Skip to main content

Full text of "mf3000-3100series_verkstadshandbok_sec_wat"

See other formats


www.maskinisten.net 



r# 




TRACTOR SERIES 3000/3100 




WORKSHOP SERVICE MANUAL 



Parti 



CONTENTS 






INTRODUCTION 



CAB AND EQUIPMENT 



SPLITTING THE TRACTOR 

ENGINE, 

GEARBOX 



REARAXLE 



(X-^W Massey Ferguson Manufacturing 
^ - -i • Beauvais France ■ 



Section 
1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 




Publication N° 1646915 M1 



© Massey Ferguson SA Alt'rights reserved Beauvais France, 1991 




www.maskinisten.net 



1 A01 Introduction 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.1 



A . Using the manual 



B. Specifications 



C. Chassis dimensions and mounting points 



16 



D. Safety precautions 



19 



E. Practical advice 



21 



F. Installation instructions 



24 



G. Conversion table 



25 



H. Sealants 



33 



I. Tightening torques 



33 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




1A01.2 



Introduction 



A . Using the manual 



General 

The purpose of this manual is to assist Distributors and 
Dealers in the efficient installation, maintenance and 
repair of MASSEY FERGUSON machinery. Carrying 
out the procedures as detailed, togetner with the use of 
special tools where appropriate, will enable the opera- 
tions to be completed within the time stated in the repair 
tirne schedule.. 

Page numbering 

Example : 7C01-3 

This manual is divided into parts and sections. Each 

page contains !he following information : 

7 = Section 

C = Part 

CM = Sequence number wdhin the Part 

2 = Page number within trie Part 

The issue number and the date are indicated at the 
bottom of the page. 

Using the manual 

To assist with locating information, each section of the 
manual is preceded by an index listing the Parts con- 
tained in that section. 

The preliminary operations to be carried out in order to 
reach the item involved are listed at the beginning of 
each Part. 

Items are indicated by means of identification marks 
(circles, squares, triangles). 

Meaning of identification marks 



circle 
square 



O 
D 



(..) 



tnangie A /..\ 



identities part only 

identifies part and indicates an 

adjustment 

identifies pan and indicates an 

important point to be noted 

during removal or refitment 



Repairs and replacements 

When parts have to be replaced . it is essential that only 
genuine MASSEY FERGUSON parts are used. 
Attention is particularly drawn to the following points 
concerning repairs and the fitting of replacement parts 
and accessories. 

Safety features embodied in the tractor may be impai- 
red if other than genuine parts are fitted. 
In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of 
parts not to the tractor manufacturer's specification. 
Torque wrench setting figures given in the Workshop 
Manual must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices 
must be fitted where specified. If the efficiency of a 
locking device is impaired during removal it must be 
renewed. 

The tractor warranty may be invalidated by the fitting of 
other than genuine MASSEY FERGUSON parts. All 
MASSEY FERGUSON reDlacement parts have the full 
backing of the manufacturer's warranty. MASSEY 
FERGUSON Distributors and Dealers are obliged to 
supply only genuine service parts. 



Repair time schedule 

The sections in the repair time schedule are identical to 
those in the workshop manual. The Repair Time Sche- 
dule is available, under publication number 
1646918M1. 



Amendments 

Amended pages will be issuea carrying the same page 
number as previous pages : only the issue number and 
the date will change. 
Old pages should be destroyed. 

Special tools 

Where the use of a special tool is necessary in an 
operation, the tool number is snown following the ins- 
truction requiring its use. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.3 



B . Specifications 



■ 


3050 


3060 


3065 ! 3070 


3080 


3095 


3115/20 


3125/40 


PERKINS Model 


A 4.236 


A 4.248 S 


C 4.236 


AT4.236 


A 6.354.4 


1006-6 HR 


1006-6LR 


1006-6T7 


Numoer of cylinders 


4 1 4 


4 


4 


6 


6 


6 


6 


Turbocharger 




- 


yes 


yes 


- 




- 


yes 


Bore (mm} 


98.47 


100.96 


98.47 j 98.47 


98,47 


100 


100 


100 


Stroke (mm) 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


Cubic capacity (cm J ) 


3860 


4060 


3860 


3860 


5800 


6000 


6000 


6000 


Maximum engine Dower DIN (kW) 


52 1 59 


62.5 


68.5 


73.5 


78.5 


84.5 


92.5 


Maximum torque (Nm) 


269 1 280 


319 


343 


374 


415 


436 


474 


Engine speed at maximum toraue 


1400 | 1400 


1400 


1400 


1200 


1200 


1100 


1200 


Idling speed (rev/min) 


850 ] 850 


850 


850 


850 


850 


850 


850 


Maximum rated speed 
(rev/mm) 


2200 


2200 


2200 | 2200 


2200 


2200 j 2200 


2200 


Torque at rated speed (Nm) 


230 


260 


276 303 

i 


325 


348 


367 


401 


Maximum no load speed rev/min 


2310 


2310 


2310 


2310 


2310 


2310 


2310 


2310 


PTO power DIN (kW) 

At engine speed of rev/mm 


47 
2200 


53 
2200 


57 
2200 


62 
2200 


68 j 72 
2200 2200 


78 
2200 


86 
2200 


Permissible front PTO power 
DIN (kW) 


52 


59 


62.5 


68.5 


69 


75 


75 


75 


Front PTO maximum permissible 
torque (all speeds) Nm 


Same as engine power 


300 


328 


328 


328 


Lubrication 


Gear tyoe Dump : - strainer on suction side and external canister type filler (s) 


Valves i Ovemeaa. oush-rod ooeratea 


Valves clearances I (Cold) 


- Inlet mm 
(in) 


0.30 
(0.012) 


0,30 
(0.012) 


0.30 
(0.012) 


0.30 
(0.012) 


0.20 
(0.008) 


0.20 
(0.008) 


0.20 
(0.008) 


0.20 
(0.008) 


- Exnaust mm 
(in) 


0.30 
(0.012) 


0,30 
(0.012) 


0.30 j 0.30 
(0.012) (0.012) 


0,45 
(0.018) 


0.45 
(0,018) 


0.45 
(O018) 


0.45 
(0.018) 


Engine oil cooler 


no 


no 


yes j yes 


yes 


no 


no 


yes 


Fuel system and air cleaner 




3050 3060 


3065 


3070 


3080 


3095 


3115/20 


3125/40 


Lift pump 


AC DELCO 


AC DELCO Type LU 


Pre-tilter 




CAV 


Fuel filter with sediment bowl 


CAV 


Number of elements 


1 


1 


1 


1 


2 


2 


2 


2 


Fuel injection pump 


CAV rotary with mechanical governor 


Injection timing 


23° 1 24° 


28° 1 16° 


23° j 18° 


22° 


18° 


Injeciors ana nozzle hoiaers 


CA V 


Cold weather starting 


Thermostan or ether, according to marnet 


Air cleaner 


Two-stage, ary element, with centrifugal pretilter and blockage indicator 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskimsten.ne 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




1A01.4 



Introduction 



Electrical system 
Voltage : 

Batteries : - 3050-3060-3065 

- 3070-3080-3095-31 15/20-3125/40 

Safety start : 

Bulbs : 

headlights : 

sidelights : 

rear/brake lights : 

direction indicators : 

number plate light : 

work lamps : 

instrument panel lighting and warning lights : 

roof lights : 



12 volt, negative earth 

1 12 volt maintenance free battery or 

2 12 volt maintenance free batteries (cold climates) 
2 12 volt maintenance free batteries. 

operated by the clutch pedal. 



European code 40/45W 

5W 

21/5 W 

21 W 

10W 

55 W - H3 

3 W-2W- 1.2 W 

2x 10W 



Cooling system 
Operation : 



Fan 



Pressurized system with centrifugal pump. 
Thermostat opening temperature : 83°C (182°F) 
Centrifugal water pump : 

- belt driven (3050-3060-3065-3070-3080) 

- gear driven (3095-3 1 1 5-3 1 20-3 1 25-3 1 40) 

belt driven 



Belt deflection : 

(on the longest span) 



10 mm (3/8") (6 cyl. engine) 
19 mm (3/4") (4cyl. engine) 



Transmission 
Clutch : 



Gearbox : 



single disc, dry, 330 mm (13 in). 
diaphragm type 
automatic adjustment, 
push-type (3000) 
pull-type (3100) 

- 8- 16 or 32 front speed 

- with creeper gearbox (ratio 4 to 1 ) 
24 speed (16 speed gearbox) 

48 speed (32 speed gearbox) 

- reverse shuttle 



Final reduction units 
Reduction unit ; 

Reduction ratios : 



epicyclic. in the rear axle housings. 

MF 3050-3060-3065 4 , 7 1 4 to 1 

MF 3070-3080-3095-3 1 20 5.077 to 1 

MF 31 15-3125-3140 5.571 to 1 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.5 



ROAD SPEEDS AT 2200 rev/min 

MF 3050/3060/3065 TRACTORS - 16.9 - 34 TYRES 

GEARBOX 4 x 4 (16 speed) 











30 KPH GEARBOX 


40 KPH GEARBOX 




A/B 
Range 


R 
A 




6 SPEED 


32 SPEED 


32 SPEED 


Speed 


N 
G 
E 


Speed- 
shift 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


i 






Slow 








_ 


1.76 


1.09 


1.87 


1 16 


2.22 


1.38 


2.35 


1 47 






T 


Fasi 


2.22 


1.38 


2.35 


1.46 


2.22 


1.38 


2.35 


1 46 


2.79 


1 74 


2.97 


1.86 


2 






Slow 




- 


- 




207 


1.29 


2.20 


1.37 


2,68 


1 67 


2.86 


1.79 









Fast 


2.66 


1.67 


286 


1.78 


2.68 


1 67 


2.86 


1 78 


3,39 


2 12 


3 61 


2.26 


3 


A 


R 


Slow 


- 






- 


2.49 


1 55 


2,64 


1 64 


315 


1 97 


3.34 


2.09 






Fasi 


3.15 


1.96 


3.34 


2.08 


3 15 


1 96 


3.34 


2 08 


400 


2.50 


4.22 


2.64 


4 




L T 



Stow 










2.93 


1.82 


3.12 


1 04 


3 69 


2.30 


3.94 


2.46 






Fast 


3.70 


2.30 


3.94 


2.45 


3.70 


2.30 


3.94 


2 45 


4 66 


2.9 1 


4 97 


3 n 


■ 




Slow 








_ 


3.56 


2.21 


3.32 


2.0G 


4 49 


2.81 


4 18 


2.61 






W , 


Fas! 


4.49 


2.79 


4.18 


2.60 


4 49 


2.79 


4,18 


2.60 


5 66 


3.54 


5.28 


3.30 


2 






Slow 




- 






4.25 


2.64 


3.96 


2 46 


5 37 


3 36 


5.02 


3 14 




B 


s 


Fast 


5.37 


3.34 


502 


3,12 


5.37 


3.34 


5.02 


3 12 


6 78 


4 23 


6.34 


3.96 


3 




Slow 


- 


- 






4 97 


3.09 


4.64 


2.88 


6 29 


3.93 


5 87 


3.67 






E 


Fast 


6.69 


3.91 


5.87 


3.65 


6.29 


3.91 


5.67 


3.65 


7 94 


4 96 


7 41 


4.63 


4 






Slow 






- 


- 


5.85 


3.64 


5,46 


3.39 


7.41 


2.94 


6.93 


4.33 






*^r 


Fast 


7,41 


4.60 


6.93 


4.31 


7,41 


4.60 


6.93 


431 


9.35 


5 84 


8 76 


5.48 


1 






Slow 


. 


. 


. 


_ 


7.11 


4.42 


7.57 


4 70 


9.00 


5.62 


9.59 


5.99 








Fast 


9.00 


5.59 


9 59 


5.96 


900 


5.59 


9.59 


5.96 


11.35 


7 09 


12.12 


7.58 


2 






Slow 


- 


- 


- 




8.49 


5.28 


9.06 


5.63 


10.71 


6.69 


11 44 


7.15 




A 




Fast 


10,73 


6.67 


11.48 


7 14 


10 73 


6.67 


11.48 


7 14 


13.53 


6 46 


14 45 


9.03 


3 






Siow 




• 






9.57 


5.95 


10.63 


661 


12.61 


7S8 


13 42 


8 39 






H H 


Fast 


12.61 


7.84 


13.42 


8.34 


12.61 


7.84 


13.42 


8 34 


15.93 


9 95 


16.96 


10.60 


4 






Slow 


- 








11 75 


7.30 


12.54 


7 79 


14 85 


9.23 


15.84 


9.90 






1 A 
G R 


Fast 


14.85 


9.23 


15.89 


9.88 


14.85 


9.23 


15.89 


9 88 


18 77 


11 73 


20.02 


1251 


1 




Slow 


. 


_ 


_ 




14 28 


8 87 


13.33 


8 28 


18 04 


11 23 


1685 


10.53 








Fast 


18.04 


11.21 


16.85 


10.47 


18.04 


11,21 


16.85 


1047 


23,23 


14 52 


21.30 


13.31 


2 




H E 


Slow 


- 


- 




- 


17.03 


10.58 


15.91 


9.89 


21.49 


13 43 


20.06 


12.54 




B 




Fast 


21.49 


13,35 


20.06 


12.47 


21.49 


13.53 


20,10 


12 49 


27 15 


16 97 


25.37 


15.86 


3 






Slow 


- 






- 


19.98 


12.42 


18.66 


11 60 


26.25 


1641 


25.08 


15.68 






A> 


Fast 


26.21 


16.29 


24.49 


15.22 


26.21 


16.29 


24.49 


15.22 


33.18 


20 74 


31.70 


19.81 


4 




Sm 


Slow 


- 


- 




- 


23.66 


14.70 


22.11 


13.74 


29.77 


18.61 


27.81 


17.36 






v 


Fast 


29.77 


18.50 


27.81 


17.28 


2977 


18.50 


27.81 


17,28 


37.62 


23.51 


35.16 


21.98 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




1A01.6 



Introduction 



ROAD SPEEDS AT 2200 rev/min 

MF 3070/3080/3095/3120 TRACTORS - 16.9 - 38 TYRES 

GEARBOX 4 x 4 (16 speed) 











30 KPH GEARBOX 


40 KPH GEARBOX 


! R 

! I A 

Speed I A/B N 

] Range i G 

I ! E 




16 SPEED 


32 SPEED 




32 SPEED 




SpeeO- 
shift 


FORWARD | 


REVERSE 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


KPH- 


MPH j KPH - 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


KPH- 


MPH 


» i | 


Slow 


_ 




_ 


. 


1-76 


1 10 


1.88 


1.17 


2.22 


1.40 


2.38 


1 50 


! T 


Fast 


2.22 


l 39 


2.37 


1.48 


2.22 


1 39 


2.37 


1.48 


2.79 


1.76 


2.99 


1 88 


2 ! 1 


Slow 


- 




- 


- 


2.09 


I 30 


2.24 


1 40 


2.64 


1.66 


2.82 


1 78 


i ! 


Fast 


2 66 


1 66 


2.85 


1.78 


266 


1 56 


2.85 


1.78 


3.34 


2.10 


3.56 


2.24 


3 i A | 

i R 


Slow 


- 




- 




2.46 


l 54 


2.63 


1 64 


6 82 


4.30 


3.30 


2 06 


Fas! 


3.11 


1 64 


3.33 


2.08 


3 11 


1 64 


3.33 


2.08 


3.92 


2.47 


4 ia 


2.63 


< ! !l 


Slow 


- 




- 




2.90 


1 81 


3.10 


1 94 


3.67 


2 31 


3.92 


2 47 


1 ' i 





Fasi 


3 67 


2 29 


3 93 


2 45 


3.67 


2 29 


3.93 


2.45 


4 64 


2.92 


4.95 


3 12 


, : ; 


Slow 




! 




3 48 


2.16 


3.23 


2.01 


4 44 


2.80 


4.14 


2.61 




|W , 


Fasi 


4 44 


2 76 


4 14 


2.57 


4 44 


2 76 


4 14 


2.57 


5.61 


3.53 


5 21 


3 28 


2 ' 


J 


Slow 




. 






4.20 


5.61 


3.92 


2.44 


5.30 


3.34 


4.95 


3 12 




R ' S 


Fasi 


5.30 


3.29 


4 95 


3.08 


5.30 


3.29 


4.95 


3.08 


6.71 


4 23 


6 25 


3 94 


3 ! 


o 




Slow 


- 


- 


- 


- 


4.93 


3.06 


4 60 


2.86 


6.23 


3 92 


5.81 


3 66 






E 


Fast 


623 


3 37 


5-81 


3.61 


6.23 


3 37 


5.81 


3.61 


7.86 


4.96 


7.35 


4 63 


4 




%M^f 


Slow 


- 






- 


5.81 


3.61 


5.43 


3.37 


7.35 


4 63 


6.86 


4.32 


! 




Fast 


7.35 


4 57 


6.86 


4.26 


7.35 


4 57 


6.84 


4.25 


9,28 


5.85 


8.67 


5 46 


1 


| 


Slow 


_ 


, 


v 


, 


7.04 


4 37 


7.50 


4,66 


8,91 


5.61 


9.50 


5 99 






Fasi 


8.91 


5 54 


950 


5.90 


8.91 


5.54 


9.50 


5.90 


11.26 


7.09 


12.01 


7.57 


2 


1 


Slow 






- 


- 


840 


5.22 


8.95 


5.56 


10.63 


6,70 


11.33 


7 14 




A [ 


Fasi 


10.63 


661 


11.33 


7.04 


10.63 


6.61 


11.33 


7 04 


13.42 


8 45 


14.32 


9.02 


3 " S 


Slow 










9.88 


6 14 


10.54 


6,55 


12.50 


7.88 


13.31 


8.39 


! JH H 


Fasi 


12.50 


7 77 


13 31 


8.27 


12.50 


7 77 


13.31 


6.27 


15.80 


9.95 


16.83 


10 60 


4 : i 


Slow 


- 




. 


- 


11.64 


7 23 


12 4 5 


771 


14 72 


9.27 


15.69 


9.88 


i 


1 A 
G R 


Fast 


14.79 


9 15 


15 69 

1 


9.75 


14.72 


9 15 


1569 


9.75 


1861 


11,72 


19.82 


1249 


-, ! 


Slow 




i 


, 


14.12 


8 77 


13.20 


8,20 t 17 86 


11.25 


16 68 


1051 


! i 


Fast 


17 86 


11 10 


16.68 


10.36 


17.86 


il 10 


16-68 


10.36 


22.57 


14.22 


21.08 


13.28 


2 


H E 


Slow 


- 






- 


16.85 


1047 


15.73 


9.77 


21.32 


13.43 


19.91 


12.54 




B 


Fast 


21.32 


13.25 


19.91 


12.37 


21.32 


13.25 


19.91 


12.37 


26.95 


16.98 


25.17 


15.86 


3 






Slow 




- 






19.95 


12.40 


1863 


11.56 


25.01 


15.76 


23.34 


14.70 






£, 


Fast 


2501 


15.54 


23.34 


14.50 


2501 


15.54 


23.34 


14.50 


31.61 


19.91 


29.50 


18,59 


4 




<* 


Slow 








- 


23.34 


U.50 


22.78 


13.50 


29.48 


18.57 


27.54 


17.35 






7& 


Fast 


29.48 


18.32 


27 54 


17.11 


29.48 


18.32 


27.54 


17.11 


37.27 


23.48 


34.83 


21.94 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.7 



ROAD SPEEDS AT 2200 rev/min - MF 3115 

20.8 - 38 TYRES 



3125-3140 



Speed 


Range 


Speed- 

shitt 


8 SPEED 30 KPH 


16 SPEED 30 KPH 


16 SPEED 40 KPH 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


FORWARD 


REVERSE 


KPH 


MPH 


KPH 


MPH 


KPH i MPH 


KPH 


MPH 


KPH 


MPH 


KPH 


MPH 




T 


Slow 




. 






2.54 


1.57 


2.53 


1.57 


2.54 


1.57 


2.53 


1.57 


i i_ 





Fasi 


322 


2.00 


3.20 


1.99 


3.22 


2 00 


3.20 


1.99 


3.22 


2.00 


3.20 


1.99 




R 


Slow 


- 


- 


- 




3.84 


2.38 


3.82 


2.37 


3.84 


2.38 


3.82 


2.37 


^ 


o 

w , 


Fast 


4.66 


3.02 


4.83 


3.00 


4.86 


3.02 


4.83 


3.00 


4.86 


3.02 


4.83 


3.00 


„ 


Slow 






- 


- 


5.32 


3.30 


5.29 


3.28 


5.32 


3.30 


5.29 


3.28 


"" 


Fast 


6.73 


4.18 


6.69 


4.15 


6.73 


4.16 


6.69 


4.15 


6.73 


4.18 


669 


4.15 




s 


Slow 


- 


- 






7 12 


4.42 


7.66 


4.76 


7.12 


4.42 


7.66 


476 




*0tf E 


Fast 


9 74 


6.05 


9.69 


6.02 


9.74 


6.05 


9.69 


6.02 


9.74 


6.05 


9.69 


6.02 






Slow 




- 


. 




10.22 


6.35 


10.16 


6.31 


10.22 


6.35 


10.16 


6.31 


" 




Fast 


12.91 


802 


12.84 


7 98 


12.91 


8 02 


'2.84 


7.98 


12.91 


8.02 


12.84 


7.98 


- 


H H 


Slow 




. 




15.43 


9 59 


15.34 


9.53 


15.43 


9.59 


15.34 


9.53 




1 " 


Fast 


19 51 


12.12 


19.39 


12.05 


19.51 


12.12 


19 39 


J2.05 


i 19.51 


12.12 


19.39 


12.05 


_ 


G R 


Slow 










21.36 


13.27 


21.23 


13.19 


i 21.36 


13.27 


21.23 


13.19 




|H ., E 


Fast 


27 00 


16 7e 


26 84 


16.68 


27.00 I 16.78 


26.64 


16.68 


1 27.00 


16.78 


26.84 


16.68 


-, 


W 


Slow 


- 








30.92 | 19 21 


30 74 


19.10 


1 30.92 


19.21 


30.7J 


19.10 




V 


Fast 








- 


! . 


■ 




39.09 


24.29 


38.86 


24.15 



Power take off 

Independent power take off (IPTO) 

PTO ratio 



Speed changing 
(according lo model) 



Proportional to the engine speed. 
Hydraulic clutch. 

540 rev/min at 1980 engine rev/min - 3.667 : 1. 
1000 rev/min a; 2000 engine rev/min -2:1. 

Either by changing shafts, or by lever selection. 

- 540 rev/min snaft. 35 mm (1 .3/8 in) diameter. 
6 splines. 

- 1000 rev/min shaft, 35 mm (1.3/8 in) diameter, 
21 splines 



"Economy" Independent power take off 

(optional extra) 



Control 



The normal 540 and 1000 rev/min PTO speeds 
can be ootained at the above stated engine speeds 
or at 1550 engine rev/min by selecting the "Econo- 
my" ratio. 

Lever in the cab. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




1A01.8 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Introduction 



Ground speed PTO 

(optional extra) 

Control 

Speed MF 3050-3060-3065 



MF 3070-3080-3095 



MF 3115-3120-3125-3140 



An addition to the independent PTO 

From the normal IPTO ODeraung lever. 

540 rev/min - 7.87 revolutions of the PTO shaft for 
one revolution of the rear wheel. 
1000 rev/min - 14.83 revolutions ot the PTO shaft 
(or one revolution of the rear wheel. 

540 rev/min - 8.48 revolutions of the PTO shaft tor 
one revolution of the rear wheel. 
1000 rev/min - 15.54 revolutions of the PTO shaft 
for one revolution of the rear wheel. 

540 rev/mm - 8.23 revolutions of the PTO shaft for one 
revolution of the rear wheel. 

1 000 rev/min - 1 5.08 revolutions of the PTO shaft for one 
revolution of the rear wneel 



Front power take off (optional exua) 
Control 



Hydraulic clutch mecnanism controlled by a button in 
the cab. 



Ratio 



1000 rev/min at 2040 engine rev/min. - 204. : 1 



Four wheel drive front axle 

Clutch mechanism 



Hydraulic, electrically actuated bv push button in the 
cab 



Differential Lock 



Front and rear differential lock-hyarauiic with 
electrical control. 



Hydraulics 

Two stage gear pump, driven directly by the engine, supplies 

1 st Stage 

This circuit supplies 29 l/mm (6.4 Imp. gal/min) 
(7.6 US gal/min) at maximum engine speed. 
Maximum pressure : 17 bar 



1. Hydrostatic steering 
A/B range gear 
Hare/Tortoise range gear 
Differential lock 
IPTO clutch 
PTO brake 
Front PTO (if fitted) 
Four-wheel drive (if fitted) 
Hydraulic brakes 
Clutch 
Lubrication of gearbox. PTO and Rear Axle 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Introduction 




1A01.9 



2nd Stage 

This circuit supplies 50 1/min (11 Imp. gat/min) 

(13.2USgal/min) 

Maximum pressure : 185 bar 

Filtration (2 filters) 



2. Trailer brake supply 
Auxiliary hydraulic system 
Hydraulic lift. 

-One external 150 micron throwaway. canister type 
filter on the suction circuit. 

-One external 15 micron high pressure filter on the low 
flow circuit. 



Brakes 
Main brake 

Type 



Operation 

Handbrake 
Trailer brake 



Oil-immersed single disc per wheel, 355 mm (13.9 in) 
outside diameter. 
Inside diameter of lining : 
3050-3060-3065 : 310 mm (12.20 in) 
3070-3080-3095-31 15/20-3125/40 : 290 mm ( 1 1.41 in) 

Hydraulic, from two master cylinders, automatic 
adjustment. 

Operates on the rear axle bevel drive pinion. 

According to mode! by hydraulic valve. 



Differential lock - Rear axle 

Type 

Control 



Positive clutch 

Hydraulic, with electrical control. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




1A01.10 



Introduction 



Hydraulic lift 

Type : 3-point. Category 2. with fixed, telescopic or quick attach hook ball ends (according to model). 
Rams : Twin externally mounted 
Lifting force (see charts) 

MF 3050 - 60 - 65 - Ram diameter 50 mm (1.96 in) or 57 mm (2.24 in) 



Position of 

lift rod on 

lower links 

mm 


Length 
of lift 
rods 

-mm 


Ram diameter 50 mm 


Ram diameter 57 mm 


Lower links 
horizontal 


Lower links 
full raised 


Lower links 
horizontal 


Lower links 
full raised 


Kg 


Lb 


Kg 


Lb 


Kg 


Lb 


Kg 


Lb 


508 


565 
765 


2207 
2302 


4870 
5080 


2926 
2421 


6457 
5343 


2885 
3010 


6367 
6643 


3825 
3165 


8441 
6985 


608 


565 
765 


2623 


5788 


3205 
2666 


7073 
5883 


3430 


7570 


4190 
3485 


9247 
7694 



MF 3070 - 80 - Ram diameter 57 mm (2.24 in) 



Position of 

lift rod on 

lower links 

mm 


Length 
of lift 
rods 
mm 


Lower links 
horizontal 


Lower links 
full raised 


Kg 


Lb 


Kg 


Lb 


550 


595 
827 


3192 
3138 


7044 
6925 


3812 
3162 


8413 
6978 


650 


595 
827 


3514 


7755 


4175 
3452 


9214 
7618 



MF 3070 - 80 - 95 - Ram diameter 66 mm (2.60 in) 



Position of 

lift rod on 

lower links 

mm 


Length 
of lift 
rods 
mm 


Lower links 
horizontal 


Lower links 
full raised 


Kg | Lb 


Kg 


Lb 


550 


595 
827 


4350 
4276 


9600 
9437 


5194 
4308 


11463 
9507 


650 


595 
827 


5740 
4788 


12668 
10567 


5689 
4703 


12555 
10379 | 



MF 3115/20 - 3125/40 - Ram diameter 73 mm (2.87 in) 



Position of 

lift rod on 

lower links 

mm 


Length 
of lift 
rods 
mm 


Lower links 

horizontal 


Lower links 
full raised 


Kg 


Lb 


Kg 


Lb 


550 


595 
827 


5425 
5000 


11975 
11037 


6510 
5087 


14370 
11230 


650 


595 
827 


8130 
5727 


17950 
12640 


7117 
5595 


15710 
12350 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.11 



Steering 

Type 

Front axle (2 WD) 



Hydrostatic 

Fixed or tillable telescopic steering column. 

One double action central ram 



TRACTOR MODEL 


3050-3060-3065-3070 


3070-3080-3095-31 1 5/20-3125/40 


CHARACTERISTICS 


NORMAL DUTY 


HEAVY DUTY 


Steering ram 

- Ram diam. (mm) 

- Rod diam. (mm) 

- Total stroke (mm) 

- Volumetric displacement (cc) 


57 

40 

236 

306 


68 

45 

236 

482 


Steering pressure (bar) 

- at steering valve 

- at return port 

- effective 


160 
16 

150 


166 

16 
150 


Steering valve 

- Make 

- Volumetric displacement (cc) 

- Check/safety valve 


Danfoss 
80 
with 


Danfoss 
125 
with 


Steering wheel 

- Diameter (mm) 

- Nb of turn (lock to lock) 


400 
3.80 


400 

3.86 


Steering angle 

- Inner wheel 

- Outer wheel 


56° 
43° 


56 c 
43° 

t 


Turning circle 

- Without braking (mm) 

- With braking (mm) 


3050/60/65 


3070 


3070 


3080/95/3115/20 


3125/40 


3700 
3250 


3750 
3300 


3850 
3400 


4320 
3750 


4320 
4000 


Angle 

- Axle swinging (max) 

- Wheel castor 

- Wheel camber 


11° 



3°30 


11° 



5° 10 


Maximum permissible load 
capacity (Kg) at track setting 


3900 

1383 mm 


7900 
1 484 mm 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




1A01.12 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




Front axle (4WD) 



TRACTOR MODEL 


3050 


3060-3065 


3080-3070 
3095-3115/20 


3125 
3140 


4 WD axle 


1 


2 


2.5 


3 


Steering ram 

- Ram diam. (mm) 

- Rod diam-{mm) 

- Ram stroke (mm) 

- Volumetric displacement (cc) 


57 

32 

2x117 

408 


57 

32 

2x 117 

408 


63 

32 

2x 119 

550 


68 

45 

2x 139 

567 


Steering pressure (bar) 

- At steering valve 

- At return port 

- effective 


166 

16 
150 


166 

16 
150 


166 

16 

150 


166 

16 
150 


I 

| Steering valve 

- Make 

- Volumetric displacement (cc) 

- Check valve 


Danfoss 
100 
with 


Danfoss 
100 

with 


Danfoss 
125 
with 


Danfoss 
125 
with 


Steering wheel 

- Diameter (mm) 

- Nb of turn (lock to lock) 


400 
4.08 


400 
4.08 


400 

4.4 


400 

4.5 


Steering angle 

- Inner wheel 

- Outer wheel 


50 r 
38.5-" 


50° 
38.5' J 


50° 

38.5° 


50° 
38.5 r 


Turning circle 

- Without braking (mm) 

- With braking (mm) 


4200 
3800 


4200 
3800 


3070 


3080/95 


4800 
4400 


4300 
3900 


4700 
4300 


Angle 

- Axle swinging (max) 

- Wheel castor 

• Wheel camber 


11° 

2°30 

1 


11° 

2°30 

1 


11° 

2°30 

1 


11 c 

2°30 

1 


Maximum permissible load 
capacity (Kg) at track setting 


4500 
1416 mm 


4500 
1416 mm 


5570 
1566 mm 


6640 
1 686 mm 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V >■/ 



Introduction 




1A01.13 



Wheels 

FRONT 



REAR 



2-wheel drive pressed steel 

4-whee! drive pressed steel or 

cast with power adjust 
variable track (PAVT) or 
fixed cast type 

pressed steel with manual adjustment or 

cast with power adjust variable track (PAVT). or 

manual adjustment. 



Tyres 

Compatibility ol front/rear tyres of 4-wheel arive tractors. 





MF 3050 


up to 3095 






MF 3115 - 3120 - 3125 - 3140 


Front 

I 


Rear 


Front 


Rear 


Front 


Rear 


Front 


Rear 


11.2-24 


16.9-30 


11.2-28 


13.6-38 


11.2-28 


13.6-38 


13.6-28 


16.9-38 


12.4 -24 


16.9 -30 
18.4-30 




16.9-34 
15.5-38 






16.9-38 
18.4-34 




18.4-34 
18.4-38 


13.6-24 


18.4 -34 


12.4 -28 


15.5-38 




12.4-28 


16.9-38 


14.9- 24 


16.9-38 




13.6-38 


13.6- 28 


16.9 - 38 






18.4- 34 




18.4 - 34 




16.9-34 


14.9-28 


18.4-38 






18.4-38 




18.4-38 


14.9-24 


18.4 -34 
15.5-38 
16.9-34 








13.6-24 


13.6-38 
13.6-38 
16.9-34 


14.9-28 


16.9-38 

18.4-38 
20.8 - 38 












16.9 -38 




18.4- 34 














18.4 -34 


16.9-22 


20.8 - 38 



Water Ballasting 
(75% fill) 





Tyre Size 


litre 


Imp. gal 


UScjal 


*g 


lb i 


1 1 .2-24 


82.5 


18.2 


21.8 


82.5 


182 ! 




12.4-24 


109 


23.9 


28.8 


109 


239 




13.6-24 


150 


33.0 


39 6 


150 


330 


Front 


14.9-24 


180 


39 6 


47,6 


180 


396 


11.2-28 


975 


21.5 


25.6 


97.5 


215 


Tyres 


12.4-28 


124 


272 


32.8 


124 


272 




13.6-26 


157.5 


34.6 


41.6 


157.5 


346 




14 9-28 


191 3 


42.1 


50.5 


193.3 


421 




16.9-28 


250 


55.0 


66 


250.0 


552 




14.9-38 


235 


51.7 


62.0 


235.0 


519 




16.9 30 


277 5 


61 


73 2 


277.5 


610 


Rear 


18.4-30 


322.5 


71 


85 2 


322.5 


710 


16.9-34 


307 5 


67.7 


81.2 


307.5 


6765 


Tyres 


18.4-34 


337.5 


74.25 


89.2 


337.5 


742.5 


13,6-36 


195 


42.9 


51.5 


195 


429 




13.6-38 


202.5 


44.6 


53.5 


202.5 


445.5 




15.5-38 


232.5 


51.1 


61 4 


232.5 


511 




16.9-38 


315 


69.3 


83.2 


315 


693 




18 4-38 


367.5 


80.9 


97 1 


367.5 


809 




20.8-38 


525 


115.5 


138.5 


525 


1159 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



1A01.14 



Introduction 




Dimensions and weights 





MF30S0 




i 




WIF 3050 


MF3065 


MF 3070 


MF 3080 MF 3095 


2WD 


4WD 


2WD 


4WD 


2WD 


4WD 


2WD 


4WD 


2WD 


4WD 


A WheeiDase-mm(m) 


2371 


2375 


2371 


2375 


2460 


2464 


2696 


2699 


2696 


2699 




(93.34) 


(93.5) 


(93.341 


(93.35) 


(96.85) 


(97.0) 


(106 1) 


106 25) 


(106.1) 


(106.25) 


B Overait lengin wiin drawbar 


3995 


4069 


3995 


4069 


4084 


4208 


4320 


4472 


4320 


4472 


mm (int 


(117.9) 


(160.2) 


(117.9) 


(160.2) 


(160.8) 


(165.7) 


(170) 


(176) 


(170) 


(176) 


C Height to roof - mm (in) 


2627 


2627 


2627 


2627 


2724 


2724 


2724 


2724 


2755 


2755 


(cab tractor) 


(103.4) 


(103.4) 


(103.4) 


(103.4) 


(107.2) 


(107.2) 


(107.2) 


(107.2) 


(108.5) 


(108.5) 


D Overau wiatn - 


2570 


2570 


2570 


2570 


2570 


2570 


2570 


2570 


2S70 


2570 




(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


(101.2) 


E Ground clearance 


1971 


1971 


1971 


1971 


2023 


2023 


2068 


2068 


2068 


2068 


(under orawoar Frame) 


(77.6) 


(77.6) 


(77.6) 


(77.6) 


(79.6) 


(79.6) 


(81.4) 


(814) 


(81.4) 


(814) 


F Height to steering wheel - mm (in) 


365 


365 


385 


365 


385 


385 


385 


385 


445 


445 


(platform models) 


(15.2) 


(15.2) 


(15.2) 


(15.2) 


(15.2) 


(15.2) 


(15.2) 


(15.2) 


(17.5) 


(175) 


Total weigm (witn full tank, without 


3565 


3840 


3565 


3840 


3855 


4100 


4185 


4420 


4440 


4675 


extra weignt steet wheels) - kg (ib) 


(7859) 


(8465) 


(7859) 


(8465) 


(8499) 


(9039) 


(9226) 


(9744) 


(9800) 


(10320) 


Rear tyre Dimensions 


16.9-34 


16.9-34 


16.9-3 J 


16.9-34 | 16 4-36 





MF 3115/3120 


MF 3125/3140 


2WD I 4WD 


2WD 


4WD 


A WheelDase-mmnn) 


2696 


2699 


2696 


2699 




(106.1) 


(106.2) 


(106.1) 


(106.2) 


B Overaii ler.otn with drawbar 


4402 


4402 


4527 


4527 


mm (in) 


(173.3) 


(173.3) 


(178.2) 


(178.2) 


C Height to root • mm (in) 


2768 


2768 


2908 


2908 


(cab tractcri 


(109) 


(109) 


(114.5) 


(114.5) 


D Overau wiatn (") 


2733 


2733 


2832 


2832 




(107.6) 


(107 6) 


(111.5) 


(111.5) 


E Grouna clearance 


442 


442 


502 


502 


(under orawoa' Frame) 


(17.4) 


(17.4) 


(19.8) 


(19.8) 


F Height to steenng wheel - mm (in) 


2110 


2110 


2250 


2250 


(platform r-;ooelS) 


(83 


(83) 


(88.6) 


(88.6) 


Total weior.i (wif full tank, wilnoul 


4190 


4590 


4805 


5040 


extra weicr: steei wheels) - kg (io) 


(9249) 


(10132) 


(10607) 


(11126) 


Rear lyre Dimensions 


16.9-38 | 20.8-38 



These dimensions are for a tractor set at 
maximum irack. 




Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^k 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.15 



Capacities 



Description 


Litre ! 


Imp. Gal 


US Gal 


Fuel tank MF 3050/3060/3065 


148 


32.56 


39.10 


MF 3070/3080/3095/31 15/3120 


173 


38.10 


45.60 


MF 3125/3140 


220 


48.5 


58 


Cooling system MF 3050/3060/3065 


16 


3.5 


4.2 


MF 3070 


20 


4.4 


5.3 


MF 3080/3095/31 15/3120/3125/3140 


25 


5.5 


6.6 


Engine sump MF 3050/3060/3065/3070 


7.5 


1.65 


2 


MF 3080/3090/3 115/31 20/3 1 25/3 1 40 


16.5 


3.6 


4.3 


Transmission / MF 3050 to 3095 


60 


13.2 


15.9 


Rear axle * M F 3 1 1 5/3 1 20/3 1 25/3 1 40 


64 


14.1 


16.9 


Front axle assembly MF 3050/3060/3065 


5.8 


1.3 


1.5 


MF 3070/3080/3095/31 1 5/3120 


6.5 


1.4 


1.7 


MF 3125/3140 


11 


2.4 


2.9 


Front final reduction MF 3050/3060/3065 


1.4 


0.3 


0.4 


units (each) MF 3070/3080/3095/31 1 5/20/25/40 


1.8 


0.4 


0.5 



When working on steep slopes 10 I {2.2 Imp Gal) (2.7 Us Gal) of oil must be added. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



1A01.16 



Introduction 




c. 


Chassis dimensions and mounting points 


3070 


3080/3095 






3050/3060 


3070 3080/3095 


3115 




3050/3060 


3115 




3065 




3120 


3125/40 




3065 




3120 


3125/40 


1 


301.50 


301.50 


301.50 


301,50 


37 


155 


155 


155 


155 


2 


20.00 


20.00 


20.00 


20.00 


38 


125 


125 


125 


125 


3 


101.60 


W1.60 


61.60 


61,60 


39 


125 


125 


125 


125 


4 


44,45 


44.45 


- 


- 


40 


52 


52 


52 


52 


5 


60.30 


60.30 


- 


- 












6 


101,60 


101.60 


- 


- 


41 


52 


52 


52 


52 


7 


481.00 


570.00 


621,40 


621,40 


42 


79,5±2 


79.5+2 


79,5±2 


96.512 


8 


1 12.40 


201.40 


49,60 


49,60 


43 


46 


46 


46 


46 


9 


25.25 


25.25 


6,30 


6,30 


44 


190 


190 


190 


190 


1C 


70.00 


70.00 


101.60 


101.60 


45 


100 


100 


100 


100 












46 


226 


226 


226 


226 


11 


- 




44.45 


44,45 


47 


92 


92 


92 


123 


15 


_ 




60.30 


60.30 


48 


0149.35 


0149.35 


0149.35 


0149.35 


12 


- 


- 


101 60 


101.60 


49 


371 


37 1 


371 


371 


14 


698.00 


787.00 


736.80 


736.80 












15 


340.00 


429.05 


370.60 


370.60 


50 


320 


320 


320 


320 


ie 


i 571.75 


571.75 


771.50 


771.50 


51 


no 


110 


110 


110 


it 


896 


896 


896 


896 


52 


130 


130 


130 


130 


18 890 


890 


890 


890 


53 


65 


65 


65 


65 


19 567 


567 


567 


567 


54 


142,75 


142.75 


142.75 


142.75 


20 


- 


94 


94 


55 


20 


20 


20 


20 












56 


817 


817 


817 


817 


2 


1 267 


267 


267 


267 


57 


310 


310 


310 


310 


22 127 


127 


127 


127 


58 


142.75 


142,75 


142.75 


142.75 


23 53 


53 


53 


53 


59 


223 


"it - ; 


223 


223 


24 101.60 


101.60 


101,60 


101.60 


60 


315 


315 


315 


324 


25 31.40 


31.40 


31.40 


31.40 












26 101.60 


101.50 


101.60 


101.60 


61 


100 


100 


100 




27 100 


100 


100 


161 


62 


65 


65 


65 




28 250 


260 


260 


280 


63 


65 


65 


65 




29 43 


43 


43 


43 


64 


40 or 66 


40 or 66 


40 or 66 


40 or 66 


30 106 


105 


106 


106 


65 


- 


- 


- 


323.90 












66 


. 


. 


, 


76.20 


31 224 


224 


224 


224 


67 


_ 




^ 


120.60 


32 128 


128 


128 


128 


68 


_ 


. 


. 


241.30 


33 1774 


1774 


1774 


1835 


69 


3056 


3142 


3388 


3388 


34 




- 


2228 












35 




- 


2870 


70 


02O3.2±O.3 


02O3.2±O.3 02O3.2±O.3 02O3.2±O. 


36 155 


155 


155 


155 












A 


6 hoies M20 through 


H 


8 studs M18 


- 1.5 




v : 4 WD centerline 




B 


8 holes M20 > 


« 38 deep 


1 


4 holes M16 


x 25 deep 


w : Crankshaft centerline 


C 


12 holes M20 


x 38 deep 


J 


5 holes M20 


x 35 deep 


x : Differential centerline 


D 


2 holes M20 through 


K 


4 holes M16 


x 30 deep 


y : Trumpet centerline 


E 


8 holes M16 x 25 deep 


L 


4 holes diam 


. 20.70 ± 0.12 


z : PTO centerline 




F 


2 hoies diarn. 


37-37.16 




through 






■- 






G 


8 holes M18 ) 


< 31 deep 

















Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




www.maskinisten.net 



An<jf* dc 
Ca<vo*»a$«t 



6ifM MIBilS 



XflRCHt /M»A>f 



B325 



Angle, dc pwo** 




PlNC£HEHrt Xi-XUOfimm 






Cjt 1 




faUtl 


tt4 


A 


1330 


1330 


1450 


V570 


B 


16^9 


)Gi9 


1600 


1920 


C 


1792 


tec 


1971 


2111 


D 


180 


180 


180 


205 


E 


135 


135 


135 


t55 


F 


326 


328 


328 


365 


G 


255 


255 


255 


2B7 


H 


180 


180 


180 


185 


J 


125 


125 


125 


125 


K 


125 


125 


125 


145 


L 


95 re 


95 re 


95 f© 


no n 


M 


70 n 


70 n 


70 f 7 


80f7 


P 


1-1/8" 


l-t/8* 


1-3/8* 


1-3/8" 




CD • 
^6 



a 



> 
r 

o 

> 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Introduction 




1A01.19 



D . Safety precautions 



Do not remove or obscure Caution, Warning or Instruc- 
tion Decals (Yellow). Replace any Caution, Warning or 



Instruction Decals that are not readable or are missing. 
See here under the actual location of these decals. 






G.B. 




CAUTION 



Bafora oparating, raad operator s inattuetrO*. 

book thoroughly. 

Do not atari angina until *v*ryww ■■ * aaia dia- 

tanca from tractor and •quipnmtt. 

Km ill ahia4ga, eevara and guard* >n placa 

whila angina n runnmg. 

Kaap handa, teat and e fcrt Wwfl away from powa* 

Sfrivafi op moving part*, 



Alwar* driva wrth dua car* and attanban. 
If diffarantta) tec* doaa not diaangaga automa- 
tfeafif. daoraaa dutch padal- 
Oraka r>*d*l* mval alwaya ba couptad togathar 
whan indapandant bratiaa ara not bamg uaad. 
Bafora laavtng tractor, apply parking brakm, 
lowar aquiomaftt. atop angina and ramovo tsay 
from atartar iwitch. 



Whan attaching aquipmant chach oparatof i 

tnatructiOA book tor front and rear til* load 

limrti 

Put th« rang* lavar *n tna nautrat pout ton 

m ordar to usa tha axlarnaJ bit controls 

Entur* that all mh+aJ and rim nuta ara - 

tightanad as apatihad m ooaratgr * irtatruetion 

boofc. 

On public roads, usa SMV amblem and rtaahmg 

warhing lights whera raquirad by law. 

oo not flEMovtoPoescuwacH. isgoj^Mca* 



CA 



WARNING 



Range lever must be in neutral position; 
-In order to use the external lilt controls 
-When the driver is not in his seat 

00 NOT AfHOVC OH OS5CUA£ OCCAl 1MUOWI 



WARNING 

High pressure steam and hot 
water. Remove filler cap with 
extreme care 

DO p*or BEMOvE OH OBXUftl KCAL MMMSMT 



A 



\A 



WARNING 

Before working on the tractor, 
disconnect negative leads to all 
batteries. 




WARNING 

Before removing any battery, 
disconnect all negative leads 
before positive leads. 

oo not HFMOvt cw wsqint Kc*i rtnersv 



G.B. Ml 



CAUTION 

Keep all shields, covers and 
guards fastened in place while 
engine is running. 




WARNING 

Beware hot parts. 



00 NOT KtMOW OH QtSTuf-t 0L,>1 lift 6TB VI 



m 



A 



WARNING 

Always disengage PTO and stop 
engine before attaching or de- 
taching PTO shafts or working 
on PTO driven equipment. 

Always fit PTO cover when PTO 
is not in usa. 



A 



CAUTION 

Do not stand between tractor 
and equipment when operating 
controls. 

Tow only with MF approved 
tractor drawbar or hitch. 



tJO MOT «M*M C* OKCUM i»Lt* 



12 



G.B. A. 

A 



WARNING 

Before working on the tractor 
or removing this cover, discon- 
nect negative leads to all 
batteries 



A 



CAUTION 

Do not short across starter ter- 
minals lo start engine. 

Never start engine while stan- 
ding on the ground. 

Start engine only with start key 
Irom operator's seat, ensuring 
that gearbox and PTO are in 
neutral, with parking brake 
applied. 

0010! RIMOS* Q#C*Saj«* «CAi ft*«7WI 



A 



CAUTION 

Use seat belt at all times 
Keep belt adjusted snugly 



•iuui-i oa Marti*! h<h 



G.B. Jk 

A 



WARNING 

If tractor is overturning 
Hold onto steering wheel 
Oo not leave seat 






II Sail ttMM VM WiiH UKAI 



11 



A CAUTION 



TO AVOID POSSIBLE 
TRACTOR OVERTURN, 
PULL ONLY FROM 
DRAWBAR OR LOWER 
LINKS OF THREE 
POINT HITCH. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



1A01.20 



Introduction 




V 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.21 



E . Practical advice 



Safety 

Your safety and that of others must always be the first 
consideration when working around machines of any 

type. 

Safety is a matter of thoroughly understanding the job 
to be done, the correct use of tools and equipment, and 
the application of good common sense. 



Trouble-shooting 

The following procedure, combined with the informa- 
tion contained in the workshop manual will be helpful in 
tracing faults accurately. 

It consists of following a number of logical steps to 
locate and correct the problem. 
1 .Determine the problem. 

2. List possible causes. 

3. Differentiate the causes. 

4. Conduct checks in logical order to determine the 
exact cause. 

5. Consider approximate remaining service life against 
cost of parts and labour. 

6. Make any necessary repair. 

7.Recheck the parts and functions for correct opera- 
tion. 



Handling of heavy components 

Unless otherwise specified, all removals should be 
accomplished using adjustable lifting equipment. All 
supporting slings must be parallel to each other and as 
near vertical as possible in relation to the object being 
lifted. However, where slings are of a far greater capa- 
city than the weight of the load to be lifted, a triangular 
lifting arrangement may be used (2. 3 or 4 strands from 
a single ring beneath the hoist hook). When removing 
a component at an angle, remember that the capacity 
of an eyebolt is reduced when the angle between the 
supporting members and the object becomes less than 
90° (correct and incorrect method of lifting). 
Eyebolts and brackets must never be bent and must 
only work under tension. A length of pipe and a washer 
may be used to reduce tension on eyebolts. 



1 



CORRECT 




INCORRECT 




Forged eyebolt support 

A Load - B Lifting shackle - C Shackle retaining plate 

(3 mm thick) - D Sleeve (may or may not be welded to 

plate) 

In some cases, special lifting fixtures are available to 

obtain correct balance and provide for safe handling. 

Consult the relevant section of the Workshop Manual. 

Warning 

If a part resists removal, check that all nuts and bolts 

have been removed and that there is no interference 

from adjacent parts. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




1A01.22 



Introduction 



V 



Cleanliness 

To ensure long iife of a machine, it is important to keep 
dirt and foreign material out of its vital working compo- 
nents. Precautions must be taken to safeguard against 
this. Enclosed compartments, seals and filters have 
been provided to keep the supply of air, fuel and 
lubricant clean. These protective devices must not be 
removed. 

Whenever hydraulic fluid, fuel, lubricating oil or air lines 
are disconnected, clean the point of disconnection and 
the surrounding area. As soon as a line has been 
disconnected, cap, plug or tape the line or opening to 
prevent the ingress of foreign material. 
The same cleaning and covering precautions should 
be taken when access covers or inspection plates are 
removed. 

Clean and inspect all parts. Make sure that all passa- 
ges and holes are clear. Cover all parts to keep them 
clean. Make sure parts are clean when they are reas- 
sembled. Leave new parts in their wrapping until they 
are actually needed for reassembly. 



Assembly 

When reassembling a machine, complete each step in 
sequence. Never partially assemble one part then start 
to assemble another. Make all recommended adjust- 
ments. Always check the job on completion to ensure 
that nothing has been overlooked. 
Recheck the various adjustments before putting the 
machine back into service. 

Note : Before fitting new parts, remove rust preven- 
tative compound from all machined surfaces 
(usually "peel-off » substances). 



Lubrication 

Where applicable, fill the compartments of repaired or 
renewed components with the quantity, type and grade 
of clean lubricant recommended in the routine mainte- 
nance section of the Operation Instruction Book. 




Gaskets 

Make sure that the holes in gaskets line up with lubrica- 
ting oil passages in the mating parts. If gaskets have 
to be made, use material of the correct type and 
thickness. Make sure that holes are punched in the 
right places. 

Incorrectly punched gaskets can cause serious da- 
mage. 

Lip type rubber seals. 

Lubricate the lips of lip-type seals with oil before fit- 
ment. Do not use grease on seals, except for grease 
seals. The main parts of a lip-type seal are the case { 1 ), 
the sealing element (2) and the ring spring (3). The 
figure shows the construction of a simple lip-type seal. 
The cross section shows the «heel» (4) and the «toe» 
(5), used to identity the sides of a single element seal. 
With a few exceptions, the toe of a single-lip seal is 
located on the lubricant side. Some seals have a 
second auxiliary lip which has no spring. 



Shims 

When shims are removed, tie them together and iden- 
tify their location. Keep shims clean and take care not 
to bend them before refitting them. 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ V 




Introduction 



1A01.23 



Cables and wires 

When removing or disconnecting a group of cables or 
wires, label each one to ensure correct refitment. 



Locking devices 

Slackening of nuts and bolts is prevented by mechani- 
cal means such as lockwashers, tab washers and 
cotter pins, or by Loctite-type locking agents. 
Flat retainers must be installed properly to be effective. 
Bend one end of the retainer against the edge of the 
part. 

Bend the other end against one of the flats on the nut or 
bolt head, 

Always fit new retainers in compartments which house 
moving parts. 

When fitting lockwashers on aluminium housings, 
place a flat washer between the lockwasher and the 
housing, 
Note: 

1) Never fit a lockwasher (Grower, fan, spring, etc..) 
under a nut or bolt to which a specified torque has 
to be applied (however, see Recommended Stan- 
dard Torque charts). 

2) Always thoroughly degrease components before 
applying Loctite type locking agents. 



Bushes and press fits 

Do not fit bushes with a hammer alone. Use a suitable 

fitting tool and a hammer or, better still, a press if 

possible. 

When using a press, ensure that pressure is applied 

directly in line with the bore. If the ring has an oi! hole, 

take care to align it with the oil hole in the mating part. 

When press fitting a part into another part, lubricate the 

mating surfaces. Tapered parts should be assembled 

dry. 

Before assembly, check that the tapers are dry and free 

from burrs. 






Correct and incorrect method of fitting and 
bending locking tabs. 



Fitting bolts in blind holes 

Use bolts of the correct length. A bolt which is too long 
may « bottom ■> before the head comes into contact with 
the part it is to hold: this will cause damage to the 
threads. If a bolt is too short, there may not be enough 
threads engaged to hold the part securely. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



— www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




1A01.24 



Introduction 



F . Installation instructions 
Pre-delivery checks 

The following items must be checked by the Distributor 
before delivery to a Dealer and by the Dealer before 
delivery to an Owner or Operator. 
1 , General Installation 

. Clean the battery top and smear the terminals with 
petroleum jelly. 

. Charge the batteries if necessary. 

. Check all electrical connections, cable and ducting 
clips and light fittings. 

. Check and top up the engine and transmission hou- 
sing oil levels. 

. Lubricate all grease points. 

. Check and adjust belt tensions as necessary (alterna- 
tor, fan, auxiliary pump and air-conditioning compres- 
sor). 

. Except when it contains antifreeze, flush the cooling 
system and refill with soft water. 

. If the clutch pedal has been held down to prevent the 
disc sticking, remove the keeper. 

. Check that the fuel tank contains a sufficient amount 
of fuel of the correct type. 

. Remove air from the fuel system and tighten all fuel 
pipe connections. 

. Check that the engine air filter hoses are secure. 

. Check that engine control linkages are correctly ad- 
justed and are operating freely. 

. Start the engine. 

. Check the instruments and warning lights for correct 
operation. 

. Check engine speed at the tachometer with both 
hand and foot throttles. 

. Attach a mounted implement and check the tractor 
hydraulics for correct operation. 

. Check and adjust tyre pressures (road or field work). 

. Check all nuts bolts, studs, pipe unions and clips for 
tightness. 

. Check all pipes and hoses for leaks. 

. Check and adjust headlamp alignment. 

. Road test the tractor, checking the brakes and all 
instruments and services for correct operation. 

2. Electronic systems 

. Check the electronic linkage for correct operation. 
. Carry out the quick check procedure in section 

11B01. 
. Check all the Autofronic lunctions, using the test 

procedure in 12B01. 
. Check the on-board computer installation (Datatro- 

nic) using procedure 13A01. 



3. Tightening Torques 

. Check the torque of all chassis fixing nuts and bolt: 

- Front axle/Engine 

- Engine/Gearbox 

- Gearbox/Rear axle 

- Axle housings/Rear axle 

. Check the torque of all wheel and rim nuts and bolts. 



Instructions to the driver 

Instructions must be given to the driver on the items 
listed below : 

1 . Safety precautions when starting the engine. 

2. Location and significance of tractor and engine 
serial numbers. 

3. Instruments and controls. 

4. Running-in. 

5. Starting and stopping the engine. 

6. Selection of correct operating gear ratio and use of 
gearshift levers and reverse shuttle lever. 

7. Danger of towing downhill without engine braking 
and correct use of gearbox. 

8. Use and adjustment of brakes and brake pedal 
latch. 

9. Use of clutch. 

10. Use of hydraulic differential lock. 

11. Use of hydraulically operated PTO - Clutch and 
brake. 

12. Operation of hydraulic lift system. 

13. Attaching and detaching towed implements. 

14. Grease points. 

15. Changing grades of oil. 

16. Replacement of engine and transmission oii filter 
elements. 

17. Operation of fuel system. Removal of air frcm the 
system. Air filter - clogging indicator. 

18. Cooling system. Frost precautions. Tension o; twin 
fan belts. 

19. Maintenance of electrical equipment (batteries). 
Negative earth system. 

20. Adjustment of front and rear track widths. 

21. Tyre pressures. 

22. Tightness of all nuts and bolts. 

23. Fuel handling and storage 

24. Use of auxiliary hydraulic equipment. 

25. Fill in tractor and engine serial number details in the 
Operator Instruction Book. 

26. Read the Operaior Instruction Book. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Introduction 




1A01.25 



G . Conversion table 



Pressure units 

1 PSi = 1 lbf/in 2 = 0,0689 bar 

1 bar = 14,512 lbf/in 2 = 14,512 PSI 



Bar 


Ibf / in 2 


Bar 


Ibf / in 2 


Bar 


Ibf / in 1 


0,5 


7,256 


9,5 


137,9 


35 


508 


1 


14,51 


10 


145 


40 


588 


1.5 


21,77 


11 


159,6 


45 


653 


2 


29 


12 


174 


50 


726 


2,5 


36,28 


13 


189 


60 


871 


3 


43,54 


14 


203 


70 


1029 


3,5 


50,8 


15 


218 


80 


1161 


4 


58 


16 


232 


90 


1306 


4,5 


65,3 


17 


247 


100 


1451 


5 


72,6 


18 


261 


200 


2903 


5,5 


79,8 


19 


276 


300 


4354 


6 


87,1 


20 


290 


400 


5805 


6,5 


94,3 


21 


309 


500 


7257 


7 


101,6 


22 


319 


600 


8708 


7,5 


108,8 


23 


334 


700 


10160 


8 


116,1 


24 


348 


800 


11611 


8,5 


123,4 


25 


368 


900 


13235 


9 


130,6 


30 


435 


1000 


14514 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




1A01.26 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




Torque units 

1 Nm = 0,7376 Ibf/ft 
1 Ibf/ft ~ 1 ,3558 Nm 
















Nm 




Ibf/ft 


Nm 




Ibf/ft 


Nm | 


I 


Ibf/ft 


1,3558 


1 


0,7376 


46,0972 


34 


25,0784 


90,8396 


67 


49,4912 


2,7116 . 


2 


1,4752 


47,4530 


35 


25,8160 


92,1944 


68 


50,1568 


4,0674 


3 


2,2128 


48,8088 


36 


26,5536 


93,5502 


69 


50,8944 


5,4232 


4 


2,9504 


50,1646 


37 


27,2912 


94,9060 


70 


51,6320 


6,7790 


5 


3,6880 


51,5204 


38 


28,0288 


96.2618 


71 


52,3696 


8,1348 


6 


4,4256 


52,8762 


39 


28,7664 


97.6176 


72 


53,1072 


9,4906 


7 


5,1632 


54,2320 


40 


29,5040 


98.9734 


73 


53,8448 


10,8464 


8 


5,9008 


55.5878 


41 


30,2416 


100,329 


74 


54,5824 


12,2022 


9 


6,6384 


56,9436 


42 


30,9792 


101,685 


75 


55,3200 


13,5580 


10 


7,3760 


58,2994 


43 


31,7168 


103,041 


76 


56,0576 


14,9138 


11 


8.1136 


59,6552 


44 


32.4544 


104.397 


77 


56.7952 


16,2696 


12 


8,8512 


61,0110 


45 


33,1920 


105.752 


78 


57,5328 


17,6254 


13 


9,5888 


62,3668 


46 


33,9296 


107.108 


79 


58,2704 


18,9812 


14 


10.3264 


63,7226 


47 


34,6672 


108,464 


80 


59,0080 


20,3370 


15 


1 1 ,0640 


65,0784 


48 


35,4048 


109,820 


81 


59,7456 


21,6928 


16 


11.8016 


66,4342 


49 


36,1424 


111,176 


82 


60.4832 


23,0486 


17 


12,5392 


67,7900 


50 


36,8800 


112,531 


83 


61,2208 


24,4044 


18 


13,2768 


69,1458 


51 


37,6176 


113,887 


84 


61,9584 


25,7602 


19 


14,0144 


70,5016 


52 


38,3552 


115,243 


85 


62,6960 


27,1160 


20 


14,7520 


71,8574 


53 


39,0928 


116.600 


86 


63,4336 


28,4718 


21 


15,4896 


73,2132 


54 


39,8304 


117,955 


87 


64,1712 


29,8276 


22 


16,2272 


74,5690 


55 


40,5680 


119,310 


88 


64,9088 


31,1834 


23 


16,9648 


75,9248 


56 


41,3056 


120.666 


89 


65,6464 


32,5392 


24 


17,7024 


77.2806 


57 


42,0432 


122,022 


90 


66,3840 


33,8950 


25 


18,4400 


78,6364 


58 


42,7808 


123,378 


91 


67,1216 


35,2508 


26 


19,1776 


79,9992 


59 


43,5184 


124.734 


92 


67,8592 


36,6066 


27 


19,9152 


81,3480 


60 


44,2560 


126,089 


93 


68,5968 


37,9624 


28 


20,6528 


82,7038 


61 


44,9936 


127,445 


94 


69,3344 


39,3182 


29 


21,3904 


84,0596 


62 


45.7312 


128.801 


95 


70,0720 


40.6740 


30 


22.1280 


i 85.4154 


63 


46,4688 


130,157 


96 


70,8096 


42.0298 


31 


22,8656 


86.7712 


64 


47,2064 


131,513 


97 


71,5472 


43.3856 


32 


23.6032 


88,1270 


65 


47,9440 


132,868 


98 


72,2848 


44.7414 


33 


24.3408 


89.4828 


66 


48,6816 


134,224 


99 


73,0224 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.27 



Capacity units 

1 litre = 0,2199 gallon imp. 
1 gallon imp. - 4,5459 litres 



Note: 

1 US gallon = 3.79 litres 



imp. gal. 


Litres 


Imp. gal. 




Litres 


Imp. gal. 


Litres 


0,2199 


1 


4,5459 


7,4766 


34 


154,561 


14,733 


67 


304,575 


0,4398 


2 


9,0918 


7,6965 


35 


159,107 


14,9532 


68 


309,121 


0,6597 


3 


13,6377 


7,9164 


36 


163,652 


15,1731 


69 


313,667 


, 0,8796 


4 


18,1836 


8,1363 


37 


168,198 


15,3930 


70 


318,213 


1 ,0995 


5 


22,7295 


8,3562 


38 


172,744 


15,6129 


71 


322,759 


1,3194 


6 


27,2754 


8,5761 


39 


177,290 


15,8328 


72 


327,305 


1,5393 


7 


31,8213 


8,7960 


40 


181,836 


16,0527 


73 


331,851 


1,7592 


8 


36,3672 


9,0159 


41 


186,382 


16,2726 


74 


336,397 


1,9791 


9 


40,9131 


9,2358 


42 


190,929 


16,4925 


75 


340,943 


2,1990 


10 


45,4590 


9,4557 


43 


195,474 


16,7124 


76 


345,488 


2,4189 


11 


50,0049 


9,6756 


44 


200,019 


16,9323 


77 


350,034 


2,6388 


12 


54,5508 


9,8955 


45 


204,566 


17,1522 


78 


354,580 


2,8587 


13 


59,0967 


10,1154 


46 


209, 1 1 1 


17,3721 


79 


359,126 


3,0786 


14 


63,6426 


10,3353 


47 


213,657 


17,5920 


80 


363,672 


3,2985 


15 


68,1885 


10,5552 


48 


218,203 


17,8119 


81 


368,218 


3,5184 


16 


72,7344 


10,7751 


49 


222,749 


18,0318 


82 


372,764 


3,7383 


17 


77,2803 


10,9950 


50 


227,295 


18,2517 


83 


377,310 


3,9582 


18 


81,8262 


11,2149 


51 


231,841 


18,4716 


84 


381,856 


4,1781 


19 


86,3721 


1 1 ,4348 


52 


236,387 


18,6915 


85 


386,402 


4,3980 


20 


90,9180 


1 1 ,6547 


53 


240,933 


18,9114 


86 


390,947 


4,6179 


21 


95,4639 


1 1 ,8746 


54 


245,479 


19,1313 


87 


395,493 


4,8378 


22 


100,009 


12,0945 


55 


250,025 


19,3512 


88 


400,039 


5,0577 


23 


104,556 


12,3144 


56 


254,570 


19,5711 


89 


404,585 


5,2776 


24 


109,102 


12,5343 


57 


259,116 


19,7910 


90 


409,131 


5,4975 


25 


113,648 


12,7542 


58 


263,662 


20,0109 


91 


413,677 


5,7174 


26 


118,193 


12,9741 


59 


268,209 


20,2308 


92 


418,223 


5,9373 


27 


122,739 


13,1940 


60 


272,754 


20,4507 


93 


422,769 


6,1572 


28 


127,285 


13,4139 


61 


277,299 


20,6706 


94 


427,315 


6,3771 


29 


131,831 


13,6338 


62 


281,846 


20,8905 


95 


431,861 


6,5970 


30 


136,377 


13,8537 


63 


286,392 


21,1104 


96 


436,406 


6,8169 


31 


140,923 


14,0736 


64 


290,938 


21,3303 


97 


440,952 


7,0368 


32 


145,469 


14,2935 


65 


295,483 


21,5502 


98 


445,498 


7,2567 


33 


150,015 


14,5134 


66 


300,029 


21,7701 


99 


450,044 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




1A01.28 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 



www.maskinisten.net 




/ V 



Capacity units 

1 litre = 1.7599 pinte imp. 
1 pinte imp. =0,5682 litre 




Note : 

1 Litre = 2.1 13 US pints 






Imp. pt. 


I Litres 


Imp. pt. 




Litres 


Imp. pt. 




Litres 


1 .7599 


1 


0,5682 


59,8366 


34 


19,3188 


117,913 


67 


38,0694 


3.5198 . 


2 


1,1364 


61,5965 


35 


19,8870 


119,673 


68 


38.6376 


52797 


3 


1,7046 


63,3564 


36 


20,4552 


121,433 


69 


39,2058 


7.0396 


4 


2,2728 


65,1163 


37 


21,0234 


123,193 


70 


39.7740 


8.7995 


5 


2,8400 


66,8762 


38 


21,5916 


124,953 


71 


40,3422 


10.5594 


6 


3,4902 


68,6361 


39 


22,1598 


126,713 


72 


40,9104 


12.3193 


7 


3,9774 


70,3960 


40 


22,7280 


128.473 


73 


41,4786 


14.0792 


8 


4,5456 


72,1559 


41 


23,2962 


130.233 


74 


42,0468 


15.8391 


9 


5,1138 


73,9158 


42 


23,8644 


131,993 


75 


42.6150 


17.5990 


10 


5,6820 


75,6757 


43 


24,4326 


133,752 


76 


43.1832 


19.3589 


11 


6,2502 


77,4356 


44 


25.0008 


135,512 


77 


43.7514 


21.1188 


12 


6,8184 


79.1955 


45 


25,5690 


137,272 


78 


44.3196 


22.8787 


13 


7.3866 


80,9554 


46 


26,1372 


139,032 


79 


44,8878 


24.6386 


14 


7,9548 


82,7153 


47 


26,7054 


140,792 


80 


45.4560 


26.3985 


15 


8,5230 


84,4752 


48 


27,2736 


142,552 


81 


46.0242 


28.1854 


16 


9,0912 


86,2351 


49 


27,8418 


144,312 


82 


46,5924 


29.9183 


17 


9,6594 


87,9950 


50 


28,4100 


146,072 


83 


47.1606 


31.6782 


18 


10,2276 


89,7549 


51 


28,9782 


147,832 


84 


47.7288 


33.4381 


19 


10,7958 


91,5148 


52 


29.5464 


149,592 


85 


48,2970 


35.1980 


20 


1 1 ,3640 


93,2747 


53 


30.1146 


151,351 


86 


48,8652 


36.9579 


21 


1 1 ,9322 


95,0346 


54 


30,6828 


153,111 


87 


49,4334 


33.7178 


22 


12,5004 


96,7945 


55 


31.2510 


154,871 


88 


50,0016 


J0.4770 


23 


13,0686 


98,5544 


56 


31,8192 


156,631 


89 


50,5698 


42.2376 


24 


13,6368 


100,314 


57 


32,3874 


158,391 


90 


51.1380 


43.9975 


25 


14,2050 


102,074 


58 


32,9556 


160,151 


91 


51.7062 


45.7574 


26 


14,7732 


103.834 


59 


33,5238 


161,912 


92 


52.2744 


57.5173 


27 


15,3414 


105,594 


60 


34,0920 


163,671 


93 


52,8426 


49.2772 


28 


15,9096 


107,354 


61 


34.6602 


165,431 


94 


53,4108 


51.0371 


29 


16,4778 


109,114 


62 


35,2284' 


167,191 


95 


53,9790 


52.7970 


30 


17,0460 


110,874 


63 


35,7966 


168,950 


96 


54.5472 


54.5569 


31 


17,6142 


112,634 


64 


36.3648 


170.710 


97 


55.1154 


56.3168 


32 


18,1824 


114,394 


65 


36,9330 


172,470 


98 


55.6836 


58.0767 


33 


18.7506 


116,153 


66 


37.5012 


174.230 


99 


56.2518 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.29 



Length units 

1m = 3,2808 ft 

1 ft = 0,3048 m 



m 




ft 


m 




ft 


m 




ft 


0.3048 


1 


3.2808 


10,3632 


34 


1 1 1 ,549 


20,4216 


67 


219,816 


0,6096 


2 


6,5617 


10,6680 


35 


114,829 


20,7264 


68 


223,097 


0,9144 


3 


9,8425 


10,9728 


36 


118,110 


21,0312 


69 


226,378 


1,2192 


4 


13.1234 


1 1 ,2776 


37 


121,391 


21,3360 


70 


229,659 


1,5240 


5 


16,4042 


1 1 ,5824 


38 


124,672 


21 ,6408 


71 


232,940 


1 ,8288 


6 


19,6850 


11,8872 


39 


127,953 


21,9456 


72 


236.220 


2,1336 


7 


22.9659 


12,1920 


40 


131.234 


22.2504 


73 


239,501 


2,4384 


8 


26.2467 


12,4968 


41 


134,514 


22,5552 


74 


242,782 


2,7432 


9 


29,5276 


12,8016 


42 


137,795 


22,8600 


75 I 


246,063 


3,0480 


10 


32,8084 


13,1064 


43 


141,076 


23,1648 


76 


249.344 


3,3528 


11 


36.0892 


13,4112 


44 


144,357 


23,4696 


77 


252,625 


3.6576 


12 


39,3701 


13,7160 


45 


147,638 


23.7744 


78 


255,906 


3,9624 


13 


42.6509 


14,0208 


46 


150.919 


24,0792 


79 


259,186 


4,2672 


14 


45,9318 


14,3256 


47 


154,199 


24,3840 


80 


262.467 


4,5720 


15 


49,2126 


14,6304 


48 


157,480 


24,6888 


81 


265,748 


4,8768 


16 


52,4934 


14,9352 


49 


160,761 


24,9936 


82 


269,029 


5,1816 


17 


55,7743 


15,2400 


50 


164,042 


25.2984 


83 


272,310 


5,4864 


18 


59,0551 


15,5448 


51 


167,323 


25.6032 


84 


275,591 


5,7912 


19 


62,3360 


15,8496 


52 


170,604 


25,9080 


85 


278,871 


6,0960 


20 


65,6168 


16,1544 


53 


173,885 


26.2128 


86 


282,152 


6,4008 


21 


68.8976 


16,4592 


54 


177,165 


26,5176 


87 


285.433 


6,7056 


22 


72,1785 


16,7640 


55 


180,446 


26,8224 


88 


288,714 


7,0104 


23 


75.4593 


17,0688 


56 


183,727 


27.1272 


89 


291,995 


7,3152 


24 


78,7402 


17,3736 


57 


187,008 


27.4320 


90 


295.276 


7,6200 


25 


82,0210 


17,6784 


58 


190,289 


27,7368 


91 


298,556 


7.9248 


26 


85,3018 


17,9832 


59 


193,570 


28.0416 


92 


301,837 


8,2296 


27 


88,5827 


18,2880 


60 


196,850 


28,3464 


93 


305.118 


8,5344 


28 


91,8635 


18,5928 


61 


200,131 


28.6512 


94 


308,399 


8,8392 


29 


95,1444 


18,8976 


61 


203.412 


28.9560 


95 


311,680 


9,1440 


30 


98.4252 


19,2024 


63 


206,693 


29,2608 


96 


314,961 


9,4488 


31 


101.7060 


19.5072 


64 


209,974 


29.5656 


97 


318,241 


97536 


32 


104,9870 


19.8120 


65 


213,255 


29.8704 


98 


321,522 


10,0584 


33 


108,2680 


20.1168 


66 


216,535 


30.1752 


99 


324.803 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




1A01.30 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




V V 



Weight units 

1kg = 2.2046 lb 
1 lb = 0.4536 kg 



*g 




lb 


kq 




lb 


kg 


i lb 


■ 
0.4536 


1 


2,2046 


15,4224 


34 


74,9564 


30,3912 


67 


147,708 


0.9072- 


2 


4,4092 


15,8760 


35 


77,1610 


30,8448 


68 


149,913 


1 .3608 


3 


6,6138 


16,3296 


36 


79,3656 


31,2984 


69 


152,117 


1.8144 


4 


8,8184 


16,7832 


37 


81,5702 


31,7520 


70 


154,322 


2.2680 


5 


11,0230 


17,2368 


38 


83,7748 


32,2056 


71 


156,527 


2.7216 


6 


13,2276 


17,6904 


39 


85.9794 


32,6592 


72 


158.731 


3.1752 


7 


15,4322 


18,1440 


40 


88,1840 


33,1128 


73 


160,936 


3.6288 


8 


17,6368 


18,5976 


41 


90,3886 


33,5664 


74 


163,140 


4.0824 


9 


19,8414 


19,0512 


42 


92,5932 


34,0200 


75 


165,345 


4.5360 


10 


22,0460 


19,5048 


43 


94,7978 


34,4736 


76 


167,549 


d.9896 


11 


24,2506 


19,9584 


44 


97.0024 


34,9272 


77 


169,754 


5.4432 


12 


26,4552 


20,4120 


45 


99,207 


35,3808 


78 


171,958 


5.8968 


13 


28,6598 


20,8656 


46 


101,412 


35,8344 


79 


174,163 


6.3504 


14 


30,8644 


21,3192 


47 


103,616 


36,2880 


80 


176.368 


6.8040 


15 


33,0690 


21,7728 


48 


105,821 


36,7416 


81 


178,573 


7.2576 


16 


35,2736 


22,2264 


49 


108,025 


37,1952 


82 


180,777 


7,7112 


17 


37,4782 


22,6800 


50 


110,230 


37,6488 


83 


182.982 


8.1648 


18 


39,6828 


23,1336 


51 


112,435 


38,1024 


84 


185,186 


8.6184 


19 


41,8874 


23,5872 


52 


114,639 


38,5560 


85 


187,391 


9.0720 


20 


44,0920 


24,0408 


53 


116,844 


39,0096 


86 


189,596 


9.5256 


21 


46,2966 


24,4944 


54 


119.048 


39,4632 


87 


191.800 


9.9792 


22 


48,5012 


24,9489 


55 


121.253 


39,9168 


88 


194,005 


10.4328 


23 


50,7058 


25,4016 


56 


123.458 


40,3704 


89 


196,209 


10.3864 


24 


52,9104 


25,8552 


57 


125,662 


40,8240 


90 


198,414 


11.3400 


25 


55,1150 


26,3088 


58 


127.867 


41,2776 


91 


200,619 


11.7936 


26 


57,3196 


26,7624 


59 


130,071 


41,7312 


92 


202,823 


12.2472 


27 


59.5242 


27,2160 


60 


132,276 


42,1848 


93 


205,028 


12.7008 


28 


61,7288 


27,6696 


61 


134,481 


42,6384 


94 


207,232 


13.1544 


29 


63.9334 


28.1232 


62 


136.685 


43,0920 


95 


209,437 


13.6080 


30 


66,1380 


28,5768 


63 


138,889 


43,5456 


96 


211,642 


14.0616 


31 


68,3426 


29,0304 


64 


141.094 


43,9992 


97 


213.846 


14.5152 


32 


70,5472 


29,4840 


65 


143.299 


44,4528 


98 


216.051 


16.9688 


33 


72,7518 


29,9376 


66 


145,504 


44,9064 


99 


218,255 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




1A01.31 





LENGTH 

1 inch = 25,4 mm 


TEMPERATURE 


Inches 


Decimals 


mm 


Inches to mm 


mm to inches 


Fahrenheit to Celsius 


Inches 


mm 


mm 


Inches 


°F 


°C 


'■ C 


°F 


1/64- 


,015625 


0,3969 










-20 


-28.9 


-30 


-22 


1/32 


,031250 


0,7937 










- 15 


-26.1 


-28 


- 18,4 


3/64 


,468750 


1.1906 










-10 


-23,3 


-26 


- 14,8 


1/16 


,062500 


1,5875 


0,0001 


0,00254 


0,004 


0.00015 


- 5 


-20,6 


-24 


- 11,2 


5/64 


,078125 


1,9844 


,0002 


,00508 


0,005 


,00019 





- 17,8 


-22 


- 7,6 


3/32 


,093750 


2,3812 


,0003 


,00762 


0,006 


.00023 


1 


- 17,2 


-20 


- 4 


7/64 


,109375 


2,7781 


,0004 


.01016 


0,007 


,00027 


2 


-16,7 


- 13 


- 0,4 


1/8 


,125000 


3,1750 


,0005 


.01270 


0,008 


.00031 


3 


- 16,1 


- 16 


3.2 


9/64 


,140625 


3.5719 


,0006 


,01524 


0,009 


.00035 


.1 


- 15,6 


- ',4 


6.8 


5/32 


,156250 


3,9687 


,0007 


,01778 


0,01 


.00039 


5 


- 15,0 


- 12 


10,4 


11/64 


,171875 


4,3656 


,0008 


,02032 


0,02 


.00079 


10 


- 12,2 


- 10 


14 


3/16 


,187500 


4,7625 


,0009 


,02286 


0,03 


.00118 


15 


- 9,4 


- 8 


17,6 


13/64 


,203125 


5,1594 


.001 


,0254 


0.04 


,00157 


20 


- 6,7 


- 6 


21,2 


7/32 


,218750 


5,5562 


,002 


,0508 


0,05 


,00197 


25 


- 3,9 


- 4 


24,8 


15/64 


,234375 


5,9531 


,003 


,0762 


0,06 


,00236 


30 


- 1,1 


- 2 


28,4 


1/4 


,250000 


6,3500 


,004 


,1016 


0,07 


,00276 


35 


1,7 





32 


17/64 


,265625 


6,7469 


,005 


,1270 


0,08 


,00315 


40 


4,4 


2 


35,6 


9/32 


,281250 


7,1437 


,006 


,1524 


0,09 


,00354 


45 


7.2 


4 


39,2 


19/64 


,296875 


7,5406 


,007 


,1778 


0,10 


.00394 


50 


10,0 


6 


42.8 


5/16 


,312500 


7,9375 


,008 


,2032 


0,20 


,0078 


55 


12.8 


8 


46,4 


21/64 


,328125 


8,3344 


,009 


,2286 


0,30 


,01181 


60 


15,6 


10 


50 


11/32 


,343750 


8,7312 


.01 


,254 


0,40 


,01575 


65 


18,3 


12 


53.6 


23/64 


,359375 


9,1281 


,02 


,508 


0.50 


.01969 


70 


21,1 


14 


57,2 


3/8 


,375000 


9.5250 


.03 


.762 


0,60 


,02362 


75 


23,9 


16 


60,8 


25/64 


,390625 


9,9219 


,04 


1,016 


0,70 


,02756 


80 


26.7 


18 


64,4 


13/32 


,406250 


10,3187 


,05 


1,270 


0,80 


,03149 


85 


29,4 


20 


68 


27/64 


,421875 


10,7156 


,06 


1.524 


0,90 


,03543 


! 90 


32,2 


22 


71,6 


7/16 


,437500 


1 1 , 1 1 25 


,07 


1.778 


1 


.03937 


95 


35,0 


24 


75,2 


29/64 


,453125 


11,5094 


,08 


2,032 


2 


,07874 


100 


37.8 


26 


78,8 


15,32 


,468750 


1 1 ,9062 


,09 


2,286 


3 


,11811 


105 


40.6 


28 


82,4 


31/64 


,484375 


12,3031 


,10 


2,540 


4 


.15748 


110 


43,3 


30 


86 


1/2 


,500000 


12,7000 


,20 


5.080 


5 


,19685 


115 


46,1 


32 


89.6 


33/64 


,515625 


13,0969 


,30 


7.620 


6 


,23622 


120 


48,9 


34 


93.2 


17/32 


,53125 


13,4937 


,40 


10,160 


7 


.27559 


125 


51,7 


36 


96.8 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




1A01.32 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Introduction 




V 



LENGTH 
1 inch = 25,4 mm 


TEMPERATURE 


Inches 


Decimals 


mm 


Inches to mm 


mm to inches 


Fahrenheit to Celsius 


Inches 


mm 


mm 


Inches 


°F 


°C 


°C 


°F 


35/64 


-546875 


13,8906 


0,5 


12,70 


8 


0,31496 


130 


54,4 


38 


100.4 


9/16 


,562500 


14.2875 


,6 


15,24 


9 


,35433 


135 


57,2 


40 


104 


37/64 


,578125 


14.6844 


,7 


17,78 


10 


,39370 


140 


60,0 


42 


107,6 


19/32 


,593750 


15.0812 


,8 


20,32 


11 


,43307 


145 


62,8 


44 


112,2 


39/64 


,609375 


15.4781 


,9 


22,86 


12 


,47244 


150 


65.6 


46 


114,8 


5/8 


,6250 


15.8750 


1 


25,4 


13 


,51181 


155 


68.3 


48 


118,4 


41/64 


,640625 


16.2719 


2 


50,8 


14 


,55118 


160 


71.1 


50 


122 


21/32 


.656250 


16.6687 


3 


76,2 


15 


,59055 


165 


73.9 


52 


125,6 


43/64 


,671875 


17.0656 


4 


101,6 


16 


,62992 


170 


76.7 


54 


129.2 


11/16 


,687500 


17.4625 


5 


127 


17 


,66929 


175 


79a 


56 


132.8 


45/64 


,703125 


17.8594 


6 


152,4 


18 


,70866 


180 


82.2 


58 


136,4 


23/32 


,718750 


18.2562 


7 


177,8 


19 


,74803 


185 


85.0 


60 


140 


47/64 


,734375 


18.6531 


8 


203,2 


20 


,78740 


190 


87,8 


62 


143,6 


3/4 


,7500 


19.05 


9 


228,6 


21 


,82677 


195 


90.6 


64 


147,2 


49/64 


,765625 


19.4469 


10 


254 


22 


,86614 


200 


93.3 


66 


150,8 


25/32 


,781250 


19.8437 


11 


279,4 


23 


,90551 


205 


96,1 


68 


154,4 


51/64 


,796875 


20.2406 


12 


304,8 


24 


,94480 


210 


98.9 


70 


158 


13/16 


,812500 


20.6375 


13 


330,2 


25 


,98425 


212 


100,0 


75 


167 


53/64 


,828125 


21.0344 


14 


355,6 


26 


1,02362 


215 


101.7 


80 


176 


27/32 


,843750 


21.4312 


15 


381 


27 


1 ,06299 


220 


104.4 


85 


185 


55/64 


,859375 


21.8281 


16 


406,4 


28 


1,10236 


225 


107.2 


90 


194 


7/8 


,875000 


22.2250 


17 


431,8 


29 


1,14173 


230 


110.0 


95 


203 


57/64 


,890625 


22.6219 


18 


457,2 


30 


1.18110 


235 


112.8 


100 


212 


29/32 


,906250 


23.0187 


19 


482,6 


31 


1 ,22047 


240 


115.6 


105 


221 


59/64 


,921875 


23.4156 


20 


508 


32 


1 ,25984 


245 


118.3 


110 


230 


15/16 


,937500 


23.8125 


21 


533,4 


33 


1,29921 


250 


121.1 


115 


239 


61/64 


,953125 


24.2094 


22 


558,8 


34 


1.33858 










31/32 


,968750 


24.6062 


23 


584,2 


34 


1.37795 










63/64 


.984375 


25,0031 


24 


609,6 


36 


1,41732 










1 


1,00 


25.40 


25 
26 


635 
660,4 


37 
38 
39 


1 .45669 
1 ,49606 
1 ,53543 




















40 


1,57480 











Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Introduction 




1A01.33 



H . Sealants 



The Loctite sealants quoted in this Workshop Service 

Manual are under their industrial names. 

For repair use the commercial name according to the 

chart below or where applicable use the power part 

equivalent. 



Loctite 


Commercial 


Part 


Industrial 


Name 


N° 


Name 






221 - 241 


Lock and Seal 


3405350M1 


242 - 542 






270 


Stud lock 


3405352 M3 


510-518 


Instant Gasket 


3405355 M2 


638 - 648 


Retainer 


3405387 M1 


Silicomet 


Supertlex sealant 
R.T.V. silicone 
sealant (clear) 





Note : Silicomet can be replaced by Hylosil 

(Powerpart). Use the product "Form A gasket 2" 

when sealing between plastic material and iron (or 

steel). 

Example : PTO sensor, vehicle speed sensor,... 

Loctite products may be ordered from Massey 
Ferguson Central Parts Operation. 

Application method for Loctite sealants 

1 . Remove all traces of previous sealants or corrosion 

- by mechanical process : wire brush or emery cloth 

- by chemical application : use "Decaploc 88" 
Leave the product to take effect then scrap off and wipe 
clean. 

2. Degrease the components with a solvent. Preferably 
use the "Loctite 706 Dry Super Solvent" or power part 
safety solvent. 

3. Allow the solvent to vaporize 

4. Apply the recommended type of sealant 

- for blind holes, coat only latest threads to the bottom 
of the hole. 

- for components which need to be pressed together, 
apply sealant on mating surfaces only using a clean 
brush. Wipe off excess sealants. 

- for gasket faces, apply a bead on one face only. Pass 
around the holes, then tighten as rapidly as possible. 

IMPORTANT : 

If the ambient temperature is below 10° C, in order to 
accelerate the action of the sealant {except for 



Silicomet) after operation 2, use Loctite activator T747 
on at least one surface. Excess sealant, outside the joint 
will not harden (anaerobic curing of product) i.e. curing 
occurs only because of the absence of oxygen. 
Therefore wipe the excess off. 

Note : 

a) Do not attempt to retighten after 5 minutes of 
curing as this may break the bead of product. 

b) Do not use too much product to avoid blocking of 
mating parts. 

Grease 

When grease is used in components which are in 
contact with transmission oil, use a grease which is 
miscible with oil to avoid blocking the hydraulic filters. 
Use "Amber Technical" grease supplied by WITCO 
company, 76320 Saint-Pierre des Elfes, France . or 
equivalent. 

I . Tightening torques 

When reassembling components, use the "standard 

Torque" charts as a general guide when tightening 

fasteners that DO NOT HAVE SPECIFIC TIGHTENING 

recommendations : 

- 1 and 2 : for metric fasteners 

- 3 and 4 : for inch fasteners 

When a specific torque is necessary, it is mentioned in 

the text. 

Charts 1 and 3 show normal torque loadings applied to 
galvanized threaded fasteners with normal nuts with a 
coarse or fine thread, with or without flat or 
lockwashers, and weld nuts deeper than 0,8 d. 

Charts 2 and 4 show reduced torque loadings applied 
to threaded fasteners in assemblies with self-locking 
galvanized nuts, phosphated nuts or bolts, shallow 
nuts and weld nuts shallower than 0.8 d. 

Torques recommended in these charts are for dry 
parts. If the threads are oiled, reduce the torque. 

NOTE: 

a) Read the strength classification on the bolt head and 
determine the torque loading required. 

b) The size is the diameter of the shank - not the head 
width. 



EG: 



8.8 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




1A01.34 



Introduction 



/ V 



CHART 1 

Standard torque values : zinc plated metric threads 



Nominal 
Size 


STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 


STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 


ISO 8.8 
(SAE 5 BS S) 


ISO 10,9 
(SAE 8 BS V) 


Torque N.m 
Max Min 


Torque N.m 
Max Min 


M3 

M4 

M5 

M6 

M8 

M10 

M12 

M16 

M20 

M24 

M30 

M36 


1.7 1.3 

4.1 3.1 

8 6 

14 10 

35 25 

70 50 

120 90 

260 200 

560 420 

960 720 

1800 1400 

3300 2500 


2.4 1.8 
5,7 4.3 
11.5 8.5 
20 14 
46 36 
96 72 
160 120 
400 300 
800 600 
1300 1000 
2800 2100 
4800 3600 



CHART 2 

Standard reduced torque values : metric threads 





STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 


STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 


ISO 8.8 


ISO 10.9 


Nominal 
Size 


(SAE 5 BS S) 


(SAE 8 BS V) 


Torque N.m 


Torque N.m 




Max Min 


Max Min 


M3 


1.4 1 


1.9 1.5 


M4 


3.3 2.5 


4.6 3.4 


M5 


6.4 4.8 


9.2 6.8 


M6 


11 8 


16 12 


M8 


28 20 


37 29 


M10 


56 40 


77 57 


M12 


96 72 


130 100 


M16 


210 160 


I 320 240 


M20 


450 340 


640 480 


M24 


770 570 


1040 800 


M30 


1400 1 100 


2200 1 700 


M36 


2600 2000 


3800 2900 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Introduction 




1A01.35 



CHART 3 

Standard torque values : zinc plated inch threads 





STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 


STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 




SAE5 


SAE8 


Nominal 
Size 


(ISO 8,8 BS S) 


(ISO 10,9 BSV) 


Torque N.m 


Torque N.m 




Max Min 


Max Min 


#6 


2.4 1.8 


3.3 2.5 


#8 


4.4 3.4 


6.3 4.7 


#10 


6.3 4.7 


8.9 6.7 


1/4 


15 11 


22 16 


5/16 


30 22 


43 31 


3/8 


53 39 


75 55 


7/16 


86 64 


120 90 


1/2 


130 100 


180 140 


5/8 


260 200 


370 280 


3/4 


460 350 


660 490 


7/8 


760 560 


1060 800 


1 


1120 840 


1600 1200 


1 1/8 


1390 1050 


2200 1700 


1 1/4 


2000 1500 


3200 2400 


1 1/2 


3400 2600 


5400 4100 



CHART 4 

Standard reduced torque values : inch threads 





STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 


STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION 


SAE5 




SAE8 


Nominal 
Size 


(IS0 8.8BSS) 




(ISO 10,9 BSV) 


Torque N.m 




Torque N.m 




Max Min 


Max 


Min 


#6 


1.9 1.5 


2.6 


2 


#8 


3.5 2.7 


5 


3.8 


#10 


5 3.8 


7.1 


5.3 


1/4 


12 8.8 


18 


13 


5/16 


24 18 


34 


25 


3/8 


42 31 


60 


44 


7/16 


69 51 


96 


72 


1/2 


104 80 


140 


110 


5/8 


210 160 


300 


220 


3/4 


370 280 


530 


390 


7/8 


610 450 


850 


640 


1 


900 670 


1280 


960 


1 1/8 


1100 840 


1760 


1360 


1 1/4 


1600 1200 


2560 


1920 


1 1/2 


2700 2100 


4320 


3280 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



N> 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



2A01 Air conditioning 



CONTENTS 



A . General 



B. Safety and precautions 



C . Maintenance 




Cab and equipment 2A01.1 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskimsten.ne 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




2A01.2 



Cab and equipment 



A . General 



Suitable controi of the internal environment oi an agri- 
cultural implement cab requires that the temperature 
and humiaity in the cab are within the range tor human 
comfort, that an adequate volume of fresh filtered air is 
fed in to keep tne cab under pressure and to prevent the 
ingress of impurities, and that the required steps are 
also taken to demist the windows to permit viewing in all 
directions. 

Moreover, the distribution oi air should be such that one 
is unable to perceive any appreciable difference in 
temperature within the cab. in particular over the body 
surface of the driver. 

in addition, the unit must also be designed to stand up 
to the mechanical stresses brought about by the large 
number of impacts and vibration stresses associated 
with agricultural work. 

Finally, sound operation in the muddy and dusty condi- 
tions associated with such agricultural work is neces- 
sary, and tne equipment must be also capable of 
operating in positions which can reach angles of 16° tilt 
from the horizontal. 



Principle of cooling 

There is no known process for producing coldness ; 
there is only one for absorption of heat. Air conditioning 
is a process by which the heat is taken out of the air. 
Temperature is measured by the quantity of heat in a 
materia!. Like water, which always runs from a high 
point towards a low point, heat always <-runs» from a hot 
body to a cold body- 
Hence, in oraer to condition the air or absorb the heat 
from the air in a cab, it is necessary to place not air in 
contact with a cold surface. 

There is also a physical property of substances which 
states that at a given pressure, there is a specific 
corresponding temperature to cause it to boil or evapo- 
rate. 

In the vaporizing process which takes place at a 
constant temperature, the substance is able to absorb 
considerable heat. One example shows that at normal 
atmospheric pressure, water boils or vaporizes at 
100°C(212°F). 

A considerable quantity of heat can be absorbed by 
water, but the temperature will not rise- The same 
principles apply if heat is removed ; steam returns to the 
liquid state or liquids become solid. 
Thus by controlling pressure in a closed circuit it is 
possible to nave a liquid at low pressure and a low 
boiling temperature. 

During vaporization the liouid is able to absorb heat 
from its environment. 



The cooling cycle 

Air conditioning in tne cab is obtained by means of a 
ventilation system which provides, after filtering, air re- 
heated by pipes or hot water from the engine for cold 
days. If the ambient temperature, being too high, 
makes driving the tractor uncomfortable (in summer), a 
compressor cooling system allows to lower the tempe- 
rature of several degrees in the cab. In an air condi- 
tioning unit, a refrigerant circulates in a closed circuit 
under pressure : this being freon R12. At properly 
specified points, this gas is subjected to modification of 
pressure and temperature. 

A compressor , driven by the engine by means of a belt, 
sucks the vapour keeping low pressure on the ups- 
tream side, into the evaporator and compresses the 
gaseous freon obtained by this way. directing it to a 
cooling unit known as tne condenser. The passage of 
air across the condenser located in front of the engine 
water radiator cools the gaseous freon and condenses 
it- The refrigerant which has become liquid is filtered. 
Humidity ana impurities are picked up by a filter, which 
also has the function of acting as temporary reser* 
voir ; this filter is known as the dehydrator reservoir. 
The liquid freon R 1 2 under high pressure is taken to the 
expansion valve, which governs the flow of fluid, and 
pressure is released : this brings about a considerable 
fall in temperature and pressure. The liquid under low 
pressure starts boiling and evaporating man exchan- 
ger or evaporator. 

The warm humid air from the cab is passed across the 
evaporator by the turoines.fans, cools on contact and 
is forced back into the cab. The humidity in the air 
condenses in the evaporator and is discharged outside 
the cab through pipes. The cycle is completed when 
the gas is taken back to the compressor. 
Depending upon the temperature desired in the cab. a 
thermostatic box or thermostat including a -OFF" set- 
ting initiates automatic switch off and switch on of the 
compressor by means ot an electromagnetic clutch, 
thus regulating the temperature of the discharge air. 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Cab and equipment 




2A01.3 




Key 

(1) Compressor with electromagnetic clutch 

(2) Compressor outlet 

(3) Condenser 

(4) Dehydrator 

(5) Condenser outlet 

(6) Expansion valve 

(7) Resistance for fan (2 speed) 



(8) Thermostat 

(9) Fan 

(10) EvaDorator 

(11) Low pressure piping (compressor induction) 

(12) Low pressure piping (evaporator outlet) 

(13) High pressure piping (quick attach connection to 
expansion valve) 

(14) Cab filter 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskimsten.ne 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




2A01.4 



Cab and equipment 



B . Safety and precautions 

It is very important to work in a clean environment, in 

order to prevent ingress of dirt and moisture into the 

system. 

Carefully clean connections, then oil them lightly with 

compressor oil before making the connections. 

Avoid blowing compressed air through the pipes, to 

remove particles which might be there ; use only 

refrigerant in such circumstances. 

Do not remove protective coverings, plugs, etc... until 

actually ready to install components. 

Cut flexible piping using a knife, never a saw. 

Plug pipes and openings carefully when components 

are removed or disconnected. 

The oil contained in the air conditioning circuit is special 

refrigeration oil. This oil readily mixes with the freon. 

Use oniy approved refrigeration oil. 

Precautions to be taken 

An air conditioning unit can be a dangerous piece of 
equipment. It could be compared to a high pressure 
steam boiler. The pressure of the refrigerant is always 
greater than its normal boiling point. If piping is split, the 
refrigerant will evaporate or boil very rapidly. 
The forces resulting from expansion can be very dan- 
gerous. A refrigeration engineer must always work with 
precaution, in order to prevent uncontrolled escape of 
refrigerant. The refrigerant R12 is non-flammable, non- 
toxic (except when in contact with a flame) and non- 
corrosive (except on contact with water). 
You should be very careful when handling R12 .It can 
freeze the skin or the eyes on direct contact. In contact 
with a flanne or a high temperature, its decomposition 
gives phosgene gas. 

Never handle freon without wearing safety goggles, as 
well as gloves. 

Never attempt to empty a system by loosening off a 
connection. Slow emptying without danger can only be 
carried out using a manifold gauge set. 
Do not empty the system in a room where there is a 
flame. Decomposition of R12 gives phosgene gas 
which is deadly. The same precautions must be 
taken if you are looking for leaks. 
If it is necessary to retighten a connection, use two 
spanners for tightening, so as to prevent distortion 
which may give rise to leakage. 
Never weld or clean with steam near a filled system: as 
excess pressure may be created with possible lea- 
kage. 

Do not store R12 refrigerant in the sun or close to a 
source of heat: Always store the bottle safely items 
back when not in use. 



Avoid subjecting the bottle to impact. Do not carry the 

bottle in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. 

In the event of accident, proceed as follows : 

If you get R12 in your eyes, wash them very carefully 

with a solution of mineral oil. and continue to wash them 

very carefully, with a solution of boric acid and water ( 1 

teaspoonful of acid, diluted in a quarter of a cup of 

water). 

Contact a doctor immediately. 

Note -.Freezing caused by liquid refrigerant can be 

treated by progressively thawing the injured area 

with cold water and then applying a dry skin cream. 

Contact a doctor immediately. 



C . Maintenance 



Very important 

Before switching on the air conditioning system, en- 
sure that windows and doors are properly closed. 

The interior of the cap must be kept as clean as 
possible. If for any reason whatsoever the cab cannot 
be completely closed, the air recycling system must be 
switched off. If these few recommendations are not 
observed, there is a risk of clogging at the evaporator 
which will result in stoppage of the air conditioning 
system and risk of damage to the compressor. 
In order to ensure operation of the system, it is neces- 
sary to check periodically the filter located at the back 
of the cab. the condenser as well as the fans and the 
evaporator. Any plugging results in increased high 
side and low side pressure and reduces the efficiency 
of cooling. The tension of the driving belt and its 
alignment must be checked. 

Check the condition of the drain for removal of conden- 
sation from the evaporator tray. Any accumulation of 
water in the tray might result in icing of the evaporator 
and stop circulation of freon. 

In order to keep the system in good condition, we 
recommend to operate the system for several minutes 
each month in order to lubricate all the components, 
since the oil contaihea in the compressor can be mixed 
with the freon. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Cab and equipment 




2A01.5 



Electrical system 

In regards to electrical checks, ensure that the fuses 
and pressure switch located at the rear of the compres- 
sor are in good condition. Low system charge or a 
damaged fuse will not allow current supply to the 
compressor clutch. 

In order to check the action of the electromagnetic 
clutch, set the fan switch to <-ON» position then move 
the air conditioning switch towards the maximum cold 
position : a click should be heard. 
After severai minutes operation, you should notice the 
successive switching on and switching off of the elec- 
tromagnetic clutch as the cab cools. 
The connecting wires must be in good condition. 

Caution : 

When restarting the compressor, specially if it has not 
operated for some time, proceed in the following 
manner to ensure lubrication right from the first rota- 
tions of the compressor : 

a) Switch on the electro-magnetic clutch by switching 
the fan to -ON" and moving the thermostat to cold. 

b) Crank over the tractor engine tor a few seconds with 
the fuel stop button out or with the electrical stop 
control of the fuel injection pump disconnected 
(3095). 

c) Then push in the fuel stop button or reconnect the 
electrical stop control of the fuel injection pump 
(3095). start the engine and allow to idle slowly for 
several minutes. 

Check visually the quantity of refrigerant (absence of 
bubbles) and its colour through the observation win- 
dow of the aehydrator tank. while operating the engine 
at a maximum revs, (with the ran and thermostat set at 
maximum cold). 

Note : upon compressor cycling, some bubbles are 
usually present. If a brown or bluish colouring 
appears in the sight glass, the system should be 
emptied, the lubrificating oil in the compressor 
changed and the dehydrator filter and if necessary 
the expansion valve changed in that order. 

Pre-season check and preventive mainte- 
nance 

a) Carry out checks and maintenance as described in 
the preceeding paragraphs. 

b) Check visually the evaporator, piping, condenser, 
the dehydrator, compressor connections, the belt 
and evaporator drain tray and hose. 

c) Start the engine and set speed at 1500 rev/min. 
Switch fan to high speed and select thermostat to 
maxi cold. 



d) Check temperature of components. 

The outlet of the expansion valve (evaporator side) 
the evaporator, the low pressure piping and "deli- 
very valve » on the compressor must be cold when 
touching.The condenser, the dehydrator tank/filter, 
the expansion valve inlet, the compressor, the 
•■output valve-, the high pressure piping must be 
warm when touching. 

e) The dehydrator filter and oil should be changed at 
least each year, or after every one thousand hours 
and on any occasion when there is a major leakage 
and particularly if a brown or bluish colour is obser- 
ved in the viewing window of the dehydrator filter. 

f) Connect gauge set to provide internal system 
checks. Always connect the low pressure gauge 
(blue) to induction side of the compressor and high 
pressure gauge (red) to the discharge side.Always 
make connections with engine stopped. 

g) If the circuit is overfilled more than 2kg(4.5 lbs) of 
R 1 2 freon there is a risk of blockage at the dehydra- 
tor filter and the expansion valve. High and low 
pressure readings will be excessively high. 

h) Whentheairconditioningunitisoperating.ifthehigh 
and low pressure are equal, this is an indication of 
a defective compressor. 

i) If there is water in the circuit, the expansion valve 
(needle valve) will be blocked by a droplet of water 
which will change into ice. This will be indicated by 
a reduction of low pressure and high pressure. 

1 1 ) Allow to dry for 48 hours (the higher the humidity 
level, the shorther the drying time). 

12) Remove the strips of adhesive tape applied in point 
4 and trim off any excess sealant proiecting beyono 
the glass at both ends. 



Health and safety 

When exposed to moisture. SILICONE SEALANT may 
release small quantities of acetic acid. Avoid 
prolonged contact with the skin , If splashed in the eyes, 
wash out with water and seek medical attention. It is 
advisable to wear protective goggles. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




v v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Cab and equipment 2B01.1 



2 B01 Recharching the system with refrigerant 



CONTENTS 

A . Discharging the system and checking tor teaks 

B. Evacuating and flushing the system 



C. Recharging the system with liquid 



D. Checking the pressures 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



2B01.2 



Cab and equipment 




A . Discharging the system and chec- 
king for leaks 

Discharging the system 

Ensure that room in which this operation is carried out 
is adequately ventilated. Avoid any naked flames and 
do not smoke. 

Prepare the system for discharging by running the 
engine for a few minutes at 1000 rev/min with the air 
conditioning set to maximum cooling- 
Stop the engine and switch off the air conditioning. 
Remove the pressure switch from the high pressure 
hose and shunt both wires (violet and black). 
Connect the manifold kit to the compressor (Fig. 1 ). 

- red hose (small diameter) in place of the pressure 
switch. 

- blue hose to low pressure (large diameter hose) 
Slowly open the Manifold low pressure valve. 
Warning : if the system is discharged too quickly, 
compressor oil will be carried out with the refrige- 
rant 

After a few minutes, when the pressure has dropped by 
1 .5 to 2 bar. slowly open the manifold high pressure 
valve to allow all the refrigerant to escape. 

Checking for leaks 

When the system is empty replace any faulty parts then 
flush the system with Freon R 1 2 by filling to a pressure 
of 2.5 to 3 bar (36 to 50 P.S.I). To do this, connect the 
centre hose between the pressure gauges to the Freon 
cylinder (Fig. 4). Slightly slacken the centre by-pass 
hose connector to purge all air from the hose, then 
retighten it. 

Open the taps on the high and low pressure gauges 
and allow the R12 gas to build up to a pressure of 2.5 
to 3 bar (36 to 50 P.S.I )in the system. Close the taps and 
leave the system charged at this pressure for 15 to 20 
minutes before checking for leaks. 
Note : To avoid accidents, make sure that all taps 
are closed before handling the hoses.Do not start 
the engine. 

Using an electronic leak detector, run the end of its 
hose over (Fig. 2) : 

a) the compressor valve connectors 

b) all the compressor seals : shaft seal ■ oil reservoir 
plug seal 



Discharging the system 

Allow the gas to escape through the high and low 
pressure taps leaving a residual pressure of 0.2 to 0.3 
bar (3 to 5 P.S.lnt the system). 




1 Low pressure gauge 

2 High pressure gauge 

3 Measuring cylinder 

4 Vacuum pump 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V 



Cab and equipment 



2B01.3 



B . Evacuating and flushing the sys- 

tem 

Evacuating the system (Fig. 3) 

When the system is no longer under pressure, connect 
the centre hose to the vacuum pump. Open the high 
pressure tap (low pressure tap already open). Open 
the tap on the vacuum pump and turn the pump on. 
Note : At ambient temperatures above 20* (68° F) it 
will generally take 30 minutes, in 15 minutes pe- 
riods, to create the necessary vacuum. It the tempe- 
rature is beiow 20* (68° F) it will take at least 60 
minutes, especially if humidity is high. At the end of 
the evacuating period, the low pressure gauge 
should indicate a partial vacuum of 635 to 711 mm 
25 to 28 in of mercury. 

Close the high and low pressure taps and the vacuum 
pumo tap and switch off the pump. 



Flushing the system (Fig. 4) 

Disconnect the centre by-pass hose from the vacuum 
pump and connect it to the top of the measuring 
cylinder. Open the top tap on the measuring cylinder, 
slightly slacken the centre by-pass hose connector in 
order to purge any air from the hose and retighten the 
connector when R12 starts to escape from the hose. 
Open the high and low pressure by-pass taps to obtain 
an R12 gas pressure of 2.5 to 3 bar (36 to 50 P.S.I). 
Close the taps and leave the charged system for 20 
minutes. 

Using the leak detector, recheck the system for leaks 
(Fig. 2), 



Discharging and evacuating the system 
(Fig. 3) 

Purge the system by slightly opening the low pressure 

by-pass tap and allowing R12 to escape. 

Close the tap when a residual pressure of 0.2 to.0.3 bar 

(3 to 5 PSI) is obtained on both high and low pressure 

sides. 

Connect the centre hose to the vacuum pump. 

Open the high and low pressure taps and let the 

vacuum pump running for 20 minutes. 

Close the high and low pressure taps, having checked 

that the low pressure gauge indicates a partial vacuum 

of 635-71 1 mm (25 to 28 in) of mercury. 

Having completed all these operations, the system is 

ready for recharging with Freon R12. 

Note : Air must be purged from the hoses each time 

they are connected to the pressure gauges and 

charging cylinder. 





Fig. 4 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



2B01.4 



Cab and equipment 




C . Recharging the system with liquid 
(engine stopped) 

The quantity of Freon required to charge the system 
correctly is 1 .7 to 1 .9 kg (3.7 to 4.2 lbs). 

1 . Instructions for filling the charging cy- 
linder from the freon gas bottle (Fig. 5) 

Connect the freon bottle to the bottom of the charging 
cylinder and tip the bottle upside down. Open the 
taps.When pressures in the bottle and charging cylin- 
der are equal, bleed gas from the charging cylinder 
through the top valve until the quantity of freon required 
for the system is obtained. Close all taps. 



2 . Connection for charging the system 
(Fig. 6) 

Connect the bottom of the charging cylinder to the 
centre connector between the pressure gauges. 

- purge air from the hoses. 

- mark the level on the charging cylinder. 

- slowly open the low and high pressure taps on the 
pressure gauges in order to charge the system. 

Note : To allow complete charging with liquid, the 
pressure in the charging cylinder must be between 
6 and 7 bar (87 and 100 P.S.I). 

When a system is correctly charged and the pressures 
are equal, pressure on both low and high pressure 
sides should be 4 to 5 bar (58 to 73 P.S.I). 
If the charging cylinder has no heater element, the 
system will have to be partially cnarged with liquid then 
topped up with gas. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Cab and equipment 




2B01.5 



Partial liquid recharge with gas top-up 
(engine stopped, then running) 

When pressures in the charging cylinder and system 

are equal . close the high and low pressure taps and the 

bottom tap on the charging cylinder. 

To top up with gas. connect the centre hose between 

the pressure gauges to the top of the charging cylinder, 

then purge air irom the hose (do this by slightly 

unscrewing the hose and allowing gas to escape tor a 

few seconds) (Fig. 7). 

For this operation, open the low pressure tap only and 

run the engine at 1000 - 1200 rev/min with the air 

conditioning set at maximum cooling and the fan on fast 

speed. 

The system is correctly charged when the required 

level is obtained into the charging cylinder. 

Close the taps on the charging cylinder and on the low 

pressure gauge. 



D . Checking the pressures 

Once charging has been completed, check the air 
conditioning system for correct operation. 
With the pressure gauges already connected to the 
compressor (Fig. 8), sian the engine and set the ther- 
mostat control to maxi cold and the fan to fast speed. 
After a few times, the high pressure hose should feel 
hot and the low pressure hose cold 
No bubbles should be visible in the dehydrator sight 
glass. 

Check the compressor cycles. The compressor should 
cycle «on» and «off » for approximately the same length 
of time once the cab temperature has stabilized . accor- 
ding to the thermostat setting. 
When the air conditioning is off, pressures on the low 
and high pressure sides should be equal and between 
4 and 5 bar (58 and 73 PSI) in a correctly charged 
system. These figures will however vary according 
to the outside temperature. 

When the air conditioning is running low pressure 
should be between 0.2 and 1 bar (3 and 15 PSI) and 
high pressure between 8 and 15 bar (H6and 218 PSI). 
All these figures depend on the outside temperature. 
The system should cycle on and off in all cases. 
Wore : 

- fan on fast speed and thermostat on coldest 
setting 

- engine running at 1800 - 2000 rev/min. 





Fig. 8 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Cab and equipment 2001.1 



2 C01 Air conditioning system faults - Compressor 



CONTENTS 



A . Diagnosis and fault analysis 



B. Failure of air conditioning system itself 



C. Compressor 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




2C01.2 



Cab and equipment 



A . Diagnosis and fault analysis 
Diagnosis 

In generai pressure readings are directly related to 
atmospheric conditions (pressure and temperature). 
At temperatures between 2 1 ° and 30° C (68° and 85° F) 
low pressure readings will vary between 0.2 and 1 bar 
(3 and 15 PSl) and high pressure readings between 8 
and 15 bar (116 and 218 PS!). To detect faults, the 
pressure gauge kit must be connected to the compres- 
sor. 



The sudden temperature increase when the engine is 
stopped causes both the temperature ana pressure in 
the air conditioning system hoses to rise. If a hose is 
only just holding, this heat will reduce its resistance to 
bursting. 

This is particularly apparent in overcharged systems 
and where hoses are worn or badly positioned (hot 
spots). 



Fault analysis 

Leaks in the system will lead to inadequate cooling and 

low and high gauge readings will be too low. 

If tne system is under-charged, bubbles will be perma- 

nentely visible in the dehydrator sight glass and both 

gauges readings will be low. 

If the evaporator is dirty or an expansion vaive is 

blocked or frozen up, there will be a partial vacuum on 

the low pressure side and insufficient pressure on the 

h:gh pressure side. 

An over- charged system, an expansion valve stuck 

open or a clogged condenser will cause excessive 

pressure on the low pressure side. 

A clogged condenser, an over-charged system will 

cause excessive pressure on the high pressure side. 



Overcharge 

in a correctly charged system, R12 discharged from 
the compressor in the iorm of gas looses its excess 
heat, resulting from compression in the first coil of the 
condenser and condenses to a liquid in the subse- 
quent coils. Before flowing to the reservoir, this liquid is 
held in the last condenser coil. If the system is over- 
charged, the liquid level builds up in the condenser, 
leaving fewer coils available to condense the gas. Both 
temperature and pressure then build up, causing 
hoses to burst in some cases. 
Failure while engine is running 
Overcharge 
Worn hoses 
Chaffed hoses 
Hoses cut by sharp edges 
Bends too tight 

Hoses too close to battery (acid) 
Plugged condensor fins 

Failure when engine is stopped 

Same reasons as when running plus stoppage of 
engine compartment cooling and engine "temperature 
surge- in the few moments after it stops. 



B . Failure of air conditioning system 
itself 

(The manifold kit must be connected to the compressor 

valves). 

High pressure reading too high 

1 - Refrigerant overcharge. 

- Purge the system. 

- Avoid leaving the system unaerchargeo. 

2 - Air in system, in spite of correct low pressure 

reading. 

- Purge and recharge the system. 

3 - Space between condenser fins clogged with in- 

sects, 

- Clean the condenser. 

4 - Refrigerant remains liquid in suction pipe, at the 

evaporator outlet. 

This causes moisture or frost formation on the hose 

or on the compressor iniet valve. 

- Check that the expansion valve sensing bulb is 
securely in contact with the suction pipe. 

5 - Plug left in a pipe on assembly, revealed by a diffe- 

rence of temperature above and below the point 
where the plug is located. 

6 - If high pressure reading is higher than the one 

obtained during normal operation with correct low 
pressure reading and charge but presence of 
bubbles in the dehydrator, the dehydrator hose 
connections have been reversed and fluid is flowing 
in the wrong direction. 

7 - If high pressure reading is very high, low pressure 

reading normal, with bubbles in the dehydrator and 
frosting of dehydrator reservoir, there is a restriction 
at the dehydrator inlet, causing the dehydrator to 
act as an expansion valve. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 




Cab and equipment 



2C01.3 



High pressure reading too low 

1 - Incorrect charge. A lack oi refrigerant causes bub- 

bles which appear in the sight glass. 

2 - Compressor gasket cracked or compressor valves 

leaking 



Low pressure reading too low, together 
with insufficient cooling 

1 - Restriction in a hose or in dehyarator. Revealed by 

a difference of temperature above and below the 
restriction, or by cooling of the dehydrator reservoir 
whilst the system is running. 

2 - Insufficient charge in expansion valve sensing 

bulb. 

- Heat the end of the thermostatic oulb by holding it. 
Intake pressure should rise quickly to at least 1 .45 
bar (21 PSI) with the engine at idling speed. If not. 
the expansion valve must be reoiaced. 

3 - Expansion valve capilliary tube oroken or leaking. 

The expansion valve stays closed, causing the 
system to operate at very low pressure. 

4 - Formation of frost in expansion valve or jet 

- The expansion valve or jet may be frozen up even 
though the pipes are barely frosted. 

5 - Expansion valve stuck. Bits of rjst in system. 

- Heating the end of the sensing bulb has no effect on 
the low pressure reading. 

- The expansion valve may open after a short rest, 
then stick again after some time in operation. 

6 - Check that the evaporator air iniet is not clogged. 



Low pressure reading too high 

1 - Compressor belt too slack. 

2 - Expansion valve sensing bulb incorrectly fixed. 

3 - Expansion valve needle stuck open. Refrigerant 

flows too freely through the coils and cools or 
. freezes the inlet pipe. 

4 - Compressor inlet valve filter blocked. 

5 - Low refrigerant charge. 

- Check whether bubbles are visible in the sight glass 
when the system is operating witn the fans switched 
on. 



6 - Compressor inlet and outlet valves leaking. 

7 - If high pressure reading is low, low pressure rea- 

ding is high and the charge is correct, there are 
leaks at the compressor gasket or faulty valves. 



Noisy expansion valve (persistent whis- 
tling) 

1 - Low refrigerant charge, revealed by presence of 
bubbles in the sight glass. 

Insufficient cooling 

1 - Compressor not functioning properiy. 

2 - Expansion valve not functioning properly. 

3 - High and low pressure readings low. tending to- 

wards partial vacuum, with correct cnarge. Tempe- 
rature too low at evaporatoor outlet, causing the 
expansion valve to close and poor synchronization 
between thermostat cycling and e/.pansion valve 
opening. 

Formation of frost on evaporation fins 

1 - Check thermostat electrical contacts. 

2 - Check that the sensing bulb is in contact with the 

evaporator fins. 



Intermittent operation of the compressor 
(irregular cycling) 

- Check belt tension 

- Check clutch drive plate clearance 

■ Check clutch coil voltage and current 

- Check the compressor itself. 



Unusual compressor noise 
In engaged position : 

- check compressor mounting 

clutch and that there is no slipping 
clutch and compressor bearings 
the refrigerant charge (175 cm J + 15 cm 3 ) 
the compressor inlet and outlet valves. 

In disengaged position : 

- check clutch drive plate clearance. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




2C01.4 



Cab and equipment 



•/ V 



C . Compressor 



Setting the drive plate clearance 

Check the drive plate clearance with a feeler gauge. 
The clearance should be 0.4 - 0.8 mm (0.016 - 0.032 
in)(Rg. 1). 

If the clearance is not the same ail the way round, lift 
slightly and tap gently where the clearance is greatest. 

Note : Drive plate clearance is obtained by means 
of shims. When reassembling or fitting a new 
clutch, try fitting the original shims first. 

When fitting a new clutch on a compressor which 
previously had no shims, use the following sizes : 
1,02 mm - 0.05 mm - 0.12 mm 
(.040 in) -( .00197 in) - (.00472 in) 
Torque the nut to 40 Nm (30 Ibf/ft) 




Fig. 1 



Precaution to be taken when removing 
and refitting the compressor : 
Note : 

1) Run the air conditioning system for 5 to 10 
minutes before removing the compressor in order 
to return all the refrigerant to the compressor. 

2) The head connectors must face upwards or be 
in line with the oil filler hole (Fig. 2). 

Locate the valve cover plate dowels in the correct 
holes in the block, then align the plate. 
Torque to 30 - 34 Nm (22 - 25 Ibf/ft) according to 
tightening sequence (Fig. 3). 





Fig. 3 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Cab and equipment 




2C01.5 



Filling with oil 

1 - Discharge the R12 refrigerant. 

2 - Always check the oil level whenever a system com- 

ponent is replaced or if there has been a leak. 

3 - Determine the mounting angle. 

Place the angle gauge on the flats of the two front 
fixing lugs. Centre the bubble. Make an accurate 
note of'the mounting angle. 

4 - Remove the plug. Look through the oil filler hole then 

rotate clutch plate to correctly position the internal 
parts of the compressor, aligning them as soon as 
they start to move towards the front of the compres- 
sor (Fig. 4). 

Note : This operation is essential in order to 
release the dipstick from the internal parts so 
that it can be inserted to its full depth. 

5 - Insert the dipstick up to the stop (Fig. 5). The stop is 

formed by the bend at the top of the dipstick ; 
• the top of the bend must be on the left if the 
compressor is RH mounted. 

- the top of the bend (stop) must be on the right if the 
compressor is LH mounted. 

- in both cases, the bottom end of the dipstick bend 
MUST BE IN CONTACT WITH THE EDGES OF THE 
FILLER HOLE. 

6 - Remove the dipstick and co;jnt the number of 

graduations covered Dy oil. 




filler hole 
ball 

ball joint 
piston rod 
dipstick 
stop 




Issue 1 



November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



2C01.6 



Cab and equipment 



7 -Using the chart below, check the oil level accor- 
ding to the compressor mounting angle : 



Mounting Angle 


Acceptable oil levels 




(measured by notches i 




on the dipstick) • 


0° 


2-4 i 


10" 


4-5 ! 


20° 


5 - 6 


30° 


6 - 7 


40° 


7 - 9 


50 c 


9 - 10 


60° 


10 - 12 


90° 


12 - 13 



8 -If the graduations noted on the dipstick do not 
agree with the chart, top up to the required level. 
Note : Use only refrigeration oil. Close the con- 
tainer after use. 

9 -Refit the filler plug. 

- Check the condition of the »0» ring 

- Check that the -0- ring and its seat are clean. 

10 -Tighten me plug to a torque of 8 - 12 Nm (6 - 9 Lbf/ 
ft). If there is a leak, do not tighten the plug any 
further ; remove it and lit a new «0» ring. 
Note : Regular checking of the oil level is unne- 
cessary, unless there is good reason to suspect 
that the level is low or needs checking. 



Recommended lubricants for SD.5 compressor 
filling, capacity : 175 cm 3 



Make 


Name 


Grade 


Sun Oil Co 


Suniso 
Sunbts 


4GS 
5GS 

31/41/51 


Caltex 


Capella 


WF100 
WF68 


1 BP 


Enagole 


LPT 100/150/185 


Shell 


Talpa Oil 
Bitoria Oil 


20/30 
33/41 . 


Mobil 


Gargoyle Artil 

t 


300 


! Castrol 


Ice Matic 

i 


299/99 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Cab and equipment 




2D01.1 



2 D0 1 Replacement of glasses 



CONTENTS 



A . Replacement of seal (hinge) on cab door window 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




2D01.2 



Cab and equipment 



A . Replacement of seal (hinge) on 

cab door window 

Product family 

Silicone elastomer, vulcanizing at ambient tempera- 
ture without having to add a catalyst. 

Products used 

RHODORSIL SILICONE SEALANT «.B. or Rubson 
HP Translucidror equivalent. 
RHORDORSIL is manufactured by RHONE-POU- 
LENC, Silicones Dept. 

Composition 

- Reactive siloxanic oolymethyi poiymer : min. 85 % 

- Reinforcing silica between 10 and 1 1 % 

- Cross-linking agent between 3 and 4 % 

- Pigment max 1% 
Colour : translucid 

Instructions 

1) Carefully remove all traces of previous silicone 
sealant 

2) Clean the sides of She windows with a dry cloth. 

3) Thoroughly degrease the edges oi the 2 windows 
with a dielectric solvent (trichloroethylene, Trichlo- 
roethane....). 

Note : The surfaces must be allowed to dry before 
applying the sealant. 

4) Apply three or tour 20 mm strips of cellulose adhe- 
sive tape (A) io hold the 2 Dieces of glass J tc 5 mm 
apart (Fig. 1 ) 

5) Turn the glass over (the strips of tape will then be on 
the bottom) (Fig. 2). 

6) Stick a strip of cellulose tape (B) on the edge of each 
window to protect the area adiacent to the joint. 

7) Sprinkle talc onto the groove (to neutralize the effect 
of the adhesive in the bottom of the groove), then 
blow clean. 

8) Squeeze a continous strip of silicone sealant into the 
4-5 mm groove (this is easier to achieve by applying 
the sealant from a cartridge with a compressed air 
gun). 

9) Smooth the surface of the joint with a wet spatula. 
or with a wet ruDDer block, siiding it along the 
surface of the two windows. 




-I k 



4-5mm 



¥ 



Fig. 1 




10) Remove the 2 strips of tape applied in point 6. 

1 1 ) Allow to dry for 48 hours (the higher the humidity 
level, the shorther the drying time). 

12) Remove the strips of adhesive tape applied in point 
4 and trim off any excess sealant projecting 
beyond the glass at both ends. 



Health and safety 

When exposed to moisture. SILICONE SEALANT may 
release small quantities of acetic acid. Avoid prolon- 
ged contact with the skin. If splashed in the eyes, wash 
out with water and seek medical attention. It is advisa- 
ble to wear protective goggles. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



CO 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




3 . SPLITTING THE TRACTOR 



Contents 



3 A01 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE ENGINE AND THE GEARBOX - 
SPEEDSHIFT 3000 

3 A02 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE ENGINE AND THE GEARBOX - 
SPEEDSHIFT 31 00 

3 A03 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE ENGINE AND THE GEARBOX - 
DAYNAHISFT 3000 

3 A04 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE ENGINE AND THE GEARBOX - 
DAYNAHISFT 3100 

3 B02 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE GEARBOX AND THE REAR AXLE 

3 C01 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE FRONT FRAME AND THE ENGINE 



V V 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Splitting The Tractor 3A01. 1 



3A0 1 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN 
THE ENGINE AND THE GEARBOX 
4 and 6 cylinder engines (3000) 



CONTENTS 



A. Removal 



B. Refitment 



C. Tightening torques 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



3A01.2 



Splitting The Tractor 




V 



A. Removal 



1 . Disconnect the two front differential lock (4WD) 
control hoses. 

Plug the pipe connections. 

2. Remove the guard and the 4WD transmission 
shaft, 

3. Remove the sheet metal panels. 

4. Disconnect the earth cables only from the batte- 
ries. 

5. Remove the hood rear bracket. 

6. Disconnect and plug: 

- the two orbitrol steering ram hoses {mark their 
position). 

- the two air conditioning plugs and the bracket (if 
fitted). 

- the fuel return hose. 

- the two cooler hoses on the 17 bar valve (mark 
the positions). 

- the accelerator control on the injection pump. 

- the fuel cut-off control. 

- the flowmeter harness (if fitted). 

- the main wiring harness connections (on cab 
console or above engine depending on harness 
model). 

- the heater hoses on the RH rear side of the 
engine block (4 cyl.) on the water pump (6 cyl. - 
mark the position). Plug the connections to avoid 
draining the cooling system completely). 

- the 7.5 and 1 amp fuse harness (to release this, 
slightly slacken the straight rod above the radia- 
tor). 

- the fuel supply hose. 

7. Immobilise tne tractor: 

- apply the nandbrake. 

- fit wedges between the frame and the front axle 
(Fig.1). 

8. Support the tractor under the gearbox using a 
suitable stand. 

9. Support the tractor under the sump using a suitable 
trolley jack. 

10. Slacken the four 10 diam. bolts (1) (Fig. 2) on the 
rubber dampers on the RH and LH cab supports, 
raise the cab slightly (low profile cab) and position 
chocks under it. 

11. Remove the bolts attaching the engine to the 
gearbox. 

1 2. Separate the gearbox from the engine. 

Note: As a safety measure, remove the front 
weights. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Splitting The Tractor 




3A01.3 



B. Refitment 



1 3. Screw two dowel pins (made locally) into diametri- 
cally opposite positions on the gearbox. 

1 4. Replace the seal /1\ on the input shaft (2) (Fig.3). 
a)withdraw the PTO shaft (3). 

b)extract the seal /1V 

c)replace the PTO shaft. 

d)remove the circlip (4) and the washer (5). 

e) protect the splined end of the shaft (3). 

f) fit a new seaf /1\ using service tool 3376803 M1 . 
(see 3A02) 

g)remove the protection from the splines, 
h) refit the washer (5) and the circlip (4). 

1 5. Lightly grease the gearbox input shaft splines with 
molybdenum disulphide grease. 

16. Check that the two dowel pins are fitted on the 
engine. 

1 7. Fit the engine to the gearbox by turning the flywheel 
ring gear with a screwdriver. 

1 8. Fit the two attaching bolts, For 6 cylinder engines 
only, coat the bolts with Loctite 270. Tighten to the 
torque indicated in Figs. 5 and 6. 

1 9. Carry out procedures 4 to 9 in reverse. 

20. Carry out procedure 10 in reverse. 

Note: When replacing the cab on its supports, 
check that the balls (1) of the gear and reverser 
levers are correctly located in their respective 
housings (2) (Fig.4). 

21 . Top up the cooling system. 

22. Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse (4WD). 

23. Start the engine. 

24. Check the accelerator control and fuel cut-off 
setting. 

25. Check: 

- the hydraulic circuits for leaks. 

- the operation of the electrical circuits. 

26. Refit the sheet metal panels. 

27. Road test the tractor. 




Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



3A01.4 



Splitting The Tractor 




V V 



C. Tightening torques 



Engine to gearbox attachment (4 cylinder engines) 



Tightening torques (1) to (15) 100- 130 Nm 




Fig. 5 



Engine adaptor plate to gearbox spacer attachment (6 cylinder engines) 




Tightening torques (Nm) 

(1) 160-210 

(2) 80-104 

(3) 80-104 

(4) 160-210 

(5) 280-370 



(6) 450-610 

(7) 450-610 

(8) 280-370 

(9) 160-210 
(10) 80-104 



(11) 80-104 

(12) 160-210 

(13) 160-210 

(14) 100-130 



Fig. 6 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



v v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Splitting the tractor 3A02. 1 



3A02 Splitting the tractor between the engine 
and the gearbox 

Pull-type clutch (3100) 



CONTENTS 



A. Removal 



B. Refitment 



C. Fitting engine adaptor plate/gearbox spacer 



D. Service tools 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




3A02.2 



Splitting the tractor 



V V 



A. Removal 



Note: Plug or cover disconnected hydraulic 
pipe connections to prevent teaks and the 
ingress of foreign matter. 

1 . Disconnect the two front differential lock (4WD) 
control hoses. 

2. Remove the guard and the 4WD transmission 
shaft. 

3. Remove the inspection plate under the clutch 
housing. 

4. Remove the pin /1\ connecting the clutch slave 
cylinder (2) to the release bearing (3) (Fig.1). 

5. Remove the sheet metal panels. 

6. Remove the battery cover. 

7. Disconnect the earth cables only from the batte- 
ries. 

8. Remove the hood rear bracket. 

9. Disconnect: 

- the two orbitrol steering ram hoses (mark their 
position). 

- the two air conditioning plugs and the bracket (if 
fitted). 

- the fuel return hose. 

- the two cooler hoses on the 17 bar valve (mark 
the positions). 

- the throttle control on the injection pump. 

- the flowmeter harness (if fitted). 

- the main wiring harness connections above the 
engine. 

- the heater hoses on the water pump and behind 
the fan pulley. (Plug the connections to avoid 
draining tne cooling system completely). 

- the 7.5 and 1 amp fuse harness. To release this, 
slightly slacken the straight rod above the radia- 
tor. 

- the fuel supply hose. 

10. Immobilise the tractor. 
Apply the handbrake. 

Fit wedges between the frame and the front axle 
(Fig.2). 

11. Support the tractor under the gearbox using a 
suitable stand. 




Fig. 1 




1 2. Support the tractor under the sump using a suitable 
trolley jack. 

1 3. Slacken the bolts attaching the engine to the gear- 
box. 

1 4. Separate the gearbox from the engine 

Note: As a safety measure, remove the front 
weights. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




v V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor 




3A02.3 



B. Refitment 



15. Assemble trie carrier (3) on the clutch slave 
cylinder (2) with the pin /1\ (Fig.3). 

1 6. Position service tool 3376802 M1 (36 mm shim) 
between the end of the guide-pin (4) and the 
face of the control cylinder (2) (Fig.3). 

17. Screw two dowel pins {use two bolts) into 
diametrically opposed positions on the gearbox. 

1 8. Replace the seal /1\ on the input shaft (2) (Fig.4). 
a)withdraw the PTO shaft (3). 

b)extract the seal /1\. 

c) replace the PTO shaft (3). 

d)remove the circlip (4) and the washer (5). 

e)protect the splined end of the shaft (3). 

f) lubricate and fit a new seal /1\ using service tool 

3376803 Ml. 
g)remove the protection from the splines, 
h) refit the washer (5) and the circlip (4). 

19. Lightly grease the gearbox input shaft splines 
(using molybdenum disulphide grease). 

20. Check that the two dowel pins are fitted on the 
engine. 

2 1 . Fit the engine to the gearbox by turning the flywheel 
ring gear with a screwdriver. 

Note : During assembly, the release bearing 

must be heard to engage in the clutch cover 

plate. Remove the service tool through the 

inspection hole (Fig.3). 

Check that tne clip is correctly positioned on the 

cover plate. 

Remove the two dowel pins. 

22. Clean the bolts attaching the engine to the gearbox 
and coat them with Loctite 270 before fitting. See 
Section C for tightening torques. 

23. Carry out procedures 6 to 12 in reverse. 

24. Top up the cooling system. 

25. Refit the guard and transmission shaft (4WD). 

26. Reconnect the two front wheel differential lock 
control hoses (4WD) 

27. Start the engine. 

28. Check the accelerator control setting. 




29. Check: 

- all hoses and pipes for leaks 

- that the electrical circuits are working. 

30. Refit the inspection plate under the clutch housing, 

31 . Refit the sheet metal panels. 

32. Road test the tractor. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskimsten.ne: 



^ 


3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS Jt 




v V 


3A02.4 


Splitting the tractor 




C. Attaching engine adaptor plate/Gearbox spacer 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V 



Splitting the tractor 




3A02.5 



Tightening torques (Nm) 



(1) 


120-160 


(8) 


600-800 


(2) 


300-400 


(9) 


600-800 


(3) 


120-160 


(10) 


300-400 


(4) 


120-160 


(11) 


120-160 


(5) 


300-400 


(12) 


120-160 


(6) 


600-800 


(13) 


■ 300-400 


(7) 


600-800 


(14) 


300-400 



D. Service tools 



3376802 M1 

36 mm tool to connect engine and gearbox 



3376803 M1 

Input shaft seal fitting tool 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




• 



Splitting the tractor - Dynashift 3A03. i 



3A03 Splitting the tractor between the engine 
and the gearbox (3000) 



CONTENTS 



A. Removal 



B. Refitment 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3A03.2 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor - Dynashift 



^ 



A. Removal 



1 . Disconnect the two front differential lock (4WD) control 
hoses. Plug the pipe connections. 

2. Remove the guard and the 4WD transmission shaft. 

3. Remove the sheet metal panels. 

■i Disconnect the earth cables only from the batteries. 

5. Remove the hood rear bracket. 

6. Disconnect and plug : 

- the two orbitrol steering ram hoses tmark their posi- 
tion). 

- the two air conditioning plugs and the bracket (if fitted). 

- the fuel return hose. 

- the two cooler hoses on the 17 bar valve (mark the 
positions). 

- the accelerator control on the injection pump. 

- the flowmeter harness (if fitted). 

- the main harness connections above the engine. 

- the heater hoses on the thermostat block to the engine 
front and to the water pump. Plug the connections to 
avoid draining the cooling system completely). 

- the 7.5 and 1 amp fuse harness (to release this, slightly 
slacken the straight rod above the radiator). 

- the fuel supply hose. 

7. Immobilise the tractor : 

- apply the handbrake. 

- fit wedges between the frame and the front axle (Fig. 1 ), 

8. Support the tractor under the gearbox using a suitable 
stand. 

9. Support the tractor under the sump using a suitable 
trolley jack. 

1 0. Remove the too! box. 

1 1 . Remove the bolts attaching the engine to the gearbox. 

1 2. Separate the gearbox from tne engine. 

Note: As a safety measure, remove the front weights. 



B. Refitment 



13. Screw two dowel pins (made local/yl rnto diametrically 
opposite positions on the gearbox. 

14. Replace the seal /1\ on the input shaft (2) (Fig.2). 

a) withdraw the PTO shaft (3). 

b) extract the seal /TV 

c) replace the PTO shaft. 

d) remove the circlip (4) and the washer (5). 

e) protect the splined end of the shaft (3). 

f| fit a new seal /1\ using service tool 3376803 Ml (see 

3A04) 
g) remove the protection from the splines, 
h) refit the washer (5) and the circlip (4). 

15. Lightry grease the gearbox input shaft splines with 
molybdenum disulphide grease. 

16. Check that the two dowel pins are fitted on the engine. 

17. Fit the engine to the gearbox by turning the flywheel ring 

gear with a screwdriver. 




18. Fit the attaching bolts. Coat the bolts with Loctite 270. 
Tighten to the torque indicated in section 3A04 

1 9. Carry out procedures 4 to 9 in reverse. 

20. Carry out procedure 10 in reverse. 

21. Top up the cooling system. 

22. Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse (4WD). 

23. Start the engine. 

24. Check the accelerator control and fuel cut-off setting. 

25. Check: 

- the hydraulic circuits tor leaks. 

- the operation of the electrical circuits. 

26. Refit the sheet metal panels. 

27. Road test the tractor. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 




Splitting the tractor - Dynashift 3A04. i 



3 A04 Splitting the tractor between the engine 
and the gearbox 

Pull-type clutch (3100) 



CONTENTS 



A. Removal 



B. Refitment 



C, Fitting engine adaptor plate/gearbox spacer 

D. Service tools 



Issue 1 December 1993 



** 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor - Dynashift 




3A04.3 



B. Refitment 



1 5. Fit the spring washer (4) and the release bearing (7) 
into the carrier (2) (Fig.3). 

1 6. Fit the cover (3), the stop bolt (6) (Fig. 3) into the 
release bearing carrier notch. Press on the spring 
washer and place pin /1\ its bend pointed 
downwards (Fig. 1 and 3). Check the free rotation 
and radial movement of the release bearing. 

1 7 . Position service tool 3376802 M2 between the end 
of the release bearing carrier (2) and the seal carrier 
(5) (Fig. 3). 

1 8. Screw two dowel pins into diametrically opposed 
positions on the gearbox. 

1 9 . Repl ace the sea I / 1 \ on th e i nput shaft ( 2) ( Fig .4) . 

a) withdraw the PTO shaft (3). 

b) extract the seal /1Y 

c) replace the PTO shaft (3) 

d) remove the circlip (4) and the washer (5). 

e) protect the splined end of the shaft (3). 

f ) lubricate and fit a new seal /1\ using service tool 
3376803 Ml. 

g) remove the protection from the splines, 
h) refit the washer (5) and the circlip (4). 

20. Lightly grease the gearbox input shaft splines 
(using molybdenum disuiphide grease). 

21 Check that the two dowel pins are fitted on the 
engine 

22. Fit the engine to the gearbox by turning the 
flywheel ring gear with a screwdriver. 

Note : During assembly, the release bearing 

must be heard to engage in the clutch cover 

plate. Remove the service tool through the 

inspection hole (Fig.3). 

Check that the clip is correctly positioned on the 

cover plate. 

Remove the two dowel pins. 

23. Clean the bolts attaching the engine to the gearbox 
and coat them with Loctrte 270 before fitting. See 
Section C for tightening torques. 

24. Carry out procedures 6 to 12 in reverse. 

25. Top up the cooling system. 

26. Refit the guard and transmission shaft (4WD). 

27. Reconnect the two front wheel differentia! lock 
control hoses (4WD) 

28. Start the engine. 

29. Check the accelerator control setting. 




30. Check: 

- all hoses and pipes for leaks 

- that the electrical circuits are working. 

3 1 . Refit the inspection plate under the clutch housing. 

32. Refit the sheet metal panels. 

33. Road test the tractor. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




ffl04.2 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor - Dynashift 



W 



A. Removal 



Note: Plug or cover disconnected hydraulic pipe 
connections to prevent leaks and the ingress of 
foreign matter. 

1 . Disconnect the two front differential lock (4WD) 
control hoses. 

2. Remove the guard and the 4WD transmission 
shaft. 

3. Remove the inspection plate under the clutch 
housing. 

4. Remove the pin /1\ connecting the release 
bearing carrier (2) and the cover (3) (Fig.1). 

5. Remove the sheet metal panels. 

6. Remove the battery cover. 

JK'. Disconnect the earth cables only from the batte- 
^^ ries. 

8. Remove the hood rear bracket. 

9. Disconnect : 

- the two Orbitrol steering ram hoses (mark their 
position). 

- the two air conditioning couplers and the bracket (if 
fitted). Protect both couplers using the plugs kit 
3376935 M91 . 

- the fuel return hose. 

- the two cooler hoses on the 1 7 bar valve (mark the 
positions). 

• the throttle control on the injection pump. 

- the flowmeter harness (if fitted). 

- the main wiring harness connections above the 
engine. 

- the heater hoses on the thermostat block to the 
front of the engine and on the water pump. (Plug 

• the connections to avoid draining the cooling 
system completely). 

- the 7.5 and 10 amp fuse harness. To release this, 
slightly slacken the straight rod above the radiator. 

- the fuel supply hose. 

1 0. Immobilise the tractor. 
Apply the handbrake. 

Fit wedges between the frame and the front axle 
(Fig.2). 

1 1 . Support the tractor under the gearbox using a 
suitable stand. 




1 2. Support the tractor under the sump using a suitable 
trolley jack. 

1 3. Slacken the bolts attaching the engine to the gear- 
box. 

1 4. Separate the gearbox from the engine 

Note: As a safety measure, remove the front 
weights. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



•** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



3A04.4 



Splitting the tractor - Dynashift 




V 



C. Attaching engine adaptor plate/Gearbox spacer 



Tightening 

(1) 120-160 

(2( 300400 

(3) 120-160 

(4) 120-160 

(5) 300400 

(6) 600-800 

(7) 600-800 



torques (Nm) 

(8) 600-800 

(9) 600-800 
tfO) 300-400 
(11) 120-160 
(121 120-160 

(13) 300-400 

(14) 300-400 




Fig. 5 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor - Dynashift 



www.maskinisten.net 




3A04.5 



D. Service tools 



3376802 M2 

Tool to connect engine and gearbox 



3376803 Ml 

Input shaft seal fitting tool 



3376935 M91 

Plugs kit for air conditioning couplers 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



V V 



www.maskmisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Splitting the tractor 3B02.1 



3 B02 Splitting the tractor between the gearbox and 
the rear axle 
(cab integral with rear axle) 



CONTENTS 



A. Removal 



B. Refitment 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.ne 




3B02.2 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor 




A. Removal 



3000-3100 tractors 

1 . Drain the gearbox and rear axle of oil. 

2. Disconnect and plug the following (on LH side of 
gearbox) (Fig. 1 >. 

. the PTO clutch lubricating pipe (1) (at both ends) 
. the gearbox lubricating hose (2) 
. the return hose (3) 

. the hydraulic hose (4) supplying the clutch slave 
cylinder 
3000 tractors 

3. Carry out procedures 1 to 6 from Section 3 A01 . 
3100 tractors 

4. Carry out procedures 1 , 2. and 5 to 9 from Section 
3A02. 

3000-3100 tractors 

5. Disconnect the braided earth cable (from the cab 
support). 

For tractors equipped with speedshift and speed 
limiting device : 

6. Disconnect the harnesses from the speedshift so- 
lenoid valve and the limit switch. 

7. Carry out procedure 9 from Section 5 KOt . 

8. Carry out procedure 10 from Section 5 K01 . 
N.B.: Do not remove the pipe. 

9. Remove the harness guard attached to the RH side 
of the gearbox. 

10. Disconnect the HareAortoise harness. 

1 1 . Remove: 

. the two sheet-metal guards over the solenoid 

valves on the RH hydraulic cover. 

. the 17 bar pipe Srom the hydraulic cover and from 

the gearbox connection. 

. the pipe supplying the orbitrol from the hydraulic 

cover. 

. the sheet-metal guard over the Autotronic unit. 

. the screen washer reservoir (as dictated by type). 

Disconnect: 

. the earth cable from the selector cover. 

. the cable running from the radar (Datatronic). 

12. Carry out procedures 3 and 4, Section 5 D01.A 
(gearboxes with creeper gears) 

13. Immobilise the tractor: 
. appfy the handbrake 

. fit wedges between the frame and the front axle 
(Hg.2) 

14. Position jacks: 

. at the front of the rear axle 

. at the rear of the hitch hook 

. at the rear of the gearbox (trolley jack). 




issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Splitting the tractor 




3B02.3 



1 5. Remove the bolts (1) through the shock absorbers 
on the RH and LH cab supports (Fig. 3). Raise the 
cab slightly. 

16. Support the cab under the RH and LH steps. 

1 7. Unscrew the bolts securing the gearbox to the rear 
axle. 

N.B.: The bolts are of different lengths. 

1 8. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle (Fig. 5). 

B. Refitment 

1 9. Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and the rear 
axle centre housing. 

At the rear axle 

20. Fit: 

. (gearboxes without creeper gears) shaft (1), with 
sleeves (2) and (7) connected to it by double 
pins (5) and (6), to differential pinion (3) (Fig. 4a). 

. (gearboxes with creeper gears) shaft (1), with 
sleeve (2) connected to it by double pin (5), to 
differential pinion (3) (Fig. 4b). 

N.B.: Groove A in sleeve (2) should be towards 

the differential ring gear (4) (Fig.4). 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



3B02.4 



Splitting the tractor 




V V 



21 . Check that spring (1) is present in the PTO clutch 
housing (Fig. 6) 

22. Check that locating pins (2) are present (pins are 
a force lit in housing) (Fig. 6). 

23. Check that the control finger is pointing forward 
(gearbox with creeper gears) (Fig. 7). 

24. Apply a gasketing compound, Loctite 51 or equi- 
valent, to the mating face of the rear axle centre 
housing. 

25. Screw two pilot pins (b) into the housing (Fig. 6). 

At the gearbox 

26. Replace the O-ring /1\ in the Hare/Tortoise 
passages (Fig. 8). 

27. Unite the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle. 

28. Fit the connecting bolts and tighten them to a 
torque of 155 - 195 Nm. 

29. Remove the supports under the steps. 

30. Lower the cab. fit the bolts through the shock 
absorbers (1) (Fig. 3), and tighten the bolts to a 
torque of 200 - 270 Nm. 

31 . Carry out procedure 14 in reverse. 

32. Carry out procedures 30 and 31 , Section 5 D01 .A 
(gearboxes with creeper gears) 

33. Carry out procedures 5 to 1 1 in reverse. 
3000 tractors 

34. Carry out procedures 1 to 6, Section 3 A01, in 
reverse. 

35. Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse. 
3100 tractors 

36. Carry out procedures 1 . 2 and 6 to 9, Section 3 A02, 
in reverse. 

37. Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse. 
3000-3100 tractors 

38. Bleed the clutch circuit, see Section 5 C01 .G. 

39. Check: 

. that there are no leaks at the hydraulic unions 
. that the electrical circuits are working. 

40. Refit the sheet metal 

Take out the wedges between the frame and the 
front axle, release the handbrake. 

4 1 . Carry out road test on: 
. clutch controls 

. controls for creeper gears (if fitted). 

42. Check that there are no leaks at the joint between 
the gearbox and rear axle. 




Fig. 6 




Fig. 7 




Fig. 8 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor 3C01.1 



3 C01 Splitting the tractor between the front frame 
and the engine 



contents 

A. Uncoupling 

B. Recoupling - 



Issue! December 1993 



-? 



3C01.2 



3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



A . Uncoupling 



1 . Disconnect the Two 4WD front axle control hoses. 

2. Remove the guard and the 4WD transmission 
shaft 

3. Remove the sneet metal panels. 

4. Disconnect the earth cables only from the 
batteries. 

5. Disconnect and mark the positions of hoses and 
flexible connections, as follows : 

- the two Orbitrol steering hoses, 

- the hose from the cooler on the 17-bar valve, 

- the harness for the flowmeter and its three hoses 
located to the left of the fuel filter (3000 series, 
according to option), 

- the connectors for the main harness above the 
engine, 

- the positive cable on the starter, 

- the inlet sleeve between the turbocharger and the 
air filter, 

- the suction pipe between the air filter and the 
exhaust pipe. 

6. Drain the cooling system. Disconnect the lower 
and upper hoses from the radiator. 

7. Remove the upper attachment on the radiator. 

8. Remove the air conditioning compressor and 
bracket assembly and tilt it forwards with its two 
hoses (according to option). 




9. Remove the front earth connections. 

10. Immobilise the tractor. Apply the handbrake. 
Position wedges between the frame and the front 
axle (Fig. 1). 

1 1 . Loosen the bolts attaching the engine to the front 
frame. 

1 2. Support the tractor under the frame using a trolley 
jack and separate the engine from the frame (Fig. 
2). 




Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



w 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Splitting the tractor 




3C01.3 



B . Recoupling 



13. Screw two dowel pins (locally made} into 
diametrically opposite positions on the front frame. 

14. Fit the frame to the engine. 

1 5. Install the bolts and tighten to the specified torque: 
• 4 cyl. engines : see Fig. 3, 

- 8 cyl. engines : see Fig. 4. 

1 6. Remove the wedges between the frame and the 
front axle. 

1 7. If the tractor is equipped with a flowmeter, purge 
the injection pump supply system (4 cyl. engines). 

1 8. Start the engine and check: 

- the hydraulic systems for any leaks, 

- the correct operation of the electrical systems. 

1 9. Carry out procedures 1 to 3 in reverse order. 
20. Carry out road test. 




_^S O J£ 



E~V^Hj^- 



^S\ 




240 
320 Nm 



700 - 900 Nm 



FLg, 4 



I: 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



-www.m 



askJniste 



• • 



• • • •«»• w • • 



• • • 






m 



• ••••••• • «»• • • 




wvmmaskimstw 



P*| 



V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



4A01 General 



CONTENTS 



A. Introduction 



B. Main specifications 

C. Viscostatic fan 



www.maskinisten.net 




ENGINE - General 4A01.1 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




4A01.2 



ENGINE - General 



V / 



A. Introduction 



The purpose of this section is to provide general infor- 
mation about the engines used for the 3000/3100 
range. 

For ail information on: technical data, adjustments and 
removal and fitting procedures, refer to one or other of 
the publication listed opposite : 



1 . Worksnop manual for all types of Perkins engines 
manufactured for MF tractors, published by Massey 
Ferguson under reference 1856562 Ml. 

2. Workshop manual specifically for the 1000 series 
engines published by Massey Ferguson under the 
reference 1646906 M1. 



B. Main specifications 





3050 


3060 


3065 


3070 


3080 


3095 


3115/20 


312540 


PERKINS Tyoe 


A 4.236 


A 4,248 S 


C 4.236 


A T4 230 


A 6.354 4 


1006-6 H?\ 


i 1006-6LR 


1QG€-6T7 


Number ot cylinoers 


4 


4 


4 


4 


6 


■ 6 


6 


6 


Turbocharger 






yes 


yes 




- 




yes 


Bore (mm) 


98.47 


100.96 


98.47 


98.47 


98.47 


100 


100 


10C' 


Stroke (mm) 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


127 


Cubic capacity (cc) 


3860 


4060 


3860 


3860 


5800 


6000 


, 6000 


600 : 


Compression ratio 


16 to 1 


16 to 1 


16 to 1 


15,5 to '. 


16to l 


16.5 to 1 


! 16,5 to 1 


16:: 1 


Max. DIN Power (Kw) 


, 52 


59 


! 62,5 ! 


68.5 


73.5 


| 78,5 


j 84,5 


92.5 


PTO power (Kw) 


47 


53 


■ 57 ! 


62 


68 


i 
! 72 


i 78 

1 


86 


At engine speed ot (rpm| 


; 2200 


2200 


' 2200 


2200 


2200 


: 2200 


i 2200 


22CC 


Maximum torque (Nm) 


269 


280 


319 \ 


343 


374 


415 


1 436 


474 


Engine speea at max. torc-e lrpm|' 1400 


1400 


1400 


1400 


1200 


1200 


1100 


12CC 


Idling speed (rpm) 


850 


850 


850 


850 


350 


: 850 


: 850 


85C 


Engine speea at max. pov.e' 
(rpm) 


2200 


2200 


2200 


2200 


2200 


2200 


2200 


22CC 


Max. no load speed (rpm: 


; 2310 


2310 


,2310 


2310 


2310 


! 2310 


j 2310 


23:: 


Torque at max. speed (Nm! 


; 230 


260 


276 


303 


325 


. 348 


| 367 


JO" 


Fifing order 




1-3-4- 


2 






1-5-3-6 


-2-4 




Lubrication " 


Gear type Dump minimum pressure 2 


.1 bar at ■■ 


■,i\ speed and normal "jn 


ling temperature 


Valves 






( 


5vernef:u 


nisn-roG ooerated 






Valve clearances 










H'OKI) 








- Inlet (mm) 


0.30 


0,30 


0.30 


0,30 


20 


0.20 


0,20 


0,2: 


■ Exhaust (mm) 


0,30 


0.30 


0.30 


0.30 


0.45 


0.45 


0.45 


0.4; 


Engine oil cooler 


no 


no 


yes 


yos 


7* *i*i 


no 


no 


ye; 



lurbocnnrgco engines nave niston coolmq jots 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 




ENGINE - General 



4A01.3 



C. Viscostatic fan 



Description 

The 1000 series engines are fitted with a cooling fan 
with an Eaton viscous coupling. This device increases 
power by 2 to 3hp. 
The viscous coupling is made up of three main parts: 

- The driving part powered by the engine and compo- 
sed of shaft (1) integral with plate (2) with annular 
grooves. 

- The driven part composed of hub (6) on which are 
mounted the fan and body (7) also with annular 
grooves. 

- The regulating part composed of thermostatic spring 
(3) controlling valve (4). 

The centre of the device has a reservoir (5) filled with a 
viscous silicone fluid. 

Method of operation 

When the temperature of the air going through the 
radiator reaches a predetermined value, thermostatic 
spring (3) acts on valve (4) which opens orifice a. The 
liquid is driven towards the annular grooves on hub (2) 
and body (7) by centrifugal force. The torque is trans- 
mitted by the internal friction of the very viscous fluid 
and its adhesion to the walls. The fan is thus driven, 
thereby increasing airflow and overall cooling 
efficiency. 



The speed of the fan varies continually over the whole 
regulatory range depending on the temperature. 

When the temperature of the air going through the 
radiator decreases, the spring closes the valve and 
stops the liquid from coming into contact with ;he 
friction area. The fluid gradually returns to reservoir (5) 
via pipe b, the fan is disengaged, leaving only a slight 
residual torque. 





issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ v 



ENGINE - Adaptor plate 




4B01.1 



4 B0 1 Engine adaptor plate 



CONTENTS 



A. 3000 Tractor with 6 cylinder engine 



B. 31 00 Tractor engine 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



4B01.2 



ENGINE - Adaptor plate 




V 



A. 3000 Tractor with 6 cylinder 
engine 

Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Chapter 3 A01. 

2. Remove the engine clutch. Chapter 5 B01 .A. 

3. Remove the starter motor attaching bolts. With- 
draw the starter motor without disconnecting the 
cable. 

Note: Support the starter motor by suspending 
it to avoid its weight damaging the cable. 

4. Remove the flywheel, chapter 5B01 .B. 

5. Remove two attaching bolts from the engine adap- 
tor plate. 

6. Screw two dowel pins into the holes vacated by the 
two bolts (two bolts can be used). 

7. Remove the five bolts and the engine adaptor 
plate. 



8. Remove the locating dowels. 

9. Withdraw the three starter motor attaching studs on 
the engine adaptor plate. 

Reassembly 

10. Clean the flanges between the engine and the 
adaptor plate. 

1 1 . Carry out procedures 8 and 9 in reverse. 

12. Carry out procedures 6 and 7 in reverse. 

13. Fit the seven adaptor plate bolts on the engine. 
Tighten to the torque shown. 

1 4. Carry out procedures 1 to 4 in reverse. 



Tightening torque 

(1) to (7) 39-53 Nm 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V v 



ENGINE - Adaptor plate 




4B01.3 



B. 3100 Tractor engine 



Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Chapter 3 A02. 

2. Remove the engine clutch. Chapter 5 COLA. 

3. Remove the starter motor attaching bolts. Withdraw 
the starter motor without disconnecting the cable. 
Note : Support the starter motor by suspending 
it to avoid its weight damaging the cable. 

4. Remove the flywheel, chapter 5C01.B. 

5. Remove two attaching bolts from the engine adap- 
tor plate. 

6. Screw two dowel pins into the holes vacated by the 
two bolts (two bolts can be used). 

7 . Remove the five bolts and the engine adaptor plate. 

8. Remove the locating dowels. 

9. Withdraw the three starter motor attaching studs on 
the engine adaptor plate. 



Reassembly 

10. Clean the flanges between the engine and the 

adaptor plate. 
1 1 .Carry out procedures 8 and 9 in reverse. 
1 2. Carry out procedures 6 and 7 in reverse. 
13. Fit the seven adaptor plate bolts on the engine. 

Tighten to the torque shown. 

Note: Oo not insert a bolt into hole A. 
14. Carry out procedures 1 to 4 in reverse. 



Tightening torques 

(1)to(6)50-70Nm 
(7) 100-130 Nm 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



01 



www.maskinisten.net 



(. 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5 . GEARBOX 



Contents 



SPEEDSHIFT GEARBOX 



DYNASHIFT GEARBOX 



SA01 


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY 




5A02 


DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY 




5B01 


PUSH-TYPE CLUTCH (3000) 




5C01 


PULL-TYPE CLUTCH (3100) 




5D01 


SELECTOR RAIL AND FORKS 


5D01 


5E01 


INPUT UNIT 




5E02 


SPEEDSHIFT 




5E03 


REVERSE SHUTTLE 




5F01 


A/B RANGE GEARS AND SYNCHROMESH 
MECHANISM 




5G01 


MAINSHAFT 




5H01 


LAYSHAFT 




5101 


OUTPUT SHAFT 




5J01 


CREEPER GEARS 


5J01 


5J02 


SUPER CREEPER GEARS 




5K01 


SELECTOR COVER (4 X 4) 




5K02 


SELECTOR COVER (4 X 2) 




5K03 


ADJUSTING SELECTOR COVER 




5L01 


SPACER 


5L02 


5M01 


16™ GEAR LOCKOUT (3100) 


5M01 
5N01 
5P01 
5Q01 
5R01 
5R02 
5R03 
5S01 
5T01 
5V01 
5X01 



5 D01 SELECTOR RAIL AND FORKS 



5 J01 CREEPER GEARS 



SPACER 

16™ GEAR LOCKOUT (3100) 

DYNASHIFT TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY 

PUSH-TYPE CLUTCH (3000) „ 

PULL-TYPE CLUTCH (3100) 

INPUT UNIT 

DYNASHIFT INPUT UNIT 

REVERSE SHUTTLE 

MAINSHAFT 

LAYSHAFT 

OUTPUT SHAFT 

SELECTOR COVER 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A01.1 



5 A0 1 Transmission assembly 



CONTENTS 



A. General description 



B. Gearbox assembly 



C. Main gearbox 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5A01.2 



Gearbox 



W*? 



A. General description 



The 3000 and 3 1 00 series tractors have a transmi ssi on 
which consists of five main housings : 

- the gearbox assembly, which also serves as a clutch 
housing. 

- the centre housing which includes the differentia! 
assembly, the power take off line and 4 wheel-drive 
clutch. It also holds the side hydraulic covers. 

- the axle housings right and left. 

- the lift cover. 

These five parts are common to the whole series 3000 
and 3100 range. The models fitted with 6 cylinder 
engines have an adapter plate located between the 
engine and gearbox. 

Clutch 

The clutch is a single-plate unit. The mechanism has a 
diaphragm which is hydraulically operated by a piston. 
For the 3000 models, the operating system is pushed 
and for the 3100 models it is pulled. 
A shaft driven by a splined hub connected to the 
engine flywheel passes through the gearbox assembly 
and transmits rotation to the power take-off clutch. The 
power take-off clutch housing drives the hydraulic 
pump via drive gear. 



In reverse, speed is : 

. 7% faster than in forward in range A 

- 7% slower than in forward in range B 

Speeds hift 

In addition to the main box and the reversing assembly, 
by means of a hydraulic device with an epicyclic train 
placed before the reversing gear, operated by a sole- 
noid, two input speeds can be added, taking the 
number of possible speeds to 32. 

Creeper gear housing 

By means of a housing fitted on the output shaft, after 
the main box, a range oi greatly reduced travel speeds 
can be obtained. This housing consists of an epicyclic 
type reduction gear, with a ratio of 4.1, driven 
mechanically, which should be engaged only if the 
main box is in the slow (Tortoise) position. 



B. Gearbox assembly 



Main box 

The main gearbox has eight basic speeds(2x4). It 
consists of a train of four gears to which a set of two 
gears is added so that a slow (Tortoise) range and a fast 
(Hare) range can be obtained. 
All the gears are in constant mesh and the speeds are 
selected by synchro-mesh units, except the Hare/ 
Tortoise range. These eight speeds can be selected 
with a single lever. 

Reverse gear assembly and A/B range 

This consists of an assembly of two sets of gears 
placed in front of the main box; one driving, fitted on a 
hollow shaft, the other driven, fitted on the main box 
countershaft. The two ranges are selected by two 
synchro-mesh units operated by the reversing gear 
lever when it is moved to the neutral position. With this 
layout, the number of speeds can be doubled and 16 
forward and reverse speeds can be obtained. 
With a compound gear cluster located between the 
hollow shaft and the countershaft, the direction of 
rotation of the countershaft can be reversed. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 



www.maskmisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY WITH 4X4 BOX 
(Longitudinal section) 




5A01.3\ 




Pressure lubrication 



Splash lubrication 



4x2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




5A01.3 




■n\\\\\\\^\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'vxvxxv\\\^vv^ 



Ill^ gS sssss^ 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Gearbox 




5A01.5 



C. Main gearbox 



General 

In order, the gearbox housing has the following major 
components: 

- the engine clutch operating device. 

- the input housing enclosing the speedshift (if fitted) 
and the reverse gears. 

- the main gearbox. 

- the creeper gear housing (if fitted). 

We will restrict ourselves to describing only the main 
box, as each major component is covered by an 
individual description in the section dealing with it. 

Construction 

The main gearbox has lour synchro-mesh speeds. 
With a gear fitted free running on the output shaft, to 
which it can be locked by a coupler, the initial four 
speeds can be doubled to obtain the basic eight 
speeds. The mainshaft and layshaft are supported by 
taper roller bearings. The output shaft is fitted in two 
taper roller bearings and one needle roller bearing. All 
the gears are helical and in constant mesh. 
The lubricating oil comes from the front housing and 
passes through an oilway drilled along the centre line 
of the mainshaft and output shaft. Radial oilways direct 
oil to the various different lubrication points of the gears, 
bearings and bushes. 

The top shafts are lubricated by the film of oil circulating 
between the PTO shaft and the layshaft. This film 
lubricates the end taper roller bearings and the needle 
roller bearing (62). Radial oilways in the shaft (54) and 
radial recesses on the driven gear make oil pass 
between all the gears. The contact area between teeth 
of the shaft (54) and the gear (36) is also lubricated by 
a radial hole drilled in the shaft. To ensure correct 
operation according to the forces to which the trans- 
mission is subjected, the bearings are fitted with pre- 
load (in the case of the mainshaft) or with end float (in 
the case of the layshaft). The output shaft can be 
shimmed with either a small amount of play or light 
preload. 



speed driving gear (7) is fitted free-running on a bush 
(8), the 2nd speed driving gear (14) and 3rd speed 
driving gear or 4th speed driving gear (4x2) (18) are 
fitted free running on the shaft direct. The 4th speed 
driving gear or 3rd speed driving gear (4x2) (29) is 
fitted on needle roller bearings (28) and (30). These act 
as axial thrust bearings. The hub (33) of coupler (31 ) is 
solid with the output shaft (44). 
Driven gears (55), (56), (59) and (60) drive the layshaft 
(54) by splines. The teeth of shaft (54) is in constant 
mesh with the Tortoise gear (36). fitted free-running on 
the output shaft. 



Operation 

Low (Tortoise) range 

This speed is engaged by moving one of the couplers 
of the synchro-mesh devices (11) and (23) to link in 
rotation the countershaft (69) with one of the 4 gears 
fitted free-running. Which ever gear is selected, the 
movement is transmitted to the layshaft (54). The 
output shaft (44) is driven by the layshaft machined 
teeth in constant mesh with the free-running gear (36) 
solid with the output shaft by moving the coupler (31 ) of 
hub (33) back. 

High (Hare) range 

This range is selected by moving forward the coupler 
(31) which puts the driving gear (29) and the output 
shaft in direct mesh. 

Therefore, in 4th speed (4x4) and in 3rd speed (4x2), 
the layshaft (54) is non-functional. The other speeds 
are obtained by movement of the couplers of the 
synchro-mesh devices (1 1 ) and (23) as in the Tortoise 
range. Movement is transmitted to the output shaft (44) 
by driven gears (55) and (29). 



Description 

In the 16 speed (4x4) version, the main gearbox drive 

is taken by gear (67) or (76), locked to the mainshaft 

(69) by the action of the synchromesh device (78) (see 

section 5 F01). 

In the case of an 8 speed gearbox (4x2), gear (67) is 

fitted on shaft (69) by means of splines. 

The two hubs of synchro-mesh devices (11) and (23) 

are locked to the mainshaft (69) by splines. The 1st 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V 



Gearbox 




5A01.7 



wll = + 0.25 




16-SPEED (4X4) MAIN GEARBOX 



^ms^^^m 



sv 



A FORWARD B FORWARD A REVERSE B REVERSE 



t_i_t 



I 



"LlJ" 



I 



m mm ■■ 



"L1J" 



r 



V *J2 = +0.04 + 0.12 



wwra 



Position of the synchro-mesh devices. 



C 




J4 = +0,20 + 0,40 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox 




5A01.9 



Synchromesh units {Fig. 1) 



Locking position 

Tne axial displacement oi tne coupler (A) presses the 
synchro brake (B) against the incnon cone of the flange (C) 
via the balls (D) and pressure elements (E). The speed 
difference existing between tne carts to be coupled creates 
a radial rotation limited bv tne pressure elements (E) wruch. 
in turn, cause pressure ot the cnamiered teeth of the synchro 
Drake (B) against the coupler (A), opposing any relative 
displacement of the latter Tne pressure exerted by the 
coupler (A) and the angular staggering of the synchro brake 
(B) create axial pressure between the friction cones of the 
synchro brake (B) and the flange (C). via the chamfers ot the 
teeth, this axial pressure establishing synchronisation dv the 
progressive reduction of the soeea difference of the pans to 
oe coupled. 

Synchronisation having been established, the persisting 
pressure exerted by the couoi£' (A) against tne synenro 
Drake (B) causes the fatter to e.c pack until the teetn ot the 
coupler (A) are in front ot the tcrtn sauces of tne synchro 
Drake (B). At this moment, tne -esistance wmen nas. so tar. 
oeen opposing displacement r the coupler (A) curing 
shifting of tne speed is overcome and the coupler (A) can 
:nen engage noiselessly with tne teeth of the flange (C) of the 
aear to be engaged. The rigtc: connection between the shaft 
and the gear is established ana tne speea is shifted. 
!!. during shifting of the speed, tne two elements come up 
against each other, tooth-to-too;-- the chamfers proviaea on 
tne tooth flanks move the gear to be enganged until each 
tooth is in front of a tooth space 

Neutral position 

Tne coupler (A) is in the mint! 1 ? rcsition Trie oaiis (0) are 
pushed back into tne -V- amo.e oi tne coupler (A) oy the 
pressure springs (F). The gear can turn freeiy on tne snaft. 

Overhaul 

In tne event of removal of tru.- s-.'.cnro-mesh units (11)- (23) 
and (78) or the reversing geai cneck the wear of the brakes 

(B). 

Place the flange (C) on a flat suriace. 

Correctly position the brake (B) :>v turning it through several 

revolutions and applying hanc pressure to it. Using a set of 

gauges, measure dimension X a; several places (Fig. 25. If it 

isless than 0.8 mm. tit a new svncnrobrake(B), after checking 

tne cone. 

If new synchro brakes are being fitted, measure dimension X, 

which must be within the following limits: 

* 1 st/2nd speed synenro (11) = 

■ 3rd/4th speed synchro (23) = 

- A/B speed synenro (78) 

- Reversing gear synchro 



0.9 to 1.5 mm 
0.9 to 1.5 mm 
1 1 to 1.6 mm 
1.4 to 2.1 mm 



Note: the Hare/Tortoise synchro-mesh unit was replaced 
by a coupler from serial number V252037. For tractors 
earlier than this number, refer to workshop manual 
t646640 Ml. 




Fig. 1 




Fig. 2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 

V V 



5A02 Disassembly and reassembly 




Gearbox 5A02.1 



CONTENTS 

General . . . .. . . ._ „ . 2 

A. Gearbox assembly - Removal and preparation 2 

B. Shifter rail mechanism cover - Removal 3 

C. Shifter rail and forks - Disassembly 3 

D. Input shaft housing - Removal 5 

E. Layshaft - Disassembly 6 

F. Creeper gearbox - Removal 7 

G. Output shaft - Disassembly 7 

H. Mainshaft: 4x2 gearbox _ . 8 

J. Mainshaft: 4x4 gearbox 9 

K. Mainshaft: 4x4 gearbox - Reassembly 10 

L. Mainshaft: 4 x 2 gearbox - Reassembly 13 

M. Output shaft - Reassembly _, _ .. 14 

N. Creeper gearbox - Refitment 17 

P. Layshaft - Reassembly 17 

Q. Input shaft housing - Refitment ... 18 

R. Shifter rail and forks - Refitment 20 

S. Selector cover mechanism housing (4x2 and 4x4) 

-Refitment ... 24 

T. Gearbox assembly - Preparation and refitment 26 

U. Service tools . . 26 

4 x 4 gearbox - Key to diagram ..... 31 

4 x 2 gearbox - Key to diagram 33 

Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



** 



5A02.2 



Gearbox 



General 



This section concerns the procedures which require 
the gearbox to be completely disassembled. In these 
cases, the complete gearbox is removed from the 
tractor and placed on a work bench. For those proce- 
dures which can be carried out with the gearbox fitted 
to the tractor, see Sections 5 DO! to 5 M01 . 



. Gearbox assembly - 
Removal and preparation 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 

axle (See 3 B02). 
2 3000 Tractor: 

Place a sling under the gearbox (Fig.1). Split the 
tractor between the gearbox and the engine (See 
3 AOt Procedures 1 1 and 12V Remove the PTO 
shaft (1). Fig. 1). 
3100 Tractor: 

Place a sling under the gearoox (Fig. 1 ). Separate 
the gearoox from the engine (See 3 A02 Procedu- 
res 3, 4. 13 and 14). Remove the PTO shaft (1), 
(Fig.1). 

3. (Fig.2) Remove: 

- the PTO clutch hydraulic feed pipe (1), 

- the engine clutch slave cylinder supply pipe (2). 

- the T-psece (3) and 1 .5 bar valve (4), 

- the 90' oil return pipe connection (5), 

- the Datatronic sensor and its bracket (6) (if 
fitted). 

- the LH cab support (7) 

4. Lay the gearbox on its LH side and lift it on to a 
suitable stand or work bench (Fig, 3). 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A02.3 



B. Selector cover - Removal 

Note: Remove the A/B range (4x4 gearbox) 
feed pipe (1) (1 7 bar) (Fig.4). 

5. Remove the bolts (2). (Fig. 4) 

Note: On gearboxes fitted with a creeper 
range, remove the control cable bracket and 
mark the position of the centring bolt /3\. 

6, Remove the cover (4) and bolt (5). (Fig. 4) 



C. Shifter rail and forks - Removal 

Note: 

1) Gearbox fitted with creeper range. 
Remove the pin (1), the locknut (2), the adjus- 
table setscrew (3). the fork (4) with the sleeve 
(5). (Fig.5) 

2) A mechanical locking device for the Hare/ 
tortoise range cut into production from serial 




Fia. 5 



number P107048. For tractors prior to this number, 
see Workshop Manual 1646640 M1 

7. Remove the plugs (1). the sonngs (2) and locking 
plungers (3) from forks (5) and (6) (Fig. 6) 




Fig. 6 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5A02.4 



Gearbox 




8. Slacken the castellated nut (21) using spanner 
3615334 M01 (Fig. 7) . 

9. Engage 4th gear (4x2 gearbox) or 3rd gear {4 x 
4 gearbox). 

1 . Release the cone (24) on the shifter rail (7) using 

a bronze drift (Fig. 8). 
1 1 . Remove the setscrew (8) 

1 2. Eject the plug (9) forwards by tapping the end of 
the rait (7) (Fig. 9). 

1 3. Remove: . 

-the bearing (15) 

-the shifter rail (7) rearwards 

-1st and 2nd gear fork (5) and 3rd and 4th gear 

fork (6) 
-the lock assembly (25) 

1 4. Disassemble: 

-the castellated nut (21) 

-the latch (22) 

-the tapered bearing (23) 

-the cone (24) 

Remove: 

- the screws (19) 

- the piston (13) 

- the High/Low range fork (20) 

- the bolt and washer assembly (17) and the 
guide (18) 

- the cylinder (10) 

Note: Discard the seals (12) and (14) from 

piston (13) and the seal (1 1) from the cylinder 

(10). 

The A/B fork (4) stays in the housing (4x4 

gearbox). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A02.5 



D. Input shaft housing - Removal 

1 5. Immobilise the laysnaft assembly using tne local- 
ly made-up tool (See Section U) {Fig. 10). 

16. Remove the drain pipe {1) from the clutch slave 
cylinder and the union (2) on the housing (Fig. 11), 

1 7. Place a sling under the housing assembly, taking 
care to avoid damaging the needle roller bearing 

(4) (Fig. 12). 

1 8. Remove the eight 10 mm diam.bolts(3) (Fig. 11). 
Note : It is not necessary to remo ve the selector 

(5) (Fig. 13) in order to remove the housing. 

19. Release and withdraw the housing assembly by 
tilting it to the left (Fig 12). 

Note: (Fig. 13 and 14) Retrieve the locating 
dowel (8). Discard the oil seals (6) and (7). 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5A02.6 



Gearbox 




E. Layshaft - Disassembly 

20. Withdraw the layshaft complete (Fig. 15) . 

21 . Remove the washer (50). See page 32. 

22. Remove the shims [51] See page 32. 

23. Remove the cup (52). 

Disassembly of shaft (54) (Fig.1 6). A new shaft 
fitting was introduced from serial number 
P345012 (version b). Tractors prior to this 
number are fitted with version a. 

24. Withdraw the taper rolier bearings (53) and (63). 
Note: Keep the bearings and cups in matched 
pairs for possible re-use. 

25. Remove the circlip (61). 

26. a) Remove 1st gear (60) and 2nd gear (59). 

b) Remove 1 st gear (60), the shims [58] and 2nd 
gear (59). 

27. a) Remove circlips (58) and (57) (Fig. 16). 
b) Remove spacer (57) 

28. Remove 4th gear (56) (4x2 gearbox) and 3rd 
gear (55) (4x2 gearbox) 

29. Remove 3rd gear (56) (4x4 gearbox) and 4th 
gear (55) (4x4 gearbox). 

30. Drift out the needie roller bearing (62) (Fig. 1 7) and 
discard it. 




Fig. 16 





Fig. 17 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V 



Gearbox 




5A02.7 



F. Creeper gearbox 
(Fig.18) 



Removal 



31 . Remove the bolts (1). 

32. Remove the creeper gearbox assembly (2). 
Note: The locating dowels (3) are held in the 
gearbox. 



G. Output shaft - Disassembly 

Note: If the tractor is fitted with a creeper gearbox, 
see above. 

33. Remove ihe 3 bolts (41) (see page 32), 

34. Remove the lock plate (46). 

35. Remove the bearing cuo (48). 

Note: Keep the bearings and cups in pairs for 
possible re-use. 

36. Remove the circlip (45). 

37. Remove the spacer /43\ and shims [42]. 

38. Remove the taper roller bearing (40). 

Note: Where shims have had to be inserted 
between bearings, remove the shim 
adjuster(s) [47] 

39. Remove the roller bearing (39). 

40. Remove the shims [38], 

Note: On all types, the High/Low range syn- 
chromesh has been replaced by a coupler 
from serial number V252037. For tractors prior 
to this number see Workshop Manual 1646640 
M1. 

4 1 . Engage the High/Low range coupler (31 ) (Fig . 1 9) 
on tne Low range pinion (36) 

42. Withdraw the shaft (44) rearwards. 

43. Remove the circlip (34) using tool MF 460 and 
discard it (Fig. 19 and 20). 

44. Remove the shaft. 

45. Through the inspection panel in the selector rail 
mecnanism cover, withdraw: the hub (33) and its 
couoter, the gear (29) (3rd gear 4x2 gearbox and 
4th gear 4x4 gearbox), the synchromesh cup 
(25). tne two thrust washers (32)-(27) and the Low 
range gear (36) 

Note: Keep the synchro cup (25) with the 
pinion (29) for possible re-use. 

46. Remove the cup (37). 

47. Remove the circisp (49). 

48. Remove the circlip (19). the washer (22) and the 
neecle roller bearsng (24) 




Fio. 18 




Ftg. 19 




^^•?-- 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5A02.8 



Gearbox 



H. Matnshaft 
Disassembly 



4x2 gearbox 



49 Remove the circlip (26). 

50 Remove 3rd and 4th gear synchromesh (23). 
Mark the direction oi tilting, 

5 1 Remove She syncnromesh cup (21) 

52 Remove the synchromesh cone (20) and the gear 
(18) 

Note: Retain the synchromesh cup and cone 

as a pair for possible re-use. 
53. Position MF 458 locking tool (Fig. 21) and the 

locally manufactured retainer sleeve lor the 

mamshaft (69) (Fig. 22) (See Section U) 
54 Remove the oil feed pipe (71) and spring (72). 
55, Unlock the nut (68) and slacken it using tool 

3376805 Ml (Fig. 23). 

56 Remove the input shaft gear (67) and cone (1). 

57 Remove tne wasner (6). 

58 Remove tool MF 458 and the sleeve (Fig. 21 and 
22) 

59 Withdraw tne shafi from ihe housing rearwards 
regaining 1st and 2nd gear train in place. 

60 From inside the housing remove, in the following 
order, 2nd gear (14). cone (13). 2nd gear 
svnchromesh cup (12). 1 st and 2nd synchromesh 
(1 1 ). cone (9). synchromesh cup (1 0). 1 st gear (7) 
and its bush (8). 

6 1 Withdraw the bearing cups (16) and (2). 

Note: Retain the cups and cones as a pair for 
possible re-use. 

62 Remove the shims [3]. the shim /4\ and circlips 
(15) and (5). 

Note: Make a note of the thickness of the shims 
for use on the mainshaft during reassembly. 
63. Remove the bearing cone (17) and circlip (70) 
irom the shaft. 




Fig. 23 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A02.9 



J. Mainshaft 
Disassembly 



4x4 gearbox 



64. Carry out procedures 49 to 54 in Section H. 

65. Remove the lock from the nut (68) and slacken the 
nut using spanner MF 456(Fig.24) 

Note: A new A/B range synchromesh assem- 
bly fitted with sintered cone rings was introdu- 
ced from the following tractor serial numbers: 

- 40 kph tractors: P089036 

- 30 kph tractors: P297030 

66. Remove She spur washer /73V B gear (76) with the 
needle roller hearing (75) and bush (74) 

67. Slacken the two screws (1 ) attach ing tne oads (2) 
to the A/B fork (3) (Fig. 25). 

Remove the A/B synchromesh (78) ana tne cups 
(77) and (80) 

Note: Take care not to remove the synchro- 
mesh hub sliding block. 

68. Move the A gear (67) slightly ton.varcs ic disen- 
gage the fork 

69. Remove the iork, 

70. Withdraw the A gear (67) with the double needle 
roller bearing (79) and the bush /81\. 

7 1 . Remove the sieeve (82) and the bearing cone (1 ). 

72. Carry out procedures 57 to 59. 

73. Remove the 1st and 2nd gear tram complete 
(Fig. 26). 

74.Carrv out tr" csdures 61 to 62 




no. 24 




Fiq. 25 




ig-26 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5A02.10 



Gearbox 



K. Mainshaft 
Reassembly 



4x4 gearbox 



75. The gearbox housing must be clean and free from 
swarf. 

76. Mating laces must be scraped clean, 

77. Use a jet of compressed air to check that a!i the 
hydraulic oiiways in the gearbox and shafts are 
free of obstructions. 

78. If the gearbox is fitted with Speedshift. fit the 
solenoid valve (1 ) and tighten to a torque of 1 8-20 
Nm (Fig.27). 

79. Fit the T-piece (2) tor the A/B feed pipe (Fig.27). 

80. Examine all parts for wear and discard any v.nich 
are faulty, 

81. Before assembling lightly lubricate the cones, 
cups, bearing bores, bushes, gaskets anc nee- 
dle roller bearings. 

82. Using a press, fit the bearing cone (17) on to ihe 
shaft (69). 

83.Fit the circtip {70). 

84. Fit the circlips (5) and (15). 

85. Refit the shim /4\. 

Note: (Fig.28) Position the shim !4\ on the 
circlip (5) side. 

86. Reduce the thickness of the shims [3] v. nose 
measurement was noted on disassembly (Sec- 
tion H Operation 62) by approximately 0.3 mm to 
obtain a shaft end ptay of 0.10 to 0.15 maximum 
to obtain an exact fit, 

87. Fit the shims [3] and cups (2) and (16). 

88. Assemble 1st gear (7) and its bush (8). the lock 
plate{9). the 1st gear synchromesh cup (10). the 
1 st and 2nd gear syncnromesh (11). the 2nc gear 
synchromesh cup (1 2). ihe cone (13) and the 2nd 
gear (14) 

89. Refit the 1 st and 2nd gear train assembly between 
the two partitions. 

90. Insert the shaft through the rear of the housing 
retaining the synchromesh/gear assembly 
(Fig.29). 

Note: Check that the bush (8) is correctly 
positioned in the gear (7). 




Fio. 27 




Fig. 28 




Issue 1 



Novemoer 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A02. 1 1 



91 . Fit the locking tool MF 458 and the locally made 
retaining sleeve (Fig. 30 anc 3 1 ). 

92. Fit the washer (6) 

93. Using a press, fit the bearing cone (1) on the 
sleeve (82). 

94. Fir the sleeve on the shaft. 

Note: To shim using formula Pi, do not fit the 
A/8 gear train (Fig.32). 

95. Fit the bush /81V the A/B synchromesh (78). the 
bush (74) and the spur wasner /73\ on the shaft. 

96. Fit nut (68) and tighten to a torque of 80-100 Nm 
using tool MF 456 (Fig.32). 

Method of shimming 

97. Carry out Procedures 98 to 108 to obtain a pre- 
load (Fig. 33.) of P1= minus 0.14mm to minus 

0.20mm (0.0055in to 0.00&in) 
98. Remove toot MF 458 and ir>s sleeve (Fig. 30 and 
31). 




Fia. 30 






P1 =-0.14-0.20, 



Fia. 33 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




5A02. 12 



3000/ 31 00 SERIES TRACTORS 

Gearbox 




99. Position a dial gauge pointer at the end ot the shaft 
(Fig.34) . 

1 00. From the front of the housing, while pulling on the 
shaft, turn it firs! to the right then to the left so that 
the cones bed properly into the cups. 

101. Zero the dial gauge. 

1 02. Repeat operation 1 00 by pushing on the shaft. 

1 03. On the basis of the dial gauge reading; select the 
shim thickness required to obtain P1 . 

104. Fit tool MF 458 and the locally made-up sleeve 
(Fig.30and31). 

1 05. Reverse procedures 95 and 96. 

1 06. Remove the sleeve (82) and its cone (1). 
107.Withdrawthecup (2). 

108. Position the adjusting shims [3] which were se- 
lected in operation 103. 

Note: Position the shim /4\ on the circlip (5) 
side (Fig.28) . 

109.Fitthecup. 

1 10. Fit the sleeve. 

111. Slide the A gear (67) on to the shaft with the bush 
/81\ (stepped side facing the synchromesh) and 
the double needle roller bearing (79) inserting the 
A/B fork into the housing (Fig.35). 

Note: Use the shifter rail to retain the fork 
(Fig.36). 

11 2. Locate the synchromesh cup (80) and A/B 
synchromesh (78). 

1 1 3. Position the pads (1) and (2) for the lork (3). coat 
the screws (4) and (5) with Loctite 24 1 and tighten 
them by hand (Fig.37 and 38). 

Note: Check that the pads move freely in the 
synchromesh sliding coupling. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox 




5A02.13 



1 14. Slide the B gear (76) on to the shaft with the cup 
(77), the bush (74) and the needle roller bearing 
(75). 

Note: Rotate gear A (67) and B (76) from right 
to left to ensure that the synchromesh cups 
are correctly positioned (80) (77). 

1 1 5. Fit the spur wasner /73\. 

Note: The oil grooves should face the B gear. 

1 16. Using a solvent degrease the shaft thread. 

11 7. Lightly coat the nut (68) with Loctite 241 then 
tighten to a torque of 80-100 Nm. 

1 1 8. Lock the nut by flattening the collar with a suitable 
drift punch (Fig. 39). 

119. Insert the spring (72) and the oil Seed pipe (71 ) into 
the shaft. 

1 20. Remove too! MF 458 and the retaining sleeve 
(Fig. 30 and 31). 

1 21 . Fit the gear (18) and the synchromesh lock plate 
(20). the brake (21) and 3rd and 4;h gear 
synchromesh (23). 

122-Fit the circlip (26). 

Note: Check that the synchromesh faces the 
correct way. 

123. Manually check: 

a) gear end play 

b) shaft and gear train rotation 

124. Check that 1st and 2nd gear and A/B gear syn- 
chromesh function correctly. 



L. Mainshaft -4x2 gearbox - 
Reassembly 

1 25. Carry out procedures 75 to 78 and 80 to 87. 

1 26. Assemble the following in the order shown in the 
housing: 1st speed gear (7) and its bush (8). the 
cone (9). 1st gear synchromesh cup (10). 1st and 
2nd gear synchro (11). 2nd gear synchro cup 
(12). cone (13) and 2nd gear (14). 

1 27. Carry out procedures 90 to 92. 

1 28. Press the bearing cone (1 ) on to the gear (67). 

1 29. Fit the gear(67) on to the shaft (69). 

130. Fit the nut (68) using special tool 3376805 M1. 
Tighten to a torque of 80-100 Nm (Fig. 40). 




Fio. 38 




Ftg. 39 



'// /' 



0/ 
I 



rd 



I iu Pa|I!' 




Fig. 40 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5A02.14 



Gearbox 




/ V 



131. Carry out procedures 97 to 1 03. 

132. Fit tool MF 458 and the retaining sleeve (Fig. 30 
and 31). 

1 33. Remove the lock from the nut. 

1 34. Remove the gear. 

135. Carry out procedures 107 to 109. 

136. Refit the gear. 

137. Carry out procedures 116 to 123. 

138. Check that 1st and 2nd gear synchromesh func- 
tions correctly. 



M. Output shaft - Reassembly 

1 39. Fit the circlip (49) and the Pearing cup (37). 
Note: The High/Low range synchromesh has 
been replaced by a coupler from serial no. 
V252037. 

For tractors prior to this number see Work- 
shop Service Manual 1646640 Ml. 

140 Refit the needle roller bearing (24), washer (22) 
and circiip (19) on to the shaft (44). Insert the shaft 
into the housing without the gears. 

141 .Slide the bearing cones (39) and (40) on to the 

shaft. 

J3 shimming 

142. The aim of this procedure is to prepare J3 shim- 
ming (Fig.4l). Hold the cones (39) and (40) 
against the step in the shaft (44) using hand 
pressure. 

Take up the clearance Y between the rear of cone 
(40) and the groove for the circlip (45) with shim 
adjuster [42] and spacer /43\. Select a new circlip 
of a size that fits snugly into the groove (Fig, 42). 

143.Shim to obtain (Fig.43): 

J3 = minus 0.05 to plus 0.05 
The aim of this procedure is to take up the play 
between the cones (39) and (40) and the cups 
(37) and (48) while keeping the above-mentioned 
shimming tolerance. 

144. Fit the circlip (45). 

Note: Position the spacer on the circlip side. 

1 45. Fit the cup (48) ana the lock plate (46). 

1 46. Tighten the bolts (41 ) to a torque of 27-32 Nm. 




Fig. 41 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A02.15 



147. Position the dial gauge pointer a! the end of the 
shall (44) (Fig.44). 

Wore: For gearboxes fitted with the creeper 
range, use the gearbox plate (Fig.45) instead 
of the lock plate. Tighten the bolts to a torque 
of 34-52 Nm. 

1 48. Push on the shait and turn it to right and left so that 
the cones bed correctly into the cups. 

1 49. Zero the dial gauge. 

150. Carry out procedure 148 but pull on the shaft. 

1 5 1 . IS end play exceeds 0.05 mm select the number of 
shims X [47] to obtain: 

J3 = minus 0.05 to plus 0.05 
Important: The shim(s) X [47] selected for J3 
should be fitted between the cones for the 
following shimming procedures. 

J4 shimming 

1 52. Remove the circhp (45). 

1 53. Remove the shim /43\ and the shim adjusters [42] . 

154. Measure the thickness Y of all Ihe shims [42] and 
/43\ (this measurement will be useful for J5 shim- 
ming). 

1 55. Remove the bolts (41) and the lock plate (46). 

1 56. Remove the cup (48). the cones (40) and (39) and 
the shaft (44). 

157. Assemble in the housing : the Low range gear 
(36). the coupler (31). the hub (33). the thrust 
washer (32). tne 4 / ~ gearbox 4th gear/4 x 2 
gearoox 3rd gear (29) with its combined needle 
roller bearings (30) and (28), the thrust washer 
(27) and the synchromesh cup (25). 

Note: If the bush (35) is worn, replace the gear 

assembly (because the bush is bored out after 

it has been fitted). 

If the combined bearings (30) and (28) are 

worn, replace the gear assembly (it is factory 

fitted). 

158. Engage the input shaft (44) retaining the gear 
train assembly (Fig. 46) . 

159. Gently pull the shaft rearwards to expose the 
circlip (34) groove. 





t-ig. 4- 




Fig. 46 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5A02.16 



Gearbox 




160. Fit the circlip (34) using tool MF 459 (Fig. 47). 
Note: Check that the circlip is correctly fitted. 

161 . Slide the following on to the shaft: the cone (39). 
the shim(s) X [47] selected in operation 15 1. the 
cone (40) and the cup (48). 

162. Fit the lock plate (46). Tighten the bolts (41) to a 
torque of 27-32 Nm. 

1 63. Fit shims to obtain (Fig. 48) : 
J4 = plus 0.20 to plus 0.40 
This shimming procedure produces end play on 
the gear (29) (4th Low 4x4 gearbox) (3rd Low 4 
x 2 gearbox). 

164. Carry out procedures 147 to 150. 

165. On the basis of the reading obtained on the diai 
gauge select the thickness of shims Z [38] to 
obtain J4. 

166. Remove the bolts (41) and the lock plate (46). 

1 67. Remove the cup (48). 

1 68. Withdraw the cones (40) and (39) and the shimi s ) 
X[47] 

1 69. Slide the following on to the shaft: the shims Z [38] . 
the cone (39), the shim(s) X [47] and the cone 
(40). 

J5 shimming 

170.CFig.49) Shim to obtain: 
J5 = Zero play 

The aim of this shimming procedure is to lock the 
cones (40) and (39) on to the shaft (44) 

171. From the thickness of shims Y [42] /43\. selected 
in operation 154, deduct the thickness of shims Z 
[38] and X [47] to obtain: 

J5 = Y - (Z+X). 

172. Carry out procedures 145 and 146, 

173. Slide the number of shims selected in operation 
171 on to the shaft. 

174. Fit the circlip (45). 

Note: Position the shim /43\ on the circlip side. 
The circlip must be a snug fit in its groove. Check 
that it is correctly positioned. 
Note: Refit the creeper gearbox (optional fit). 
See Section N. 

1 75. Check the shaft and gear train rotation manually. 

176. Check that the 3rd and 4th speed synchromesh 
and the High/Low range coupler operate normal- 
ly. 





Fig. 49 | 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox 




5A02.17 



N. Creeper Gearbox - Refitment 

(Fig.50) 

1 77. Position the lock oiate (1 ) and the ring gear (2) on 
the housing. 

178. Attach the friction washers (3) and (4) to the 
planetary carrier (5) using -Amber Technical" 
grease. 

179. Slide the pinion carrier on to the output shaft. 

1 80. Position the cover plate (6). 

181. Fit the bolts (7) and tighten to a torque of 34-52 
Nm. 



P. Layshaft - Reassembly 

A new designed shaft was introduced from serial 
no. P345012 (version b). Tractors prior to this are 
built using version a. 

182. Fit the needie roller bearing (62) against the 
shoulder on the snaft (54) using a press (Fig, 51 ). 
Note: Check that the needle roller bearings 
turn freely in the cage. 

1 83. a) Carry out procedures 25 to 29 in reverse order. 
Note: Ensure that the circlips fit easily into 
their grooves. 

The gap J1 is calculated according to machi- 
ning tolerances (Fig.52). 
b) Carry out procedures 28 and 29 in reverse. 
Slide the spacer (57) on to the shaft. 
Fit the 2nd gear (59). the 1st gear (60) and the 
circiip (61). 

Using a set of shims, measure the space between 
the 1st gear (60) and the 2nd gear (59). On the 
basis of the measurement, select a thickness of 
shims to obtain (Fig.52): 
J1 = to plus 0.25 

Remove the circiip (61 ) and the gear (60). 
Slide the shims already selected on to the shaft. 
Fit the gear and the circiip. 
Note: Ensure that the circiip is correctly fitted. 




Fig. 52 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5A02.18 



Gearbox 



1 84. Using a press, fit the bearing cones (63) and (53) 

holding the assembly in a suitable jig (Fig. 53). 
185. Carry out procedures 23 and 20 in reverse. 



Q. Input shaft housing - Refitment 

186. Carry out procedures 15 and 17. 

187. Clean the mating face. 

1 88. Check that the cup (1 ) and the «0» ring (2) are 
fitted (Fig.54). 

189.(Fig.55) Fit the -0» rings (3) and the locating 

dowel (4) in the housing. 
190. {Fig. 56) Offer up She input shaft housing 

assembly (66) into the housing by tilting ft to the 

left then tilting it to the right to engage the reverser 

gear train into the A/B gear train. 

191. At the same time, check through the selector 
cover that the reverse shuttle selector (5) (Fig. 54) 
is not in contact with the housing partition and thai 
the layshaft cone (63) engages in the cup (64) 
(Fig.56) 

192. Position the housing assembly over the locating 
dowel. 

1 93. Fit the bolts and tighten to a torque of 45-60 Nm. 
Remove the retaining tool. 

194. Carry out procedure 16 in reverse. 

195. (Fig. 57) Shirn to obtain: 

J2 = plus 0.04 to plus 0.12 

1 96. (Fig .59) Fit the locally made-up tool (see Section 
U) into the. layshaft. 

1 97. Lightly compress the spring by tightening the nut 
on the tool so that the cones seat correctly in the 
cups. 

198. Rotate the Shaft several times. 

199. Measure the space X using a depth gauge bet- 
ween face A of the cup (52) and face B of the 
housing (Fig. 58). 

200. Measure the thickness Y of the washer (50). 

201 .Calculate the difference between X and Y. 

202. Determine the thickness of shims required to 
obtain a play of plus 0.04 to plus 0.12. 

203. Remove the compression tool. 

204. Position the shims [51] selected in procedure 
202. 

205. Press the washer into the housing. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox 




5A02.19 



Gearbox laid on its LH side 



AB- 




Fig. 56 





i. 



tmmm 



11 




Fig. 58 




' <>' v.—.<y-^ '.■■■a ; <■.■,. vv.vvavv/vA- ; ■■■■■■■■V.v.v.-.v.vv^.vXv.v.tvv.'.'.v 



Fig. 59 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




•/ v 



5A02.20 



Gearbox 



Shifter rail and forks 
Reassembly (Fig.60) 



206. Check that the hydraulic ports of the High/Low 
cylinder (10) are unobstructed. 

207. Fit the cylinder (10) together with the «0» ring {11} 
in the housing. 

208. Position the High/Low fork (20) in the coupler. 

209. Fit the seals (12) and (14) on the piston (13) then 
insert it into the cylinder bore. 

Note: The setscrew holes should face the 
tapped holes in the fork. Immobilise the fork 
with a setscrew (19). 

2 10. Clean and assemble the mechanical lock (22), 
the tapered bearing (23), the cone (24) and cas- 
tellated nut (21). 



21 1. Fit the 3rd and 4th speed gear forks (6). 1st and 
2nd gears (5) and the lock assembly (25). 

21 2. Insert the selector rail (7) through the rear of the 
housing and slide it into the piston, the Jock 
assembly and the forks. 

Note: For the 4x4 gearbox, do not forget the At 
B fork (4). 

213. Fit the bearing (15) and tighten the bolts (16) to a 
torque of 27-32 Nm. 

214. Clean the setscrew (8) with solvent, coat with 
Loctite 542 and tighten to a torque of 28^43 Nm. 




issue 1 



NovemDer 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A02.21 



21 5. Clean the insert (9), coat with Loctite 542 and 

press it in ievei with the housing. 
216. Fit the locking plungers (3), the springs (2) and 

tighten the plugs (1) to a torque of 50-70 Nm. 

Note: Gearbox fitted with creeper gears 

(Fig.61). 

Fit the sleeve (5), the fork (4) and the pin (1). 

Position the fork and the locking plunger (3) on 

the flat of the shifter rail (6) (between the two 

locking notches). Tighten the locking peg to 

compress the ball. 

Slacken the screw a quarter turn. 

Clean the nut (2) with solvent and coat with 

Loctite 241. 

Tighten to a torque of 15-20 Nm. 

Check that the fork is correctly locked. 
217 Setting the High/Low range fork. 

Principle: Positioning of the selector fork (20) on 

the rail is made possible by the different centre to 

centre distances of the tapped holes Y and of the 

notches Z on the piston (13). 

The fork's position is altered by turning either the 

front screw or the rear screw as necessary 

(Fig.62). 

2 18. Position the control piston (13) and the coupler 
(31) in the High range. 

2 19. Keep the coupler in contact with the high range 
gear (29) (Fig, 63) (3rd gear on the 4 x 2 gearbox 
- 4th gear on the <i x 4 box). 




Fig.61 




Fig. 62 




** 



19 



' i ■' ■ - j Hff%- 




Posmon 
High Range 
(Harei 



Fig. 63 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 / 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5A02.22 



Gearbox 




220. Adjust the position of the fork (20) by turning the 
two adjusting screws (19) after cleaning them 
with a solvent and lightly coating them with Loctiie 
221 to obtain a play of J1 s 0.3 mm between the 
rear face of the plate and the coupier (Figs. 63 & 
64). 

Note: Use the locally made-up tool to carry out 
the adjustment (see Section U). 

221. Position the control piston (13) and the coupler 
(31) in Low range. 

222. Check that there is a play of J2 = 0.3 minimum 
(value obtained by J1 adjustment) between the 
plate and the coupler with the latter in contact with 
the Low range gear (36) (Fig. 65), 

Tighten the screws to a torque of 35 Nm without 
changing the adjustment. 
Note: In Low range position, if the face X of the 
fork (20) plate is in contact with the coupler 
(Fig.65) increase the play J1. 

223. Move the fork into the Low range position. 
224.Siightly slacken the castellated nut (21). 

Lightly coat the thread of the cone (24) with 

Loctite 270. 
225. Wove the forks into the neutral position. 
226. Divide the J3 and J4 play (minimum 0.3 mm) 

equally so that the mechanical lock (22) moves 

freely (Figs. 66 & 67). 




i£eS 



. ■ ^ ^ 




(Figure determined by J1 aaiustment) 



ig. 65 

















(£) 


1 




1 , 


^vy/i 


9>i 


\ 










1 


\ 








i 


\ 

J 




J 


f 


Ǥ^\ ls~* 


-T 


^ ^24^1 






1 1 
1 1 

1 1 


lini 


-^T)®) 




J3 = 


3rr 




J 4 = 0.3 mint 










Fig. 66 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V \ 




Gearbox 



5A02.23 



227. Tighten the castellated nut (21) to a torque of 
50 Nm using spanner 3615334 M01 and a 
spring balance (Fig. 68). 

228. Coat the inner face of the slider (18) with Loctite 
648 and the bolt (17) with Loctite 241. Fit the 
washer and the bolt. 

229. Equalize the J5 and J6 clearances (minimum 
0.3 mm} between the slider and the lock in the 
High and Low range positions (Figs. 63. 65. 69 
and 70V 

230. Tighten the bolt to a torque of 27-32 Nm. 

231 . Check the operation of the High/Low range and of 
the lock. 

232. Check the operation of the gears and of the A/B 
range. 

Reverse shuttle selector - Adjustment 

(Fig.71) 

233. Move the selector (1) into neutral. 

Fit and tighten service tool 3582434 MOt with two 
centring bolts fitted with spacers. 

234. Coat the setscrews (2) with Loctite 221 . 

235. Position face X of the reverse shuttle selector in 
contact with the service tool using the screws (2). 
Note: See procedure 217 for the principle of 
adjustment. 

236. Tighten the screws to a torque of 35 Nm. 

237. Remove the tool. 





g.69 





!Q. 7* 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5A02.24 



Gearbox 




S. Selector cover - Refitment 



4x2 Gearbox 

238. Clean the mating face of the cover (56). 
239- Move the reverse shuttle selector into neutral. 

240. Engage 1s) gear. 

24 1 . Coat the mating face of the gearbox housing with 
a gasket sealant (Loctite 510 Master Joint or 
equivalent). 

Note: Remember to position the bolt (1) on the 
housing (Fig.72). 

242. Turn the two cover levers to the left, keeping them 
parallel. 

243. Lay the cover on the gearbox ensuring that the 
levers are correctly positioned in the selectors 
(Rg.73l. 

244. Carry out procedure 5 in reverse. 
Note: Tightening torque 50-70 Nm. 

245. Check: 

- the movement of all the gears and the position oi 
the High/Low (Hare/Tortoise) range. 

- the operation of the reverse shuttle. 

4x4 Gearbox 

246. Clean the mating face of the cover (57). 

On the gearbox: 

247. Check that the reverse shuttle selector is in neu- 
tral and the A/B fork in position B (forwards). 

24S. Engage 1st gear. 

On the cover: 

249. Remove the pressure valve (58) and the plunaer 
/59\ (Fig. 74). 

250. Lock the control shaft (53) in position B with lugs 
(66) and (54) lined up (Fig. 76) using tool 361 5053 
M01 (Fig. 74) (tighten but not fully). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox 




5A02.25 



251. Move the lug /61\ of the A/B fork into posilion B 

(forwards) (Fig. 75). 
252. Move the gear lever to the left (into 1st) (36) 

(Fig. 76). 

253. Carry out procedure 241. 

254. Assemble the cover on the gearbox by engaging 
the lugs (54) and (66) in the reverse shuttle 
selector and the lug /61\ into the A/B fork, then 
engage the lug (36) into the 1 st and 2nd gear fork 
and the mechanical lock (Fig. 76). 

255. Position the cover. 

256. Fit the bolts and tighten to a torque of 50-70 Nm. 
Remove too! 3615053 M01. 

Note: For a gearbox fitted with creeper gears, 
fit the cable bracket (1) (Fig.77) 
To correctly centre the cover, first tighten bolt 
/3\ (Fig.77). Carry out a manual check, using 
the levers, that the lugs have been correctly 
fitted into the selectors. 

257. Install the plunger /59\ and the pressure valve (58) 
and tighten to a torque of 18-20 Nm. 

258. Check: 

• the free movement of all gears 
- the High/Low range positions 

259. Adjust the A/B range. See Section 5 K03. 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5A02.26 



Gearbox 



T. Gearbox - Preparation 
and Refitment 

260. Reverse procedures 3 and 4. section A. 
261 3000 Tractor 

Refit the gearbox to "he engine ( Section 3 A01) 
3100 Tractor 

Refit the gearbox io me engine (Section 3 A02) 

262. Refit the gearbox to ine rear axle housing iSee 
Section 3 B02). 



U. Service Tools 



1. Toots to be made up locally 



k*- 



/ 
/ 



185 



193 



ZZ3 



-? 




Mainshaft retaining tool 



Issue l 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox 



5A02.27 



circular o 6 




Layshaft retaining toot 



www.maskinisten.net 




5A02.28 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 





Feeler gauge 



Washers MF 3385963 M01 
{retrieved on assembly tool-coupling) 



Washer MF 338331 1 3 M2 \o 
tool 



Washer LL 12U 
©int. : 12.5 
G ext. : 40 
1h. : 2.5 



Nut HM10 




Welrjmo Oeaa 



Washer MF 33831 1 3 M2 
to tool 



Layshatt retaining tool 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V 



Gearbox 




5A02.29 



2. Tools available on the M.F. network 



Mainshaft nut socket 
(Gearbox 4x4) 




Mainshaft retaining tool 



Snap ring replacer 



MF456 



Snap ring remover 




MF458 




MF459 




Mainshaft nut socket 
(gearbox 4x2) 



MF460 




3376805 M1 



Reverse shuttle setting gauge 




3582434 M1 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox 




5A02.31 



4x4 Gearbox - Key to illustration 



(1) Bearing cone 






(2) Bearing cup 


(44) Output shaft 


[3] Shims 


(45) Circlip 


/4\ Spacer 


(46) Lock plate 


(5) Circlip 


[47] Shims 


(6) Washer 


(48) Bearing cup 


(7) 1st drive gear 


(49) Circlip 


(8) Bush 


(50) Washer 


(9) 1st gear synchro cone 


[51] Shims 


(10) 1st gear synchro cup 


(52) Bearing cup 


(11) 1st and 2nd gear synchro 


(53) Bearing cone 


(12) 2nd gear synchro cup 


(54) Layshaft 


(13) 2nd gear synchro cone 


(55) 4th driven gear 


(14) 2nd drive gear 


(56) 3rd driven gear 


(15) Circlip 


Version a 


Version b 


(16) Bearing cup 


(57) Circiip 


Spacer 


(17) Searing cone 


(58) Circlip 


- 


(18) 3rd drive gear 


[58] - 


Shim 


(19) Circlip 


(59) 2nd driven gear 


(20) 3rd gear synchro cone 


(60) 1st driven gear 


(21) 3rd gear synchro cup 


(61) Circlip 


(22) Washer 


(62) Needle roller bearing 


(23) 3rd and 4th gear synchro 


(63) Bearing cone 


(24) Needle roller bearing 


(64) Bearing cup 


(25) 4th gear synchro cup 


(65) Gearbox housing 


(26) Circlip 


(66) Input shaft housing assembly 


(27) Thrust washer 


(67) A range gear 


(28) Combined bearing 


(68) Nut 


(29) 4th gear drive pinion (High range) 


(69) Mainshaft 


(30) Combined bearing 


(70) Circlip 


(31) Coupler 


(71) Oil feed pipe 


(32) Thrust washer 


(72) Spring 


(33) Coupler hub 


/73\ Spur washer 


(34) Circlip 


(74) Bush 


(35) Bush 


(75) Needle roller bearing 


(36) Gear (Low range) 


(76) B range gear 


(37) Bearing cup 


(77) B range synchro cup 


{38] Shims 


(78) A/B synchro 


(39) Bearing cone 


(79) Needle roller bearing 


(40) Bearing cone 


(80) A range synchro cup 


(41) Bolt 


/81\ Bush 


[42] Shims 


(82) Sleeve 


/43\ Spacer 







Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




5A02.31 



Version b 




— www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskmisten.net 



V 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox 




5A02.3C 



4x2 Gearbox - Key to illustration 


(1) Bearing cone 


[38] Shims 


(2) Bearing cup 


(39) Bearing cone 


[3] Shims 


(40) Bearing cone 


/4\ Spacer 


(41) Bolt 


(5) Circlip 


[42] Shims 


(6) Washer 


/43\ Spacer 


(7) 1st drive gear 


(44) Output shaft 


(8) Bush 


(45) Circlip 


(9) 1st gear synchro cone 


(46) Lock plate 


(10) 1st gear synchro cup 


[47] Shims 


(11) 1st and 2nd gear synchro 


(48) Bearing cup 


(12) 2nd gear synchro cup 


(49) Circlip 


(13) 2nd gear synchro cone 


(50) Washer 


(14) 2nd drive gear 


[51] Shims . 


(15) Circlip 


(52) Bearing cup ' 


(16) Bearing cup 


(53) Bearing cone 


(17) Bearing cone 


(54) Layshaft 


(18) 4th drive gear 


(55) 3rd driven gear 


(19) Circlip 


(56) 4th driven gear 


(20) 4th gear synchro cone 


Version a 


Version b 


(21) 4th gear synchro cup 


(57) Circlip 


Spacer 


(22) Washer 


(58) Circlip 


- 


(23) 3rd and 4th gear synchro 


[58] - 


Shim 


(24) Needle roller bearing 


(59) 2nd driven gear 


(25) 3rd gear synchro cup 


(60) 1st driven gear 


(26) Circlip 


(61) Circlip 


(27) Thrus; washer 


(62) Needle rollei bearing 


(28) Combined bearing 


(63) Bearing cone 


(29) 3rd gear drive pinion (High range) 


(64) Bearing cup 


(30) Combined bearing 


(65) Gearbox housing 


(31) Coupler 


(66) Input shaft housing assembly 


(32) Thrust washer 


(67) Input gear 


(33) Coupier hub 


(6b) Nut 


(34) Circlip 


(69) Mainshaft 


(35) Bush 


(70) Circlip 


(36) Gear (Low range) 


(71) Oil feed pipe 


(37) Bearing cup 


(72) Spring 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




5A02.33 




www.maskinisten.net 



v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5B01.1 



5 B0 1 Push-type Clutch (3000) 



CONTENTS 



General 



Operation 



A. Clutch assembly 



B. Engine flywheel 



C. Ring gear replacement 



D. Clutch release bearing assembly 



E. Clutch hydraulic slave cylinder assembly 



F. Slave cylinder seal replacement. 



G. Removing air from the system 



K. Checking piston travel in slave cylinder. 



I. Clutch pedal adjustment 



J. Service tools 



11 
11 
11 
12 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5B01.2 



Gearbox - Clutch 



V V 



General 



Operation 



Description 

This is a diaphragm push-type clutch. The master 
cylinder is supplied by the low pressure hydraulic 
system Drive to the gearbox is through the disc (6) 
which engages with the spiined gearbox input shatt. 

Construction 

The slave cylinder (1 1 ) and guide (17) are fitted on the 
iront face of the input shaft housing. The release bea- 
ring carrier (9) moves between the guide (17) and the 
cylinder {1 1 ). "Composite" seals /1 4\ and /14A\ seal the 
release bearing earner and the slave cylinder. Seals 
/15\. /15A\ and /16\ seal the guide and the release 
bearing carrier. The clutch release bearing (19) is a 
force tit on the bearing carrier. The self-centring release 
bearing is sealed. The ball bearing races are sealed 
and the lubrication is maintained dv the grease during 
rotation. 



Clutch disengagement 

Depressing the clutch pedal moves the control rod 
which in turn operates the piston of a master cylinder. 
The quantity of oil displaced by this piston passes 
through the hole drilled in the side of the slave cylinder 
(11) and moves the release bearing carrier (9) and 
release bearing (19) assembly forwards. The dia- 
phragm in the clutch cover (7) is compressed, relea- 
sing pressure on the clutch plate and the disc (6) is 
released. 

Clutch engagement 

Releasing the clutch pedal causes a drop in pressure 
in the slave cylinder. The diaphragm pushes the re- 
lease bearing carrier rearwards and the pressure plate 
forwards. The disc (6) is held between the pressure 
plate and the engine flywheel anG transmits drive to the 
gearbox input shaft. 



Specifications 

Clutch control 
Plate load 
Number of vanes 
Type of vane 
Disc diameter 
Friction linings 



Push-type 

1300 kg 

6 

Non-progressive 

330 mm 

Cerametallic 



Key to illustrations on pages 3 and 4 



(1) Engine flywheel 

(2) Flywheel ring gear 

(3) PTO shaft drive hub 

(4) Engine flywheel attaching bolts 

(5) Clutch cover plate dowel pins 

(6) Clutch friction disc 

(7) Clutch cover plate 

(8) Bolts attaching cover plate to flywheel 

(9) Clutch release bearing carrier 

(10) Rubber boot 

(11) Cylinder 

(12) Cylinder attaching bolt 
(12A) Cylinder attaching bolt 

(13) "O" ring 

/14\ Cylinder oil seal 



/14A\ 

/15\ 

/15A\ 

/16\ 

(17) 

(18) 

(19) 

(20) 

(21) 

(22) 

(23) 

(24) 

(25) 

(26) 



Cylinder "O" ring 

Clutch release bearing carrier seal 

Clutch release bearing "O" ring 

Scraper ring 

Guide 

Dowel 

Clutch release bearing 

Supply pipe grommet 

Supply pipe 

Cylinder supply 90° union 

Cylinder bleed straight union 

Bleed pipe 

Bleed pipe union 

Bleed point 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



11 



www.maskinisten.net 



m 

g 

(0 



2 

1 

3 



to 






1 | 




CO 




o 




o 


o 


§ 


o 




01 

*5 




CJ 1 


05 


o 


CD 


X 


JO 




m 


1 


CO 


o 


H 




5 






o 

3 

CO 




www.maskinisten.net 




5B01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 




Exploded view 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



>./ 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5B01.5 



A. Clutch cover plate 



Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. See Section 3 A01 . 

2. Locate tool MF 457 (4 cyl Fig. 1) - (6 cyi. Fig. 2) to 
retain the cover plate/disc assembly. 

3. Gradually slacken the bolts (8) attaching the cover 
plate (7) to the engine flywheel (1). 

4. Remove the cover plate and the disc (6). 

5. Remove the three dowel pins (5) on the flywheel. 
Reassembly 

6. Clean the flywheel with a solvent. 

7. Check the flywheel friction surface. 

Note : if the flywheel friction surface is scored it 
can be skimmed. (See Section B procedure 6). 

8. Lightly coat the PTO shaft hub splines in the 
flywheel with Molybdenum disulphide grease. 

9. Fit the three dowel pins (5). 

1 0. Using tool MF 457, centre the clutch disc (6) on the 
flywheel. The longest section of the hub must face 
the diaphragm. 

1 1 . Refit the clutch cover plate. 

1 2. Progressively tighten the bolts (8) to a torque of: 
50-70 Nm (4 cyl.) 

30-35 Nm (6 cyl.) 

13. Withdraw tool MF 457. 

1 4. Refit the gearbox to the engine (section 3 A01 ). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



L 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5B01.6 



Gearbox - Clutch 



\/ 



B. Engine flywheel 



Disassembly 

1 Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox 
{Section 3 A01). 

2. Remove the engine clutch (see Section 3 A01). 
Carry out procedures 2 to 5 in Section A. 

3. Immobilize the flywheel (1). 

4. Remove the six bolts {4) attaching the flywheel to 
the crankshaft. 

5. Remove the flywheel and the PTO shaft hub (3). 

Reassembly 

6. If the friction surface of the flywheel is scored, it can 
be skirnmed. 

Grind surlace A as necessary to obtain dimension 
X = 26 mm mini. Surface finish 2.5 microns maxi- 
mum. 

Measure dimension Y. reduce surface B to obtain 
a measurement of 34 . 1 mm to 34.2 mm (4 cyl. Fig.3) 
(6 cyl. fig.4). 

Shorten the three dowel pins (5) accordingly. 
Note: 

1) Check that the cover plate attaching bolt 
holes drilled in the flywheel are the correct 
depth; if not, drill to the correct depth. After 
skimming the flywheel clean it with a solvent. 

2) The release bearing PN3384863 M92 (45,5 
mm long) is only used as repair part (Fig. 4A). 
If the flywheel has been skimmed on a tractor 
equipped with the old bearing (41 mm long) it is 
mandatory to replace it by the 45,5 mm long 
bearing. 

Do not fit a 3100 clutch disc if the flywheel has 
been skimmed. 

7. Fit two dowel pins into the flywheel attaching holes. 

8. Refit the flywheel and the hub (3). 

9. Coat the bolts (4) with Loctite 241 . 

1 0. Refit the six bolts (4) and tighten to a torque oS 110- 
140 Nm (4 and 6 cyl.) 

Release the engine flywheel. 

1 1 . Carry out procedures 6 to 13 (Section A). 

1 2. Refit the gearbox to the tractor (Section 3A0 1 ) 



X 26mm Mini 




^Face A2.5 U 



m 



V ,34,1 34,2 



^ 



; Face I 



Fig.3 



)C 26mm Mini 




Face A 2,5 (im 



Y 34,1 34,2 



Face I 



Fia. 4 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5B01.7 



C. Flywheel ring gear replacement 
Disassembly 

1 . Remove the engine flywheel (Section B. procedu- 
res 1 to 5). 

2. Carry out procedures 2 and 3 (Section 5C01 .C). 

Reassembly 

3. Carry out procedures 4 and 5 (Section 5 C01.C). 

4. Refit the engine flywheel (Section B, procedures 7 
to 12). 



D. Clutch release bearing 

Note: As disassembly of the clutch release bearing 
entails its removal from the slave cylinder, seal 
replacement is recommended to avoid the risk of 
leakage during service. See Section F. 

Disassembly 

1 . Using a suitable drift punch, remove the release 
bearing through th<~ three holes in the slave cylin- 
der l Fig. 5). 

Reassembly 

2. Using a suitable assembly to support the outer 
collar, press the release bearing up against the 
release bearing earner shoulder (Fig. 6). 

Note: Coat the contact surface of the release 
bearing and carrier with Loctite 270 (Fig.7). Do 
not put Loctite into the bearing. 




44 

ii 

\\J 




Fig.7 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5B01.8 



Gearbox - Clutch 



E. Hydraulic slave cylinder 
assembly 

Removal 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box (Section 3 A01). 

2. Disconnect the bleed pipe and supply pipe from 
the slave cylinder assembly. 

Note: To remove the hydraulic slave cylinder 
assembly complete, do not separate the bea- 
ring carrier fully from the cylinder to gain 
access to the attaching bolts. 

Method (Fig.8) 

3. Pull the release bearing carrier 40 mm away from 
the cylinder and remove the boot (10). 

4. Using short Allen keys, unscrew the two bolts (12) 
and bolts (12A). 

Refitment 

5. Coat the bolts with Loctite 24 1 . Fit and tighten the 
bolts to a torque of: 

8 diam. : 25-35 Nm 
10 diam. : 40-70 Nm 

6. Refit the boot (10). Refit the bleed pipe (24) and 
supply pipe (21). 

7. Refit the gearbox to the tractor (Section 3 A01). 

8. Remove air from the clutch hydraulic control sys- 
tem (see Section G). 

Note: To avoid damage to the release bearing 
carrier (9) use plastic protective jaws and grip 
the collar lightly. 



F. Slave cylinder seal replacement 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box (Section 3 A01). 

2. Disconnect the bleed pipe (24) and the supply 
pipe (21). 

3. Remove the rubber boot (10). 




4. Withdraw the clutch release bearing carrier (9) 
from the siave cylinder (11). 

5. Remove the two bolts (12) and the bolt (12A). 

6. Remove the slave cylinder-guide assembly. 

7. Separate the slave cylinder and the guide (17). 

8. Remove the "0" ring (13) 

9. Remove: 

- the elbow union (22). 

- the straight union (23), 

10. Remove the rod (18) 

11. Remove the clutch release oearing (Section D, 
procedure 1) 

Disassembly 

1 2. Remove: 

- on the release bearing carrier (9): the scraper 
ring /16\, the seal /15\ and the "O" ring /15A\ 
(Fig.9). 

- on the slave cylinder (11): the seal /14\ and the 
"O" ring/14A\(Fig.10). 

Note: To remove the seals and "O" rings, use a 
suitably protected screwdriver (Fig.9). The 
bores and grooves of the parts must, be free 
from scoring and damage. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5B01.9 



Reassembly of "0" ring /14AV and bush /14\ in 
cylinder (Fig.11). 

13. Clean the cylinder (11). 

14. Position the cylinder with the groove facing up- 
wards. 

1 5. Lubricate and fit the "O" ring /14A\ in the groove. 
Do not twist it. 

1 6. Form the seal /14\ into a heart-shape. 
Important: The Up of the seal must face out- 
wards. 

17. Fit the seal /14\ into the groove and push it gra- 
dually towards the "O" ring /14AV 

18. Lubricate the seal and the cylinder bore. 

Note: To ensure seal seated properly, use 
bearing carrier as a mandril. 

Method 

Lubricate the release bearing carrier (9) 

Insert the release bearing carrier (9) in the front of the 

cylinder (11) using the tool (Fig. 12) (See Section J) 

Turn the release bearing carrier approximately one turn 

in the cylinder to bed in seal. 

Remove the release bearing carrier: the seal /14\ is now 

fitted. 





(11 jl ^gg 




J 


\ - 


tfrs^~~-*QO 


J===Jwm 


~-^~- 


li ~"~A Fig. 12 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.ne1; 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5B01.10 



Gearbox - Clutch 



V V 



Reassembly of "O" ring /1$A\ and seal /15\ on 
release bearing carrier (9). 

19. Clean the release bearing carrier. 

20. Position the release bearing carrier with the groove 
facing upwards. 

21. Lubricate and fit the "0" ring /15A\ in the groove. 
Do not twist it (Fig. 13). 

22. Form the seal /15\ into a heart-shape (Fig. 14). 
Important: The lip of the seal J15\ must face 
outwards. 

23. Fit the seal /15\ into the groove and push it gra- 
dually towards the "O" ring /15AV 

Note : To ensure seal seated properly, use guide 
as a mandril. 





Fig. 14 



Method 

Lubricate the seal /15\ and the guide (17). 

Insert the guide (1 7) into the front of the release bearing 

carrier (9) using the tool shown Fig. 1 5. (See Section J). 

Turn the guide approximately one turn. 

Remove the guide. The seal /15\ is now fitted. 




Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 



* 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5B01.11 



24. Using a suitable arrangment to support the bearing 
carrier, press in the scraper ring /16\ (Figs. 16 and 
17). 

25. Fit the release bearing. See procedure 2 {Section 
D). 

26. Lubricate the seal /15V the seal /16\and the release 
bearing carrier bore. 

27. Fit the rod (18) after coating it with Loctite 241. 
Tighten to & torque of 25-35 Nm. 

28. Lubricate the guide (17). the seal (14) and the 
release bearing carrier (9). 

29. Position the "O" ring (13) on the guide. 

30. Assemble the cylinder (1 1 ) with the guide (1 7). 

31 . Refit the bolts (12) and (12A). 

32. Press the release bearing carrier (9) into the cylin- 
der (11) so as to leave a gap of 40 mm to allow 
access for the Allen keys to tighten bolts (12) and 
{12A)(Fig.8}. 

33. Screw on the unions (22) and (23). 

34. Locate the slave cylinder assembly on the Speeds- 
hift cover. 

35. Coat the bolts (12) and (12A) with Loctite 241 . 
Using the short Allen keys, tighten to a torque of: 

8 diam- : 25-35 Nm 
10 diam. : 40-70 Nm 

36. Fit the boot (10). Refit the bleed pipe (24) and 
supply pipe (21). 

37. Refit the gearbox to the tractor. See Section 3 A01 . 

38. Remove air from the clutch hydraulic control 
system. 

G. Removing air from the clutch 
hydraulic system 

1 . Carry out orocedures 1 to 5. Section 5 C01 .G. 



H. Checking piston travel in the 
slave cylinder 

1 . Carry out Drocedures 1 to 3, Section 5 C01 .H. 



I. Clutch pedal adjustment 

Before assembly coat the pins (3) and (4) with molyb- 
denum disulphide grease. 

Coat the threads of the rod (1) (Fig. 1 8) with Loctite 542. 
Adjust the rod to obtain a pedal travel of 170 mm 
between the disengaged position (pedal up against 
the stop (2)) and the engageo position. 





Fig. 17 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 



www.maskinisten.net 




5C01.1 



5 C0 1 Pull-type Clutch (3 1 00) 



CONTENTS 

General 



Operation 



A. Clutch assembly 



B. Engine flywheel 



C. Ring gear replacement . 



D. Clutch release bearing assembly 



E. Clutch hydraulic slave cylinder assembly 



F. Slave cylinder seal replacement 



G. Removing air from the system 



12 



H. Checking piston travel in stave cylinder 



.12 



I. Clutch pedal adjustment 



.12 



J. Service tools 



.13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5C01.2 



Gearbox - Clutch 



General 



Operation 



Description 

This is a diaphragm puii-lype clutch. The master cylin- 
der is supplied by the low pressure hydraulic system. 
Drive to the gearbox is through the disc (6) which 
engages with the spimea gearbox input shaft during 
rotation. 

Construction 

The slave cylinder (19) is fitted on the front face of the 
input shaft housing. The piston/cylinder assembly is 
sealed by composite seals /14\ and /16\ and the slave 
cylinder guide by rings /13\ and /17Y 
The boot holder (11) is screwed on to the end of the 
piston (15) and retains the clutch release bearing 
carrier (9) and clutch release bearing (23). The spring 
clip (10) retains the clutch release bearing carrier (9) on 
tne boot holaer (11). 

The clutch cover plate (7) is connected to the release 
bearing by a circlip filled on the cover plate and which 
locates in the groove of the release bearing (23) 
W&rning: Any operation which requires splitting the 
tractor between the engine and the gearbox requi- 
res removal of the spring clip (10) (see Section 3 
A02) 



Clutch disengagement 

Depressing the clutch pedal moves the control rod 
which in turn operates the piston of a master cylmaer. 
The auantity of oil displaced by this piston passes 
through the lower nole in the slave cylinder (19) ana 
moves the piston (15) and release bearing (23) as- 
sembly rearwards. The diaphragm is then compressed 
and the disc (6) is released. 

Clutch engagement 

Releasing the clutch pedal causes oil to escape from 
the slave cylinder pressure chamber and the release 
bearing to return. 

The diaphragm is compressed and the aisc (6) is held 
against the engine flywheel by the tnction piate in the 
clutch cover (7). 



Specifications 

Clutch comrol type 
Plate load 
Number oi vanes 


Pull 

1300 kg 
7 


Type of vane 
Type of pressure plate 
Disc diameter 
Friction linings 


Progressive 
Ventilated 
330 mm 
Cerametatiic 



Key to illustrations 



(1) 


Engine flywheel 


/16A\ 


Slave cylinder oiston "O" ring 


(2) 


Flywheel ring gear 


/17\ 


Slave cylinder piston guiae ring 


(3) 


PTO shaft drive hub 


(18) 


bolts attaching stave cylinaer to gearDOx 


(4) 


Engine flywheel attaching bolts 


(18A) 


Speedshift housing 


(5) 


Clutch cover plate dowel pins 


(19) 


Slave cylinder 


(6) 


Clutch friction disc 


(20) 


Retaining ring (clutch release oeanng) 


(7) 


Clutch cover piate 


(21) 


Flat washer {clutch release bearing} 


(8) 


Boits attaching cover plate to flywheel 


(22) 


Spring washer (clutch release bearing; 


(9) 


Clutch release bearing carrier 


(23) 


Clutch release beanna 


(10) 


Spring clip 


(24) 


Guide pin 


(11) 


Rubber boot carrier 


(25) 


Supply pipe grommet 


(12) 


Rubber boot 


(26) 


Supply pipe 


/13\ 


Clutch slave cylinder guide ring 


(27) 


Cylinder supply elbow connector 


/14\ 


Clutch siave cylinder seal 


(28) 


Slave cylinder straight bleed connector 


/14A\ 


Slave cylinder "O" ring 


(29) 


Bleed pipe 


(15) 


Slave cylmaer piston 


(30) 


Bleed pipe union 


/16\ 


Slave cyimaer Dision seal 


(31) 


Bleea take-oii point 



issue 1 



Novemoer 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




* 



S 
5- 

o 

X 

o 



o 

o 
to 



CO 

o 

§ 

o 

CO 

3] 
en 

I 

o 

3 

CO 




www.maskinisten.net 



in 
in 

c 

CD 



s 

3 
cr 

(V 



U3 




O 
o 



lil 



Q 

CD 

a- 

o 

X 

I 

o 



CO 
Q 

§ 

— * 

o 
o 

CO 

m 

CO 

I 

o 

3 

CO 



* 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5C01.5 



A. Clutch cover plate 



Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. See Section 3 A02. 

2. Separate the release bearing carrier from the cover 
plate (7). 

3. Position tool MF 457 to retain the cover plate/disc 
assembly (Fig.1). 

4. Progessively slacken the bolts (8) attaching the 
cover plate (7) to the engine flywheel (1). 

5. Remove the cover plate (7) and the disc (6). 

6. Remove the three dowel pins (5) on the flywheel (1). 

Reassembly 

7. Clean the flywheel (1) with a solvent. 

8. Check the flywheel friction surface. 

Note: If the flywheel friction surface is scored it 
can be skimmed. (See 5 C01.B procedure 6). 

9. Lightly coat the PTO shaft hub splines (3) with a 
molybdenum disulphide grease. 

Fit the three dowel pins (5) on the flywheel (1). 

1 0. Using tool MF 457, centre the clutch disc (6) on the 
flywheel. (The longest section of the hub must face 
the diaphragm). (Fig.1). 

1 1 . Refit the clutch cover plate. 

12. Progressively tighten the bolts (8) to a torque of 
25-35 Nm. 

1 3. Withdraw tool MF 457. 

14. Refit the gearoox to the engine (see 3 A02). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5C01.6 



■/ V 



Gearbox - Clutch 



B. Engine flywheel 



Disassembly (Fig.2) 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox. 
Section 3A02. 

2. Remove the engine clutch, see Section 5 C01 A. 

3. Immobilize the engine flywheel (1). 
4 Remove the six bolts (4). 

5. Remove the engine tiywheel (1) and the hub (3). 

Reassembly 

6. if the friction surface of the flywheel (1 ) is scored, it 
can be skimmed ; a maximum of 1 .5 mm can be 
removed. Surface finish 2.5 micrometers maxi- 
mum. Shorten the dowei pins (5) accordingly. 
NOTE: After skimming clean the flywheel with a 
solvent. 

7 Fit two cowet pins into the flywheel attaching holes. 

3. Refit the nub (3) and the flywheel (1). 

9. Clean tne bolts (4) and coat them with Loctite 24 1 . 

1 0. Refit bci;s (4) and immobilize the flywheel. Tighten 
!0 a loroue of 1 10-140 Nm. 

1 1 , Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse. 



C. Flywheel ring gear replacement 
Disassembly 

1 Remove the flywheel, see 5 C01.B. 

2. Drill a 5 mm diameter hoie in the ring gear halfway 
between the inner diameter of the ring (2) and the 
bottom of any tooth to a depth of 16 mm (Fig. 3). 

3 . Place a cold chisel in the space above the hole and 
split the ring gear 

Important: Wear protective equipment when 
removing the ring gear to avoid flying metal 
particles. 

Reassembly 

4 Heat a new ring gear to 245°C in an oven. Do not 
use a oiow torch or any other naked flame. 

5. Fit the ring gear (2) on to the flywheel (1) with the 
chamfered lead on the teeth pointing towards the 
front (engine side) of the flywheel. Push the ring 
gear Quickly into position. Allow the ring to cool 
siowiy 

6- Refit the flywheel. 




Fig.2 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5C01.7 



D. Clutch release bearing 
Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Operation 3 A02. 
2 Release the carrier from the clutch cover plate. 

3. Grip the tool (Fig. 4) made up locahy (see Section 
J) in a vice. Locate the release bearing carrier on 
the tool. 

4. Screw up the nut on the tool to compress the spring 
washer (22). 

5. Press the circlip (20) near the centre with a small 
screwdriver. 

6. (Fig. 5) Press on the carrier (9) and remove the 
circlip (20). 

7. Remove the washer (21). the spring washer (22) 
and the release bearing (23) from ihe carrier. 

Reassembly 

8. Carry out procedures 3, 7 and 4. 

9. Locate the circiip (20) in the groove ot the carrier (9) 
and ensure that it is correctly located. 

1 0. Check the radial clearance of the release bearing 
(23) in the housing of the carrier (9). (Fig. 6) 

1 1 . Refit the gearbox to the tractor. Section 3 A02. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5C01.8 



Gearbox - Clutch 



E. Hydraulic slave cylinder 

assembly 

Removal 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Section 3 A02. 

2. Disconnect 

- the supply pipe (26) (plug tne pipe), 

- the bleed pipe (29) 

3. Remove the two bolts (18) and the bolt (18A). 

4. Remove the slave cylinder assembly. 



7. Clean the two bolts (1 8) and the boil (18 A) and coat 
(hem with Loctite 241. 

8. Refit bolts (18) and (1 8A) and tighten io the torque: 

- 8 diam. : 25-35 Nm 

- 10 diam. : 50-70 Nm 

9. Reconnect pipes (26) and (29). 

1 0. Clean the clutch housing with a solvent. 

1 1 . Refit the gearbox to the tractor. Section 3 A02. 

1 2. Remove air from the clutch hydraulic controi sys- 
tem (see Section 5 C01.G). 



Refitment 

5. Clean the threads of the slave cylinder attaching 
hoies. 

6. Position the slave cylinder assembly on the gear- 
box cover. 




Fia. 7 



Issue 1 



Novemt>er 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Pull-type clutch 




5C01.9 



F . Slave cylinder seal replacement 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Section 3 A02. 

2. Remove the clutch hydraulic slave cylinder. Section 
5C01.E. 

3. Remove the rubber boot (12). 

4. Remove : 

- theelbow union (27). 

- the straight union (28), 

- the guide pin (24) on the boot earner (11), 
•the boot carrier (11) using the locally made-up 

tools shown in Figs. 8 and 9 (see section J) 

5. Remove the guide pin (24). 

6. Withdraw the piston (15) from the cylinder (19). 

Disassembly 

7. Remove the piston seals /16\- /16A\and the ring 
/17V 

Remove the cylinder seals /14\and /14A\and ring 

/13V 

Note : 1} To remove the seals, use a suitably 

protected screwdriver (Fig. 10). 

2) The bores and grooves of the parts must be 

free from scoring and damage. 

Reassembly 

Reassembly of "O" ring /14A\ and bush /14\ in 

cylinder : 

8. Clean me cylinder (19). 

9. Position the cylinder with the grooves facing up- 
wards. 

1 0. Lubricate and fit the "0" ring /14A\in the deepest 
groove. Do not twist it. (Fig. 1 1) 

1 1 . Compress the seal /14\ into a heart-shape (Fig. 1 1 ) 
Important: The lip of the seal /14\ must face 
outwards. 

1 2. Fit the seal /14\ into the groove and push it gradually 
towards the "O" ring /14AV 

1 3. Lubricate the seal /14\and the bore of the cylinder 
(19). 

1 4. Important: To ensure seal seated properly, use 
piston /15\ as a mandril. 








Fig. 9 




Issue 2 



December 1933 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5C01.10 



Gearbox - Pull-type clutch 



^ 



To fit seal /1 4\ 

Protect the threaded part of the piston (15) (Fig. 11). 
Locate trie piston in the cylinder Ithe threaded portion 
of the piston (15) facing the front of the cylinder (19)). 
Centre the piston and introduce it into the cylinder using 
the fitting tool Fig. 12 (See Section J). 
Turn the piston approximately one turn in the cylinder. 
Remove the piston (15). The seal /14\ is now fitted. 

Reassembly of "0" ring and seal on piston 

1 5. Clean the piston (15). 

16. Fit the seai /16\on the small diameter of the piston. 

Important: The lip of the seal /16\ must face 

outwards. 

1 7 Place the piston (with the groove facing you) on a 
pipe gripped in a vice, immobilise the piston 
(Fig. 13). 

1 8. Lubricate and fit the oil seal /16A\ in the deepest 
groove. Do not twist it. 

19. Work the seal /16\ gradually into the groove using 
two lengths of tape (Fig 13). 

20 Important: To ensure seal seated properly use 
cylinder (19) as a mandril. 

2 1 Fit the guide ring /13\ into the cylinder. Ensure that 
it is correctly seated in the groove. (Clearance 2-5 
mm). 

To fit seal /1 6\ 

Fit the seal using <ne torsion bar and tool 3376804 Ml 

(Fig. 14). 

Lubricate the sea! and the Diston (15). 

Insert trie piston ( 1 5) into the cylinder (19) using the tool 

snown m Fig. 15 Turn the piston approximately one 

turn. 

Remove the piston (15). The seal /16\ is now fitted, 

22. Make the guide ring /13\ round. Lightly grease the 
two ends (Use grease made by Under Technical 
Socitt) WITCO 76320 Saint Pierre des Elfes). 
Note: To reduce friction on the guide ring /13l 
its contact surface with the piston has been 
milled from serial no. R023005. The milled sur- 
face MUST face the piston. 




issue 2 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ V 



Gearbox - Clutch 




5C01.11 



23. Lubricate the cylinder bore, the piston, the seals 
/14Y /16\and guide ring /13\. 

24. Place the assembly in a vice. 

25. Push the piston approximately 10 mm into the 
cylinder using the tool (Fig. 16) 

26. Make the long guide ring /17\ round. Lightly grease 
the two ends (Use grease «Amber technical" 
made by WITCO. co 76320 Saint Pierre des Elfes 
France) or equivalent miscibie grease. 

Note: To reduce friction on the guide ring /17\, 
its contact surface with the piston has been 
milled from serial no. R023005. The milled sur- 
face MUST face the piston. 

27. Fit the guide ring into the piston groove manually. 
(Clearance 2 to 5 mm). 

28. Complete the assembly of the piston into the cylin- 
der using the tool (Fig. 17). 

29. Clean and refit the guide pin (24). 

30. Clean the thread of the boot carrier (11) and of the 
piston (15). Apply Loctite 542 to the boot carrier 
and tighten it on the piston using the tools (Figs. 8 
and 9) 

3 1 . Line up one of the threaded holes in the boot carrier 
with the rod (24). 

32. Coat the rod (24) with Loctite 241 and tighten to a 
torque of 25-35 Nm. 

33. Tighten the unions (27) and (28). 

34. Carry out procedures 2 and 3 in reverse. 

35. Refit the gearbox :o the tractor, operation 3 A02. 

36. Remove air from me clutch hydraulic system. See 
Section G. 




Fig. 15 




Pit / 7=-y/ 



Fig. 16 





/<U 


/ 


^^^P 1 






^. 


' 


Fig. 14 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5C01.12 



Gearbox - Clutch 




G, Removing air from the clutch 
hydraulic system 

l.Run the engine at approximately t200 r.p.m and 
restrict the return hose (1) Fig. 18 with suitably 
protected pliers or clamp. 

2 . Connect the union 3582045 M 1 (1 ) together with its 
hose (Fig. 19) to the bleed point (RH side of gear- 
box). 

3. Immerse the end of the hose mio a receptacle 
partly filled with transmission oil. 

4. Operate the clutch pedal. Repeat the action seve- 
ral times until oil free of air bubbles comes out of the 
hose. 

5. Remove the union 3582045 M1 and release the 
return hose. 

NOTE: On this type of clutch, pedal travel is 
taken up automatically. 
However, if the clutch does not operate correc- 
tly, repeat the air removal procedure. If the 
problem persists, refer to Section H. 

H. Checking piston travel in the 
slave cyfinder 

1 . Disconnect the two hoses supplying the front diffe- 
rential lock (4WD) and plug the connexions. 

2. Remove the guard and the 4WD transmission 
shaft. 

3. Remove the inspection plate. 

Switch off the engine. Using a pair of dividers, 
measure the distance between the slave cylinder 
(19) and the boot carrier (11) 
Fully depress tne clutch pedal. Measure the dis- 
tance again. 

The difference between the two measurements 
(travel) must be 8-10 mm. 

1. Clutch pedal adjustment 

Before assembly coat the pins (3) and (4) with molyb- 
denum disulphide grease. 

Coat the threads of the rod (1 ) (Fig.20) with Loctite 542. 
Adjust the rod to obtain a pedal travel of 200 mm 
between the disengaged position (pedal against the 
stop (2)) and the engaged position. 





Fig. 19 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Pull-type clutch 




5C01.13 



J. Service Tools 



1. Tools to be made up locally 



-M 20 



T 



10 



32 T 
1 



~nn± 



120 



OI20 



■e-- 



iSO 



Boot carrier removal tool 



09 

/ 



e>— -£ 



40 



25 




10 ' ' 



Piston retaining tool 



6 5.0.5 



-8 



MF 
3019B65 X01 



-1 

16 

T 



68 



HM16«75 

MF 
0339024x01 . 



^ttn 



MF 
33B5 963 M01 



Piston fining and spring washer compression tool 



Issue 2 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5C01.14 



Gearbox - Pull-type clutch 



^ 



2. Tools supplied by M-F. 



MF457 

Clutch centraiiser 



3582045 M1 

Hydraulic connector (coupler) 



3376804 Ml 

Oil seal calibrating tool 




Issue 2 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Selector rail and forks 




5001 A 



5 D0 1 Selector rail and forks 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Creeper gear fork 



B. Hare/Tortoise range fork - Mechanical lock assembly 
- 1st/2nd - 3rd/4th forks - Selector rail 



C. A/B range fork 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.nei 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5D01.2 



Gearbox - Selector rail and forks 




V V 



General 



The selector rai! (7) which supports the various forks 
and the latch assembly is located on the RH side of the 
gearbox on the selector cover side. It crosses the gear- 
box housing and the Hare/Tortoise range control piston 
(1 3). It is held in place by a setscrew (8). A plug (9) seals 
the front end of the rail and a cover (15) seals the rear 
end. The forks for the A/B range (4), 1st/2nd gears (5), 
3rd/4th gears (6) and the creeper gears (28) cannot be 
adjusted (except locking pressure for the creeper 
gears). The Hare/Tortoise range fork (20) is adjustable. 
Note: The 4x2 gearboxes (8-speed) have no A/B 
fork (4). 



A. Creeper gear fork 



Disassembly 

1 . Carry out procedures 1 to 7 (Section 5 K01), 

2. Carry out procedures 2 to 14 (Section 8 101) 

3. Disconnect the creeper gear control cable. 

4. Remove the bolt (1), withdraw the rod (2) to disen- 
gage the lever from the fork (Fig.1). 

5. Unscrew nut (26) and the locking screw (27) on the 
fork (28) (Fig. 2). 

6. Remove the setscrew (8) (Fig. 5) 

7. Turn the selector rail (7) and drive out the roll pin (29) 
(Figs.2 and 3). 

Note: Take care not to let the roll pin fall into the 
gearbox housing. 

8. Drive out the double pin (1 ) from the coupling sleeve 
(2) (Fig. 4). If the pin is inaccessible, carry out pro- 
cedures 9 to 12. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Selector rail and forks 




5D01.3 




Key 


to Figure 5 














(D 


Plug 


(11) 


'0' ring 






(21) 


Castellated nut 


(2) 


Spring 


(12) 


'0' ring 






(22) 


Latch 


(3) 


Locking plunger 


(13) 


Hare/Tortoise 


range piston 


(23) 


Tapered bearing 


(4) 


A/B range fork 


(14) 


'O' ring 






(24) 


Cone 


(5) 


tst/2nd gear fork 


(15) 


Cover 






(25) 


Latch assembly 


(6) 


3rd/4th gear fork 


(16) 


Bolt 






(26) 


Nut 


(7) 


Selector rail 


(17) 


Bott 






(27) 


Locking screw 


(8) 


Setscrew 


(18) 


Slider 






(28) 


Creeper gear fork 


(9) 


Plug 


(19) 


Adjusting screw 




(29) 


Roll pin 


(10) 


Cylinder 


(20) 


Hare/Tortoise 


range 


fork 







Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




5D01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Selector rail and forks 




V 



On 4WD tractors. 

9. Disconnect the front hose from the differential lock 
control (front axle side). 

10. Remove the guard (1) (Fig. 6). 

1 1 . Unscrew the centre bearing (2) from the 4WD shaft 
(3) (Fig. 6). 

1 2. Remove the split pin (4) from the rear sleeve (5), 
disengage the 4WD clutch shaft by sliding off the 
sleeve (Fig. 6). Turn the halfshaft to bring the cou- 
pling sleeve (2) into position (Fig. 4). 

1 3. Fit the setscrew (8) temporarily to hold the selector 
rail in order to remove the fork (28) (Fig. 5) 

14. Slide the sleeve (1) and the coupler (2) towards 
each other on the connecting shaft (3) (Fig. 7). 

1 5. Move the sleeve assembly, connecting shaft and 
coupler to the outer LH edge, then withdraw it from 
the fork (28) (Fig. 7). 

Note: Mark the direction in which the sleeve is 
assembled (1) (Fig. 7). 

16. Remove the fork (28) from the selector rail (7) 
(Rg. 8). 

1 7. Remove the rod (3) (Fig. 1 ). 

18. To remove the creeper gear control shaft (1), turn 
it so that it goes under the selector rail (7) (Fig. 9). 
Discard the 'O" ring (3). 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ v 



Gearbox - Selector rail and forks 




5D01.5 



Reassembly 

19. Check the parts and replace any which are faulty. 

20. Refit the control rod. Pull the rod as far as possible 
to the right. Lubricate and fit a new 'O' ring (Fig. 1 0). 

21.Refittherod(3)(Fig. 11). 

Coat the bo/ts with Loctite 241 and tighten them. 

22. Refit the fork on the selector rail. 

Note: Ensure that the lever (1) of the creeper 
gear control rod faces the front of the tractor 
(Fig. 11). 

23. Engage the sleeve assembly, connecting shaft 
and coupler at the LH outer edge, then fit it in the 
fork. 

Note: The machining groove on the sleeve (1) 
should face the rear of the tractor (Fig. 12). 

24. Slide the sleeve and the coupler on to the connec- 
ting shaft. 

25. Press a new double pin (1) into the sleeve (2) 
(Fig. 4). 

26. Remove the setscrew (8) (Fig, 5). 

27. Press in a new pin (29) and turn the selector rail (7) 
(Figs. 2 and 3) 

28. Clean the setscrew (8), coat it with Loctite 542 and 
tighten to a torque of 28 - 43 Nm. 

29. Locate the fork (28) and the locking screw (27) on 
flat M of the selector rail (7) (between the two detent 
notches) (Fig. 5). 

Tighten the screw to compress the ball. Slacken the 
screw a quarter turn. Clean the nut (26) and coat it 
with Loctite 241, then tighten to a torque of 15 - 
20 Nm (Fig. 5). 
Check that the fork is correctly tightened. 

30. Turn and push the rod (2) to engage the lever in the 
fork. Fit the bolt (1) after coating with Loctite 241 
(Fig. 1). 

Note: Check the operation of the rod. 

31. Reconnect and adjust the creeper gear control 
cable. 

Note : See Section 5 J01 for adjustment proce- 
dure. 

32. Carry out procedures 15 to 17 (Section 8 101). 

33. Check that the transfer pipe 'O' rings are in good 
condition and insert the pipe into the LH cover (see 
Fig. 2 -Section 8 101). 

34. Carry out procedures 20 and 1 8 (Section 8 101 ). 

35. Refit the RH cover and the bolts. Tighten to a torque 
of 72-96 Nm. 

36. Carry out procedures 7 - 1 1 in reverse (Section 
8 101). 

37. Fit the wiring harnesses and secure with a clip. 











Fig. 12 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5D01.6 



Gearbox - Selector rail and forks 




V \ 



38. Refit the trailer braking valve (if fitted). Check that 
the '0' rings are in good condition. 

Tighten to a torque of 25-35 Nm. 

39. Carry out procedure 6 in reverse (Section 8 101 ). 

40. Refit the trailer braking valve pipe (if fitted) and the 
filter. 

41. Carry out procedures 9 - 12 in reverse (Section 
5D01). 

42. Refit the.wheel. Remove the stand and the trolley 
jack. 

43. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm. 

44. Carry out procedures 1 to 4 in reverse (Section 
5 KOI). 

45. Start the engine and carry out procedures 32 and 
33 (Section 8 101). 

46. Road test the tractor and check the creeper gear 
control. 



B. Hare/Tortoise range fork - Me- 
chanical lock assembly- 1st 2nd and 
3rd/4th forks - Selector rail 

Disassembly with or without creeper gears 
Note: For gearboxes fitted with creeper gears, carry 
out the additional procedures marked * 

47. Carry out procedures 1 to 12, Section 5 K01 . 
48*Disconnect the creeper gear control cable. 

49. Carry out procedures 5 and 6, Section 5 A02.B. 

50. Carry out procedures 2 to 14, Section 8 101 . 

51. Remove the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the 
deteni plungers (3) (Fig. 5). 

52*Carry out procedures 4 to 7. 
53* Refit the setscrew (8) temporarily. 

54. Carry out procedures 8 to 1 1 , Section 5 A02.C. 

55. Tap the rear end of the selector rail (7) with a 
copper tipped mallet to drive out the plug (9) 
(Fig. 5). 

Note: This procedure gives access to the selec- 
tor rail from the front. 
56*Remove the creeper gear fork (28) (Fig. 5) by 
moving the selector rail forwards. 

57. Position the Hare/Tortoise range fork (20) (Fig. 5) in 
the Low position. 

58. Remove the adjusting screws (19) (Fig. 5). 

59. Remove the bolts (16) and the cover (15) (Fig. 5). 

60. Remove the Hare/Tortoise piston (13) (Fig. 5) and 
discard the seals. 



61 . Remove the cylinder (10) (Fig. 5) and discard the 
seal. 

62. Turn the pump suction pipe (1) upwards. 
Note: Do not slacken the bolt (2) on the pipe clip 
(Fig. 13). 

63. Move the selector rail rearwaras to tree the A/B 
(4x4 gearbox), 1st, 2nd, 3rd. 4th and Hare/Tor- 
toise forks. 

64. Withdraw the 1st, 2nd, 3rd anc 4th forks and the 
lock assembly. 

65. Withdraw the Hare/Tortoise fork. 

66. Remove the slider (18) (Fig. 7). 

67. Withdraw the selector rail through the seiector 
cover access panel after passing it through the 
High/Low range cylinder bore (Fig. 15). 

68. Remove the lock assembly. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Gearbox - Selector rail and forks 




5D01.7 



Reassembly 

69. Check the parts and replace any that are worn. 

70. Clean the cone threads and the nut tapping, 

71 . Refit the latch assembly. 

72. Carry out procedure 67 in reverse (Fig. 15). 

73. Refit the forks and the latch assembly. 

74. Check that the ports of the Hare/Tortoise range hy- 
draulic cylinder (10) are not blocked. 

Fit the cylinder complete with the 'O' ring (11). 

75. Slide the selector rail forwards into the Hare/Tor- 
toise range fork, the latch assembly, 1st/2nd, 3rd/ 
4th and the A/B range forks (4x4 gearbox). 
Note: For gearboxes fitted with creeper gears, 
move the selector rail far enough forward to refit 
the fork (28) (Fig. 16), 

76. Carry out procedure 209. Section 5 A02.R. 

77. Fit the cover (15) with the bolts (16) and tighten to 
a torque of 27 - 32 Nm. 

78* Fit the creeper gear fork lugs into the coupler. 
Note: The fork control lever (1) should face for- 
wards (Fig. 1 1). 

79* Slide the selector rail rearwards into the creeper 
gear fork. 

80* Press in a new pin (Fig. 3) to facilitate fitting, turn the 
selector raii (Fig. 2). 

81. Clean the setscrew, coat it with Loctite 542 and 
tighten to a torque of 38 - 43 Nm. 

82. Coat the plug (9) with Loctite 542 and press it in 
level with the housing. 

83*Fit the locking screw (27) on the fork (28) and nut 

(26) on the boit (Fig. 5). 
84* Carry out procedure 29. 

85. Turn and push the rod (2) until it engages with the 
lever in the fork. Fit the bolt (1) after coating it with 
Loctite 241 (Fig. 1). 

86. Fit the detent plungers, springs and locking nuts. 
Tighten the nuts to a torque of 50-70 Nm. 

87. Carry out procedures 217 to 232, Section 5 A02.R 

88. Carry out procedures 15 to 27, Section 8 101 . 

89. Carry out procedures: 

246 to 256. Section 5 A02.S (4 x 4) 
238 to 244. Section 5 A02.S (4 x 2) 

90. Fit the plunger and the hydraulic spool valve (4x4). 
91 "Reconnect and adjust the creeper gear control 

cable. See Section 5 J01 . 

92. Carry out procedures 8 to 12 in reverse (Section 
5 KOI). 

93. Refit the wheel. Remove the stand and the trolley 
jack. 





94. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 4C0 - 450 Nm. 

95. Top up the oil in the gearbox, remove -ne chocks 
and release the parking brake. 

Road test the following controls: 

. Creeper gears (if fitted) 
. Hare/Tortoise range 
. 1st, 2nd; 3rd. 4th gears 

96. Check all cover gasket faces and hydraulic unions 
for leaks. 

C. A/B range fork 

Note: Since the A/B fork disassembly and reassem- 
bly procedures are identical to the A/B range pro- 
cedures, refer to Section 5 F01. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Input unit 




5E01.1 



5E01 Input unit 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Removal 



B. Refitment 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5E01.2 



Gearbox - Input unit 



V V 



General 



The input gearbox is in the form of an interchangeable 
module fitted at the input end of the gearbox. It is made 
up of two quite separate parts: the speedshift (if fitted) 
and the reversing mechanism. 

The speedshift : This is an independant device which 
allows the input speed to the main gearbox to be 
doubled. It is situated at the front of the input gearbox 
and consists of a hydraulic clutch coupled to epicyclic 
reduction gearing. For operation see Section 5 E02. 

Reverse shuttle : This is housed in the enclosure at the 
rear of the input gearbox and consists a set of two gears 
operated via a synchromesh mechanism. Paired idler 
gears allow the direction of rotation to be reversed. For 
operation see Section 5 £03. 



A. Removal 



N.B.: 

1) To enable the layshaft bearings to be shimmed 
correctly, the gearbox must be removed from the 
tractor. 

2) If the input gearbox is to be replaced as a com- 
plete assembly, the layshaft will need to be shim- 
med again. 

3000-3100 tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle (Section 3 B02). 

3000 tractors. 

2. Separate the gearbox from the engine. Carry out 
procedures 1 1 and 1 2, Section 3 A0 1 (after suspen- 
ding the gearbox in slings). Remove the PTO shaft. 
Remove the input gearbox: carry out procedures 7 
to 12, Section 5 E03. 

Remove the clutch slave cylinder assem- 
bly. 

N.B.: To avoid damaging the seals, it is best not to 
remove the release bearing mounting from the 
slave cylinder. 

3. Withdraw the release bearing from the slave cylinder 
for a distance of approx. 40 mm (Fig. 8 - 5 B0 1 ), take 
off the rubber boot. 

4. Undo the three bolts holding the slave cylinder 
assembly in position. 



3100 tractors 

5. Separate the gearbox from the engine. Section 
5 A02A, procedure 2. 

6. Carry out procedures 6 to 12 (Section 5 E03). 

Removing the clutch slave cylinder assem- 
bly 

7. Carry out procedures 3 and 4, Section 5 C01 E. 



B. Refitment 



3000 tractors 

Refit the clutch slave cylinder assembly. 

8. Clean the 3 bolts and apply Loctite 421 to them. 
Fits the bolts and tighten them to torques of : 

8 mm , : 25-35 Nm 
10 mm L : 50-70 Nm 

9. Refit the rubber boot and push the thrust washer 
mounting back in. 

Refit the input gearbox; carry out procedures 72 to 

83, Section 5 E03. 

Refit the gearbox to the engine. 

The following procedures are to be carried out from 

Section 3 A01:13 and 14 (except a) 

15, 16, 17 and 18 (after the gearbox 
has been suspended in slings). 

3100 tractors 

Refit the clutch slave cylinder assembly. 

10. Carry out procedures 7 and 8, Section 5 C01E. 

1 1 . Carry out procedures 72 to 83, Section 5 E03. 
Fit the gearbox to the engine. 

The following procedures are to be carried out from 
Section 3 A02:15 to 18 (except a) 
19 to 22. 

3000 - 3100 tractors 

1 2. Re-unite the tractor at the joint between the gear- 
box and rear axle (Section 3 B02). 

1 3. Perform road test on speedshift. reversing mecha- 
nism and gears. 

1 4. Check that there are no leaks at the selector cover 
joint and the gearbox to rear axle joint. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



5E02 Speedshift 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




5E02.1 



General 



Operation 



A. Removing the front cover 



B. Disassembling the front cover . 



„ 7 



C. Separating planetary carrier and cover assembly . 



D. Disassembling the planetary carrier assembly 



E. Disassembling hydraulic cover 



F. Reassembling the planetary carrier 



G. Reassembling the hydraulic cover 



10 



H. Refitting the planetary carrier assembly 



11 



I. Reassembling the front cover 



11 



J. Refitting the front cover 



13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5E02.2 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




\ V 



General 



The speedshift unit is mounted at the front of the gearbox 
input . It is a hydraulically operated gearchange device which 
provides two different input ratios to the main gearbox . It does 
this by means of: 

- a multidtsc hydraulic clutch, 

- an epicylic gear train consisting of a planetary carrier with 
three twin planetary gears, an input sun gear and an output 
sun gear, 

- a system for' braking the planetary carrier hydraulically. 
The design of the speedshift allows the ratios to be changed 
on the move, even under full load, without deciutching. 

Different versions 

The following versions can be obtained as a function of the 

number of teeth on sun gears /6\and /7\and the order in which 
they are fitted: 

- 30 km/h or 40 km/h version (Fig. 1 ) 

- version with super creeper gears (Fig. 2). 



Operation 



30 Kph and super creeper version : stepdown 
40 Kph version : stepup (Fig. 3) 

in this mode {Fig. 3), there is no supply to the hydraulic 
components and the speedshift operates as a purely 
mechanical transmission . Oil in chamber of pistons (28) and 
(48) returns to the housing via the gallery C and the solenoid. 
The drive from the hollow primary shaft (36) is transmitted to 
the input sun gear !7\ by the splines which secure the gear to 
the shaft. Sun gear R\ drives the compound planetary gears 
/12\ which are mounted to rotate freely on spindles /8\. 
The planetary gears in turn drive the output sun gear /6\. 
which is spimed to the hollow secondary shaft (5). in one of the 
following ratios: 30 km/h 1 .26 stepdown - 40 km/h 1 .26 stepup 
- super creeper 7.8 stepdown. Since no hydraulic pressure is 
applied, the planetary carrier assembly (50) is locked against 
rotation by a Belleville spring disc (18) which applies 
pressure to pressure plate (20) and thus stops disc (21 ) from 
turning, the latter being locked to the planetary carrier 
assembly in rotation by splines. 





SUPER CREEPER MODE 



ig. 2 



List ot parts 


(13) Housing 


(27) Front cover . 


(41) F-essure z r.e 


(l)O-rinc 


(14) Soacer 


(28) Clutcn oiston 


(42) D=: 


(2) O-rina 


(15) Hub 


(29) O-r -g 


(43) E::-ngwsE-er 


(3) Bolt 


(16) Heecile-rolier bearing 


/30\ Se,ai ring 


(44) P r =;ssure r =:e 


(4) Busn 


(17) Thrust washer 


/31\ Sea. nng 


(45) Dsc 


(5) Seconcarv snail 


(18) Belleville spring disc 


(32) Neecle-roller bearing 


(46) Scnng ws = *er 


/6\ Output sun Gear 


(19) O-nng 


(33) St? a; carrier 


(47) P'ssswe c v.e 


/7\ Inpui s-:i gear 


(20) Pressure plate 


/34\ Sea* 


(48) P ston 


/8\ Planetary gear spindles 


(21) Disc 


/35\ W.ce seal 


(49) Ec: 


/9\ Planetary earner cover 


(22) O-nng 


(36) Primary shaft 


(50) Paneiary :=:ne: 3=sem 


(10) Thrust '.'.asner 


(23) O-rmg 


(37) Ore. o 


biv 


(11) Neea'.e- roller oeartng 


(24) Boll 


(38) Lug .vastier 


(51) C-itj 


/12\ ComDCjna cianetary 


725\ Hydraulic cover 


(39) Wasr-er 


(52) Seal 


gears 


(26) O-ring 


(40) Bah 


(53) [Jeeale-rc ~- oea* ng 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




5E02.3 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5E02.4 



Gearbox - Speedshift 



V V 



Hydraulic operation : direct transmission (Fig.4) 

The range is changed by actuating the solenoid valve, 
which then feeds hydraulic oil to the chambers behind 
pistons (48) and (28) simultaneously. Braking piston 
(48) is then applied to pressure plate (20), which 
compresses the Belleville spring disc (18), thus 
releasing disc (21) and the planetary carrier assembly 
(50). At the same time clutch piston (28) clamps 
together pressure plates (41), (44), (47) and the discs 



(42), (45) which are driven by hub (15). Since the 
pressure plates are secured to the pianetary carrier by 
three lugs, drive is transmitted from the primary input 
shaft (36) to the hub (15) and from there to the clutch 
assembly which transmits it to the planetary carrier 
(50). The primary shaft (36) and the planetary gear and 
sun gear assembly turn at the same speed as the 
secondary shaft (5) thus giving direct transmission in 
the ratio of 1/1. 




: ig. 4 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




5E02.5 




^w^ 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5E02.6 



Gearbox - Speedshift 



V / 



A. Removing the front cover 

3000 tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox 
{Section 3 A01). 

3100 tractors 

2. Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox 
(Section .3 A02). 

3000-3100 tractors 

3. Remove the PTO shaft. 

4. Withdraw seal (52). 

5. Remove the bleed and supply pipes to the clutch 
assembly. 

6. Drain the gearbox only of oil. 

7. Unscrew bolts (24) (Fig. 6). 

8. Screw two pilot pins into the gearbox housing in 
diametrically opposed positions (Fig. 6). 

9. Unscrew the three bolts (49) a little at a time, taking 
them in order (Fig .6). 

1 0. Remove cover (27) together with shaft (36) (Fig. 6). 
Discard O-rings (1) and (2), (19) and (51). 
N.B.: In anticipation of future rationalisation of 
the design of the speedshift, the former 6-lug- 
ged friction disc has been replaced by one with 
40 internal splines. The hydraulic cover and the 
planetary carrier cover, and the bolts for secu- 
ring them, have also been replaced by new 
covers and bolts adapted to the design with the 
splined disc. 

These new parts were introduced as from serial 

no.P17901B. 

For tractors with lower serial numbers see 

Workshop Manual 1646640M1. 

1 1 . Take out disc (21). pressure plate (20), Belleville 
spring disc (18) and planetary carrier assembly 
(50) 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



■,' v 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




5E02.7 



B. Disassembling the front cover 

1 2. Extract circlip (37) and take out lug washer (38). 

1 3. Withdraw shaft (36) from the front of the cover. 

1 4. Take out needle-roller bearing (53). 

15. Remove washer (39). 

3000 tractors 

Take out the clutch slave cylinder assembly 

N.B. : You are advised not to take the release bearing 

out of the slave cylinder to avoid damage to the 

seals. 

1 6. Withdraw the release bearing from the slave cylin- 
der for a distance of approx. 40 mm (Fig. 8 - 5 B01 ), 
take off the bellows. 

17. Unscrew the three bolts holding the cylinder in 
place. 

3100 tractors 

Take out the clutch slave cylinder assembly 

18. Unscrew the bolts holding ; .ne slave cylinder as- 
sembly in place and take the assembly out. With- 
draw piston (48) from the cover (Fig. 7). 

3000-3100 tractors 

1 9. Remove seals (22) and (23) and discard them. 
N.B.: In 3000-3100 series tractors, new speeds- 
hift rings made of PTFE rather than cast iron 
and with gaps increased to 2.1/2.4 mm were 
introduced as from serial no. N1 55012. 

For tractors with serial numbers lower than this 
see Workshop Manual 1646640M1. 

20. Remove seal rings /30\ and /31\ (discard these 
rings). 

2 1 . Remove lip seals /34\ and /35\ and discard them. 

22. Take out needle-roller bearing (32) and discard it. 

23. Drive ring carr-ier (33) out of cover (27) (Fig. 8) (Work 
from the rear of the ring carrier using a plastic- 
iaced mallet as a drift). 



C. Separating planetary carrier and 
cover assembly. 

24. Place the planetary carrier assembly (50) down on 
a bench (with the planetary carrier cover /9\ on 
top). 

25. Unscrew bolts (3). 

26. Separate planetary carrier cover /9\ from hydraulic 
cover /25\ while holding sun gears /6\ and /7\ in 
position in planetary carrier cover (Fig.9). 






Fie. 9 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5E02.8 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




/ / 



D. Disassembling planetary carrier 
assembly 

27. Take out the 1st sun gear : 

- H\ 36 tooth in 30 km/h version (Fig.1) 

- /6\ 30 tooth in 40 km/h version (Fig.1 ) 

- /7\ 30 tooth in super creeper version (Fig.2) 
N.B. : Mark the direction in which the lubricating 
grooves in the sun gear should face when the 
gear is refitted. 

28. Drive out spindles /8\ with a drift and a mallet 
(Fig.10). 

29. Take out the planetary gears /12V 

30. Take out needle-roller bearings (11) and (16). 
spacers (14), and washers (10) and (17). 

31 . Take out the second sun gear : 

- /6\ 39 tooth in 30 km/h version (Fig.1 ) 
-/7\ 36 tooth in 40 km/h version (Fig.1) 

- /6\ 39 tooth in supper creeper version (Fig.2) 
N.B. : Bush (4) is a force fit in planetary carrier 
cover /9\. 

E. Disassembling the hydraulic 
cover 

32. Take out splined hub (15). 

33. Take out pressure plate (41), disc (42), spring 
washer (43). pressure plate (44), disc (45), spring 
washer (46) and pressure plate (47). 

34. Withdraw piston (28) from cover /25\ (Fig. 1 1 ). 

35. Remove O-rings (26) and (29) and discard them. 
N.B. : In the supper creeper version, cover I25\ 
and piston (28) differ from those in the 30 and 40 
km/h versions. The cross-sectional area of the 
piston is greater and this means that the diame- 
tric cutouts in the cover are larger. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



Br 

/ v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




5E02.9 



Reassembling the planetary 
rrier 

Glean and check the parts and replace any which 
are faulty. 

Lubricate the needle-roller bearings. 
Check that the oilways in spindles /8\ are not 
blocked. 
;m/h version 

Fit the 39 tooth sun gear /6\ into the planetary carrier 
cover (Fig. 12). 
km/h version 
Fitthe 36 tooth sun gear/7\into the planetary carrier 

cover (Fig. 12). 
>er cr^pei version 

Fit the^B tooth sun gear /6\intothe planetary carrier 
cover {Fig. 12). 

N.B. : In. all versions, fit the gear so that the 
lubricating grooves in it are facing towards face 
F of the planetary carrier cover (Fig. 12). 
Fit a needle-roller bearing (11), a spacer (14) and 
a needle-roller bearing (16) into a planetary gear 
/12V 

Fit an assembled planetary gear into the cover, with 
the following gears closer to face F in the respec- 
tive cases {Fig. 13) : 

- 21 tooth: 30 km/h version 

- 18 tooth: 40 km/h version 

- 27 tooth: super creeper version. 

N.B. : The planetary gear is marked with three 
punch marks made in a single face. Each punch 
mark indicates two teeth which line up. 
In thmcase of the 40 km/h version, mark the 
unpt^Ried face with three paint fines in the 
same positions as the punch marks made in the 
factory. 

Fit washers (10) and (17). 

Line up the planetary gear and washers with a 
locating rod made up locally : diameter = 16 mm, 
length = 80 mm (Fig. 13). 

Insert spindle /8\ into the unobstructed bore in face 
F and drive it home with a mallet until it is slightly 
recessed below the face (Fig. 14). 
N.B. : The oilway opening onto the circumfe- 
rence of spindle /8\ must face outwards. 
The oilway opening onto the end face of spindle 
/8\ must face towards face F of the planetary 
carrier cover (Fig. 13). 




Fig. 12 



Lubrication 




Fig. 13 




Fig. 14 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5E02.10 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




V 



47. Repeat procedures 42 to 46 to fit the other two 
planetary gears. 

N.B.: The marks (punch marks) on the three 
planetary gears must line up with the centre on 
line spaced 120P apart, as shown in Fig. 15. 
Once fitting of the spindles /8\ has been comple- 
ted, re-check that the marks on the planetary 
gears line up as above. 

If the marks do not line up properly, this will 
cause damage to the speedshift. 

48. Fit the following sun gears in the respective ver- 
sions ; 

- /7\ 36 tooth: 30 km/h version (Fig.1) 

- /6\39 tooth: 40 km/h version (Fig.l) 

- /7\ 30 tooth: super creeper version (Fig. 2) 

N.B. : In all versions, fit the gear so that the 
lubricating grooves in it are facing towards face 
F of the cover. 



G. Reassembling the hydraulic 
cover 

49. Clean and check the parts and replace any which 
are faulty. 

50. Make sure that the three openings into the 1 7 bar 
passage in the hydraulic cover /25\ are not blocked 
(Fig. 16). 

51. Lubricate O-rings {26) and (29) and fit them to 
piston (28). 

52. Lubricate the faces against which the piston seals 
bear in the hydraulic cover. 

53. Place the piston in the cover with the grooves 
facing towards the operator. 

54. Tap the piston (28) gradually home into the cover 
by working progressively round its face with a 
plastic-faced mallet (Fig. 17). 

N.B.: Once the piston is fitted, check that no 
pieces have been detached from the O-rings. 

55. Refit the splined hub (1 5) making sure it is correctly 
orientated. 

56. Refit pressure plate (47), spring washer (46), disc 
(45), pressure plate (44), spring washer (43), disc 
(42) and pressure plate (41). 

N.B. : Place the gaps in spring washers (43) and 
(46) in diametrically opposed positions. 





Fig. 17 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




5E02. 1 1 



H. Reassembling the planetary 
carrier assembly 

57. Screw two pilot pins into the hydraulic cover /25\ in 
diametrically opposed positions. 

58. Fit the planetary carrier cover /9\ to the hydraulic 
cover /25\, while holding the sun gears /6\ and /7\ 
in position. 

N.B. : Position the two covers so that the balan- 
cing marks (milled grooves or paint lines) are as 
far away from each other as possible (Fig. 18). 

59. Refit bolts (3). Bolts must be tightened to a torque 
of 10- 14 Nm. 

60. Tap spindles /8\ in with a pin punch so that they butt 
against the hydraulic cover /25V 

61. Check: 

- that discs (42) and (45) are not compressed 

- that planetary gears /12\ and sun gears /6\ and 
/7\ can turn freely. 

62. Fit planetary carrier assembly (50) to shaft (5). 

63. Fit Belleville spring disc (18). 

64. Fit pressure plate (20) into housing (13). 

N.B. : Apply three spots of grease («Amber 
Technical" or equivalent) to the lugs on the 
pressure plate. 

65. Engage friction disc (21) onto the planetary carrier 
assembly. 




I. Reassembling the front cover 

66. Clean the mating face and the rest of the cover. 
Make sure that the 1 7 bar passage and the lubrica- 
ting passage are not blocked. 

67. Fit seals (22) and (23) to piston (48). 

68. Lubricate the surfaces in the speedshift cover 
against which the piston seals bear. 

69. Position the piston on the cover with its grooves 
facing towards the operator. 

70. Tap piston (48) gradually home into the cover by 
working progressively round its face with a plastic- 
faced mallet (Fig. 19). 

N.B. : Once the piston is fitted, check that no 
pieces have been detached from the O-rings. 




Fie. '9 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5E02. 12 



Gearbox - Speedshift 



■/ ■/ 



71. Clean the ring carrier and its mating face (check 
that the 1 7 bar passage and the lubricating pas- 
sage are not blocked). 

N.B. : Ball (40) is crimped into the ring carrier. 

72. Position (Fig. 20) : 

• needle-roller bearing (32) at 29.3 ± 0.1 mm from 
faceG 

- seal /34\ at 43.8 mm from face H 

• wide seal /35\ at 0.3 - 0.8 from face G. 

N.B. : Use a press and a suitable press tool to 

position the bearing and seals perpendicular to 

the axis of the ring carrier. 

Having fitted seals /34\ and /35\, check that the 

two pressure-relief passages are not blocked 

(Fi9.21). 

73. Apply a gasketing compound (Loctite Masterjoint 
5 1 or equivalent) to the mating face of the cover to 
allow the ring carrier (33) to be fitted. 

74. Screw wo pilot pins (1) into the cover. Engage the 
ring carrier in the cover bore (Fig.22). 

N.B. : Check that the openings of the 17 bar 
passage and the lubricating passage in the ring 
carrier match up with the passages in the cover. 

75. Tap the ring carrier home in the cover (Fig.22). 

76. Lubricate seals /34\ and /35V 



3000 tractors 

Refit the ciiitch s!ave cylinder assembly 

77. Apply Loctite 241 to the three bolts and tighten 
them -0 torques of : 

8 mm : 25 - 35 Nm 
lQr-m : 50 - 70 Nm. 

78. Refit tr.e bellows and push in the release bearing. 

3100 tractors 

Refit the clutch slave cylinder assembly 

79. Apply Loctite 24 1 to the bolts which hold the clutch 
slave cylinder assembly in place and tighten them 
to the following torques : 

8 mm ; 25-35 Nm 
10 mm : 50 - 70 Nm. 



Pressure-relief 
passage 




Fitted dimensions / 



0.3-0.8 mm -— - 



Fitted dimension 29.3 ± 0.1 



Fitted dimension i 43.8 mm 



Fig.20 




ig-21 




Fig.22 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Speedshift 




5E02.13 



3000-3100 tractors 

80. Fit needte-roNer bearing (1) (Fig. 23) so that it is 15 

- 16 mm from the front face of the shaft. 

81 . Lubricate shaft (36) and insert it in ring carrier (33) 
from the front. 

N.B. : 

1) Make sure that the lubricating passages in the 
shaft are not blocked. 

2) Cover the splines in the shaft temporarily to 
avoid damage to seals /34\ and /35\. 

82. Refit washer (38) and circlip (37). 

83. Refit rings /30\ and /31\and make sure that they turn 
freely in the grooves. 

84. Having made this check, remove the rings, preform 
them by reducing them to approximately 1 /3 of their 
original diameter, and coat them with miscible 
grease (Amber Technical or equivalent) to ensure 
that they will be held in position effectively when the 
front cover is being refitted. 

85. Fit the rings into their respective grooves, making 
sure that : 

- they do not project from the circumference of the 
ring carrier, 

- their ends are correctly overlapped (Fig.24). 
N.B. : Even the slightest damage to the rings 
may give rise to leaks followed by pressure 
dropping in operation. 

86. Grease washer (39) and fit it into cover (27). 

87. Fit new O-rings (1) and (2), (19) and (51). 

88. Check that the locating pin is present in the rever- 
sing mechanism housing and that the two pilot pins 
are fitted. 



-jg . Fitted dimension 



16mn 



^jggz zzL, 



rrr? 




£z/ 



Fig.23 




J. Refitting the front cover 

89. Fit front cover (27) together with shaft (36). 
N.B. : 

1) Use the PTO shaft to make mating-up easier 
(only when fitting on tractor). 

2) Check that the 1 7 bar and lubricating passa- 
ges in the cover match up with the openings in 
the housing. 

90. Refit bolts (24) and tighten them to a torque of 45 
- 60 Mm. 

9 1 . Fit bolts (49) and tighten them to a torque of 25 - 
35 Nm. 

92. Reconnect the supply and bleed pipes to the 
clutch slave cylinder assembly. 



3000 tractors 

93. Re-unite the tractor between engine and gearbox 
(Section 3 A01). 

31 00 tractors 

94. Re-unite the tractor between engine and gearbox 
(Section 3 A02). 

3C00-31 00 tractors 

95. Top up the oil in the bousing. . 

96. Bleed the clutch circuit (Section 5 C01G). 

97. Carry out a road test on ihe speedshift control. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



5 E03 Reverse shuttle 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




5E03.1 



General 



Operation 



A. Removal . 



B. Refitment and adjustment of reverse gear fork 



List of parts . 



13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




-/ v 



5E03.2 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 



General 



The function of the reversing mechanism is to transmit 
motion from the speedshift (if fitted) or the mainshaft to 
the secondary shaft mounted at the front of the main 
gearbox. In the A/B range version (4x4), it provides two 
forward speeds and two reverse speeds. 

The reversing mechanism is housed in the enclosure at 
the back of the input gearbox behind the speedshift. It 
consists of : 

- two helical gears (5) and (23), carried on two roller 
bearings (6) and (20). These gears are in constant 
mesh with the A range gear (67) and the B range gear 
(76) respectively (4x4 version), these latter gears 
being mounted on the secondary shaft which forms 
the input to the main gearbox. In the 4 x 2 version, 
there is only the rear gear (5) in constant mesh with 
input gear (67) to the main gearbox. 

- a synchromesh assembly (18) including a body and 
outer member assembly (2). The body of assembly (2) 
is splined to the hollow input shaft (19). 

- an assembly comprising a guide rail and synchronic 
ser control fork. 

- a hollow shaft (1 9) carried in roller bearings (24) or /44\ 
(depending on version) and (9). The roller bearings 
are supported in two seatings in the reversing mecha- 
nism housing. 

- an idler gear set (15) in constant mesh with gear (23) 
and the A range gear (67) (4x4 version) or the input 
gear (4x2 version) of the gearbox. 



Reverse 

The reverse speeds are obtained by means of the 
reverse idle gear set (15). When either of the reverse 
speeds is selected (in the same range as was previou- 
sly selected in forward), only synchromesh assembly 
(18) moves. Drive is transmitted from hollow shaft (19) 
to secondary shaft (69) via the two sets of teeth on idler 
gear (15). 

A range 

When moved forward, synchromesh assembly (18) 
connects gear (23) to shaft (19). Drive is transmitted 
from gear (23), via sets of teeth (c) and (d) on gear (1 5). 
gear (67) and synchromesh assembly (78). to secon- 
dary shaft (69). 

B range 

When moved rearward, synchromesh assembly (18) 
connects gear (5) to shaft (19). 
Gear (5) transmits drive to turn gear (67). Gear (67) is 
in mesh with set of teeth (d), which rotate with set or 
teeth (c). Teeth (c) drive gear (23) and this turns 
secondary shaft (69) via gear (76) and synchromesh 
assembly (78). 



Operation 



Forward 
A range 

If they are moved in the rearward direction, the couplers 
of synchromesh assemblies (18) and (78) respectively 
connect gear (5) to shaft (1 9) and gear (67) to shaft (69). 
Gear (5) then applies drive to gear (67), with which it is 
in constant mesh, to synchromesh assembly (78) and 
to secondary shaft (69). 

B range 

tf they are moved in the forward direction, the couplers 
of the synchromesh assemblies respectively connect 
gear (23) to shaft (19) and gear (76) to shaft (69). Gear 
(23) then applies drive to gear (76), with which it is in 
constant mesh, to synchromesh assembly (78) and to 
secondary shaft (69). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




5E03.3 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5E03.4 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 



A. Removal 



Procedure where intermediate shaft has to be set 

up, e.g. when reverse mechanism housing {26) is 
being replaced. 

To allow the intermediate shaft bearings to be set up 
correctly, the: gearbox has to be removed from the 
tractor. 

3000-3100 tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle ; see Section 3 B02. 

3000 tractors 

2. Separate the gearbox from the engine ; see Sec- 
tion 3 A01 . Carry out procedures 1 1 and 12 after 
suspending the gearbox in slings (Fig.1). 

3100 tractors 

3. Separate the gearbox from the engine ; see Section 
5 A02.A, procedure 2. 

Procedure where intermediate shaft does not have 

to be set up. 

N.B.: Take off the RHstep. Gearbox only should be 

drained of oil. 

3000 tractors 

4. Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox, 
Section 3 A01. 

3100 tractors 

5. Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox, 
section 3A02. 

3000-3100 tractors, with or without shimming. 

6. Remove the PTO shaft and take out seal (6) (Fig. 2). 

7. Remove the bleed pipe (1) and supply pipe (2) and 
connector (3). Plug the passage openings (Fig. 2). 

8. Carry out the following procedures from Section 
5K01 

- 9 to 14 {procedure with no shimming) 

- 13 and 14 (procedure with shimming). 

9. Unscrew set-screws (34) and take off the selector 
dog (33). 

10. Unscrew the 8 bolt diam. 10 mm (4) (Fig. 2). 
W.B.: Do not remove the three bolts (5) (Fig.2) 
(with speedshift). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




5E03.5 



1 1. Release and withdraw the reversing mechanism by 
tilting it forward and down (Fig. 3). 

N. B. : Sa ve the locating pin (1) but discard the O- 
rings (2) and {3) (Fig.4). 

1 2. Place the reversing mechanism on a bench. 

1 3. Remove plug (29), spring (28) and locking plunger 
(27) 

N.B. : Remember that this plunger is not inter- 
changeable with the locking plungers used for 
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears in the gearbox 
(different length). 

1 4. Unscrew bolts (32). 

N.B.: To prevent jerky operation of the reversing 
mechanism, the locked position of the guide rail 
was modified as from serial no P188030. For 
tractors with serial number prior to the above, 
see Workshop Manual 1646640M1. 

15. Remove guide rail (31) and fork (30). 

N.B.: To avoid the risk of wear to the bearings 
carrying the reverse idler gear in the reversing 
mechanism, the following modifications were 
introduced as from these serial numbers: 

- P090012 : units with speedshift 

- P251008 : units without speedshift 

■ The shape of the thrust washers was altered to 
prevent them from turning. 

- The cast housing of the reversing mechanism 
was strengthened. 

For tractors with serial numbers prior to the 
above, see Workshop Manual 1646640 Ml. 





Fio. 3 i 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5E03.6 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 



V V 



16. Unscrew set-screw (10). 

17. Withdraw the shaft (13) carrying the reverse idler 
gear (15). 

1 8. Take out the two washers (12) and (1 7), the reverse 
idler gear, the two needle roller bearings (14) and 
(16), and the spacer (11). 

1 9. Carry out procedures 9 to 11, Section 5 E02 
(reversing mechanism with speedshift). 

20. Extract circlip (25) (reversing mechanism with 
speedshift). 

21. Remove spacer (36), sealing ring (37) and pipe 
(42) (reversing mechanism without speedshift). 

22. Remove the shims {1]. 

23. Press out the secondary shaft (19) using a press 
and a suitable press tool (Fig. 5 - reversing mecha- 
nism with speedshift) - (Fig. 6 - reversing mecha- 
nism without speedshift). 

N. B. : There ha ve been two alternative suppliers 
for the 114 mm diameter reversing synchro- 
mesh assembly : CGTand ZF. 
All 3000 series tractors produced from the be- 
ginning of production to serial no. V058034 and 
from serial no. P054040 onwards are fitted with 
a CGT assembly. 

All 3000 series tractors produced between se- 
rial nos. V058035 and P054039 are fitted with a 
ZF assembly. 

24. Take out washer /8\. 

25. Remove the gear and synchromesh assembly (18) 
(Fig.7). 

26. Take out bearing (9). 

27. From the gear and synchromesh assembly, sepa- 
rate: gear (5), bush (7), single-row needle-roller 
bearing (6), end ring (4), synchroniser brake (3), 
synchroniser (2), synchroniser brake (21 ), end ring 
(22), gear (23), and double-row needle-roller bea- 
ring (20). 

28. From the secondary shaft, separate : 

- bearing (24) and washer /35\ (with speedshift). 
N.B.: Mark which way round the washer fits. 

- bearing /44\ (without speedshift). 

N.B.: Mark which way round the bearing fits. 

29. Withdraw seal /41\ from spacer (36) and discard ii 
(if necessary). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




5E03.7 



B. Refitting and adjusting the 
reverse gear selector fork 

Refitment 

30. Clean and check all parts and replace any which 
are faulty. 

31. Check that oilways and their openings are not 
blocked in secondary shaft (19), shaft (13) and 
housing (26). 

32. Oil shaft, bearings and seals. 

33. Check the clearance between the synchroniser 
brakes (3) and (21 ) and the end rings (4) and (22). 
N.B. : See Section 5 A01, p.9. 

34. Fit washer /35\ to shaft (19) (lubrication grooves 
facing towards shoulder E) (Fig. 8). 

35. Press bearing (24) on until tight against washer /35\ 
with a press and a suitable press tool (units with 
speedshift) (Fig. 9). 

36. Press bearing /44\ on until tight against shoulder E 
on shaft (19) with a press and a suitable press tool . 
N.B. : The sealed side of the bearing should face 
towards shoulder E (units without speedshift) 
(Fig.10). 

37. Carry out procedures 25 to 27 in reverse. 




Fig. 8 




Fig. 9 




Fig. 10 i 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5E03.8 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




V V 



38. Fit and centralise washer /8\ with its lubrication 
grooves facing towards gear (5) (Fig. 1 1 ). 

39. Insert secondary shaft (19) into the gear and syn- 
chromesh assembly (18). 

40. Check that the splines on shaft (1 9) are engaged in 
the splines in the synchroniser body (2). 

Press the shaft in until it is fully home against the 
inner races of bearings (24) or /44\, and (9) with a 
press and a suitable press tool. 

- reversing unit with speedshift (Fig. 12a) 

- reversing unit without speedshift (Fig. 12b). 

41 . Refit circiip (25) (units with speedshift). 

42. Fit spacer (36) (units without speedshift) (Fig. 14). 
Tighten bolt (38) to a torque of 25-30 Nm. 
Tighten bolts (40) to a torque of 45-60 Nm. 

43. Hold the unit in a suitable position in a vice. 

44. Shim up the shaft bearings 
J1 = +0.05 to +0.2 mm 

- units with speedshift (Fig. 13). 

- units without speedshift (Fig. 14), 





Fig. 12 





Fig. u 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 




Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 



5E03.9 



45. Set up dial gauge with stylus against end of shaft 
(Fig.15). 

46. Pull on shaft to position bearing (24) correctly 
against circlip (25), or bearing /44\ correctly 
against spacer (36), depending on version. 

47. Set dial gauge to zero. 

48. Push on the shaft to position bearing (9) correctly, 
hard against the shoulder in the housing. 

49. As-dictated by the reading taken from the dial 
gauge, select shims of the appropriate thickness to 
give J1. 

50. Remove circlip (25) (units with speedshift). 

51 . Remove spacer (36) (units without speedshift). 

52. Fit the shims [1] selected in operation 49. 

53. Refit circlip (25) (units with speedshift). 

54. Where required, fit a new seal /41 \ in spacer (36) so 
that it is a distance of 27.5 mm from face F (units 
without speedshift) (Fig. 16) 

N.B. : Use a suitable tool to set up the seal 
perpendicular to the axis of the spacer. 

55. Cover the splines in shaft (19) temporarily so that 
seal /41\ will not be damaged (units without 
speedshift). 

56. Lubricate seal /41\ and refit spacer (36), with a new 
sealing ring (37), and pipe (42) (units without 
speedshift). 

Remove the temporary covering and tighten bolts 
(38), smeared with Loctite 542, to a torque of 25-30 
Nm. Tighten bolts (40), smeared with Loctite 542, 
to a torque of 45-60 Nm. Remove the temporary 
covering (units without speedshift). 

57. Check the rotation of shaft (19) and the end float of 
gears (5) and (23) manually. 

58. Carry out procedures 17 and 18 in the reverse 
order. 

59. Apply Loctite 241 to set screw (10) and tighten 
screw to a torque of 28-43 Nm. 

N.B.: Check the end float and backlash of the 
reverse idler gear (15). ,, 

60. Carry out procedures 62 to 65 from Section 5 E02 
(units with speedshift). 

61 . Carry out procedures 83 to 87 from Section 5 E02 
(units with speedshift). 

62. Carry out procedure 89 from Section 5 E02 (units 
with speedshift). 

63. Fit the three 8 mm bolts holding the speedshift 
cover to the unit and tighten them to a torque of 
25-35 Nm (units with speedshift). 





Fig. 16 



64. Clean out the tapped holes in fork (30) and slide ;ne 
fork onto the guide rail (31). 

65. Fit locking plunger (27), spring (28) and plug (29) 
Fighten the plug to a troque of 50-70 Nm. 

66. Coat screws (32) lightly with Loctite 22 1 and tighten 
them gently to allow the selector fork to be adjus- 
ted. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5E03.10 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




V V 



Adjusting the selector fork (procedures 67 

to 71) 

General principle 

The fork (30) is positioned by means of the difference 

in the spacing Y of the tapped holes and the spacing Z 

of the spot-facings in the guide rail (31). 

The fork can be adjusted to move to different points by 

acting on either the front or rear screw (32) depending 

on what adjustment is required (Fig. 17). 

67. Position the fork so that it is locked in the forward 
position. 

68. Hold the synchro outer member against the gear. 

69. Check that the front pad on the fork is not touching 
the synchro outer member. 

70. Repeat the procedure (with the fork locked in the 
rearward position), checking that the rear pad on 
the fork is not touching the synchro outer member. 
If it is. adjust the fork by acting on screws (32) 
(Fig. 17). 

71 . Tighten the screws to a torque of 35 Nm without 
disturbing the adjustment. 

72. On the reversing mechanism, check that cup (1) 
and 0-ring (2) are in position (Fig. 18). 

73. Fit locating pin (4) and new O-rings (3) to the 
housing (Fig. 19). 

74. Offer up the reversing mechanism to the gearbox 
housing and tilt it downwards to engage its gearing 
in the A/B gearing (4x4 gearboxes). 

75. At the same time, with the help of an assistant, lift 
the front of the intermediate shaft slightly through 
the opening in the selector cover to allow the cone 
to be engaged in the cup. 

76. Locate the reversing mechanism on the locating 
pin. 

77. Fit the bolts and tighten them to a torque of 45-60 
Nm. 

78. Refit pipes (1) and (2), and connector (3) (Fig. 2). 

Version with shimmed intermediate shaft 

79. Carry out procedures 21 and 22 from Section 
..< 5A02.E. 

Carry out procedures 195 to 205 from Section 
5A02.Q. 

80. Fit the reverse selector dog (33) (shimmed and 
unshimmed units} 

81 Carry out procedures 233 to 237 from Section 
5 A02.R (shimmed and unshimmed units). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ v 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




5E03.11 



Refitting 4x2 selector cover 

82. Carry out procedures 238 to 243, Section 5 A02.S 
(shimmed and unshimmed units) 

From Section 5 K01 , carry out in reverse order: 

- procedure 13. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 50- 
70 Nm (shimmed and unshimmed units). 

- procedures 11 and 12 (unshimmed units). 

- procedure 10 (unshimmed units). 

N.B.: Grease ball-joints (8) (14) and (21) (27) 
(Ldctite anti-seize grease or equivalent). 
Carry out procedure 50, Section 5 K01 (unshim- 
med units). 

Carry out procedures 8 and 9, Section 5 K01 in 
reverse (unshimmed units). 
Refitting 4x4 selector cover 

83. Carry out procedures 246 to 255 from Section 
5 A02.S (shimmed and unshimmed units) 

Fit the earth cable lug to the cover (shimmed and 

unshimmed units). 

Carry out procedures 256 and 257, Section 5 A02.S 

(shimmed and unshimmed units). 

Carry out procedures 48 to 51, Section 5 K01 

(unshimmed units). 



Version with unshimmed intermediate shaft 
3000 tractors 

87. Connect the tractor at the joint between the engine 
and gearbox, Section 3 A01. 

3100 tractors 

88. Connect the tractor at the joint between the engine 
and gearbox, Section 3 A02. 

3000-3100 tractors 

89. Top up the oil in the housing and bleed the clutch 
circuit, Section 5 C01.F. 

90. Carry out a road test on all the controls. 

91. .Check the selector cover joint and the joint 
between the gearbox and rear axle for leaks. 



Version with shimmed intermediate shaft 
3000 tractors 

84. Connect the gearbox to the engine. Carry out the 
following procedures from Section 3 A01: 

- 13. 1 4 (except a and b) 
-15, 16 

- 17, 18 (after suspending the gearbox in slings) 
31 00 tractors 

85. Connect the gearbox to the engine. Carry out the 
following procedures from Section 3 A02: 

- 15 to 17 

- 18 (except a and b) 
19 to 22. 

3000-3100 tractors 

86. Join the tractor at the joint between the gearbox 
and the rear axle. Section 3 B02. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




\/ 



5E03.12 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 



@k-_f @ 



Exploded view 




WITH SPEEDSHIFT 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox - Reverse shuttle 




5E03.13Q 



List of parts • Reverse shuttle 


[1] 


Shims 


(2) 


Synchroniser 


(3) 


Synchroniser brake 


(4) 


Synchroniser end ring 


(5) 


Gear 


(6) 


Single-row needle-roller bearing 


(7) 


Bush 


/8\ 


Thrust washer 


(9) 


Bearing 


(10) 


Set screw 


(11) 


Spacer 


(12) 


Thrust washer 


(13) 


Shaft 


(14) 


Needle-roller bearing 


(15) 


Reverse idler gear 


(16) 


Needle-roller bearing 


(17) 


Thrust washer 


(18) 


Synchromesh assembly 


(19) 


Secondary shaft 


(20) 


Double-row needle-roller bearing 


(21) 


Synchroniser brake 


(22) 


Synchroniser end ring 


(23) 


Gear 


(24) 


Bearing 


(25) 


Circlip 


(26) 


Housing 


(27) 


Locking plunger 


(28) 


Spring 


(29) 


Plug 


(30) 


Fork 


(31) 


Guide rail 


(32) 


Adjusting screw 


(33) 


Selector dog 


(34) 


Ad|usting screw 


/35\ 


Thrust washer 


(36) 


Spacer 


(37) 


O-ring 


(38) 


Bolt 


(39) 


Connector 


(40) 


Bolt 


/41\ 


Seal 


(42) 


Pipe 


(43) 


Connector 


/44\ 


Bearing 



With speedshift 



Without speedshift 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 





5E03.13 





^m 




WITH SPEEDSHIFT 




V V 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - A/B range and synchromesh 5F01.1 



5 F0 1 A/B range gears and synchromesh 
mechanism 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Disassembly 



B. Reassembly 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5F01.2 Gearbox - A/B range and synchromesh 



General 



Drive from the reverse shuttle gears is transmitted to the 
train of two gears fitted at the front end of the (ayshaft to 
give two additional forward and reverse speeds to the 
main gearbox. 

For a general description of the A/B range operation, 
refer to Sections 5 E03 and 5 K01 . 
The A range (67) and B range (76) gears, separated by 
the synchromesh assembly, are located on the front 
end of the gearbox layshaft. 

They are fitted respectively on the needle roller bea- 
rings (79), (75) and the bushes /81Y (74) and retained 
by the sleeve (82). the washer /73\ and the nut (68). 



3100 Tractors 

1 4. Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Section 3 A02. 

3000-3100 Tractors 

15. Drain the gearbox. 

16. Carry out procedures 8 to 14. Section 5 K01. 

17. Carry out procedures 7 ana 10 to 12, Section 
5E03. 

18. Carry out procedures 2 lo 14. Section 8 101. 

1 9. Carry out procedures 4 to 6, Section 5 D01 .A. 

20. Carry out procedures 7 to 10. Section 5 A02.C. 

21 . Remove the slider (7) (Fig. 2). 

22. Carry out procedures 62 and 55 in Section 5 D01 .B 

23. Move the selector rail rearwards to release the A/B 
fork. J 



A > Disassembly 



Without creeper gears 

3000 Tractors 

1 . Spiit the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Section 3 A01. 

3100 Tractors 

2. Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Section 3 A02. 

3000-3100 Tractors 

3. Drain the gearbox. 

4. Carry out procedures 8 to 14. Section 5 K01 . 

5. Carry out procedures 7 and 10 to 12. Section 
5E03. 

6. Carry out procedures 7 to 11. Section 5 A02.C 

7. Remove the slider (7) (Fig. 2). 

8. Extract the insert (1) (Fig. 1 ). 

9. Withdraw the selector rail forwards. 

1 0. Remove the latch assembly (1) (Fig. 2) 

1 1 . Remove and clean (Fig.2) ; 

- the castellated nut (2) 

- the latch (3) 

- the tapered bearing (4) 

- the cone (5) 



Tractors fitted with creeper gears 
The RH hydraulic lift cover must be removed. 

1 2. Set tne RH rear wheel on wide track to gain access 
to the cover. 

3000 Tractors 

1 3. Spin the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box. Section 3 A01. 




Fig. 1 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - A/B range and synchromesh 5F01.3 



Disassembly with or without creeper gears 

24. Release the lock from the nut (68) and remove it 
using special tool M-F 456 by engaging the syn- 
chromesh mechanism and immobilising the B 
gear. 

Note : To improve the performance of the synchro- 
mesh and A/8 range cones, rings with sintered 
grooved cones are now fitted. The new synchro' 
mesh assembly was introduced on 40 kph trac- 
tors from serial number P089036 and on 30 kph 
tractors from serial number P297030. 

25. Remove the spur washer /73V 

26. Remove the B gear (76) together with the needle 
roller bearing (75) and the bush (74) (Fig. 3). 

27. Remove the attaching bolts (1 ) from the shoes (2) 
on the A/B fork (3) {Fig. 4) 

28. Remove the brake (77), the synchromesh ring (78) 
and the brake (80) (Fig. 3) without unfastening the 
synchromesh hub siide. 

29. Remove the fork. 

Note: Move the A gear (67) to release the fork. 

30. Remove the A gear together with the needle roller 
bearing (79) and the bush /81\ 





Fig. 3 



Issue l 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5F01.4 



Gearbox - A/B range and synchromesh 




B. Reassembly 



Tractors without creeper gears 

3 1 . Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
faulty. 

32. Lubricate the bushes and bearings. 

33. Refit the A gear together with the needle roller bea- 
ring (79) and the bush /81\ with its shoulder facing 
the synchromesh mechanism. 

34. Move the A gear slightly forwards to refit the fork. 

35. Carry out procedures 9 to 1 1 in reverse. 

36. Refit the brake (80) and the synchromesh mecha- 
nism (78). 

37. Position the shoes (2), fit the bolts after coating 
them with Loctite 24 1 and tighten them but not fully 
(Fig.4). 

38. Check that the sn.oes move freely in the synchro- 
mesn slider. 

39. Refit She gear (76). the brake (77). the bearing (75) 
and the bush (74) and check [hat the synchromesh 
brakes (77) ana (80) are correctly positioned. 

40. Refit the spur washer /73V the oil grooves must face 
the B gear. 

41. Clean the thread of the shaft and of the nut (68). 
Coat it with Loctiie 24 1 and iighten to a torque of 80- 
1 00 Nm, Lock the nut by bending the collar into the 
shaft groove. 

42. Check manually that the A/B synchromesh opera- 
tes correctly. 

43. Carry out procedures 214 to 216 in Section 
5A02.R. 

44. Carry out procedures 223 to 232 in Section 
5 A02.R. 

45. Carry oul procedures 72 to 78 in Section 5 E03. 

46. Clean the selector cover joint and carry out proce- 
dures 45 to 51 in Section 5 K01. 

Tractors with creeper gears 

47. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
faulty. 

48. Lubricate the bushes and bearings. 

49. Relit the A gear together with the needle roller 
bearing (79) ana the bush /81\ with ha shoulder 
facing the synchromesh mechanism. 

50. Move the A gear slightly forwards to refit the fork. 
5 1 Move the selector rail forwards to insert it into the A/ 

B fork. 

52. Fit the setscrew after coating it with Loctite 542 and 
tighten to a torque of 28-43 Nm. 

53. Press in the insert coated with Loctiie 5-12 Mush with 
the housing. 



54. Refit the brake (80) and the synchromesh mecha- 
nism (78). 

55. Position the shoes (2), fit the boits after coating 
them with Loctite 241 and tighten mem Dut not fully 
(Fig.4). 

Note: Check that the shoes move freely in the 
synchromesh slider. 

56. Refit the gear (76), the braKe (77). the Dearing (75) 
and the bush (74) and check that the synchromesh 
brakes (77) and (80) are correctly positioned. 

57. Refit the spur washer /73\. the oii grooves mustface 
the B gear. 

58. Clean the thread of the shaft and of the nut (68). 
Coat it with Loctite 24 1 and tighten to a torque of 80- 
1 00 Nm. Lock the nut by bending the collar into the 
shaft groove. t 

59. Manually check that the A/B svncnromesh ODera- 
tes correctly. 

60. Carry out procedure 216 in Section 5 A02.R. 

61 . Carry out procedure 83. Section 5 0-01 .B. 

62. Carry out procedure 29. iection £ 001. A. 

63. Carry out procedures 223 to 232 in Section 
5A02.R. 

64. Clean the selector cover joint and carry out proce- 
dures 15 to 27, Section 8 101. 

65. Carry out procedures 72 to 78 in Section 5 E03. 

66. Clean the selector cover joint and carry out proce- 
dures 45 to 5 1 in Section 5 K01 . 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 
3000 Tractors 

67. Refit the gearbox to the tractor. Section 3 A01 . 
3100 Tractors i 

68. Refit the gearbox to ihe tractor. Section 3 A02. 

Tractors with creeper gears 

69. Fit the creeper gear control. 

70. Adjust the creeper gear control. Section 5 J01 . 

7 1 . Position the wheel on normal track (creeper gears). 
Tighten the nuts to 400 - 450 Nm 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

72. Fill the gearbox with oil. 

73. Remove air from the hydraulic ciutch circuit. Sec- 
tion 5 C01G. 

74. Road test the A/B range, the gears. I he Hare/Tor- 
toise range ana the creeper gears {if fitted). 

75. Check the following lor ic-aks: 

- the selector cover gasket faces 

- the RH hydraulic iifl cover qasKet faces , 

- the hydraulic unionu ' 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Mainshaft 




5G01.1 



5G01 Mainshaft 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Preliminary procedures . 



B. Disassembly and reassembly. 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5G01.2 



Gearbox - Mainshaft 



General 



B. Disassembly and reassembly 



The mainshaft (69) is fitted on the two taper rotter bea- 
rings (1) (2) and (16) (17) which are supported by the 
two lower bearings of the main gearaox. The front end 
houses the A/B range gears and synchromesh assem- 
bly 4x4 (16 speed) version or the input gear 4x2 (8 
speed) version. 

Between the two lower bearings it supports the 1st (7) 
and 2nd (1 4) drive gears which run free and the 1 st and 
2nd synchromesh assembly (1 1 ) whose hub is splined 
on to it. At the rear end, it supports the 3rd (4x4) or 4th 
(4x2) (18) drive gear and the 3rd/4th synchromesh 
assembly (23). 

The rear end carries a needle roller bearing (24) which 
supports the front end of the output shaft (44). The 
moving parts are lubricated by a central oiiway ano 
holes drilled radially. The taper roller bearings are 
preloaaed by means of the shim /4\ and shim adjusters 
[3] located behind the bearing cup (2). 



4. Carry out the following operations in Section 5 A02: 



4x2 gearbox 

5 to 63 
125 to 245 



4x4 gearbox 

5 to 48 

64 to 124 

139 to 237 

246 to 259 



Refit the gearbox to the engine. 
3000 Tractors 

5. Carry out procedures 13 to 18. Section 3 A01. 
3100 Tractors 

6. Carry out procedures 15 to 22. Section 3 A02. 

3000-3100 Tractors g 

Refit the gearbox to the rear axie (see Sectiorfl 
3 B02). 

7. Road test the control assemoiv 

8. Check the selector cover ana gear do/ gasket face', 
for leaks 



A. Preliminary procedures 

The gearbox must be removed in order to dismantle 
the mainshaft. 
3000-3100 Tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox ana the rear 
axle. Section 3 B02. 

3000 Tractors 

2. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the en- 
gine. Section 3 A01. 

Support the gearbox on a siing and carry out crocedu- 
res 11 and 12. Remove the PTO shatt. 
3100 Tractors 

3. Split the tractor between the gearbox ana the en- 
gine. Section 5 A02.A. procedure 2. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - Mainshaft 



5G01.3 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




■/ •/ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Layshaft 




5H01.1 



5H01 Layshaft 



CONTENTS 



General . 



A. Preliminary procedures 



B. Disassembling layshaft 



C. Reassembling layshaft 



D. Refitting input gearbox . 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5H01.2 



Gearbox - Layshaft 



/ V 



General 



The layshaft and the gears it carries form the upper 
drive line in the gearbox. The shaft (54) carries the 
driven gears for 1st speed (60), 2nd speed (59), 3rd 
speed (56) and 4th speed (55). In the 4 x 2 version (8 
speeds). (55) is the 3rd speed gear and (56) the 4th 
speed gear. The set of teeth at the rear are in constant 
mesh with the Lo gear. 



The front of the shaft is carried by a taoer roller bearing 
(63) (64) in the rear of the input gearccx and at the rear 
it is carried in a bearing (52) (53) mounted in the bearing 
at the rear of the gearbox. 

Gears (56) and (59) are held in position either by two 
circtips (57) and (58) in version A. or by a spacer (57) 
in version B. The running clearance the gears require is 
obtained by machined tolerances in version A and by 
inserting shims [58] in version B. 



VERSION B 




Fig-i 



Issue t 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Layshaft 




5H01.3 



A. Preliminary procedures 

To allow the bearings carrying the layshaft to be 
correctly shimmed, the gearbox must be removed. 

3000-3100 tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between gearbox and rear axie. 
Section 3 B02. 

3000 tractors 

2. Separate the gearbox from the engine. Carry out 
procedures 1 1 and 12, Section 3 A01 (having sus- 
pended the gearbox in slings). 

Remove the PTO shaft. 

3100 tractors 

3. Separate the gearbox from the engine 
Carry out procedure 2. Section 5 A02.A. 

4. Remove bleed pipe (1), supply pipe (2) and con- 
nector (3) (plug the openings into the passages) 
(Fig.2). 

3000-3100 tractors 
Removing the selector cover 

5. Carry out procedures 1 3 and 1 4. Section 5 K0 1 . 

6. Unscrew the 8 x 10 mm bolts (4) (Fig.2). 

N.B.: Do not unscrew the three bolts (5) (Fig.2) 

7. Release and withdraw the input gearbox by tilting it 
forwards and down (Fig. 3). 

N.B.: Keep locating pin (1) but discard O-rings (2) 
and (3) (Fig.4). 

8. Position ;he input gearbox on a bench. 




fc^sssssa: 



IlIE 




Fig. 3 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5H01.4 



Gearbox - Layshaft 




B. Disassembling the layshaft 

9. Withdraw the assembled shaft (Fig. 5). 

1 0. Remove washer (50). 

1 1 . Remove shims [51] 

12. Remove cup (52). 
Disassembling shaft (54) (Fig.6) 

A new shaft arrangement was introduced as 
from serial number P345012 (version b). 
Previous tractors were fitted with version a. 

13. Extract bearing cones (53) and (63). 

N.B. : Keep the cups and cones together in pairs 
if they are going to be revised. 

14. Remove circlip (61). 

15. a) Take off the 1st speed gear (60) anc trie 2nd 
speed gear (59). 

b) Take off the 1 st speed gear (60). shims [58]. and 
the 2nd speed gear (59). 

16. a) Remove cjrciips (58) one (57). 
b) Remove spacer (57) 

1 7. Take off the following gears: 

- 4th speed (56) (4x2 gearbox) 

- 3rd speed (55) (4x2 gearbox} 

18. Take off the following gears: 

- 3rd speed (56) (4x4 gearbox) 

- 4th speed (55) (4x4 gearbox) 

19. Drive out needle-roller bearing (62) (Fig. 7) and 
discard it. 





Fig. 7 



issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Layshaft 




5H01.5 



C. Reassembling layshaft 

20. Clean and check the parts and replace any which 
are faulty. 

A new shaft arrangement was introduced as from 
serial number P345012 (version b). 
Previous tractors were fitted with version a. 

21 . In a press, press needle-roller bearing (62) in until 
it is bearing against the shoulder in shaft (54) 
(F'ig.8). 

N.B.: Check that the needle-rollers can turn 
normally in their cages. 

22. a) Carry out procedures 14 to 18 in reverse. 
N.B.: Make sure that the circlips seat cleanly in 
their grooves. 

Clearance J1 is set by machined tolerances 

(Fig.9). 

b) Carry out procedures 17 and 18 in reverse. 

Slide spacer (57) onto the shaft. 

Fit 2nd speed gear (59). 1st speed gear (60) and 

circiip (61). 

With a set of feeler gauges, measure the gap 

between 1st speed gear (60) ana 2nd soeed gear 

(59) 

As a function of the gap measured, selec; shims of 

a thickness to give (Fig.9) ; 

J1 = to +0.25 mm 

Remove circiip (61 ) and gear (60). 

Slide the shims selected as above onto the shaft. 

Refit the gear and circiip. 

N.B.: Make sure that the circiip is correctly 

fitted. 

23. Press on cones (63) and (53) with a suiiaDle press 
tool (Fig. 10). 

24. Refit cup (52) and replace the assembled shaft. 





Fig. 10 



Issue t 



November 1991 



www.maskimsten.ne 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5H01.6 



Gearbox - Layshaft 




/ ■■/ 



D. Refitting input gearbox 

25. Fit new O-rings (3) and the locating pin (4) to the 
gearbox housing (Fig.1 1). 

Check that cup (1) is present in the input gearbox 
housing and fit a new O-ring (2) lo the housing 
(Fig. 121 

26. Engage the input gearbox assembly in the gearbox 
housing by tilting it back ana down to engage the 
gears of the reverse shuttle in the A/B gearing 
(4x4 gearbox). 

27. At the same time, with the help of an assistant, raise 
the front of the layshaft slightly through the ooening 
in the selector cover to engage the cup in the cone. 

28. Locate tne input gearbox on the locating pin. 

29. Fit the Doits and tighten them to a torque of 45 - 
60 Nm. 

30. Refit pipes (1) and (2) ana connector (3) (Fig.2). 

Shimming the layshaft. 

Carry out proceaures 195 to 205 from Section 5 A02.Q. 

Refitting 4x2 selector cover 

31. Carry out procedures 238 to 243 from Section 
5 A02.S 

Fit the earth cable lug to the cover. 

Carry out procedure 1 3, Section 5 K01 . in reverse. 

Tighten bolts to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm. 

Refitting 4x4 selector cover 

32. Carry out procedures 246 to 255 from Section 
5 A02.S. 

Fit the earth cable tug to tne cover. 

Carry out procedures 256 and 257 from Section 

5 A02.S. 

Fit gearbox to engine. 

3000 tractors 

33. Carry out procedures 1 3 ana l ; i (except a !. Section 
3A01. 

34. Carry out orocedures 15 and 1G. Section 3 A01. 

35. Carry out procedures 17 and 18 (after suspending 
the gcaroox in slings J. Section 3 A0I. 

3100 tractors 

36. Carrv out Drocedures 15 to 17. Section 3 A02, 

37. Carry nut orocedures 18 (e-.'.cipt a}. Section 3 A02. 

38. Carry out orocedures 10 to 22. Section 3 A02. 





3000-3100 tractors 

Join the tractor between qearoox ann rt.-.r ;sxle. Section 
3 B02. 
39. Check . 

- all circuits tor ieahs 

- that electrical circuits a:;.- ■.vorKinn 

40. Carry out road res; on cur.untr, 

4 1 . ChecK mat there are nn Ic-.iks m the mints (selector 
cover pint and |Oini between qearoox and rear 
axle) nr the corneclionr. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5101 Output shaft 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Removing selector cover 



B. Removing guide rail and selector forks 

C. Removing output shaft 



D. Refitting and shimming output shaft 



www.maskinisten.net 




Gearbox - Output shah 5101.1 



E. Refitting guide rail and selector forks 8 

F. Refitting selector cover 11 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5101.2 



Gearbox - Output shaft 



^ 



General 



The output shaft transmits the drive provided by the 
various gear ratios to the rear axle transfer shaft. It is 
mounted at the rear of the gearbox on the lower trans- 
mission drive line. 

At the front it is carried in a needle-roller bearing 
located in the bore in the mainshaft and at the rear in two 
iaper bearings mounted with their tapers opposed. 
The shaft (44) carries : 

- a driving gear (29) which is mounted to rotate freely on 
combination bearings (28) and (30). 

- an assembly consisung of gear (36) and spacer (35), 
which are mounted to turn freely. 

- a coupler (31) and its hub (33) which are splined to 
rotate together. 



To ensure that the complete assembly will operate 
correctly under the forces applied to the transmission, 
various settings have to be made with shims : 

- setting J3 : by means of shim or shims [47], this 
setting allows the clearance to be taken up between 
cones (39) and (40) and their resDective cups. 

- setting J4 : shims or shims [38] placed between the 
shoulder on shaft (44) ana cone (39) allow end float for 
gear (29) 

- setting J5 : shim or shims (42] placed between cone 
(40) and packing shim /43\take up the axial clearance 
which cones (39) and (40) have on shaft (44). 




Fig. 1 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Output shaft 




5101.3 



A. Removing selector cover (Fig.2) 

1 ■ Before doing anything to the selector cover, split the 
tractor between gearbox and rear axle. Section 3 
B02. 

2. Remove the A/B range supply pipe (1). 
(4x4 gearbox). Remove bolts (2) 

N.B.: On gearboxes with creeper gears, remove 
the control cable support and mark the position 
of bolt /3\. 

3. Remove cover (4) and bolt (5). 

8. Removing guide rail and selector 
forks 

N.B. : 

1) Gearbox fitted with creeper gears. 

Remove pin (1), tocknut (2), adjustable locking 
screw (3), and fork (4) together with sleeve (5) 
(Fig.3). 

2) Mechanical locking for the Hi-Lo (Hare/Tortoise) 
range was introduced in production as from serial 
number P107048. 

For tractors with numbers lower than this, see 
Workshop Manual 1646640M1. 

4. Remove plugs (1), springs (2) and locking plungers 
(3) from forks (5) and (6) (Fig. 4). 

5. Slacken off lock ring (21 ) with spanner 36 1 5334 M0 1 
(Ftg.5). 

6 Engage 4th gear (4x2 gearbox ) or 3rd gear (4x4 
oearbox). 




Fig.2 





he j 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5101.4 



Gearbox - Output shaft 



7. Free off cone (24) on guide rail (7) with a bronze 
drift (Fig.6). 

8. Unscrew set screw (8). 

9. Remove : bearing (15). guide raii (7) from the rear, 
forks (5) and (6), and locking assembly (25). 

1 0. Remove : lock ring (21), locking gate (22), bearing 
(23), and cone (24). 

Remove : set screw (19), piston (13), Hi-Lo fork 
(20). bolt and washer (17), siider(18). and cylinder 
(10). 

N.B.: Discard O-rings (11), (12) and (14). Leave 
the A/B fork (4) in the housing. 



C. Removing output shaft 

N.B.: Remove the creeper gearbox if the tractor is 
fitted with one (see 5 A02.F). 

1 1 Unscrew the three bolts (41). 

1 2. Take off the retainer ring (46). 

1 3. Withdraw bearing cup (48). 

N.B.: Keep cups and cones together in pairs if 
they are to be re-used. 

14. Takeoff circlip (45) 

15. Remove packing shim /43\ ana adjusting shims 
[42] 

16. Remove bearing cone (40). 

N.B.: Where shimming was needed between the 
cones, take off the shims [47]. 

17. Remove cone (39). 

18. Takeoff shims [38]. 

N.B. : In all versions, the Hi-Lo range synchroni- 
ser was replaced by a coupler as from serial 
number V252037. For tractors with earlier num- 
bers, see Workshop Manual 1646640M1. 

19. Slide the Hi-Lo coupler (31) (Fig. 7) onto the Lo gear 
(36). 

20. Pull shaft (44) towards the rear. 

21. Remove spring ring (34) with tool MF460 and 
discard it (Figs.7 and 8). 

22. Remove the shaft. 

23. Through the opening in the selector cover take out: 
hub (33) and its couoler. gear (29). synchroniser 
brake (25). the two thrust washers (32). (27) and the 
Lo gear (36). 

N.B.: Keep the synchromesh brake (25) paired 
with gear (29) if they are to be re-used. 
24 Remove cup (37). 




Fig. 5 




Fig.6 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Output shaft 




5101.5 



25. Remove circlip (49). 

26. Remove circlip (19). washer (22) and needle-roller 
bearing (24). 

D. Refitting and shimming output 
shaft 

27. Clean and check the parts and replace any which 
are faulty. 

28. Fit circlip (49) and cup (37). 

N.B.: The HhLo range synchroniser was repla- 
ced by a coupler as from serial number 
V252037. 

For tractors with earlier numbers, see Work- 
shop Manual 1646640M1. 

29. On shaft (44) refit needle-roller bearing (24). 
washer (22) and circlip (19). Engage the shaft in the 
housing without gears. 

30. Slide cones (39) and (40) onto tne shaft. 
Setting J3 

3 1 . The purpose or this procedure is to orepare for the 
making of setting J3 (Fig. 9). Hold cones (39) anc 
(40) hard against the shoulder on shaft (44) by 
applying manual pressure to them, 

Fill the gap between the rear face of cone (40) and 
the groove for circlip (45) with shims [42] and 
packing shim /43\. Select a new circlip such that it 
will be a slightly tight fit in the groove (Fig. 10). 

32. Make the setting (Fig. 1 1 ) with shims to give : 
J3 = -0.0S to +0.05 mm 

The setting consists in taking up the clearance 
between cone (39), (40) and cljos (37), (48) while 
ODservmg the tolerance given aDove. 





Fig. 10 




Fig. 1 1 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5101.6 



Gearbox - Output shaft 



•■/ V 



33. Fit circiip (45) 

N.B.: Fit the packing shim on the same side as 
the circiip. 

34. Fit cup (48) and retainer ring (46). 

35. Tighten bolts (41) to a torque of 27 - 32 Nm. 

36. Set up a dial gauge against the end-face of shaft 
(44) (Fig. 12). 

N.B.: In the case of gearboxes fitted with cree- 
per gears, use the gearbox ring (Fig. 13) rather 
than the retainer ring. Tighten the bolts to a 
torque of 34 - 52 Nm. 

37. Push on the shaft while turning it alternately clock- 
wise and anticlockwise to seat the cones properly 
in the cups. 

38. Zero the dial gauge. 

39. Repeat procedure 37 pulling on the shaft. 

40. If the end float measured is greater than 0.05 mm. 
select shim(s) X [47] to give: 

J3 = -0,05 a + 0,05 

Important: The shim or shims X [4 7] selected for 
J3 must be in place between the cones for the 
following settings. 

Setting J4 

41 . Remove circiip (45). 

42. Take out packing shim /43\ and adjusting shims 
[42] 

43. Measure the total thickness Y of shims [42] and /43\ 
(this measurement will be helpful for setting J5). 

44. Remove bolts (41) and retainer ring (46). 

45. Take out cup (48), cones (40), (39) and shaft (44). 

46. Fit together in the housing the following : Lo gear 
(36). coupler (31). hub (33). thrust washer (32). 
gear (29) (4th speed in 4 x 4 gearbox, 3rd in 4 x 2 
gearbox), together with its combination needle- 
roller bearings (30) and (28). thrust washer (27), 
and synchro brake (25). 

N.B.: If bush (35) is showing signs of wear, 
replace the gear complete (the bush is reamed 
after fitting). 

If the combination bearings (30) and (28) are 
worn, replace the gear complete (bearings are 
fitted in the factory). 

47. insert output shaft (44) while holding me gear 
assembly in position (Fig. 14). 

48. Pull the shaft back slightly to expose the groove for 
the spring ring (34) 




Fig. 12 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v / 



Gearbox - Output shaft 




5101.7 



49. Fit spring ring (34) with tool MF 459 (Fig. 15). 
N.B.: Check that the spring ring is properly 
seated. 

50. Slide the following onto the shaft: cone (39), the 
shim or shims X [47] selected in procedure 40. 
cone (40) and cup (48). 

51. Fit retainer ring (46) and tighten bolts (41) to a 
torque of 27 - 32 Nm. 

52. Make setting J4 (Fig. 16) to give : 
J4 = +0.2 to +0.4 mm 

This setting consists in providing end float for gear 
(29) (Hi 4th speed in 4 x 4 gearbox . Hi 3rd gear in 
4x2 gearbox). 

53. Carry out procedures 36 to 39. 

54. As dictated by the reading taken from the dial 
gauge, find the thickness required for shim(s) Z 
[38] to give J4, 

55. Remove boits (41) and retainer ring (46). 

56. Remove cup (48). 

57. Withdraw cones (40) and (39). and shim(s) X [47]. 

58. Siide the following onto the shaft: shimis) Z [38]. 
cone (39). shim(s) X [47] and cone (40). 

Setting J5. 

59. Make setting J5 (Fig. 1 7) to give : 
J5 = No end float 

This setting consists in taking up the end float 
which cones (40) and (39) have on shaft (44). 

60. From the thickness measured for shim(s) Y [42] /43\ 
in procedure 43 find the thickness required for 
shim(s) Z [38] and X [47] to give J5 = Y - (Z+X) 

61 . Carry out procedures 34 and 35. 

62. Slide she shims of the thickness selected in proce- 
dure 60 onto the shaft. 

63. Fit circlip <45). 

N.B.; Position packing shim /43\ on the same 

side as the circlip. 

The circlip should be a slightly tight fit in its groove. 

Check that it is properly seated. 

N.B.: Refit the creeper gearbox (if fitted). See 

Section 5 A02.N. 

64. Check by hand that the shaft and its gears turn 
freely, 

65. Check that the 3rd/4th speed synchroniser and the 
Hi-Lo coupler are operating normally. 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5101.8 



Gearbox - Output shaft 



-/ V 



E. Refitting guide rail and selector 
forks(Fig.18) 

66. Check that the hydraulic ports in the Hi-Lo cylinder 
(10) are not blocked. 

67. Fit O-ring (1 1 ) to cylinder (10) and insert cylinder in 
gearbox housing. 

68. Fit Hi-Lo fork (20) to the coupling ring. 

69. Fit O-rings (12), (14) to piston (13) and then slide 
the piston into the bore in the cylinder. 

N.B.: Line up the seatings for the adjusting 
screws with the tapped holes in the fork. Hold 
the piston in position with an adjusting screw 
(19). 



70. Clean and put together mechanical locking gate 
(22). taper bearing (23), cone (24) and lock ring 
(21). 

71. Fit the 3rd/4th speed fork (6). the 1st/2nd speed 
fork (5) and the tocKing gate assembly (25). 

72. Insert the guide rail (7) from the rear of the housing 
and slide it througn the piston, locking gate assem- 
bly ana forks. 

N. B. : In the case of 4x4 gearboxes, do not forget 
the A/B fork (4). 

73. Fit bearing (1 5) and tighten bolts (1 6) to a torque of 
27-32 Nm. 

74. Clean set screw (8) with a solvent, appiy Loctite 542 
to it and tighten it to a torque of 28-43 Nm. 




Fig. 18( 



Issue f 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Output shaft 




5101.9 



75. Fit locking plungers (3) and springs (2) and tighten 
plugs (1) to a torque of 50-70 Nm. 

N.B.: Gearboxes fitted with creeper gears 

(Fig.19). 

Fit sleeve (5), fork (4) and pin (1). 

Position the fork so that locking screw (3) is 

over the flat on guide rail (6) (between the two 

locking recesses). 

Tighten the screw fully in so that the ball is 

compressed. 

Unscrew the screw one quarter turn. 

Apply Loctite 241 to nut (2) after cleaning it with 

solvent. 

Tighten the nut to a torque of 15-20 Nm. 

Check that the fork locks correctly. 

76. Adjusting the Hi-Lo tork. 
General principle : 

The fork (20) is positioned by means of the diffe- 
rence in the spacing Y between the tapped holes 
and the spacing Z of the spot-facings in piston 
(13) 

The fork can be adjusted to move to different points 
by acting on either the front or rear screw depen- 
ding on what adjustment is required (Fig. 20). 

77. Set control piston (13) and coupling ring (31) to the 
Hi range. 

78. Hold the coupling ring pressed aqainst the Hi 
range gear (29) (Fig. 2 1 ) (3rd speed in 4 x 2 gear- 
box , 4th in 4 x 4 gearbox). 



UJi (f. 




\Jc® 



Fig. 19 



\ 



\\\N 



\ 



Ywrmm^mz 



t 



7 ZZZZZZZZZZZMZA 



\ / /, 






Fig. 20 




J5 = mm. of - 3 in:n 

in Hi range rUfl __ .{3l) 



I position 




Fig. 21 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5101.10 



Gearbox - Output shaft 




■/ V 



79. Having cleaned the two adjusting screws (19) with 
a solvent and coated them lightly with Loctite 221 , 
use them to adjust the position of fork (20) to set a 
clearance of J1 = 0.3 mm between the rear face of 
the pad and the coupling ring (Figs. 21 and 22). 
N.B.: For making the adjustment use the locally 
fabricated tool mentioned in sub-section U of 
5A02. 

80. Set control piston (1 3) and coupling ring (31) to the 
Lo (Tortoise) range. 

81. Check that there is a clearance of J2 = min. of 
0.3 mm (dimension determined by setting J 1 ) bet- 
ween pad and coupling ring with the latter hard 
against Lo range gear (36) (Fig.23), 

Tighten the screws to a torque of 35 Nm without 
disturbing the adjustment. 
N. B. : In the Lo (Tortoise) position, if face X of the 
pad on fork (20) is in contact with the coupling 
ring (Fig.23), increase clearance J1. 

82. Set the fork to the Lo position. 

83. Unscrew lock ring (21) slightly. 

Apply Loctite 270 sparingly to the thread on cone 
(24). 

84. Set the forks to the neutral position. 

85. Set clearances J3 and J4 to be of equal size (min. 
= 0.3 mm) so that the mechanical locking gate (22) 
can operate freely (Figs. 24 and 25) 





JO 
J6= 0.3 mini 



J 2 = 0.3 mini 



pUrfc: 



/-— ' Lo range position 



Dimension determined by setting J1 



//. y — *. 



Fig. 23 



M 




Fig. 25 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Output shaft 




5101.11 



86. Tighten lock ring (21) to 50 Nm with scanner 
3615334 M01 and a spring balance (Fig. 26). 

87. Apply Loctite 648 to the clamping face of slider (1 8) 
and Loctite 648 to bolt (1 7). Fit the bolt ana washer. 

88. Adjust the clearances J5 and J6 {min. of 0.3 mm) 
between the slider ana the locking gate to be equai 
in the Hi and Lo positions (Figs. 21 . 23. 27 and 28). 

89. Tighten the bolt to a toraue of 27-32 Nm. 

90. Check the operation of the Hi-Lo (Hare/Tortoise) 
range and the locking gate. 

91 . Check the changing of the gears and of the A/B 
range. 



F. Refitting selector cover 

4x2 gearbox (Fig. 30) 

92. Clean the mating face of the cover (56). 

93. Set the reverse selector to the neutral position. 

94. Engage 1st gear, 

95. Apply a gasketing compound (Loctite Master joint 
5 1 or equivalent) to the mating face of the gearbox 
housing. 

N.B.: Do not forget to fit bolt (1) to the housing 
(Fig.29). 

96. Position the two levers on the cover to the left and 
parallel to one anoiher. 




>^E. -\ J 










Fig. 26 




.27 



© 



U\ 



n 



\ 



-—~ p' 



<£> 



^,i>, 



; t 



! l n 



\f' 




:-&\ 



Fig. 28 



Fig. 29 



Issue 1 



November J 991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5101.12 



Gearbox - Output shaft 



V 



97. Fit the cover to the gearbox, making sure that the 
levers are correctly engaged in the selector forks 
(Fig.30). 

98. Refit the bolts which hold the selector cover in 
place and tighten them to a torque of 50-70 Nm. 
Refit the support for the creeper gear cable (if 
fitted). 

99. Check : 

- the -changes to all the gears and the change 
between the Hi-Lo positions. 

- the operation of the reversing mechanism. 

4x4 gearbox 

1 00. Clean the mating face of the cover (57). 

In the gearbox : 

101. Check thai the reverse selector is in the neutral 
position and that the A/B fork is in the B position 
(the forward position). 

102. Engage 1st gear. 

At the cover : 

1 03. Take out pressure valve (58) and remove piunger 
(59) (Fig. 31). 

1 04. Clamp actuating shaft (53) in the B position with 
tool 3615053 M01 (Fig.31). Tighten down mode- 
rately hard. 

1 05. Set the finger /61\ tor actuating the A/B fork to the 
B position (the forward position) (Fig. 32). 

106. Move the gear lever to the left (into 1st gear). 
107, Apply a gasketing compound (Loctite Master 

joint 510 or equivalent) to the mating face of the 

gearbox housing. 

N.B.: Do not forget to fit bolt (1) to the housing 

(Fig.29). 




Fig. 30 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Output shaft 




5101.13 



108. Offer ud the cover to the gearbox, engaging 
fingers (54), (66) in the reverse selector fork and 
finger /61\ in the A/B fork, and then engage actua- 
ting finger (36) in the tst/2nd gear fork and the 
mechanical locking gate (Fig. 33). 

1 09. Seat the cover down. 

110. Fit the bolts and tighten them to a torque of 50 - 
70 Nm. 

Remove tool 3615053 M01. 
N.B.: In the case of a gearbox fitted with a 
creeper gearbox, fit cable support (1) (Fig.34). 
To ensure the cover is correctly located, first 
tighten bolt /3\ (Fig.34). With the help of the 
levers, check by hand that the actuating fin- 
gers are correctly engaged in the selector 
forks. 

1 1 1 . Fit plunger /59\ and screw in pressure valve (58) 
and tighten it to a torque of 1 8-20 Nm. Refit the A/ 
B supply pipe. 

1 1 2. Reconnect the tractor between gearbox and rear 
axle. Section 3 B02. 

113.ChecK 

- that none of the circuits leak 

- that the electrical circuits are working. 

1 1 4. Carry out a road test on the controls. 

115. Check that there are no leaks at the joints between 
selector cover and gearbox and between gear- 
box and rear axle 





issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5J01 Creeper gears 



CONTENTS 



General 



Operation. 



A. Removing creeper gearbox and ring gear. 

B. Disassembling planetary carrier 

C. Reassembling planetary carrier 



D. Refitting creeper gearbox and ring gear. 

E. Adjusting control mechanism 

F. Circuit diagram — 




Gearbox - Creeper gears 5J01.1 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5J01.2 



Gearbox - Creeper gears 




General 



The creeper gear reduction gearbox consists of an 
epicyclic gear train comprising a planetary carrier and 
ring gear assembly mounted ai the rear of the main 
gearbox. It is operated from a Sever situated on the 
console in the caD. the lever oeing connected by a 
cable to an arm fitted on the right at the front of the 
centre housing. The arm shifts the fore, which controls 
the coupling sleeve. 

1st generation 3000 tractors (serial numbers prior 
to PI 07048) 

When the creeper gear control is engaged, the «Auto- 
troniC" system automatically permits a changeover to 
the Lo range. 

New generation 3000 tractors and 3100 tractors 
A system for locKing the Hi-Lo (Hare.- Tortoise) ranges 
was introducea as from serial number P 107048. 
The creeper gears shouid oniy be se^ctea if the main 
gearbox is in the Lo range. 



Operation 

Coupling sleeve (8) is splinea to connecting shaft {21 ). 
If lever A is moved towards the creeper gear position 
(Figs. 1 and 2), this shifts coupling sleeve (8) towards 
the rear and engages its external teeth with planetary 
carrier (1). The speed of connecting shaft (21) is then 
1/4 of the speed of the output shaft. 
In the normal gears, coupling sleeve (8) ts movea 
forward to connect the output shaft of r e gearbox to the 
connecting snait {21). thus providing -irec; transmis- 
sion. 

Special points : New generation 3000 tractors and 
3100 tractors 

[f the creeper speea range is seiectec^nd she Hi (hare) 
light flashes, this indicates to the ope r ator thai he is in 
the Hi position and that it is essential for him to change 
to the Lo position. 

The electrical signal indicating that tne creeper speed 
range has been selected is transmitted from switch C. 
Switch C is mounted on the control cc in she manner 
shown in Fig. 1 m the case of tractors v. :hout an ■■ Auto- 
some • or ■•£■■ ana in the manner shcv.n in Fin 2 in the 
case nt tractors '.vitn an -Autotromc- 
Tractors without an - Autotromc ■> have a button on the 
dashboard which oermits n changeover to the Lo 
range. 



CREEPER GEAR 
POSITION 




/ 



: P~T £tjQ 



Fig. 1 



CREEPER GEAR 
POSITION 




Fig. 2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Creeper gears 




5J01.3 



General arrangement drawing (Fig.3) 




©o© 



List of parts (11) 

(1) Planetary carrier (12) 

(2) Thrust wasner (13) 

(3) Front disc (14) 

(4) Spring washer (15) 

(5) Bolt (16) 

(6) Spring ring (17) 

(7) internally toothed bush (18) 

(8) Coupling sleeve (19) 

(9) Planetary gears (20) 
(10) Needle rollers (21) 




View on F 



Spacer 

"Hi 

Sector plate 

Sector plate 

Backing disc 

Circlip 

" ! "metary earner nsccmniy 

Thrust washer 

Ring gear 

Locating pin 

Connecting snalt 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5J01.4 



Gearbox - Creeper gears 




/ V 



Exploded view (Fig.4) 



L_ 




A. Removing the creeper gearbox 
and ring gear 

1 . Take off the RH hydraulic cover, 

Garry out procedures 1 to 14, Section 8 101. 

Removing support for top link - driving gear - 
intermediate shaft - PTO clutch 

2. Two-speed PTO : 

- carry out procedures 1 to 7. Section 6 D0 1 . 

- carry out procedure 3. Section 6 G01 . 
Four-speed (economy PTO) 

- carry out procedures 60 to 76. Section 6 D01. 

- carry out procedure 14, Section 6 G01. 
Removing sleeve/connecting shaft/coupling sleeve 
assembly and fork 

3. Carry out procedures 3 to 16. Section 5 D01.A 
Removing creeper gearbox and ring gear 

4. Take out bolts (5) and spring washers (4). 

5. Take off front disc (3). 



6. Withdraw planetary carrier "!:semniy (17) aria 
thrust washers (2) ana (18) Jfe 

7. Remove ring gear (19). ^^ 
N.BXocating pins (20) should be left in the ring 
gear. 

8. Remove backing disc (15). 

N.B.Be careful not to apply any traction to the 
output shaft. 

B. Disassembling planetary carrier 

9. Remove rjrciip (16) 

10. Drive out pins (12). 

1 1 . Take out sector plates (13) and (14). 

1 2. Take out planetary gears (9) 

N.B.: There are 54 needle-rollers (10) per plane- 
tary gear (two rows of 27 needle-rollers separa- 
ted by a spacer (11). Replace the planetary 
carrier (1) if there is any damage to internallyj^k 
toothed bush (7). ^^ 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Creeper gears 




5J01.5 



C. Reassembling planetary carrier 

1 3. Check and clean the parts and replace any which 
are faulty. 

1 4. Refit planetary gears (9). Use a miscible grease 
(■■Amber Technical" or equivalent) to fit needle- 
rollers (10). 

15. Refit sector plates (13) and (14). 

16. Refit pins (12), making sure they are the correct 
way round to allow circlip (16) to be fitted. 

17. Fit circlip (16). 

Check the end float of each planetary gear and that 
it turns freely by hand. 

D. Refitting creeper gearbox and ring 
gear 

18. Carry out procedures 177 to 181. Section 5 A02.N 
Refitting fork and sleeve/connecting shaft/coupling 
sleeve assembly 

19. Carry out procedures 22 to 31. Secuon 5 D01.A 
Refitting PTO clutch, intermediate shaft, driving 
gear and support for top link. 

20. Two-speed PTO 

- carry out procedures 5 to 7. Section 6 G0 1 

- carry out procedures 8 to 18. Section 6 D01 . 
Four-speed PTO 

- carry out procedures 16 to 18. Section 6 G01 

- carry out procedures 79 to 88, Section 6 D0 1 . 
Refitting RH hydraulic cover 

21. Carry out procedures IS lo 33. Section 8 10 1 

22. Carry out road test on creeper gears. 

23. T est ihe operation of the PTO and its brake 

E. Adjusting control mechanism 
(Fig.5 and 6) 

N.B.: Procedures 25 to 28 should be carried out 
when replacing the control cable. 

24. Move control lever A to the -Cfceoer- position. 

25. S -:ew cievis (1) right to tin: or id or th>~- itironciocl onrt 
v canto (6) 

26. Attach clevis (1) to lever A with pin (7) nnd lighten 

•o nut (2). 

27. .-••Jjusi caoie lerruio(5) to utitig run (3) flur.n wan ttic 
■~na ot its threaded oorutm 

28. r.qnten uu nut (4). 

N.B. Check that the cable is not under any 
stress. 



29. Move arm B to the-Creeper gear- position (Fig. 6) 
{external teeth on coupling s;eeve (8) engagea in 
rearwards direction (Fig. 3)) - : orK locked. 

30. Screw clevis (9) right to the eno of the threaoea 
portion of cable (6) (Fig. 6). 

31 . Attach cievis (9) to arm B witr c:n (10) and tighten 
nut(11)(Fig.6). 

32. Aaiust ferruie (12) with nut (13). while making Lure 
that arm 8 remains propeny -ccked. 

33. Tighten up nut (14). 

N.B. After tightening the nut, check that the 
cable is not under stress. 

34. ChecK that the control mecnanism locks in 'he 
"direct transmission'' posuicr 



Creeper gear position 




Issue 1 



November 199". 



www.maskinisten.net 




5J01.6 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Creeper gears 




17(g) (0)16 



Key 

j 12. Creeper gear indicating switch 

16. Hi indicator light 
' 17 l.o indicator light 
. 59. Relav 



F. Circuit diagram 












Cab/console 
harness 


59 


i i i 




Blinker display 






Instrument panel 
lighting harness 


VF 


. 




. 



*C76 



L 12 



Colour codes 

B. Whito 

BLC. Light blue 

G. Grev 

M. Light brown 



N. Black 
R. Red 
V Green 
JY Dark green 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Super creeper speeds 




5 J 02.1 



5J02 Super creeper speeds 



CONTENTS 



General . 



Operation 



A. Removing the accumulator. 



B. Refitting the accumulator. 



C. Electrical diagrams. 



4-5 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5J02.2 



Gearbox - Super creeper speeds 




General 



A. Removing the accumulator 



The tractors fitted with super creeper speeds use the 
same mechanical reduction assembly as the standard 
•■creeper gear- version. This reduction gear is fitted 
behind the main box. on the output shaft (see cnapter 
5J01). 

They also use the reduction function of the hydro- 
mechanical device included in the input housing. In 
this configuration, the following modifications have 
been made (Fig. 1): 

- planet wheels / sun wheels reduction ratio increased. 

- special hydraulic cover /25\. with a larger clutch 
piston. 

In addition, a hydraulic accumulator is fitted to the right- 
hand sice of the box. 



Operation 



Moving sever A to the snail position (Fig. 2) causes, at 
the same time. engagement o; the two reaucticn devi- 
ces. 

The switch (1 ) closes the solenoid valve which controls 
the hydro-mechanical reduction device (input housing) 
putting the forward reduction device into the Tortoise 
range. 

At the same time, the rear mechanical reduction gear 
goes into the slow position (see chapter 5 J01). 
The movement of the two reduction devices into the 
Tortoise range drives the rear axie connecting shaft at 
a speed of 1 revolution per 7.8 revolutions of the box 
input shaft. When lever A is moved back to the Hare 
position . :ne transmission of movement is direct < ratio of 
1:1). From serial number P333039. tractors having the 
-super creeper speeds- version are fitted with an 
accumulator (Fig. 3) connected to the pipe (2) coming 
from the ' 7 bar valve. The purpose of this is to reduce 
the pressure drop when the super creeper range is 
engages This device is held by a bracket fixed to the 
selection cover. 



1 . Remove bolt (3) 

2. Disconnect union (4) 

3. Remove accumulator (5) 

4. Remove fixing bracket (6) 



B. Refitting the accumulator 

1 . Reverse operations 1 to 4. 
Note: Apply a sealant between the union and 
accumulator (Loctite 542 or equivalent). 
For correct operation, maintain nitrogen inflation 
pressure of 8 bar, using the valve (7) (Fig. 3). t 
Pressure to be checked once a year. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Super creeper speeds 




5J02.3 




Fig. 1 




Fig. 2 




Fig. 3 



Issue 1 



November ?99l 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5J02.4 



Gearbox - Super creeper speeds 




C. Electrical diagram 



1 .With «Autotronic» 



C37 




R 



C32 



C33 



fl 



10A 



K 



N 



.A h 



R 




Ro 



V 



7,5A 



62 



Ro 




w 



C42 

3 



R 



C30 



Key 

1 -Autotronio box 

7 Hi-Lo (Hare/Tortoise) switch 

21. Starting switch 

60. Super creeper speed solenoid valve 

61. Low-pressure pressure-sensitive switch 

62. Super creeper sDeea switch 



Colour codes 

B. White 

J. Yellow 

N. Black 

R. Red 

Ro. Pink 

V Green 



Ro 




25A 



21 




■AC 



Abbreviations 

-AC ^ , After contact 



•-(■ 



p, 



ermanont + 



C - * ~or.ner.tion 
C - Connection 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



■■/ v 



Gearbox - Super creeper speeds 




5J02.5 




Key 

7. Hi-Lo (Hare/Tortoise) switch 

1 1. Low-pressure pressure-sensitive switch 

21. Starimg switch 

60. Super creeper speed solenoid valve 

61. Low-pressure pressure-sensitive switch 

62. Super creeper roeed switch 
'. 63. Telebreaker 



+ AC VAC 

Colour codes 



8. 

G. 

J. 

N. 

R. 

Ro. 

VF. 



White 

Gn*>v 

Yeiiow 

Blae* 

Red 

Dark iirneti 



Abbreviations 

+AC = +■ After contact 
-P - Permanent + 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 K01 Selector cover (4x4) 16 Speed 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Gearbox - Selector cover 1 6 speed 5K01.1 



General 



Operation 



A. Removal 



B. Disassembly. 



C. Reassembly. 



10 



D. Refitment 



~ 11 



E. Adjustment of sleeves on levers 



11 



List of parts 



12 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 KOI. 2 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 




General 



The selector cover fitted on the RH side of the gearbox 
housing has two separate levers which each perform 
two different functions: 

- Front lever: this lever controls the A/B ranges and the 
reversing mechanism. 

- Rear lever: this lever selects the four basic gears and 
the Hi-Lo speeds. 



Operation 



1. A/B range and reverse lever (Fig.1) 
A/B range function 

The A/B ranges are hydro-mechanically controlled. 

The range and reversing lever (23) selects one of the 

•wo ranges when it is either pushed (A range) or oulled 

(B range). 

Supply chamber (F). ducts (a) and (d), ana chamber 

(H) are under constant pressure from the 1 7 bar LP 

circuit. 



Reversing function 

The reversing function is obtained when iever (23) is 
moved either forward (reverse gears) or back (forward 
gears). It can be obtained in both the A range and the 
8 range. 

A range 

Moving lever (23) either forward or back causes shaft 
(53), which is secured to U-arm (54). to turn. The front 
pad on U-arm (54) moves selector (S) and the selector, 
as it moves, takes with it upper finger (66), which is 
engaged in the selector (S). 
N.B.: In the A range, upper finger (66) remains 
passive and is simply carried along by selector (S) 
in its movement. 

B range |fe 

in this position, when lever (23) is ouiled. moving tn^^ 
lever either forward or back causes U-arm (54) to oivot. 
The rear pad on U-arm (54) moves UDper finger (66) 
which in turn moves selector (S). The front pad on U- 
arm (54) is men aisengagea Tim selector (S). 



A range 

Lever (23) is pushed. Plunger /59\ moves to the lowered 
position in the waist on shaft (53) ana there is no supply 
to ducts (b) and (c). The pressure prevailing in cham- 
ber (F) is transmitted to chamber (H) and acts on the 
annular face of piston (72). The piston moves forward 
and pivots lever /61V which moves fork (T) to the A 
position. The hydraulic oil contained in chamber (G) is 
returned to the housing via ducts (c) and (b) and 
pressure valve (58). 

B range 

Lever (23) is pulled. Plunger /59\ then moves into 
contact with the larger-diameter circumference of spin- 
dle (53) and assumes its raised position. It allows 
hydraulic oil to flow from duct (a) to ducts (b) and (c) 
and then to chamber (G). Since the force acting on the 
larger face of piston (72) is greater lhan that applied to 
its annular face, the piston moves back. Lever /61\ 
moves with the piston and shifts fork (T) to the B 
position. 

The hydraulic oil contained in chamber (H) is returned 
to the 17 bar circuit via ducts (d) and (a). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 




Gearbox - Selector cover 1 6 speed 5 K01.3 





front 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5K01.4 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 




V 



Mechanical locking of A/B ranges 

Two ramps machined into the A/B range fork (T) allow 
it to be locked by the end of shaft (53). 

- In the A range, fork (T) is in the position shown in Fig. 

2 and prevents an accidental change to the B range. 

- In the B range, fork (T) is in the position shown in Fig. 

3 and prevents an accidental change to the A range. 
N.B.: The lever in the cab moves in the opposite 
direction to the lever on the selector cover ; when it 
is in the forward position, the forward gears are 
engaged. 

2. Gear lever 

Selecting 1st/2nd gears 

To select these gears, the gear lever (12) is set to its 
intermediate position. Arm (36), which is linked to lever 
(1 2) engages in the 1 st/2nd speed fork <P) and lock (V) 
prevents any movement by the 3rd/4th speed fork (Q) 
{Fig. 4 j. 1 st gear is obtained by moving lever (1 2) back 
and 2nd by moving it forward. 
Selecting 3rd/4th gears 

If gear iever (12) is pushed, arm (36) engages in the 
3rd/4th speed fork (Q) and moves with it lock (V), which 
then prevents movement by the 1 st/2nd speed fork (P) 
(Fig. 5). 3rd gear is obtained by moving lever (1 2) back 
and 4th by moving it forward. 
Hi-Lo (Hare-Tortoise) function 
The Hi-Lo function is obtained in the neutral position by 
pulling lever (12). Arm (36) linked to the lever moves 
lock (V), which applies pressure to switch (1). Switch 
(1 ) operates the Hi-Lo solenoid valve via the Autotronic 
(if fitted) or via a system of relays (tractors without 
Autotronic or «E»). 





Fig. 2 




Fig. 3 




Fig. 5 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 




5K01.5 



Hare position 

Solenoid valve E, which is mounted at the bottom of the 

RH cover (Fig. 6), opens and feeds hydraulic oil to 

chamber (a) situated at the rear of piston (13) (Fig. 9). 

The piston moves forward and applies pressure to fork 

(20). 

The oil contained in chamber (b) is forced into the Hare 

duct and returns to the 17 bar circuit. 

Tortoise position 

Switch (1) is again actuated via the gear lever and this 

causes the solenoid valve to close and the pressure in 

chamber (a) to drop. Piston (1 3) moves back under the 

prompting of the 1 7 bar pressure applied to its annular 

face. 

The oil contained in chamber (a) is returned to the 

housing via the Hare duct and solenoid valve E. 

Hare/Tortoise locking 

Slider (18) secured to fork (20) is facing lock (22). which 
prevents any accidental movement of fork (20) both in 
the Hare position (Fig. 7} and in the Tortoise position 
(Fig. 8). 

The configuration of lock (22) is such that the slider and 
fork assembly is only released if the gear lever is pulled 
to select either the Hare position or the Tortoise posi- 
tion. 





Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




§ 

—4 

CD 



i 



s 

B- 
§ 

i 

CO 

CD 

CD" 

& 

8 
S 

-t 

—4, 

CD 
Cb 
Q. 



o 
o 

S 

§ 

C/> 

I 

1 

0) 




www.maskinisten.net 




<^- 



* 



o 




3 




■■* 




o 




X 


p 


i 


Ul 




— i 


CO 


o 


CD 


Q 


CD" 
O 

2* 


C7D 

3 


o 

-1 


ffi 


o 

§ 

-1 


1 




~H 


o> 


o 

3] 


-^ 


C/l 


T3 




CD 




CD 




Q, 








Kl 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5K01.8 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 




V V 



A. Removal 



1 . Immobilise the tractor. Fit wedge blocks under the 
LH rear wheel. 

2. Apply the handbrake. 

3. Fit chock between frame and front axle. 

4. Drain the gearbox (only) of oil. 

5. Raise the rear RH side of the tractor with a jack. 

6. Place an axle stand in position. 

7. Take off the wheel. 

8. Take off the RH step. 

9. Take out cotter pins (18) and (25) and remove 
washers (1 7) and (26). Remove pins (1 1 ) and (20). 

10. Lift dust-covers (49) and (51), and (9) and (16). 
Take out range lever (23) and gear lever (12) and 
mark which fits where. Take off pipe (2) (Fig. 1 2). 

1 1 . Disconnect the Hi-Lo wiring from switch (1) 
(Fig. 12). 

1 2. On gearboxes fitted with creeper speeds, discon- 
nect the control linkage. 

On gearboxes fitted with a speed limiter. discon- 
nect the wiring to switch (1) (Fig. 13). 

1 3. Remove bolts (33). 

N.B.: Mark the positions of locating bolt /3\ and 
earth wire fug (24). 

On gearboxes fitted with creeper gears, take off 
the control cable support (1) (Fig. 14). 

1 4. Remove cover (57). 




Fig.12 




/>■ 





\ 



T 



rO 



Fig- U 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v \, 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 




5K01.9 



B. Disassembly 



15. Clamp cover (57) in a vice (Fig. 15). 

16. Unscrew pressure valve (58) and plunger /59\. 

17. Unscrew bolts (29) and (30). and (4) and (5), and 
take off supports (6) and (31). 

N.B.: On gearboxes fitted with a speed iimiter, 
take off support (1) (Fig. 16). 

1 8. Unscrew setscrews (1 5) and (52) and remove arms 
(10) and (32). 

19. Unscrew setscrew (55), withdraw shaft (53) and 
take off the reverse- controlling U-arm (54). 

20. Withdraw cotter pin (62), washer (64). spring 
wasner (65) and pin (63) and take off finger (66). 

21. Unscrew shoulder screw (60). mark which way 
rounc A/B control finger /61\ fits, and remove the 
finger (Fig. 17). 

22. Unscrew A range plug (77), take off O-ring (76) and 
unscrew nut (75). 

23. Witr.craw washer (74). piston (72). aaiusting snims 
[71] O-ring (73), piston rod (68) and O-nng (69). 

24. Unscrew bolts (44), (45) and (47). 

25. Take off support (46). 

26. Withdraw dowel pins (43) and (48) from the cover. 

27. Unscrew bolt (34) and withdraw the selecting arm 
assembly. 

28. Remove cup seals (38) (40) and spring (39). 

29. Withdraw arm (36) from mounting block (35) and 
remove cup seal (41 ) and spring (42) irom the arm 
(36) 

30. Unscrew Hi-Lo switch (1). remove O-ring (2). plug 
(19) and union (67). 

3 1 . Remove seals /37\ and /50\. 




Fig. 15 




Fig. 16 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




5K01.10 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 




C. Reassembly 



32. With a jet of compressed air, check that the A and 
B passages are not blocked {Fig. 18 and 19). 

33. Clean the mating face of cover (57). 

34. Apply a light coating of Loctite 542 to the outer 
circumference of seals /37\ and /50\ and press 
them fully home in the cover. 

35. Carry out procedures 28 to 30 in reverse. 

36. Refit the selecting arm assembly and bolt (34). 
N.B. : Be careful not to damage the lip ofseal/37\ 
when refitting the assembly. Clean the bolt and 
coat it with Loctite 270 and tighten it to a torque 
of 25 ■ 25 Nm. 

37. Carry out procedures 25 and 26 in reverse. 

38. Refit bolts (44), (45) and (47) and tighten them to a 
torque of 25 to 35 Nm 

39. Replace O-ring (69) on piston rod (68). Lubricate 
the combination and insert it in the bore in the 
cover. 

N.B. The notch in the rod must face down 
(Fig. 20). 

40. Carry out procedure 21 in reverse. 

N.B.: Clean the tapped thread and coat it with 
Loctite 270 (do not coat the thread on the 
screw). Tighten the screw to a torque of 50 to 
70 Nm. Check that the finger will pivot freely. 

41 . Carry out procedure 20 in reverse. 

42. Carry out procedure 19 in reverse. 

N.B.: Fit shaft (53) from the inside of the cover 
(Fig. 21). Be careful not to damage the lip of seal 
/50\. Tighten the setscrew to a torque of 28 to 
43 Nm. 

43. Carry out procedures 17 and 18 in reverse. 

44. Take the cover out of the vice. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 




Gearbox - Selector cover 1 6 speed skoi.ii 



D. Refitment 



45. Carry out procedures 247 and 248, 250 to 255 from 
Section 5 A02.S. 

46. Fit the earth wire lug (24). 

47. Carry out procedures 256 and 257, Section 5 
A02.S. 

N. B. : If nothing has been done to the A/B control 
mechanism, fit the cover without making the 
adjustments. Otherwise adjust the A/B selector 
mechanism as described in Section 5 K03. 

48. Carry out procedures 1 1 and 12 in reverse. 

49. Carry out procedure 10. 

N.B.: Grease ball-joints (8) (14) and (21) (27) 
(Loctite Anti Seize grease or equivalent). 

50. On gearboxes fitted with creeper gears, adjust the 
control (see Section 5 J01). 

On gearboxes fitted with a speed limiter. fit switch 
(1 ) (Fig. 1 3) (see Section 5 M0 1 ). 

5 1 . Carry out procedures 8 and 9 in reverse. 

52. Refit the wheel. 

53. Remove the axle stand and jack, Tighten the wheel 
nuts to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm, 

54. Carry out procedures 1 to 4 in reverse. 

55. Carry out road test on the controls for : 

A/B and reverse, gears. Hi-Lo. creeper gears (if 
fitted). 

56. Check that there are no leaks at the cover joint or at 
the hydraulic unions. 




E. Adjustment of sleeves on levers 

Note : If an adjustment or a replacement becomes 
necessary slightly coat the inside of every sleeve 
with "Anti-Seize" grease or equivalent. 

The setting dimension of the sleeve of the A/B range - 
reverse shuttle lever according to the shouider of the 
selector cover lever which was previously 58 mm, 
becomes the same as for the gear lever : 40 mm. Refer 
to Service Bulletin 89/009. issue 1 . 

Adjustment (Fig. 22) 

Place she A/B range-reverse shuttle lever in position A 

(reverse shuttle non engaged) and the gear lever to 

neutral. 

Unscrew nuts (1 ). Set sleeves (2) to octain 40 mm from 

the end of the sleeve to the shoulder "E" on every lever. 

Tighten the nuts to the torque of 50 Nm and fit the bellow 

(3) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




5K01.12 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 




■/ v 



List oi parts 

(1) 

/3\ 
(4) 
(5) 
(6) 
(7) 
(8) 

(9) 
(10) 

01) 
(12) 
(13) 
(14) 
(15) 
(16) 
(17) 
(18) 
(19) 
(20) 
(21) 
(22) 
(23) 
(24) 
(25) 
(26) 

(27) 

(28) 

(29) 

(30) 

(31) 

(32) 

(33) 

(34) 

(35) 

(36) 

/37\ 

(38) 

(39) 

(40) 

(41) 

(42) 

(43) 

(44) 

(45) 

(46) 

(47) 

(48) 

(49) 

/50\ 

(51) 

(52) 

(53) 

(54) 



Switch 

Seal 

Locating bolt 

Bolt 

Bolt 

Support 

Dowel pin 

Ball 

Dust-cap 

Arm 

Pin 

Gear lever 

Dowel pin 

Ball 

Setscrew 

Dust cap 

Washer 

Cotter pin 

plug 

Pin 

Sail 

Dowei pin 

A/B range and reversing lever 

Lug 

Colter pin 

Washer 

Ball 

Dowel pin 

Bolt 

Bolt 

Support 

Arm 

Bolt 

Bolt 

Mounting block 

Arm 

Seal 

Cup seal 

Spring 

Cup seal 

Cup seal 

Spring 

Spring dowel 

Bolt 

Bolt 

Support 

Bolt 

Spring dowel 

Dust cover 

Seal 

Dust cover 




Setscrew 



Shaft 
U-arm 



(55) 


Setscrew 


(57) 


-' x 4 cover 


(58) 


Pressure valve 


/59\ 


Plunger 


(60) 


Shou/der screw 


/61\ 


Finger 


(62) 


Cotter pin 


(63) 


Pin 


(64) 


Washer 


(65) 


Spring washer 


(66) 


Upper finger 


(67) 


Union 


(68) 


Piston roa 


(69) 


0-nng 


(70) 


Threaaed roa 


171] 


Adjusting shim 


(72) 


P is ion 


(73) 


O-nng 


(74) 


Washer 


(75) 


Nut 


(76) 


O-rinn 


(77) 


PiuQ 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Selector cover 16 speed 

(67) (44 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 K02 Selector cover (4x2) 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Gearbox - Selector cover 8 speed 5 K02. 1 



General 



Operation 



A. Removal 



B. Disassembly 



C. Reassembly 



D. Refitment 



E. Adjustment of sleeves on levers 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5K02.2 



Gearbox - Selector cover 8 speed 




v \ 



") 



General 



The selector cover fitted on the RH side of the gearbox 
housing has two separate levers which control the 
following functions: 

- Front lever: controls the reverse shuttle, 

- Rear lever: selects the four basic speeds and the 
Hare/Tortoise range. 



8. Reverse procedures 28 and 29 (Section 5 K01). 
Refit the gear control assembly and the bolt (34) 
after coating it with Loctite 270. 

Tighten to a torque of 25-35 Nm. 

Note: Take care not to damage the lip of the seal 

/37\. 

9. Refit the plug (19), the Hare/Tortoise switch (1 ) and 
its seal (2). 

10. Reverse procedures 17 and 18 (Section 5 K01). 

1 1 . Remove the cover from the vice. 



Operation 



Reverse shuttle lever 

The reverse shuttle operates when the lever (23) is 
moved either forwards (for reverse) or backwards (for 
forward travel). 

Moving the lever (23) causes shaft (53) to rotate ; this is 
integral with lever (54) which moves the selector (S). 

Gear lever 

1 st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and Hare/Tortoise range are selected 
in the same way as for the 4x4 gearbox (See 5 K01 ). 
Note: In the 4x2 version 3rd and 4th positions are 
the reverse of those in the 4x4 gearbox. 



A. Removal 



1 . Carry out procedures 1 to 13 (Section 5 K01 ). 

2. Remove the cover (56). 



B. Disassembly 



3. Place the cover (56) in a vice. 

4. Carry out procedures 17 to 19 (Section 5 K01). 

5. Carry out procedures 24 to 31 (Section 5 K01). 



D. Refitment 



1 2. Carry out procedures 238 to 243 in Section 5 A02. 
The following procedures not described must bet 
carried out in Section 5 K01. 

13. Reverse procedure 13. 

Tighten the bolts to a torque of 50-70 Nm. 

1 4. Reverse procedures 1 1 and 1 2. 

15. Reverse procedure 10. 

Note: Grease the balls (8) (14) and (21) (27) (use 
Loctite Anti-seize or equivalent grease). 

16. Procedure 50. 

1 7. Reverse procedures 8 and 9. 

18. Refit the wheel. 

1 9. Remove the stand and the trolley jack. Tighten the 
wheel nuts to a torque of 400-450 Nm. 

20. Reverse procedures 1 to 4. 

21 . Road test the following controls : 

. A/B reverse shuttle, gears. Hare/Tortoise range. 

creeper gears (if fitted). 
. Check the cover gasket face and the hydraulic I 

unions for leaks. 



C. Reassembly 



6. Clean the gasket face of the cover (56). Coat the 
outer diameter of the seals /37\ and /50\ with Loctite 
542 and press them fully home into the cover. 

7. Press the pins (43) and (48) into the cover. Fit the 
support (46). 

Refit the bolts (44), (45) and (47) and tighten them to 

a torque of 25-35 Nm. 

Refit the lever (54), refit the shaft (53) inside the 

cover. Take care not to damage the lip of the seal 

/50V 

Fit the bolt (55) and tighten to a torque of 28-43 Nm. 



E . Adjustment of sleeves on levers 

Carry out procedure from section 5K01 page 11. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Selector cover 8 speed 




5K02.3 







Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 K02.4 



Gearbox - Selector cover 8 speed 




/ 



Key to Figure 

(1) Switch 

(2) Seal 

/3\ Centring screw 

(4) Bolt 

(5) Bolt 

(6) Support bracket 

(7) Pin 

(8) Ball 

(9) Dust cap 

(10) Link 

(11) Pin 

(12) Gear lever 

(13) Pin 

(14) Ball 

(15) Setscrew 

(16) Dust cap 

(17) Washer 

(18) Pin 

(19) Plug 

(20) Pin 

(21) Ball 

(22) Pin 

(23) Shuttle lever 

(24) Bracket 

(25) Pin 

(26) Washer 

(27) Ball 

(28) Pin 



(29) 


Bolt 


(30) 


Bolt 


(31) Support bracket 


(32) 


Link 


(33) 


Bolt 


(34) 


Bolt 


(35) 


Rack 


(36) 


Lever 


/37\ 


Seal 


(38) 


Cup 


(39) Spring 


(40) Cup 


(41) Cup 


(42) 


Spring 


(43) Tubular split pin 


(44) 


Bolt 


(45) 


Bolt 


(46) 


Bracket 


(47) 


Bolt 


(48) 


Tubular split pin 


(49) 


Dust cap 


/50\ 


Seal 


(51) 


Dust cap 


(52) 


Setscrew 


(53) 


Pin 


(54) 


Lever 


(55) 


Setscrew 


(56) 


4x2 cover 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 





3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Adjusting selector cover 



5K03. 1 



5 K03 Adjusting selector cover 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Preparing for adjustment 



B. B range adjustment 



C. A range adjustment 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5K03.2 



Gearbox - Adjusting selector cover 




General 



To ensure that the A/B range will operate correctly, two 
adjustments need to be made. They consist of adjus- 
ting the position of the control piston so that there is a 
clearance of 0.2 to 0.3 mm between the pads on the A/ 
B fork and the slider of the synchroniser in both the A 
and B positions. 

N.B.: To rationalise the design of the hydraulic 
control mechanism for the A/B range, the system 
for reducing and regulating the pressure applied to 
the piston was modified mechanically and the 
modification was introduced: 

- as from serial number N257024 in MF 3050, 3060, 
3070 and 3090 tractors 

- as from serial number N258024 in MF3080 tractors, 
and 

■as from serial number N265031 in MF 3065 tractors. 



Modification by service kit 

A service kit to reduce and even up the pressure 
applied to the A/B control piston was introduced: 

- in 40 km/h 3000 tractors: as from serial number 
N161041 

- in 30 km/h 3000 tractors: as from serial number 
N 17301 2. 

30 km/h tractors produced with serial numbers bet- 
ween N 1 6 1 044 and N 1 730 1 1 were fitted with an inter- 
mediate set-up. 

For the make-uD of the kit. and the fitting and adjust- 
ment procedures, see Service Bulletin 88/029, issue 2. 
July 1988. 




issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Adjusting selector cover 




5K03.3 



A. Preparing for adjustment 

1 . Unscrew plug (77). 

2. Remove and discard O r ring (76) (Fig.t). 

N.B.: In the rod of the A/B piston, the socket 
screw was replaced first byanM8x40 screw as 
from serial number P193024 and then by a 
threaded rod as from serial number R016007. 
For tractors with serial numbers prior to 
P193024, see Workshop Manual 1646640M1. 

3. Unscrew nut (75) (Fig.2). 

N.B. If it proves necessary for the threaded rod 
(70) to be removed, clean it and refit it to the rod 
of the piston with Loctite 270, observing the 
dimension of 16 mm (Fig.3). 
4. Withdraw flat washer (74) and piston (72) with a 
pair of external circlip pliers (Fig. 4). 

5. Keep the adjusting shims [71] (Fig. 4), 

6. Remove O-ring (73) from the piston and discard it. 

7. Clean the parts and replace any which are faulty. 







(to) 


fjj / == ^r-^ 






I 


-^Stoil 


Fig.3 




Fig. 1 




Fig.2 




Fig. 4 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5K03.4 



Gearbox - Adjusting selector cover 




B. B range adjustment 



8. Hold the control lever in the B position (Fig. 5). 

9. Push rod (68) fully in to set it to the B position 
(Fig. 6) 

N.B. : Make sure that tho rod is welt inserted. 

10. Insert tool 3583544M1 into the bore in the cover. 

1 1 . Make sure that the outer tube of the tool is in contact 
with the shoulder in the cover and that its inner tube 
is bearing against rod (68) (Fig. 7). 

1 2. Tighten the screw in the tool and withdraw the tool 
from the cover. 

13. With a depth gauge, measure the dimension X 
shown by the service tool (Fig. 8). 




Fig. 7 




E 



Fig, 5 




Fig. 6 




e=E>-+ 






\ 



'■A.V 



Fig. 8 



issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



•/ V 



Gearbox - Adjusting selector cover 




5K03.5 



1 4. Determine the shim thickness E required to give a 
clearance: J1 = +0.2 to +0.3 mm (Fig.9). 

1 5. Lubricate 0-ring (73) and fit it to the piston. 

16. Fit shim(s) E [71] of the thickness selected in pro- 
cedure 14 and then piston (72). 

1 7. Slide on flat washer (74), apply a light coat of Loctite 
241 to nut (75), fit the nut and tighten it to a torque 
of 25 - 35 Nm (Fig. 10). 



C. A range adjustment 



N.B.: Clean the thread on plug (77) and the tapping 
to receive it. For a correct adjustment to be made, it 
must be possible for the plug to be screwed in by 
hand for the full length of its thread without any 
res/stance. 

18. Connect a compressed air supply, a pressure 
gauge and a valve to unio~. (67) (Fig. 1 1 ). 

1 9. Adjust the valve to give a pressure of not more than 
3 bars on the pressure gauge. 

20. Set control lever (23) to ;he A range position 
(Fig. 12). 

21 . Screw in the A range plug (77) until it is in contact 
with the piston. 




Fig, 1 1 



J1 = +0.20 .+ 0.30 




Fig.9 




Fig. 10 




Fig. :- 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5K03.6 



Gearbox - Adjusting selector cover 




22. Mark Dlug (77) and cover (57) with a straight line 
(Fig. 13). 

23. Screw the plug out, counting the number of turns. 

24. Lubricate O-ring (76) and fit it. 

25. Apply Loctite 242E to the first turns of the thread on 
the piug. 

26. Screw the plug in for the number of turns counted 
in procedure 23. 

27. When the mark on plug (77) is opposite the mark on 
cover (57), screw the plug in by 1/6 of a turn (60°) 
(Fig. i4) to give a clearance (Fig. 15): 

J2 = +0.2 to +0.3 mm. 

28. ChecK the operation of the A and B ranges and of 
the reversing gearbox. 

29. Disconnect the pressure gauge and fit the supply 
pipe (1) for the A/B ranges (Fig. 16) 



J2 = +0.20 + 0.30 







Fig. 14 



: iq. 15 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox -Spacer 5L01.1 



5 L01 Spacer 



CONTENTS 

A. Spacer - 3000 Tractor with 6 cylinder engine 
8. 31 00 Spacer 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5L01.2 



Gearbox - Spacer 



A. Spacer - 3000 Tractor with 6 
cylinder engine 

Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear 
box (section 3 A01). 

2. Remove the toolbox. 

3. Remove two spacer attaching bolts on the gear- 
box. 

4. Screw two guide pins in their place (use two bolts). 

5. Remove the other thirteen bolts and the spacer. 

6. Remove the locating dowels. 



Reassembly 

7. Clean the spacer and gearbox mating surfaces, 

8. Refit the locating dowels. 

9. Carry out procedure 4 and reverse procedure 5. 

1 0. Remove both guide pins. Fit and tighten the fifteen 
bolts to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. 

1 1 . Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Spacer 




5L01.3 



B. 3100 Spacer 



Disassembly 

1. Split the tractor between the engine and the gear 
box (section 3 A02). 

2. Remove the toolbox. 

3. Remove two spacer attaching bolts on the gear- 
box. 

4. Screw two guide pins in their place (use two bolts). 

5. Remove the other thirteen bolts and the spacer. 

6. Remove the locating dowels. 



Reassembly 

7. Clean tne spacer ana gearbox mating surfaces. 

8. Refit the locating dowels. 

9. Carry out procedure 4 and reverse procedure 5. 

10. Remove both guide pins. Fit and tighten the fifteen 
bolts to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm.f- 

NOTE : Make sure that the countersunk head 
screw /13\ is in the correct hole. 

1 1 . Carry out proceaures i and 2 in reverse. 

Screw /te\, vn"H\ L0CT\TEZ?o 
CFrom 5/M S2550L1) 




Issue 1 



November 1991 




V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 102 Spacer 



CONTENTS 



A. Spacer (4 Cyl. engine- 1004) 



B. Spacer (6 Cyl. engine - 1006) 



www.maskinisten.net 




Gearbox - Dynashift 5L02.1 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



W 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5L02.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



* 



A. Spacer (4 cyl. engine - 1004) 

A spacer is fitted between the gearbox and the engine 
on tractors of the MF 3075 Dynashift type (1 004 engine!. 
Internally, the spacer is attached by means of studs of 
different lengths which are screwed into the gearbox 
housing (Fig. 1). 

Disassembly 

- 1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox 
(see Section 3 A03). 

2. Remove the spacer. 

3. if necessary, extract the studs from the gearbox. 



Reassembly 

4. Cleaning the mating races or. we soacer ana 
gearbox. 

5. If they were removed, coat the studs with Loctite 
270. Screw and lock into their correct locations 
according to their lengtns. as shown in Fig. 1. 

6. Recoupie the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A03). 



Tightening torque 
(1)to(15) = 100^ 130Nm 




length of studs 

13) = 145 
(5M8) = 155 
(6) (7) = 130 



F,g. 1 



issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



5L02.3 



B. Spacer (6 cyl. engine - 1006) 

Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox 
(see Section 3 A03 or 3 A04 according to the type), 

2. Remove the tool box. 

3. Remove two spacer attaching bolts on the gearbox. 

4. Screw two guide studs in their place (locally 
manufactured). 

5. Remove the 13 bolts and the spacer. 

6. Remove the locating pins. 



Reassembly 

7. Cleaning the mating faces on me spacer and 
gearbox. 

8. Reinstall the locating pins. 

9. Repeat procedure 4 and carry out procedure in 
reverse order. 

10. Remove the guide studs. Fit and tighten the 

1 5 bolts to a toraue of 1 00 - 1 30 Nm. 
Note: Make sure that the countersunk head 
screw /13\ is positioned in the correct hole 
(Fig. 2). 

1 1 . Carry out proceaures 1 and 2 in reverse order. 




F»g- 



Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



■■■/ v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox- 1 6th gear lockout 




5M01.1 



5M01 1 6th gear lockout 



CONTENTS 



General . 



Operation 



A. Fitting 



B. Circuit diagram 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5M01.2 



Gearbox - 16th gear lockout 




General 



The arrangement for locking out the 16th gear is fitted 

to 3100 series tractors which are equipped with a 40 

km/h version speedshift. 

It applies only to countries where the maximum speed 

is limited to 30 km/h. 

The system is formed by a switch which bears against 

the gear lever (Fig.D and by two relays mounted 

behind theinstrument pane! (Fig. 2). 

Moving the gear lever into 4th automatically causes the 

solenoid valve controlling the speedshift to open and a 

change to be made to the Tortoise range. 



Operation 



The system requires ~sree items of information which 
are provided by the two relays : 

a) a supply in the Hare range coming from the Hare/ 
Tortoise range solenoid valve 

b) a signal that switch (1) is in a position indicating that 
4th gear has been engaged 

c) a signal controlled cy the clutch pedal which indica- 
tes the clutch engagement phase. 

in combination, these tnree items of information control 

the speeashift solenoid valve in the 4ih Hare speed 

alone, without pressing the button on the console in the 

cab. 

N.B. In all the other gear ratios, the speedshift can 

be controlled from the button on the console. 



A. Fitting 



With boils (4) and nut (2). position switch (1) so that it 
rests hard nqamst near lever (3) in the 4th gear position 
(Fig. I) 




Fia. 1 




tlOTT 



Fia- 2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - 16th gear lockout 




5M01.3 



B. Circuit diagram 



To pin 10 
Connector C 
Autotronic unit 



To terminal 56a 

of remote-control switch 63 

(tractors witnout Autotronic) 



f 



) — c-©> 



Terminal S1 
Speedshift switch 




Key 

6. Hare/Tortoise solenoid valvo 
21. Starter switch 

64. Speedshift solenoid valve 

65. Relay 

66. Stvircn 



Colour codes 

G. Grey 
N. Black 
O. Orange 

R. Red 
V. Green 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



*r 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 5N0i.i 



5 N0 1 Dynashift transmission assembly 



CONTENTS 



A. Description 



B. Gearbox assembly 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



•Br 



5N01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



A. Description 



The general configuration of the Dynashift transmission is 
similar to the Speedshift transmission (see Section 5 AQ1) 
except for: 

- Input unit: This features the Dynashift function and the 
reversing gear function. 

The Dynashift system replaces the Soeedshift and provides 
four gearbox input ratios in place of the two for Speeashift. 
The reverse shuttle is located in the rear enclosure of the 
gearbox. Its design is identical to that of the Speedshift 
version except that it is installed on two taper roller bearings 
instead of on two ball bearings. 

- Clutch: This is identical to the clutch for the Speedshift 
version but its control is different and ensurea by a slave 
cylinder with two pistons. 

The control system is pushed for the 3000 models and 
pulled for the 3100 models in the same wav as in the 
Speeashift version. 



B. Gearbox assembly 



Reverse gear assembly 

This consists of an assemDiv oi two gears o.'aced in front of 
the main gearbox, fitted or, a noilow snafx. eno a third gear 
fitted on the main gearbox mainshaft. 
A compound gear cluster located between tne hollow shaft 
and the mainshaft allows tne direction o: rotation of tne 
mamshaft to be reversed. 

Creeper gear unit 

This is identical to that in tne Soeedshift version (see Section 
5A01). 

Lubrication (Fig. 21 

Lubrication is ensured by means of the 1 .5 bar valve located 

on the left-hand side of the gearbox. The qs: flow circulates 

through the Dynashift assemoly, the reverse snuttle and the 

layshaft bearings as well as in tne gears, bearings and bushes 

of the mainshaft and output shaft. 

The lubricating efficiency is improved t>v tne Tact that the enoaA 

of the reverse shaft is engaged in tne >&/snaft ana tne^^ 

deflector (50) is installed. 

The Dynashift planet gears are splash lubricgieo. 



Main gearbox 

The mam gearbox has eight basic speeas. It consists of a tram 
o< four gears to which a set of two gears is added so that a 
slow (Tortoise) range and a fast (Haret range can be obtained. 
All the gears are in constant mesn and the soeeds are 
selecteo by synchromesh units. These eight speeds can be 
selectea with a single lever. 



List of parts 




(26) 


Circlip 


(53) 


Hearing cone 


ID Bearing cone 




(27) 


Thrust washer 


(54) 


Lavshaft 


(2) Bearing cup 




(28) 


Combined bearing 


(551 


3rd driven gear 


(31 Adiusting snims 




129) 


3rd drive gear (Harei 


(56) 


■i'n driven gear 


/4\ Thickness shim 




(30) 


Combined bearing 


(57) 


Soacer g 


(51 Grciip 




(311 


Hare / Tortoise synchro 


(581 


Snims | 


(6) Washer 




(32) 


Thrust washer 


159) 


2nd driven gear 


(71 1st drive gear 




(33) 


Tortoise synchro ring 


(60) 


'. v. anven gear 


(81 Bush 




(34) 


Retaining ring 


161) 


C.rchp 


19) 1 st gear synchro cone 


(35) 


3ush 


(62) 


Needle roller oearing 


(10) 1st gear synchro ring 


(36) 


Tortoise gear 


(63) 


Bearing cone 


(11) 1 s* and 2nd gear 


synchro 


(37) 


3eanng cup 


164) 


Bearing cup 


(12) 2nd gear synchro 


ring 


1381 


Adiusting shims 


(65) 


Housing 


(13) 2nd gear synchro 


cone 


(39) 


Bearing cone 


(66) 


Reverse gear umi 


(14) 2nd drive gear 




(40) 


Bearing cone 


(67) 


■r-iput gear 


(151 Circlip 




(41) 


Bolt 


(68) 


:.'ut 


(16) Bearing cud 




(421 


Adiusting shims 


(691 


"-■lainsnah 


(171 Bearing cone 




/43\ 


Thickness shim 


(70) 


detaining ring 


(18) 4th drive gear 




(44) 


Output shaft 


(71) 


Oil feed pipe 


(19) CircliO 




(451 


Circlip 


(72) 


Spring 


(20) -m gear synchro 


cone 


(46) 


Lock plate 


(73) 


Tortoise svncnro cone 


(21) Jth gear synchro ring 


147! 


Adiusting shims 


(74) 


-are syncnro ring 


(22) Washer 




(48) 


3earmg cup 


(75) 


Hare synchro cone 


(231 3rd and 4ih gear 


Synchro 


(49) 


Circlip 


(761 


3rd gear syncnro ring 


124) Needle roller bearing 


(50) 


Oil deflector 






125) 2ro gear synchro 


ring 


[51] 


Adiusting snims 







issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 






3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6) 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



5N01.3 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



W 



5N01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



WW 




Pressure lubrication 
Splash lubrication 



** 



3000/ 31 00 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 PO 1 Push-type clutch 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Operation 



B. Engine flywheel 



C. Replacing the flywheel ring gear 



D. Removing and refitting the release bearing 



E. Replacing the slave cylinder seals . 



www.maskinisten.net 



Gearbox - Dynashift spoi.i 



F. Adjusting the clutch pedal 8 



G. Service tool 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5P01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



General 



Operation 



Description 

This is a diaphragm push-type clutch. The master 
cylinder, which is of identical design to that on the 3600 
tractor, is supplied and kept at a constant level by the 
low-pressure hydraulic system. Drive is obtained viathe 
disc (6) which engages with the spiined gearbox input 
shaft in rotation. 

Construction 

The clutch control system on tractors equipped with a 
Dynashift gearbox consists of: 

- a slave cylinder (24) centred by spacer (9) 

- two pistons /23\ housed in the slave cylinder 

- a release bearing carrier (26) centred in the slave 
cylinder 

- a release bearing assembly (25) which snaps into 
place on the bearing carrier. 

Each piston /23\ is supported by two guide rings /28\ 
and tight sealing is provided by a bush /29\and O-ring 
/29A\ and a scraper ring /27V 



The force exerted on the pedal and transmitted by the 
control rod acts on the master cylinder. The quantity of 
oil displaced by the master cylinder piston 
enters via the upper hole ((arge diameter) in the slave 
cylinder (24) and causes the release bearing carrier (26) 
and the release bearing (25) to move forwards. The 
release bearing compresses the diaphragm of the clutch 
cover plate (7), and this releases the pressure on the 
clutch cover plate and frees the disc (6). 

Clutch engagement 

When the clutch pedal is released, the pressure drops 
in the slave cylinder. The diaphragm pushes the release 
bearing carrier back and the pressure plate is moved 
forwards. The disc (6) is then locked between the 
pressure plate and the engine flywheel and drives the 
gearbox input shaft. 



Specifications 

Clutch control 
Plate load 
Number of vanes 
Type of vane 
Disc diameter 
Friction linings 



push-type 

1,100 kg 

6 

non-progressive 

330 mm 

cerametallic 



List of parts 

(1) Engine flywheel 

(2) Flywheel ring gear 

(3) PTO shaft drive hub 

(41 Engine flywheel attaching bolts 

(5) Dowel pins 

(6) Disc 

(7) Clutch cover plate 

(8) Clutch cover plate attaching bolts 

(9) Spacer 

(10) Bleed point 

(11) Grommet 

(12) 90* union 

(13) Bleed pipe 

(14) Straight union 

(15) Straight union 

(16) Supply pipe 



(17) Grommet 

(18) 90° union 

/19\ Slave cylinder attaching bolt 

(20) Slave cylinder attaching bolt 

(21) Pin 

(22) Spring washer 
/23\ Pistons 

(24) Slave cylinder 

(25) Clutch release bearing 

(26) Release bearing carrier 
/27\ Scraper ring 

/28\ Guide rings 
/29\ Sealing bush 
/29A\CHing. 
/30\ Guide rings 
(31) Flexible retainer 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



w 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5P01.3 



Overall view 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




5P01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



Hr 




issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



f? 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5P01.5 



A. Clutch cover plate 



Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A03). 

2. Position the centring tool MF 457 (Fig. 3) to retain 
the cover plate and disc assembly. 

3. Gradually loosen the bolts (&} attaching the cover 
plate (7) to the engine flywheel (II. 

4. Remove the cover plate and the disc (6). 

5. Remove the two dowel pins (5) from the flywheel. 

Reassembly 

6: Remove dust and clean the engine flywheel with a 
solvent. 

7. Check the flywheel friction surface. 

Note: If the friction surface of the engine flywheel 
(1) is scored, it can be skimmed fsee part B, 
operation 6). 

8. Lightly grease the splines on the power take-off 
shaft hub in the engine flywheel (GN + Molykote 
type grease). 

9. Reinstall the two dowel pins (5). 

1 0. Using the centring tool MF 457, centre the clutch 
disc (6) on the engine flywheel. The longest section 
of the hub must be facing the diaphragm. 

1 1 . Refit the clutch cover plate. 

1 2. Gradually tighten the attaching bolts (8) to a torque 
of 50 - 70 Nm. 

1 3. Remove the centring tool MF 457. 

1 4. Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A03). 



B. Engine flywheel 



Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A03), 

2. Remove the engine clutch. Carry out procedures 2 
to 5, in part A. 

3. Immobilise the engine flywheel (1). 

4. Take out the six bolts (4) attaching the engine 
flywheel to the crankshaft. 

5. Remove the engine flywheel and the PTO shaft hub 
(3). 




Reassembly 

6. If the friction surface on the engine flywheel is 
scored it can be skimmed. 
Skimming of the friction surface should be 
performed as required (removal : 1 .5 mm max. - 
surface condition : 2.5 micrometres max.). 

/\ Important : On the flywheel, the clutch 
M^L cover plate attaching face must be 
reduced by the same value, as well as 
the length of the dowel pins (if incorrect). 
Check that the tapped holes for the bolts (81 
attaching the mechanism onto the flywheel are 
deep enough. If they are not, they must be 
tapped. 

After reworking, grease the flywheel. 
Do not install a progressive clutch disc. 
If skimming is performed, place two spacers (91 
between the seal holders and the slave cylinder 
(24). 

Replace bolts /19\ and (20) with bolts that are 
35 mm and 55 mm long, 8 dia. pitch 125, grade 
10-9. 

1 . Screw the two dowel pins into the flvwheel atta- 
ching holes. 

8. Refit the engine flywheel and the hub (3). 

9. Coat the bolts (4) with Loctite 241 . 

10. Reinstall the six bolts (4) and tighten them to a 
torque of 1 10 - 140 Nm. Free the engine flywneei. 

1 1 . Refit the engine clutch, carrying out procedures 6 to 
13 {in pan A). 

1 2. Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A03). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5P01.6 



Gearbox - Dynash/ft 



^ 



C . Replacing the flywheel ring gear 

Disassembly 

1 . Remove the engine flywheel (part B. procedures 1 

to 5). 

2. Use a 5 mm dia. drill bit to drill a hole 16 mm deep 
between the inside diameter of the ring gear (2) and 
the bottom of a tooth (Fig. 4). 

3. Crack the ring gear with a chisel positioned above the 
hole under the bottom of the tooth. 
Important: Wear protective equipment when 
breaking the ring gear to avoid possible injury by 
flying metal particles. 

Reassembly 

4. Heat a new ring gear to 245"C in an oven only. Do not 
use a blow torch or any other naked flame. 

5. Fit the ring gear (2) onto the flywheel (1) with the 
chamfered lead on the teeth pointing towards the 
engine side, and push the ring gear quickly into 
position. Allow the ring gear to cool slowly. 

6. Refit the engine flywheel (carry out procedures 6 to 
12 in part B). 



D . Removing and refitting the 
release bearing 

Preliminary operation 

Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox 
(see Section 3 A03). 

Removal 

1 . Separate the release bearing carrier (26) from the 
siave cylinder (24J. 

Note: Do not press the clutch pedal, in order to 
avoid extending the slave cylinder pistons. 

2. Using a screwdriver, press on the lugs (1) (Fig. 5) of 
the flexible retainer and remove it along with the 
spring washer and the release bearing. 

Refitting 

3. Clean the release bearing carrier and carry out 
procedure 2 in reverse. 

4. Check the rotation and radial movement of the 
release bearing. 

5. Check that the guide rings /30\ inside the slave 
cylinder are not damaged (Fig. 5}. 

6. Carry out procedure 1 in reverse. 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5P01.7 



E . Replacing the slave cylinder seals 

1 . Disconnect the bleed pipe (13) and the supply pipe 
(16). 

2. Carry out procedure 1 (in part D) and remove the 
following (as per Fig. 6): 

- pin (21) (if necessary) 

- bolts /19\ and (20) 

- the slave cylinder (24). 

3. Remove the unions (15), (if necessary) (Fig. 6). 

Disassembly (Fig. 7) 

4. Withdraw the piston /23\ by knocking the slave 
cylinder on a wooden block. 

5. Remove the guide rings /30\ and drive out the 
scraper rings /27Y 

6. Remove : 

- the guide rings /28Y 

- the sealing bushes /29\ and the O-rings /29AV 

Reassembly 

7. Clean the slave cylinder (24) (Fig. 6) and the seal 
grooves. 

Check that : 

- the bleed and supply pipes are not blocked, 

- there is no scoring in the bores and on the pistons, 

8. Shape the guide rings /28\ so as to decrease their 
diameter by approximately one third. Using pliers 
and wearing protective equipment, install the rings 
in their grooves (Fig. 7), with the knurled face in 
contact with the piston /23V 

9. Lubricate and fit the O-rings /29A\ in their groove 
without twisting them. 

1 0. Shape the sealing bushes /29\ as per Fig. 8. 
Note: The sealing bushes must be positioned 
with their iips facing the pressure side (Fig. 7). 

1 1 . Position the sealing bushes in the grooves, 
gradually fitting them on the O-rings /29AV 

1 2. Lubricate the sealing bushes, the guide rings /28\ 
and the cylinder bores. 

1 3. Check thattherearenoburrson the pistons /23V Fit 
the pistons, with the "C" chamfers facing the inside 
of the cylinders (Fig. 7). 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5P01.8 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



* 



14. Using a suitable fixture, fit the scraper rings /27\ 
fully home on their shoulder (Fig. 7). 

1 5. Check that the pistons move freely in their bores. 

1 6. If they were dismantled, screw the unions (15) and 
pin (21) into place (Fig. 6), after coating them with 
Loctite 241 and tighten them to a torque of 
25-35Nm. 

17. Shape the guide rings /30\so as to decrease their 
diameter by approximately one third. Place the 
rings in their grooves, with their knurled faces in 
contact with the release bearing carrier (26) (see 
Fig. 5). 

1 8. Lubricate the guide rings and the bore in the slave 
cylinder. 

1 9. Fit the slave cylinder on the Dynashift cover, 
inserting spacer (9) between them. Coat the bolts 
/19\ and (20) with Loctite 241 and tighten them to 
a torque of 25 • 35 Nm (Fig. 6). 

20. Fill the piston chambers with transmission oil via 
the supply port in the slave cylinder. 

21 . Reconnect the pipes (13) and (16), 

22. Check that the guide rings /30\ have not been 
displaced (Fig. 5). 

Assemble the release bearing carrier (26) with the 
slave cylinder (24), positioning the pin (21) in its 
recess (Fig. 6), 

23. Clean the clutch housing with a solvent. 

24. Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A03). 

25. Bleed the brake and clutch systems. See Section 
6 K01 , parts C and D, and Section 5 Q01 , part H. 

26. Carry out a road test on the clutch control. 

27. Check the unions for leaks. 



G . Service tool available from the 
MF network 

Clutch disc centring tool, reference MF 457 




F , Adjusting the clutch pedal 

See Section 5 Q01 . pan I. 



Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



5Q01 Pull-type clutch 



CONTENTS 

General 



Operation 



A. Clutch cover plate 



B. Engine flywheel 



C. Replacing the flywheel ring gear 

D. Clutch release bearing assembly 



E. Clutch hydraulic slave cylinder assembly 



F. Replacing the slave cylinder seals . 




Gearbox - Dynashift 5Q01.1 



G. Replacing the release bearing carrier guide rings 7 

H. Bleeding the system 8 

I. Adjusting the clutch pedal 8 

J. Service tools . 9 



Issue ) December 7 993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5Q01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



General 



Operation 



Description 

This is a diaphragm pull-type clutch. The mastercyiinder, 
which is of identical design to that on the 3600 tractor, 
is supplied and kept at a constant leve! by the low- 
pressure hydraulic system. Drive is obtained via the 
disc (6) which engages with the splined gearbox input 
shaft in rotation. 

Construction 

The clutch control system on tractors equipped with a 
Dynashift gearbox consists of: 

- a slave cylinder (24) 

• two pistons /23\ housed in the slave cylinders 

- a release bearing carrier (26) sliding on the guide cylin- 
der 125) 

- a guide cylinder (25) screwed onto the input gearbox 
sea! holder 

- a release bearing assembly (33) held in place by spring 
clip (31) 

Each piston /23\ is supported by two guide rings /28\ 
and tight sealing is provided by a bush /29\ and O-ring 
/29A\, and a scraper ring /27Y 
The clutch cover plate (7) is connected to the release 
bearing by a retaining ring fitted on the cover plate and 
which fits into the groove in the release bearing (33). 
Warning: Any operation which requires the splitting of 
the tractor between the engine and the gearbox requires 
the removal of the spring clip (31) (see Section 3 A04). 



Clutch disengagement 

The force exerted on the pedal and transmitted by the 
control rod acts on the master cylinder. The quantity of 
oil displaced by the master cylinder piston enters via the 
upper holes (large diameter) in the slave cylinder J24), 
acts on the pistons /23\and causes the release bearing 
carrier (26) and the release bearing (33) to move 
rearwards. The release bearing pulls on the diaphragm 
of the clutch cover plate and this releases the pressure 
on the clutch cover plate and frees the disc (6). 

Clutch engagement 

When the clutch pedal is released, the oi! escapes into 
the slave cylinder pressure chamber and the clutch 
release bearing returns. The diaphragm is compressed 
and the disc (6) is held against the engine flywheel by 
the friction plate in the cover plate (7). 



Specifications 

Clutch control 
Plate load 
Number of vanes 
Type of vane 
Type of pressure plate 
Disc diameter 
Friction linings 

Service tools 

See part J. 



pull-type 

1 ,300 kg 

7 

progressive 

ventilated 

330 mm 

cerametallic 



List of parts 

(1) Engine flywheel 

(2) Flywheel ring gear 

(3) PTO shaft drive hub 

(4) Engine flywheel attaching bolts 

(5) Dowel pins 

(6) Disc 

(7) Clutch cover plate 

(8) Clutch cover plate attaching bolts 
(91 Slave cylinder attaching bolts 

(10) Bleed point 

(11) Grommet 

(12) 90" union 
113) Bleed pipe 

(14) 90" union 

(15) 90' union 

(16) Connecting pipe 

(17) Grommet 

(18) 90' union 



(19) Supply pipe 

(20) Bolts (location of slave cylinders for push-type 
clutch) 

(21) Tee union 

(22) Tee union 
/23\ Pistons 

(24) Slave cylinders 

(25) Guide bearing 

(26) Release bearing carrier 
/27\ Scraper rings 

/28\ Guide rings 
/29\ Sealing bush 
/29A\ 0-rmg 
/30\ Guide rings 

(31) Spring clip 

(32) Locking screw 

(33) Clutch release bearing 

(34) Cover 

(35) Spring washer . 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5001.3 



Overall view 




Issue i 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5Q01.4 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 




Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



vv 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5Q01.5 



A . Clutch cover plate 



Disassembly 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A04). 

2. Separate the release bearing assembly from the 
cover plate. 

3. Position the centring tool MF 457 to retain the cover 
plate and disc assembly (Fig. 3). 

4. Gradually loosen the bolts (8) attaching the cover 
plate (7) to the engine flywheel (1) (Fig. 4). 

5. Remove the cover plate (7) and the disc (6). 

6. Remove the three dowel pins (5) from the flywheel 
(1) {Fig. 4). 

Reassembly 

7. Remove dust and clean the enginef lywheel (1 ) with 
a solvent. 

8. Check the flywheel friction surface. 

Note: if the friction surface of the engine flywheel 
isscored, it can be skimmed (see part B. operation 
61. 

9. Lightly grease the splines on the power take-off 
shaft hub (3) (Fig. 4) with a molybdenum grease. 
Reinstall the three dowel pins \5) on the flywheel 
(1) 

10. Using the centring tool MF 457, centre the clutch 
disc (6) on the engine flywheel (Fig. 3). The longest 
section of the hub must be facing the diaphragm. 

1 1 . Refit the clutch cover plate. 

1 2. Gradually tighten the attaching bolts (8) to a torque 
of 25-30 Nm. 

13. Remove the centring tool MF 457. 

14. Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A04). 



B. Engine flywheel 



Disassembly (Fig.4) 

1. Split the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A04). 

2. Remove the engine clutch (see pan A). 

3. Immobilise the engine flywheel (1). 

4. Take out the six bolts (41. 

5. Remove the engine flywheel (1) and the hub (3). 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5Q01.6 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



Reassembly 

6. If the friction surface on the engine flywheel (1) is 
scored it can be skimmed. 

Skimming of the friction surface should be 
performed as required (removal ; 1 .5 mm max. - 
surface condition : 2.5 micrometres max.). 
Reduce the length of the three dowel pins (5) by the 
same amount. 

Note: Cheek that the tapped holes for the baits 
18) attaching the mechanism onto the flywheel 
are deep enough. If they are not, they must be 
tapped. After reworking, grease the flywheel. 

7. Fit two dowel pins into the flywheel attaching 
holes. 

8. Refit the hub (3) and the flywheel (1). 

9. Clean the bolts (4) and coat them with Loctite 241 . 

1 0. Reinstall the six bolts (4) and tighten them to a 
torque of 110-140 Nm. 

1 1 . Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse. 



C . Replacing the flywheel ring gear 

Disassembly 

1 . Remove the engine flywheel (see part B). 

2. Carry out procedures 1 and 2. in part C of Section 
5P01. 

Reassembly 

3. Carry out procedures 4 and 5, in part C of Section 
5P01. 

4. Refit the engine flywheel (see part B). 



E . Hydraulic slave cylinder as- 
sembly^ 

Preliminary operation 

Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox, as 
per Section 3 A04. 

Removal 

1 . Disconnect: 

- the supply pipes, 

- the bleed pipes. 

2. Take out bolts (9). Remove the slave cylinders. 

Refitting 

3. Position the slave cylinders on the Dynashift cover. 

4. Fit the bolts (9) and tighten them to a torque of 
25-35Nm. 

5. Reconnect the pipes. 

6. Clean the clutch housing with a solvent. 

7. Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox, as per Section 3 A04. 

8. Bleed the clutch system (see part H). 



F . Replacing the slave cylinder seals 

Preliminary operation 

Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox, as 
per Section 3 A04. 



. Clutch release bearing assembly 

Preliminary operation 

Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox 

(see Section 3 A04). 

Note: Do not press the clutch pedal. 

Disassembly 

1 . Separate the release bearing assembly (33) from 
the clutch cover plate (33). 

2. Remove the cover (34), the clutch release bearing 
(33) and the spring washer (35). 

Reassembly 

3. Carry out procedures 15 to 17, in Section 3 A04. 

4. Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox. Carry out procedures 1 8 to 33, in Section 
3 A04. 



Disassembly 

1 . Remove the slave cylinders (see part E). 

2. Withdraw the piston /23\ by knocking the slave 
cylinder on a wooden block. 

3. Drive out the scraper rings /27\ and their O-rings 

/29AY 

4. Remove : 

- the guide rings /28V 

• the sealing bushes /29\ and the O-rings /29AV 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5Q01.7 



Reassembly 

5. Clean the slave cylinder (24) (Fig. 5) and the seal 
grooves. 

Check that : 

- the bleed and supply pipes are not blocked, 

- there is no scoring in the bores and on the pistons 

6. Shape the guide rings /28V so as to decrease their 
diameter by approximately one third. Using pliers 
and wearing protective equipment, install the rings 
in their grooves (Fig. 5), with the knurled face in 
contact with the piston /23V 

7. Lubricate and fit the O-rings /29A\ in their groove 
without twisting them. 

8. Shape the sealing bushes /29\ as per Fig. 6. 
Note : The sealing bushes must be positioned 
with their lips facing the pressure side (Fig. 5). 

9. Position the sealing bushes in the grooves, 
gradually fitting them on the O-rings /29AV 

1 0. Lubricate the sealing bushes, the guide rings /28\ 
and the cylinder bores. 

1 1 . Check that thereare no burrs on the pistons /23V Fit 
the pistons, with the "C" chamfers facing the inside 
of the cylinders (Fig. 5). 

1 2. Position the O-rings and scraper rings /23\ in their 
corresponding grooves. 

1 3. Fit the pistons and check that they move normally 
in their bores. 

14. If they were removed, fit unions (14) and (15). 

1 5. Reinstall the hydraulic slave cylinders (see part E). 
Reconnect the pipes. 

16. Clean the dutch housing with a solvent. 

1 7. Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (see Section 3 A04). 

18. Bleed the brake and clutch systems. See part Hand 
parts C and D in Section 6 KOI . 

1 9. Carry out a road test on the clutch control. 

20. Check the unions for leaks. 



G . Replacing the clutch release 
bearing guide rings 

Preliminary operation 

Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox, as 
per Section 3 A04. 





Fig. 6 



Disassembly 

1 . Remove the hydraulic slave cylinders (see part E). 

2. Withdraw the release bearing carrier (26). Remove 
the guide rings /30V 

Note: If necessary, remove the guide cylinder (25) 
using socket 3376936 M1 (see part J). 

Reassembly 

Note: If it was removed, apply Loctite 542 on the 
thread on the guide cylinder (25). Tighten to a 
torque of 40 - 50 Nm. 

3. Shape the guide rings /30\ so as to decrease their 
diameter by approximately one third. 

Install the rings in their grooves, with the knurlec 
face in contact with the release bearing carrier (26). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5Q01.8 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



* 



Lubricate the guide rings and the bore in the release 

bearing carrier. 

Check that the rings are correctly positioned. 

Assemble the release bearing carrier (26) on the 

guide cylinder |25). Check that the notches E on the 

rear face of the release bearing carrier are lined up 

with bolts (20) (Fig. 1). 

Check that the release bearing carrier slides freely. 

Reinstall the hydraulic slave cylinders (see part E). 

Recouple the tractor between the engine and the 

gearbox {see Section 3 A04). 



H. Bleeding the system 

1 . Run the engine at approximately 1 ,200 rpm and 
restrict the return hose (11 (see Fig. 7) with suitably 
protected pliers or clamp. 

2. Connect the union 3582045 Ml (1) together with its 
hose {Fig. 8) onto the bleed point (on the right-hand 
side of the gearbox). 

3. Immerse the end of the hose in a receptacle partly 
filled with transmission oil. 

4. Operate the clutch pedal. Repeat the action several 
times, until oil free of bubbles comes out of the hose. 

5. Remove the union and release the hose. 

Note : On this type of clutch, pedal tra vel is taken 
up automatically . If, however, the clutch does 
not operate correctly, repeat the air bleed 
procedure. 



I . Adjusting the clutch pedal 

Before installing, coat the pins (3) and (4) with 

molybdenum disulphide grease. 

Apply Loctite 542 on the threads of rod (1) (Fig. 9). 

Adjust the rod to obtain a pedal travel of 200 mm 

between the disengaged 

position (pedal against the stop (2)) and the engaged 

position. 




Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5Q01.9 



J . Service tools available from the 
MF network 



MF457 

Clutch disc centring tool 



3582045 Ml 

Hydraulic quick coupler (union) 



3376936 Ml 

Socket for release bearing carrier guide 




issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - Dynashift srot.i 



5R01 Input unit 



CONTENTS 

General 



A. Removal 



B. Refitting and adjusting the reverse gear selector. 



C Service tool 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5R01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



* 



General 



The input gearbox is in the form of an interchangeable 
module fitted at the input end of the gearbox. It is made 
of two quite separate parts. The Dynashift unit and the 

reverse shuttle. 

The Dynashift: This is an independent device which 
allows four ratios to be selected while running, without 
declutching,- using a lever located under the steering 
wheel. The Dynashift assembly is secured to the front 
of the input unit. It is a hydraulicafiy controlled gear 
change device providing for ratios on input to the 
gearbox. 

This function is ensured by two epicyclic gear trains 
associated with two hydraulic clutches. 
For its operation, see Section 5 R02. 

The reverse shuttle: This is housed in the enclosure to 
the rear of the input gearbox and consists of a set of two 
gears operated via a synchromesh mechanism. A pair 
of idler gears allows the direction of rotation to be 
reversea. For its operation, see Section 5 R03. 



A. Removal 



When tne input gearbox is replaced, the layshaft 
shimming must be adjusted. To allow the bearings to 
be shimmed correctly, the gearbox must be removed 
from the tractor. 
3000-3100 tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle (Section 3 B02). 

2. Remove the selector cover and carry out procedure 
11 and 12 in Section 5X01. 

3000 tractors 

3. Separate the gearbox from the engine. Carry out 
procedures 9 and 11 to 12 In Section 3 A03. 
Remove the PTO shaft. 

3100 tractors 

4. Separate the gearbox from the engine. Carry out 
procedures 3 and 4, and 1 2 to 14 in Section 3 A04. 
Remove the PTO shaft. 




3000 -3100 tractors 

5. To facilitate the removal of the input unit, remove the 
bolts (34). Remove the selector (33) (Fig. 1). 

6. Remove the clutch slave cylinder or cylinders (de- 
pending on the type) and install the sling 3376883M 1 
(see part J of Section 5 R02), using bolts of the 
correct length (Fig. 2). 

7. Remove the eight bolts (30) [Fig. 2). 

Note: Do not remove the three bolts (66}, 
dimensioned across flats 13 (Fig. 2). 



Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - Dynashift 



5R01.3 



8. Detach and remove the input unit, pulling it 
forwards, 

9. Discard the O-rings (2) and (3). Recoverthe cup (64) 
and the locating pin (4) (Fig. 3 and 4). 



B. Refitting and adjusting the re- 
verse gear selector 

Refitting 

1 0. On the input unit, check that the cup (64) O-ring (21 
are in position {Fig. 3). 

11 . On the housing, position the new O-rings (3) and 
the locating pin (4) (Fig. 4). 

1 2. On the gearbox, screw in two locating studs "G", as 
per Fig. 4. Offer up the gearbox in the housing, using 
the sling. 

1 3. At a first stage, with the help of an operator, slightly 
lift the layshaft through the opening of the selector 
cover in order to engage the cone of the shaft in the 
cup (64) 

14. Position the housing with respect to the locating 
pin. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 45 - 60 Nm. 

1 5. Remove the sling. 

16. Refit the clutch slave cylinder or cylinders, 
depending on the type (see Section 5 P01 or 5 Q01 , 
part G, procedure 5). Fit the bolts: 

- 3000 series: First coat them with Loctite 542 and 
tighten to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm. 

- 3100 series: Tighten to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm. 

1 7. Shim the layshaft. Carry out procedures 25 to 35, in 
Section 5 T01 . 

3000 tractors 

18. Recouple the gearbox to the engine. Carry out 
procedures 13 to 16, in Section 3 A03. 

1 9. Carry out procedures 1 7 and 1 8, in Section 3 A03. 

3100 tractors 

20. Recouple the gearbox to the engine. Carry out 
procedures 15 to 23, in Section 3 A04. 

3000/3100 tractors 

Adjusting the reverse gear selector 

21. Position the selector (33) to the neutral position. Fit 
and tighten tool 3582434 M1 (see Part CI with two 
bolts (Fig. 5). 

22. Coat the adjusting bolts with Loctite 221 . 

23. Position face F of the reverse gear selector in 
contact with the tool using bolts (34) (Fig. 5). 




Fig- 3 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




5R01.4 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRA CTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




V 



Principle of adjustment 

The selector (33) is positioned on me basis of the difference 
in tne soacing Y of the holes and tne sDacing Z of the soot- 
faced depressions in the guide rail (31). The selector can be 
adjusted to move to different Doints dv acting eitner on the 
front or tne rear screw (32) oepenamg on the aaiustment 
reauired (Fig. 6). 

24 . Refit the selector cover. Carry out orocecures 33 to 38. in 
Section 5 XOl . 

25. Recouple the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axie (Section 3 B02). 

26. Carry out road test on ratios A, B, C ano D of the 
Dynashift, reverse shuttle and gears. 

27. Check the mating faces on ihe selector cover as well as 
the gearbox on the rear axie for leaks. 

C. Service tools 

1. Tool available through MF network 





1 
1 






-v 












v> 


***\ ~\ 










5c 


X T 






'fr„jl 


\ s 








ft 







r\ 




Fig. 6 



3583434 Ml - Reverse shuttle setting gauge 




Fig. 7 



3376883 Ml - 
Lifting bracket 




Fig. 8 



2. Tool to be made locally 

Handling bar 



1500 



-»4 



! ! i 

//III 


T 


// i ; ; i i'i 


J 

1 
i 

I i 



» » g 



:5 > . «■ ?5 ~ m 



'80 



SO 



5 holes, 7 mm dia. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



www.maskinisten.net 




5 R02. 1 



5 R02 Dynashift input unit 



CONTENTS 



General description 
Operation 



A. Preliminary operations 



2 

2 
8 



B. Disassembling the cover, housing, front clutch 
and brake 



C. Removing and separating the planetary carrier 



10 



D. Disassembling the rear clutch and brake 



10 



E. Assembling the planetary carriers. 



10 



F. Reassembling the rear clutch and brake 



11 



G. Reassembling the cover, front clutch, brake 
and spacer housing 



12 



H. Shimming the planetary carriers 



14 



I. Reinstall primary shaft, cover and housing assembly 



15 



J. Service tools 



16 



Issue 1 



December 1 993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 R02.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



General 



Description 

The general conception of the Dynashift input unit 

3000/3100 is the same as the tractor 3600. 

But it's important to note that the spacer (21 ) is fixed on 

the gearbox housing instead of being mounted on the 

reverse shuttle housing. 

Only a Belleville spring /52\ operates on the brake and 

the rear clutch 

Particularities 3100 

The front of the support hub (11) is threaded and 

supports the guide of the release bearing carrier. 

Sealing with the primary shaft is obtained by a wide seal 

(77) only. 

The Dynashift assembly is fitted at the front of the input 

unit. It is a hydraulically controlled gearchange device 

which provides four input ratios to the main gearbox. 

It does this by means of two epicyclic gear trains 

connected to two hydraulic clutches. 

The Dynashift design allows four ratios to be selected 

on the move, without declutching, using a control 

located under the steering wheel. 

The Dynashift unit is controlled by two solenoid valves 

fitted in the low flow hydraulic circuit. 

The two solenoid valves are themselves controlled by 

an electronic control unit located under the instrument 

panel and connected to the tractor's Autotronic unit. 



Operation 



The dynashift input unit includes two epicyclic gear 
trains : 

- The primary epicyclic unit is the major component of 
the input unit and is used to transmitting engine 
motion to the gearbox. 

- The secondary epicyclic unit controls the speed of the 
primary sun gear. 

Primary epicyclic gear train 

Motion enters via the primary ring gear (31) which is 
spiined onto the primary shaft (7). It turns at engine 
speed. 

The motion is transmitted via the planetary carrier (28) 
which is spiined onto the secondary shaft (53), The 
primary sungear (64) is driven by the secondary 
epicyclic gear train. The speed of this sungear 
determines the una reduction ratio. 

Secondary epicyclic gear train 

This epicydic gear tram is controlled by hydraulic 
clutches and brakes. 



The secondary ring gear (34) is : 

- either locked onto the primary shaft (7) by the three 
clutch discs (3) and the Belleville spring /4\ located in 
the front part of the unit. 

- or immobilized in relation to the housing by three brake 
discs (15) and one piston (22). 

With no pressure, the piston (22) is pushed to the rear 
by the twelve springs (20) and the Belleville spring /4\ 
via the brake plate (16), 

When pressure from the 17 bar circuit acts on piston 
(22), it moves forward, locks the brake discs (15) and 
pushes plate (16), which compresses the Belleville 
spring /4\. 

The secondary ring gear speed is established as 
follows : , 

- speed equal to engine speed when the front piston is 
not under pressure. 

• speed zero when the front piston is under pressure. 

The sungear (61) is either : 

• locked on the secondary shaft by means of the four 
clutch discs (50) and one Belleville spring /52\ located 
at the rear part of the unit. 

• or immobilized in relation to the housing by means of 
the three brake discs (41) and one piston (37). 

With no pressure, piston (37) is pushed towards the 
front by the Belleville spring and the six springs (65). 

Under 1 7 bar pressure, piston (37) moves towards the 
rear and locks the brake discs (41). It compresses the 
Belleville spring /52\ via the brake plate (45), which 
frees up the secondary shaft clutch discs. 

When the secondary ring gear (34) or the sungear (61) 

is immobilized, the speed of the secondary planetary 
carrier (39) changes. The secondary planetary earner 
drives the primary sungear (64) and produces the unit 
reduction ratio. 



Service tools 

Tools available for MF dealers (See section J) 

- Lifting bracket for front cover unit. No. 3376883 M1 

- Centering tool, No. 3376887 M1 

- Secondary ring gear retaining tool. No. 3376888 M1 

- Sling for shaft and cover assembly. No. 3376889 M1 

- Planetary carrier compression tool. No. 3376920 Ml 

- Calibrated pins. No. 3376925 M? 
Tool to be made up locally 

- Adaptor bar 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



Key (Fig. 1) 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



ID 


Secondary ring gear carrier 


{2} 


Clutch driven plates 


(3) 


Clutch driving plates 


/4\ 


Belleville spring 


(5) 


Splined hub 


(6) 


Needle bearing 


(7) 


Primary shaft 


/8\ 


Wide seal 


/9\ 


Narrow seal 


(10) 


Thrust washer 


(11) 


Suppoft hub 


(12) 


Bolt 


(13) 


Front cover 


(14) 


Clutch housing 


(15) 


Front brake discs 


(16) 


Brake plate 


(17) 


Pressure plate 


(18) 


Bolt 


(19) 


O-ring 


(20) 


Springs 


(21) 


Spacer (piston housing) 


(22) 


Front piston 


(23) 


Blanking plug 


(24) 


O-ring 


(25) 


Bolt 


(26) 


O-ring 


(27) 


Ball bearing 


(28) 


Primary planetary carrier 


(29) 


Blanking plug 


(30) 


Screw 


(31) 


Primary ring gear 


(32) 


O-ring 


(33) 


Bolt 


(34) 


Secondary ring gear 


(35) 


O-ring 


(36) 


O-ring 


(37) 


Rear piston 


(38) 


Pressure plate 


(39) 


Secondary planetary carrier 


(40) 


Reverse shuttle housing 


(41) 


RH Brake disc 


/42\ 


Secondary brake housing 


(43) 


Bolt 


(44) 


Pressure plate 


(45) 


Brake plate 


(46) 


Bolt 


(47) 


Cover 


(48) 


Driven plate 


(49) 


Retaining ring 


<50) 


Rear clutch driving plate 



(51) 


Thrust washer 


/52^ 


Belleville spring 


(53) 


Secondary shaft 


(54) 


Splined hub 


(55) 


Circlip 


(56) 


Spacer 


(57) 


Ball bearing 


(58) 


Ball bearing 


(59) 


Rear clutch housing 


(60) 


Retaining ring 


(61 


Secondary sungear 


(62 


Retaining ring 


(63 


Locating needles 


(64 


Primary sungear 


(65 


Springs 


(66 


Bolt 


(67 


O-ring 


(68 


O-ring 


(69 


Circlip 


(70 


Thrust plate 


[71 


Shim(s) 


(72 


Retaining ring 


(73 


O-ring 


(74 


Plug 


(75 


Oil deflector 


(76 


Ball 


(77 


Wide seal (serie 3100) 



Issue 1 




December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5R02.4 



Gearbox - Dynashift 

@> ^^r\ do 



^ 




33 



Explanation of ratios 

Ratio A = 1:1.620 reduction (Fig. 3) 

The two pistons (22) and (37) are simultaneously under 

pressure from the 1 7 bar circuit. 

The secondary ring gear (34) is locked onto the housing 

by means of the front brake. 

The secondary sungear (61) is locked onto the housing 

by means of the rear brake. 

As a result, the secondary epicyclic gear train is locked. 

The primary sungear (64) is locked. 

The reduction ratio is fixed only by the primary epicyclic 
gear tram. It uses traditional gearing: motion enters via 
the ring gear and leaves via the planetary carrier, while 
the sungear remains immobile. 



Ratio B = 1:1.386 reduction (Fig. 4) 

The front piston (22) is under pressure. 

The secondary ring gear (34) is locked onto the housing 

by means of the front brake. 

The rear piston (37) is not under pressure. 

The secondary sungear (61) turns with the secondary 

shaft (53) (the clutch is engaged). 

The secondary planetary carrier (39) turns at slow 

speed, driving the primary sungear (64). 

This causes the reduction ratio to be less. 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



5R02.5 




Issue i 



OecemDer 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



1k 



5R02.6 Gearbox - Dynashift 

Ratio C = 1:1. 1704 reduction (Fig.5) 

The rear ptston (37) is under pressure. 

The secondary sungear (61 ) is locked onto the housing 

by the rear brake. 

The front piston (22) is not under pressure. 

The secondary ring gear (34) turns with the primary 

shaft (7). thus imparting a higher speed to the 

secondary planetary carrier (39). 

The primary sungear (64) is driven by the secondary 

planetarycarner (39) at a higher speed than in ratio B. 

This therefore gives less reduction. 



Ratio D = 1:1. reduction (Fig.6) 

Neither of the two pistons is under pressure. The two 

clutches are therefore engaged. 

The secondary ring gear (34) turns with the primary 

shaft (71 

The secondary sungear (61) is locked onto the 

secondary shaft (53) thus mechanically locking the 

entire svstem. 

The ra:o is therefore VI (direct drive). 



Issue 1 DecemDer 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




n 



5R02.7 




Fig. 5 




Fig. 6 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



s* 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 R02.8 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




A. Preliminary operations 

1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the gear- 
box ; 

- see section 3 A03 (3000) 

- ses section 3 A04 (3100) 

2. Drain only the gearbox. 

3. At the left hand front of the gearbox, disconnect the 
clutch slave cylinders) supply hose (tractors 3000 or 
3100). 

4. Inside the clutch housing, disconnect : 

- pipes (13( and (16), the union (121 (Fig. 7 and 8) 
(tractors 3000 and 3100) 

• the tube (1), 

Remove the union (10) (Fig. 7 and 8) (tractors 3000 

and 3100). 

Disassemble the grommets |2). 111) and 117) (Fig. 7 

and 8) (tractors 3000 and 3100). 

5. Remove the PTO shaft. 

6. Remove the clutch slave cylinder(s). Fit the lifting 
bracket 3376883 Ml. using bolts of the correct 
iengtn (Fig. 9). 

Immobilize the reverse shuttle lever in forward posi- 
tron so as to retain the reverse shuttle housing 
(Fig. 10). 





Issue 1 



Decemoer 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5 R02.9 



7. Remove two screws (301 diametrically opposed 
and screw two guide studs "G* (Fig.11). Remove 
the other six screws. 

8. Unscrew the three bolts (66) gradually and 
alternately (Fig. 11) (flat to flat dimension 13 mm) 
fixing the housing ill) on the reverse shuttle 
housing (40). 



B. Disassembling the cover, the 
housing, front clutch and brake 

9. Remove the primary shaft assembly (7), cover (13) 
and housing (21). Discard the O'rings (32), (67) and 
(68). 

1 0. Remove the lifting bracket. 

1 1 . Turn the front cover/housing assembly over onto a 
suitable support (Fig. 12). 

1 2. Retain the thrust washer (70) and the shims 1711. 

1 3. Remove the circlip 169), take out the primary shaft 
(7) downwards, taking care not to damage : 

- the seals /8\ and /9\ (tractor 3000) 

- the seal /77\ (tractor 3100) 

14. Take the piston (37)out the housing (21). Remove 
the seats (35), (36) and discard them. 

1 5. Turn the ring gear (31) so as to have access to the 

bolts (25). 
16. Using tool 3376888 Ml, immobilize the ring gear 

(34). Remove the bolts (25) (Fig. 13). 
1 7. Take out the ring gear assembly (34), its carrier (1), 

ring gear (31), bearing (27). 

1 8. If necessary, remove the bolts (33), to separate the 
ring gear (34) from its carrier (1). Remove the 
bearing (27) from the ring gear (31). 

19. Unscrew the bolts (18) gradually and alternately, 
remove the housing (21). Discard the seal (19). 

20. If necessary, take the piston (22) out of the housing, 
discard the seals (24) and (26). 

21 . Remove the discs (3). the driven plates (2) and the 
splined hub (5). 

22. Remove the springs (20), the discs (15) separated 
by the brake plate (16) and the pressure plate (17). 

23. Take out the Belleville spring /4\, the clutch housing 
(14), and its the thrust washer (10). 

24. If necessary, take the seats /8\and /9\out (tractor 
3000). the seal /77\ (tractor 3100) and the needle 
bearing (6). Discard the parts. Remove screws 
(12), separate the support hub (11) from the cover 
(13) (hit the back of the support, using a plastic 
hammer). 





Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5R02.10 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



C. Removing and separating the 
planetary carrier assembly 

25. Compress the planetary carrier assembly using 
special tool 3376920 Ml (Fig.U). 

26. Remove the retaining ring (72). Lift off the primary 
planetary carrier assembly. 

27. Remove the secondary sungear (61) and the 
retaining ring (49) (if necessary). 

28. Remove the circfip (55). Remove the planetary 
carrier bearing (57) and the spacer (56). 

29. Separate the secondary planetary carrier (39) from 
the primary planetary carrier (28). 

30. Remove the retaining ring (60) and the bearing (58). 

31. Place the secondary carrier in vertical position. 
Tapping lightly on a wooden block, remove the 
needles (63) (Fig.1 5). Separate the planetary carrier 
from the primary sungear (64). with the ring (62) 
and the deflector (75). 



D. Disassembling the rear clutch and 
brake 

32. Remove the pressure plate (38), the pressure plate 
springs (65). the brake discs (41), separated from 
the pressure plate (44). 

33. Remove the clutch housing assembly (59). incor- 
porating brake plate (45) and the last disc (41). 
Remove the thrust washer (51). 

34. Remove the clutch cover screws (46). Remove the 
cover (47) and the Belleville spring /52V Separate 
the brake/clutch plate (45), the clutch discs (50) and 
the driven plates (48). Remove the hub (54). 

35. Remove the screws (43). Separate and remove the 
secondary brake housing /4ZY Mark its position. 




E. Assembling the planetary carriers 

36. Clean and inspect the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

37. Make sure that the secondary shaft lubrication 
holes are not obstructed. 

38. Check axial play and rotation of each planetary 
manually. 

39. Onto the secondary planetary carrier (39). fit the 
primary sungear (64) along with its bearing 
retaining ring (62) and the deflector (75). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



Ik 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5R02.11 



40. Slide the three needles (631 into each hole of the 
primary sungear. They must be fully home to the 
bottom of the groove in the secondary planetary 
carrier. 

41 . Fit the ball bearing (58} and the retaining ring (60). 

42. Assemble the secondary planetary carrier on the 
primary planetary carrier (28). To facilitate the entry 
of the gearteeth, turn the planetary gears. 

43. Fit the spacer (56) and the ball bearing (57). Install 
the circiip (55). 

44. Check the backlash between the primary planetary 
gears manually. 

45. Fit the ring (49) (if it was removed) into the secon- 
dary sungear (61). 



F. Reassembling the rear clutch and 
brake 

46. Clean and inspect the parrs, replace any which are 
defective. 

47. Direct a jet of compressed air into the reverse idler 
gear port to ensure that it is not obstructed. 

48. Coat the seal mating surface of the brake housing 
/4Z\ with a sealing compound in the area of the 
lubrication passage (Fig. 16). 

49. Fit the input unit like it was during the dismantling. 
Coat the screws (43) with Loctite 241 and tighten 
them to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm. 

50. To gain access to the bolts (46), turn over the 
planetary carriers. Place the secondary planetary 
(61), the housing (59) and the splined hub 154) with 
the internal splines facing downwards (Fig. 17). 
Install the rear discs (50), the driven plates (48) and 
the pressure plate (45), the Belleville spring /52\as 
Fig.1, then the cover (47). 

5 1 . Centre the clutch housing assembly (591 using tool 
3376887 M1 {Fig. 18). Coat the bolts (46) with 
loctite 241 and torque them to 1 2 - 1 6 Nm. Remove 
the tool. Separate the housing assembly from the 
pla-netary carriers. 

52. Coat the washer (51) with miscible grease and 
place it on the cover (47). 

53. Fit a disc (41) in the brake housing /42Y 





Fig. 17 




Fig. 18 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5R02.12 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



** 



54, Rt the clutch housing assembly (59) and the 
washer (51) on the shaft (53). Fit the splined hub 
(54). with its internal splines pointing upwards 
(Fig. 19). 

55. Fit the two other brake discs (41 ), separated by the 
pressure plate (44). Position the sungear (61) toge- 
ther with the ring (49), on the clutch housing (59). 



G. Reassembling the cover, front 
clutch, brake and spacer housing 

56. Clean the seal mating surface and the cover (13). 
Check that the plug (74) is fitted. Make sure that the 
lubrication passage is not obstructed. 

57. Clean the support hub (11). Check that the lubri- 
cation holes are not obstructed. 

58. If necessary, fit and then position : 
Tractor 3000 {Fig. 20) 

- The needle bearing (6) at - 0,3 from face H 

- The narrow seal /9\ pressing on shoulder E 

- The wide seal /8\ at 0,2 - 0,6 from face G 
Tractor 3100 (Fig. 21) 

- The needle bearing (6) at - 0,3 from face H 

- the seal /77\ pressing on shoulder E. 

Note : Use a press and a suitable assembly 
device to fit the bearing and the seals correctly. 

59. After fitting the seals /8\ and /9V make sure that 
orifices O are not obstructed (Fig. 20). 

60. Coat the surface of the cover which contacts the 
support (11) with sealing compound. 

61 . Screw in two guide studs G. Position the support 
(Fig. 22) making sure that lubrication hole meets up 
with the corresponding passage in the cover (Fig. 
22). 

62. Fit the support into the cover (Fig. 22). 

63. Remove the guide studs. Coat the screws (12) with 
Loctite 542, fit and torque to 14 - 20Nm. 

64. Place the cover on a suitable support (Fig. 23). 

65. Make sure that lubrication holes of the primary 
shaft (7) are not obstructed. Protect the splines to 
avoid damage to the seals /8V and /9\ or /77\ 
{following type). Lubricate the shaft and slide it into 
the support from below. Retain the shaft in position 
using the locally made tool (Fig. 23). 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5R02.13 



66. Remove the spline protection. 

67. Coat the thrust washer (10) with miscibie grease and 
place it on the housing (14). 

68. Place the housing with the thrust washer on the support 

(11). 

69. Fit the Belleville spring /4\ the correct way round (Fig. 1 ), 

a brake disc (15) and a brake plate (16). 

70. On the primary shaft (7) fit the splined hub (5) with its 

internal splines pointing upwards (Fig. 24). Fit the discs 
(3) and the driven plates (2). 

71. Fit the two other brake discs (15), separated by the 

pressure plate (17). 

72. Reinstall the springs (20). Fit the O'rings (19) and (73). 

73. Check that the blanking plugs (23) and (29) are in place. 
Make sure that the supply holes to the front and rear 
piston chambers in the spacer housing (21) are not 
obstructed. 

74. Lubricate O'rings (24) and (26) and fit them respectively 
in the front piston (22) and in the spacer housing (21). 

75. Position the front piston in the spacer housing and drive 
in it using a plastic hammer, tapping gradually and 
alternately around its circumference. 

76. Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs into the 
spacer housing (21 ) and position it on the front cover (1 3), 
making sure that the spacer housing lubrication hole 
meets up with the corresponding passage in the cover. 

77. Remove the guide studs. Fit and tighten the bolts (18) to 

a torque of 29 ■ 37 Nm. Connect a pressure gauge fitted 
with a shut-off valve to the front piston orifice. Connect 
a 0,3 bar compressed air line to the circuit. Close the shut- 
off valve and check that no pressure drop occurs within 
1 minute. 

78. If it was removed, reinstall the bearing (27) on the primary 

ring gear (31). Place the secondary ring gear (34) on the 
secondary ring gear carrier (1). Coat the bolts (33) with 
Loctite 241. fit and tighten to a torque of 12 - 16 Nm. 

79. Screw two guide studs into the clutch housing (14). Fit 
the secondary ring gear (34), carrier (1), primary ring gear 
(3l ) and bearing (27) assembly onto the primary shaft (7). 
Remove the guide studs. Fit the bolts (25). Immobilize 
the secondary ring gear (34) as Fig. 1 3. Coat the bolts (25) 
with Loctite 241 and tighten to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm. 

80. Fit the circlip (69). 

81 . Lubricate, then fit seals (35) and (36) on the rear piston 

(37) 

82. Position the piston in the housing and drive it home using 

a ptastic mallet . tapping gradually around its 
circumference. Maintain the rear piston in place by 
means of a suitable device. Check that the seals are 
leakproof using operation 77 above. 




4f*^\ 




Ft 


Fig. 23 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



■*P 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 R02. 14 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



H. Shimming the planetary carriers 

This operation consists of obtaining a play J1 from 0,50 
to 0,70 between the stop (70) and the front face of the 
primary planetary carrier (28) (Fig. 25). 
This shimming must be carried out if any operation is 
performed on the following parts : 

- housing (21), 

- cover (13). 
-support (11), 

- washer (10), 

- housing (14), 

- ring gear carrier (1). 

- bearing (27), 

- ring gear (31). 

- circlip (69), 

- stop (70), 

- planetary carrier (28), 

- bearing (58). 
• spacer (56), 

- bearing (57), 

- ring (49). 

- housing (59), 

- cover (47), 
-washer (51). 

To do this shimming correctly, the springs (65), the 

pressure plate (38) and the shims [711 must not be 

fitted. 

Note : if shimming is not necessary, continue 

operations as from 89 to 104. 

83. Fit stop (70) on the primary shaft (7). 

On the spacer housing (21) 

84. Using calibrated pins *P* 3376925 Ml and a depth 
gauge with an engineer straight edge, measure 
dimension X (Fig. 26) at two opposing points. 
Calculate the mean of the two measurements. 
Note : Substract the thickness of the straight 
edge. 

On the reverse shuttle housing (40) 

85. Remove the guide studs. Retain the housing using 
two bolts (30) diametrically opposed (Fig. 14). 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



vV 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5RQ2.15 



86. Slide the planetary carrier assembly on the shaft and pla- 
ce it fully home, using a compression tool 3376920 M1 
(Fig. 27). 

87. Screw the pins P (Fig. 27) in contact with the housing. 

Using depth gauge with an engineer straight edge, 

measure dimension Y (Fig. 27). 

Note : Substract the thickness of the straight edge. 

88. Calculate the play to obtain : 
J1.b 050 to 0,70 

Find the initial play from the formula : 

J1 = fX+Y)-220 

where 220 = 2a 

a = lengh of calibrated pins 

Depending of the initial play, select the thickness of 

shims needed [71] to obtain J1 at the tolerance shown. 

89. Place the shim pack [71] between circlip (69) and stop 

(70) coated with miscible grease (Amber Technical or 
equivalent). 

90. Remove the compression tool and the planetary carriers 
lif shimming). Coat the springs (65) with miscible grease 
and reinstall them. Position the pressure piate (38), ma- 
king sure that the notches line up with the lugs on the 
brake housing /4ZY Place the planetary carriers on the 
shaft (53) and compress them using tool 3376920 Ml 
(Fig. 14). 

91. Fit the retaining ring (72). Remove the tool. Check ma- 
nually the play between the secondary planetary gears 
backlash. 

I. Reinstall primary shaft , cover and 
housing assembly 

92. Place new O'rings (32). (671, (68) coated with grease, on 
the reverse shuttle housing. Remove the two bolts (30) 
retaining the reverse shuttle housing. Screw two guide 
studs in diametrically opposed. 

93. Fix the lifting bracket 3376883 M1 on the cover (13). 
Reinstall the primary shaft assembly (7), cover and hou- 
sing (21) (Fig. 1 1) lining up the lubrication holes and the 
circuit 1 7 bar. 

94. Turn the shaft so as to engage the planetary gears in the 

ring gears. 

95. Fix two screws (30). Remove the guide studs. Fit six other 
Dolts (Fig. 1 1L Fit screws and tighten to a torque of 45 - 
60 Nm. 

96. Fit three screws (66) and tighten to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm 
(Fig. 11). 

97. Remove the lifting bracket. Reinstall the clutch slave 
cylinders) (for different type, see section 5P01 orSQOD. 
Coat only the bolts 3000 with Loctite 542 and tighten to 
a torque of : 

- 36 - 46 Nm (3000) 
-25-35Nm(3100) 




98. Reverse operations 3 and 4. 

99. Clean the clutch housing with a solvent. 

1 00. Replace the sealing of the input shaft 

- 3000 serie tractors : see operation 14. section 3A03. 

- 3100 serie tractors : see operation 19. section 3A04. 

101. Couple the tractor together at the engine and the 
gearbox (section 3A03 - 3000 serie tractor, section 
3A04- 3100 sene tractor). 

1 02. Fill the rear axle with oil to the correct level. 

1 03. Road test all controls and Dynashift A, B, C and D 
ratios. 

1 04. Check the sealing of the unions. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5R02.16 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



J . Service tools 



- Lifting bracket tor input unit No 3376883 Ml 

- Centering tool No 3376887 M1 

- Secondary ring gear retaining tool No 3376888 M1 

- Planetary carriers compression tool No 3376920 M1 

- Calibrated pins No 3376925 M1 . 





3376888 Ml 




3376920 Ml 


U^C^r 



3376925 Ml 




tssue 1 



December 1993 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



5R02.17 



Tool to be made up locally 

- Adaptor bar 













2500 






















// 












' ' 




// 






1 
1 


1 
1 




1 




I 
1 

| 


t 
1 






.7 














I 










1 




/ 




75 


»L 75 






75 






180 




80 




ft 
n 

IS 





























5 holes 7 mm 



Issue 1 



December 1393 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 R03 Reverse shuttle 



CONTENTS 

General _ 



Operation 



A. Input unit removal 



B. Dynashift dismantling . 



Gearbox - Dynashift 5R03.1 



C. Reverse shuttle dismantling and reassembly 6 

D. Dynashift reassembly 8 

E. Input unit assembly and refitting 8 

F. Service tool 9 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



^ 



5 R03.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



General 



Operation 



The reverse shuttle transmits drive from the dynashift 
to the mainshaft located at the front of the main 
gearbox. 

The reverse shuttle assembly is located at the rear of 
the input unit behind the Dynashift. It comprises : 

- two helical gears (5) and (23) running on two needle 
roller bearings (6) and (20). 

- a synchromesh assembly which the hub (2) is splined 
onto the secondary shaft (19). 

- a synchromesh selector rail and fork assembly 

- a secondary shaft (19) mounted on taper roller 
bearings (24) (37) and (9) (38) supported at both ends 
in the reverse shuttle housing. 

- a compound gear (15) in constant mesh with the gear 
(23) and the gearbox input gear (67). 



Forward drive 

When moved rearwards the synchromesh coupler 
connects gear (5) with shaft (19) and gear (671 with 
shaft (69). Gear (S) transmits drive to main shaft (69) via 
gear (67) in constant mesh with gear (5). 

Reverse drive 

When moved forward the synchromesh coupler 
connects gear (23) with shaft (19). The drive is 
transmitted to main shaft (69) via gear (23). theth of 
gear (15) and gear (67). 

Service tool 

Lifting bracket for input unit. No 3376889 M1 (see 
paragrapn Fi. ■ 



Key 

IV 
(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
(5) 

(6) 



Shims 

Synchromesh hub 

Synchromesh ring 

Synchromesh cone 

Gear 

Needle roller bearing 

/7\ Bush 

/8\ Thrust washer 



(9) Rear bearing cone 

(10) Screw 

(11) Spacer 

(12) Thrust washer 

(13) Reverse gear pin 

(14) Needle roller bearing 

(15) Compound gear 

(16) Needle roller bearing 

(17) Thrust washer 

(18) Synchromesh/gear assembly 

(19) Secondary shaft 



(20) 


Needle roller bearing 


(21) 


Synchromesh ring 


122) 


Synchromesh cone 


(23) 


Gear 


(24) 


Front bearing cone 


(25) 


Retaining plate 


(26) 


Housing 


(27) 


Locking pin 


(281 


Spring 


(29) 


Plug 


(30) 


Fork 


(31) 


Selector rail 


(32) 


Adjusting screw 


(33) 


Selector 


(34) 


Adjusting screw 


(35) 


Thrust washer 


(36) 


Screw 


(37) 


Front bearing cup 


(38) 


Rear bearing cup 


(39) 


Ball 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - Dynashift 



5 R03.3 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




5 R03.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



^ 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



**■ 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - Dynashift 



5R03.5 



A. Input unit removal 



Version with shimming of layshaft 

Example : Replacement of reverse shuttle housing 
(26). To obtain a correct shimming of the layshaft 
bearings, the gearbox removal is necessary. 
3000/3100 series tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle (section 3B02). 

2. Remove the selector cover, carry out operations 1 1 
and 12. section 5X01. 

3000 series tractors 

3. Disconnect the gearbox from the engine, carry out 
operations 9 and 11-12, section 3A03. Remove the 
PTO shaft. 

4. Remove the pipes and the clutch slave cylinder. 
3100 series tractors 

5. Disconnect the gearbox from the engine, carry out 
operations 3, 4 and 1 2 to 1 4. section 3A04. Remove 
the PTO shaft. 

6. Remove the pipes and the clutch slave cylinders. 

Version without shimming of layshaft 
3000 series tractors 

7. Split the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox (section 3A03). Remove the PTO shaft. 

8. Remove the pipes and the clutch slave cylinder. 

9. Drain the gearbox only. 

1 0. Remove the selector cover, carry out operations 7 
to 1 2. section 5X01 . 

3100 series tractors 

1 1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox, section 3A04. 

Remove the PTO shaft. 

1 2. Remove the pipes and the clutch slave cylinders. 

1 3. Drain the gearbox only. 

1 4. Remove the selector cover, carry out operations 7 
to 12, section 5X01. 



Version with or without layshaft shimming 
3000/3100 series tractors- 

1 5. Remove the input unit, carry out operations 5 and 
7 to 9, section 5R01 . 

16. Remove the plug (29), the spring (28) and the 
locking pin (27). Remove the screws (32). Remove 
selector rail (31) and the fork (30). 

Note : The locking pin (27) can not be replaced 
by those of Ist/Snd and 3rd/4th of the gearbox. 

1 7. Place the input unit in vertical position. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5 R03.6 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^fc 



B. Dynashift dismantling 

1 8. Unscrew the three bolts (66) (Fig. 3) gradually and 
alternately. 

1 9. Using the lifting bracket 3376889 M 1 , remove the 
primary shaft assembly (7), cover (13), housing 
(211 (Fig. 3). Discard O'rings (32|. (67) and (681 (Fig. 
4). 

20. Remove the planetary carrier assembly, carry out 
operations 25 and 26, section 5R02. 

21. Remove the rear clutch and brake, carry out 
operations 32 - 33 and 35, section 5R02. 



C. Reverse shuttle, dismantling and 
reassembly 

Dismantling 

22. Remove the screws 1101. Take out pin (13). 
Remove the compound gear, the washers (12), 
(17), the needle roller bearings (14) (16) and the 
spacer (11). 

23. Remove the bolts (36). Remove the retaining plate 
(25), the shims [1] and the cup (37). 

24. Take out the secondary shaft (19) (Fig. 5). 

25. Remove gear/synchro assembly (18) (Fig. 5) and 
the washer /8V 

26. Remove the cone (9) and the cup (38). 

27. Onthe gears/synchro assembly, separate : thegear 
(5). the bush /A the needle roller bearing (6), the 
cone (4), the ring (3), the synchromesh (2). the ring 
(21). the cone (22), the gear (23), the needle roller 
bearing (20). 

28. If necessary, take out the cone (24( from the shaft 
and remove the washer /35Y 

Refitting 

29. Clean and check the parts, replace any parts which 
are defective. 

30. Check the pans and oilways on secondary shaft 
(19), pin (13) and housing (26) are all clear. Check 
ball (39) is present. 

3 1 . Lubricate the shaft, the cones and the bearing cups. 

32. Check for the end float between the synchromesh 
rings and the cones (section 5A01 . p 9). 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5R03J 



33. If removed, place the washer /35V pointing the 
grooves towards the gear (27). Unsing a press and 
an appropriate device, fit the cone (24) fully home 
on the washer. 

34. Fit gear 15) and bush /7V Fit the needle roller 
bearing (6) the cone (4), the ring (3), the synchrc- 
mesh, the ring (21 ), the cone (22), the gear (23), the 
needie roller bearing (201. 

35. Reverse operations 25 and 26. 

Note : Place the washer /8V pointing the lubri- 
cation grooves towards the gear (SI {Fig. 6). 

36. Centre the washer /8V By the front bore of the unit, 
fit the secondary shaft (19) in synchromesh/gear 
assembly (18). Place recess "E" fully home on the 
synchromesh (2) (Fig. 7). 

37. Position the cup (37) and the retaining plate (25) 
without the shims 11). 

38. Fit and tighten screws (36) to a torque of 36 - 46 
Nm. 

39. Position the unit in a vice. 

40. Shim (Fig. 8) to obtain a preload : 
PI = 0,05 to 0,15 




Fig. 6 




Fig, 7 



Pt-0.05/ 0.15 




u' / Tr 




%-8 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



* 



5 R03.8 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



41 . Place the tip of the dial gauge at the end of shaft (19) 
(Fig. 9). 

42. Pud on the shaft while turning it alternately from 
right to left to seat the cones correctly in the cups. 

43. Set the dial gauge to zero. 

44. Repeat operation 42 while pushing. 

Note: Togetthecorrectpr»load,reducetheend 
float to obtain a value between 0, 10 and 0,15. 

45. Depending of the end float noted, select shims 
thickness Ml to obtain Pi. 

46. Place the unit in vertical position. Remove the 
screws (36), Remove the retaining plate (25). 

47. Place shims selected during operation 45, making 
sure that they are correctly centered on the cup 
(37) 

48. Refit retaining plate (25). Fit and tighten bolts (36) 
coated with loctite 241 to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm. 

49. Check the end float and the gears (5) and (23) 
running. Manually, check the free running of shaft 
(19). 

50. Refit compound gear (15). Reverse operation 22. 

51 . Coat the screw (10) with Loctite 241 and tighten to 
a torque of 28 - 43 Nm. 

52. Check manually the end float and the backlash of 
the compound gear. 



D. Dynash'rft reassembly 

53. Refit rear clutch and brake, carry out operations 46, 
48, 49 and 52 to 55, section 5R02. 
Note : The planetary carrier shimming is 
required in case of intervention on the housing 
(26) and the retaining plate (25). 
If shimming is necessary (see paragraph H. section 
5R02). With or without shimming, carry out 
operations 89 to 91, section 5R02. 



E. Input unit assembly and refitting 

54 . Place new O-rings (32) (68) and (67) respectively on 
the reverse shuttle housing (26) ana the housing 
(21KFig.4). 

55. Using the lifting bracket 3376889 M 1 , refit primary 
shaft assembly (7), cover (13) and housing (21) 
(Fig. 3) lining up the galleries of the lubrication 
circuit and the low pressure circuit 1 7 bar. 

56. Turn the shaft so as to engage the planeiaries in the 
ring gears. 




57. Fit bolts (66) (Fig. 3) and tighten gradually to a 
torque of 25 - 35 Nm. 

58. Manually check that shaft rotates correctly. 

59. Clean the fork threaded holes. 

60. Fit and adjust the fork. 

Principle : 

The fork (30) is positioned by means of the difference 
in the spacing Y to the tapped holes and the spacing Z 
of the spot facings in the guide rail (31). 
The fork can be adjusted to move to different points by 
acting on either the front or rear screws (32) depending 
on what adiustment required (Fig. 10). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - Dynashift 



5*03.9 



61 . Fit the fork (30), the locking pfuger (271, the spring 
(28) and the plug (29). Tighten the plug to a torque 
of 50 - 70 Nm. Fit the screws (32) coated with 
Loctite221. 

62. Select forward gear. Hold the sliding coupler to the 
gear. 

63. Check that a clearance exists between the sliding 
coupler and the fork pads. If there is no clearance 
adjust via screws (32). 

64. Repeat operations 62 and 63 but in this time select 
reverse gear. Adjust as required. 

65. Tighten the screws to a torque of 35 Nm without 
changing the setting. 

66. Refit the input unit, carry out operations 10 to 1 5, 
section 5R01. 

67. Refit the clutch slave cylinder(s) (different types, 
see section 5P01 or 5Q01, paragraph G, operation 
51. Fit the screws. 

- 3000 series tractors : coat with Loctite 542 and 
tighten to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm. 

- 3 1 00 series tractors : tighten to a torque of 25 - 35. 
Reconnect the pipes. 

Version with shimming of layshaft 

68. Shim the layshaft carry out operations 25 to 35, 
section 5T01 . 

69. Adjust reverse shuttle selector, carry out 
operations 21 to 23, section 5R01 . 

70. Remove the selector cover, carry out operations 33 
to 38, section 5X01 . 

3000 series tractors 

7 1 . Connect gearbox to engine, carry out operations 1 3 
to 16. section 3A03, 

72. Carry out operations 17 and 18. section 3A03. 
3100 series tractors 

73. Connect, gearbox to engine, carry out operations 
15 to 23, section 3A04. 

3000/3100 series tractors 

74. Connect the tractor between the gearbox and the 
rear axle, section 3802. 



Version without shimming of layshaft - 

75. Adjust reverse shuttle selector, carry out 
operations 2t to 23, section 5R01 . 

76. Refit the selector cover, carry our operations 33 to 
43, section 5X01. 

3000 series tractors 

77. Connect the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox, section 3A03. 

3100 series tractors 

78. Connect the tractor between the engine and the 
gearbox, section 3A04. 

3000/3100 series tractors 

79. Top up the oil in the rear axle housing. Bleed the 
clutch circuit, section 5Q01, paragraph H. 

80. Road test all the controls. 

81 . Check for leaks at the selector cover seal mating 
surface. 



F. Service tool 



Lifting bracket. No 3376889 Ml 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



www.maskinisten.net 




5S01.1 



5 SOI Mainshaft 



CONTENTS 

General ■ 



A. Preliminary operations 



B. Disassembling and reassembling the mainshaft 



C. Final operations 



D. Service tools 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5S01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



*r 



General 



The mainshafl (69) is fitted on the two taper roller 
bearings (1) (2) and (16) (17) which are supported by 
the two lower bearings of the main gearbox. The front 
end houses the input gear (67). 
Between the two lower bearings, it supports the 1 st (7) 
and 2nd (14) driving gears which run free and the 1st 
and 2nd gear synchromesh assembly (11) whose hub 
is splined onto it. 

At the rear end, it supports the 3rd and 4th gear 
synchromesh assembly (23). 
The bore in the rear end carries a needle-roller bearing 
which supports the front end of the output shaft. The 
moving parts are lubricated by a central oilway and 
radially-drilled holes. The taper roller bearings are 
preloaded by means of a shim /4\and shim adjusters (31 
located behind the bearing cup (2). 



Service tools 

See part D. 



A. Preliminary operations 

The gearbox must be removed in order to dismantle the 
mainshaft. 

3000 - 3100 tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle, as per Section 3 B02. 

3000 tractor 

2. Separate the gearbox from the engine, as per 
Section 3 A03. 

Support the gearbox with a sling and carry out 
procedures 9 and 11 to 12. Remove the power 
take-off shaft. 

Remove the grommets and the clutch slave 
cylinder pipes at the front end of the gearbox. 
3100 tractor 4k 

Separate the gearboxf rom the engine. Support ^re 
gearbox with a sling and carry out procedures 3. 4 
and 12 to 14 las per Section 3 A04). Remove the 
PTO shaft. 

Remove the grommets ana the clutch slave 
cylinder pipes at the front end of the gearbox. 



3. 




December 1993 



Issue 1 



www.maskinisten.net 



w 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5S01.3 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5S01.4 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



w 



3000 - 3100 tractors 

4. Remove the selector cover. Carry out procedures 
11 and 1 2, in Section 5 X01 . 

Remove the bolts (1) (Fig. 5) as per Section 5 X01 . 

5. Remove the guide rail and the forks. Carry out the 
procedures in part C, Section 5 V01 . 

6. Remove the input gearbox assembly. Carry out 
procedures 5 to 9, in Section 5 R01 . 
Remove the layshaft. Carry out procedure 8, in 
Section 5 T01 . 

Remove the output shaft. Carry out procedures 1 1 
to 23, in Section 5 V01 . 



7. 



8 



B. Disassembling and reassem- 
bling the mainshaft 

Disassembly 

9. Remove the circlip (26). 

10. Remove the 3rd and 4th gear synchromesh (23). 
Mark the direction of fitting. 

1 1 . Remove the synchromesh ring (21). 

12. Remove the synchromesh cone (20) and the gear 
(18). 

Note: Keep the synchromesh ring and cone as 
a pair for possible re-use. 

13. Position the retaining tool MF 458 (Fig. 3) and the 
locally manufactured holding sleeve for the 
mainshaft (69) (Fig. 4). (See part O). 

H. Remove the oil feed pipe (71) and spring (72). 

15. Unlock the nut (68) and loosen it using socket 
3376805 M1 (Fig. 5). 

16. Remove the input gear (67) and cone (1). 

17. Remove the washer (6). 

1 8. Remove tool MF 458 and the sleeve (Fig. 3 and 4). 

19. Withdraw the shaft rearwards from the housing, 
holding the 1st and 2nd gear train in place. 

20. From inside the housing and in the following order, 
remove: the 2nd gear (14) with bush (8). cone (13). 
2nd gear synchromesh ring (12). 1st and 2nd 
synchromesh (11), cone (9), 1s: gear synchro- 
mesh ring (10) and the 1 st gear (7). 

21 . Withdraw the cups (16( and (2). 

Note: Keep the cups and cones in pairs for 
possible re-use. 




December 1993 



Issue 1 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5S01.5 



22. Remove the adjusting shims [31 the shim /4\ and 
circiips (15) and (S). 

Note: Measure the thickness of the adjusting 
shims for use on the mainshaft during 
reassembly operations. 

23. Remove the cone (17) and retaining ring (70). 

Reassembly 



24 
25 



26 



28 
29 

30 



31 
32 



Cjean the housing and the mating faces. 
Using a jet of compressed air, check that afl the 
oiiways in the gearbox and the shaft are free of 
obstructions. Clean and check the parts, and 
replace any that are faulty. 
Lubricate the cones, the cups, the bearing bores 
and the bush. 
27. Using a press, fit the bearing cone (17) onto the 
shaft (69). 

Fit the retaining ring (70). Fit the circiips (5) and (15). 
Position the shim /4\ against circlip (5) (Fig. 6). 
Reduce the thickness of the shims [3] whose 
measurements were noted during disassembly by 
approximatley 0.3 mm so as to obtain an end play 
of between 0. 1 and 0. 1 5 maximum so as to obtain 
an exact fit. 

Install the shims [3] and the cups (2) and (16). 
In the housing and in the following order, assemble 
the 1 st gear (7), cone (9), the 1 st gear synchromesh 
ring (10), the 1 st and 2nd speed synchromesh (11), 
the 2nd gear synchromesh ring 112). cone (13) and 
the 2nd gear (14) with bush (8). 
Insert the shaft through the rear of the housing, 
while supporting the synchromesh gear assembly 
(Fig. 7). 

Note: Check that the bush 181 is correctly 
positioned in the gear {14}. 
Fit the retaining tool MF 458 and the locally made 
holding sleeve (Fig. 3 and 4). 
Fit the washer (6). 
Fit the cone (1) onto the gear (67). 
Fit the gear (67) onto the shaft (69). 
Fit the nut (68) using the special socket 
3376805 Ml. Tighten to a torque of 80 - 100 Nm 
(Fig. 8). 

Shim the shaft. Remove tool MF 458 and the sleeve 
(Fig. 3 and 4), 



33. 



34. 

35, 
36 
37 
38 



39. 





TJ$z4h 



^°=fe^%. 




Fig. 8 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5S01.6 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



40. Position the pointer of a dial gauge at the end of the 
shaft (Fig. 9). 

41 . From the front of the housing, pull on the shaft and 
turn it 1st to the right and then to the (eft. so that 
the cones are property seated in the cups. 

42. Set the dial gauge to zero. 

43. Repeat procedure 41 , while pushing on the shaft. 

44. According to the play measured, select the shim 
thickness required to obtain a preload of: 

PI = 0.14 to 0.20 

45. Fit the retaining tool MF 458 and the locally 
manufactured holding sleeve (Fig. 3 and 4). 

46. Unlock nut (68). Remove the gear (671. 

47. Take out the cup (2). 

48. Fit the adjusting shims [31 selected during 
procedure 44. 

Note: The shim /4\ must be positioned on the 
same side as the circlip (5) (Fig. 6). 

49. Reinstall the cup and the gear. 

50. Degrease the thread on the shaft with a solvent. 

51 . Lightly coat the nut (68) with Loctite 270 and then 
tighten to a torque of 80-100 Nm. 

52. Lock the nut, bending the collar into the groove 
with a suitable drift punch. 

53. Insert the spring (72) and the oil feed pipe (71 ) into 
the shaft. 

54. Remove tool MF 458 and the holding sleeve. 

55. Fit the gear (18) and the synchromesh cone (20), as 
well as the ring (21) and the 3rd and 4th 
synchromesh (23). 

56. Fit the circlip (26). 

Note: Cheek that the synchromesh is facing the 
right way. 

57. Check the following by hand: 

a) the end play on gears. 

b) the rotation of the shaft and gear train. 

58. Check that the 1st and 2nd gear synchromesh 
functions correctly. 



C. Final operations 

59. Refit and shim the output shaft. Carry out 
procedures 25 to 63, in Section 5 V01 . 

60. Refit the layshaft. Carry out procedure 23. in 
Section 5 T01 . 

61. Refit the input gearbox assembly. Carry out 
procedures 10 to 16, in Section 5 R01 . 

62. Shim the layshaft. Carry out procedures 25 to 35. 
in Section 5T01. 

63. Reassemble the forks and the guide rail. Repeat 
the operations in part F, Section 5 V01 . 




64 



out 



65 



Adjust the reversing selector. Carry 

procedures 21 to 23, in Section 5 R01 . 

Refit the selector cover. Carry our procedures 33 to 

38 in Section 5 X01 . 

Note: Do not forget to install the bolt ( H on the 

housing (see Fig. 5, Section 5 X01). 

3000 tractors 

66. Recouple the gearbox with the engine. Carry out 
operations 13 to 16. Section 3 A03. 

67. Carry out procedures 17 and 18 (after supporting 
the gearbox in a sling, as per Section 3 A03). 

3100 tractors 

68. Recouple the gearbox with the engine. Carry out 
procedures 1 5 to 23 (after supporting the gearoox 
in a sling) as per Section 3 A04. 

3000 -3100 tractors 

69. Reconnect the gearbox and the rear axle (Sectioflfc 
3 B02). " ™ 

70. ChecK the operation of the electrical circuits. 

71 . Carry out a road test on the controls. 

72. Check the unions and mating faces for leaks 
(selector cover, and gearbox on rear axle). 



December 1993 



Issue 1 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5S01.7 



D. Service tools 



1 . Tools available from the MF network 



Socket for mainshaft nut 




3376805 Ml 



Mainshaft retaining tool 




MF458 



2. Locally manufactured tool 




Issue 1 



December t9S3 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Gearbox - Dyna shift stoi.i 



5 T01 Layshaft 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Preliminary operations 



B. Disassembly . 



C. Reassembly 



D. Refitting the input gearbox and shimming the layshaft 



E. Service tool 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5T01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^k 



General 



The layshaft and its gears make up the upper drive line 
of the gearbox. The shaft (54) carries the driven gears 
for 1 st speed (60), 2nd speed (59) 3rd speed (55) and 
4th speed (56). The rear set of teeth is constantly 
meshed with the Tortoise (Lo) gear. 



The front of the shaft is carried by the taper rofler 
bearing (63) (64) in the rear of the input gearbox and by 
a bearing (52) (53) mounted in the bearing at the rear of 
the gearbox. 

The gears (56) and (60) are held in position by spacer 
(57). End play on the gears is obtained by mounting 
shims [58] between the gears (59) and (60). 



Overall view 



Fig. 1 




Exploded 



Fig- 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5T01.3 



A. Preliminary operations 

To allow the bearings to be correctly shimmed when 
replacing the faysahft the gearbox must be removed. 
3000-3100 tractors 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle (see Section 3 B02), 

3000 tractors 

2. Separate the gearbox from the engine. Carry out 
procedures 9 and 1 1 to 1 2, in Section 3 A03 {having 
suspended the gearbox in slings). Remove the PTO 
shaft. 

3. Remove the pipes and the clutch stave cylinder. 
3100 tractors 

4. Separate the gearbox from the engine. Carry out 
procedures 3 to 4 and 1 2 to 1 4, in Section 3 A04 
(having suspended the gearbox in slings). Remove 
the PTO shaft. 

5. Remove the pipes and the clutch slave cylinders. 

3000-3100 tractors 

6. Remove the selector cover. Carry out procedures 
1 1 and 1 2. in Section 5 X01 ). 

7. Remove the input gearbox. Carry out procedures 5 
to 9, in Section 5 ROD. 



B. Disassembly 



8. Remove the deflector (50J. the shims £51] and the 
cup (52). Withdraw the shaft assembly (Fig. 3). 

9. Extract the bearing cones (53) and (63). 

Note: Keep the cones and cups in pairs if they 
are to be re-used. 

10. Remove the circlip (61). 

1 1 . Remove the 2nd gear (59), the shims [58], the 1 st 
gear (60J and the spacer (57). 

1 2. Remove the 4th gear (56) and the 3rd gear (55). 

1 3. Drive out the needle-roller bearing (62) and discard 



C. Reassembly 



1 4. Clean and check the parts, and replace any that are 
defective. 

1 5. Fit the needle-roller bearing (62) fully home on the 
shoulder of the shaft (54), using a press. 

Note: After this fitting operation, check that the 
needle-rollers turn normally in the cage. 

16. Reinstall the 3rd gear (55) and the 4th gear (56). 

17. Slide the spacer (57) into position. Install the 1st 
gear (60) and the 2nd gear (59). 

18. Fit the circlip (61). 




1 9. Using a set of shims, measure the space between 
the 1 st gear (60) and the 2nd gear (59). 
According to the measurement obtained, use the 
shim thickness required to obtain a play of: 

J1 = to 0.25 mm 

20. Remove the circlip (61) and the gear (59). 

21 . Slide the previously selected shims onto the shaft. 
Fit the pinion and the circlip. 

22. Use the press and a suitable fixture to fit the cones 
(63) and (53). 

23. Reinstall the assembled shaft and the cup (52). 

Note : When replacing the gears, it is not necessary 
to shim the bearings again. Disassembly of layshaft 
can be made without removing the gearbox 
according to the following method. 

Disassembly 

. Remove the 1 st , 2nd plunger and position the lock so 
as to free the fork. 

. Refer to section 5 NOT . Remove lubrication tube (71) 
and the spring. Loosen nut (68). 
In order to facilitate the disengagement of 1st gear 
(60) to remove the complete shaft, take out the input 
gear (67) to the front with its bearing, the 1 st, 2nd 
gears (7) - (14) and the synchromesh. 

. Remove the gears (see § B). 

Reassembly 

. Reverse the disassembly operations. Replace nut (68) 
as described section 5 S02 5 B. op. 50 to 53. 

, Tighten the plunger plug to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm. 

. Check the axial play of the 1st - 2nd gears and the 
synchromesh operation. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



-*P 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5T01.4 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



w 



D . Removing the . input gearbox 
and shimming the iayshaft 

24. Remove the input gearbox. Carry out procedures 
10 to 16, in Section 5 R01. 

25. Shim the Iayshaft (see Fig. 4) to obtain a play of: 

J2 a 0.04 to 0.12 mm (Fig. 5} 

26. Install the locally manufactured tool (see Section E) 

in the Iayshaft (Fig. 6). 

27. Compress the spring moderately by tightening the 

nut on the tool in order to bed the cones correctly 
in the cups. 

28. Rotate the shaft through a few turns. 

29. Using a depth gauge, measure the dimension X 

between face A of the cup (52) and face B on the 
housing (see Fig. 5). 

30. Measure the thickness Y of the deflector (50). 

31 . Calculate the difference between X and V. 

32. Determine the shim thickness required to obtain a 
play of between 0.04 and 0.12. 

33. Remove the compression tool. 

34. Position the shims 151] selected in procedure 32. 

35. Fit the deflector in the housing. 

36. Adjust the reversing selector. Carry out procedures 
21 to 23. in Section 5 R01 . 

Refit the selector cover. Carry out procedures 33 to 
38 in Section 5 X01 . 

Note: Do not forget to fit the bolt (1) on the 
housing (Fig. 51, Section 5 XOt. 
3000 tractors 

37. Recouple the gearbox with the engine. Carry out 

procedures 13 to 16. Section 3 A03. 

38. Carry out procedures 1 7 and 1 8, in Section 3 A03. 

3100 tractors 

39. Recouple the gearbox with the engine. Carry out 

procedures 15 to 23. in Section 3 A04. 
3000 - 3100 tractors 

40. Recouple the tractor between the gearbox and the 

rear axle (Section 3 B02). 

41. Check : 

- the systems for leaks 

- the operation of the electrical circuits. 

42. Carry out a road test on all the controls. 

43. Check the unions and mating faces for leaks 
{selection cover, and gearbox on rear axlel. 




Fig. 4 




Fig. 5! 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5T01.5 




E. Service tool 



Layshaft holding tool, to be manufactured locally. 



Soring, inside tiia. &0 
95 Long. A dia. wire 



Washer MF 338311 3 M2 

to be macnined 



Washer LL 12U 
Inside cia - 125 
Outsiae aia.. 40 
2.5 thk 




Weld Dead 



Fig. 7 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



www.maskinisten.net 



*M 



5V01.1 



5V01 Output shaft 



CONTENTS 

General _ 



A. Preliminary operations 



B, Removing the selector cover 



C. Disassembling the guide rails and selector forks 



D. Disassembling the output shaft . 



E. Reassembling and shimming the output shaft 



6 



F. Reassembling the guide rail and selector forks . 



G. Refitting the selector cover . 



11 



H. Final operations 



11 



I. Service tools 



12 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5V01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



*r 



General 



The output shaft transmits the drive provided by the 

various gear ratios to the rear axle transfer shaft. It is 

mounted on the lower transmission drive line at the rear 

of the gearbox. 

At the front end, it is supported by a needle-roiler 

bearing located in the bore in the mainshaft and, at the 

rear end. in two taper bearings fitted with their tapers in 

opposition. " 

The shaft (441 carries: 

- the driving gear (29) which is mounted to rotate freely 
on combination bearings (28) and (30), 

- the gear (36) and bush (35) assembly which are 
mounted to rotate freely, 

- the Harefiortoise (Hi/Lo) coupler (31) and its hub 
which are splined to rotate together. 



To ensure that the assembly wilt operate correctly 
under the forces applied to the transmission, several 
settings have to be made with shims: 

- Setting J3: with shim or shims (471, this setting 
allows the clearance to be taken up between the 
cones (39) and (40) and their respective cups. 

- Setting J4: shim or shims [38] placed between the 
shoulder on the shaft (44) and the cone (39) allow(s) 
end play on the gear (29). 

- Setting J5: shim or shims 142] placed between the 
cone (40) and packing shim /43Uake up the end play 
of cones (39) and (40) on the shaft (44). 




*M 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



*■ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5V01.3 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5V01.4 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



Hr 



A . Preliminary operations 

1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear 
axle (Section 3 B02). 



B . Removing the selector cover 

2. Carry out procedures 1 1 and 12, in Section 5 X01 . 

3. If necessary, remove the bolt (1) (see Fig. 13). 



C . Removing the guide rail and 
forks 

Note: Gearbox equipped with creeper gears. 
Remo vepin(l) ioeknut 12), adjustable locking screw 
(3), and fork (4) with sieeve IS) (see Fig. 3). 

4. Remove the plugs (1), springs (2) and locking 
plungers (3) (See Fig. 5). 

5. Slacken off the castellated nut (21) using spanner 
3615334 M1 (see Fig. 4). 

6. Engage 4th gear. 





Fig. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



*r 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5V01.5 



7. Free the cone (24) on the guide rail (7) using a 
bronze drift (see Fig. 6). 

8. Remove the set screw (8). 

9. Remove the bearing (15), the guide rail (7) from the 
rear, the forks (5) and (6) and the locking assembly 
(25). 

1 0. Dismantle the castellating nut (21), locking device 
(22). bearing (23) and cone (24). 
Remove the bolts (19). piston (13), the Hare/ 
Tortoise <HH_o) fork (20), the bolt and washer 
assembly (17) slider (18) and cylinder (10). 
Note: Discard the seals (111, (121 and (141. 



D . Removing the output shaft 

Note: Remove the creeper gearbox if the tractor is 
fitted with one. 

1 1 . Move the three screws (41). 

1 2. Remove the locking ring (46). 

1 3. Remove the bearing cup (48). 

Note : Keep the cones and cups in pairs if they 
are to be re-used. 

1 4. Remove the circlip (45). 

1 5. Remove the packing shim /43\ and the adjusting 
shims [42]. 

1 6. Remove the bearing cone (40). 

Note : If shimming was required between the 
cones, remove the shim or shims (47}. 

1 7. Remove the cone (39). 

1 8. Remove the adjusting shims (38). 

1 9. Pull the shaft (44) towards the rear. 

20. Remove the snap ring (34) using tool MF 460 and 
discard it (see Fig. 7). 

21 . Remove the shaft. 

22. Through the opening in the selector cover, take out 
the synchromesh (31). the synchromesh rings (33) 
and (74), the gear (29) with cones (75) and (76). the 
ring (25), the two thrust washers (27) and (32) and 
the Tortoise gear (36). 

Note: Keep the synchromesh rings (25) and (74) 
paired with the cones (75) and (76), and ring (33) 
with cone (73). 

23. Remove the cap (37) and circlip (49). 

24. Remove circlip (19), washer (22) and the needle- 
roller bearing (24). 





Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5V01.6 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



E . Reassembling and shimming 
the output shaft jgf 

25. Check and clean the parts, and replace any that are 
faulty. 

26. Fit the circlip (49) and cup (37). 1 

27. Reinstall the needle-roller bearing (24), washer (22) 
and circlip (19) on the shaft (44). Engage the shaft 
in the housing without gears. 

28. Slide the cones (39) and (40) onto the shaft. 

Setting J3 

29. The purpose of this operation is to prepare for 
setting J3 (Fig. 8). Hold the cones (39) and (40) fully 
home against the shoulder of shaft (44) by pressing 
on them by hand. 

Fiil the gap Y between the rear of the cone (40) and 
the groove for circlip (45) with shims 1421 and the 
packing shim /43\. Choose a new circlip that 
provides a slightly tight fit in the groove (Fig. 10). 

30. Perform the setting (Fig. 9) with shims in order to 
obtain . 

J3 = -0.05 to +0.05. 

This shimming operation consists in taking up the 
clearance between the cones (39) and (40) and the 
cups (37) and (48), while complying with the 
setting tolerance specified above. 

31. Fit the circlip (45). 

Note : Position the packing shim on the circlip 
side. 

32. Fit the cup (48) and the locking ring (46). 

33. Tighten the bolts (41) to a torque of 27 - 32 Nm. 




Fig. 




J3 = -0.05 +0.05 



r 



47 



f\ 



*»■• 





^ 


■H, 




42 


® 




| O 


- 


{0-EmJ^ 0(45) 


43\ 






,44)' 


/ r A. J- - \ 







Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5V01.7 



34. Position a dial gauge on the end of the shaft (44) 
{Fig. 11). 

Note: In the ease of gearboxes equipped whh 
creeper gears, use the gearbox locking ring (see 
Fig. 12) In place of the locking ring. Tighten the 
bolt to a torque of 34 • 52 Nm. 

35. Push on the shaft while turning it alternately 
clockwise and then anticlockwise to 

seat the cones correctly in the cups. 

36. Reset the dial gauge to zero. 

37. Repeat procedure 35 while pulling on the shaft. 

38. If the end play measured is greater than 0.05 mm 
select a thickness of shims X [47] to obtain : 
J3 = -0.05 to +0.05 

Important: The shim or shims X147J selected for 
J3 must be installed between the cones for the 
following setting operations. 

Setting J4 

39. Remove the circlip (45). 

40. Remove the packing shim /43\ and the adjusting 
shims 1421 

41 . Measure the thickness Y of the set of shims [42] 
and /43V (This measurement will be useful for 
setting J5.) 

42. Remove the bolts (41) and the locking ring (46). 

43. Remove the cup (48), cones (40) and (39), and the 
shaft (44). 

44. Fit the following in the housing: the Tortoise gear 
(36), the synchromesh and its rings (33) and (74), 
the thrust washer (32), the gear (29) with its 
needle-roller bearings (30) and (28) and its 
synchromesh cones (75) and (76), thrust washer 
(27) and synchromesh ring (25). 

Note: If bush (35) shows signs of wear, replace 
the complete gear assembly. (The bush is 
reamed after fitting). If the combination bearings 
(30) and (28) are worn, replace the complete 
gear assembly. (Bearings are fitted in the 
factory). 

45. Insert the output shaft (44) while holding the gear 
assembly in position (see Fig. 1 3). 

46. Pull the shaft slightly back in order to expose the 
groove for the snap ring (34). 




Fig. 1 1 



// O 




Fig. 12 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5V01.8 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^ 



47. Fit the snap ring (34) with tool MF 459 (Fig. 14). 
Note: Check that the snap ring is correctly 
installed. 

48. Slide the following components onto the shaft: 
cone (39), shim or shims X [471 selected in 
procedure 38, cone (40) and cup (48). 

49. Fit the locking ring (46). Tighten the bolts (41) to a 
torque of 27 - 32 Nm. 

50. Perform the setting (Fig. 15) to obtain a play of : 
J4 = 0.20 to 0.40 

This setting operation consists in providing an end 
play on the gear (29). 

51 . Carry out procedures 34 to 37. 

52. According to the measurement read on the dial 
gauge, determine the thickness of shims Z 1381 to 
obtain play J4. 

53. Remove the bolts (41) and the locking ring (46). 

54. Remove the cup (48). 

55. Withdraw the cones (40) and (39), and the shim or 
shims X 147], 

56. Slide the following components onto the shaft: the 
required thickness of shims Z 1381, cone (39), shim 
or shims X [47], and cone (40). 

Setting J5 

57. Perform the setting (Fig. 16) to obtain : 
J5 = no end play 

This setting consists in taking up the end play of 
cones (40) and (39) on the shaft (44). 

58. Use the thickness of shims Y [421 /43V measured 
in procedure 41 . to deduce the thickness of shims 
Z [38] and X [47] to obtain : J5 = Y - (Z + X). 

59. Carry out procedures 32 and 33. 

60. Slide the thickness of shims selected in procedure 
58 onto the shaft. 

61 . Fit the circlip (45). 

Note. Position the packing shim /43\ on the c/r- 

clip side. 

The circiip must be a slightly tight fit in its groove. 

Check that it is correctly positioned. 

Note: Refit the creeper gearbox (if fitted). 

62. Check by hand that the shaft and its gears turn 
freely. 

63. Check that the 3rd and 4th gear and Hare/tortoise 
synchromeshes operated normally. 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^r 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5V01.9 



F . Reassembling the guide rail and 
forks (Fig, 17) 

64. Check that the ports in the Hare/Tortoise cylinder 
(10) are not blocked. 

65. Fit the cylinder (10) equipped with O-ring (1 1) in the 
housing. 

66. Install the Hare/Tortoise fork (20) in the synchro- 
mesh. 

67. Fit seals (12) and (14) onto the piston (13) and then 

insert it into the bore in the cylinder. 
Note : Una up the locations for the adjusting 
screws with the tapped holes in the fork. Immo- 
bilise the piston with a screw (19). 

68. Clean and then assemble the mechanical locking 
device (22), taper bearing (23), cone (24) and cas- 
tellated nut (21). 

69. Fit the 3rd and 4th speed fork (6) and the 1st and 
2nd speed fork (5), and the locking assembly (25). 

70. Insert the guide rail (7) from the rear of the housing 
and slide it through the piston, the locking assembly 
and the forks. 



71 . Fit the bearing (15) and tighten the bote (16) to a 
torque of 27 - 32 Nm, 

72. Clean the set screw (8) with a solvent. Coat it with 
Loctite 542 and tighten to a torque of 28 ^43 Nm. 

73. Fit he locking plungers (3) and springs. (2), and 
tighten the plugs (1) to a torque of 50 - 70'Nm. 
Note : Gearboxes equipped whh creeper gears 
{Fig. 3). 

- FH sleeve (5), fork 14) and pin (1). 

- Position the fork so that locking screw (31 ts 
over the flat on the guide rail (6) (betwe en the 
two locking recessesl. 

• Tighten the screw fully in so that the ball ts 
compressed. 

• Loosen the screw by one quarter turn. 

• Apply Loctite 241 to nut (2) after cleaning it 
with solvent. 

- Tighten to a torque of 15 • 20 Nm. 

~ Check that the fork locks correctly. 




Issue 1 



Oecember 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5V01.W 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



* 



74. Adjusting the Hare/Tortoise fork 

Principle: The fork (20) is positioned by means of 
the difference in the spacing between the tapped 
holes Y and the spacing Z of the spot-facing marks 
in the piston (131. The fork can be adjusted to move 
to different positions by acting on either the front or 
rear screw, depending on the adjustment required 
(Fig. 18). Set the control piston (13) and 
synchromesh (31) to the high range (Hare). 

76. Hold the synchromesh against the high range gear 
(29). (See Fig. 19). 

77. Adjust the position of the fork (20) by acting on the 
two adjusting screws (19) after cleaning them with 
solvent and coating them with Loctite 221 , in order 
to obtain a play ot J1 = 0.3 mm between the rear 
face of the pad and the synchromesh slide rod 
(Figures 19 and 20). 

Note: Perform the setting using a locally manu- 
factured tool. 

78. Set the control piston (13) and the synchromesh to 
the low range (Tortoise). 

79. Check that there is a play of J2 = 0.3 min. (value 
determined by setting J 1 ) between the pad and the 
synchromesh slide rod. with the slide rod resting 
against the low range gear (36) (Fig. 21). Tighten 
the screws to a torque of 35 Nm without modifying 
the setting. 

Note: In the Tortoise position, play J1 must be 
increased if face X of the pad on fork (20} is bea- 
ring against the synchromesh slide rod (Fig. 21}. 

80. Set the fork to the Tortoise position. 

81 . Slightly loosen the castellated nut (21 ). Apply a mo- 
derate coat of Loctite 270 on the thread of cone 
(24). 

82. Place the forks in the neutral position. 





taf 




Fig. \i 





B)U3 



551 — yji 




>- 

J5 = mm. of +0.3 mm 
in Hi range 
position 



J 1 = 0.3 



I +0.3 mrnl 

JOyJS 




Fig. fl 



EB fjM * fc , " -w =^F6- 




J 2 = 0.3 mini 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 




5V01.11 



83. Adjust the plays J3 and J4 (min. = 0.3 mm) evenly 
so that the mechanical lock (22) operates freely 
(Figures 22 and 23). 

84. Tighten the castellated nut (21) to a torque of 
50 Nm using a spanner 3615334 M1 and a spring 
scale (Fig. 23). 

85. Apply Loctite 648 on the tightening face of the 
slider (18) and Loctite 241 on bolt (17). Fit the 
washer and the bolt. 

86. Adjust plays J5 and J6 (min. = 0.3 mm) evenly 
between the slider and the lock in the Hare and 
Tortoise positions (Figures 19 to 21 and 24). 

87. Tighten the bolt to a torque 36 - 46 Nm. 

88. Check the operation of the Hare/Tortoise range and 
the lock. 

89. Check the changing of the gears. 



G. Refitting the selector cover 

90. Fit the bolt (1) (Fig. 13). if fitted, and carry out 
procedures 33 to 38. in Section 5 X01 . 
Note; If the setting of the sleeves on the levers 
is required, repeat part E, Section 5 X01. 



H . Final operations 



91 . Recouple the tractor between the gearbox and the 
rear axle, as per Section 3 B02. 

92. Check : 

- the systems for leaks, 

- the operation of the electrical circuits. 

93. Carry out a road test on the controls. 

94. Check for leaks on the mating faces of the selector 
cover and of the gearbox on the rear axle. 






^■v_ 


^mt®, 










/ 


\ — 

J 
















! 








I I 

I I 

I 






J 3 = 0.3 mini 




J 4 - 0.3 mini 










Fig. 22 




Issue t 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



5V01.12 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



* 



I . Service tools 



a) Tools available from the MF network 



Slotted nut wrench 3615334 Ml 




3376805 Ml 



Snap ring remover tool MF 460 




MF458 



b> Tool to be manufactured locally 





Set of shims 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



*fr 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



5X01.1 



5 XO 7 Selector cover 



CONTENTS 

General 



Operation 



A. Removal 



B. Disassembly. 



C. Reassembly 



D. Refitting 



E. Adjustment of sleeves on levers 



issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



5X01.2 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



^" 



General 



The selector cover fitted on the right-hand side of the 
gearbox housing has two separate levers each of which 
performs one of two different functions : 

- Front lever : This lever controls the reverse shuttle. 

- Rear lever : This lever selects the four basic speeds 
and the two Hare/Tortoise (Hi-Lo> ratios. 



Operation 



Reversing lever 

The reverse shuttle is operated when the lever (23) is 
pushed forwards (reverse) or backwards (forward mo- 
tion). 

When the lever iZ3) is moved forwards or backwards, 
it causes the shaft (53) which is secured to the U-arm 
(54) to turn. The index on the U-arm moves the selector 
(SI. 

Gear lever 

The arrangement of the 1 st and 2nd speed gears is the 
reverse of the arrangement for the standard 8-speed 
gearbox (4x2). 



Operation 

Selecting 1st/2nd gears 

When tne lever (12) is pushed, the arm (36) is engaged 

in the 1 st and 2nd speed fork. 

moving lock (V) which prevents any movement of the 

3rd and 4th speed fork. 

1 st gear is then obtained by moving the lever forwards 

and 2nd is obtained by moving it back. 

Selecting 3rd/4th gears 

In this configuration, the gear lever (12) is in the 
intermeaiate position. The arm (36), which is secured to 
the lever (12). is engaged in the 3rd and 4th speed fork 
and lock (V) prevents any movement of the 1 st and 2nd 
speed for*. 

3rd gear is then obtained by moving the lever forwards 
and 4th is obtained by moving it back. Jfe 

Hare/Tortoise function 

The Hare/Tortoise position (Hi-Lo) is obtained in the 
neutrai cosition by pulling the lever (12). The arm (36) 
moves ir.e iock (V) which applies pressure on switch ( 1 ) 
controlling the Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve via the 
Autotronic system. 

For the ooeration of the hydraulic system, see Section 
5 KOI, page 5. 



List of parts 


(20) 


Pin 


(40) Cud 


(1) Switch 


(21) 


Ball 


(41) Cud 


(2) Seal 


(22) 


Pin 


(42) Spring 


(3) Temperature probe 


(23) 


Reversing lever 


(43) Dowel pin 


(4) Bolt 


(24) 


Lug 


(44) Bolt 


(5) Bolt 


(25) 


Cotter pin 


(45) Bolt 


(6) Support bracket 


(26) 


Washer 


(46) Bracket 


(7) Pin 


(27) 


Ball 


(47) Bolt 


(8) Ball 


(28) 


Pin 


(48) Dowel pin 


(91 Dust cover 


(29) 


Bolt 


(49) Dust cover 


(10) Link 


(30) 


Bolt 


/50\ Seal 


(11) Pin 


(31) 


Support bracket 


(51) Dust cover 


(12) Gear lever 


(32) 


Link 


(52) Set screw 


(13) Pin 


(33) 


Bolt 


(53) Shaft 


(14) Ball 


(34) 


Bolt 


(54) Arm 


(15) Set screw 


(35) 


Rack 


(55) Set screw 


(161 Dust cover 


(36) 


Arm 


(56) Cover 


(17) Washer 


/37\ Seal 


157) Nut 


(18) Cotter pin 


138) 


Cup 




(19) Elbow union 


(39) 


Spring 





Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



(A 

g 
CD 



I 

3 
cr 

SB 







* 









1 

\ 

CO 

8 

CO 

I 
3 




www.maskinisten.net 




5X07.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



ik 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



Vv 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 

Gearbox - Dyna shift 




5X01.5 



A . Removal 



1 . Immobilise the tractor. Fit wedging block under the 

left-hand rear wheel. 

2. Apply the handbrake. 

3. Fit chock between the frame and the front axle. 

4. Drain the oil from the gearbox only. 

5. Raise the rear right-hand side of the tractor with a 
trolley jack. 

6. Install an axle stand and remove the wheel. 

7. Remove the footstep (if necessary). 

8. Take out the cotter pins (181 and (25), washers (17) 
and (26). Remove pins (11) and (20). Lift the dust 
covers (49) (51) and (9) (16). Remove the reversing 
lever (23) and gear lever (12) and mark their 
positions (Fig. 3). 

9. Disconnect the wiring harnesses from the switch 
(1) and temperature probe (3) (Fig. 3). 

TO. Disconnect the control linkage on gearboxes 
equipped with creeper gears. 

1 1 . Remove the nut (57) and bolts (33) and mark the 

position of the earth wire lug (24). On creeper-type 
gearboxes, remove the control cable support 
bracket (1) (Fig. 4). 

1 2. Remove the cover (56). 



B . Removal 



1 3. Install the cover in a vice. 

1 4. Take out bolts (29) (30) and (4) (5). remove the 
supports (6) and (31). 

15. Remove set screws (15) and (52). Remove the 
links (10) and (32). 

1 6. Remove bolt (55). Withdraw shaft (53) and remove 
the reversing control U-arm (54). 

1 7. Remove bolts (44) (45) and (47). 

18. Remove the bracket (46). 

1 9. Extract the dowel pins (43) (48) from the cover, 

20. Remove bolt (34). Remove the gear control 
assembly. 

21 . Remove the cups (38) and (40). and spring (39). 

22. Separate the arm (36) from rack (35). Remove the 
cup (41) and spring (42) from the arm (36). 

23. Remove the HarefTortoise switch (1), seal (2), 
union (19) and temperature probe (3). 

24. Remove seals /37\ and /50V 




C . Reassembly 



25. Clean the mating face on the cover (56). Apply 
Loctite 542 on the outer circumference of seals 
/37\and /50Vand fit them fully home in the shoulder 
of the cover. 

26. Fit the dowel pins (43) and (58) in the cover. Install 
the bracket (46). 

Reinstall the bolts (44) (45) and (47). and tighten 

them to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm. 

Refit the U-a rm (54) a nd refit the shaft (53) from the 

inside of the cover. Be careful not to damage the lip 

of seal /50V 

Install the set screw (55) and tighten it to a torque 

of 28 - 43 Nm. 

27. Refit the cup (41) and spring (42) on arm (36). 
Assemble the arm with the rack (35). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




5X01.6 



Gearbox - Dynashift 



28. Reinstall the spring (39) and cups (38) and (40). 

29. Refit the gear control assembly and bott (34) after 
coating it with Loctite 270. Tighten to a torque of 
25-35Nm. 

Note : Be careful not to damage the lip of seal 
/371 

30. Reinstall the union (191, the temperature probe (31 
fitted with its seal, the Hare/Tortoise switch (1) and 
its seal (2). 

3 1 . Refit links (10) and (32). Fit the set screws (15) and 

(52). 

32. Refit the support brackets (6) and (31). Fit bolts (29) 

(30) and (4) (5). 

D . Refitting 

33. Clean the mating face on the cover (56). 

34. Set the reversing selector, and the 1 st, 2nd. 3rd and 
4th gear forks to the neutral position. Move the lock 
V towards the opening of the selector cover (see 
Pig. 5). 

35. Apply a sealing compound on the mating face of the 
gearbox housing. 

36. Position the gear lever pointing towards the right. 

Set the reversing lever to the neutral position. 

37. Position the cover on the gearbox, making sure that 
the levers are correctly positioned in the selector 
mechanisms. 

38. Fit the earth wire lug (24). bolts (331 and nut (571. 

Tighten to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm. 

Note : For gearboxes equipped with creeper 

gears, fit the cable support (1) {Fig. 4). 

39. Connect up the control linkage on gearboxes 
equipped with creeper gears. 

40. Reconnect the wiring harnesses to the Hare/ 
Tortoise switch (1} and on the temperature probe 
(3). 

41 . Refit the reversing lever (23) and gear lever (12). 

42. Reinstall pins 111) and (20). Reinstall the washers 
and pins. Position the dust covers (Fig. 3). 

43. Refit the footstep (if it was removed). 

44. Reinstall the wheel. 

45. Remove the axle stand and the trolley jack. Tighten 

the wheel nuts to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm. 

46. Carry out procedures 1 to 4 In reverse order. 

47. Carry out a road test on the controls for ; 

- the reverse shuttle, gears. Hare/Tortoise range. 

creeper gears (if fitted) and Dynashift speeds A. B. 

C. D. 
• Check the mating face on the cover and hydraulic 

unions for leaks. 



E . Adjusting the sleeves on levers 

Note: If an adjustment or replacement is necessary, 
lightly coat the inside of each sleeve wrtfr"Anti- 
Seize" grease or equivalent 

48. Set the reversing and gear levers to the neutral 
position. 

49. Unlock nuts (1). Adjust the sleeves (2) so as to 
obtain a dimension X between the base of the 
sleeve and shoulder "E" on each lever (see Fig. 6). 
Tighten the nuts to a torque of 50 Nm and position 
the dust cover (3). 

X = 40 mm for all types 
= 70 mm on the gear lever only for 31 25 as from 
serial number B064014. 





Fig. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



0) 



www.maskinisten.net 



V v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - Description 




6A01.1 



6A01 Description of rear axle 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Centre housing assembly 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6A01.2 



Rear axle - Description 



* 



General 



The rear axle comprises four main housings : 

- The centre housing which houses the differential, 
the power take-off gear in all variants and the 4- 
wheel drive transmission, the handbrake and main 
brake control unit. It also supports the two axle 
housings (trumpets), the lift cover and the side 
covers (see chapters 8 101-02). 

- The right and left trumpets fixed to each side of the 
centre housing, serving as a rear wheel drive axle 
case (see chapters 6C01-02). 

- The lift cover fitted to the top of the centre housing 
supporting the lift arms which are attached to the 
lower links (see chapter 6B01). 



A. Centre housing assembly 

Differential 

The bevel gear is driven from the gearbox output shaft 
through a connecting shaft with splined couplers. The 
helical bevel crownwheel and pinion set transmits the 
drive through a differential to the final reduction units. A 
differential lock system actuated by hydraulic pressure 
is incorporated into the casing (see 6J01). 
The differential lock is controlled by the Autotronic (if 
fitted). 



Power take-off drive 

The rotation of the shaft passing through the gearbox, 
proportional to the engine speed, is transmitted to the 
hydraulic clutch situated at the front of the centre 
housing (see 6G01). 

In the engaged position drive is transmitted by a 
countershaft and a set of driving and driven gears to the 
540 or 1000 rpm power take-off shaft. Speeds are 
selected by a system of interchangeable shafts (see 6 
E01 ) or by coupler (see 6 E02). 
A hydraulic braking device stops the rotation of the 
power take-off shaft in the disengaged position. 
Two additional options are offered : 

- (economy) 4 speed power take-off (see 6 D01). 

- power take-off proportional to forward speed 
(GSPTO)(see6F01). 

Handbrake assembly 

A brake assembly comprising two plates and an ex- 
pander mechanism is mounted on the bevel drive 

pinion (see 6(01). 

Main brakes 

Two pistons mounted laterally in two cavities in the 
centre housing act on two discs splined onto the output 
shafts. The brake pistons are activated hydraulically 
(see6K01). 



4-wheel drive clutch 

A gear splined to the drive bevel gear shaft drives the 
4 WD clutch assembly. 

Motion is then transmitted via Belleville washers to the 
clutch output shaft (see 7A01 ). 
It is hydraulically actuated to disengage the 4 WD. 
There is therefore no possibility of acddentai disenga- 
gement of 4 WD in the event of hydraulic failure. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



-y v 




Rear axle - Description 



Centre housing assembly 
(longitudinal cross-section) 



6A01.3 




'iJ.r.1 lllrrtj. 




\\\\\\\\\^ 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



-www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - Description 




6A01.^. 



Rear transmission assembly 
(cross section) 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



6B01 Lift cover 



www.maskinisten.net 




/ v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Lift cover 




6B01. 1 



CONTENTS 

General 



A. Removal 



B. Disassembly 



C. Reassembly. 



D. Refitting 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6B01.2 



Rear Axle - Lift cover 



General 



The lift cover is mounted on the upper face of the rear 
axle housing. The shaft (4) which has the two lift arms 
(5) and (11) spiined to it, is supported by bushes (8). 

Cam (9) on the lift shaft (4) provides the means for 
sensor (26) to monitor position of lift arms. This 
information's transmitted to the Electronic Linkage 
Control (ELC) system. 

To ensure correct play between the lift arms and the 
cover, shims [12] are fitted on the left hand end of the 
shaft. 

The rear face of the lift cover supports the auxiliary 
spool valves. The vehicle speed sensor (15) is screwed 
in the front of the cover. The cover also supports lever 
(21) for economy ( 4 speed) PTO, if fitted. 



Parts list 



(1) 


Washer 


(2) 


Bolt 


(3) 


Retainer 


(4) 


Lift shaft 


(5) 


Right-hand lift arm 


(6) 


Nylon ring (2) 


(7) 


O-ring (2) 


(8) 


Bush (2) 


(9) 


Cam 


(10) 


Lift cover 


(11) 


Left-hand lilt arm 


[12] 


Shim(s) 


(13) 


Bush 


(14) 


Set screw (2) 


(15) Venicle speed sensor 


(16) 


Nut 



(17) Cup plug (2-speed PTO) 

(18) Screw (4-speed PTO) 

(19) Control finger (4-speed PTO) 

(20) O-ring (4-speed PTO) 

(21) Lever (4-speed PTO) 

(22) Screw (4-speed PTO) 

(23) Elbow connector 

(24) Bolt 

(25) Nut 

(26) Position sensor 

(27) Cup plug 

(28) Threaded plug 

(29) Seal 

(30) Threaded plug 

(31) Seal 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




* 





Co 




O 


3? 


§ 


ft) 


§ 


-i 


Q 


fcfc 


cs 


>< 


te 




in 


<D 


m 






i 


F» 


1— 


to 






=* 


3 


o 


* 


o 


Ci 


5 


-H 


CD 


O 


*-t 


i 




01 





I 


Oi 


^ 



www.maskinisten.net 




6B01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Rear Axle - Lift cover 



Exploded diagram 




<§> M§> % ® @ 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



1* 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - L/ft cover 




6B01.5 



A. Removal 



1. Remove the sheetmetal. 

2. Remove the rear fastening screws to the cab 
(remove only the central and lower screws to the 
guard plates to gain access to the cab fastening 
screws). 

3. Raise the cab. 

Note: Place a block between the cab and the 
trumpets (Fig. 1). 

4. Disconnect (Fig. 2) : 

. the supply hose (1) to the spool valve 
. the supply hose (3) to the lift valve 
. the return hose (2). 

5. Remove the bolts (4) for the spool valve support (S) 
(Fig. 2). 

6. Remove the support swinging the assembly out of 
the way, without disconnecting the controls (1) 
(Fig. 3). 

7. Disconnect (Fig. 4): 
. the vehicle sensor wire assembly (1 ) (Autotronic, 

Datatronic) 
. the position sensor wire assembly (2) 
. the differential lock pipe (3) 
. the cable (4) (4-speed PTO, if fitted) 
. the cable (5) (shiftable PTO, if fitted). 





Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6B01.6 



Rear Axle - Lift cover 



vV^ 



8. Unscrew the pipe (1) at both ends and remove the 
support (2) for the trai'fer brake connector if fitted 
(Fig. 5). 

9. Remove the upper pins from the rams and lift rods. 

1 0. Remove the fastening bolts (24) for the cover (10). 
Note: Thep.t.0. control cable supports (depen- 
ding on the vetsion) are fixed by the bolts for the 
cover. 

1 1 . Lift the"cover and remove it. 



B. Disassembly 



1 2. Place the cover on a work bench. 

13. Remove the elbow connector (23). 

14. Unscrew the nut (16) and remove the vehicle 
speed, sensor (15). 

15. Unscrew the hut (25) and remove the position 
sensor (26). 

For tractors equipped with economy 4-speed, carry 
out operations 16 to 19 (Fig. 6). 

16. Undo the Allen screw (22) in the lever (21). 

1 7. Undo the screw (18). 

1 8. Remove the control finger (19). 

1 9. Remove the O-ring (20). 

20. Flatten tabs locking the bolts (2) retaining the lift 
arms.. 

21. Undo the screws. 

22. Remove the washers (1). 

23. Remove the shim(s) [12], 

24. Remove the lift arms (5) and (11). 

25. Remove the nylon rings (6) and the O-rings (7). 

26. Remove the set screws (14) in the cam (9). 

27. Withdraw the lift shaft (4) from the cover. 

28. Remove the cam (9). 

29. Withdraw the bushes (8) (Fig. 7). 

30. Remove the cup plug (17) (2-speed PTO). 




Issue t 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Rear Axle - Lift cover 




6B01.7 



C. Reassembly 



Note: The bushes (13) are mounted with Loctite 648 
at a distance of 40.50 mm from the face A (Fig. 8). 

3 1 . Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

32. Clean the joint faces of the lift cover and of the s pool 
valve support. 

33. Fit.toe bushes(8) in the cover. 

34. Fit the cup plug (17) smeared with Loctite 542 flush 
with the cover (2- speed p.t.o.). 

35. Mount the lift shaft (4) and the cam (9) in the cover 
(Fig. 9). 

Note: Ensure that the direction of the shaft and 
the position of the cam are correct. 

36. Tighten the set screws (14) smeared with Loctite 
241 to a torque of 5 Nm (Fig. 9). 

Note: Apply this torque so as not to deform the 
cam. 

37. Position the O-rings (7) and the nylon rings (6). 
Note: Protect the splines of the shaft. Lubricate 
the 0~r/ng$ before mounting (Fig. 10). 

38. Grease the splines of the shaft (4) (Anti-Seize 
Grease or equivalent). 

39. Fit the lift arm (5) (sensor side), the washer (1 ), the 
retainer (3) and the screw (2). 

Note: Grease the face of the cover (Anti-Seize 
Greasn or equivalent) before fitting the arms. 

40. Tighten the screw (2) so as to align two flat sides of 
the screw head with the two tabs of the retainer(3). 
Bend back the tabs. 

Note: If work has been done without the need to 
carry out shimming J1 (Fig. 12) (eg. replacement of 
seals) it is essential to place the shims (12] at the left 
end of the shaft (factory fitting) to preserve the 
correct positioning of the cam and avoid having to 
adjust the sensor (26). 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6B01.8 



Rear Axle - Lift cover 



'•/ V 



41. Carry out shimming of the shaft (4) (Fig. 12) to 
obtain: 

J1 = +0.05 to +050 maximum. 

Mount the arm (11), the washer (1 ) and the bolt (2). 
Note: Grease the face of the cover (Anti-Seize 
Grease or equivalent) before mounting the arm. 

42 . Ti ghten the bolt so as to position the I ift arms (5) and 
(11) correctly on the shaft. 

43. Remove the bolt (2) and the washer (1) at the left 
end of the shaft. 

44. Measure the distance between face A of the shaft 
and face B of the arm using a depth gauge (Figs. 
11 and 12). 

45. By measuring dimension X, determine the 
thickness of spacers Y needed to obtain (Fig. 12): 
J1 = +0.05 to +0.20 maximum. 

J1=X + Y 

46. Mount the previously selected shims [12], the 
washer (1), the retainer (3) and the bolt (2). 

47 . Tighten the bolt (2) so as to align two flat sides of the 
screw head with the two tabs of the retainer(3). 
Bend back the tabs. 

For tractors equipped with economy 4-speed PTO, 
carry out operations 48 to 51 . 

48. Refit the finger (19) (Fig. 13). 

49. Mount the O-ring (20) from the exterior side of the 
cover (Fig. 13). 

50. Smear the screws (18) and (22) with Loctite 241 
and tighten. 

5 1 . Check that the control functions smoothly. 

52. Fit the elbow connector (23). 




J1 = +0,05 +0.20 max 




Fig. 12 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



i*V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Lift cover 




6B01.9 



D. Refitting 



53. Clean the joint face of the cover on the rear axle 
housing. 

54. Smear the joint face with a sealing compound 
(Master Joint 510 Loctite or equivalent). 

55. Lift cover into position. 

Note: When refitting the cover, ensure that the 
supply pipe of the differential lock and the 
control finger (4-speed economy PTO) engage 
properly in their respective positions (Fig. 14). 

56. Mount the supports for the PTO control cables 
(depending on the version) and fit the bolts (24) of 
the cover (10). Tighten to the following torque : 

. 1 2mm diameter bolt = 72- 96 Nm 

. 16mm diameter bolt = 160-200 Nm 

A heavy-duty cover and five new bolts (24) has 

been released on 31 25 tractor from SN ; S06701 1 . 

The tightening torque of 16 mm diam bolts is 240 - 

320 Nm instead of 160 - 200 Nm. 

57. Refit the upper pins to the rams and lift rods. Refit 
the trailer brake valve support if fitted. Retighten 
the pipe at both ends. 

58. Refit (Fig. 4) : 

. the differential lock supply pipe (3) 
. the cable (4) (4-speed PTO, if fitted) 
. the cable (5) (shiftable PTO, if fitted) 

59. Fit the vehicle speed sensor (15) with "Loctite 577 
Sensor Sealing" or equivalent (Autotronic, 
Datatronic tractors) (Fig. 15). 

60. Screw in the speed sensor into contact with the 
crownwheel, without forcing it. 

61 . Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn so as to obtain a 
clearance of approx. 1 mm between the sensor 
and the crownwheel (Fig. 15). 

62. Tighten the nut (16) moderately (Fig. 15). 

63. Connect the sensor. 

64. Fix the harness assembly with a clip. 

65. Clean the joint face of the spool valve support . 

66. Coat the joint face of the spool valve support with 
a sealing compound (Master Joint 510 Loctite or 
equivalent). 

67. Refit the support and spool valve assembly (1) 
(Fig. 16). 

















/ J ^**^^^*^ 








-***^~~*^ 








"*~~«^ ^\. 


•^^ _ y—— 




t^ 


Fig. 14 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6B01.10 



Rear Axle - Lift cover 



68. Smear the thread of the two lower screws (4) with 
Loctite 510. Fit and tighten the boits (4) in the spool 
valve support to a torque of 50-70 Nm (Fig. 17). 

69. Reconnect (Fig. 17): 

. the supply hose {1 ) to the spool valve 
. the supply hose (3) to the lift valve 
. the return hose (2) 

70. Adjust the p.t.o. control (4-speed) (chapter 6D01 . 
operations 127 and 132 to 137) and the p.t.o. 
control (shiftable) (chapter 6E02, operations 47 
and 52 to 58). 

7 1 . Remove the blocks between the cab supports and 
the trumpets. Position the cab. 

72. Refit the rear fastening screws of the cab. Tighten 
the nuts to 27-35 Nm and the lock-nuts smeared 
with Loctite 270 to 13-20 Nm. Refasten the guard 
plates. 

73. Fit and adjust the position sensor. 

74. Smear the thread of the sensor (26) with a sealing 
compound (Hylornar or equivalent), then screw in 
the sensor a few turns and connect the harness. 

75. Start the engine. 

76. Using the external control, make sure that the lift 
arms are in the fully raised position (relief valve 
blowing. 

77. Stop the engine, then make a mark on the cover 
and on one arm. Screw in the sensor (without 
forcing it) until it meets the cam (9) and unscrew by 
approximately one turn (ie. 1 .5 mm). 

78. Fix the harness. 

79. Start the engine. 

80. Using the internal control, lower and raise the lift 
arms. 

8 1 . Check the position of the moving mark on the arm. 
The difference between the two marks should be 
approx. 3 mm. 

Note: 

a) If the difference is greater than 3 mm, uns- 
crew the sensor slightly. 

b) If the difference is less than 3 mm, retighten 
the sensor slightly. 

82. Tighten the nut (25) to a torque of 25 Nm using a 
suitable spanner (Fig. 18). 

83. Check for leaks: 

at the joint between the lift cover and the spool 
valve support 
. at the hydraulic connectors. 

84. Refit the sheetmetal. 



Version without lift 

. The holes of the shaft (4) are plugged with caps 

(27) sealed with Loctite 542. 
. The position sensor (26) is replaced with a 

threaded plug (28) equipped with a seal (29). 

Version without Autotronic 

. The vehicle speed sensor (15) is replaced with 
a threaded plug (30) equipped with a seal (31). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 




6G01:1 



6 C01 3000 Tractor Trumpet housings 



CONTENTS 






General 



A. Trumpet housing assembly 



B. Planetary carrier assembly 



C. Bearings and seals 



8 



D. Axle shaft bearings preload 



E. Wheel stud replacement 



10 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6C01.2 



Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 




V 



General 



Description 

The trumpet housings support the RH and LH axle 
shafts and house the final reduction units which trans- 
mit the drive from the differential assembly. 
There are two versions of the rear axle, normal and 
heavy duty, depending on the size of tractor: normal for 
the 3050. 3060 and 3065 tractors and heavy duty for the 
3070, 3080 and 3095 tractors. 



Shims [26] located at the end of the axle shaft allow the 
taper roller bearing preload to be aajusted. The half 
shaft (2) and the planetary carrier assembly (10) are 
held by the washer (25) and the bolt (24). The ring gear 

(22) is a force fit in the trumpet housing and attached by 
three bolts (17). It comprises three locating dowels (21) 
which centre the brake plate (18). 

Drive from the differential is transmitted to the final 
reduction planetary gears through a planetary shaft 

(23) on to which the brake disc (19) is splined. 



The two trumpet housings are identical and are fitted on 
either side of the centre housing. 

Construction 

The half shaft (2) is supported by two taper roller 
bearings (5) and (8) fitted opposite each other. The unit 
is sealea on the outside by a triple lip seal /3\ and on the 
inside by a single lip seal /7V The final reduction pla- 
netary carrier assembly (10) fitted with three pinions 
(14) is sciined onto the half shaft (2). 
The heavy duty planetary carrier assemblies comprise 
two rows of needle rollers (16) separated by a spacer 
(15). The normal duty planetary carrier assemblies 
have only one row of needle rollers (16). The recesses 
in carrier assemblies (10) are rough finished and as 
such planetary gears (14) end float is adjusted by fitting 
suitable thickness thrust washer (13). 



Key to illustrations 



(1) 


Wheel stud 


(2) 


A<le shaft 


/3\ 


Triple lip seals 


(4) 


S=al housing 


(5) 


Eeanng cup 


(5A) 


Bearing cone 


(6) 


Trumpet housing 


/7\ 


Seal 


(8) 


Bearing cup 


(8A) 


Esaring cone 


(9) 


Sour washer 


(10) 


; - ; anetary earner assembly 


(11) 


Circlip 


(12) 


.--'anetary gear pin 


[13] 


r 'irust washer(s) 



(14) 


Planetary gear 




(15) 


Spacer (heavy duty planetary carrier 


assembly) 


(16) 


Needte rollers 




(17) 


Bolt 




(18) 


Brake plate 




(19) 


Brake disc 




(20) 


Bolt 




(21) 


Locating oov/ei 




(22) 


Ring gear 




(23) Planetary shaft 




(24) 


Bolt 




(25) 


Washer 




[26] 


Shim(s) 




(27) Locating dowel 




(28) 


Plug 





Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle- 3000 Tractor trumpet 




6C01.3 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6C01.4 Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 



—I 


iffi******^ 






B^*** 


-' ^^ 


Ri 



6601.5 



A. Trumpet housing assembly 
Removal 

1 . Immobilize the tractor. Apply the handbrake. Fit 
chocks between the frame and the front axle (see 
3A01Ftg1). 

2. Drain the rear axle only. 

3. Using a trolley jack, raise the side of the tractor 
inyojved. 

4. Support the tractor with an axle stand. 

5. Remove the wheel. 

6. Remove the stabilizer bracket 

7. Disconnect the draft control sensor harness. 

8. On tractors fitted with an automatic hitch, the 
sensor is removed outwards (Fig. 1 ). 

9. Remove the cab attaching bolts (A) (Low profile 
cab Fig. 2) - (Hiline cab Fig. 3). 

1 0. Raise the cab -sufficiently to prevent any fouling 
when the trumpet housing is removed {chock the 
cab). 

Important : Check the clearance between the 
hood and the windscreen (if insufficient remo ve 
the sheet metal). 

1 1 .Remove the spacer (B) (Fig. 2 low profile cab). 
Note: Only for trumpet housing replacement on 
hiline cab tractors, remove bolts (A) and (C) and 
the spacer B (Fig. 3). 

12. Position a suitable support on a trolley jack under 
the trumpet housing. 

13. For the LH trumpet housing disconnect the lift 
hydraulics valve supply hose (plug the ends). 

14. Unscrew the attaching bolts (20). 

15. Pull the trumpet housing away from the rear axle 
housing. 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6C01.6 Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 




V 



16. Remove : 

. the brake disc (19) 
. the planetary shaft (23) 
. the locating dowel (27) 

Note : To prevent the brake piston (C) from 
coming out of the housing, it is recommended 
that two wide washers and two bolts be fitted 
diametrically opposite each other to hold it in 
place. (Fig.4) 

1 7. Remove ihe brake plate (18). 

Refitment 

1 8. Clean the mating faces of the centre housing and 
the trumpet housing with a non-greasy solvent. 

19. Apply a bead of oil resistant (Silicomet type) 
silicone to the inner edge of the centre housing 
(Fig.5). 

Note: Do not block up the oil drain hole in the 
housing. 

20. Check that the disk (19) slides freely on the plane- 
tary shaft (23) (Fig.6). 

21. Refit the locating dowel (27), the planetary shaft 
(23) and the brake disc (19). 

22. Screw two dowel pins into diametrically opposite 
positions on the centre housing. 

23. Refit the brake plate (18) in the trumpet housing. 
Note: To retain the plate, apply three spots of 
"Amber Technical" grease or an equivalent 
product to the surface of the ring gear (22). 

24. Fit the trumpet housing to the centre housing. 
Note: Turn the shaft (2) to engage the planetary 
shaft (23) in the planetary gears. 

25. Clean the bolts (20) and coat them with Plastex. 
Hylomar or an equivalent gasket sealant. 

26. Fit and tighten the bolts (20) to a torque of 170- 
210 Nm. 

27. Carry out procedures 12 and 13 in reverse. 

28. Carry out procedures 10 and 1 1 in reverse. 

29. Refit the cab attaching bolts with the nuts and 
locknuts to a torque of : 

Nut : 27-35 Nm 

Locknut : 13-20 Nm (with Loctite 270) 

30. Refit the draft control sensor. 

Note: Lightly com the draft control sensor with 
Loctite Anti-seize or equivalent grease. 

31. Reconnect the draft control sensor harness and 
refit the stabilizer bracket. 

32. Replenish transmission oil. 

33. Refit the wheel. Tighten to a torque of 400-450 Nm. 

34. Remove the axle stand. 

35. Test the hydraulic lift and brake circuits. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



**■ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle- 3000 Tractor trumpet 




6601:7' 



36. Check for leaks : 

- between the trumpet housing and the rear axle 
housing 

- from the lift system valve supply hose (LH trumpet 
housing) 



B. Planetary carrier assembly 
Disassembly 

1 . Remove the trumpet housing (see Section A). 

2. Remove the bolt (24) {Fig. 7). 

3. Remove the retaining washer (25) and the shim(s) 
[26] (Rg.7). 

4. Remove the planetary carrier assembly (10). 

5. Open out the circlip (11) (Fig. 8). 

6. Using a copper tipped mallet, tap lightly on the 
three pins (12) (Fig. 8). 

7. Remove the three pins (12) and the circlip (11). 

8. Remove the three planetary gears (14), the needle 
rollers (16), the spacers (15) (heavy duty planetary 
gear A) and the thrust washers [13]. 

Reassembly 

9. Clean the planetary carrier (10), the pins (12) and 
the planetary gears (14). Check the condition of the 
parts. 

1 0. Coat the needle rollers (16) with "Amber Technical" 
or an equivalent grease. Into each planetary gear 
(14) insert : 

- Heavy duty planetary carrier (A) : two rows of 
needle rollers separated by a spacer (15) (Fig. 7). 

- Normal duty planetary carrier (B) : one row of 
needle rollers (Fig. 7). 

Note: Each heavy duty planetary gear (A) has 42 
needle rotters. 

Each normal duty planetary gear (B) has 21 
needle rollers. 
1 1 .Shim the planetary gears. 

Note: Three thicknesses of thrust washer (13] 

are available : 

. 3382026 M2 = 1.60 / 1.50 

- 3382210 Ml = 2.37/2.27 

- 3580962 M1 = 2.10/ 2.00 

12. Position the planetary gears (14) and the medium 
thickness washers [13] on each side of the 
planetary gear. 

1 3. Fit the three pins (12). 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6C01.8 



Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 




14. Using a set of feeler gauges, determine the 
thickness of washers [13] to be fitted to obtain an 
end play of between 0.15 and 0.55 on each 
planetary gear (Fig.9). 

1 5. Pul) out the three pins slightly and fit the shims [13] 
selected in procedure 14 (Fig. 10). 

1 6. Push in the three pins and fit the circlip (1 1 ). 
1 7. Open out the circlip (11) (Fig.8). 

1 8. Tap lightly on the three pins to insert the circlip (1 1 ) 
into the groove in the planetary carrier (Fig.1 1). 

1 9. Check that the spur washer (9) is fitted. 

20. Refit the planetary carrier. 

21. Fit shims to obtain the required preload (see 
Section D). 

22. Refit the trumpet housing (see Section A). 



C. Bearings and Seals 
Disassembly 

1 . Separate the trumpet housing from the centre hou- 
sing (see Section A). 

2. Remove the planetary carrier (see Section B). 

3. Remove : 

- the spur washer (9) (Fig. 12) 

- the bearing cone (8A) (runs free on shaft) 

4 Withdraw the shaft (2) from the trumpet housing. 

5. Extract the cone (5A). 

6. Drive out the triple lip seai /3\. 

7. Using an extractor, remove: 

- the cup (5) 

- the housing (4) for seal /3\ 

- the cup (8) 

8. Drive out the seal /7Y 

Reassembly 

Note: The planetary ring gear (22) is a tight fit in the 
trumpet housing (6) (page 3). 
ft is centred by the three locating dowels (21} (Loc- 
ate 638) and tightened by the three bolts (17) to a 
torque of 79-90 Nm (Loctite 242). 

9. Clean the seal contact surfaces, the cup seats and 
the cones in the trumpet housing and on the shaft. 
The seal, cup and cone contact surfaces must be 
free Irom burrs and damage. 

1 0. Coat the outside diameter of the seal /7\ with Loctite 
542 (metal cage). 
Note: Fit the seai the correct way round. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



w 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 




6G0i:9 



1 1 . Replacement of seal /7\ : 

a) Without replacing the shaft (2) 

So that the seal lip is not in the same place on the 
shaft, press on the seal until it is 4 mm from the 
shoulder of the cup (8) (Fig. 12). 

b) Replacing the shaft (2) 

Position the seal 5 mm from the shoulder of the cup 
(8) (Fig. 13). 

1 2. Lubricate the cups (8) and (5) and press them fully 
onto the shoulder. 

13. Press the housing (4) fully on to the shoulder 
(Fig. 14). 

14. Push the triple lip seal /3\ up against the shaft 
shoulder. 

Note : Ensure that the seal is fitted the correct 
way round (Fig.14). 

15. Lubricate the shaft (2) and press the cone (5A) 
against the shoulder. 

16. Lightly grease the cone (5A) and the lips of seals 
/3\ and /7\ (use BP Agricharge or an equivalent- 
grease). 

1 7. Protect the splines of the shaft (2) and insert it into 
the trumpet housing. 

Wore; The lips of seal /3\ must face outwards. 

18. Remove the protection from the shaft and lightly 
lubricate the cone (8A). 

19. Refit the cone (8A), the washer (9) and the 
planetary carrier (10). 

20. Fit shims to obtain the required preload (see D). 
21 .Replace the plug (28) by a grease nipple. Partly fill 

the cavity at the end of the trumpet housing bet- 
ween the cone (5A) and the seal /3\ with BP Agri- 
charge or an equivalent grease. Remove the 
grease nipple and refit the plug (Fig. 14). 
22. Refit the trumpet housing (see Section A). 




D. Axle shaft bearings preload 

1 . Place the trumpet housing assembly in a vertical 
position. 

2. Remove the bolt (24) and the washer (25). 

3. Seat the cones (5A) and (8A) in their cups by 
turning the trumpet housing on its shaft. 




Fig. 13 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6001.10 



Rear axle - 3000 Tractor trumpet 




4. Fit shims [26] required to provide thickness greater 
than dimension X to obtain end piay (Fig. 15). 

5. Fit the washer (25) and the bolt (24) and tighten to 
a torque of 270-440 Nm. 

6. Using a dial gauge, check the end play by moving 
the planetary carrier laterally (Fig. 16). 

7. Remove the bolt (24) and the washer (25). 

On the basis of the reading obtained, remove the 
numbenot shims [26] required to obtain a preload 
of :P1 =0.025 to 0.125 

8. Clean the threads at the end of the shaft (2). 

9. Refit the washer (25). 

10. Clean the bolt (24) and coat it with Loctite 241. 
Tighten to a torque of 270-440 Nm. 



E. Rear wheel stud replacement 

1 . Drive out the damaged stud using a hammer and 
bronze drift. 

2. Clean the marks left by the stud ridges with a paint 
brush dipped in solvent. 

3. Dry with compressed air. 

4. Apply a few drops of Loctite 270 to the new stud 
ridges. 

5. Place the new stud in the ridge marks left by the old 
stud. 

6. Make sure that the ridges are properly engaged 
and then knock the stud head up against the half 
shaft flange with a bronze mallet. 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




v v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle -3100 Tractor trumpet 




6C02. 1 



6 C02 3 1 00 Tractor Trumpet housings 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Trumpet housing assembly 



B. Planetary carrier assembly 



C. Bearings and seals 



D. Axle shaft bearings preload 



E. Wheel stud replacement 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




6C02.2 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - 31 00 Tractor trumpet 




General 



Description 

The trumpet housings support the RH and LH axle 
shafts and house the final reduction units which trans- 
mit the drive from the differential assembly. 
The two trumpet housings are identical and are fitted on 
either side of the centre housing. 

Construction 

The half shaft (2) is supported by two taper roller 
bearings (5) and (8) fitted opposite each other. The unit 
is sealed on the outside by a triple lip seal /3\ and on the 
inside by a single lip seal /7V The final reduction 
planetary carrier assembly (21) fitted with three 
pinions (18) is splined onto the half shaft (2). Shims [22J 
located at the end of the axle shaft allow the taper roller 
bearing preload to be adjusted. The half shaft (2) and 
the planetary carrier assembly (21) are held by the 
washer (23) and the bolt (24). The ring gear (10) is a 
force fit in the trumpet housing. It comprises five 
locating dowels (9) which centre the brake plate (26). 
Drive from the differential is transmitted to the final 
reduction planetary gears through a planetary shaft 
(25) on to which the brake disc (27) is splined. 



Key to illustrations 

(1) Wheel stud 

(2) Axle shaft 
/3\ Triple lip seal 

(4) Seat housing 

(5) Bearing cup 
(5A) Bearing cone 

(6) Trumpet housing 
/7\ Seal 

(8) Bearing cup 
(8A) Bearing cone 

(9) Locating dowel 

(10) Planetary ring gear 

(11) Spur washer 

(12) Plug 

(13) Bolt 



(14) 


Spacer 


(15) 


Circlip 


(16) Planetary gear pin 


(17) 


Thrust washer 


(18) Planetary gear 


(19) 


Spacer 


(20) 


Needle roller 


(21) 


Planetary carrier 


[22] 


Shim(s) 


(23) 


Retaining washer 


(24) 


Bolt 


(25) 


Sun wheel 


(26) 


Brake plate 


(27) 


Brake disc 


(28) 


Locating dowel 


(29) 


Bolt 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle -3100 Tractor trumpet 




6C02.3 



General view 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.nei 




6C02.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - 31 00 Tractor trumpet 




V 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear axle -3100 Tractor trumpet 




6C02.5 



A. Trumpet housing assembly 
Removal 

1 . Immobilize the tractor, Apply the handbrake. Fit 
chocks between the frame and the front axle (see 
3 A02 Fig 2). 

2. Drain the rear axle only. 

3. Using a trolley jack, raise the side of the tractor 
involved. 

4. Support the tractor with an axle stand. 

5. Remove the wheel. 

6. Remove the stabilizer bracket 

7. Disconnect the draft control sensor harness (wi- 
thout disconnecting the harness). 

8. Remove the cab attaching bolts (A) with the nuts 
(Fig.i). 

9. Raise the cab sufficiently to lift the support spacer 
(B) clear (Fig. 1). 

Note : Check the clearance between the hood 
and the windscreen (if insufficient remove the 
sheet metal). 

10. Position a suitable support on a trolley jack under 
the trumpet housing. 

1 1 . For the LH trumpet housing disconnect the lift 
hydraulics valve supply hose (plug the ends). 

12. Unscrew the attaching bolts (29). 

13. Separate the trumpet housing from the rear axle 
housing. 

1 4. Remove : 

. the brake disc (27) 
. the planetary shaft (25) 
. the locating dowel (28) 

Note: To prevent the brake piston (C) from 
coming out of the housing, it is recommended 
that two wide washers and two bolts be fitted 
diametrically opposite each other to hold it in 
place. (Fig.2) 

1 5. Remove the brake plate (28). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




6C02.6 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - 31 00 Tractor trumpet 




V V 



Refitment 

1 6. Clean the mating faces of the centre housing and 
the trumpet housing with a non-greasy solvent. 

17. Apply a bead of oil resistant silicone (Silicomet 
type) to the inner edge of the centre housing 
(Fig.3). 

Note: Do not block up the oil drain hole in the 
housing. 

1 8. Check that the disk (27) slides freely on the plane- 
tary shaft (25) (Fig. 4). 

19. Refit the locating dowel (28), the planetary shaft 
(25) and the brake disc (27). 

20. Screw two dowel pins into diametrically opposite 
positions on the centre housing. 

21 . Refit the brake plate (26) in the trumpet housing. 
NOTE: To retain the plate, apply three spots of 
"Amber Technical" or equivalent grease to the 
surface of the ring gear (10). 

22. Fit the trumpet housing to the centre housing. 
Note: Turn the shaft (2) to engage the planetary 
shaft (25) in the planetary gears (18) 

23. Clean the bolts (32) and coat them with Plastex, 
Hylomar or an equivalent gasket sealant. 

24. Fit and tighten the bolts (29) to a torque of 1 70 - 
210 Nm. 

25. Carry out procedures 9 to 1 1 in reverse. 

26. Refit the cab attaching bolts with the nuts and 
locknuts to a torque of: 

Nut : 27-35 Nm 

Locknut : 13-20 Nm (with Loctite 270) 

27. Refit the draft control sensor. 

Note: Lightly coat the draft control sensor with 
Loctite Anti-seize or equivalent grease. 

28. Carry out procedures 6 and 3 in reverse 

29. Refit the wheel. Tighten to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm, 

30. Remove the axle stand. 

31 . Carry out procedures 1 and 2 in reverse. 

32. Test the hydraulic lift and brake circuits, 

33. Check for leaks : 

- between the trumpet housing and the centre 
housing 

- from the lift system valve supply hose (LH trumpet 
housing) 

B. Planetary carrier assembly 

Disassembly 

1 . Remove the trumpet housing (see Section A). 

2. Remove the bolt (24). 

3. Remove the retaining washer (23) and the shim(s) 
[22] (Fig.5). 





Fig. 4 



15} /& 




Fig.5 










Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Rear axle -3100 Tractor trumpet 




6C02.7 



4. Remove the planetary carrier assembly (21). 

5. Remove the bolt (13) and the spacer (14). 

6. Open out the circlip (15) (Fig.6). 

7. Using a copper tipped mallet, tap lightly on the 
three pins (16) (Fig.6). 

8. Remove the three pins (16) and the circlip (15). 

9. Remove the three planetary gears (18), the needle 
rollers (20), the spacers (1 9) and the thrust washers 
(17). 

Reassembly 

10. Clean the planetary carrier (21), the pins (16) and 
the planetary gears (18). Check the condition of the 
parts. 

1 1 . Coat the needle rollers (20) with "Amber Technical" 
or an equivalent grease. Into each planetary gear 
(18) insert two rows of needle rollers separated by 
a spacer (19). 

Note: Each planetary gear has 56 needle rollers. 

1 2. Fit the planetary gears (18) and the thrust washers 
(17). 

13. Fit three pins (16) with the circlip (15) (Fig. 7). 

14. Open out the circlip (15) (Fig.6). 

1 5 . Tap lightly on the three pins to insert the circlip (15) 
into the planetary carrier groove (Fig. 7). 

1 6. Position one end of the circlip in contact with the pin 
(16) (Fig,8) 

17. Clean the threads of the bolt (13). Fit the spacer 
(14). Coat the bolt (13) with Loctite 270 before 
fitting. Tighten to a torque of 34 - 50 Nm (Fig. 8). 

1 8. Check that the spur washer (1 1) is fitted. 

19. Refit the planetary carrier. 

20. Fit shims to obtain the required preload (see 
Section D). 

21 .Refit the trumpet housing (see Section A). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6C02.8 



Rear axle - 3100 Tractor trumpet 



* 



i 



C. Bearings and Seals 



Disassembly 

1 . Separate the trumpet housing from the centre hou- 
sing {see Section A). 

2. Remove the planetary carrier (see Section B). 

3. Remove : 

- the spur washer (11) (Fig. 9) 

- the bearing cone (8A) {runs free on shaft) 

4. Withdraw the shaft (2) from the trumpet housing. 

5. Extract the cone (5A). 

6. Drive out the triple lip seal /3\. 

7. Using an extractor, remove: 

- the cup (5) 

- the housing (4) for seal /3\ 
• the cup (8) 

8. Drive out the seal /7\. 

Reassembly 

9. Clean the seal contact surfaces, the cup seats and 
the cones in the trumpet housing and on the shaft. 
The seal, cup and cone contact surfaces must be 
free from burrs and damage. 

10. Coat the outside diameter of the seal /7\ with 

Loctite 542. 

Note: Fit the seal the correct way round. 
1 1 .Replacement of seal /7\ : 

a) Without replacing the shaft (2) 

So that the seal lip is not in the same place on the 
shaft, press on the seal until it is 9 mm from the 
shoulder of the cup (Fig 9). 

b) Replacing the shaft (2) 

Position the seal 8 mm from the shoulder of the cup 
(Fig. 10). 

1 2. Lubricate the cups (8) and (5) and press them fully 
on to the shoulder. 

1 3. Press the housing (4) to within 20 mm of the trumpet 
housing (Fig. 1 1). 

14. Push the triple lip seal /3\ up against the. shaft 
shoulder. 

Note: Ensure that the seal is fitted the correct 
way round (Fig. 1 1). 

15. Lubricate the shaft (2) and press the cone (5A) 
against the shoulder. 

16. Lightly grease the cone (5A), the lips of seals /3\ 
and /7\ (use BP Agricharge or an equivalent 
grease). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Rear axle -3100 Tractor trumpet 




6C02.9 



17. Protect the splines of the shaft (2) and insert it into 
the trumpet housing. 

Note: The lips of the seal/3\ must face outwards. 

18. Remove the protection from the shaft and lightly 
lubricate the cone (8A). 

19. Carry out procedures 2 and 3 in reverse. 

20. Fit shims to obtain the required preload (see D). 

21 . Replace the plug (12) by a grease nipple. Partly fill 
the-cavity at the end of the trumpet housing bet- 
ween the cone (5A) and the sea! /3\ with BP Agri- 
charge or an equivalent grease. Remove the 
grease nipple and refit the plug (Fig. 1 1 ). 

22. Refit the trumpet housing (see Section A). 



P. Axle shaft bearings preload 

1 . Place the trumpet housing assembly in a vertical 
position. 

2. Remove the bolt (24) and the washer (23). 

3. Seat the cones (5A) and (8A) in their cups by 
turning the trumpet housing on its shaft. 

4. Fit shims [22] required to provide thickness greater 
than dimension X to obtain end play (Fig. 1 2). 

5. Fit the washer (23) and the bolt (24) and tighten to 
a torque of 270 - 440 Nm. 

6. Using a dial gauge, check the end play by moving 
the planetary carrier laterally (Fig. 13). 

7. Remove the bolt (24) and the washer (23). 

On the basis of the reading obtained, remove the 
number of shims [22] required to obtain a preload 
of :P1 =0.025 to 0.125 

8. Clean the threads at the end of the shaft (2). 

9. Refit the washer (23). 

10. Clean the bolt (24) and coat it with Loctite 241. 
Tighten to a torque of 270 - 440 Nm. 






^Yvy 






( 








^^^€^^^ 














-"7 

n 






^i 




' r? ' Fig. 13 



E. Rear wheel stud replacement 

1 . Drive out the damaged stud using a hammer and 
bronze drift. 

2. Clean the marks left by the stud ridges with a paint 
brush dipped in solvent. 

3. Dry with compressed air. 

4. Apply a few drops of Loctite 270 to the new stud 
ridges. 

5. Place the new stud in the ridge marks left by the old 
stud. 

6. Make sure that the ridges are properly engaged 
and. then knock the stud head up against the half 
shaft flange with a bronze mallet. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




V /' 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6 D01 Intermediate shaft - Driving pinion 
Power-take-off brake 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Rear axle - Inter* 3 shaft - Driv^ pinion - PTO brake 600 1 . 1 



General 



Operation 



A. 2-speed PTO (without shimming) 



B. 2-speed PTO (with shimming) 



C. 4-speed economy PTO (without shimming) 



D. 4-speed economy PTO (with shimming) 



10 



E. Adjustment of PTO control 4-speed economy 



12 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6D01.2 



Rear axle - Inter* 11 shaft - Driv 1 " 9 pinion - PTO brake 




V V 



~) 



General 



The drive from the engine is transmitted to the power- 
take-off clutch mounted at the front of the centre hou- 
sing. 

The intermediate shaft (2) is connected by splines at 
one end to the clutch and at the other end either to the 
double pinion (13) in the 2-speed PTO version or to the 
coupler (31) in the 4-speed economy PTO version. 
The compound pinion (13) turns on two taper roller 
bearings (3) (4) and (7) (8), mounted in the bore of the 
centre housing and the top link support (10) respec- 
tively. 

A piston (9) housed in the 3rd point support and 
controlled by the 17 bar hydraulic circuit enables the 
compound pinion (13) to be braked when the control 
lever is moved to the PTO braking position. 



Power-take-off 
4-speed 2-speed 



Operation 



2-speed PTO 

When the PTO solenoid valve feeds the clutch, the 
intermediate shaft (2) is driven. This in turn drives the 
compound driving pinion (13) which engages cons- 
tantly with the 540 rpm and 1000 rpm pinions of the 
lower line. 

4-speed PTO 

This feature enables speeds of 540 rpm or 1 000 rpm to 
be obtained with an engine speed of 1550 rpm, 

Standard position (engine speed 2000 rpm) 
When the coupler (31 ) is moved forwards, the interme- 
diate shaft (2) turns with the shaft (35) which drives the 
compound driving pinion (13). This coniiguration is 
identical to the 2-speed PTO version. 

Economy position (engine speed 1550 rpm) 
When the coupler (31) is moved backwards, the drive 
is transmitted to the coupler (34)-(fitted loose on the 
shaft (35)) and to the compound pinion (18) which 
drives the driving pinion (13). The ratio of the 
compound pinion (18) is 1.292. 

power-take-off brake 

The movement of the control lever in the cab acts on an 
electrical contactor which enables the solenoid valve of 
the PTO brake mounted on the right cover to open. Oil 
is supplied to the chamber situated behind the piston 
(9). The piston moves and presses the bearing cup (8) 
against the bearing cone (7), progressively 
immobilising the driving pinion (13) which constantly 
engages with the 540 and 1000 rpm pinions. 



(1) Clutch 

(2) Intermediate shaft 

(3) Bearing cup 

(4) Bearing cone 

(5) Washer 
/6\ Bolt 

(7) Bearing cone 

(8) Bearing cup 

(9) Brake piston 

(10) Top link support 
111] Shims 

(12) O-ring 

(13) Driving pinion 

(14) Compound pinion assembly 

(15) Deflector 

(16) Washer 

(17) Needle roller bearing 

(18) Compound pinion 

(19) Spacer 

(20) Needle roller bearing 

(21) Washer 

(22) Set screw 

(23) Shaft 

(24) Locking screw 

(25) Nut 

(26) Fork 

(27) Screw 

(28) Needle roller bearing 

(29) Circlip 

(30) Ring 

(31) Dog tooth coupler 

(32) Circlip 

(33) Washer 

(34) Dog tooth pinion 

(35) Shaft 

(36) Cup plug 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




* 



s 



^ 
» 



0) 

ra- 
ft 
=t 

< 

3" 
o" 

=3 



3 

Cr 

3 



Co 

o 
o 
\ 

Co 

— i. 

o 
CO 

CO 

i 

o 

3 

CO 



CO 



K 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




V V 



6D01.4 Rear axle - Inter* 8 shaft - Driv"** pinion - PTO brake 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear axle - Inter** shaft - Driv^ pinion - PTO brake 




6D01.5 



A. 2-speed PTO (without shimming) 
Disassembly 

1 . Disconnect (Fig. 1) : 

. the auxiliary spool vaive supply hose (1) 
. the supply hose of the lift valve (3) 
. the return hose (2) 

2. Remove the bolts (4) of the auxiliary spool valve 
support (5) (Fig. 1). 

3. Detach the auxiliary spool valve support. 
Note: Tilt the support and auxiliary spool valve 
assembly without detaching the control cables 
(1)(Fig.2). 

4. Disconnect the supply tube (1) of the PTO brake 
(Fig- 3). 

5. Disconnect the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 3). 

6. Remove the boits (3) and the top link support (10) 
(Fig. 3). 

7. Withdraw the pinion (13) and shaft (2) assembly 
held by the washer (5) and screw /6V Remove the 
bearing cone (4). 

Note: The shaft (2) is mounted in the clutch (1) 
without locking screw. 

Reassembly 

8. Check and clean the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

9. Refit the bearing cone (4). Fit the pinion (13) and 
shaft (2) assembly held by the washer (5) and 
screw /6\. 

10. Clean the joint face of the top link support. 

1 1 . Smear the joint face of the housing with a sealing 
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent). 

Note: To ensure the lubrication of the bearing 
cone (7), a cup plug (36) is fitted without Loctite, 
recessed into the face of the housing. 

12. Refit the top link support (10). Fit and tighten the 
bolts (3) to a torque of 130-170 Nm (Fig. 3). 
Note: Ensure that the cup (8) is present. 

13. Reconnect the supply tube of the PTO brake (1) 
and the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 3). 

14. Clean the joint face of !he spool valve support. 

15. Smear the joint face of the support cover with a 
sealing compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent). 

16. Refit the support, tilting it, with the control cables 
(1)(Fig.2). 

1 7. Smear the threads of the two lower bolts (4) with 
Loctite 510. Fit and tighten the bolts (4) to a torque 
of 50-70 Nm (Fig. 1). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6D01.6 



Rear axle - inter 40 shaft - Dri\/ n s pinion - PTO brake 




V 



J 



18. Reconnect (Fig. 1): 

. the spool valve supply hose (1) 
. the supply hose of the lift valve (3) 
. the return hose (2). 

19. Check the operation of the PTO and its brake. 

20. Check for leaks 

. at the joint faces (spool valve support, top link 

support) 
. at the hydraulic connectors. 



B. 2-speed PTO (with shimming) 

Note: Shimming J1 must be carried out when wor- 
king on the following parts: Pinion (13), deflector 
(15), bearing cones (4) (7), cups (3) (8), piston (9), 
support (10). 

For correct shimming of the bearing cones (4) (7) 
and of the cups (3) (8), it is necessary to remove the 
lift cover. 

Disassembly 

2 1 . Remove the lift cover. Carry out operations 1 to 1 1 , 
chapter 6B01. 

22. Disconnect the supply tube (1 ) from the PTO brake 
(Fig. 3). 

23. Disconnect the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 3). 

24. Remove the bolts (3) of the top link support 
(Fig. 3) and detach it. 

25. Withdraw the pinion (13) and shaft (2) assembly 
held by the washer (5) and bolt /6\. 

Note: The shaft (2) is mounted in the clutch (1) 
without locking screw. 

26. Remove the screw /6\ and the washer (5). 

27. Separate the pinion (13) from the shaft (2). 
Note: A deflector (15) mounted between the 
pinion (13) and the bearing cone (7), in contact 
with the cup (8) (Fig.4), has been introduced on 
3000 tractors from serial number N120009 
onwards. 

28. Extract the bearing cone (7) and the deflector (1 5) 
(Fig. 5), then remove the bearing cone (4). 
Note: To extract the cup (3) it is necessary to 
remove the 540/1000 rpm pinions. Partly drain 
the rear axle housing. Carry out operations 29, 
8 to 11 and 31, chapter 6E01. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



www.maskinisten.net 




Rear axle - Inte^ shaft - Drlv^ pinion - PTO brake 6D0 1 . 7 



Reassembly 

29. Check and clean the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

30. Place the deflector (1 5) on the pinion (1 3). Push the 
bearing cone (7) on as far as the shoulder with the 
aid of a press (Fig. 6). 

Lubricate the bearing cone (4) and place it in the 
cup (3). 

Note: If replacing the cup (3), refit the 540/1000 
rptn pinions. Carry out operations 33, 36 and 37, 
12 to 15, chapter 6E01. Top up the oil of the rear 
axle housing. 

31 . Withdraw the piston (9) from the top link support 
(10). 

32. Remove the shims [1 1] and the O-ring (1 2) in order 
to prepare for shimmng J 1 . 

33. Fit the piston (9) (without O-ring) and the cup (8) 
in the support (10). 

34. Lubricate the cup and the bearing cone (7). 

35. Fit the pinion (13) in the housing. 

36. Refit the top link support. 

Tighten the bolts to a torque of 130 - 170 Nm. 

37. Carry out shimming (Fig. 7) to obtain: 
J1 = -0.05 to +0.05. 

38. Place the tip of the dial gauge against the end of 
the pinion (13) (Fig. 8). 

39. Pull on the pinion, turning it alternately from right to 
left, so as to compress the deflector (15), to seat 
the bearing cone (7) correctly in the cup (8). 

40. Set the dial gauge to zero. 

41 . Push the pinion, turning it alternately from right to 
left, to seat the bearing cone (4) correctly in the 
cup (3). 

42. Select shims of the correct thickness as a function 
of the dial gauge reading so as to obtain clearance 
of J1. 

43. Remove the support (10) and withdraw the cup (8) 
and piston (9). 

44. Place the shims [1 1] selected in operation 42 in the 
support (10). 




Fig. 6 



i J1 =-0.05 +0.05 



Fig. 7 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6D01.8 



Rear axle - Inter* 9 shaft - Driv ng pinion - PTO brake 




V 



45. Fit the piston (9) with a new O-ring (12). 

Note: Position the lubrication holes of the 
piston toward the bearing cone (Fig. 9). 

46. Fit the cup (8) in the'support. 

47. Withdraw the pinion (13) and assemble on the 
shaft (2) with the washer (5) and bolt /6Y Tighten to 
a torque of 50 Nm. 

48. Refit the bearing cone (4). Fit the pinion (13) and 
shaft (2) assembly. 

49. Smear the face supporting the top link support on 
the rear axle housing with a sealing compound 
(Masterjoint 510 or equivalent). 

50. Refit the top link support (10). Fit and tighten the 
boitss (3) to a torque of 130-170 Nm (Fig. 3). 
Note: Ensure that the cup (8) is present. 

51 . Reconnect the supply tube (1) of the PTO brake 
and the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 3). 

52. Refit the lift cover. 

53. Carry out operations 53 to 57, chapter 6B01 . 

54. Reverse operation 7, chapter 6B01 . 

55. Carry out operations 64 to 69. chapter 6B01 . 

56. Carry out operations 71, 72 and 84, chapter 6B01. 

57. Check the operation of the PTO and its brake. 

58. Check for leaks: 

. at the joint faces (spool valve support, top link 

support, lift cover) 
. at the hydraulic connectors. 



C. 4-speed economy PTO (without 
shimming) 

Disassembly 

59. Remove the left side cover. 

If removing the screw (27) and the intermediate 
shaft (2), carry out operations 1 to 6, chapter 8102. 
Note: A new assembly without coupling bet- 
ween the clutch and the intermediate shaft has 
been introduced on 3000 tractors from serial 
number N342012 onwards. 
For earlier tractors and certain tractors equip- 
ped with the old assembly following the intro- 
duction: N342017 - N342018 - N342022 - 
N342026 - N348029 refer to workshop manual 
1646640 NIL 

60. Disconnect (Fig. 1): 

. the spool valve supply hose (1) 
. the supply hose of the lift valve (3) 
. the return hose (2). 




61. Remove the bolts (4) fastening the support (5) to 
the lift cover (Fig. 1). 

62. Remove the support. 

Note: Tilt the support and spool valve assembly 
without detaching the cables (1) (Fig. 2). 

63. Disconnect the supply tube (1) of the PTO brake 
(Fig. 10). 

64. Disconnect the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 10). 

65. Remove the bolts (3) ol the top link support (10) and 
detach it (Fig. 10). 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 




Rear axle - Inter** 3 shaft - Driv^ pinion - PTO brake 6D0 1 . 9 



66. Remove the nut {25) and the locking screw (24) of 
the fork (26). 

67. Remove the screw (22) (Fig. 11). 

68. Withdraw the shaft (23) from the compound pinion 
assembly (14) in order to disengage the fork (26). 
Note: To disengage the fork alone, gently pull 
the shaft (23) towards the rear 

69. Remove the friction washers (16) and (21). 
Note: Take care not to drop the washers in the 
housing. 

70. Withdraw the compound pinion assembly (14) 
(through the aperture of the spool valve support for 
version without shimming only) (Fig. 12). 

71 . Remove the needle roller bearings (17) and (20) 
and the spacer (19) of the pinion (18). 

Note: A new coupler and a new pinion have 
been introduced on 3000 tractors from serial 
number P181042 onwards. 

72. Remove the circlip (32) (Fig. 13). 

Note: Use short-handled pliers to facilitate 
access to the circlip. 

73. Withdraw the pinion (13) and shaft (35) assembly 
held by the washer (5) and bolt /6\. 

74. Remove the flat washer (33). 

Note: Take care not to drop the circlip and the 
washer in the housing. 

Hold the pinion (34) and the needle roller bea- 
ring (28). 

The bearing cone (4) remains in the cup (3) 
during removal of the pinion (13). 

75. Remove the pinion (34) and the needle roller 
bearing (28). 

76. Remove the bearing cone (4). 

77. Remove the hexagon socket setpcrew (27) (if 
necessary). 

78. Withdraw the shaft (2) and the coupler (31) (if ne- 
cessary). 

Note: The circlip (29) remains on the shaft (2). 

Reassembly 

79. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

80. Refit the shaft (2) and the coupler (31 ) (if removed). 

8 1 . Smear the screw (27) with Loctite 22 1 and tighten 
(if removed). 

82. Refit the bearing cone (4). Advance the pinion (13) 
prepared with the shaft (35). Fit the coupler (34), 
the needle roller bearing (28). the washer (33) and 
[he circlip (32). Push on to the pinion (13). Position 
the washer (33). Fit the circlip (32). 





Fig. 12 




Fig. 13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




v 



6D01. 10 Rear axle - lnter* e shaft - Driv^ pinion - PTO brake 



i 



83. In the pinion (18), place the spacer (19) and the 
needle roller bearings (17) and (20). Position the 
compound pinion assembly (14). Fit the washer 
(16) smeared with miscible grease (Amber Tech- 
nical or equivalent). 

84. Lightly engage the shaft (23) to hold the washer 
(16) in place. Fit the washer (21) smeared with 
miscible grease. Centre the compound pinion 
assembly (14). 

85. Mount the shaft (23) finally in the pinion assembly 
(14) and in the fork (26), ensuring that the hole of 
the screw (22) is properly positioned. 

86. Smear the screw (22) with Loctite 542. Fit and 
tighten to a torque of 28-43 Nm. 

87. Clean the joint face of the top link support. 

88. Smear the joint face of the housing with a sealing 
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent). 

89. Ensure that the cup (8) is present. Fit and tighten 
the bolts (3) to a torque of 130-170 Nm (Fig. 10). 

90. Reconnect the tubes (1) and (4) (Fig. 10). 

91 . Refit the screw (24) and the nut (25) on the fork 
(26) 

92. Adjustment of locking of fork (26) (Fig. 14): 

. Position the fork (26) and the locking screw (24) 
on the flat part M of the shaft (23) {between the 
two locking notches). Tighten the screw as far as 
it will go so as to compress the ball. 

, Loosen the screw by 1/4 of a turn. Smear the nut 
(25) with Loctite 24 1 . Tighten to a torque of 1 5-20 
Nm. 

. Check that the fork is locked correctly. 

93. Adjust the control. 

Carry out operations 127 and 132 to 137 . 

94. Clean the joint face of the spool valve support. 

95. Smear the joint face of the support with a sealing 
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent). 

96. Refit the support, tilting it, with the control cables 
(1>(Fig. 2). 

97. Smear the threads of the two lower bolts (4) with 
Loctite 51 0. Tighten the four screws to a torque of 
50-70 Nm (Fig. 1). 

98. Reconnect the hoses (1) (2) (3) (Fig. 1 ). 

99. If the screw (27) and intermediate shaft (2) have 
been removed, refit the left side cover, Carry out 
operations 7 to 20, chapter 8I02. 

100. Check the operation of the PTO and its brake. 




101. Check for leaks 

. at the joint faces (spool valve support, top link 
support, left side cover) 
.at the hydraulic connectors. 

D. 4-speed economy PTO (with 
shimming) 

Note: Shimming J1 must be carried out when wor~ 
king on the following parts: Pinion (13), deflector 
(15), bearing cones (4) (7), cups (3) (8), piston (9), 
top link support (10). 

For correct shimming of the bearing cones (4) (7) 
and of the cups (3) (8), it is necessary to remove the 
lift cover. 

Disassembly 

102. Remove the lift cover. Carry out operations 1 to 
11, chapter 6B01. 

103. Carry out operations 63 to 76. 

Note: A strengthened shaft (35) has been 
introduced on 3000 tractors. The old needle 
cage has been replaced with a friction ring (30) 
having an external diameter of 14 mm. 
The modified shaft has been introduced: 
. On tractors MF 3050 - 3060 - 3065 - 3070 and 

3090 from serial number N287019 onwards. 
.On tractors MF 3080 from serial number 

N28801 7 onwards. 

For tractors prior to these numbers, refer to 
workshop manual 1646640 M1. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Rear axle - Inter 16 shaft - Dri\/" 9 pinion - PTO brake 




6D01.11 



104. Separate the pinion (13) from the shaft (35) with 
the aid of a press and a suitable tool (Fig. 15). 
Note: The friction ring (30) is force-fitted in the 
shaft (35). 

105. Extract the bearing cone (7) and the deflector 

(15) (Fig. 5). 

Note: To extract the cup (3) it is necessary to 

remove the 540/1000 rpm pinions. 

Partly drain the axle housing. 

Carry out operations 21 to 24, 2 to 6 and 26 of 

chapter 6E02. 

Reassembly 

1 06. Check and clean the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

Note: To obtain correct lubrication of the fric- 
tion ring (30), a deflector (15) (mounted bet- 
ween the pinion (13) and the bearing cone (7) 
in contact with the cup (8) (Fig. 16)) has been 
introduced on 3000 tractors from serial num- 
ber N1 20009 onwards. 

107. Place the deflector (15) on the pinion (13). Push 
the bearing cone (7) on as far as the shoulder with 
the aid of a press (Fig. 6). Place the bearing cone 
(4) in the cup (3). 

Note: If replacing the cup (3), refit the 540/1000 
rpm pinions. Carry out operations 31 and 32, 7 
to 10 and 34 to 37, chapter 6E02. 
Top up the oil of the rear axle housing. 

108. Carry out operations 31 to 46. 

109. Withdraw the pinion (13) and assemble on the 
shaft (35) (Fig. 17). Mount the washer (5) and boit 
/6V 

Tighten to a torque of 50 Nm. 

1 10. Refit the bearing cone (4), the coupler (34) and 
the needle roller bearing (28). 

1 1 1 . Fit the pinion (13) and shaft (35) assembly. 
Note: Ensure that the coupler (31) is present. 

1 1 2. Position the washer (33). Fit the circlip (32). 

1 13. In the pinion (18), place the spacer (19) and the 
needle roller bearings (17) and (20). Position the 
compound pinion assembly (14). Fit the washer 

(16) smeared with miscible grease (Amber Tech- 
nical or equivalent). 

1 1 4. Lightly engage the shaft (23) to hold the washer 
(16) in place. Fit the washer (21) smeared with 
miscible grease. Centre the compound pinion 
assembly (14). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




V 



6D0 1.12 Rear axle - Inter* 1 * shaft - Driv™ pinion - PTO brake 



1 15. Fit the shaft (23) finally in the pinion assembly (14) 
and in the fork (26), ensuring that the hole of the 
screw (22) is properly positioned. 

1 16. Smear the screw (22) with Loctite 542. Fit and 
tighten to a torque of 28-43 Nm. 

1 1 7. Clean the joint face of the top link support. 

118. Smear the joint face of the housing with a sealing 
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent). 

119. Ensure that the cup (8) is present. Fit the top link 
support with the bolts (3) and tighten to a torque 
of 130-170 Nm (Fig. 10). 

1 20. Reconnect the tubes (1) and (4) (Fig. 10). 

1 21 . Fit the locking screw (24) and the nut (25). Adjust 
the fork (26), carry out operation 92. 

1 22. Refit the lift cover. 

Carry out operations 53 to 57, chapter 6B01. 
Reverse operation 7, chapter 6B01. Carry out 
operations 64 to 69, 71 , 72 and 84, chapter 6B01 . 

123. Adjust the economy PTO control. 

Carry out operations 127 and 132 to 137. 

124. Adjust the shiftable PTO control. 

Carry out operations 47 and 52 to 58, chapter 
6E02. 

1 25. Check the operation of the PTO and its brake. 

1 26. Check for leaks: 

.at the joint faces (spool valve support, top link 
support) 
.at the hydraulic connectors. 



E. Adjustment of PTO control 4 
speed economy 

Wore; Operations 128 to 131 must be carried out 
when replacing the control cable. 

1 27. Set the control lever L to the « Economy 1 550 rpm » 
position. 

128. Screw the clevis (1 ) until it reaches the end of the 
threaded part of the cable (6) (Fig. 18). 

1 29. Mount the clevis (1) on the lever with the clip (7). 
Tighten the nut (2). 

130. Adjust the outer cable stop (5), with the nut (3) 
reaching the end of the threaded part. 

131. Tighten the nut (4). 

Note: Check that the cable is not constrained. 
132. Set the lever M to the -Economy 1550 rpm» 
position (Fig. 19) (coupler engaged towards the 
rear, fork locked). 




1550 rpm 
economy position 
engaged 



Fig. 18 



1550 


rpm economy position 




O 


2000 rpm position 


(j) 




/^Z^\ 


(s\ 




if/fyix 


Ql 




JCO \ 




-\ \. 


i 


i i ^TT 








(?) 


(?) 


V_y Fig. 19 



1 33. Screw the clevis (7) until it reaches the threaded 
part of the cable (1). 

1 34. Fit the clevis (7) on the lever M with the clip (6). 
Tighten the nut (5). 

1 35. Adjust the outer cable stop (4), ensuring that the 
lever M is still locked. 

1 36. Tighten the nuts (2) and (3). 

Note: After tightening, check that the cable is 
not subject to any constraint. 

1 37. Check the locking of the control in the •• 2000 rpm» 
position. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



V -/ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Removable PTO shaft 



6E01.1 



6 E0 1 Removable PTO shaft 



CONTENTS 

- General 



A. Replacement of 540 or 1000 rpm shaft 



B. Removal and refitting of rear cover 



C. Disassembly and reassembly of rear cover 



0. Disassembly and reassembly of 540 and 
1000 rpm gear and of front bearing 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 

v v 




6E01.2 Rear Axle - Removable PTO shaft 



General 



The driven gears (5) and (6) are fitted on the PTO shaft 
situated in the lower rear part of the axle housing. These 
gears constantly engage with the driving compound 
gear which is driven by the upper shaft whose move- 
ment is transmitted by the PTO clutch. 
The PTO shaft (10) is fitted at the front on a roller bearing 
(1) force-fitted in the axle housing and at the rear on a 
hub (9) turning on a roller bearing (15). 
It has 6 splines in the 540 rpm version and 21 splines in 
the 1000 rpm version. 

In the 540 rpm configuration, the gear (5) is driven 
through the splines of shaft (1 0). The gear (6) and bush 
(4) assembly runs idle on the shaft (10). 
In the 1000 rpm configuration, the gear (6) is driven via 
the splines of shaft (10). The gear (5) and shaft (3) 
assembly runs idle on the shaft (10). 
The snap ring (20) holds the shaft in place. 
Sealing is provided by the seal /1 4\ or /1 4A\ and the O- 
rings (11) and (19). The deflector (13) ensures pro- 
tection against foreign material. 



Parts list 


0) 


Roller bearing 


(2) 


Deflector 


(3) 


Bush 


(4) 


Bush 


(5) 


540 rpm gear 


(6) 


1000 rpm gear 


(7) 


Circlip 


(8) 


Snap ring 


(9) 


Hub 


(10) 


540 or 1000 rpm p.t.o. shaft 


(11) 


O-ring 


(12) 


Cover 


(13) 


Deflector 


/14\ 


Sealing ring 


/14A\ Reinforced sealing ring 


(15) 


Roller bearing 


(16) 


Bolt 


(17) 


PTO speed sensor 


(18) 


Nut 


(19) 


O-ring 


(20) 


Snap ring 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Removable PTO shaft 




6E01.3 



Assembly 




J. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




v 



6E01.4 Rear Axle - Removable PTO shaft 



Exploded 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Rear Axle - Removable PTO shaft 




6E01.5 



A. Replacement of 540 or 1 000 rpm 
shaft 

Disassembly (Fig. 1) 

1 . Raise rear of tractor to avoid oil spillage. 

2. Remove snap ring (20). 

3. Withdraw shaft (10). 

4. Remove O-ring (11) and discard it. 

Reassembly 

5. Fit a new O-ring (11). 

6. Clean and refit shaft (10). 

7. Refit snap ring (20) and lower rear of tractor. 



B. Removal and refitting of rear 
cover 

Removal 

8. Partially drain the rear axle housing. Remove two 
diametraliy opposed bolts (16) (Fig. 2). 

9. Screw two guide studs {Fig. 2) against the gear (6). 
The purpose of this is to hold the gears (5) and (6) 
in line when removing the shaft (10) and the rear 
cover assembly (Fig. 3). 

10. Remove the other two bolts (16) (Fig. 2). 

1 1 . Withdraw the shaft and bearing assembly (Fig. 4). 

Refitting 

1 2. Mount the shaft and rear bearing assembly (Fig. 4) 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6E01.6 



Rear Axle - Removable PTO shaft 



^7^/ 



• ") 



1 3. Smear Loctite 542 on two bolts (16) then tighten to 
a torque of 105- 120 Nm. 

1 4. Remove the two guide studs. 

1 5. Smear Loctite 542 on the other two bolts (16) then 
tighten to a torque of 105 - 120 Nm. 

1 6. Top up the oil level of the rear axle housing. 



C. Disassembly and reassembly of 
rear cover 

Remove the rear bearing by carrying out operations 

8 to 1 1 . 

Disassembly 

17. Remove O-ring (19). 

18. Remove snap ring (20). 

1 9. Separate the shaft (1 0) from the bearing assembly. 

20. Remove O-ring (11). 

21 . Remove circlip (7). 

22. Separate the cover (1 2) from the roller bearing (1 5). 

23. Remove snap ring (8). 

24. Extract the roller bearing (15) from the hub (9). 

25. Dismantle : 

- version a : the sealing ring /14\ and the deflector 
(13). 

- version b : the reinforced sealing ring /14AV 

Reassembly 
Version a (Fig. 5) 

26. Using a press and a suitable device, fit the 
deflector (13) against the shoulder of the cover 
(12). 

Note: Assemble in the correct way. 

27. Using a press and a suitable device, fit the sealing 
seal ring /14\ flush with the chamfer of the cover 
(12) with the lip facing towards the bearing (15). 

Version b (Fig. 6) 

Depending on the option, a reinforced sealing ring 
/14A\is fitted in place of the seal /14\and deflector (13). 
Smear Loctite 542 on the exterior of the sealing ring and 
using a suitable device, fit it against the shoulder of the 
cover(12). The double lip should face towards the 
bearing (15). 

28. Reverse operations 17 to 24 and refit the rear 

bearing assembly by carrying out operations 12 to 
15. 




VERSION 



Fig. 5 




VERSION 



Fig. 6 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear Axle - Removable PTO shaft 




6E01.7 



D. Disassembly and reassembly of 
540 or 1000 rpm gear and of front 
bearing 

Disassembly 

To disassemble gears (5) and (6) it is necessary to 
remove : 

- The lift cover by carrying out operations 1 to 11, 
chapter.6 B0 1. 

- The top link support, the driving gear and the 
intermediate shaft by carrying out operations 4 to 7, 
chapter 6 D0 1. A. 

29. In order to gain access to the sensor, remove the 
left cylinder by dismantling the lower fastening and 
disconnecting the supply hose. 

Remove the PTO sensor (Autotronic - Datatronic). 

30. Remove the rear cover assembly by carrying out 
operations 8 to 1 1 . 

31 . Remove the gears (5) and (6). 

32. Extract the bearing (1) and the deflector (2). 

Reassembly 

33. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

34. Smear Loctite 648 on the face of the deflector (2) 
which meets the housing and place it in its hole. 
Position so that the aperture faces upward (Fig. 7). 

35. Fit the roller bearing (1) in the housing abutting on 
the deflector (2). 

36. Lubricate the bushes {3) and (4). 

37. Refit the gears (5) and (6) and screw two guide 
studs against the gear (6). The purpose of this is to 
hold the gears in line (Fig. 3) when refitting the rear 
cover assembly. 

Note: If the bushes (3) and (4) are damaged, 
replace the gears (5) and (6). 

38. Refit the rear cover assembly by carrying out 
operations 12 to 15. 

39. Smear Loctite "Form A gasket 2» (sensor sealing 
or equivalent) on the thread of the PTO sensor. Fit 
and adjust the sensor: 

a) Screw the sensor fully in, without forcing it, so 
that it is in contact with the gear (6). 

b) Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn. 

c) Tighten the nut (18) moderately and connect the 
harness. 

Refit the LH cylinder, reassemble the lower faste- 
ning and reconnect the supply hose. 
Refit the driving gear with the intermediate shaft 
and the top link support. 




40. Carry out operations 9 to 13. chapter 6 D01 
(2 speeds). 

Refit the lift cover. 

41 . Carry out operations 53 to 57 chapter 6 B01 . 

42. Reverse operation 7, chapter 6 B01. 

43. Carry out operations 64 to 69. chapter 6 B01 . 

44. Carry out operations 71.72 and 84, chapter 6 B0 1 . 

45. Top up the oil level of the rear axle housing. 

46. Check the operation of the p.t.o. and its brake. 

47. Check for leaks: 

- of the joint faces (Auxiliary spool valve support, 
top link support. PTO rear cover assembly, lift 
cover) 

- of the hydraulic fittings. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6 E02 Shiftable PTO shaft 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft e E02. 1 



General 



A. Removal and refitting rear cover 



B. Disassembly and reassembly of rear cover 



C. Disassembly and reassembly of 540 and 1000 rpm gear 

and of the front roller bearing of the shaft 7 



D. Adjustment of control cable 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6 E02.2 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




V 



General 



The driven gears (4) and (7) are fitted on the p.t.o. shaft 
(13) situated in the lower rear part of the axle housing. 
These gears constantly engage with the driving com- 
pound gear which is driven by the upper shaft whose 
movement is transmitted by the p.t.o. clutch. 
The p.t.o. shaft is fitted free in the roller bearing /2\and 
is force-fitted in the roller bearing (10) which are fitted 
in the axle housing and in the cover (14) respectively. 
The hub coupler (6) is driven by the splined shaft (13). 
The gears (4) and (7) drive the shaft when the coupler 
(5) is moved towards the front (540 rpm) or the rear 
(1000 rpm). When one of the gear (4) or (7), equipped 
with bushes (19) and (20) respectively, is passive, it 
rotates either on the bush /3\ or on the shaft (13). 
A fork (25) fitted on a selector rail (22) enables speed 
selection (540 or 1000 rpm). 

Sealing is by means of a seal /1 1\ or /1 1 A\ and the CD- 
ring (1 8). The deflector (12) ensures protection against 
foreign materiel. 

Lubrication of gears (4) and (7) 

The two gears are lubricated by the transmission oil. 
The roller bearing /2\ has a sealed face oriented to- 
wards the 540 rpm gear. The gears are lubricated via 
the deflector (1) and the shaft (13) which has an axial 
channel and radial holes. 



Parts list 


0) 


Deflector 


/2\ 


Roller bearing 


/3\ 


Bush 


(4) 


540 rpm gear 


(5) 


Coupler 


(6) 


Hub 


(7) 


1000 rpm gear 


(8) 


Circiip 


0) 


Retainer ring 


(10) 


Roller bearing 


/11\ 


Seal 


/11A\ Reinforced seal 


(12) 


Deflector 


(13) 


PTO shaft 


(14) 


Cover 


(15) 


Screw 


(16) 


Sensor 


(17) 


Nut 


(18) 


O-ring 


(19) 


Bush 


(20) 


Bush 


(21) 


Lever 


(22) 


Selector rail 


(23) 


O-ring 


(24) 


Pad 


(25) 


Fork 


(26) 


Set screw 


(27) 


Pad 


(28) 


Plug 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




6E02.3 




540 rpm 



1000 rpm 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6 E02.4 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




V V 



Exploded 



540 rpm 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




6 E02.5 



A. Removal and refitting of rear cover 
Disassembly 

1 . Partially drain the rear axle housing. 

2. Place the coupler (5) on the gear (7). 

3. Remove two diametrically opposed screws (15) 
(Fig. 1). 

4. Screw two guide studs against the gear (7). The 
purpose of this is to hold the gear (4) and (7) (Fig. 
2), "the hub and the coupler in line when removing 
the shaft (13) and the cover assembly. 

5. Remove the other two bolts (15). 

6. Withdraw the shaft and cover assembly (Fig. 3). 
Discard the O-ring (18). 

Refitting 

7. Replace the O-ring (18). Fit the shaft and cover 
assembly (Fig. 3). 

8. Smear Loctite 542 on two screws (1 5) then tighten 
to a torque of 105 - 1 20 Nm. 

9. Remove the two guide studs. 

10. Smear Loctite 542 on the other two screws (15) 
then tighten to a torque of 105 - 120 Nm. 

1 1 . Top up the oil level of the rear axle housing. 



B. Disassembly and reassembly of 
rear cover 

Remove the rear cover by carrying out operations 

1 to 6. 

Disassembly 

12. Remove O-ring (18). 

13. Remove circlip (8). 

1 4. Separate the cover (1 4) from the roller bearing (10). 

15. Remove the retainer ring (9). 

16. Extract the roller bearing (10) from the shaft (13). 

1 7. Remove : 

- Version a : the seal /1 1\ and the denector (12). 

- Version b : the reinforced seal /11AV 




Fig. 1 



KJJU 




Fig. 2 




Fig. 3 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6 E02.6 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




V V 



Reassembly 

Version a (Fig. 4) 

18. Using a press and a suitable device, fit the 
deflector (12) against the shoulder of the cover 
(14). 

Note: Assemble in the correct direction. 

1 9. Using a press and a suitable device, fit the seal /1 1\ 
flush with the chamfer of the cover (14) with the lip 
facing towards the roller bearing (10). 

Version b (Fig. 5) 

Depending on the option, a reinforced seal /11A\ is 
fitted in place of the seal /11\ and deflector (12). 
Smear Loctite 542 on the exterior of the seal and using 
a suitable device, fit it against the shoulder of the cover 
(14) (Fig. 12). The double lip should face towards the 
roller cover (10). 

20. Reverse operations 12 to 16 and refit the rear cover 
by carrying out operations 7 to 10. 




VERSION : a 



Fig. 4 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




6E02.7 



C. Disassembly and reassembly of 540 
and 1000 rpm gears and of the front 
roller bearing of the shaft 

Disassembly 

To disassemble gears (4) and (7) it is necessary to 
remove: 

- the lift cover by carrying out operations 1 to 11, 
chapter 6 B01 . 

- the top link support and the driving gear by carrying 
out operations 63 to 76, chapter 6 D01 . 

21 . in order to gain access to the sensor, remove the 
left-hand lift cylinder by removing the lower faste- 
ning and disconnecting the supply hose. Remove 
the sensor (Autotronic - Datatronic). 

22. Unscrew the set screw (26). 

23. Remove the selector rail (22) with the lever (21) 
towards the left-hand side of the tractor. Discard 
the O-ring (23). 

Note: The plug (28) remains in the housing. 

24. Withdraw the fork (25) with the pads (24) and (27), 
taking care not to drop them into the housing. 

25. Remove the rear cover assembly by carrying out 
operations 1 to 6. 

26. Remove the hub (6) with the coupler (5), the gears 
(4) and (7) and the bush /3V 

27. Extract the roller bearing /2\and the deflector (1). 

Reassembly 

28. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

29. Smear Loctite 648 on the face of the deflector (1) 
which meets the housing and place it in its hole. 
Position the aperture upwards (Fig. 6). 

30. Fit the roller bearing /2\ in the housing against 
deflector (1) (Fig. 6). 

Note: Place the sealed part of the roller bearing 
towards the gear (4). 

31. Using a jet of compressed air, ensure that the 
channel of the shaft (13) is not obstructed. Lubri- 
cate bushes (19) and (20). Refit the gears (4) and 
(7), the coupler (5) with the hub (6), the bush /3\with 
the toothed opening facing towards the rear of the 
tractor (Fig. 7), 

Note: If the bushes (19) and (20) are damaged, 
replace the gears (4) and (7), 

32. Engage the coupler (5) with the gear (7). Screw two 
guide studs against the gear (7). The purpose of 
this is to hold the gears in line (Fig. 2). when refitting 
the rear bearing assembly. 




33. Refit the rear cover assembly by carrying out 
operations 7 to 10. 

34. Smear Loctite 577 (sensor sealing or equivalents 
on the thread of the PTO sensor (16). Fit and adjust 
the sensor: 

a) Without forcing screw the sensor in contact with 
the gear (7). 

b) Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn. 

c) Tighten the nut (1 7) moderately and connect the 
harness. 

35. Refit the fork (25) with the pads (24) and (27). helo 
on the fork by two spots of miscible grease (Amber 
Technical or equivalent). 

36. Fit a new O-ring (23). Fit the selector rail (22) with 
(ever (21). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6 E02.8 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




V 



J 



37. Smear Loctite 221 on the screw (26). Fit and 
tighten. Manually check the operation of the fork. 
Refit the left-hand lift cylinder. Reassemble the 
lower fastening and reconnect the supply hose. 

38. Refit the driving gear and the top link support. 
Carry out operations 82 to 92, chapter 6 D01 . 

39. Refit the lift cover. Carry out operations 53 to 57, 
chapter 6 B01. 

40. Reverse operation 7, chapter 6 B01 . 

41. Carry out" operations 64 to 69, 71, 72 and 84, 
chapter 6 B0 1. 

42. Adjust the p.t.o. control (4 speeds), carry out 
operations 127 and 132 to 137, chapter 6D01. 

43. Adjust the shiftable p.t.o. control, carry out opera- 
tions 47 and 52 to 58, section D. 

44. Top up the oil level of the rear axle housing. 

45. Check the operation of the PTO and its brake. 

46. Check for leaks: 

- of the joint faces (spool valve support, 3rd point 

support, PTO rear cover assembly, lift cover) 

- of the hydraulic fittings. 

Note: On tractors equipped with a shiftable 
PTO, there are two types of control: 

a) internal control via cable (Figs. 8 and 9). 

b) external control (depending on option) 
(Figs. 10 and 11). 




* Jl 


IB 


Fig. 8 




o l o / 


1°/ 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Rear Axle - Shiftable PTO shaft 




6E02.9 



D. Adjustment of control cable 

Note: Operations 48 to 51 must be carried out when 
replacing the control cable. 

47. Set the LMever to the «1000 rpm» position. 

48. Screw the clevis (1) until it reaches the end of the 
threaded part of the cable (6) {Fig. 12). 

49. Fit the clevis (1) on the U-rod with the clip (7). 
Tighten the nut (2), 

50. Adjust the outer cable stop (5), with the nut (3) 
reaching the end of the threaded part. 

51. Tighten the nut (4), 

Note: Check that the cable is not constrained. 

52. Set the iever V to the « 1 000 rpm- position (Fig . 1 3). 

53. Screw the clevis (6) until it reaches the threaded 
part of the cable (4). 

54. Temporarily fit the clevis (6) on the lever V with the 
Clip (7). 

55. Adjust the outer cable stop (1). ensuring that the 
lever V is stii! in the " 1000 rpm» position. 

56. Tighten the nuts (2) and (3). 

57. Set the adjustment with the clevis (6), tighten the 
nut {5). 

Note: After tightening, check that the cable is 
not subject to any constraint in the 1000 rpm 
and 540 rpm positions. 

58. Check the operation of the control in the «540 rpm » 
position. 



Position 



540 rpm 1000 rpm 




Position 
T 540 rpm 
V 



Fig. 13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 




6F01.1 



6 F0 1 Ground speed Power take-off 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Disassembly of power take-off (2WD version) 



B. Reassembly of power take-off (2WD version) 



C. Disassembly of power take-off (4WD version) 



11 



D. Reassembly of power take-off (4WD version) 



12 



E. Adjustment of control 



13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6F01.2 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 



v ■-/ 



General 



Parts list 



3000/3100 series tractors can be equipped with a 
ground speed power take-off . 

Unlike the independent p.t.o. system or the p.t.o. sys- 
tem which depends on the engine speed, the ground 
speed p.t.o. is driven by the driving pinion, and the 
speed of the'p.t.o. shaft is proportional to the speed of 
the tractor. 



Operation 



The bevel drive pinion comprises a gear (31) which 
constantly engages either with the pinion (16) (2WD - 
page 4) or with the transfer gear (33) (4WD - page 3). 
The shaft (18) (2WD) or the shaft (32) (4WD) can be 
made to rotate with the shaft (8) by means of the coupler 
(10). The pinion (3) mounted at the end of the shaft (8) 
drives the 540 rpm gear of the rear power take-off shaft. 

The coupler (10) is moved by a finger fixed on a pin 
mounted at the bottom left of the rear axle housing and 
controlled by a connecting rod and a cable activated 
by a lever in the cab. 



2WD 



4WD 



(1) Plug 

(2) Circlip 

(3) Pinion 

(4) Circlip 

(5) Ball bearing 

(6) Circlip 

(7) Circlip 

(8) Shaft 

(9) Circlip 

(10) Coupler 

(11) Screw 

(12) Cover 

(13) Needle roller bearing 

(14) Bearing cup 

(15) Bearingcone 

(16) Gear 

(17) Circlip 

(18) 2WD shaft 

(19) Bearing cone 

(20) Bearing cup 
[21] Shim(s) 

(22) Spacer 

(23) Circlip 

(24) Plug 

(25) Double pin 

(26) Double pin 

(27) Sleeve 

(28) Sleeve 

(29) Shaft 

(30) Circlip 

(31) Gear 

(32) 4WD shaft 

(33) Transfer gear 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3 
O 

i. 

a> 

3 

1 




|< 



2 

CD 

o 

CO 

3 



CD 

3 



CO 



CO 

o 

§ 

— I 

o 
o 

CO 
CO 

i 

o 

3 

CO 



HI 



www.maskinisten.net 




6F01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 



* 



j 



General arrangement 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 




6F01.5 



Exploded diagram 



4WDG.S. PTO. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6F01.6 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 




V V 



Exploded diagram 



2WD G.S. PTO 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 




6F01.7 



A. Disassembly of power take-off 
(2WD version) 

1 . Immobilise the tractor. Drain the transmission oil. 

2. Remove the screws (11)- 

3. Remove the cover (12). 

Note: Save the spring (3) (Fig. 1). 

4. Remove the retaining tube (4) for the control pivot 
(7) and the locking plunger (2) (Fig. 1). 

5. Disconnect the control cable {1) and remove the 
control pivot (7) (Fig. 2). 

Note: The finger (1) is force-fitted in the control 
pivot (Fig. 1). 

6. Remove the O-ring (5) (Fig. 1). 

7. Remove the drawbar. 

8. Extract the plug (1) (Fig. 3). 

9. Remove the circlip (2). 

10. Withdraw the pinion (3) (Fig, 4). 






Fig. 2 




Fig. 4 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6F01.8 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 



V v 



11. Remove the circlip (4) with long-nose pliers 
(Fig. 5). 

1 2. Withdraw the shaft (8) with the ball bearing (5), then 
remove the coupler (10). 

Note: If it is unnecessary to remove the circlip 
(7), leave it in the housing. 

13. Remove the circlips (6) and (9). 

1 4. Extract the ball bearing (5) with a press. 

1 5. Extract the plug (24). 

16. Remove the circlip (23) and the spacer (22). 

17. Remove the shims [21]. 

18. Remove the cup{20). 

19. Withdraw the shaft (18) assembled with the 
bearing cone (19) and the circlip (17), while hol- 
ding the gear (16). 

20. Remove the gear (16) and the bearing cone (15). 

21 . Extract the cone(19) and remove the circlip (17) 
from the shaft (18). 

Note: Keep the cones and the cups paired if 

they are to be reused. 

The roller bearing (13) is pressed in to the shaft 

(18). 

22. Extract the cup (14) with a suitable extractor. 

// removing the gear (31) it is necessary to remove 
the right-hand hydraulic cover. 

23. Immobilise the tractor. 

24. Apply the handbrake. 

25. Lift the tractor with a jack. 

26. Put a prop in position. 

27. Remove the wheel. 

28. Remove the right hydraulic cover. 

Carry out operations 2 to 14, chapter 8101 . 




Tractors with creeper gears 

34. Remove the fork, the sleeve assembly, the con- 
necting shaft and the coupler. Carry out operations 
3 to 8 in chapter 5D01. A. 

35. Carry out operations 13 to 16 in chapter 5D01.A. 

36. Remove the circlip (30). 

37. Remove the gear (31). 



Tractors without creeper gears 

29. Drive the double pins (25) and (26) from the 
sleeves (27) and (28) 

30. Slide the sleeves towards one another on the shaft 
(29). 

31 . Detach the shaft and sleeve assembly 

32. Remove the circlip (30). 

33. Detach the gear (31). 

Note: On 2WD tractors (without G.S. PTO) the 
gear (31) is omitted but the circlip (30) must 
remain in place. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 




6F01.9 



B. Reassembly of power take-off 
(2WD version) 

38. Clean and check the parts, replacing any which 

are defective. 
If carrying out work on the gears (31). 
Tractors with creeper gears 

39- Refit the gear (31). 

40. Refit the circlip (30). 

41. Reattach the fork, the sleeve assembly, the con- 
necting shaft and the coupler. Carry out operations 
22 to 31 in chapter 5D01 .A, 

Tractors without creeper gears 

42. Refit the gear (31). 

43. Refit the circlip (30). 

44. Refit the assembly (connecting shaft and sieeves), 
then position the sleeves (27) and (28) on the shaft 
(29). 

45. Mount the double pins (26) and (25) on the sleeves. 
Note: Position the grooved end of the sleeve 
(28) towards the rear of the tractor (Fig. 6). 
Replace the pins. The long pin is fitted into the 
sleeve (27). 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

46. If necessary, refit the right hydraulic cover. 
Carry out operations 15 to 27, chapter 8101. 

47. Push the cup (14) as far as it will go against the 
shoulder of the housing. 

48- Push the bearing cone (19) on the shaft (18) as far 
as it will go against the shoulder using a press and 
a suitable device, then position the circlip (17). 

49. Check that the needle roller bearing (13)is present. 




50. In order to be able to turn the shaft to carry out 
spacing J1 . do not mount the gear (16). 
Position the cone(1 5). Fit the shaft (18) assembled 
with the cone (19) and the circlip (17). 

51. Refit the cup (20), the spacer{22) and the circlip 

(23). 

Note: To obtain correct shimming, ensure that 

the spacer moves freely in the bore of the 

housing. 

52. Carry out shimming on the shaft (18) so as to 
obtain: 

J1 =0 to +0.10 

53. Place the tip of the dial gauge against the spacer 
(22) (Fig. 7). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6F01.10 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 



V V 



54. Through the opening in the cover (12), puil on the 
shaft, turning it back and forth, in order to seat the 
bearing cones correctly in the cups. 

55. Set the dial gauge to zero. 

56. Repeat the operation while pushing the shaft. 

57. Select the necessary thickness of shims to provide 
J1. 

58. Remove the circlip (23) and the spacer (22). 
Withdraw the shaft (18) assembled with the 
bearing cone (19) and the circlip (17) whiie holding 
the bearing cone (15). Refit the gear(16) the shaft 
(18) and the cup (20). 

59. Apply two spots of grease to the shims [21] se- 
lected in operation 57 and place them against the 
cup (20). 

60. Fit the spacer (22) and the circlip (23). 

61 . Clean the plug (24) and its recess in the housing. 

62. Smear the edge of the plug with Loctite 542, then 
push it in. 

63. Place the coupler (10) on the shaft (18). 

Note: Position the small shoulder E towards the 
shaft (18) (Fig. 8). 

64. Fit the circlips (6) and (9) on the shaft (8). 

65. Using suitable equipment, press the ball bearing 
(5) on to the shaft (8), until it contacts the circlip (6). 

66. Check that the circlip (7) is present. 

67. Mount the assembled shaft (8) in the housing 
(Fig. 9). 

68. Mount the circlip (4). 

69. Fit the pinion (3). 

70. Mount the circlip (2) (Fig. 10). 

71. Check the movement of the coupler(10) through 
the opening in the cover (12). 

72. Clean the plug (1) and the bore in the housing. 

73. Smear the plug with Loctite 542, then push it in so 
that it is slightly recessed from the face of the 
housing. 

74. Mount the control pivot (7) (equipped with a new O- 
ring (5), placing the finger (1) in the groove of the 
coupler (10) (Fig. 1). 

75. Clean and degrease the joint faces {cover and 
housing). 

76. Smear the joint face of the cover with a sealing 
compound (Master Joint 510 or equivalent). 

77. Screw two guide studs in opposite positions into 
the housing. 

78. Mount the retaining tube (4) for the control pivot, 
the locking plunger (2) and the spring (3) (Fig. 1 ). 

79. Refit the cover (12). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 




6F01.11 



80 Remove the guide studs. Fit and tighten the screws 
to a torque of 130 - 1 70 Nm. 

81 - Reconnect the G.S. PTO control cable (1) (Fig. 2). 

82. Adjust the control. 

Carry out operations 1 14 to 120. 

If the right hand hydraulic cover has been removed, 
carry out operations 83 to 85. 

83. Lift-the tractor with a trolley jack. 

84. Refit the wheel Remove the prop and ihe jack. 

85. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm. 

86. Replenish transmission oil. 

87. Refit the drawbar. (For tractors equipped with an 
automatic hook, check its operation. If adjustment 
should prove to be necessary, carry out operations 
1 and 6 to 19, chapter 6M01.). 

88- Check the operation of the GSPTO. 
89. Check for leaks: 

. at the joint faces 

. at the cover under the rear axle housing. 

. at the right hydraulic cover (if removed) 

. at the hydraulic connectors 



91. Lift the tractor with a jack. Put a prop in position. 
Remove the wheel. Remove the right hydraulic cover. 

92. Carry out operations 2 to 14, chapter 8101. 

Tractors without creeper gears 

93. Drive the double pins (25) and (26) from the 
sleeves (27) and (28). 

Note: If the double pins are not accessible, carry 
out operations 9 to 12, chapter 5D01.A. 

94. Slide the sleeves towards one another on the shaft 
(29). 

95. Remove the assembly (shaft and sleeves). 

96. Remove the circlip (30) and the gear (31). 

Tractors with creeper gears 

97. Remove the fork, the sleeve assembly, the connec- 
ting shaft and the coupler. Carry out operations 3 to 
8 and 13 to 16. chapter 5D01.A. 

98. Remove the circlip (30) and the gear (31). 



C. Disassembly of power take-off 
(4WD version) 

90. Carry out operations 1 to 14. 

Should it prove necessary to carry out work on the 
4WD clutch assembly, on the bearing cones and 
cups, on the shaft and the needle roller bearing, 
refer to chapter 7A01 . 

If removing the gear (31) it is necessary to remove 
the right hand hydraulic cover. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6F01.12 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 



V 



D. Reassembly of power take-off 
(4WD version) 

99. Clean and check the parts, replacing any which 
are defective. 

If carrying out work on the gear (31). 
Tractors with creeper gears 

100. Refit the gear (31) and refit the circlip (30). 

101 .Refit the fork, the sleeve assembly, the connec- 
ting shaft and the coupler. Carry out operations 22 
to 31 in chapter 5D01 .A. 

Tractors without creeper gears 

102. Refit the gear (31) and refit the circlip (30). 

103. Refit the assembly {connecting shaft and slee- 
ves), then position the sleeves (27) and (28) on the 
shaft (29). 

104. Fit two new double pins (25) and (26) on the 
sleeves. 

Note : Position the grooved end of the sleeve 
(28) towards the rear of the tractor (Fig. 1 1). 
The long double pin is fitted in to the sleeve 
(27). 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

105. If necessary, refit the right hand hydraulic cover. 
Carry out operations 15 to 27, chapter 8101 . 
If the 4WD clutch assembly, the bearing cones 
and cups, the shaft and the needle roller bea- 
ring have been disassembled, refer to chapter 
7A01 for reassembly. 

If necessary, carry out operations 9 to 12, 
chapter 5D01 .A in reverse. 

106. Place the coupler (10) on the shaft (32). 

Note : Position the small shoulder E towards 
the shaft (32) (Fig. 12). 

1 07, Carry out operations 64 to 82. 

If the right hand hydraulic cover has been removed, 
carry out operations 83 to 85. 

1 08. Carry out operations 86 to 88. 
109 Check for leaks: 

. at the joint face of the cover under the rear axle 
housing 

. at the right hydraulic cover (if removed) 
. at the hydraulic connectors. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V / 



Rear Axle - GSPTO 




6F01.13 



E. Adjustments of control 

Note: Carry out operations 110 to 113 when repla- 
cing the control cable. 

110. Screw the clevis (1 ) on to the end of the threaded 
part of the cable (7) (Fig. 13). 

111. Mount the clevis (1) on the selector lever U with 
the clip (8). Tighten the nut (2) (Fig. 13). 

1 1 2. With the inner cable (7) extended the outer cable 
end (5) (Fig. 1 3) is to be positionned in support (6) 
so that selector lever U has a neutral dimension of 
105 mm between the clevis hole (1) and the 
support (6). 

1 1 3. Tighten the nut (4). 

Note: Check that the cable is not restricted. 

114. Place the selector lever U in the «engaged» 
oosition (Fig. 14). 

115. Place the control pivot V in the ..engaged- 
oosition (Fig. 15), 

Note: Make sure that the control pivot V is fully 
engaged. 

1 1 6. Screw the clevis (6) on to the threaded part of the 
cable (4) (Fig. 15). 

1 1 7. Fit the clevis (6) on control pivot V with the clip (S). 
Tighten the nut (7). 

1 18. Adjust the outer cable stop (1) with the nut (3), 
ensuring that the control pivot V is still in the 
■engaged- position. 

119. Tighten the nut (2). 

Note: After tightening, make sure that the 
cable operates freely to the "disengaged" and 
«engaged» positions (Fig. 15). 
1 20 Check the operation of the control in the ■■disen- 
gaged" position. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Rear axle - PTO dutch 




6G01.1 



6 G0 1 Power take-off clutch 



CONTENTS 



General . 



Operation . 



A. Removal and refitting of PTO clutch 
(2-speed version) 



B. Removal and refitting of PTO clutch 
(4-speed version) 



C. Disassembly and reassembly of clutch . 
(Valeo make) 



3 



D. Disassembly and reassembly of clutch . 
(M.F. make) 



10 



E. Service toot 



12 



Issuel 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6G01.2 



Rear axle - PTO dutch 



V 



General 



Operation 



The power-take-off clutch, fitted at the front of the rear 
axle housing, is driven by a shaft traversing the primary 
shaft of the gearbox, the speedshift. the reverse shuttle 
and the layshaft. This shaft is connected via splines to 
a sleeve fixed on the engine flywheel. 

The clutch assembly, Valeo version, is composed of the 
following principal components : 

- A housing (9) supported by two ball bearings (2) and 
(7) separated by a sleeve (4) centred in a hole in the 
centre housing. The housing contains a shaft 
supported by the ball bearing (23) in the hub (24). 

- A piston (11) sliding inside the housing. 

- A set of inner plates (16) and outer plates (15). 

- A driving hub (24). 

- A cover (20). 

The housing has exterior helical teeth which drive the 
gear of the hydraulic pump. The roller bearings and the 
plates are lubricated. 

A new clutch made by MF operating in an identical 
manner is now fitted on 3000 and 3100 tractors. 
The clutch has 3, 4 or 5 plates, depending on the 
version. 



PTO engagement 

The clutch is fed by the 1 7 bar hydraulic circuit through 
the PTO solenoid valve situated on the right side cover. 
The oil enters the support housing (9) through channels 
a, bandc. it pushes the piston (11) which presses the 
outer plates (1 5) against the inner plates (16). The outer 
plates (15) have lugs which are driven by the clutch 
housing (17) and the inner plates (16) drive the hub 
(24), which is splined to the intermediate shaft which is 
in turn splined to the PTO compound gear. At the same 
time the pressure which was acting on the PTO brake 
piston is cut off, enabling the 540 and 1000 rpm gears 
to turn freely. When the clutch is engaged, the plates 
are cooled and lubricated. 

PTO braking 

When the supply is cut off. the scrtng pusnes the piston 
against the housing (9). 

At the same time, the solenoid vaive for ;ne PTO brake 
directs the oil to the PTO brake s;;uatec in the top link 
support. The pressure acts on a oiston v/nich supports 
the cup on the rear taper roller cearing. progressively 
stopping the driving gear. 



Version without PTO (Fig. 1) 

On tractors without PTO, an assembly comprising a 
driving gear (1) and sleeve (2) (see diagram) replaces 
the PTO clutch. The sleeve is smeared with Loctite 648 
and is inserted in the gear by a press, 

On the right cover, the solenoid valves of the PTO and 
oi the PTO brake are replaced with plugs. 

The PTO brake feeder tube is absent. 

The PTO speed sensor is replaced with a plug. 

The top link support has 2 plugs mounted on the 
lubrication and brake ducts of the PTO 

A cover plate (fitted using Loctite 510 or equivalent) 
replaces the rear cover assembly. 

The lubrication tube of the gear driving the PTO is 
absenl. A right-angled connector replaces the T-con- 
nector. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




y •/ 



3000/ 31 00 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 




6G01.3 



General arrangement of Valeo clutch 




/?.//// / / - zzzSZZ 



/ AW*? / / /\+\/ / /A' 



sBHn 




(1) Circlip 

(2) Bail bearing 

(3) O-ring 

(4) Sleeve 
/5\ Seat rings 

(6) O-ring ' 

(7) Ball bearing 
! (8) Rivet 

! (9) Clutch housing 

! (10) O-ring 



(11) 


Piston 


(12) 


Valve 


(13) 


Belleville washer 


(14) 


Retainer 


(15) 


Outer drive plate 


(16) 


inner driven plate 


(17) 


Clutch housing 


(18) 


Circlip 


(19) 


Retaining ring 


(20) 


Cover 



(21) 


Spring 


(22) 


Spring seat 


(23) 


Ball bearing 


(24) 


Hub 


(25) 


Screw 


(26) 


Washer 


(27) 


O-ring 


(28) 


Ball 



Fig. 2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




6G01.4 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 




/ 



Exploded view - Vaieo clutch 




Fig. 3 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 




6G01.5 



Fig. 4 



General arrangement of M.F. clutch 




© A 



(1) 
(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
/5\ 
(6) 
(7) 
(8) 

0) 
(10) 

(11) 
(12) 



Circlip 

Ball bearing 

0-ring 

Sleeve 

Seal rings 

O-ring 

Ball bearing 

Valve 

Support housing 

Piston 

O-ring 

Belleville washer 



(13) 
(14) 



(15) 
(16) 
(17) 



(18) 



Retainer 
Outer plate 
A : 3-plate clutch 
B : 4-plate clutch 
C : 5-plate clutch 
Clutch housing 
Bolt 

Inner plate 
A : 3-plate clutch 
B : 4-plate clutch 
C : 5-plate clutcn 
Spring 



(19 

(20 

(21 

(22 

(23 

(24 

(25 

(26 

(27! 

(28 

{29 

(30 



Soring seat 

Securing ring 

Hub 

Ball bearing 

Washer 

Screw 

O-ring 

O-ring 

Sleeve 

Soacer. 3- and 4-plate type 

Spacer. 3-oiate type 

Pins 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




6G01.6 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 




Exploded view - M.F. clutch 



@© 




Fig. 5 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^V 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 




6G01.7 



A . Removal and refitting of PTO 
clutch (2-speed version) 

Removal 

1 . Remove the left side cover. Carry out operations 
1 to 6, chapter 8 I02. 

2. Remove the top link support, the compound gear 
and the intermediate shaft. Carry out operations 1 
to^r chapter 6 D01. 

3. Remove the retaining screw (3) of the clutch {1). 
Remove the clutch and the spring (5) (Fig. 6). 

Refitting 

4. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

5. Check that the O-rings (2) and (4) (Fig. 6) have not 
deteriorated. 

6. Place the spring (5) (Fig. 6) in the hollow clutch 
shaft and refit the clutch, pushing it as far as 
possible with a lever (Fig. 7) so as to compress the 
spring in order to fit the screw (3) (Fig. 6). 

7. Clean the screw and smear it with Loctite 221 and 
tighten it with a ring spanner (Fig. 6). 

8. Refit the intermediate shaft, the compound gear 
and the top link support. Carry out operations 9 to 
18, chapter 6 D01. 

9. Replace the left cover. Carry out operations 7 to 19, 
chapter 8 I02. 

10. Check the operation of the PTO clutch, the PTO 
brake and of the lift. 

1 1 . Check for leaks: 

- at the joint faces (spool valve support, top link 
support, left side cover) 

- at the hydraulic connectors. 




B. Removal and refitting of PTO 
clutch (4- speed version) 

Removal 

1 2. Remove the left side cover. 

Carry out operations 1 to 6, chapter 8 I02. 
Note: A new assembly has been introduced 
without intermediate shaft sleeve (clutch ou- 
tlet) on 3000 tractors as of serial number 
N342012. 

Serial numbers of tractors equipped with old 
assembly after introduction: N342017, 
N34S018, N342022, N342026, N348023. 
For tractors equipped with old assembly, refer 
to workshop manual 1646640M1 



13. Remove the top link support, the compound gear 
and the intermediate shaft. Carry out operations 60 
to 68 and 72 to 78. chapter 6 D01. 

14. Remove the retaining screw (3) of the clutch (1). 
Remove the clutch and the spring (5) (Fig. 6). 

Refitting 

1 5. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

1 6. Check that the O-nngs (2) and (4) (Fig. 6) have not 
deteriorated. 

17. Place the spring (5) (Fig. 6 ) in hollow clutch shaft 
and refit the clutch, pushing it as far as possible 
with a lever (Fig . 7) so as to compress the spring in 
order to fit the screw (3) (Fig. 6). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskimsten.ne 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




v / 



6G01.8 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 



1 8. Clean the screw and smear it with Loctite 221 and 
tighten it with a ring spanner (Fig. 6). 

19. Refit the intermediate shaft, the compound gear 
and the top link support. Carry out operations 80 to 
82 and 85 to 98, chapter 6 D01. 

20. Replace the left cover. Carry out operations 7 to 19. 
chapter 8 102. 

21 . Check the operation of the clutch, the PTO brake 
and of the hydraulic lift. 

22. Check for leaks : 

- at the joint faces (spool valve support, top link 
support, left side cover) 

- at the hydraulic connectors. 

C. Disassembly and reassembly 
of clutch (Valeo make) 

Disassembly 

23. Place the clutch housing (9) in a vice (Fig. 8). 

24. Remove the retaining ring (19) [Fig. 8) with vice 
grips. 

25. Remove the cover (20) with the circlip (18). the 
outer plates (1 5) and the inner plates (16) (page 4). 

26. Remove the O-rings (3) and (6). 

27. Remove the circlip (1). 

28. Extract the ball bearings (2) and (7) with the sleeve 
(4) (Fig. 9). Remove the sealing rings /5V 

29. Hold the spring (21) with a locally manufactured 
tool (Fig. 10). For tool see page 12. 

30. Remove the screw (25) and the washer (26). 

31. Remove the hub (24), the spring seat (22). the 
spring (21), the retainer (14) and the Belleville 
washer (13). 

32. Extract the ball bearing (23). 

33. Take out the piston (11). 

34. Remove the O-rings (10) and (27). 

Reassembly 

Note: The valves (12) are fitted in the piston (11) 

and the ball (28) in the support housing (9). 

The support and clutch (17) are fastened together 

by rivets (8). 

35. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 





Fig. 9 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 



6G01.9 



36. Using a suitable device and a press, push the ball 
bearing (7) in as far as the shoulder (Fig. 1 1 ). 

37. Place the seal rings /5\ in their grooves. Ensure that 
they turn freely. 

38. Slide the sleeve (4) over the rings, taking care not 
to damage them. 

Note: Position the larger diameter end of the 
sleeve towards the ball bearing (7). 

39. Using a suitable device and a press, push the ball 
bearing (2) in until it meets the shoulder of the 
support (9) (Fig. 12). 

40. Fitthe circlip (1). 

41 . Replace and lubricate the O-rings (10) and (27). 

42. Lubricate the hole of the support housing (9) and 
the piston (11) and insert into the housing with a 
plastic mallet. 

43. Fit the bali bearing (23) in the hub (24). 

44. Refit the Belleville washer (1 3), the retainer (14), the 
spring (21). the spring seat (22) and the hub (24). 

45. Compress the spring (21) with the tool (Fig. 10) 
(see section E). Fit the washer (26) and tighten the 
screw (25) smeared with Loctite 242 to a torque of 
24 - 28 Nm. 

Note : Take care not to obstruct the lubricating 
hole with Loctite. 

46. Place the outer plates and the inner plates on the 
hub (24). 

Note: The clutch is equipped with 5 inner plates 
and 6 outer plates. Check that the plates slide 
freely on the hub. 

47. Fit the cover (20) with the circlip (18). 





Fig. 12 ! 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6G01.10 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 



V / 



48. Fit the retaining ring (19). 

Note : The retaining ring must be fitted between 
the cover (20) and the circlip (18) (Fig. 13). After 
fitting, benti back the end of the retaining ring 
(19) (Fig. 14). 

49. Manually check that the inner plates and outer 
plates do not bind together. 

50. Lubricate and fit the O-rings (3) and (6). 
Note :The O-rings have different diameters. 



D. Disassembly and reassembly of 

clutch (M.F. make) 

Disassembly 

51 . Remove the bolts (16). 

52. Remove the clutch housing (15), the inner plates 
(17) and the outer plates (14). 

Note: The number of inner plates and outer 
plates varies according to the type of tractor. 
Assembly A : 3 inner plates, 3 outer plates and 

2 spacers (28) and (29) for 3050 - 

3060 - 3065 tractors. 
Assembly B : 4 inner plates, 4 outer plates and 

1 spacer (28) for 3070, 3080-3095. 
Assembly C : 5 inner plates, 5 outer plates for 

3115, 3125, 3120, 3140 tractors. 

53. Place the support housing (9) in a vice. 

54. Remove th§ O-rings (3) and (6). 

55. Remove th§ circlip (1). 

56. E/tract the ball bearing (2) with the sleeve (4) 
(Fig, 15). 

57. Remove th§ seal rings /5\(Fsg. 20). Extract the ball 
bearing (7) (Fig. 16). 

58. Hold the spring (18) with the aid of a locally made 
tool (Fig. 17), For toot see page 12. 

59. Remove the screws (24) and take off the washer 
(23) (Fig. )7), Gradually decompress the spring 
with the tool. 

60. Remove th e hub (21), the spring seat (19). the 
spring (18), the retainer (13) and the Belleville 
washer (12). 

6 1 . Remove the securing ring (20), 

62. E/.tract the ball bearing (22). 

63. Take out the piston (10). 

64 Remove the O-rings (11). (25) and (26). 




Fig. 14 




Fig. 1 5 




Fig. 16 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 




6G01.11 



Reassembly 

Note: The valve (8) is fitted in the support housing 
(9). 

The sleeve (27), smeared with Loctite 648 (Fig. 18) is 
fitted with a press. If disassembly proves necessa- 
ry, check when reassembling that the channel is not 
obstructed with Loctite. 

Two pins (30) are fitted in the support housing (9) 5 
mm from the face (Fig. 19). 

65. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

66. Using a suitable device and a press, push the ball 
bearing (7) in until it meets the shoulder. 

67. Place the seal rings /5\ in their grooves and join up 
the ends (Fig. 20). Ensure that they turn freely. 

68. Slide the sleeve (4) on to the seal rings, taking care 
not to damage them. 

Note: Position the larger diameter end of the 
sleeve towards the ball bearing (7). 






Fig. 19 



Fig. 18 




Fig. 20 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




•/ / 



6G01.12 



Rear axle - PTO clutch 



69. Using a suitable device and a press, push the ball 
bearing (2) in until it meets the shoulder of the 
support housing (9) (Fig. 21). 

70. Fit the circlip<1). 

71. Replace and lubricate the O-rings (11), (25) and 
(26). 

72. Lubricate the sleeve (27) and the piston (10) and 
insert into thehousing with a plastic mallet (Fig. 22). 

73. Using-a suitable device and a press, insert the ball 
bearing (22) into the hub (21). Fit the securing ring 
(20), 

74. Refit the Belleville washer (12), the support (13). the 
spring (18), the spring seat (19) and the hub (21). 

75. Compress the spring (18) with the tool (Fig. 17). 
Mount the washer (23) and tighten the screw (24) 
smeared with Loctite 242 to a torque of 24 - 28 Nm. 

76. Place the spacers, the outer plates and the inner 
plates (according to the type) on the hub (21). 

77. Position the clutch housing (15) on the two Dins 
(30). Fit the bolts (16) lightly smeared with Loctite 
542 and tighten them to a torque of 24 - 28 Nm. 

78. Manually check that the inner plates and outer 
plates do not bind together. 

79. Lubricate and fit the O-rings (3) and (6). 
Note : The O-rings have different diameters. 



E. Service tool 



Toot to be made locally. 




Fig. 21 




Fig, 22 




Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 




6101.1 



6101 Handbrake 



CONTENTS 



General 



Operation 



A. Disassembly 



B. Reassembly 



C. Fitting and adjustment of control 



Issue 1 



Novembar 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6101.2 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 



•/ / 



General 



The handbrake assembly is fitted on the bevel drive 
pinion. It consists of a mechanism placed between two 
friction discs which are driven by the bevel drive pinion 
via splines. 

The mechanism comprises two cast iron plates held by 
springs and separated by balls housed in cams. 



Operation 



When the handbrake lever in the cab is pulled, the cam 
(14) is moved via the pin (20). The cam pushes the 
actuator lever (13) which causes the plates of the 
mechanism (31) to rotate and move apart. The discs 
(30) are thus compressed between the moving plates. 
the closing plate (24) and the supporting plate (29). 
preventing the bevel drive pinion from rotating. 

When the handbrake lever is released, the spring (17) 
moves the cam (14) to the rest position and the mecha- 
nism is closed by its springs. 



Parts list 


(1) 


Circtip 


(2) 


Pinion 


(3) 


Stud 


(4) 


Nut 


/5\ 


Plate 


(6) 


Pin 


(7) 


Clevis 


(8) 


Pin 


(9) 


Cotter pin 


(10) 


Left cover 


(11) 


Plug 


(12) 


Seal Ring 


(13) 


Actuator lever 


(14) 


Cam 


(15) 


Circlip 


(16) 


Finger 


(17) 


Spring 


(18) 


Dowel 


(19) 


Seal ring 


(20) 


Control shaft 


(21) 


Retainer ring 


(22) 


Washer 


(23) 


Finger 


(24) 


Closing plate 


(25) 


Screw 


(26) 


Bevel drive pinion 


[271 


Shim(s) 


(28) 


Screw 


(29) 


Supporting plate 


(30) 


Discs 


(31) 


Mechanism 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Rear Axle - Handbrake 



6101.3 



Assembly 



W 1 l 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




6101.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 




v •/ 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 




6101.5 



A. Disassembly 



1. 

2. 



3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 

7. 



Drain the rear axle housing. 
Block: 

- the front wheels of the tractor 

- between the engine frame and the front axle 
(Fig. 1). 

Raise the tractor with a jack. 

Place props in position. 

Remove the rear wheels. 

Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover. Carry out 

operations 2 to 14, chapter 8 101 . 

Remove the left-hand cover. Carry out operations 

2 to 6, chapter 8 I02. 



Tractors without creeper gears 

8. Drive out the double pins (2) and (4) of the coupling 

sleeves (1) and (5). Slide the sleeves towards each 

other on the pin (3). 

Remove the pin and sleeve assembly (Fig. 2). 

On 4RM tractors 

If the double pins are not accessible, carry out 

operations 9 to 12, chapter 5 D01 .A. 
9. Remove the circlip (1). 

1 0. Remove the pinion (2) (if fitted). 

Tractors with creeper gears 

1 1 . Remove the creeper gears control fork and the 
sleeve assembly (linking pin and coupler). 
Carry out operations 3 to 8, chapter 5 D01 .A. 

1 2. Carry out operations 13 to 16, chapter 5 D01 .A. 

13. Remove the circlip (1). 

1 4. Remove the pinion (2) (if fitted). 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

Note: Lift the cab, carry out operations 2 and 3, 
chapter 6B01. Examine the space between the hood 
and the windscreen (if the space is inadequate, 
remove the sheetmetal). 

15. Disconnect the cable (3). Takeout the split pin (1) 
and remove the control arm (2) (Fig. 3). 

16. Remove the seal {19). 

1 7. Release the spring (17) using pliers. 

1 8. Undo the nut to release the actuator lever (1 3) of the 
cam (14). 

19. Remove the circlip (15). 

20. Remove the cam (14) with the finger (16). 

21 . Remove the screws (25). 





Fig. 2 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6101.6 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 




V v 



22. Remove the closing plate (24) and the control shaft 
(20). 

Note: Keep the mechanism (31) and the brake 
discs (30) towards the rear. Withdraw the clo- 
sing plate (24) (Fig. 4), inclining it in order to 
disengage it from the dowel (18), the finger (23) 
and the bevel drive pinion (26) and to release the 
shaft (20) from the housing. 

23. Remove the spring (17) and the washer (22). 

24. Remove the retainer ring (21) (if necessary) on the 
control shaft (20). 

25. Remove the discs (30) and the mechanism (31). 

In case of replacement of mechanism 

26. Undo the nut (4), remove the plate /5\ and the pin 
(6). 

27. Remove the split pin (9), take out the pin (8) ana the 
clevis (7). 

Note: The stud (3) is smeared with Loctite 270 
and locked in the clevis (7). 

If replacement of the supporting plate (29) is unavoi- 
dable 

28. Remove two diametrically opposed screws (28) 
and screw in two guide studs (A) (Fig. 5). The 
purpose of this is to hold the shims [27] (Fig. 6). 

29. Unscrew the two remaining screws. 

30. Remove the supporting plate. 

Note: Check that the shims ha ve ail remained on 
the housing. 

The finger (16) smeared with Loctite 241 is 
screwed into the cam (14). The finger (23) smea- 
red with Loctite 241 is screwed into the suppor- 
ting plate (29). 

The dowel (18) is pushed fully home on the 
shoulder of the closing plate (24). 




Fig. 4 




Fig. 5 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



*V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 




6101.7 



B. Reassembly 



3 1 . Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

In case of replacement of supporting plate (29) 

32. Refit the plate. 

33. Smear two screws (28) with Loctite 241 then tighten 
to a torque of 90 - 1 20 Nm. 

34. Remove the two guide studs. 

35. Smear the other two screws (28) with Loctite 241 
then tighten to a torque of 90-120 Nm. 

In case of replacement of mechanism 

36. Refit the clevis (7) prepared with the stud (3) and 
the pin (8). Replace the split pin (9). 

37. Fit the lever (13) with its pin (6) on the stud (3) of the 
clevis. 

38. Refit the plate /5\, tighten the nut (4). 

Note: The plate /5\ is rectangular. It must be 
positioned horizontally, lengthwise, on the pin 
(6) in the lever (13) to be correct (Fig. 7). 

39. Replace the discs (30), placing the mechanism 
(31 ) between them. 

Note: Fit the lever (13) on the finger (23). Check 
that the discs slide freely on the bevel drive 
pinion (26). 

40. Place the retainer ring (21 ) (if removed) on the shaft 
(20). 

41 . Fit the shaft (20) in the closing plate (24) with the 
washer (22) and the spring (17). 

42. Reverse operation 22. 

43. Check that the discs (30) and the mechanism (31) 
are correctly positioned. 

44. Fit and tighten the screws (25) to a torque of 90 - 
120 Nm. 

45. Fit the cam (14) with its finger (16). 

46. Fit the circtip (15). Replace the spring (17), posi- 
tioning its ends E as indicated in Fig. 8. 

47. Fit the seal (19) supported by the housing (Fig. 9). 





Fig. 8 





© 


















Fig. 9 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6101.8 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 



Tractors with creeper gears 

48. Refit the pinion (2) (if fitted). 

49. Position the circtip (1). 

50. Refit the sieeve assembly (linking pin and coupler) 
and the creeper gears control fork. Carry out ope- 
rations 22 to 31, chapter 5 D01 .A. 

Note: If necessary reverse operations 9 to 12 
(4 RM), chapter 5 D01.A. 

Tractors without creeper gears 

5 1 . Refit the pinion (2) (if fitted). 

52. Position the circtip (1). 

53. Refit the sleeve assembly (linking pin and coupler) 
and the creeper gears control fork. Carry out ope- 
rations 44 and 45, chapter 6 F01. 

Note: If necessary reverse operations 9 to 12 
(4 RM), chapter 5 D01.A. 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

54. Refit the left cover. Carry out operations 8 to 17. 
chapter 8 102. 

55. Position the lever (2) (Fig. 10) of the cam (14) in 
contact with the lever (1 3) so as to obtain a distance 
of 315 mm ± 12 between the cable fastening axis 
and the support (3). Fit the cotter pin (1) (Fig. 10). 

56. Adjust the mechanism (31) with the adjusting nut, 
so that the cam displacement, from rest position to 
maximum position, is 60° (Fig. 1 1). 

Note: Access to the adjusting nut (4) is via the 
aperture of the plug (11) on the left cover (10) 
(Fig. 12). 

57. Reconnect the control. 

58. Adjust the handbrake control. 
Carry out operations 73 to 75. 

Remove the blocks between the cab supports and 
the trumpet housings. Fit the washers. Position the 
cab. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 27 - 35 Nm and 
the lock-nuts, smeared with Loctite 270. to 13 - 20 
Nm. Refasten the protecting panels. 

59. Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover. Carry out 
operations 1 5 to 27, chapter 8 101. 

60. Raise the tractor with a jack. 

61 . Refit the wheels. 

62. Remove the props and the jack. 

63. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm. 

64. Remove the blocks at the front of the tractor and 
between the engine frame and the front axle. 



L._ 




=ig. 10 





g- '2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Rear Axle - Handbrake 




6101-9 



65. Top up the oil level of the rear axle housing. 

66. Check the operation of the electrical circuits, of the 
low pressure switch, of the solenoids and of the 
filter vacuum switch. 

67. Check the operation of the lift. 

68. Check for leaks at the joint faces, covers and 
hydraulic connectors. 



C. Fitting and adjustment of control 

69. 1 ntroduce the cable (1 ) from below towards the cab 
interior and fasten with the clip (2) (Fig. 13). 

70. Fix the cable end (7) on the brake lever (4) with the 
pin (5), the washer (6) and the split pin (3) (Fig. 1 3). 
Note: Check that the cable is not constrained. 

71. Fit the outer cable stop (2) in the bracket (1) 
(Fig. 14). 

72. Attach the end of the cable (7) to the lever (6) 
(Fig. 14). 

73. Place the handbrake lever in the released position. 
Adjust so as to obtain a distance of 315 mm ± 12 
between the nut (5) and the axis of the end of the 
cable (7) (Fig. 14). 

74. Tighten the lock-nut (3) on the washer (4) (Fig. 14). 
Note: For good alignment of the outer cable 
stop (2) and the cable (7), the nut (5) and the 
lock-nut (3) are mounted in front of the bracket 
(1) (Fig. 14). 

75. Check the operation of the control. 

- Pull the lever. Initial travel should be approxima- 
tely 8 notches. The warning light on the instru- 
ment panel should come on. 

- Release the lever. The control should revert 
freely to the rest position and the warning light on 
the instrument panel should go off. 



imrm = — 

o: \\M—t — 




0, "w- '^f-L 




' \ i \ 


Qr^^^^ 


J — ""Fig. 13 




Fig. 14 



Issue t 



November 1991 



6J01 Differential 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.1 



General . 



A. Removal of left hand carrier cover and of differential 
lock assembly 



B. Disassembly and reassembly of differential lock 



C. Refitting of left hand carrier cover and of differential 
lock assembly 



D. Removal of differential assembly. 



E. Disassembly of differential assembly 
and crownwheel 



F. Removal and disassembly of bevel drive pinion . 



G. Reassembly of crownwheel and differential 
assembly 



10 



H. Reassembly and refitting of bevel drive pinion 



11 



I. Refitting of differential assembly - 



13 



J. Service tool 



16 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.ne 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




•/ / 



6J01.2 



Rear Axle - Differential 



General 



The bevel crownwheel and pinion, whose movement is 
provided by the output shaft of the gearbox, drives the 
rear axle through a connecting shaft. 
The helical bevel drive pinion is supported on either 
side by taper roller bearings. 
The bearing cones are force-fitted on the pinion, and 
the rear bearing cup is also force-fitted in the rear axle 
housing. The front bearing cup moves freely in its bore 
to enable the shimming of the pinion. 
The crownwheel is fixed to the differential housing by 
rivets. The differential assembly turns on two taper 
roller bearings supported by two side carriers screwed 
on to the rear axle housing. 

The differential assembly comprises two housing hal- 
ves containing four planetary pinions and two sun 
gears. 

The pinion is fitted in the rear axle housing with a 
preload obtained by means of shims placed between 
the handbrake backing plate and the axle housing. 
The shimming of the differential assembly is carried 
out with deflectors (shims) of different thicknesses 
placed behind the bearing cup of the left hand cup 
bearing. 

Differential lock 

The left hand carrier houses the differential lock mecha- 
nism. 

The system comprises a piston and a splined sliding 
coupler rotating with the left sun gear. The piston acts 
on the sliding coupler when pressure from the 17 bar 
hydraulic circuit is supplied by the solenoid valve fitted 
on the right hand cover. The piston moves, pushing the 
sliding coupler and compressing the spring. 
The teeth of the sliding coupler engage with a fixed 
coupler attached to the differential housing. In this 
position, the sun gears of the right and the left hand 
trumpet housings turn at the same speed. When the 
pressure is released, the coupler moves back towards 
the rear under the influence of the spring. 



Parts list 




(1) O-ring 




(2) Screw 




(3) O-ring 




{4) Circlip 




(5) Piston 




(6) Spring 




(7) Sliding coupler 




(8) O-ring 




(9) Left hand carrier 




(10) Differential lock hydraulic assemdy 


(11) Thrust washer 




(12) Finger 




[13] Deflector (shim) 




(14) Bearing cup 




(15) Screw 




(16) Coupler 




(17) Bearing cone 




(18) Washer 




(19) Sun gear 




(20) Planetary pinions 




(21) Washer 




(22) Cross joint 




(23) Crownwheel 




(24) Rivet 




(25) Right hand carrier 




(26) Screw 




(27) Bearing cup 




(28) Bearing cone 




(29) Crownwheel earner 




(30) Bearing cone 




(31) Bearing cone 




(32) Screw 




(33) Bearing cup 




(34) Bevel drive pinion 




(35) Supporting plate 




[36] Shim(s) 




(37) Bearing cup 




(38) Pipe 




(39) Connector 




(40) Differential lock supply tube 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.3 



General arrangement 



Backlash J1 between gears and pla 
netary pinions +0.08 to +0.30 



Jj 



Shimming PI 

Preload = -0.05 to -0.12 



(Backlash 

|j2- 4-0.15 to +0.40. 




Shim with deflector to obtain 
a preload on the roller bearings 
of to -0.25 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




6J01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Differential 




V -/ 



Exploded diagram 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



*• 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.5 



A. Removal of left hand carrier and 
of differential lock assembly 

Note: It is possible to work on the differential lock 
hydraulic assembly (10) with only the left hand axle 
housing removed. 

1 . Remove the left hand axle housing . 
3000 tractors 

Carry out operations 1 to 1 7, chapter 6C01 .A. 
3100 tractors 

Carry out operations 1 to 15. chapter 6C02.A. 
3000 - 3100 tractors 

2. Disconnect the supply tube (38), unscrew the 
connector (39) and withdraw the tube (40) (Fig. 1). 
Note: If access to the connector (39) is difficult, 
on "economy 4-speed p.t.o.» version tractors, 
remove the control (1) (Fig. 1). 

3. Undo the screws (2) alternately so as to release the 
spring (6) gradually. 

4. Remove the carrier (9), the washer (11 ), the sliding 
coupler (7) and the spring. 



B. Disassembly and reassembly of 
differential Iock 

Disassembly 

5. Withdraw the bearing cup(14) and the deflector 
[13]. 

Note: Mark the direction of mounting of the 
deflector. 

6. Remove the circlip (4). 

7. Withdraw the piston (5) with the aid of a jet of 
compressed air (Fig. 2). Exercise caution. 

8. Remove the O-rings (3), (8) and (1). 

9. Unscrew the finger (12) (if necessary). 

Reassembly 

10. Check the parts and replace any which are defec- 
tive. 

1 1 . Clean the finger (12), smear it with Loctite 22 1 . then 
fit and tighten it on the carrier (9). 

1 2. Smear the O-rings (3) and (8) with miscible grease 
(Amber Technical or equivalent), in order to retain 
them correctly in the bottom of their respective 
grooves. 

1 3. Using a plastic mallet, fit the piston (5) back in the 
carrier (9) (Fig. 3), paying attention to the position 
of the finger (12). 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6J01.6 



Rear Axle - Differential 



V V 



1 4. Fit the circlip (4), the deflector [13] ensuring that it 
is fitted the right way round and the bearing cup 
(14) (Fig. 4). 



C. Refitting of left hand carrier and 
of differential lock assembly 

15. FittheO-ring(l). 

1 6. Screw in two guide studs «G» diagonally opposite 
on the housing {Fig. 5). 

17. Refit the spring (6), the sliding coupler (7), 
the thrust washer (11) and the carrier (9). 

Note: Position the feed port of the differential 
lock towards the top. 

1 8. Fit and tighten two screws (2) to a torque of 85 - 1 30 
Nm. Remove the guide studs. Fit and tighten the 
two other screws to the same torque (Fig. 5). 

19. Fit the pipe (40) and the connector (39) (Fig. 1). 

Leak test 

After working on the piston (5). the seals (3) and (8) and 
the carrier (9), it is necessary to check the assembly for 
leaks. 

20. Fit a pressure gauge and valve on the supply 
connector (39){Fig. 6). 

21. Feed compressed air at approx. 5 bar into the 
system to check the correct movement of the 
piston. Reduce the pressure to 0.3 bar to carry out 
the leak test. 

22. C'ose the valve. Over 1 minute the pressure gauge 
should not show any drop in pressure. 

23. Disconnect the pressure gauge and connect the 
supply pipe (38) (Fig. 1). 

If necessary: Reconnect the « economy 4-speed 
p.t.o." control and carry out adjustment. Carry out 
operations 127 and 132 to 137, chapter 6D01. 

24. Reconnect the left hand axle housing. 
3000 tractors 

Carry out operations 18 to 36, chapter 6C01 .A. 
3100 tractors 

Carry out operations 16 to 33, chapter 6C02.A. 

25. Check for leaks of the supply pipe (38) (Fig. 1 ) and 
the operation of the differential lock. 




P 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ V 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.7 



D. Removal of differential assembly 

3000 -31 00 tractors 

26. Immobilise the tractor. Apply the handbrake. 
Chock the front wheels and the axle frame (see 
3A.02 - Fig. 2). 

27. Drain the rear axle only. 

28. Lift the rear of the tractor with a trolley jack. 

29. Place stands under the rear axle housing. 

30. Remove the wheels. 

31 . Remove the right and left hand axle housing. 
3000 tractors 

Carry out operations 6 to 17, chapter 6C01 .A. 
3100 tractors 

Carry out operations 6 to 15, chapter 6C02.A. 
Note: Check the space between the hood and 
the windscreen. (If the space is too narrow, 
remove the sheetmetai.) 
On both series of tractor, the cab should be 
supported on either side with suitable stands in 
iront of the front support of the tank (Fig. 7). On the 
right hand side, pay attention to the heating pipes, 
if necessary, unscrew the fastening brackets. 
3000 -3100 tractors 

32. Disconnect the fuel supply and return hoses and 
the harness to the tank gauge. 

Note: Mark the harness connectors. 

33. Partly empty the tank. Remove the fueftank and 
then the tank support. 

34. Remove the lift cover. Carry out operations 4 to 1 1 , 
chapter 6B01. 

35. Remove the top link support, the drive pinion and 
the layshaft. 

2-speed p.t.o. tractors 

Carry out operations 4 to 7, chapter 6D01 . 
4-speed p.t.o. tractors 

Carry out operations 63 to 68 and 72 to 7B. chapter 

6D01. 

36. Remove the pipe (40) (Fig. 8), 

37. Support the differential assembly using a hoist and 
aG clamp (Fig. 9). 

38. Slacken the screws (2) alternately so as to release 
the spring (6) gradually. 

39. Remove the carrier (9), the spring (6), the coupler 
(7) and the washer (11). 

40. Remove the screws (26). 
41 Remove the cover (25). 

42. Withdraw the differential assembly from the hou- 
sing (Fig. 9). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6J01.8 



Rear Axle - Differential 



E. Disassembly of differential 
assembly and crownwheel 

43. Place the assembly on a workbench. 

44. Remove the bearing cones (17) - (28) and the cup 
(27) (Fig. 10-11 -12). 

45. Remove the screws (15). 

46. Remove the fixed coupler (16). 

47. Separate the two parts of the housing (29). 
Note: These pieces each have the same num- 
ber. They must be paired. 

48. Remove the washers (18), the sun gears (19), the 
planetary pinions (20), the washers (21) and the 
cross joint (22) (Fig. 13). 

Note: When the crownwheel is replaced, the 
bevel drive pinion must be replaced as well. 
These pieces each have the same number and 
must be paired. 

In the factory the crownwheel and the carrier 
are assembled by means of rivets. 
For the purposes of repair, the rivets are repla- 
ced with screws and nuts. 




Fig. 10 











■ 


@ 


/fo] 


]oB\ 








1 l/QSssA 






s (° v> 


;ig AM5l/ 






^sT~ ' 


/ 




Fig. 1 1 











l& <@ 



Fig. 13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.9 



Disassembly of the crownwheel (23) 

49. Remove the crownwheel from the housing. 

50. Make a centre mark in the centre of each rivet {24) 
(crownwheel teeth side). 

51 . Drill the rivets to a depth of 10 mm with a 5 mm 
diameter drill (Fig. 14). 

52. Drill out to a diameter of 12 mm and to the same 
depth. 

53. Drive the rivets out with a suitable drift punch 
(Fig- 15). 



F. Removal and disassembly of 
bevel drive pinion 

54. Remove the right hydraulic cover, Carry out opera- 
tions 2 to 14. chapter 8101. 

55. Remove the left hydraulic cover. Carry out opera- 
tions 3 to 6. chapter 8I02. 

Tractors without creeper gears 

56. Drive out the double pins (2) and (4) from the 
sleeves (1) and (5), Slide the sleeves towards one 
another on the. shaft (3) (Fig. 16). Remove the si laft 
and sleeve assembly. 






I 1 \ 






li ^ 






\AAajiI 






^=^TjgL>^ 




f^^y/ o(l ^-^ 










v/xsj^s^*^^**^^' 








Fig. 15 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6J01.10 



Rear Axle - Differential 




■/ ■/ 



On 4WD tractors 

If the double pins are not accessible, carry out opera- 
tions 9 to 1 2, chapter 5D01 .A. 

57. Remove the circlip (1) and detach the gear (2) (if 
fitted) (Fig. 17). 

Tractors with creeper gears 

58. Carry out operations 3 to 8, chapter 5D01.A. 

59. Carry but operations 13 to 16, chapter 5D01 A. 

60. Remove the circlip (t) and detach the gear (2) (if 
fitted) (Fig. 17). 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

61. Remove the handbrake mechanism assembly. 
Carry out operations 15 to 25, chapter 6101 . 

62. Remove the screws (32), the supporting plate (35) 
and the shims [36J. 

63. Remove the bearing cup (33) ana ihe bevel gear 
pinion fitted with bearing cones (30) and (31). 

64. Remove the bearing cup (37). 

65. Extract the bearing cones (30) ana (31). 



G. Reassembly of crownwheel and 
differential assembly 

66. Check that the crownwheel and ir.e bevei gear 
pinion have the same number. 

67. Clean the contact faces of the new crownwheel 
■ (23) and of the carrier (29) and the screws and nuts 

referred to in the spare parts catalogue. 

68. Smear the screws (1) (Fig. 18) with loctite 270 on 
the first threads and place them in the crownwheel 
and earner. 

69. Tighten and lock the nuts (2) (Fig. 1 8) to a torque of 
150 -160 Nm. 

Reassembly of differential assembly 

70. Check the parts and replace any which are defec- 
tive. 

71 . Reverse operations 46 to 48. 

72. Smear the screws (15) with Loctite 270, then tigh- 
ten them to a torque of 85 - 130 Nm. 

Note: The clearance Jl between the planetary 
pinions and the buil gears must be between 
+0.08 and +0,30. 





Fig, is ; 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.11 



73. Push the bearing cup (27), the bearing cones (17) 
and (28) against the shoulder with the aid of a press 
and a suitable device (Figs. 19-20-21). 



H. Reassembly and refitting of 
the bevel drive pinion 

Reassembly 

74. Check the parts, replace any which are defective. 

75. Using a press and a suitable device, push the 
bearing cones (31) and (30) against the bevel 
drive pinion (Figs. 22-23). 





Fig. 19 

















L J§> 






4 1 


1 < II 











Fig. 21 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6J01.12 



Rear Axle - Differential 



/ V 



Refitting 

76. Smear the periphery of the cup (37) with Loctite 
603 and push it against the shoulder in the housing 
using a suitable tool. 

77. Fit the pinion with bearing cones and cup (33). 
Note : Ensure the bearing cones and cups are 
clean and lubricated. 

Method 1 for setting pre-load. 

78. To aetermine correct shim thickness, add shims to 
a greater thickness than "a", i.e. protrusion of cup 
(33) from housing face (Fig. 24) in order to provide 

some end float. 

79. Screw two guide studs in opposite positions into 
the nousing. Fit the shims [36] of the thickness 
determined in operation 78 and the supporting 
plate (35). 

80. Fit re screws (32). remove the guide studs and 
tigr.:en to a torque of 90 - 120 Nm. 

81. Nov.- calculate the shims required to obtain P1 
(Fig. 25) as follows. 

82. Place the tip of a dial indicator against the drive 
pinion (Fig. 26). 

83.Thrcugh the opening for the right hand hydraulic 
cover, pull on the pinion shaft turning it back and 
fonn to ensure the bearing cones and cups are 
correctly seated. 

84. No-.v set the dial indicator to zero. 

85. Receat operation 83 while pushing. 

86. The correct thickness of shims required is the 
reacing from the dial indicator, plus the pre-load of 
0.05 to 0,t2. subtracted from shim thickness 
de'.ermined in operation 78. 

87. Rer-.ove two screws (32). screw in two guide studs. 
Remove the two other screws and the supporting 
pia;e (35). 

88. Fit ;ne shims [36] selected in operation 86 and refit 
the supporting plate. 

89. Fit ne screws (32) smeared with Loctite 270. 
Remove the guide studs and tighten to a torque of 
90- i20Nm. 

2nd method (rear axte on a support only) 

The pnraole involves removing or adding shims [36] to 

obtain -.:rque of 0.80 to 2.00 Nm. measured with a 

rolling :crque gauge or spring balance. 

Note: Each time the screws (32) are refitted, always 

tighten to a torque of 90 - 120 Nm. 

On the final refitting, smear the screws with Loctile 270 

and accy the above - mentioned torque. 




Fig. 24 



P1 = -0,05 -0.12 





Fig. 26 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ v 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.13 



I. Refitting of differential assembly 

90. Place the differential assembly in the housing (Fig. 
27). 

9 1 . Screw in two guide studs in opposite positions and 
mount the right hand carrier (25). 

Note: Position the oil passage of the carrier 
downnwards. 

92. Fit.and tighten two screws to a torque of 85 - 130 
Nm. Remove the two guide studs. Fit and tighten 
the two other screws to the same torque. 

93. Remove the cup (14) and the deflector [13] of the 
left hand carrier(9). Place the cup on the bearing 
cone (17). 

94. Mount tool 3376847 M91 in the housing using two 
screws (2) tightened to a torque of 85 - 1 30 Nm (Fig . 
28). 

95. Tighten the central screw of the tool to a torque of 
10Nm(Fig. 28). 

Note: Turn the crownwheel a few times to 
"seat" the bearing cones correctly in the cups. 
Recheck the tightening torque of the central 
screw of the tool. 

96. Fit and tighten calibrated spacers (A) {Fig. 28) in 
the two other holes in the housing. 

97 Now determine shims P2 (Fig. 29) to obtain pre- 
load of : zero to +0.25 

98. Place a straight edge against the two calibrated 
spacers. 

99. Measure the gap J between the finger of the tool 
and the straight edge (B) with a feeler gauge (Fig. 
30). 




©L, 


k /3f 


© 






KA 


i i 


ml I / 

ol \ \\ 
















(I5M 


I>^\ 


"-C^-x- -_ 


— -(sT 


"l^- 


/v 








— i 


■3 ' ' 






Fig 








.28 



J/ 



., P2 = 0-025 



* ' / 




/ / 7 /-///' v ■' ■' ■ 



Fig. 29 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6J01.14 



Rear Axle - Differential 



100. Calculate the distance C between the cup (14) 
and the contact face of the carrier (9) (Fig. 31 ). 
C = (114 + J) -70 

101 . On the carrier(B), determine the distance Y with 
a depth gauge and a straight edge (Fig. 32). 

1 02. Select the correct thickness of the deflector [1 3] 
(see table) to obtain: 

P2 = C-Y 

Note: For carrying out shimming P2 there are 

eight deflectors of different thicknesses. If 

the determined value P2 is between two 

tihicknesses deflector, select the thinner of 

the two. 

Remove the tool and the cup (14). 

Place the deflector [13] selected in operation 

102 and the cup (14) in the cover (9). 

Note: Ensure that the deflector is mounted 

the right way round (Fig. 33). 

Screw in two guide studs in opposite positions. 

Assemble : the washer (11). the sliding coupler 

(7) and the spring (6) in the carrier (9). Fit the 

assembly with the feed orifice of the differentia! 

lock towards the top. 

1 06. Fit and tighten two screws to a torque of 85 - 1 30 
Nm. Remove the two guide studs. Fit and tighten 
the two other screws to the same torque. 

107. Check the backlash between the crownwheel 
and bevel drive pinion: 

J2 = +0.15 to +0.40 



103. 
104. 



105. 



Dots 






Number of 




Reference 


dots 


mm 


187 689 M1 





0.73 • 0.78 


892 1 73 Ml 


1 


0.864 -0.914 


892 172 Ml 


2 


0.991 - 1.041 


892 171 M1 


3 


1.118- 1.168 


892 170 M1 


4 


1.245- 1.295 


191 124 M1 


5 


1.37 - 1.42 


191 125 Ml 


6 


1.49 - 1.54 


521 401 M1 


7 


0.61 -0.66 



contact face 
of carrier (9) 





Fig. 31 i 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear Axle - Differential 




6J01.15 



108. Place the tip of the dial gauge on a tooth of the 
crownwheel (Fig. 34). 

Note: Carry out this operation at four diame- 
trically opposed points on the crownwheel. 
Clearance 42 is obtained as a function of the 
machining tolerances. If this clearance is out- 
side the maximum tolerance, after shimming 
P2 has been carried out, it is possible to 
reduce the thickness of the deflector (13]. 
" Place a shim of suitable thickness between 
the cup (27) and the carrier (29). 

1 09. Check clearance J2 again. 

Refitting of the handbrake mechanism 
assembly 

Note: The plate /5\ is rectangular. It must be 
positioned horizontally, lengthwise, on the 
pin(6) in the lever (13) to be correct (Fig. 35). 

1 10. Carry out operations 39 to 47. chapter 6101. 

Tractors with creeper gears 

111. Refit the gear (2) (if mounted) and the circlip (1) 
(Fig. 36). 

112. Refit the fork and the sleeve, connecting shaft 
and coupler assembly. Carry out operations 22 
to 30, chapter 5D01. A. 

Reconnect the creeper gears control cable. 
If necessary reverse operations 9 to 12. chapter 
5D01.A (4WD). 

Tractors without creeper gears 

113. Refit the gear (2) (if mounted ) and the circlip (1 ) 
(Fig. 36). 

1 14. Refit the sleeve, connecting shaft and coupler 
assembly. Carry out operations 44 and 45. chap- 
ter 6F0 1 . If necessary reverse operations 9 to 1 2, 
chapter 5 D01, A (4WD). 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

1 1 5. Refit the left hand cover. Carry out operations 7 
to 1 1 , chapter 8I02. 

Mount the handbrake control support, the G.S. 
PTO support (if fitted), remove the guide studs, 
fit and tighten the screws to a torque of 72 - 96 
Nm. 

116. Position the control rod and adjust the hand- 
brake mechanism. 

Carry out operations 55 to 57. chapter 6101. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




6J01.16 



Rear Axle - Differential 



V •/ 



117. Reconnect the G.S. PTO control (if fitted), the 
supply hose of the lift valve, the supply pipe of 
the rams and the lift and lowering valves (yellow 
connector). Clip the wire assembly to the valve 
supply hose. 

118. Refit the right hand hydraulic cover. 
Carry out operations 15 to 27, chapter 8101. 

119. Refit the layshaft, the driving pinion and the top 
link support. 

Tractors with 2-speed p.t.o. 

Carry out operations 8 to 13, chapter 6D01 . 

Tractors with 4-speed p.t.o. 

Carry out operations 79 to 82 and 85 to 92. 
chapter 6D01 . 

120. Refit the lift cover. 

Carry out operations 53 to 57 and reverse opera- 
tion 7, chapter 6B01. 
Fix the harnesses with a clip. 

121. Refit the fueltank. 

Reconnect the fuel supply and return hoses and 
the harness of the tank gauge (connect as mar- 
ked upon disassembly). 

1 22. Refit the right hand and left hand trumpet hou- 
sings. 

3000 tractors 

Carry out operations 18 to 31. chapter 6C01.A. 

3100 tractors 

Carry out operations 16 to 27. chapter 6C02.A. 
Refit the stabiliser support. 

3000 -3100 tractors 

123. Refill with fuel. 

1 24. Refit the support with the auxiliary spool valves. 
Carry out operations 65 to 69, chapter 6B01 . 

1 25. Check the adjustment of the controls: 
Ground speed PTO : carry out operations 1 1 4 to 
120, chapter 6F01. 

Handbrake: Carry out operations 7 1 to 75. chap- 
ter 6101 . 

Shiftable PTO : Carry out operations 47 and 52 
to 58, chapter 6E02. 

Economy 4-speed: Carry out operations 127 
and 132 to 137, chapter 6D01. 
Creeper gears: Carry out operations 24 and 29 
to 34, chapter 5J01. 



1 26. Raise the rear of the tractor with a trolley jack. 
Refit the wheels. Remove the stands under the 
rear axle. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 
400 - 450 Nm. 

127. Top up the oil in the housing and remove the 
chocks. Refit the sheetmetal (if removed). 

1 28. Start the engine. Carry out a road test. Check the 
operation of the controls and of the electrical 
circuits. 

1 29. Check for leaks of the joint faces of the trumpet 
housings on the centre housing, of the covers 
and of the hydraulic connectors. 



J. Service tool 



Shimming tool 3376847 M91 . available from the M.F. 
network. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 




V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6 K01 Brake pistons and seals 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Rear Axle - Brake pistons and seals 6K01. 1 



General 



A. Disassembly 



8. Reassembly 



C. Bleeding of main braking circuit 



D. Bleeding of trailer braking circuit 



Issue 1 



November t99l 



www.maskimsten.ne| 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6K01.2 



Rear Axle - Brake pistons and seals 




V •/ 



General 



The brake pistons are housed in two lateral cavities of 
the rear axle housing, concentric with the supporting 
face of each trumpet housing {see 5 A01 . page 5). They 
comprise a shouldered part and are guided by 3 
dowels force-fitted in the housing. Sealing is provided 
by 2 Orings mounted in grooves of the rear axle 
housing. Each piston is controlled by a master cylinder 
supplied by a residual oi! flow coming from the 1 7 bar 
valve. Each piston acts directly on a friction disc moun- 
ted on the planetary shaft at the entrance of the trumpet 
housing and a backplate centred by dowels and sup- 
ported on the ring gear of the final drive unit. When the 
brake is released, there is minimal clearance between 
the piston and the disk. The brakes are self-adjusting 
and pedal travel remains constant. The discs are cons- 
tantly lubricated by oil from the rear axle: the film of oil 
is maintained on the braking surfaces when they are not 
in use and cools the brakes when they are used. 



A. Disassembly 



3000 Tractors 

1 . Remove the trumpet housing. Carry out operations 
1 to 15. chapter 6 COLA. 

3100 Tractors 

2. Remove the trumpet housing. Carry out operations 
1 to 13. chapter 6 C02. A. 

3000 -3100 Tractors 

3. Remove the disc (1), the planetary shaft (2). the 
dowel (3) (Fig. 1), 

4. Remove the backpiate (1) (trumpet housing inter- 
ior) (Fig. 2). 

5. Withdraw the piston (1) from the housing with a jet 
of compressed air applied to the connector (2) 
(Fig. 3). 

Wore: To facilitate access to the connector (2), if 
necessary, disconnect the economy 4-speed 
p.Lo. control and rotate the connector. 




Fig. 1 




Fig. 2 




Fig. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear Axle - Brake pistons and seals 




6K01.3 



6. Remove the O-rings (1 ) and (2) on the centre hou- 
sing and discard them. 



B. Reassembly 



3000 -.3100 Tractors 

7. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

8. Fit the piston (1) without seals in the housing (2) 
(Fig. 5). 

Note: Check that the piston slides freely in the 
bore of the housing and over the dowels (3) 
without binding (Fig. 5). 

9. Fit new O-rings (1) and (2) (Fig. 6). 

Note: Lightly smear the seals with miscible 
grease («Amber technical or equivalent) in 
order to keep them correctly at the bottom of the 
groove. 





Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6K01.4 



Rear Axle - Brake pistons and seals 




-/ ■/ 



1 0. Position the piston over the dowels, then fit it in to 
place with the aid of a plastic mallet, striking 
alternate points around the circumference (Fig. 7). 

1 1 . Hold the piston with two large washers and two 
screws diametrically opposed (Fig. 8). 

Leak test (operations 12 to 15, Fig. 8). 

If work is carried out on the brake piston and O-rings, 
it is necessary to check for leaks. 

12. Fit a pressure gauge to the connector (2). 

13. Supply the circuit with compressed air at approx. 5 
bar. so as to ensure operation of the piston. Re- 
duce the pressure to 0.3 bar to carry out the test. 

14. Close the pressure reducing valve. For 1 min. no 
reduction in pressure should be indicated at :he 
pressure gauge. 

15. Disconnect the pressure gauge. Remove :ne 
screws and the holding washers. Reconnect :ne 
brake hose. 

3000 Tractors 

Refitting the trumpet housing 

16. Refit the trumpet housing. Carry out operations 58 
and 19, chapter 6 C01 .A. 

17. Reiit the planetary shaft (2), the disc (1) anc :ne 
dowel (3) (Fig. 1). 

Note: Check that the disc slides freely on the 
planetary shaft. 

1 8. Carry out operations 22 to 34. chapter 6 CO 1 A. 

3100 Tractors 

Refitting the trumpet housing 

19. Refit the trumpet housing. Carry out operation ;6 
and 17, chapter 6 C02.A. 

20. Refit the planetary shaft (2), the disc (1) anc :ne 
dowel (3) (Fig. 1). 

Note: Check that the disc slides freely on the 
planetary shaft. 

21 . Carry out operations 20 to 31 , chapter 6 C02.A 

3000 -3100 Tractors 

22. Bleed the main braking circuit and the trailer era- 
king circuit (if fitted), see C and D. 

23. Test: 

- lifting 

- braking on the road 

24. Check for leaks 

- between the trumpet housing and the rear ?.xle 
housing 

- at the lift valve supply hose (left hand huroet 
housing) 




Fig- 8 ' 



C. Bleeding of main braking circuit 

25. To eacri vent screw (1 ) en the left and right hand c: 
the rear axle housing attacn a transparent hose (int. 
dia. 6 mm) (Fig. 9). 

26. Immerse the ends of the two hoses in a container 
partially filled with transmission oil (Fig. 9). 

27. Run the engine at approx. 1 200 rpm. Using suitably 
protected pliers or clamp stop up the return hose 
(1) (Fig 11). 

28. Open the right vent screw. Check that there are no 
leaks between the pipe and the vent screw. 

29. Unlock the brake pedals. 

30. Gently depress the rignt peaat through its entire 
travel and release it »n the same way. Repeat the^^ 
operation several times until the oil flows without a;VF 
bubbles. 

31 . Close the vent screw and remove the pliers . 

32. Open the left vent screw. Check that there are no 
leaks between the pipe and ihe vent screw. 

33. Gently depress the left pedal through its entire 
travel and release it in the same way. Repeat the 
operation several times until ihe oil flows without air 
bubbles. 

34. Close the vent screw and remove the pliers. 

35. Activate each pedal several times in order to posi- 
tion the brake pistons. 

36. Check the hardness of action of each pedal. 
Note: If a problem of functioning should appear, 
carry out bleeding a second time. 

If the problem persists, check for leaks: 

- from the circuit 

- at the master cylinders ga^ 
' at the piston seals. ^P 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Rear Axle - Brake pistons and seals 




6K01.5 



D. Bleeding of trailer braking circuit 

Note: It is imperative to bleed the main braking 
circuit before bleeding the trailer braking circuit. 

37. To the vent screw of the pilot head of the trailer 
brake valve attach a transparent hose (int. dia. 4 
mm) (Fig. 10). 

38. Immerse the end of the hose in a container partially 
filled with transmission oil (Fig. 10). 

39. Run the engine at approx. I200rpm. Using suitably 
protected pliers stop up the return hose (1) (Fig 
11). 

40. Open the vent screw. Check that there are no leaks 
between the pipe and the vent screw. 

4 1 . Gently depress the twin pedals. Repeat the opera- 
tion several times until the oil flows without air 
bubbles. 

42. Close the vent screw and remove the pliers. 

43. Connect a pressure gauge to the trailer brake 
connector (Fig. 12). 

44. Run the engine at approx. 2000 rpm. 

45. Gradually depress the twin brake pedals. 

46. The pressure obtained should be between 1 30 and 
150 bar maximum. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Rear Axle - Automatic hitch 




6M01.1 



6 M01 Automatic hitch 



CONTENTS 



A. Adjustment of automatic hook control 



B. Adjustment of automatic hook 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



6M01.2 



Rear Axle - Automatic hitch 




V V 



A. Adjustment of automatic hitch 
control 

Note: Operations 2 to 5 must be carried out when 
replacing the control cable. 

1 . Set the lever "U" to the ~lockeo> position (Fig. 1 }. 

2. Turn the clevis (1) until it meets the end of the 
threaded part of the cable (7). 

3. Attach the clevis (1 ) to the lever "U" with the clip (2). 
Tighten the nut (3). 

4. Adjust the outer cable stop (6), with the nut (4) 
reaching the end of the threaded part. 

5. Tighten the nut (5). 

Note: Check that the cable is not constrained. 

6. Screw the clevis (2) until it reaches the threaded 
part of the cable (4) (Fig. 2). 

7. Fit the clevis (2) to the lever "V with the clip (1). 
Note: Make sure that the lever "V" is in the 
locked position. 

8. Tighten the nut (3). 

9. Fit the outer cable stop (7) in xr.e support (8), then 
tighten the nut (6) in such a way that the cable (4) 
ss not subject to any constrain! or any play. 

10. Tighten the nut (5). 



Unlocked 
position 





Fig. 2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V 



Rear Axle - Automatic hitch 




6M01.3 



B. Adjustment of automatic hitch 

1 1 . Start the engine. 

12. Press on the interna) or external lift control button 
so that the lift system is in the continuous pumping 
position. 

1 3. Raise the lower part of the hook with the aid of a 
trolley jack (Fig. 3). 

14. Having ensured that the upper parts of the lift rods 
are fixed, adjust the length of the rods by turning 
the lower rod (4) so that it is able to engage the 
clevis (3) on the hook pin (1), leaving a play of 
between and 1 mm. 

15. Fit the split pins (2). 

16. Activate the internal hitch control button inside the 
cab and check that there is play of 10.5 mm ± 1 .5 
between the latch (1) and the locking pin (2) 
(Fig. 4}. 

1 7. Remove the trolley jack. 

18. Check the operation of the hook. 

19. Fit the protection plate. 




Fig. 3 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 



>y _ *■ V 




TRACTOR SERIES 3000/3100 




WORKSHOP SERVICE MANUAL 



Part 2 



CONTENTS 



J9 



FRONT AXLE 2 AND 4 WD 
HYDRAULICS 



ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 
ACCESSORIES 



ELECTRONIC LIFT CONTROL 

AUTOTRONIC 

DATATRONIC 



SERVICE TOOLS 




•-J Beauvais France 



t'vw- Massey Ferguson Manufacturing 



Section 

7 

8 

9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 




Publication N° 1646915 M1 



© Massey Ferguson SA AJI rights reserved Beauvais France, 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




7 . FRONT AXLE 2 WD AND 4 WD 



Contents 



7 A01 4 WD CLUTCH ASSEMBLY 

7 B01 FINAL DRIVE UNITS (1 st GENERATION) 

7 B02 FINAL DRIVE UNITS (2 nd GENERATION) 

7 C01 DIFFERENTIAL (1 ST GENERATION) 

7 C02 DIFFERENTIAL (2 nd GENERATION) 

7 D01 2 WD FRONT AXLE 

7 E01 STEERING COLUMN (1 ST GENERATION) 

7 E02 STEERING COLUMN (2 nd GENERATION) 



/ / 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7A01 4 WD Clutch Assembly 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Front axle -4 WD clutch assembly 7A01.1 



General 



A. Removal of clutch assembly 



8. Disassembly of clutch 



C. Reassembly of clutch 



D. Refitting of clutch assembly 



E. Tools to be made locally 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




tl 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7A01.2 



Front axle - 4 WD clutch assembly 




V ■/ 



General 



Parts list 



The clutch assembly for the drive to the front axle is 
mounted in the lower part of the rear axle housing. An 
inspection cover placed under the housing provides 
access to the unit which comprises : 

- A shaft (25) turning on two taper roller bearings 
mounted in the bore of the centre housing. 

- A hyaraulic clutch assembly mounted on the shaft. 

- A transfer gear (15) centred on the shaft by a bush 
(43), driving the clutch plates (36). 

The transfer gear (15) has helicai teeth and engages 
constantly with the gear (7) fitted on the bevel drive 
pinion. 

The shaft is fitted with shims [20] placed between the 
cap (22) and the cup (18) so as to obtain piay of to 
>0.lDmm. 



Operation 



Disengaging 

The 4WD solenoid valve sends oil at a pressure of 1 7 
bar via a gallery in the centre housing, through bush 
(11) into the drilling in shaft (25). 
The piston (30) is forced by oil pressure along hub (40) 
and pulls drum (42) which compresses the Belleviiie 
washers /34\ and /35\ releasing plates (36). The 
transter gear (15) then runs freely on bush (43). 

Engaging 

With tre solenoid valve releasing the oil pressure, the 
Belleviile washers push back the drum (42) which 
throucn the plates locks up with transfer gear (15) ano 
drives shaft (25). The returning oil is dumped back into 
the centre housing. 



(1) 


Sleeve 


(2) 


Double pin 


(3) 


Shaft 


(4) 


Double Din 


(5) 


Sleeve 


(6) 


Circlip 


(7) 


Gear 


(8) 


Plug 


(9) 


Needle roiler bearing 


(10) 


Bolt 


(11) 


Bush 


/12V 


Seal rings 


(13) 


Bearing cup 


(14) 


Bearing cone 


(15) 


i ranster gear 


(16) 


Clutch assemolv 


(17) 


Cover 


(18) 


Bearing cud 


(19) 


Seanna cone 


[20] 


S'~.imis) 


(21) 


O-ring 


(22) 


Cap 


(23) 


Circlip 


(24) 


Seal 


(25) 


•aWD drive shaft 


(26) 


Seal 


(27) 


Locking screw 


(28) 


Flange 


(29) 


O-ring 


(30) 


Piston 


(31) 


Circlio 


(32) 


O-ring 


(33) 


O-ring 


/34\ 


Belleville washer 


/35\ 


Belleville washer 


(36) 


Outer plate 




A : 4-plate clutch 




B : 5-plate clutch 


(37) 


Inner plate 




A : 4-plate clutch 




B : 5-plate ciuich 


(38) 


Cover 


(39) 


Orclip 


(40) 


H'jp 


[41] 


Sh:m(s) 


(42) 


Drum 


(43) 


3ush 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 4 WD clutch assembly 




7A01.3 




Issue i 



November 1991 



. www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




7A01.4 Front axle -4 WD clutch assembly 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 4 WD clutch assembly 




7A01.5 



A. Removal of clutch assembly 

1. 

2. 



Immobilise the tractor. Drain the rear axle housing. 
Disconnect the hoses for the front differential lock 
(plug the fittings). Remove the guard and the drive 
shaft. 

3. Remove the bolts (10) and the cover (17). 
Note: On tractors with a ground speed PTO 
(G.S. PTO), recover the spring (3), the plunger 

(2) and the retaining tube (1) (Fig. 1). 

On tractors equipped with a protector flange 
and rice field seal, remove the screw (27), the 
flange (28) and the seal (26). 

4. Remove the circlip (23). 

# Protect the splined section of the shaft (25). Extrac: 
the cap (22) with its seal (24) using the iocaJly made 
tool (see section E). Remove the seal (24) (Fig. 2). 

6. Remove the O-ring (21). 

7. Remove the sb/ms [20] and the cup (18). 

Note: On tractors equipped with a G.S. PTO. set 
the control to the disengaged position. 

8. Remove the shaft assembly (25) and bearing cone 
(19). whilst keeping the clutch assembly (16) ana 
transfer gear (15) together. 

9. Remove the clutch assembly (16) with the transfer 
gear (15) and bearing cone (14). 

10. Using the locally made tool (see section E). remove 
the bush (11) (Fig. 3). This tool is essential for 
tractors with G.S. PTO. If necessary, also remove 
the cup (13) with a suitable extractor. 

(f removing the gear (7), it is necessary to remove 
4fce right-hand hydraulic cover. 

1 1 . Raise the relevant side of the tractor with a jack. 

1 2. Place a stand in position and remove the wheel. 

1 3. Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover. 
Carry out operations 2 to 14. chapter 8 101. 

Tractors without creeper gears 

1 4. Drive out the double pins (2) and (4) of the coupling 
sleeves (1) and (5). 

15. Slide the steeves towards each other on tne sha'" 

(3) and remove the shaft - sleeve assembly. 

16. Remove tne circlip (6) and the gear (7). 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




7A01.6 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 4 WD clutch assembly 




Tractors with creeper gears 

17. Carry out operations 3 to 8 and 13 to 16. chapter 
5D01.A. 

1 8. Remove the circlio (6) and take off the pinion (7). 



B. Disassembly of clutch 

19. Separate the transfer gear (15) from the clutch 
assembly (16). 

20. Remove the circlip (31). 

21 . Remove the cover (30). 

22. Remove the O-rings (29) and (32). 

23. Compress the Beiieville washers /34\ and /35\ with 
a press and a sunable device (Fig. 4). 

24. Remove the circiiD (39) and the shim(s) [41] 
(Fig. 4). 

25. Remove the device. 

26- Remove the cover (38), the outer plates (36) ana 
the inner plates (37). 

Note: The number of outer plates and inner 
plates varies according to the type of tractor. 
Assembly A : 4 outer plates and 3 inner plates: 

• 3050 to 3095 tractors without G.S. PTO. 
Assembly B : 5 outer plates and 4 inner plates: 

• 3050 and 3095 tractors with G.S. PTO from 
serial no. N309034 onwards. 

• 31 15-3125 tractors with or without G.S. PTO. 

27. Separate the hub (40) from the drum (42). 

28. Remove the O-ring (33). 

29. Remove the Belleville washers /34\ and /35V 

Disassembly of shaft 

30. Remove the two seal rings /12V 

31 . Extract the bearing cone (19) with a press and a 
suitable device. 

32. Extract the needle roller bearing (9). Remove the 
plug. 

Reassembly of shaft 

Make sure that the oii drilling of the shaft is not blocked. 

33. Tighten the plug (8) smeared with Loctite 542. 

34. Fit the needle roner bearing (9) 2.5 mm back from 
the face F (Fig. 51. 

35. Fit the bearing ccne (19) against the shoulder of 
the shaft (25). 



r ": ~ £ 553 




Fig. 4 



.£5. 




Fig. 5 



C. Reassembly of clutch 

36. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

Check that the oil drilling in hub (40) is not blocked. 

37. Position the Belleville wasners /35\ and /34\ in the 
drum (42) (Fig. 61. 

38. Lubricate and fit the O-ring (33) on the hub (40). 

39. Position the hub (40) in the drum (42) up against the 
Belleville washers. 

40. Fit the outer olates (36) and inner plates (37) 
alternatively, alignina the luqs and fit the cover 
(38) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 4 WD clutch assembly 




7A01.7 



41. Shimming J1 (Fig. 7) 

Using a press and a suitable device (Fig. 4) exert 
a force of approx 2000 daN, to compress the 
Belleville washers /35\ and /34\. 
Fit the circlip (39). Using a feeler gauge, determine 
the space X between the cover (38) and the circlip 
(39). Select the shim(s) to obtain a play of : 
J1 = 1.5 to 1.7 mm (Fig. 7). 

42. Remove the circiip (39). 

43. Position the shim(s) selected in operation 41 bet- 
ween the cover and the circlip (the thickest shim on 
the circiip side). 

44. Refit the circlip. 

45. Lubricate and fit the O-rings (32) and (29) on the 
cover (30) and refit them. 

46. Fit the circlip (31). 

47. Fit the clutch assembly (16) to the transfer gear 
(15) 

Note: The bush (43) is press- fitted into the 
transfer gear (15) and then rebored. 



D. Refitting of clutch assembly 

If the gear (7) has been removed 
Tractors without creeper gears 

48. Refit the gear (7). 

49. Position the circlip (6). 

50. Carry out operations 1 03 and 104. chapter 6 F01 . 

Tractors with creeper gears 

51. Refit the gear (7). 

52. Position the circlip (6). 

53. Carry out operations 22 to 31, chapter 5 00 1 A. 

54. Refit the right hydraulic cover. 

Carry out operations 15 to 29. chapter 8 101 . 

55. Fit the cup (13) (if removed). 

56. Fit the bush (11) with a locally made tool (see 
section E) so that the bush is positioned 4 to 5 mm 
back from the rear face oi the cup (13) (Fig. 8). 
Ensure that a hole in the bush aligns wuh the feed 
channel in the centre housing. 

57. Fit the seal (24) in the cop (22). 




Y^ZZZZ7Z&_ 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




7A01.8 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 4 WD dutch assembly 




V '■/ 



58. In order to position the bearing cones correctly in 
the cups, shim as follows: 

J2 s to 0.10 mm. fit the bearing cone (14), the 
shaft (25), the cup (18). 

59. Protect the shaft splines. 

60. Mount the cup (22) and the circiip (23). 

61 . Place the tipofthedial gauge against the end of the 
shaft (25) (Fig. 9). 

62. Pull on the shaft, turning it back and forth, in order 
to seat the bearing cones in the cups. 

63. Set the dial gauge to zero. 

64. Repeat operation 62 while pushing. 

65. Select the thickness of the shims [20] required to 
obtain J2. 

66. Remove the circiip (23). the cap (22). the cup (18) 
and the shaft (25). 

67. Place the seal rings /12\ in the grooves of the shaft 
(25). Join up the ends. Ensure that they turn freely. 

68. Place the bearing cone (14) in the cup (13). Fit the 
shaft (25) after having positioned the clutch 
assembly (16) and the transfer gear (15) in -:he 
housing. 

69. Fit the cup (18) and the shim(s) [20] (smeared with 
grease) selected in operation 65. 

70. Fit the O-ring (21) in the groove of the housing. 

7 1 . Mount the cap (22) and the circiip (23). remove the 
protection of the shaft splines. 

72. On tractors with rice field sealing, grease and fit the 
seal (26) with the lip facing towards the cap (22). 
Remove the protection. 

73. Mount the flange (28), ensuring that there is suita- 
ble play between the flange and the housing. 

74. Tighten the screw (27) smeared with Loctite 241 . 

75 . Clean and degrease the joint face of the cover (1 7) 
and of the housing. 

76. Smear the joint face of the cover with a sealing 
compound (Master Joint 510 or equivalent). 



J2 = . + 0,10 ! 







Fig. 9 



77. Screw in two guide studs in ODposite positions on 
the housing. 

78. On tractors equipped with a G.S. P T 0. check the 
position of the lever (4). Mount the -staining tube 
(1), the plunger (2) ana the spring (3) (Fig. 1). 

79. Refit the cover (17). 

80. Remove the guide studs, fit and tignten the bolts 
(10) to a torque of 130 - 170 Nm. 

81 . Coat the two drive shaft couplings with "Anti-seize" 
grease or equivalent. Refit the drive shaft and 
reconnect the two hoses for the front differential 
lock. 

82. Refill transmission with oil. 

83. ChecK the operation of the ciutch and of the G.S, 
PTO control (if fitted). 

84. Check for leaks: 

- at the joint faces of the cover under the rear axle 
housing 

- at the right hydraulic cover (if removed) 

- at the hydraulic connectors. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



■/ ■/ 



Front axle - 4 WD clutch assembly 




7A01.9 



E. Tools to be made locally 



2 studs M6x 130 



1 . Cap extractor 



Screw HM6 welded 



Nut HM10 welded — t 



2. Bush extractor 

Washer MF 3385 963 M01 



\ 




\ 



a 



\ 



StudMl 2 x 1 80 



/ Ss\\k\ W\] ' 



/ 



! 



C h1 to 45° 



Hole M \2 



//I 




/ 



T 



4 A 
/ 



/ 



H 



-jj- — sl_ gj d o -- 



www , ,\\i 




A 



50 



I 
10 



_L 



=_22 



3. Bush fitting tool 



Knurled 



CM to 45 



Ch2 to 45° 




Issue 1 



November i99t 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




7B01.1 



7 B01 Final drive units 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Removal of planetary carrier, sun gear, ring gear 



B. Refitting of ring gear, sun gear, planetary carrier 



C. Disassembly of wheel hub 



D. Reassembly of wheel hub 



E. Replacement of a wheel stud 



F. Disassembly of swivel housing 



G. Reassembly of swivel housing 



H. Removal and refitting of universal drive shaft 



t. Service tool 



11 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7B01.2 



Front axle - Final drive units 




General 



The final drive unit comprises a housing (47) articulated 
on the front axle case through two swivels (7) and (11). 
The wheei hub (22) turns on two taper roller bearings 
whose cups (23) and (19) are press fitted inside the 
hub. The bearing cone (18) is fitted on the housing and 
the opposing bearing cone (25) is fitted freely so that 
the assembly can be adjusted by means of shims [26]. 
The drive from the front differential is transmitted to the 
wheel hub through the universal drive shaft assembly 
(10), the sun gear (28), the planetary pinion (38) and the 
ring gear (44). The ring gear is held by the circlip (24) 
on the ring gear carrier (42) which is fastened by a bolt 
on to the housing (47). 

Oil is contained by seal (45) between swivel housing 
(47) and hub (22) and seal(16) between swivel housing 
and outer drive shaft. There ts another seal (8) between 
axie housing (52) and inner drive shaft. 
"OVings (6) and (12) are fitted to seal the swivel 
bearinas. 



Special cases 

Improved sealing is provided in cases where prolon- 
ged use in wet conditions is likely, such as in rice fields. 
Special seals are fitted on the 4WD clutch output, on the 
rear axle case, in the differentia! input and on the final 
drive units. 



Different categories of front axle 

Cat. 1 . MF3050 

Cat. 2 : MF 2060 
MF 3065 

Cat. 2.5: MF 2070 
MF 3080 
MF 3095 
MF3115 

Cat. 3 : MF3125 



Parts list 


(D 


Bolt 


(2) 


Cover 


[3} 


Shims 


(4) Bearing cup 


(5) Bearing cone 


(6) 


O-ring 


(7) 


Swivel pin 


(8) 


Oil seai 


0) 


Bush 


(10) 


Universal drive shaft 


(11) 


Swivel pin 


(12) 


O-ring 


(13) 


Bearing cone 


(14) 


Bearing cup 


(15) 


Cover 


(16) 


Oil seal 


(17) 


Bush 


(18) 


Bearing cone 


(19) 


Bearing cup 


(20) 


Seal 


(21) 


Plug 


(22) 


Wheel huo 


(23) 


Searing cup 


(24) 


Circlip 


(25) 


Bearing cone 


[26] 


Shims 


(27) 


Dowel pin 


(28) 


Sun gear 


(29) 


Circlip 


(30) 


Thrust washer 


(31) 


Screw 


(32) 


0-rmg 


(33) 


Retaining ring 


(34) 


Circlip 


(35) 


Needle roller bearing 


(36) 


Planetary carrier 


(37) 


Plate 


(38) 


Planetary pinion 


(39) 


Plate 


(40) 


Bolt 


/41\ 


Planetary pinion pin 


(42) 


Ring gear carnor 


(43) 


Wheel stud 


(44) 


Ring gear 


(45) 


ON seai 


(46) 


Breather or plug 


(47) 


Swivel housing 


(48) 


Pin 


(49) 


Washer 


(50) 


Slop 


(51) 


Spacer 


(52) 


Axle housing 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




7B01.3 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net. 




7B01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




V V 




Issuel 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




7B01.5 



A. Removal of planetary carrier, sun 
gear, ring gear 

1 . Chock the rear wheels. Apply the handbrake. 

2. On 3000/3100 tractors, with the 4WD clutch enga- 
ged, lift the two wheels so that the wheel hub (22) 
turns freely. Place stands in position. 

3. Remove the wheel on the relevant side. 

4. Drain the final drive unit. 

5. Remove screws (40). 

6. Remove the planetary carrier with the thrust washer 
(30). 

7. Remove the circlip (29) and the sun gear (28). 

8. Close the circlip (24) and remove the ring gear (44). 

Disassembly of planetary carrier 

9. Place the planetary carrier in a vice with soft jaws. 

1 0. Remove the circlips (34). 

1 1 . Gradually drive out the planetary pinion pin /41\ 
(Fig. 1}. Recover the needles. Remove the O-ring 
(32) and if necessary the retaining ring (33). 

12. Repeat operation 11 for the other two planetary 
pinions. 

Reassembly of planetary carrier 

13. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

1 4. In one planetary pinion (38), place the needles (35) 
smeared with bearing grease. 

15. Replace the O-ring (32) on the planetary pinion pin 
/41\. Refit the retaining ring (33) (if removed on di- 
sassembly). 

1 6. Lightly engage the planetary pinion pin /41\ in the 
planetary carrier cover, ensuring that the notch of 
the pin is aligned with that of the cover, in order to 
fit the circlip (34).Fit the plate (37). Center the 
planetary pinion (38) with the needles. Engage the 
pin in the planetary pinion. Fit the plate (39). Insert 
the pin as far as it will go and fit the circlip (34). 

17. Manually check the axial play and rotation of the 
planetary pinion. 

1 8. Repeat operations s 4 to 1 7 for the otner two plane- 
tary pinions. 




B. Refitting of ring gear, sun gear, 
planetary carrier 

1 9. Assemble the ring gear (44) on ;ne ring gear earner 
(42) with the circlip (24), ensuring that it is properly 
positioned in the groove. Mount the sun gear (28) 

and fit the circlip (29). 

20. Screw two guide pins diametrically opposed on 
the wheel hub (22). 

21 . Smear the joint face of the planetary earner with a 
sealing compound (Loctite 520 or equivalent). 

22. Check that the thrust washer (30) is present 

23. Refit the planetary earner. 

24. Fit the screws (40). Remove the guide pins. Tighten 
the screws to a torque of 91 - it 2 Nm. 

25. Turn the wheel hub so that tho filler plug is in a 
horizontal position. Top up tho oil level of the final 
drive unit. Refit the plug (21) with its seal (20). 

26. Refit the wheel. Remove the stands and the trolley 
jack. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 250 - 300 Nm 

27. Remove the chocks and release the handbrake. 
28. Carry out road test of front axle. Check (or leaks o; 

the joint face of the planetary carrier and of the 
fiHer-olug. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7B01.6 



Front axle - Final drive units 




C. Disassembly of wheel hub 

29. Remove the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 
1 to 6. 

30. Remove the circlip (29) and the sun gear (28). In 
view of the weight of the hub, place in a sling before 
removing. 

31 . Remove the screws (31). 

32. Use a locally made pulier (see section I) to extract 
the wheel hub (22) (Fig. 2). 

33. Remove the ring gear (44) assembled on the ring 
gear carrier (42) with the circlip (24), the shims [26] 
and the bearing cone (25). The shrink-fitted dowel 
pins (27) should remain in the swivel housing (47). 

34. If it proves necessary to replace the oil seal (45) 
and the bearing cones (18) and (25), remove the 
oii seal (45), extract the bearing cone (18) with a 
suitable extractor and disassemble the bearing 
cups (19) ana (23). 



D. Reassembly of wheel hub 

35. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

36. If the bearing cone (18) and the bearing cups (19) 
and (23) are to be replaced , push the bearing cone 
in the swivel housing and the bearing cups in the 
wheel hub until they meet the shoulder, 

Smear the outer periphery of the oil seal (45) with 
Loctite 542. Push against the shoulder .vithout 
aeforming it. 

37. Fit the wheel hub (22) on the swivel housing (47). Fit 
the bearing cone (25) supported by the bearing 
cup (23) to determine shims required to ootain : 
P2 = + 0.05 mm. 

38. Using a depth gauge, check the height "A" of the 
ring gear carrier (42) (Fig, 3) and the protrusion "B" 
of the bearing cone (25) out from the housing (47) 
(Fig. 4). 

39. Determine the thickness "SP" of the shims [26] 
(Fig. 5) to obtain the preload P2 using the (or- 
•nuia : 

SP = (A-B) + 0.05 mm 

Note : Shims come in various thicknesses as 
per the parts book. 
40 Fii ihe shims [26] (Fiy . 6) chosen in operation 39 on 
■he ring gear carrier (42) with bearing grease. Fit 
;he assembled ring gear carrier (42). ring gear 
(44) and shims [26]. with the two ends of the circlip 
(24) towards the bottom (Fig. 7). 





Fig. 3 




Fig. 4 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




7B01.7 



4 1 . Smear the screws (31 ) with Loctite 270 and tighten 
them gradually and alternately to a torque of 113- 
125 Nm. 

Note : Later axles fitted with 12.9 grade screws 
can be torqued to 125 - 155 Nm. 

42. Refit the sun gear (28) and the circlip (29). 

43. Refit the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 
20 to 28. 



E. Replacement of a wheel stud 

44. Chock the rear wheels. Apply the handbrake. 

45. Lift the relevant side with a trolley jack. Position a 
stand and remove the front wheel. 

46. Unscrew the faulty stud using a nut and a lock-nut. 

47. Lightly srnear the new stud with Loctite 270 and fit 
it. 

48. Lubricate the studs (43). Refit the wheel. Remove 
the stand and the jack. Tighten the nuts to a torque 
of 250 - 300 Nm. 



F. Disassembly of swivel housing 

49. Remove the planetary carriers. Carry out opera- 
tions 1 to 6. 

50. Remove the wheel hub. Carry out operations 30 
to 34. 

51 . Remove the split pin and the nut from the steering 
ball joint. Remove the ball joint. 

52. Support the swivel housing (47) in a sling. 





Fig. 7 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.nei 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7B01.8 



Front axle - Final drive units 




53. Remove the screws (1), cover (2), shims (3] and the 
bearing cup (4). Extract the swivel pin (17) with 
tools MF 195C and MF451 (Fig. 8). 

54. Remove the screws (1), cover (1 5) and the bearing 
cup (14). Extract the swivel pin (11) as described 
above for the upper swivel pin (Fig. 8). 

If necessary, remove the bearing cones (5) and 
(13) from the swivei pins 

55. Protect.the splines of the universal drive shaft so as 
noi to damage the seal (16). 

56. Remove the swivel housing (47). 

57. Remove the seal (16). If necessary, remove the 
breather (46) (if fitted) and drive out the bush (17). 
Note: To avoid risk of leakage, the breather in 
the swivel housing was eliminated and replaced 
with a plug. Refer to service bulletin issued in 
1990 for cut-in. 

58. Remove the universal drive shaft assembly. 

59. Remove the seal (8). If necessary, extract the 
bush (9). 



G. Reassembly of swivel housing 

60. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

61 . Fit the bush (9) (if removed). Smear the outer peri- 
phery of the new seal (8) with Loctite 542 and fit it 
against the shoulder of the axle housing (52). 

62. Lubricate the seal (8). Refit the universal drive shaft 
(10). Insert a guide through the oil filling hole to 
align the left drive shaft with the differential. 

63. Fit the bush (17) (if removed). Smear the outer pe- 
riphery of the new seal (16) with Loctite 542 and fit 
it against the shoulder of the swivel housing (47)_ 

64. If the steering lock stops have been removed, refit 
them as shown in Fig. 9 depending on angle 
required.. 

Push the bearing cones (5) and (1 3) (if removed) on 
to the swivei pins (7) and (11). Replace the O-rings 

(6) and (12). 

65. Refit the swivel housing (47) Position the swtvel pin 

(7) in such a way that the swivel housing assembly 
is aligned with the axle case (52). 

66. Fit the swivel pin (11). the bearing cup (14) and the 
cover (15). Tighten the screws (1) evenly and 
alternately so as to push the swivel pin (1 1 ) into the 
axle case. Tighten the screws to a torque of 91 - 
112 Nm. 




Fig. 8 




Fig. 9 



67. Fit the bearing cup (4). the shims [3] ana the cover 
(2). Fit and tighten the screws (1) in the manner 
described in operation 66. 

Check that the swivel pins (7) and (11) are 
properly in contact with the axle case. 

68. Remove the cover (2). Remove the shims [3]. Refit 
the cover and tighten the screws to a torque 1 1f\lm. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




7B01.9 



Shimming P1 

69. With a dial gauge, measure the axial play "J" using 
a lever between the axle case and the swivel 
housing (Fig. 10). 

70. Depending on the play "J" that is measured, de- 
termine the thickness of shims [3] needed to obtain 
(Fig. 11): 

P1 = "J" +0.30 

(0.30 being the preload value). 

71. Remove the screws (1), the cover (2) and the 
bearing cup (4). Pack the bearing cone (5) with 
bearing grease. Refit the bearing cup and the 
shims [3] selected in operation 70. Refit the cover. 
Smear the screws (1) with Loctite 241 and tighten 
them to a torque of 91 - 112 Nm. 

72. Remove the cover (15) and bearing cup (14). Pack 
the bearing cone (13) with bearing grease. Refit 
the bearing cup and the cover. Smear the screws 
(1) with Loctite 241 and tighten them to a torque of 
91 - 112Nm. 

73. Refit the steering ball joint. Tighten the nut to a 
torque of 1 05 -115 Nm. Lock the nut v/iih a new split 
pin. 

74. Refit the wheel hub. Carry out operations 36 to 41 . 

75. Remove the protection from the splines of the 
universal drive shaft. Fit the sun gear (28) and the 
circlip (29). 

76. Refit the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 20 
to 28. 




H. Removal and refitting of 
universal drive shaft 

Removal 

77. Remove the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 
1 to 6. 

78. Remove the circlip (29), cun gear (28) and the 
steering ball joint. 

79. Remove the assembled swivel housing (47) and 
wheel hub (22). Carry out operations 52 to 56. 

80. Remove the universal drive shaft (10). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7B01.10 



Front axle - Final drive units 




Disassembly of universal joint (Fig. 12) 

81 . Place the drive shaft in a vice with soft jaws. 

82. Remove the four circlips (3) ot each extremity of the 
joint. 

83. Use a plastic mallet to drive the central yoke (2) 
downwards until the bearing sleeve emerges. 

84. Place the bearing sleeve in a vice and strike the 
yoke to drive it out. 

85. Rernove-the opposite bearing sleeve in the same 
way and remove the section of the shaft. 

86. Turn the whole shaft through 90. then repeat ope- 
rations 83 to 85 to remove the universal joint from 
the shaft. 

87. Place the outer section of the shaft assembly in the 
vice and repeat operations 82 to 86. 

Reassembly of universal joint 

88. Clean and check the parts. Replace the universal 
joint assembly comprising the cross-pins, the 
seals, the bearings, the sleeves and the circiips. 

89. Smear the needles with bearing grease and ensure 
that they are all in the sleeves. 

90. Position the universal joint (1) in the yoke and push 
it as far as possible to the side (Fig. 13). so that the 
extremity of the cross-pin serves as a guide for 
fitting the sleeve with the needles. 

91. Drive the sleeve (1) sufficiently into the yoke, 
holding the cross-pin {Fig. 14) in order to fit the 
circlip. 

92. Fit the other sleeves and cross-pin in the same way. 

Refitting 

93. Refit the drive shaft assembly. Insert a guide 
through the oil filling hole to align the left drive shaft 
with the differential. 

94. Replace the seals (6) and (1 2). Refit the assembled 
swivel housing and wheel hub. 

95. Position the swivel pin (7) in such a way that the 
swivel housing assembly (47) is aligned with the 
axle case (52). 

96. Fit the swivel pin. (11) the bearing cup (14) and the 
cover (15). Tighten the screws (1) evenly and al- 
ternately so as to push the swivel pin (11) into the 
axle case. 



(7 


) (2)/^ 




__-- — 




u^y ; % 




N> —^3 7 yj 










7 


// (3) 


"\ 


Fig. 12 




Issuet 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




7B01.11 



97. Remove the cover (15) and the bearing cup (14). 
Pack the bearing cone (13) with bearing grease. 
Refit the bearing cup and the cover. Tighten the 
bolts (1) smeared with Loctite 241 to a torque of 91 
- l12Nm. 

98. Fit the bearing cup (4), the shims [3] and the cover 
(2). Tighten the bolts as in operation 96. 
Check that the swivel pins (7) and (11) are 
properly in contact with the axle case (52). 

99. Remove the cover (2). Remove the shims [3] and 
the bearing cup (4). Pack the bearing cone (5) with 
bearing grease. Refit the bearing cup, the shims 
and the cover. Tighten the bolts (1) smeared with 
Loctite 241 to a torque of 91 - 1 12 Nm. 



100. Refit the steering ball joint. Tighten the nut to a 
toraue oM 03 - 1 15 Nm. Lock the nut with a new 
pin. 

101 . Remove the protection of the snaft. Refit the sun 
gear (28) and the circiip (29). 

102. Refit the pianetary earner. Carry out operations 20 
to 28. 



I. Service tool 



Tool to be made locally 

Wheel hub puller (see Fig. 2). 






1 




___ 




i 




!| 


a 


L_ 


i 


r 


d 








dX 



_U5_ 



___JQ_ 



II 



'3F-§^ 



J55_ 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




7B01.12 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Final drive units 




'•/ V 



I 



miv.---T' r,i ; v/ 



i 




ZZZZZZBEZZ r-'^^iitr- -n- 



f 



430 



_3Z. 



J7Q_ 



JZQ_ 



_3Z_ 



S L28. 1 an 

r i 



J7_ 



^s. 



I f i 



/ I 




i^^> 




70 



-TO ~- 



159 



159 



e 



_ZI5_ 



_2!5^ 






H« 



=f 



j^ZZZ 






38 




_fll25„ 



-I 



% 



Issuel 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7 B02 Final drive units 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Removal of planetary carrier, sun gear, ring gear 

B. Refitting of ring gear, sun gear, planetary carrier 

C. Disassembly of wheel hub 

D. Reassembly of wheel hub 



E. Replacement of a wheel stud 



F. Disassembly of swivel housing 

G. Reassembly of swivel housing 



I 



Improved front axle - Final drive units 7B02. 1 



H. Removal and refitting of universal drive shaft __ 9 

I. Service tools 10 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




7B02.2 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



improved front axle - Final drive units 



^r 



General 



Note : This procedure applies to tractors equipped 
with improved front axles cat. 1 to 3.5 fitted from 
serial numbers : 
-axles cat. 1 and 2 

3050 : A209023 

3060/3065 : standard seal ; A 1630 15 
reinforced seal : A 161005 

- axle cat. 2.5 
3070/80/85/95/31 15/20 ; A20901 1 

- axle cat. 3.5 
3125 : A007039 

The final drive unit has a swivel housing (47) which 
articulates on the front axle round the two swivels (7) 
and (111 . The wheel hub (22) turns on two taper roller 
bearings whose cups (23) and (19) are force fitted in the 
housing. The bearing cone (18) is free on the swivel 
housing and the opposite bearing cone (25) is force 
fitted on the ring gear earner (42). 
Unlike the non improved axle, the taper roller Dearings 
are not adjustable. The components are produced with 
machining tolerances which do not require adjustment 
or shimming. 

The drive from the front differential is transmitted to the 
wheel through the universal drive shaft assembly (10), 
the sun gear (28). and the wheel hub which is fastened 
to the planetary pinions (38) which react off the static 
ring gear (44). 



This ring gear is held by two rings (24) and (26) onto its 

carrier (42} wnicn is spiined onto the swivel housing 

(47) and locked in position Py the central nut (27). 

The hub/housing is sealed by a double lip seal (45) 

working against the seal cage (46) and it also has a seal 

against water ingress (50). The swivel housing is seaied 

on its input shaft by seal (16). 

The front axle housing is seaied on its anve shaft by seal 

(8). 

The two pivots are sealed by O'rings (6) and (12). 



Service tools (see section I p. 10) 

MF451B Wheel hub puller 

MF451 B3 Extractor for puller M 1 8 ^ 

3376880 M1 Socket for ring gear earner nut (axle caiP 

2.5 and 3.5) 

3376926 M1 Socket for ring gear carrier nut (axle caT- 1 

and 2) 



Parts list 


(18) 


3earing cone 


(36) 


Planetary carrier 


(1) 


Bolt 


(19) 


3earing cup 


(37) 


Plate 


(2) 


Cover 


(20) 


Seal 


(38) 


Planetary pinion 


13) 


Shim(s) 


(21) 


Plug 


(39) 


Plate 


(4) 


Bearing cup 


(22) 


Wheel hub 


(40) 


Screw 


(51 


Bearing cone 


(23) 


3earmg cup 


/41\ 


Planetary pinion pin 


(6) 


O-ring 


(24) 


Retaining ring 


(42) 


Ring gear earner 


(7) 


Swivel pin 


(25) 


3eanng cone 


(43) 


Wheel stud 


(8) 


Oil seal 


126] 


Retaining ring 


(441 


Rmg gear 


(9) 


Bush 


(27) 


Nut 


(45) 


Oil seal 


(10) 


Universal drive shaft 


(28) 


Sun gear 


(46) 


Seal cage 


(ID 


Swivel pin 


(29) 


Circlip 


(471 


Swivel housing 


(12) 


O-ring 


(30) 


Thrust washer 


(48) 


Stop screw 


(131 


Bearing cone 


131) 


3ush 


(49) 


Nut 


(14) 


Bearing cup 


(32) 


O-ring 


(50) 


Oil seal 


(15) 


Cover 


(33) 


Retaining ring 


(51) 


Spacer (cat. 1 to 2.5) 


(16) 


Oil seal 


(34) 


Circlip 


(52) 


Ax.ie housmq 


(171 


Bush 


(35) 


Needles 


(53) 


Smterea Pushing f 


Issue i 


December 1993 







www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Final drive units 




7B02.3 



General arra figment 




Issue 1 



December 1 993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7B02.4 



improved front axle - Final drive units 



^ 



Explosed drawing 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Final drive units 




7B02.5 



A . Removal of planetary carrier, sun 
gear, ring gear 

1 . Block the rear wheels. Apply the handbrake. 

2. The 4W0 clutch being engaged, lift the two wheels 
to allow to the wheel hub (22) to turn freely. 
Position props. 

3. Remove the wheel on the relevant side. 

4. Drain the final drive unit. 

5. Remove bolts (40). 

6. Remove the planetary carrier with the thrust 
washer (30). 

7. Remove the circlip (29) and the sun gear (28). 

8. Unstake the nut (27) and unscrew it using socket 
3376880 Ml (axle cat. 2.5 and 3.5) or 3376926 Ml 
(axle cat. 1 and 2) (Fig. 2). Extract the ring gear 
carrier (42) assembly. Remove the retaining rings 
(24) (26). Separate the ring gear (44) from the ring 
gear carrier. 

Disassembly of planetary carrier 

9. Place the planetary carrier in a vice with soft jaws. 

1 0. Remove the circtip (34). 

1 1 . Gradually remove the planetary pinion pin /41\ (Fig. 
1). recover the needles. Remove the O'ring (32) 
and if necessary the retaining ring (33). 

1 2. Repeat operation 1 1 for both planetary pinions. 

Reassembly of planetary carrier 

1 3. Clean and check the parts, replace those which are 
defective. 

1 4. In one planetary pinion (38), place the needles (35) 
coated with bearing grease. 

1 5. Replace the O'ring (32) on the planetary pinion pin 
/41\, refit the retaining ring (33) (if removed). 

1 6. Lightly engage the planetary pinion pin /41\ in the 
planetary carrier cover, insuring that the notch of 
the shaft is aligned with that of the cover to fit the 
circlip (34). Fit the plate (37). Center the planetary 
pinion (38) with its needles. Engage the pin in the 
planetary pinion. Fit the plate (39). Insert entirely 
the pin and fit the circlip (34). 

1 7. Manually check the axial play and rotation of the 
planetary pinion. 

18. Repeat operations 14 to 17 for the other two plane- 
tary pinions. 




B . Refitting of ring gear, sun gear, 
planetary carrier 

1 9. Assemble the ring gear (44) on the ring gear earner 
(42) with retaining rings (24) (26) ensuring that they 
are properly engaged in their grooves. 

20. Fit the ring gear carrier (42) assembly on the splines 
of the swivel housings (47). 

21 . Clean the threads of the nut (27). lightly coat them 
with Loctite 270. Tighten to o torque of 400 • 
450 Nm. 

22. Lock the nut by bending its lock tab into the slot. 

23. Manually check rotation of the wheel hub (22). 

24. Fit sun gear (28) ana circlip (29). 

25. Screw two guide studs diametraly opposed on the 
wheel hub (22). 

26. Coat the joint of the planetary carrier with a sealing 
product (Loctite 510 or equivalent). 

27. Check that the thrust washer (30) is present. 

28. Refit the planetary carrier 

29. Fit the bolts (40). Remove the guide studs. Tighten 
the bolts to a torque of 91 - 112 Nm. 

30. Turn the wheel hub to place the filler plug m a 
horizontal position. Too up the oil level of the final 
drive unit. Refit the plug (21) with its seal (20). 



Issue i 



December 1993 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7B02.6 Improved front axle - Final drive units 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



31 . Refit the wheel. Remove the props and the trolley 
jack. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 250 - 300 Nm. 

32. Remove the shims and release the handbrake. 

33. Carry out road test of front axle. Check the sealing 
of the joint face of the planetary carrier and of the 
filler plug. 



C . Disassembly of wheel hub 

34. Remove the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 
1 to 6. 

35. Remove the circlip (29) and the sun gear (28). 

36. In view of the weight of the hub. place in a slsng 
before removing. Unstake and unscrew the nut 
(27) with socket (Fig. 2) : 

- 3376926 Ml : axle cat. 1 and 2 

- 3376880 M1 : axle cat. 2.5 and 3.5 

37. Remove the wheel hub (22). 

38. Remove the bearing cone (18) and if necessary 
extract the bearing cone (25) by the ring gear carrier 
(42) holes with a suitable extractor. Disassemble 
the bearing cups (19) (23). 

39. Remove the seal (50). Extract the seal cage (46) (if 

necessary). 



D . Reassembly of wheel hub 

40. Clean and check the parts, replace those which are 
defective. 

41 . If the bearing cones (18) (25) and the bearing cups 
(19) (23) have to be replaced, push the bearing 
cone (18) on the swivel housing, the bearing cone 
(25) on the ring gear carrier (42) and the bearing 
cups on the wheel hub until they meet the 
shoulder. 

Note : The bearing cones (18) (25) and the 
bearing cups (19) (23) must imperatively be 
from the serie N (width tolerance = 0,1 instead 
of 0£mm). The shimming of these bearings is 
determined by the machining tolerances of the 
swivel housing (47), the wheel hub (22) and the 
ring gear carrier (42). Each part could be repla- 
ced separately. If the rotation of the wheel hub 
(22) is incorrect after fitting, research the defec- 
tive part. 




42. With a locally made drift, push the seal cage (46) 
{if removed) until it meets the shoulder. Place the oil 
seal (50) the iio facing the oil seal (45). 

Note : The tool is centered on the inner diameter 
of the wheel hub (22). To push the cage, it is 
necessary to remove the bearing cups (19) (23), 

43. Fit the wheel hub (22) on the swivel housing (47), 

44. Engage the ring gear carrier assembled with the 
ring gear (44) on the splines of swivel housing. 

45. Clean the threads of the nut (27). Apply Loctite 270 
and tighten to a torque of 400-450 Nm with special 
socket 3376880 Ml. 

46. Lock the nut by bending its lock tab into the slot. 

47. Manually check the rotation of wheel hub (22). 

48. Refit the sun gear (28) and the circtip (29). ^^ 

49. Refit the planetary carrier. Carry out operations ^r 
to 33. 



Issue 1 



December 1 993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Final drive units 




7B02.7 



E . Replacement of a wheel stud 

50. Block the rear wheels. Apply the handbrake. 

51 . Lift the relevant side with a trokey jack. Position a 
prop and remove the "front wheel. 

52. Unscrew the faulty stud using a nut and a lock-nut. 

53. Lightly coat the new stud with Loctite 270 and fit it. 

54. Lubricate the studs. Refit the wheel. Remove the 
prop and the jack. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 
250 - 300 Nm. 




F . Disassembly of swivel housing G . Reassembly of swivel housing 



55. Remove the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 
1 to 6. 

56. Remove the wheel hub. Carry out operations 35 to 
38. 

57. Remove seal (45) if necessary. Remove the pin and 
the nut of the steering ball joint. Extract the ball 
joint. 

58. Place the swivel housing (47) in a sling. 

59. Remove the bolts (1), the cover (2). Take off the 
shims [3] and the bearing cup (4), extract the swivel 
pin (7) with remover MF451B and adaptor 
MF45lB3(Fig. 3). 

60. Remove the bolts (1). Remove the cover (15) and 
the bearing cup (14). Extract the swivel pin (11) as 
described above for the upper swivel pin (Fig. 3). If 
necessary, extract the bearing cones (5) (13) of the 
swivel pins. 

61. Protect the splines of the universal drive shaft as 
not to damage the seal (16). 

62. Remove the swivel housing (47), 

63. Remove the seal (16) and drive out the bush (17). 
Note : Thebush (31) is fined with Loctite 270. To 
avoid risk of leakage, the breather of the swivel 
housing has been suppressed. 

64. If necessary, remove the universal drive shaft. 
Remove the seal (8) and extract the bush (9). 



65. Clean and check tne oarts, reciace those which are 
defective. 

66. If removed, fit the bush (9) and the new seal (8) 
against the shoulder of the axie housing (52). oil the 
seal (8). Refit the universal drive shaft. Introduce a 
guide through the filling hole to align the left drive 
shaft with the differential. 

67. If removed, fit the bush (17) and the new seal (16) 
against the shoulder of the axie housing (47). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



7B02.8 



Improved front axle - Final drive units 



* 



68. The steering lock adjustment of axles cat. 1 to 2.5 is 
made by spacers (51) of different lenghts fitted on 
swivel housing (47). For axies cat. 3.5 adjust the 
screw (48) (Fig. 4) . According to the turning circle 
required, report to the table here below. After 
adjustment, lock the nut (49) : 

Dimension X Turning circle 
77 mm 35° 

63 mm 40° 

34 mm 50° 

69. Refit the swivel housing (47). Position the swivel 
pin (7) provided with O'ring (6) so that the swivel 
housing assembly is aligned with the axle case (52). 

70. Fit the swivel pin (11) provided with O'ring (12), the 
bearing cup (14), the cover (15). Tighten the bolts 

(I) evenly and alternately to push the swivel pin 

(II) into the axie housing. Tighten the bolts to a 
torque of 91 - 112 Nm. 

71 . Fit the bearing cup (4), the shims [3], the cover (2). 
Fit and tighten the bolts (1) in the same way that in 
operation 70. Check that the swivel pins (7) (1 1 ) 
are properly in contact with the axle housing. 

72. Remove the cover (2), remove the shims [3J. Refit 
the cover and tighten the bolts to a torque of 91 - 
112Nm. 

Shimming Pi. 

73. With a dial gauge, measure the axial play using a 
lever between the axle housing and the swivel 
housing (Fig. 5). 

74 . According to the play J, determine the thickness of 
shims [31 to obtain (Fig. 6) : 

PI = J + 0,30 (0,30 being the preload value) 

75. Remove the bolts (1). the cover (2), the bearing cup 
(4). coat the bearing cone (5) with bearing grease. 
Refit the bearing cup, the shims [3] selected in 
operation 74. Refit the cover. Apply Loctite 241 on 
bolts (1) and tighten to a torque of 91 -112 Nm. 

76. Remove the cover (15} and the bearing cup (14). 
Coat the bearing cone (13) with bearing grease. 
Refit the bearing cup and the cover. Apply Loctite 
241 on bolts (1) and tighten to a torque of 91 - 
112 Nm. 

77. Using a locally made drift pusn seal (45) (if 
removedl against the shoulder. Refit the steering 
ball joint. Tighten the nut to a torque of 103 -1 15 
Nm, Lock the nut with a new pin. 

78. Refit the wheel hub. Carry out operations 41 to 47. 

79. Remove the protection on the splines of the univer- 
sal drive shaft. Fit the sun gear (28) and the circlip 
(291 

80. Remove the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 
25 to 33. 





Fig. 



[ -I r-i. L!| 1 

3 h--JSS33^ 




hlHH^ 










t 


XV^OI;.- ■ 


1 


<-,-,lS/ 




^0$£3^ 




INfcuj^KN 


Fig.d 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



Ik 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Final drive units 




7B02.9 



H . Removal and refitting of universal 
drive shaft 

Removal 

81 . Remove the planetary carrier. Carry out operations 
1 to 6. 

82. Remove the circiip (29), the sun gear (28) and 
extract the steering ball joint. 

83. Remove the swivel housing (47} assembly and the 
wheel hub (22). Carry out operations 58 to 62. 

84. Remove the universal drive shaft (10). 

Disassembly of universal joint (Fig. 7) 

85. Maintain the external section (1) of the universal 
drive shaft in a vice with soft jaws. 

86. Remove the four circlips (3) from each end of the 
universal joint. 

87. Use a plastic mallet to drive the central yoke (2) 
downwards until the bearing sleeve protrudes. 

88. Place the bearing sleeve in a vice and tap the central 
yoke from the bearing, 

89. Remove the opposing bearing sleeve in the same 
way and remove the external section of the shaft. 

90. Turn the shaft assembly through 90°, then repeat 
operations 87 to 89 to disengage the universal joint 
from the shaft. 

91 . Place the interior section of the drive shaft in the 
vice and repeat operations 86 to 90. 

Reassembly of universal joint 

92. Clean and check the parts. Replace the universal 
loint assembly comprising the yokes, the seals, the 
bearings, the sleeves and the circlips. 

93. Coat the needles with bearing grease and ensure 
that they are all in the sleeves. 

94. Position the universal joint (1 ) in the yoke and move 
it sideways as far as possible to provide a guide for 
the needle rollers of the bearing sleeve being 
installed (Fig. 8). 

95. Drive the sleeve (1) into the yoke deep enough to 
permit insertion of the circiip (Fig. 9). 

96. Fit the other sleeves and universal joints in the 
same way. 





Fig. S | 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



WW 



7B02. 10 Improved front axle - Final drive units 



Refitting 

97. Refit the universal drive shaft. Introduce a guide 
through the filling hole to align the left drive shaft 
with the differential. 

98. Replace the seats (61 and (121. Remove the 
swivel housing assembly and wheel hub. 

99. Position the swivel pin (7) in such a way that the 
swivel housing (47) assembly is aligned with the 
axle case (52). 

1 00. Fit the swivel pin (11), the bearing cup (14). the 
cover (15). Tighten the screws (1) evenly and 
alternately to push the swivel pin (11) into the 
axle case. 

101. Remove the cover (15) and the bearing cup (14). 
Coat the bearing cone (13) with bearing grease. 
Refit the bearing cup and the cover. Apply Loctite 
241 on bolts (1) and tighten to a a torque of 91 - 
112 Nm, 

I . Service tools 

A . Tools available on the MF network 
MF451B Wheel hub puller 
MF451B3 Adaptor for puller Ml 8. 



3376880 M1 Socket for ring gear carrier nut 
(cat. 2.5 and 3.5) 

3376926 Ml Socket for ring gear carrier nut 
(cat. 1 and 2) 



1 02. Fit the bearing cup (4), the shims I3J, the cover 
(2). Tighten the bolts as in operation 100. 
Check that the swivel pin (7) and (11) are 
properly in contact with the axle case (52). 

1 03. Remove the cover (2). Remove trie shims r 3Jand 
the bearing cup (4). Coat the bearing (5) with 
bearing grease. Refit the bearing cup, the shims 
and the cover. Apply Loctite 241 on bolts (1) and 
tighten to a a torque of 91 - 11 2 Nm. 

1 04. Refit the steering ball joint. Tighten the nut to a 
torque of 103- 11 5 Nm. Stake the nut with a new 
pin. 

1 05. Remove the protection of the shaft. Refit the sun 
gear (28) and the circlip (29). 

1 06. Refit the planetary carrier. Carry our operations 25 
to 33. fl 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Improved front axle - Final drive units 7B02. 7 7 



8 . Tools to be made up locally 
Swivel housing oil seal fitting tool 



C4L1-Z 


A 


B 


C 


D 


r. 


F I. 


H 


1 


L 

28 


M 
106 


N 


i p | Q 


076 


81.3*0,3*0.2 


156 


0168.8*0.1/0 


01SM.2 


e?io 


1U.I> 


151 


a ?o I01O2 (io. 1 «-o.» 


C31. 2.5 ■ 3.5 


086 


BT.3 »0,3*0,2 


ISO 


£1193.8*0,1/0 


0219.2 


O240 


20.S 


17 


67 


42 


118 


173 


76 J0 1Q8 j 9.50/-0.1 




Seal cage fitting tool { all models ) 



rv 



• 



CM 1 4ft > ^ 



s 



040 



Knurled 



/' 



g^o 



C12 345 



B195- 



J2BS, 



_flJ0— 






tm*45' 



/ 

/ 



_aaa 



ggya 



^2iX 



ll 



til3i30/ 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Differential 




7C01.1 



7C01 Differential 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Splitting between the front axle and the frame 



B. Removal of swivel housings, wheel hubs and universal 
drive shafts 



C. Removal of differential gear case assembly 



D. Disassembly of differential 



E. Removal of differential lock 



F. Removal of bevel drive pinion 



G. Reassembly of bevel drive pinion 



8 



H. Reassembly of differential lock 



10 



I. Piston leak test 



11 



J. Refitting of differential case assembly - 



12 



K. Refitting of swivel housings, wheel hubs and universal 
drive shafts 



12 



L. Reassembly of front axle ' frame 



12 



M. Service tools 



13 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




7C01.2 



Front axle - Differential 



General 



The bevel crownwheei and pinion assembly containing 
the differential lock device (hydralock) is mounted in a 
casing (7) comprising two bearing halves (43) fastened 
by bolts (42). 

The bevel drive pinion is mounted at the rear of the 
casing on two opposed taper roller bearings. Its posi- 
tion can be adjusted by means of shims [8] situated 
behind the head roller bearing. The preload of the roller 
bearings is adjusted by controlled tightening of the nut 

(D 

The assembly is sealed by two seals (4) and (2). Axles 
of categories 2.5 and 3 have an O-ring (41 ) mounted on 
the bevel drive pinion and axles of categories 1 and 2 
have an O-ring (40) fitted in the spacer (3). 

Axles of categories 1 to 2.5 have two planetary pinions 

(38) ana one pin (36) and axles of category 3 have four 

planetary pinions and two pins. 

The clearance between the crownwheel and bevel 

drive pinion is adjusted by shims [22] placed behind 

the cup (29). 

Preload of the case and crownwheel assembly is done 

with the splined nut (32). 



Parts list 


0) 


Slotted nut 


(2) 


Lip seal 


(3! 


Spacer 


(4) 


Sealing ring 


(5) 


Bearing cone 


(6) 


Bearing cup 


(7) 


Casing 


[8] 


Shim(s) 


(9) 


Bearing cup 


(10) 


Bearing cone 


(11) 


Diff. gear 


(12) 


Lug washer 


(13) 


Retaining ring 


(14) 


Piston 


(15) 


O-ring 


(16] 


Thrust washer 


/17\ 


Spring 


(18) 


Dog tooth coupler 


(19) 


O-ring 


/20\ 


Guide washer 


(21) 


Washer 


[22] 


Shim(s) 


(23) 


Bolt 



(24) 


Cover 


(25) 


Housing half 


(26) 


Housing half 


(27) 


Crownwheei 


(28) 


Nut 


(29) 


Cup 


(30) 


Bolt 


(31) 


Locking plate 


(32) 


Splined nut 


(33) 


Bearing cone 


(34) 


Dowel 


(35) 


Washer 


(36) 


Planetary pinion otn 


(37) 


Spherical washer 


(38) 


Planetary pinion 


(39) 


Beve? drive pinion 


(40) 


O-ring (cat. ! - 2) 


(41) 


0-nng(cat. 2.5 -3) 


(42) 


Bolt 


(43) 


2ea r ^g naif 


(44) 


Centring busn 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Differential 




7C01.3 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




7C01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Differential 




V 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



-■/ 



Front axle - Differential 




7C01.5 



A. Splitting front axle / frame 

1 . Chock the rear wheels and apply the handbrake. 

2. Disconnect the two hoses of the front differential 
lock (plug the channels). Remove the shield and 
the drive shaft. 

3. Drain the axie. 

4. Raise the tractor with a jack positioned under the 
axis of the axle housing. Place a stand (Fig. 3) 
under the fewer engine housing. Remove the 
wheels. 

5. Disconnect the pipes of the steering cylinder. 
marking their position (plug the channels). 

6. Place the front axie in slings (Fig. 3). 

7. Remove the bolts (1) ana the grease nipple (3). 
Remove bearing (2) and washer (4) (Fig. 1 ). 

8. Remove the front axle, disengaging it from its rear 
bearing, and olace it on a support. Remove the 
chamfered washer (7) (Fig. 1 ). 

Note: On tractors equipped with a belly weight, 
it is necessary to remove this in order to 
remove the front axie. 

B. Removal of swivel housings, 
wheel hubs and universal drive 
shafts 

Note: Exercise care when carrying out this opera- 
tion 

9. Remove the steering ball joints. 

10. Place the swivel housing assembly in a sling. 

1 1 . Remove the swivel housings. Carry out operations 
53 and 54, chapter 7B01. 

1 2. With the heip of another person, remove the 
assemblies. 

13. If necessary, remove the seals (8) (Fig. 2) 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C01.6 



Front axle - Differential 




C. Removal of differential case 
assembly 

14. Remove the bolts (1) and detach the steering 
cylinder (2), taking care not to lose the centring 
bushes or the rings (3) (depending on the 
category) (Fig. 4). 

15. Remove the bolts (1). Detach and remove the 
differential case assembly (8) (Fig. 5). 
On tractors equipped with front axles of categories 
1-2-2.5, the differential case is centred by means 
of dowels force-fitted in the axle casing (52), and 
on category 3 axles by means of rings, likewise 
force-fitted. 



P. Disassembly of differential 

16. Place the casing (7) in a soft-jawed vice (Fig. 6). 
17. Remove the bolt (30) and its retainer (31) (Fig. 6). 
18 Remove the splined nut (32) using the special, 
locaily made spanner (see section M), 

19. Remove the four bolts (42), detach the bearing 
halves («) (Fig. 6). 

Note: Carefully remove the bearing half on the 
lock control side; with the spring /1 7\ compres- 
sed, the washer (21) should remain in the ca- 
sing (7). 

20. Remove the complete differential assembly with 
the bearing cones (33) and the cups (29) (Fig. 7). 
Seoarate the cups from the taper roller bearings. 
Remove the shim(s) [22], 

Note: Keep the bearing cones and cups paired 
if they are to be reused . 





Fig. 4 




Fig. 5 




Issue t 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Differential 




7C01.7 



21. If necessary, extract the two bearing cones (33). 

22. Place the differential assembly in a soft-jawed 
vice. Remove the nuts (28). Take out the bolts (23). 
Note: Prior to disassembly, mark the position of 
the bearing halves (25) and (26) and of the cover 
(24) so that they can be paired when refitting. 

23. Separate the bearing halves (25), (26) and the 
cover (24). 

24. Remove the gear (11) and washer (35). 

Front axle, category 1 - 2 - 2.5 (Fig. 8) 

25. Separate the pin (36), the planetary pinions (38) 
and the spherical washers (37). 

Front axle, category 3 (Fig. 9) 

26. Separate the two pins (36). the planetary pinions 
(38) and the spherical wasners (37). 



E. Removal of differential lock 
(Fig. 10) 

27. Using tool MF471. correctly centred, compress the 
spring /1 7\ until the supporting washer (21 ) is free. 

28. Remove the washer (21). 

29. Gradually relax the spring /17V 

30. Remove the service tool MF 47 1 . 

31. Remove the guide washer /20\oi the spring. 

32. Remove the spring /17Y 

33. Remove the retaining ring (13) of the dog tooth 
coupler (18). 

34. Dismantle the coupler (18). (he thrust washer (16) 
and the lug washer (12). 

35. Remove the piston (14). 

36. Take out the O-rings (15) and (19). 



(26) (36) :25) 24 




0.8 



[26 



(38) f^V/jn (36} (25 





@n / 



Fig. so 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




7C01.8 



Front axle - Differential 



F. Removal of bevel drive pinion 

37. Unlock the nut (1) and untighten it with Facom 
spanner n° 125-80 or equivalent (Fig. 1 1 ). 

38. Remove the bevel gear pinion (39) together with 
the bearing cone (10). 

39. Front axles category 2.5 and 3: Remove the O- 
ring{41). 

40. Remove-the bearing cone (10) of the bevel drive 
pinion. 

41 . Remove the cup (9) and the shims [8]. 
Remove the spacer (3). Take out the seal (2). 
Front axles category 1 and 2: Remove the O-ring 
(40) 

42. Remove the sealing ring (4). the cone (5) and the 
cup (6). 



G. Reassembly of bevel drive pinion 

43. Before reassembly, clean the parts and replace 
those which are defective. Check that the chan- 
nels of the differential lock are not obstructed. 
Note: If it should prove necessary to replace the 
crownwheel (27) or the bevel drive pinion (39), 
the two parts should be replaced together. 
44. Adjust the position of the bevel drive pinion (Fig. 
1 2). The thickness of the shims needed to position 
the bevel drive pinion correctly is calculated ac- 
cording to the following formula: 
SP = A - (d+t) 
where: 

SP: -equired thickness oi shims [8] 
A: distance measured between the bearing 
cone (10) placed in the cup (9) and the 
machined face F of the casing (7). 
d: nominal dimension varying according to the 
type of axie. 

category 1 (3050) = 118 

category 2 (3060-3065) = 118 

category 2.5 

(3070 up to 31 15-3120) = 118 

category 3 (3 1 25 -3 1 40) = 135 

t : actual dimension marked on the head of the 
bevel drive pinion. This value may be 
positive or negative (to be added or 
subtracted from nominal dimension d). 





Fig. 11 




Method of operation (Fig 12) 

45. Position the cup (9) ana the bearing cone (10) in 
the casing (7) without the shims [8J. 
Using a depth gauge, measure dimension A. 
Take care to seat the oearinncono correctly in the 
cup. Having taken :ne measurement, apply the 
formuia to determine the thickness of the shims 
neeaed. 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Differential 




7C01.9 



46. Remove the bearing cone (10) and cup (9) again. 

47. Push the bearing cone (10) against the shouider 
of the beve! drive pinion using a press ana a 
suitable tool (Fig. 13). 

48. Place the shim [8] of the previously calculated 
thickness in the casing. 

49. Fit the cup (9). 

50. Place the cup (6) in the casing as far as it will go. 

51 . Position the bevel drive pinion (39) preparea with 
the cone (10). 

52. Smear the bearing surface of the bearing cone (5) 
with Loctite 601 and position it on the bevet drive 
pinion. 

53. Fit the O-ring (41) (axles category 2.5 and 3) the 
O-ring (40) (axies category 1 - 2). 

54. Smear the periphery of the sealing ring (4) with 
Lcctite 5^2 and push tt into the casing (7) as far as 
: . will go. with the metal oart turnea towaras T .ne 
exterior of the casing. 

55. F>{ ihe seal (2) in me spacer (3) with the lio facing 
towards the interior of the housing. 

56- Smear the interior of the spacer (3) '.van L;;;ite 
601. then position it temporarily at the end of the 
bevel drive pinion. Grease the exterior of the spa- 
cer and the tip joint (2). Place the spacer finaiiy in 
contact with the bearing cone (5). 

57. Replace the nut (1). smear it with Loctite 270 and 
then tighten it lightly on the bevel drive pinion. 
Note: Check that there is clearance between the 
spacer (3) and housing. 

58. Rotate the bevel drive pinton through a few turns. 
Using a torque wrench and an aaapted grooved 
sleeve, check that the rotational torque is between 
2.5 and 3.5 Mm (Fig. 14). Tighten or untighten the 
nut (1 ) with Facom spanner n J 1 25-80 or equivalent 
until the desired rotational torque is obtained. 

59. Lock the nut (1) by bending its cotfar in 3 equidis- 
tant grooves. 




Fig. 13 




Fig. 14 



issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C01.10 



Front axle - Differential 




V 



H. Reassembly of differential lock 

60. Mount the thrust washer (16) on the coupler (18). 
Fit the assembly in the piston (14). Fit the lug 
washer (12) and position the retaining ring (13) in 
the groove of the coupler. 

Note: The toothing of the coupler has been 
strengthened (see service bulletin Tract.89/ 
005). 

61. Mount the piston (14) together with the coupler 
(18) in the packingless casing. 

Wore; The dowel (34) is force-fitted in the 
piston. Check that the piston and the dowel 
slide freely in the housing. 
Having carried out the check, remove the pis- 
ton together with the coupler. 

62. Fit new O-rings (15) and (19). Position the piston 
with the coupler, then insert it with the aid of a 
plastic mallet, striking it on the periphery. 

63. Position the spring /17\ and the washer /20\. v/uh 
the snoulder of the washer facing the spring. 
Tension the assembly with service tool MF 47 1 until 
the washer (21) slides freely in the groove of the 
casing. 

64. Loosen the service tool MF 471, taking care to 
ensure that the spring cannot escape. 

65. Fit the bearing cone (33), if it has been removed, 
on the housing half (26) using a press or a suitable 
tool (Fig. 15). 

66. Fit the other bearing cone (33). if it has been 
removed, on the cover (24). 

67. Assemble the housing half (25) in the cover (24) 
(with claw teeth), observing the marking made at 
the time of dismantling. 

68. Position the washer (35) on the axle gear (11). 
Place the assembly in the housing half (25), putting 
the tab of the washer in one of the holes of the 
housing half. 



Front axles, category 1 - 2 - 2.5 (Fig. 8) 

69. Place the two planetary pinions (38) ana the two 
spherical washers (37) on the planetary pinion pin 
(36). '.hen place the assemoly in the housing half 
(25). putting the tabs of the spnencal washers (37) 
in the holes of the housing hall (25). 




Fig. 15 



Front axles, category 3 (Fig. 9) 

70. Place the four oianetarv pinions (38) 'snd the four 
spherical washers (37) on tna two pins (36). then 
place the assemblies in the housing half (25). 
putting the tabs of the spherical washers (37) in the 
holes of the housing half (25). 

Front axles, categories 1 to 3 

7 1 . Place the other washer (35) on the other gear (11). 
Place the assembly in the housing half (26), taking 
care to ensure that the position of the tab of the 
washer (35) is correct. 

72. Position the housing half (26) assembly on the 
housing half (25). maintaining the assembly posi- 
tion marked at the time of dismantling. , 

73. Position the crownwheel (27) on the housing half 
(26). Fasten together the housing halves (25) ana 
(26), the cover (24) and the crownwheel. 

Fit the bolts (23) and smear them with Loctite 270. 
Tighten the nuts (28) to a torque of 66 - 73 Nm. 

74. Position the cups (29) on their cones (33). 

75. Place the crownwheel assembly in the casing (7) 
(Fig. 7). 

76. Check that the centring bushes (44) -'ire present. 
Fit the shims [22]. Position the Oearmq halves (43). 
Moderately tighten the bolts (42) so that the cups 
(29) move freely. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Differential 




7C01.11 



77. Put the housing in a horizontal position in a soft- 
jawed vice, the crown uppermost (Fig. 16). 

78. Put a dial gauge in place. Tighten the nut (32) (Fig , 
1 6) and turn the crownwheel a few times to seat the 
bearing cones property in the cups. Tighten the nut 
again to eliminate the axial play. 

79. Tighten the nut (32) a further 3 notches to obtain 
the correct preload. 

80. Gheck the backlash between the teeth of the 
crownwheel and of the pinion with a dial gauge 
(Fig. 1 7). Take three readings at three equidistant 
points. Determine the average of the three 
readings. This should be within the following 
values : 

Category 1 and 2 = 0.17 mm - 0.22 mm 

Category 2.5 = 0. 1 5 mm - 0.20 mm 

Category 3 = 0.10 mm - 0.20 mm 

If the reading is too high, reduce the thickness of 

the shims [22], If it is too low, increase the thicK- 

ness until a correct backlash is obtained. 

8 1 . Remove the bearing bolts (42) one dv one. Smear 
them with Loctite 270 and tighten tnem to a torque 
of 136- 150 Nm. 

82. Refit the locking plate (31) with the bolt (30) 
smeared with Loctite 270 and tighten to a torque of 
1 6-26 Nm. Lock the nut (32), bending the tab of the 
locking plate in the appropriate groove. 



1. Piston leak test 

83. Connect a pressure gauge equipped with a valve 
to the supply connector of the differential lock, 

84. Supply the circuit with compressed air at a pres- 
sure of approx. 5 bar and check the movement of 
the piston (14), 

Reduce the pressure to 0.3 bar and close the 

valve. 

The pressure gauge should not show any drop in 

pressure for 1 minute. 

85. Remove (he pressure gauge and valve assembly. 





Fig. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




7C01.12 



Front axle - Differential 



•/ V 



J. Refitting of differential case 
assembly 

86. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which 
are defective. 

Note: To avoid risk of leakage, the breather in 
the swivel housing was eliminated and 
replaced with a plug. Refer to service bulletin 
Front Axle 011 issue 1. 

87. Check that the centring pins (category 1 - 2 - 2.5) 
and bushes (category 3) are present on the axle 
casing (52). 

88. Smear the joint face of the differential case on the 
axle case with sealing compound Loctite 510 or 
equivalent and screw in two diametrically oppo- 
sed guide studs. 

89. Refit the differential case assembly (8). 
Remove the guide studs. Fit and tighten the bolts 
(1) (Fig. 5) to a torque of 91 - 1 12 Nm. 

90. Check that the centring bushes (3) are cresent and 
refit the steering cylinder (2). Apply Loctite 270 on 
bolts (1) ana tighten io a torque of 102 - 112 Nm 
(Fig. 4). 



K. Refitting of swivel housings, 
wheel hubs and universal drive 
shafts 

91 . If the seals (8) (Fig. 2) have been removed, smear 
the new seals with Loctite 542on the Denphery and 
tit them against the shoulder. Replace i.ne seais (6) 
and (12) (Fig. 2). 

92. With the help of another person, fit the assemblies. 
Slide the universal drive shafts in ;ne axle case 
without damaging the seals (8). Insert a guide 
through the oil filling hole to align the left drive shaft 
with the differential. 

93. Turn the wheel hubs to engage the drive shafts. 

94. Refit the swivel housings. Carry out operations 95 
to 100. chapter 7B01. 



L. Reassembly of front axle / frame 

95. Put the washer (7) in piace. lightly smeared with 
grease (the chamfer facing towards the axte 
(Fig. 1)). Place the front axle in siings (Fig. 3) 
and position it so that it is in contact with its 
support (6) (Fig. 1). 

Note: The rear support of the axle is fixed to 
the frame on tractors 3050 to 3070 and deta- 
chable on types 3080 to 3125. 

96. Fit the washer (4) (the chamfer facing towards 
the axle (Fig. 1 )) with the bearing (2) against the 
washer (4) in such a way as to eliminate piay. Fit 
and tighten the bolts (1) (Fig. 1) smeared with 
Loctite 270 to a torque of 520 - 640 Nm. 

97. Fit the grease nipple (3). Grease the bearings (2) 
and (6) (Fig. 1 ) with a grease gun. ' 

98. Reconnect the pipes oi the steering cylinder 
(marked at the time of dismantling j, 

99. Raise the tractor with a jack. Refit the wheels. 
Remove the stand. Tighten the nut; :o a torque of 
250 - 500 Nm. 

1 00. Top up the axle oil ana check the cii level of the 
final drives. 

101. Coat the two drive shaft couplings with "Anti- 
seize" grease or equivalent. Refit the drive shaft. 
Reconnect the two hoses of the front differential 
lock. 

1 02. Remove the blocks and release the handbrake. 

103. Carry out a road test on the front axle and 
differential lock control. 

104 Check for leaks: 

- of the seals ana or the joint iace of the 
differential case ' 

• of the hydraulic connectors. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Differential 




7C01.13 



M . Service tools 



1 . Tool to be made locally 

Special spanner for splined nut 




ZHMB screws weldea 




2 . Tool available from the MF network 

Spring compression tool MF471 





www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02 Differential 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Splitting between the front axle and the frame 

EL Removal of swivel housings, wheel hubs and 
universal drive shafts 



Improved front axle - Differeniiai 7C02. i 



C. Removal of differential case assembly 6 

D. Disassembly of differential 7 

E. Removal of differential lock 8 

F. Removal of bevel drive pinion 8 

G. Reassembly of bevel drive pinion ____ 8 



H. Reassembly of differential lock „ 10 

I. Piston leak test 11 

J. Refitting of differential case assembly 12 

K. Refitting of swivel housings, wheel hubs and 

universal drive shafts „ 12 

L. Reassembly of front axle / frame 13 

M. Service tools 13 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02.2 



Improved front axle - Differential 



mar 

WW 



General 



Note : This procedure applies to tractors equipped 
with improved front axles cat. 1 to 3.5 fitted from 
serial numbers : 
-axles cat. 1 and 2 

3050 : A209023 

3060/3065 : standard seal : A 163015 

reinforced seal : A 161005 
■ axle cat. 2.5 

3070/80/85/95/3115/20 ; A209011 
- axle cat. 3.5 

3125 : A007039 



The assembly is sealed by two seals (4) and (40) fitted 

on the bevei drive pinion. Axles of categories 1 - 2 and 

2.5 have two planetary pinions (381 and a pin (36), those 

of category 3.5 are fitted with four planetary pinions and 

two pins. 

Backlash between the crownwheel and bevel drive 

pinion is set by means of shims 1221 placed behind the 

cup (29). 

Preload of the case and crownwheel assembly is done 

with the splined nut (32). 

A riveted plate on the RH side of the front axle housing 

shows the category and the serial number. 



The bevel crownwheel and pinion assembly containing 
the differential lock device (hydralock) is mounted in a 
casing (7) comprising two bearing halves (43) fastened 
by screws (42). 

The bevel drive pinion is mounted at the rear of the 
casing on two opposed taper roller bearings. Its position 
can be adjusted by means of shims [8] situated behind 
the heaa roller bearing. The preload of the roller 
bearings js adjusted by means of shims [2] located 
between the spacer /45\and the bearing cone (5). 



Service toots (see section M) A 

MF451 B Swivel pin bearing remover 

MF451B.3 Adaptor for remover diam M18 

MF471 Spring compression tool 

33768B1 Ml Special spanner for slotted nut of bevel 

drive pinion {axles cat. 2.5 and 3.5) 

3376927 Ml Special spanner for slotted nut of bevel 

drive pinion (axles cat. 1 and 2). 



Parts list 


(1) 


Slotted nut 


[2] 


Shim(s) 


(3) 


Soacer 


(4) 


Seal 


(5) 


Bearing cone 


(6) 


Bearing cup 


(7) Casing 


[8] 


S'nim(s) 


(9) 


Bearing cup 


(10) 


Bearing cone 


(11) 


Diff. gear 


(12) 


Lug washer 


(13) 


Retaining ring 


(14) 


Piston 


(15) 


O'nng 


(16) 


Thrust washer 


/17\ Spring 


(18) 


Dog tooth coupler 


(19) 


O'nng 


/20\ Guide washer 


(21) 


Washer 


[221 


Shim(s) 



(23) 


Bolt 


(24) 


Cover 


(25) 


Housing half 


(26) 


Housing half 


(27) 


Crownwheel 


(2B) 


Nut 


(29) 


Cup 


(30) 


Bolt 


(31) 


Locking plate 


(32) 


Splined nut 


(33) 


Bearing cone 


(34) 


Dowel 


(35) 


Washer 


(36) 


Planetary pinion pin 


(37) 


Sohencaf washer 


(38) 


Planetary pinion 


(39) 


Bevel drive pinion 


(40) 


O'nng 


(42) 


Bolt 


(43) 


Bearing half 


(44) 


Centring bush 


/45\ Spacer 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Differential 






7C02.3 




Issue 1 



Oecember 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02.4 



Improved front axle - Differentia! 



^k 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Differential 




7C02.5 



A . Splitting front axle / frame 

1. 
2. 



Block the rear wheels and apply the handbrake. 
Disconnect the two hoses of the front differential 
lock (plug the channels). Remove the shield and the 
transmission shaft. 

3. Drain the axle. 

4. Raise the tractor with a jack positioned under the 
axis of the axle housing. Place a prop (Fig. 2) under 
the lower engine housing. Remove the wheels. 

5. Disconnect the pipes of the steering cylinder, 
marking thetr position (plug the channels!. 

6. Place the front axle in slings (Fig. 2). 

7. Remove the bolts (1) and the grease nipple (3). 
Remove bearing (2) and washer (4) (Fig. 1). 

8. Remove the front axle, disengaging it from its rear 
bearing, and place it on a support. Remove the 
chamfered washer (7) (Fig. 1). 

Note : On tractors equipped with a belly weight, 
it is necessary to remove this in order to remove 
the front axle. 




B . Removal of swivel housings, 
wheel hubs and universal drive 
shafts 

Note : Exercise care when carrying out this 
operation. 

9. Remove the steering ball joints. 
1 0. Place the swivel housing assembly in a sling. 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02.6 



improved front axle - Differential 



^ 



Removal of swivel housings (Fig. 3 - 4) 

1 1 . Remove bolts (1) and cover (2J. Remove shims [31. 
Extract swivel pin (7) with tool MF451 B and adaptor 
MF451B3. 

12. Remove the lower swivel pin as explained 
previously. 

13. With the help of another person, remove the 
assemblies. 

1 4. If necessary, remove oil seals (8) (Fig. 3). 



C . Removal of differential case 
assembly 

1 5. Remove the boits (1) and detach the steering 
cylinder (2), taking care not to lose the centring 
bushes or the rings (3) (Fig. 5). 

16. Remove the bolts (1)- Detach and remove the 
differential case assembly (8) (Fig. 6). 
On improved axles, the differential case is centred 
by means of bushes force-fitted in the axle casing 
( 52). 






Fig. 



Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^TV^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Differential 




7C02.7 



D . Disassembly of differential 

1 7. Place the casing (7) in a soft-jawed vice (Fig. 7). 

18. Remove the bolt (301 and its retainer (31 J (Fig. 7). 

1 9. Remove the splined nut (32) using the special, 
locally made spanner (see section M). 

20. Remove the four screws (42), detach the bearing 
halves (43) (Fig. 7). 

Note : Carefully remove the bearing half on the 
lock control side ; with the spring /17\ 
compressed, the washer (21) should remain in 
the casing 17). 

21 . Remove the complete differential assembly with 
the bearing cones (33) and the cups (29) (Fig. 8). 
Separate the cups from the taper roller bearings. 
Remove the shim(s) [22]. 

Note : Keep the bearing cones and cups paired 
if they are to be reused. 

22. If necessary, extract the two bearing cones (33). 

23. Place the differential assembly in a soft-jawed vice. 
Remove the nuts (28). Take out the bolts (23). 
Note : Prior to disassembly, mark the position of 
the bearing halves (25) and (26) and of the co ver 
(24) so that they can be paired when refitting. 

24. Separate the bearing halves (25), (26) and the cover 
(24) 

25. Remove the gear (11) and washers (35). 

26. According to category, separate one or two pins 
(36), the planetary pinions (38) and the spherical 
washers (37) (Fig. 9). 




Fig. 7 




Fig. 8 




Fig. 9 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02.8 



Improved front axle - Differential 



^ 



E . Removal of differential lock 
(Fig. 10). 

27. Using tooi MF471 , correctly centred, compress the 
spring /17\ until the supporting washer (21) is free. 

28. Remove the washer (21). 

29. Gradually relax the spring /17Y 

30. Remove the service tool MF471. 

31 . Remove the guide washer /20\of the spring. 

32. Remove the spring /17Y 

33. Remove the retaining ring (13) of the dog tooth 
coupler (18). 

34. Dismantle the coupler (18), the thrust washer (16) 
and the lug washer (12). 

35. Remove the piston (14). 

36. Take out the O'rings (15) and (16). 



F . Removal of bevel drive pinion 

37. Unstake the nut (1 ) and maintain it using the special 
spanner (Fig. 11 - 12} : 

- 3376927 Ml : Cat. 1 and 2 

- 3376881 Ml : Cat. 2.5 and 3.5 

Untighten the bevel drive pinion clockwise using 
the special sleeve "C" (Fig. 1 1 1 locally manufactured 
(see section M). 

38. Remove the bevel drive pinion together with cone 
(10), spacer /45\, shims [2] and O'ring (40). 

39. From the bevel drive pinion, remove O'ring (40). 
shims (21. spacer /45V 

40. Extract cone (10) from bevel drive pinion. 

41 . Remove cup (9) and shims [8J. 

42. Remove spacer (3). drive out cup (6) with its cone 
(5) in order to extract the seal ring (4). 



G . Reassembly of bevel drive pinion 

43. Before reassembly, clean the parts and replace 
those which are defective. Check that the channels 
of the differential lock are not obstructed. 
Note : If it should prove necessary to replace the 
crownwheel (27) or the bevel drive pinion {39}, 
the two parts should be replaced together. 






Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Differential 




7C02.9 



44. Adjust the position of the bevel drive pinion (Fig. 
1 3). The thickness of the shims needed to position 
the bevel drive pinion correctly is calculated 
according to the formula : SP = A - (d±t) 

SP : required thickness of shims [8] 

A : distance measured between the bearing 
cone (10) placed in the cup (9) and the 
machined face F of the casing (7). 

d : nominal dimension = 1 18± 0,1 (cat. 1-2-2.5) 

133.5+ 0.1 (cat. 3.5) 

t : actual dimension marked on the head of the 
bevel drive pinion (Fig. 14). This value may be 
positive or negative (to be added or 
subtracted from nominal dimension d). 
Method of operation (Fig. 13) 

45. Position the cup (9) and the bearing cone (10) in the 
casing (7) without the shims 18]. Using a depth 
gauge, measure dimension A. Take care to seat the 
bearing cone correctly in the cup. Having taken the 
measurement, apply the formula to determine the 
thickness of the shims needed. 

46. Remove the bearing cone (10) and cup (9) again. 

47. Push the bearing cone (10) against the shoulder ot 
the bevel drive pinion using a press and a suitable 
tool (Fig. 15). 

48. Place the shim [8] of the previously calculated 
thickness in the casing. 

49. Fit the cup (9). 

50. Place the cup (6) in the casing as far as it will go. 

51 . On the bevel drive pinion prepared with cone (10), 
engage the spacer /45\with its chamfer facing the 
bevel drive pinion splines. 

52. Place the bevel drive pinion assembly into the 
casing and fit the shims (2], then fit cone (5) and 
spacer (3) (Fig. 16). 




Fig. 15 








i 




t^\ *"* 1 -**"""" ~" v 




^j§i§ 


\/ 




Fig. 14' 



\\\\Vs 




Fig. 16 



Issue 1 



December 1 991! 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02. W 



Improved front axle - Differential 



^ 



53. Maintain nut (1) with the special spanner 
3376927 M1 or 3376881 Ml. Using the special 
sleeve and a torque wrench, turn the bevel drive 
pinion, to obtain a torque of 250 -295 Nm (Fig. 17). 

54. Preload the bevel drive pinion. 

Method : The principle consists of removing or 
adding shims [2] to obtain a rotational torque of 1 to 
3Nm. 

55. Rotate, the bevei drive pinion through a few turns 
using a torque wrench and the special sleeve 
(Fig. 18). Check that the above torque is correct. 
Note : The torque of 250 - 295 Nm should be 
applied to every refitting of nut (1). 

56. After setting, maintain nut (1) and untighten the 
bevel drive pinion. 

57. Fit O'ring (40). Apply Loctite 270 on nut (1 J. Rotate 
the bevel drive pinion until torque of 250 - 295 Nm 
is obtained, lock the nut by bending its tab in two 
opposite slots. Check nut (1) is free of burrs. Oil the 
seal ring (4) and fit it into the casing using a locally 
made drift (see section M). 



H . Reassembly of differential lock 

58. Mount the thrust washer (16) on the coupler (18). 
Fit the assembly in the piston (14). Fit the lug 
washer 112) and position the retaining ring (13) in 
the groove of the coupler. 

59. Fit the piston (14) together with the coupler (18) ir\ 
the packmgless casing. 

Note : The dowel (34) is force-fitted in the 
piston. Check that the piston and the dowei 
slide freely in the housing. Having carried out 
the check, remove the piston together with the 
coupler. 

60. Fit new O'rings (15) and (19). Position the piston 
with the coupler, then insert it with a plastic mallet, 
striking it on the periphery. 

61 . Position the spring /17\and the washer /20V with 
the shoulder of the washer facing the spring. Ten- 
sion the assembly with service tool MF47 1 until the 
washer (21) slides freely in the groove of the 
casing. 

62. Loosen the service tool MF471, taking care to 
ensure that the spring cannot escape. 

63. Fit the bearing cone (33) [if removed) on the 
housing half (26) using a press or a suitable tool (Fig. 
19). 




Fig. V 



&R^ 



*- — ^*v 




\ \ 



Fig. i| 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Differential 




7C02. 1 1 



64. Fit the other bearing cone (33) (if removed) on the 
cover (24). 

65. Assemble the housing half (25) in the cover (24) 
(with claw teeth) observing the marking made at 
the time of dismantling. 

66. Position the washer (35) on the axle gear (11). 
Place the assembly in the housing half (25), putting 
the tab of the washer in one of the holes of the 
housing half. 

67. According to category, place the corresponding 
number of planetary pinions (38) and washers (37) 
on two or one pin (36). Then place the assemblies 
in the housing half (25), putting the tabs of the 
spherical washers (37) in the holes of the housing 
half (25) (Fig. 9). 

68. Place the other washer (35) on the other gear (11). 
Place the assembly in the housing half (26), taking 
care to ensure that the position of the tab of the 
washer (35) is correct. 

69. Position the housing half (26) assembly on the 
housing half (25) maintaining the assembly position 
marked at the time of dismantling. 

70. Position the crownwheel (27) on the housing half 
(26). Fasten together the housing halves (25) and 
(26), the cover (24) and the crownwheel. 

Fit the bolts (23) and smear them with Loctite 270. 
Tighten the nuts (28) to a torque of 79 - 87 Nm. 

71 . Position the cups (28) on their cones (33). 

72. Place the crownwheel assembly in the casing (7) 
(Fig. 8). 

73 . Check that the centring bushes (44) are present. Fit 
the shims [221, Position the bearing halves (43). 
Moderately tighten the bolts (42) so that the cups 
(29) move freely. 

74. Put the housing in a horizontal position in a soft- 
lawed vice, the crown uppermost (Fig. 20). 

75. Put a dial gauge in place. Tighten the nut (32) (Fig. 
20) and turn the crownwheel a few times to seat 
the bearing cones properly in the cups. Tighten the 
nut again to eliminate the axial play. 

76. Tighten the nut (32) a further 3 notches to obtain 
the correct preload. 

77. Check the backlash between the crownwheel and 
the pinion with a dial gauge (Fig. 21). Take three 
readings at three equidistant points. Determine the 
average of the three readings to obtain backlash of 
0.13 to 0.28 mm. 

If the reading is too high, reduce the thickness of 
the shims 122). If it is too low, increase the 
thickness until a correct backlash is obtained. 




78. Remove the bearing bolts (42) one by one. Smear 
them with Loctite 270 and tighten them to a torque 
of 136- 150Nm. 

79. Refit the locking piate (31) with the bolt (30) 
smeared with Loctite 270 and tighten to a torque of 
1 6 - 26 Nm. Lock the nut (32), bending the tab of the 
locking plate in the appropriate groove. 



1 . Piston leak test 



80. Connect a pressure gauge equipped with a valve to 

the supply connector of the differential lock. 
81 Supply the circuit with compressed airat a pressure 

of approx. 5 bar and check the movement of the 

piston (14). 

Reduce the pressure to 0.3 bar and close the valve. 

The pressure gauge should not show any drop in 

pressure for 1 minute. 
82. Remove the pressure gauge and valve assembly. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02.12 



Improved front axle - Differential 



WW 



J . Refitting of differential case 
assembly 

83. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which are 
defective. 

Note : To avoid risk of leakage, the breather 
valve on the axle housing has been eliminated 
and replaced with a plug. 

84. Check that the centring bushes are present on the 
axle housing. 

85. Coat the joint face of the differential case on the 
axle housing with sealing compound, Loctite 5 1 or 
equivalent, and screw in two diametrically opposed 
guide studs. 

86. Refit the differential case assembly (8). 
Remove the guide studs. Fit and tighten the bolts 
(1) (Fig. 6> to a torque of 91 -112 Nm. 

87. Check that the centring bushes (3) are present and 
refit the steering cylinder (2). Apply Loctite 270 on 
bolts (1) and tighten them to a torque of 102 - 
112 Nm (Fig. 5). 



K . Refitting of swivel housings, 
wheel hubs and universal drive 
shafts (Fig. 22). 

88. If the oil seals (8) have been removed fit them 
against the shoulder. Replace the seals (6) and (12). 

89. Oil the seals (8) and with the help of another 
person, fit the assemblies. Slide the universal drive 
shafts in the axle housing without damaging the 
seals. Introduce a guide through the filling hole to 
align the left drive shaft with the differential. 

90. Turn the wheel hubs to engage the drive shafts. 

91 . Position the pin (7) aligning the swivel housing (47) 
with the axle housing (52). 

92. Fit the pin (11 ), the cup (14), the cover (15). Tighten 
the bolts (1) evenly and alternately to press the pin 
(11) into the axle housing. 

93. Remove the cover (15) and the cup (14). Apply 
bearing grease on the cone (13). Refit the cup and 
the cover. Apply Loctite 241 on bolts ( 1 ) and tighten 
to a torque of 91 - 1 1 2 Nm. 

94. Fit the cup (4), the shims [3], the cover (2). Tighten 
the bolts as in operation 92. 

Note : Check that pins (71 and (1 1) are in contact 
with the axle housing {52}. 




**• 




95. Remove the cover (2). Take off the shims [3] and 
the cup (4). Coat the cone (5) witn bearing grease. 
Refit the cup. the shims and the cover. Tighten the 
bolts (1) coated with Loctite 241 to the torque of 91 
- 112 Nm. 

96. Refit the ball joints. Tighten the nuts to the torque 
of 1 03 - 1 1 5 Nm. Lock the nuts with new pins. 



Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Improved front axle - Differential 




7C02. 13 



L . Reassembly of front axle / frame 

97. Lightly coat the washer (7) with grease and put it 
in place, the chamfer facing the axte (Fig. 1). Place 
the front axle in slings (Fig. 2) and position it so that 
it is in contact with its support (6) (Fig. 1 ) 
Nota : The rear support of axle is remo vabfe on 
6 cylinder engines. 

98. Fit the washer (4) (the chamfer facing towards the 
axle (Fig. 1)) with the bearing (2) against the 
washer (4) in such a way as to eliminate play. Fit 
and tighten the bolts (1) (Fig. 1) coated with 
Loctite 270 to a torque of 520 - 640 Nm. 

99. Fit the grease nipple (3). Grease the bearings (2) 
and (6) (Fig. 1 ) with a grease gun. 

1 00. Reconnect the pipes of the steering cylinder 
(marked at the time of dismantling). 



M . Service tools 



1. Tools available from the MF network 

MF451 B Swivel pin bearing remover (Fig. 23) 

MF451B3 Adaptor for remover diam Ml 8 (Fig. 23) 

MF471 Spring compression tool (Fig. 24) 

3376881 Ml Special spanner for slotted nut of bevel 

drive pinion, cat. 2.5 and 3.5 axles (Fig. 25) 

3376927 Ml Special spanner for slotted nut of bevel 

drive pinion, cat. 1 and 2 axles (Fig. 25) 




101. Raise the tractor with a jack. Refit the wheels. 
Remove the proD. Tighten tne nuts to a toraue of 
250 - 300 Nm. 

102. Top up the axie oil and cheer, the oil lever of the 
final drives. 

1 03. Coat the two sleeves with 'Anti-seize' grease or 
equivalent. Refit the anve snaft and the shield. 
Reconnect the two hoses of the front differential 
lock. 

1 04. Remove the blocks and release the handbrake. 

105. Carry out a road test on the front axle and 
differential lock control. 

106 Check for leaks : 

. at the seals and the joint face of the differential 
case. 
. at the hydraulic connectors. 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7C02.14 



improved front axle - Differential 



^ 



2. Tools to be made locally 
Special spanner for splined nut 



'NuiUMJ 2 weided. 



nrm m 



Special sleeve for bevel drive pinion 
tightening and rotational torque check 




y\ \\ \ \ MjiA \ x x~x~ 



■H 



^ SI1 S. x 3IE •- ^ \ \ W 



rV 



\Nut HM1 8 w eided 
Nut HM8 welded 



Coupler 3380056 M2 



Drift for bevel drive pinion oil seal 



Cat i - 2 


0A | OB 


0C 


0D 


81.80 j -0 


25.54-°m 


68 


Cai 2.5 
3.5 


9T.60 


-7 


34.90 • e; -j 60 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




7D01.1 



7D01 2WD front axle 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Removal and refitting of steering arm ball joint 



B. Removal and refitting of hub. spindle and spindle arm 



C. Removal and refitting of steering ram 



D. Removal and refitting of front axle 



E. Adjustment of toe-in 



.11 



F. Track adjustment 



11 



G. Service tool 



.12 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7D01.2 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




/ ■/ 



General 



The front axle comprises the following parts: 

- A cast support identical to that of the 4-wheel-drive 
version, whose lower rear part comprises a bearing 
supporting the 2nd steering swivel pin (4-cylinder 
engine) or a removable swivel pin (6-cylinder en- 
gine). 

- A front bearing fixed on the cast support holding the 
1st steering swivel pin. 

- An axle beam articulated on two swivels. 

- Two spindle arms. 

- Two spindles mounted in the bores of the spindle 
arms. 

- A double acting ram linked to the spindles by two 
steering arms. 

There are three axle versions depending on the type of 
tractor: 

MF 3050-3060-3065 

Standard axle with 6-hole hub. 

MF 3Q70 

Standard axle with 6-hole hub or heavy-duty axle with 
6- or 8-hole hub. 

MF 3080-3095-3115-3125 

Heavy-duty axle with 6- or 8-hole hub. 



Key 







Version 






standard 


heavy-duty 






6-hote 


6- or 8-hole 






hub 


hub 


(1) 


Pin 






(2) 


Nut 




• 


(3) 


Washer 




• 


(4) 


Bearing cone 




• 


(5) 


Spindle 




• 


(6) 


Bearing cup 




• 


(7) 


Dust cap 




• 


/8\ 


Thrust washers 






(9) 


Grease nipple 




• 


(10) 


Nut 




• 


01) 


Axle Beam 




• 


(12) 


Steering arm 




• 


(13) 


Seal 






(14) 


Bush 




• 


(15) 


Spindle arm 




• 









Version 






standard heavy-duty 






6-hote 6- or 8-hole 






hub hub 


06) 


Bush 






(17) 


Washer 






/18\ 


Sealing ring 






(19) 


Bearing cone 






(20) 


Hub 






(21) 


Bearing cup 






(22) 


Cover 






(23) 


Rivet 






(24) 


Nut 




(25) 


Washer 




(26) 


Belleville washers 




/27\ 


Sealing ring 




(28) 


Bearing cone 


• 


(29) 


Bearing cup 


• 


/30\ 


Sealing ring 


• 


(31) 


Lock washer 


• 


(32) 


Spacers 




> • 


(33) 


Screw 






(34) 


Washer 






(35) 


Nut 






(36) 


Bolt 




■ • 


(37) 


Steering ram 




■ • 


(38) 


Screw 




■ • 


(39) 


Washers 




> • 


(40) 


Nuts 




i • 


(41) 


Sleeve 




i • 


(42) 


Screw 




> • 


(43) 


Steering rod 




• • 


(44) 


Screw 




• • 


(45) 


Nuts 




• • 


(46) 


Sleeve 




« • 


(47) 


Pin 




• • 


(48) 


Washer 




• • 


(49) 


Nut 




• • 


(50) 


Ball joint 




• • 


(51) 


Pin 




• • 


(52) 


Nut 




• • 


(53) 


Ball joint 




• • 


(54) 


Support 




• • 


(55) 


Bush 




• • 


(56) 


Thrust washer 




• • 


(57) 


O-ring 




• • 


(58) 


O-ring 




• • 


(59) 


Nut 




• • 


(60) 


Lock nut 




• » 


(61) 


Bushes 




• • 


(62) 


Grease nipple 




• ■ • 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




Heavy-duty axle 



www.maskinisten.net 




v v 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




7D01.5 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^W 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




7D01.7 



A. Removal and refitting of steering 
arm ball joint 

Removal 

1 . Chock the rear wheels and apply the handbrake. 

2. Lift the relevant wheel with a jack. Remove the pin 
(47), the nut (49) and the washer (48). 

3. Extract the ball joint (50) from the steering arm (1 2). 

4. Loosen the nuts (45), turn the sleeve (46) in order 
to separate the ball joint (50) from the rod (43). 

Refitting 

5. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

6. Mount the ball joint (50) in the steering arm (12). 

7. Couple the sleeve (46) to the rod (43) and the ball 
joint (50) 

8. Fit the washer (48), tighten the nut (49) to a torque 
of 108 - 122 Nm and lock it with the pin (47). 

9. Remove the jack. 

10. Remove the chocks and release the handbrake. 

1 1 . Adjust the toe-in {see section E). 



B. Removal and refitting of hub, 
spindle and spindle arm 

Removal 

1 2. Chock the rear wheels and apply the handbrake. 

1 3. Lift the front of the tractor with a jack positioned in 
the axis of the axle and insert props. 

14. Remove the relevant wheel. 

1 5. Extract the cover (22). 

16. Remove the pin (1), loosen the nut (2), remove the 
washer (3) (standard axle). 

Release and loosen the nut (2), remove the lock 
washer (31), remove the washer (3) (heavy-duty 
axle). 

1 7. Remove the bearing cone (4). 

18. Remove the wheel hub (20) from the spindle (5). 

1 9. Extract the sealing ring /18\ and remove the bea- 
ring cone (19). 

20. Extract the cups (6) and (21) from the hub (20). 

21 . Remove the dust cap (7). 



There are 3 axle versions: 

MF 3050-3060-3065 

Standard axle with 6-hole hub. 

MF 3070 

Standard axle with 6-hole hub or heavy-duty 
axle with 6- or 8-hole hub. 

MF 3080-3095-3115-3125 

Heavy-duty axle with 6- or 8-hole hub. 

Standard axle with 6-hole hub 

22. Remove the nut (35), the washer (34) and the 
screw (33). 

23. Withdraw the steering arm (12) from the spindle 
(5). 

24. Withdraw the spindle (5) from the spindle arm (1 5). 

25. Remove the washers /8\ and (17). 

26. Extract the rings (14) and (16) from the arm (15). 

Heavy-Duty axle with 6- or 8-hole hub 

27. Remove the nut (24) and the washer (25). 

28. Withdraw the steering arm (12) from the spindle 
(5). Remove the Bellevitie washers (26). 

29. Withdraw the spindle (5) from the spindle arm (1 5). 

30. Separate the bearing cone (28) from the spindle 
(5). 

31. Extract the sealing rings /30V and /27\ from the 
spindle arm (15). 

32. Extract the bush (14) and the cup (29) from the arm 
(15). 



Standard or heavy-duty axle 

33. Remove the screw (36) and the nuts (10). 

34. Withdraw the spindle arm (15) from the 
beam (11), remove the grease nipple (9). 



axle 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7D01.8 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




V V 



Refitting 

Standard or heavy-duty axle 

35. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

36. Mount the spindle arm (15) in the axle beam (11), 
fasten it with screws (36) and nuts (10) placed in 
the seats of the axle. 

Tightening torque of screws (36): 

- Standard axle : 350 - 430 (Sim 

- Reinforced axle : 400 - 600 Nm 

Standard axle with 6-hole hub 

37. With a punch, push in the bushes (14) and (16) 
against the shoulder in the spindle arm (15). 

38. Fit the dust cap (7) on the spindle (5). 

39. Place washers /8\ and (17) on the spindle . orien- 
tate the grooves of washers /8\ towards washer 
(17) 

40. Introduce the spindle (5) into the arm (15). 

41 . Place the seal (13) in the seat of the steering arm 
(12). 

42. Fit the steering arm (12) on the spindle (5). 

43. Position the screw (33) in the recess in the spindle 
(5), fit the washer (34). Tighten the nut (35) to a 
torque of 250 - 300 Nm. 

Note: Ensure that the spindle (5) is fitted wi- 
thout any play. 

Heavy-duty axle with 6- or 8-hole hub 

44. With a punch, push in the bush (14) against the 
shoulder in the spindle arm (15). 

45. Push in the sealing ring /27\ against the shoulder in 
the spindle arm with the lip facing outwards. 

46. Push the dust cap (7) on the spindle (5). 

47. Position the bearing cup (29) in the spindie arm. 

48. Push the sealing ring /30\ in the spindle arm with 
the lip facing outwards. 

49. Push the bearing cone (28) on the spindle, then 
introduce the spindle into the spindle arm. 

50. Position the Belleville washers (26), the steering 
arm (12) and the washer (25). Smear the nut (24) 
with Loctite 241 , tighten to a torque of 550-580 Nm. 

Standard or heavy - duty axle 

51 . Using a press or an appropriate device push the 
cups (6) and (21) against the shoulder in the hub 
(20). 

52. Grease the bearing cone (19) (MF1 105 grease or 
equivalent) and place it in the cup (6). 

53. Push the sealing ring /18\ into its seat against the 
shoulder, the lip turned outwards {Fig. 1). 




54. Fill the cavity of the hub (20) with MF1 105 grease 
or equivalent. 

55. Mount the wheel hub (20) on the spindle (5). 

56. Grease the bearing cone (4) (MF1 105 grease or 
equivalent) and place it on the spindle in contact 
with the bearing cup (21). 

57 . Position the washer (3), the nut (2) (standard axle), 
the lock washer (31), the nut (2) (heavy-duty axle). 
After tightening the nut to a torque of 81 Nm, 
slacken it by 1/12 to 1/16 of a turn to obtain play of 
between and 0.13. 

58. Lock the nut (2) on the spindle with the pin (1) 
(standard axle). Bend back the tab of the lock 
washer (31) on the nut (2) (heavy-duty axle). 

59. Check that the hub turns smoothly. 

60. Fill the cavity of the hub (20) (nut side) with MF1 1 05 
grease or equivalent. 

61 . Close the hub with the cover (22). 

62. Clinch a rivet (23) in the hole of the cover. Fit the 
grease nipple (9). 

63. Refit the wheel, remove the props and tighten the 
bolts to a torque of 140 - 200 Nm. Grease the 
spindle arm (15). 

64. Remove the chocks and release the handbrake. 

65. Adjust the toe-in (see section E). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




7D01.9 



C. Removal and refitting of steering 
ram 

Removal 

66. Chock the rear wheels and apply the handbrake. 
Lift the front of the tractor with a jack positioned in 
the axis of the axle. 

67. Disconnect and block the ram supply hoses. 
Note: Mark the position of the hoses before 
removal. 

68. Loosen the nuts (45), turn the sleeves (46) to 
separate the ball joints (50) from the steering rods 
(43). 

69. Remove the pin (51 ) and the nut (52). Withdraw the 
ball joint (53) from the support (54). 

70. Remove the steering ram assembly. 

71 . Unscrew the ball joint (53) (if necessary). 

72. Dismantle the nuts (40), the washers (39) and the 
screws (38). Separate the sleeves (41) equipped 
with rods (43). 

Refitting 

73. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

74. Assemble the sleeves (41) equipped with rods 
(43) on the ram. Fit the screws (38) and washers 
(39) and tighten the nuts (40). 

75. Screw the ball joint (53) (if fitted) on the steering 
ram. 

76. Refst the ram assembly on the support (54). 

77. Tighten the nut (52) of the ball joint to a torque of 
100-120 Nm and fit the pin (51), 

78. Couple the sleeves (46) to the rods (43) and to the 
ball joints (50). 

79. Connect the ram supply hoses. 

80. Withdraw the jack. Remove the chocks and re- 
lease the handbrake. 

81 . Adjust the toe-in (see section E). 

82. Check for leaks of the ram connectors. 



D. Removal and refitting of front 
axle 

Removal 

83. Chock the rear wheels and apply the handbrake. 

84. Lift the front of the tractor with a jack positioned in 
the axis of the axle. 

85. Position a stand under the crankcase. 

86. Remove the front wheels. 

87. Remove the screws (36) ana the nuts (10). 

88. Remove the nuts (40). the washers (39) and the 
screws (38). 

89. Remove the assemblies (1) (Fig. 2). 

90. Remove the pin (51 ) and the nut (52), withdraw the 
ball joint (53) from the support (54), detach the ram 
from the axle (11). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.nei 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7D01.10 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




V 



91.Hoisttheaxle(Fig. 3). 

92. Remove the screws (1) and the grease nipple (3). 
Remove the front bearing (2) and the washer /4\ 
(Fig. 4). 

93. Remove the front axle, disengaging it from its rear 
bearing (5) with the washer /6\ (Fig. 4). 

94. Remove the lock nut (60) and the nut (59) with its 
seal (58), remove the support (54). The bush (55), 
the thrust washer (56) and the o-ring (57) remain 
on the support (54). 

95. If necessary, withdraw the bushes (61) from the 
axle. 



Replace any which 
locally 



Refitting 

96. Clean and check the parts, 
are defective. 

97. If necessary, fit the bushes (61) with a 
made tool (see section G). 

98. Position the bush (55), the thrust washer (56) and 
the seal (57) and refit the support (54). 

99. Tighten the nut (59) with O-ring (58) on the sup- 
port (54), then slacken it so as to obtain axial play 
of 0.05 to 0.25. 

1 00. Using a spanner wrench, tighten the lock nut (60) 

to 120-150 Nm. Check that the support swivels 

freely. 
101. Hoist the axle. Position the washer /6\ (the 

chamfer facing the axle side. Fig. 4). Fit the axle 

in the support (5). 

1 02. Position the washer /4\ (the chamfer facing the 
axle side, Fig. 4). Mount the front bearing (2) so as 
to eliminate play between the washers and the 
axle as far as possible. 

1 03. Smear the screws (1 ) with Loctite 270. Tighten to 
a torque of 540-620 Nm. Detach the hoist. 

104. Fit the grease nipple (3) (Fig. 4). 

105. Refit the ram assembly (37) on the support (54). 
Tighten the nut (52) to a torque of 100-120 Nm 
and fit the pin (51). 

106. Grease the bearings (2) and (5) (Fig. 4) and the 
ram support (54). 

107. Grease the rods (43) with molybdenum disul- 
phide. Refit the assemblies (1) (Fig. 2). Fit the nuts 
(10) and the screws (36). Tighten to a torque of : 

- Standard axle ; 350-430 Nm 

- Heavy-duty axle : 400-600 Nm 

1 08. Fit the screws (38). the washers (39) and the nuts 
(40). Tighten to a torque of 75-81 Nm. 

109. Refit the front wheels. Remove the stand under 
the crankcase. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 
140-200 Nm. 

1 10. Remove the chocks and release the handbrake. 
1 1 1 .Adjust the toe-in (see section E). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Front axle - 2 WD Front axle 




7D01.11 



E. Adjustment of toe-in 



1 1 2. Set the steering to the central position. It is neces- 
sary to adjust the sleeves (46) so as to obtain a 
toe-in of to 14 mm. The toe-in is measured at 
points A, A' and B,B\ determined by a diameter of 
895 mm traced on the flanks of the tyres (Fig. 5). 
It is obtained from the difference of the two values 
LandD. 

Note: If the toe-in is measured on a diameter 
other than 895mm, correct the value accordin- 
gly. Once adjustment has been carried out, 
tighten the nuts (45) to a torque of 45-55 Nm. 



F. Track adjustment 



1 13. Lift the front of the tractor in the axis of the axle. 

1 14. Remove the screws (36) and (42) and the nuts 
(10) and (40) (Fig. 6). 

1 15. Place the spindle arms in the desired position. 

1 16. Fit the bolts (36). Tighten to a torque of : 

- Standard axle : 350-430 Nm 

- Heavy-duty axle : 400-600 Nm 

117. Fit the rods (43) according to the position of the 
arms. 

Fit the screws (42), the washers (39) and the nuts 
(40). Tighten to a torque of 75-81 Nm. 
Note: When the tractor is used with the widest 
track, the spacer (32) must be used when 
fitting the 3rd screw (36) (Fig. 7). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Steering column 




7E01.1 



7 E01 Steering column 



CONTENTS 



A. Removal - 



B. Disassembly of tilt mechanism 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




7E01.2 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Steering column 




V V 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Front axle - Steering column 




7E01.3 



A . Removal 



1 . Remove : 

- the instrument panel cover, 

- the steering wheel and the boot. 

2. Withdraw the steering column from the instrument 
panel after having removed the 4 boits at the base 
of the column. 

3. Place the column assembly on a bench and remove 
the-2 screws from the plastic half housings. 

4. Remove lever (24) and pin (25). 



B . Disassembly of tilt mechanism 

5. Fit the yoke of special tool 3582244M1 on housing 
(1 ), lining up the 2 screws with the holes in the swivel 
joints (3). Tighten the 2 screws (Fig. 1). 

6. Place a shim about 20 mm thick under housing (1) 
in order to line the assembly up correctly. 

7. Remove the 6 screws with a 5 mm Allen key. 

8. Remove top housing (2). 

9. Remove :guide(19),rollers(17),spring(18), guide 
(23) and spring (22) (use a screwdriver). 

1 0. Tilt joint (3) to reduce the pressure of springs (16). 

Remove guide (13), rod (14), springs (16) and 

washer (15) (with a screwdriver). 
1 1 . Remove the yoke and withdraw the column 

assembly from housing (1), complete with 

corrugated washers (12), 

1 2. Drive out pin (8) and remove rod (1 1 ) complete with 
rack (7), spring (9) and washer (10). 

1 3. Remove the 2 screws (6) with a 3 mm Allen key. 
These screws are difficult to extract because they 
are fitted with Loctite. 

14. Remove rack (4). 

Reassembly 

15. Insert pin (5) in rack (4), with the domed end 
outwards. 

16. Fit rack (4) onto body (3) with the 2 screws (6), 
having coated them with Loctite 270. 

1 7. Prepare rod (11) with washer (10) and spring (9). 

1 8. Place the rod in a vice and. using compression tool 
3582244M1 , Item 2, compress the spring as shown 
in figure 2. 




Fig. 1 ' 




Bjfflgj r, 



FHHS 




Fig. 2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 

v 



7E01.4 Front axle - Steering column 

19. Fit the rod/tool assembly in position in housing (1). 

20. Fit rack (7) and insert pin (8) coated with Loctite 
648. 

21 . Position spring (18) and rollers (17) on each side of 
rod (11), with the chamfers facing downwards. Fit 
guide (19) (note the position of rollers (17) and 
spring (18)). 

22. Fit 2 corrugated washers (1 2) on the swivel joints of 
body (3) and place the assembly in housing (1). 
Take care with the two washers (12). Position bush 
(20) in recess A in housing (1). Dowel (28) must be 
facing upwards. 

23. Fit the clamping yoke as for disassembly. Also 
place the shim under housing (1). 

24. Fit spring (22) using a screwdriver to compress it. 
Fit guide (23), with the thickest part against the 
spring. 

25. Tilt body (3) and fit (13) (14) (15) and (16). Use a 
screwdriver to compress (16). 

26. Hold guide (19) with the thumb and remove the 
compression tool. 

27. Fit rings (21), positioning the gaps at 180° to each 
other. 

28. Fit the top half housing (2). Note that rings (21) and 
corrugated washers (12) have to be adjusted by 
hand. 

29. Reverse operation 1 to 4. 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



7 E02 Steering column - 2nd generation 




Front axle - Steering column 2nd gen. 7E02.1 



CONTENTS 

General _ 



Operation 



A. Removing and refitting the steering column 



B. Disassembling and reassembling the 
control lever assembly 



C. Removing and refitting the notched lever and rack . 



D. Disassembling and reassembling the locking 
mechanism 



E. Replacing the shafts and bearings 



F. Replacing the guide bushes 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Ik 



7E02.2 Front axle - Steering column 2nd gen. 



General 



The steering column assembly consists of the following 
two sections: 

- the fixed lower section comprising a tube and an 
attaching base plate, 

- the moving upper section comprising a tube and a 
welded yoke as well as a housing including the steering 
wheel height and tilt adjusting mechanisms. 



Operation 



Height adjustment 

When the control rod (4) is moved to the high position, 

rod T causes the elbow lever (8) to swivel and lower arm 

(15) which is hinged on pin (14}. 

Adjusting screw [5] attached to the arm bears on the 

lock piate (16) which is released, allowing the upper 

section of the steering column to move. 

The spring (3) returns the control lever (4) to its initial 

position. 

The stop (25) limits the movement of both sections. 

Tilt adjustment 

When the control lever (4) is moved to the low position, 
it presses on rod T which pushes on the end of the 
notched lever (9) and frees it from the rack /I (fallowing 
it to tilt the housing (20). The two return springs (17) 
allow the positioning of the steering wheel. 
Adjusting screw [51 allows the meshing of the teeth on 
the rack /10\ and notched iever (9) to be adjusted. 



List of parts 


H) 


Retaining washer 


(2) Retaining washer 


(3) Spring 


(4) 


Control lever assembly 


[51 Adjusting screw 


(6) 


Bolt 


(7) Spring 


181 


Elbow lever 


(9) 


Notched lever 


/10\ 


Rack 


(11) 


Pin 


(12) 


Upper shaft 


(13) 


Retaining washer 


(14) 


Pin 


(15) 


Arm 


(16) 


Lock plate 


(17) 


Springs 


(18) 


Pin 


(19) 


Pin 


(20) 


Housing 


(21) 


Moving column 


(22) 


Bearings 


(23) 


Circlip 


(24) 


Bolt 


(25) 


Stop 


(26) 


Bush 


(27) 


Bush 


(28) 


Fixed column 


(29) 


Lower shaft 


(30) 


Bushes 


(31) 


Circlip 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Front axle - Steering column 2nd gen. 7E02.3 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



WW 



7E02.4 Front axle - Steering column 2nd gen. 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Front axle - Steering column 2nd gen. 7E02.5 



A. Removing and refitting the 
steering column 

Removal 

1 . Using the lever on the right-hand side under the 
steering wheel, pull the steering column as far 
towards the driver as possible. 

2. Remove the steering wheel and the dashboard 
covering. 

3. On tractors equipped with a Dynashift gearbox, 
disconnect the control switch (1 ) located under the 
dashboard (Fig. 1). 

4. Take out the bolts (2) attaching the base of the 
column onto the cab support (Fig. 1). 

5. Remove the assembly by tilting it so that the base 
is withdrawn via the dashboard support. 

Refitting 

6. Check the operation of all the positions of the 
steering column. 

7. Lightly coat the splines in shaft (29) with Loctite 
«Anti-Seize» grease or equivalent. 

8. Carry out procedures 2 to 5 in reverse order. 
Note: Tighten the steering wheel nut to a torque 
of 57- 78 Nm. 

9. Check the operation of the electrical equipment 
and the A, B, C, D speeds (for Dynashift type 
tractors). 

B . Disassembling and reassembling 
the control lever assembly 

Disassembly 

1 0. Remove the steering column. Carry out procedures 
1 to 5. 

1 1 . Remove the housing in two halves around the 
steering column. Remove the Dynashift control (if 
fitted). 

1 2. Remove and discard the retaining washers (1) and 

(2). Remove the spring (3), lever (4) with the dust 
cover and lever (8). 

Reassembly 

13. Refit the levers (4) and (8) and the spring (3). 
Replace the retaining washers (1) and (2). 

14. Adjust the lever (4), rod T in contact with the 
notched lever (9) using the adjusting screw [5] 
(3 mm Allen wrench). 

1 5. Carry out procedure 1 1 in reverse and carry out 
procedures 6 to 9. 




C . Removing and refitting the not- 
ched lever and rack 

Removal 

16. Remove the steering column. Carry out 
procedures 1 to 5. 

17. Remove the housing in two halves around the 
steering column. Remove the Dynashift control (if 
fitted). 

1 8. Remove and discard the retaining wasners (1 } and 
(2). Remove the spring (3), lever (4) with the dust 
cover. 

1 9. Compress spring (7) by pressing on ine notched 
lever (9). Take out the bolts (6). Remove the rack 
/10V 

20. Drive out pin (11). Remove the notched lever (9) 
and spring (7). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 




3000/ 31 00 SERIES TRACTORS 



7E02.6 Front axle - Steering column 2nd gen. 



www.maskinisten.net 



WW 



Refitting 

21 . Carry out procedure 20 in reverse. 

22. Compress spring (7). Position the rack /10\ as per 
Fig. 2 to avoid any interference with lever (4). Fit and 
tighten bolts (6) after coating them with Loctite 241 . 

23. Refit the lever (4), rod T and spring (3). Replace the 
retaining washers (1) and (2). 

24. Adjust the lever (4J, with rod T in contact with the 

notched lever (9), using the adjusting screw 15] 
{3 mm Allen wrench). 

25. Carry out procedure 17 in reverse and carry out 
procedures 6 to 9. 

D . Disassembling and reassem- 
bling the locking assembly 

Disassembly 

26. Remove the steering column. Carry out procedures 
1 to 5. 

27. Remove the housing in two halves around the 
steering column. 

28. Remove the adjusting screw [5] (3 mm Allen 
wrench). Remove and discard the retaining washer 
(13). Drive out the pin (14). 

29. Remove the arm (15) and lock plate (16). 

Reassembly 

30. Carry out procedure 29 in reverse. 

31 . Fit the pin (14). Replace the retaining washer (13). 

32. Fit and set the adjusting screw 151 and lever (4) with 
rod T in contact with the notched lever (9). 

33. Carry out procedure 27 in reverse and carry out 
procedures 6 to 9. 



E . Replacing the shafts and 
bearings 

Disassembly 

34. Remove the steering column. Carry out procedures 
1 to 5. 

35. Remove the housing in two halves around the 
steering column. Remove the Dynashift control (if 
fitted). 

36. Slide the dust cover over the contra) lever (4). 

37. Compress spring (7) by pressing on the notched 

lever (9). Remove the bolts (6). Remove the rack 
/10V 

38. Remove the springs (17). 




39. Uncrimp pin (18). Drive out pins (18) and (19). 

40. Separate the housing (20) from the moving column 

121). 

41 . Remove the circlip (23). Separate the upper shaft 

(12) from the housing (20). 

42. Drive out the lower shaft (29) from the moving 
column (21). 

43. Extract the bearings (22) from the housing (20). 

Reassembly 

44. Fit the bearings (22) in the housing (20) using a 

suitable fixture. 

45. Assemble the upper shaft (12) on the bearings 
(22). Fit the circlip (23). 

46. Assemble the lower shaft (29) equipped with 
bushes (30) and circlip (31) on the fixed column' 

(28). 

Note: Deform the column tube by striking it 

with a punch so as to lock the bushes (30) in 

position. 

47. Reassemble the housing (20) and mobile column 
(21) assemblies. Fit pins (18) and (19). Crimp pin 
(18). 

48. Refit the springs (17). 

49. Compress spring (7). Position the rack /10\ as per 
Fig. 2 to avoid any interference with lever (4). Fit 
and tighten the bolts (6) after coating them with 
Loctite 241 . 

50. Adjust the lever (4). rod T in contact with the 

notched lever (9) using the adjusting screw [5] 
(3 mm Allen wrench). 

51. Carry out procedure 35 in reverse and carry out 
procedures 6 to 9. 4 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/ 31 00 SERIES TRACTORS 




Front axle • Steering column 2nd gen. 7E02.7 



F . Replacing the guide bushes (26) 
(27) (30) 

Disassembly 

52. Remove the steering column. Carry out procedures 
1 to 5. 

53. Remove the housing in two halves around the 
steering column. 

54. Loosen the adjusting screw [5] (3 mm Allen 
wrench). Remove the lock plate (16). 

55. Remove the bolt (24) from the stop (25). 

56. Extract the bush (26). 

57. Separate the moving column (21) from the fixed 
column (28). 

58. Extract the bush (27). 

Reassembly 

59. Position bush (27). 

60. Place the stop (25) in the groove on the fixed 
column (28). 

61 .Assemble the mobile column (21) with the fixed 
column (28). 

62. Fit the bolt (24) without tightening it so that bush 
(26) can be installed. After installing the bush, 
tighten the bolt moderately. Check that the moving 
column (21) slides freely. 

63. Refit the lock plate (16). Adjust the lever (4), rod T 
in contact with the notched lever (9) using the 
adjusting screw [5], 

64. Carry out procedure 53 in reverse and carry out 
procedures 6 to 9. 



Issue 1 December 1993 



-www.maskinisten.net 



• d 



• • • • 



*• • •€» • • • 



• • 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




8 . HYDRAULICS 



Contents 



8 A01 DESCRIPTION OF CIRCUIT 

8 B01 TRAILER BRAKING 

8 C01 "REXROTH" AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES 

8 C02 "BOSCH" AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES 

8 D01 LIFT CONTROL VALVE 

8 E01 HYDROSTATIC STEERING 

8 F01 LOW-PRESSURE COMPONENTS 

8 G01 BRAKE AND CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER CIRCUIT 

8 H01 DISTRIBUTION VALVE 

8 101 RIGHT-HAND HYDRAULIC COVER 

8 I02 LEFT-HAND HYDRAULIC COVER 

8 J01 HYDRAULIC TESTS 

8 K01 DYNASHIFT CONTROL 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Description of circuit 




8A01.1 



8A01 Description of circuit 



CONTENTS 



A. General circuit 



B. Low-pressure circuit, low flow _ 



C. High-pressure circuit, high flow 



D. Description, layout of parts 



E. Circuit diagrams 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8A01.2 



Hydraulics - Description of circuit 



WW 



A. General circuit 



The hydraulic system of {he 3000-3 100 tractors is of the open 
centre type. It is divided into two separate circuits fed by a 
two-stage gear pump, fitted on the internal face of the right 
cover. Via a 1 50 micron strainer also fitted on the right cover, 
the pump uses the transmission oil contained in the common 
reservoir formed by the centre housing and the gearbox. A 1 5 
micron pressure filter is fitted on the low flow circuit before the 
Orbitrol steering unit. The hydraulic pump is driven by the 
teeth of the PTO clutch housing. 



C. High-pressure circuit, high flow 

The second stage of the pump supplies, in this sequence: 

- The trailer brake valve, which has priority 

- The auxiliary spool valves 

- The lift control valve (rear linkage) 

The oil not used by the trailer brake valve supplies the 
auxiliary spool valves fitted on the rear of the lift cover. 
Exiting from the auxiliary spool valves, a hose supplies the lift 
valve situated on the left side cover. 
The excess flow from these three spool valves returns to the 
pump intake manifold without passing through the strainer. A 
safety valve fitted in the delivery pipe of the right hand cover 
protects the high-pressure circuit. 



B. Low-pressure circuit, low flow 

This circuit gives priority to supplying the hydrostatic steering 
system where the pressure can reach 170 bar. After 
satisfying the needs of the steering valve (Orbitroi), the oil is 
sent to a distribution valve fixed under the hood. This valve 
has a number of functions: 

- Pressure maintaining valve 

Downstream of the Orbitrol, the distribution valve maintains 
the operating pressure of the various transmission elements 
at 17 bar. 

- Cooling, lubrication and clutch and brake master cylinder 
supply circuit 

After supplying the various transmission elements, the dis- 
tribution valve sends the oil to the oil cooler if it is hot, or 
directly to the gearbox and PTO lubrication system if it is 
cold. The lubrication pressure is maintained by a valve set 
at 1 .5 bar, fitted on the front left of the gearbox. The residual 
flow from the distribution valve also supplies the clutch and 
brake master cylinders. 

Functions supplied by the low flow circuit 

The 1 7 bar circuit supplies the various transmission functions 

in parallel, via solenoid valves screwed into the main gallery 

of (he right cover. 

None of these are priority functions and they can be actuated 

simultaneously. 

Certain of the solenoid valves (4WD, PTO etc.) are connected 

to the Autotronic device. 

The functions supplied by the low-pressure circuit are as 

follows: 

. The hydrostatic steering 

. The hi/lo (Hare/Tortoise) range 

. The differential lock (front and rear) 

. The 4WD clutch 

. The speedshift 

. The A/B range 

. The PTO circuits: 

- clutch 

- PTO brake 

- Front PTO (option) 



D. Description, layout of parts 



Parts 

(1) 

(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
(5) 
(6) 
(7) 
(8) 
(9) 
(10) 

(11) 
(12) 
(13) 
(14) 
(15) 
(16) 
(17) 
(18) 
(19) 
(20) 
(21) 
<22) 
(23) 
(24) 
(25) 
(26) 
(27) 
(28) 
(29) 
(30) 
(31) 
(32) 
(33) 
(34) 
(35) 
(36) 
(37) 
(38) 
(39) 

(40) 



list 

Front differential lock 

Steering ram 

17 bar distribution valve 

Hydrostatic steering unit (Orbitrol) 

Speedshift 

A/B range 

Hare/Tortoise range 

PTO clutch 

4WD clutch 

Rear differential lock 

PTO brake 

Front PTO (if fitted) 

Oil cooler 

Clutch master cylinder 

Brake master cylinders 

Clutch hydraulic receptor 

Speedshift solenoid valve 

Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve 

Differential Iock solenoid valve 

PTO solenoid valve 

PTO brake solenoid valve 

4VVD solenoid valve 

Front PTO solenoid valve (option) 

Low-pressure switch 

RH and LH brake 

Pump inlet pipe 

150 micron suction strainer 

Filter vacuum switch 

Hydraulic pump 

Safety valve 

Trailer brake valve 

Trailer brake connector 

Auxiliary spool valve 

Lift valve 

Lift rams 

1.5 bar valve 

Diagnostic connector 

A/B spool 

Lubrication : Speedshift - reverse shuttle - gearbox, 

PTO 

15 micron pressure filter 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Description of circuit 




8A01.3 



Layout of parts 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




n 



te 



i — , — p t~k 



— @r 



W-* 



■w 1,5 bar 



=rn^) 




L 



(25) u — i nr 



1Mb 



O 




Simplified diagram 






i 



5 




^ 




Q. 




2* 


to 


0) 


o 


p 1 


§ 

— * 


(0 


o 


1 


o 


a 


CO 

m 


CD 


:n 


Co 




s 


in 

CO 


"O 


H 


5J- 


? 


o 


is. 


3 


o 


o 


3 

CO 


i«" 




O 




c 








>-*•' 





* 



www.maskinisten.net 



rj) (fj) 




Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Trailer braking 




8B01.1 



8 B0 1 Trailer braking 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Removal and refitting of trailer brake vaive 



B. Operation, trailer brakes released and partial trailer braking . 



C. Partial braking and maximum braking of the trailer 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8B01.2 



Hydraulics - Trailer braking 



** 



'") 



General 



3000/3100 tractors can be equipped with a trailer 
braking system consisting of: 

- A valve assembly (spool valve) fitted on the right- 
hand hydraulic cover. 

- A pipe linking the trailer braking valve to a connector 
situated at the rear of the tractor. 

- A pipe connected to the master cylinders or to a 
supply hose of the main right-hand brake (depen- 
ding on version) linked to the pilot head of the valve. 

The valve is supplied as a matter of priority by the high- 
pressure circuit. The oil not used for the braking of the 
trailer is sent to the auxiliary spool valves. 
The valve controls the flow and pressure towards the 
trailer brakes. It is controlled by the pressure of the 
tractor braking circuit so as to obtain tractor/trailer 
braking that is progressive and proportional to the effort 
applied to the pedal. The trailer brake only works if the 
two pedals are coupled. 

Description of the trailer braking valve 

(Fig- 1) 

Flow control valve (1) 

Provides control of the flow Qx and regulation of the 
hydraulic flow, transmitting the pressure to the trailer- 
brakes (see pages 4 and 6). 



Control spool assembly(2) 

Changes the position of the flow control valve and 
regulates the trailer braking pressure. 

Check valve(3) 

Prevents oil flowing back from brake line B to port N 
(see pages 4 and 6). 

Pressure relief valve (4) 

with loaded springs (8) 

Limits the maximum brake pressure. 

Pilot flow housing (5) 

with piston (6) and bleed screw (7) 

Operates the trailer brake valve via a sensing line from 

the tractor brakes. 



Designation of ports 

(see pages 4 and 6} 

B Supply to the trailer brake connection (junction) 

N Continuation to the auxiliary spool valve 

P Pressure 

R Return to sump 

Y Supply coming from the tractor braking system 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



i) 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Trailer braking 




8B01.3 



A. Removal and refitting of trailer brake valve 



Removal (Fig. 2) 




1 . Disconnect and block: 

- the hose (7) of the pilot housing, 

- the supply hose (8) of the auxiliary spool valve and 
the tube (3) of the trailer brake connector. 

2. Remove the screws (5) and the valve (6). 

Refitting 

3. Clean the joint faces of the hydraulic cover and of the 
valve. 

4. Replace the O-rings {1) and (2) (Fig. 3). 

5. Refit the valve, fit and tighten the screws (5) to a 
torque of 21 - 24 Nm. 

6. Reconnect : The tube (3) of the trailer brake con- 
nector, the supply hose (8) of the spool valve and the 
hose (7) of the pilot housing. 

7. Bleed the main brake and the trailer brake and check 
the pressure. Carry out sections C and D, chapter 
6K01. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8B01.4 



Hydraulics - Trailer braking 



^ 



D 



§SL© 





<P 






7$Ete» 



IrfF 



— b| 



I 

I 

— i 



~r. 



j 



u-~- 



Fig. 4 - Trailer brakes released 



b 



Fig. 5 - Partial trailer braking, 
initial braking operation. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



* 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Trailer braking 




8B01.5 



B. Operation, trailer brakes released 
and partial trailer braking 

Trailer brakes released (Fig. 4) 

There is no pressure in sensing line Y (no effort applied 
to the pedals). 

Port B (supply to the trailer brake junction) is open to 
return tine R via channel f of the control spool (2). 

Flow QP coming from the pump passes through port P 
in flow control valve (1). 

A flow QP - QX is sent towards the port N {continuation 
to the auxiliary spool valve and the lift valve). A partial 
flow QX (approx. 0.6 l/min) coming from port P and 
going towards the diaphragm (11), the restrictor (9), the 
gallery (10) and the control spool (2) comes back to 
line R. 

Consequently the pressure drop produced by restrictor 
(9) holds flow control valve (1 ) in the fully open position 
a, where it has no regulating function. 

Partial braking of the trailer 
Initial braking operation (Fig. 5) 

The piston (6) of the pilot flow housing (5) is supplied 
under pressure by the tractor braking system (effort 
applied to the brake pedals). 



Note: To improve braking efficiency, the diameter of 
the pilot piston valve has been increased from 16 to 
20 mm. 

This modification has been introduced on 3000 
tractors from serial number R 030013 onwards. 

The pressure arrives via port Y. The control spool (2) 
is then pushed to the left, obstructing channel f and 
interrupting the communication between port B (to- 
wards the trailer brake junction) with the return line R, 
and thus the connection with the gallery (10). 

Control spool (2) moves from position c to position e. 

Control flow QX is cut off and the flow control valve (1) 
moves to position b (regulating position). 

A constant flow QK flows from port P to port B (towards 
the trailer brake junction) via the diaphragm (11), the 
channel (12), the line (13) and the check valve (3). The 
surface of the diaphragm (11) is calculated in accor- 
dance with the constant flow QK. 

The residual flow QR passes through the control valve 
(1) then to port N (continuity to the auxiliary spool valve 
and the lift valve). 

The line from port B (towards the trailer brake junction 
is placed under pressure and acts on the surface (14) 
of the control spool (2) against the pressure exerted on 
the piston (6) by the tractor braking system. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




8B01.6 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Trailer braking 



^ 



"3 




Fig.6 - Partial braking of trailer 



Fig 7 - Maximum braking of trailer; 
limited braking pressure 




P N 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



i 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Trailer braking 




8B01.7 



C. Partial braking and maximum 

braking of trailer 

Partial braking of trailer (Fig. 6) 

Pressure Pb existing in the trailer brake line (pressure 
acting on the active surface (1 4) of the control spool (2)) 
equalises with the pressure Py (coming from the tractor 
braking system) acting on the piston (6) of the pilot flow 
housing (5). 

The line from port B {towards the trailer brake junction) 
is cut off from the return port R. Therefore the oil is 
trapped within the trailer braking system. When the 
pressures have equalised the control spool (2) is in 
position d. 

The flow control valve (1) then moves to position a, 
where it has no regulating function. 

As when the trailer brakes are released, flow Qp - Qx 
is directed to port N (continuity to the auxiliary spool 
valve and the lift valve) and control flow Qx is sent 
towards the return line R via the control spool (2). 

Maximum braking of trailer (Fig. 7) 
Limited braking pressure 

Flow control valve (1 ) and control spool (2) occupy the 
same positions (a and d) as for partial braking. 

Flows Qp and Qx are the same as for partial braking. 
The maximum admissible braking pressure for the 
trailer is attained (Pb = 150 bar). There can be no 
increase in trailer braking pressure, even if the braking 
pressure of the tractor continues to increase. 

The pressure relief valve (4) is then pushed to the left. 

The springs (8) and (15) preloaded to the maximum 
admissible braking pressure for the trailer {Pb = 150 
bar) are compressed. 



If the trailer braking pressure Pb should increase due to 
external influences, the control spooi (2) momentarily 
opens channel f between orifice B (supply towards the 
trailer brake junction) and the return line R. 

In all operating positions of the trailer brake valve, the 
auxiliary spool valve and the lift valve are usable via 
orifice N (Fig. 8) without having any major effect on the 
trailer braking system. This has priority over the high- 
pressure hydraulic circuit. 

Note: To prevent possible vibrations in the brake 
pedals, the following modifications have been in- 
troduced on tractors equipped with trailer braking. 

1 ) Temporary solution : 

A damper valve and a new pilot hose have been 
introduced on 3000 tractors between serial num- 
bers N 103023 and N 159018. 

2) Final solution : 

A new trailer brake valve incorporating a damper 
valve has been introduced from serial number 
N 1590 19 onwards. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8 C01 "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 



CONTENTS 




Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves scot 1 



General 



A. Flow divider 



8. 3-position spool valve, single/double acting 



C. 3-position spool valve, single/double acting 
with kickout return to neutral 



D. 3-position spool valve, single/double acting, 
with nonreturn valve and kickout return 



E. 4-position distributor, double acting with kickout 
return to neutral and floating position 



F. Diagrams 



G. Assembly and adjustment of control cables 



.10 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.ne^ 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8C01.2 Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 



** 



D 



General 



The auxiliary spool valves are fitted on the high- 
pressure circuit. They are fed by the oil coming from 
the trailer brake valve or from the cover plate (depen- 
ding on the option). 

In the neutral position, the oil not used by the spooi 
valves is available for the lift valve fitted downstream. 

The auxiliary spool valves are fixed on a support 
which in turn is mounted on the rear of the lift cover. 
The quick couplings are mounted directly on the 
body of the spool. To obtain an adequate distance 
between the couplings, the spool valves contain 
blocks which serve as distance pieces. These blocks 
also permit the oil to continue to the next spool. 

Rexroth and Bosch spool vatves have the same 
characteristics and contain essentially the same 
features but are not interchangeable in part. 

Characteristics 

Each spool valve is activated by a lever in the cab, 
and has three phases: 

- 35% slow flow 

- 45% progressive increase in flow and pressure 

- 20% full flow 

The progressive increase in flow and pressure ena- 
bles uniform control of implements. 
This characteristic also enables two spool valves to 
be activated simultaneously, the overall flow being 
shared. The flow to each quick coupler is proportio- 
nal to the position of the control lever. 



Different types of spool valves 

- 3 positions, convertible to single or double acting. 

- 3 positions, convertible to single or double acting 
with kickout return to neutral. 

- 3 positions, convertible to single or double acting 
with nonreturn valve and kickout return to neutral. 

- 4 positions, double acting with kickout return and 
floating position. 

- 3 positions with shock valves. 



Assembly procedure (Fig. 1 and 2) 

1 . For correct assembly of the plates (2) and seals 
each spool valve must be disassembled and reas- 
sembled vertically with the end plate (11) at the 
bottom. 

2. Screw on the nuts (12) until they touch the intake 
block (1). 

3. Place the spool valve assembly with the fastening 
surfaces "F" supported on a flat surface, ensuring 
that it is lying perfectly flat. 

4. Tighten the nuts (12) to a torque of 17-20 Nm. 

5. Fit the connectors (1 3) and the pipe (3), then tighten 
them to a torque of 50 Nm. 

To improve the reliability of the spool valve assem- 
blies, internal leakage has been reduced from 
50 cnfYmin to 25 cnfYmin. See Service Bulletin n c 
88/02, issue 1. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 8C01.3 



Designation of ports 



Continuity {to lift valve) 

Pressure 

Excess flow 

Return 

Regulated flow to 1st spool valve 

Feed port 1 , to lift valve 




Description of components 

(1) Intake block with incorporated flow 
regulator 

Sealing plate with "O'-rings 
Excess flow pipe 
Flow divider regulating knob 
Single/double change-over screw 
3-position spool valve, convertible single/ 
double acting, return to neutral by spring 
Intermediate block receiving excess flow 
3-position spool vaive, convertible single/ 
double acting with kickout return to neutral 
Intermediate block 

4-position spool valve with kickout return 
to neutral 

End-plate enabling continuity to lift and 
return to sump 



(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
(5) 
(6) 

(7) 
(8) 

(9) 
(10) 

(11) 



Fig. 3 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8C01.4 Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 



Hr 



A. Flow divider 



For work requiring a regulated flow, the divider enables 
a variable flow to be obtained, by adjusting the knob 
(4) between the minimum and maximum positions 
(Fig. 4). 

The divider is situated at the intake of the auxiliary 
spool valve assembly. It is fed by the oil from the 
high-pressure circuit passing through the brake valve 
or the cover plate (depending on the option). 

Operation (Fig. 5) 

The oil coming from port N is sent to port X and feeds 
the first spool valve. The flow is regulated according 
to the position of the knob (4). 
At the same time, the pressure existing in channel 
N enables the oil to pass through hole "a" and res- 
tricted "b". 

The piston (7) is then moved upwards, sending the 
oil through the port QX and the intermediate block, 
which receives the excess flow through the pipe (3). 

Adjustment (Fig. 6) 

1 . Remove the stop screw (6), the lock nut (1) and 
the washer (2). 

2. Unscrew and remove the knob (4). 

3. Without forcing it, tighten the screw (3) so that the 
valve (8) is in contact with its seat. 

4. Screw in the knob so that it is in contact with the 
cap (5). 

5. Unscrew the knob by two turns. 

6. Screw in and tighten the stop screw (6) to a torque 
of 20 Nm. 

7. Place the knob in the closed position (Fig. 4). 

8. Fit the washer (2) and tighten the locknut (1) to a 
torque of 30-40 Nm. 





n 




Fig. 5 



^ 




Fig. 7 



.) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 8C01.5 



B. 3-position spool valve, single/ 
double acting 

Operation (Fig. 8) 

The oit from the high-pressure circuit passes through 
the brake valve {if fitted) or the cover plate fixed on 
the right hydraulic cover and feeds the various spool 
valves via the continuity channel N. 



Neutral' position 

The oil is not available at outputs S1 or S2. it is sent 
via the continuity Sine towards the lift valve and 
passes directly to the intake manifold of the pump 
when the lift is in the neutral position. 

Channels N and P are connected in the intermediate 
block 7 (Fig. 7) to feed the following spool valves. 

intake - Discharge phase 

When the spool (2) is moved to right or left, the 
pressure increases and lifts the valve (1). The oil is 
sent to channel D or G, depending on the direction 
of movement of the spool, to feed the outputs S1 or 
S2 via grooves g1 or g2. At the same time, the re- 
turning oil is sent from the ram to output S1 or S2, 
depending on the position of the spool, and comes 
back to the return channel R. 



Note: To prevent oil flowing on to the rear of the 
tractor, oil catchers (1) with pipes have been fitted 

on to the quick couplers (Fig. 9). < — 

Introduced from serial number R178047. 

Change-over single/double acting 

For the single acting position, unscrew the valve (4). 
Output S1 is now connected to channel R. Output S2 
feeds the ram. 
For the double acting position, screw in the valve (4). 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8C0 1 . 6 Hydraulics - "Rexroth " auxiliary spool valves 



^ 



•~> 



C. 3-position spool valve, single/ 
double acting with kickout return to 
neutral 

Operation 
Neutral position 

The operating principle of the 3-position spool valve, 
single and double acting with kickout return to neu- 
tral, is the same as that of the previous spool valve. 

Intake - discharge phase (Fig. 10) 

Operation identical to the previous 3-position spool 
valve, plus the special characteristic that it automa- 
tically returns to the neutral point. 



The system in the housing (3) locks when the spool 

(2) is actuated. 

The spool automatically returns at a pressure of 140- 

160 bar. 

The pressure passes through the holes a and b, 

releases the system, and enables automatic return 

of the spool to the neutral position. 

The housing (3) is in communication with channel R. 

Residual pressure in the housing (above 2 bar) may 
cause the spool to return to neutral. 



) 




) 



Fig. 10 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



wW 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Hydraulics - "Rexroth " auxiliary spool valves 8C01.7 



D. 3-position spool valve, single/ 
double acting, with nonreturn valve 
and kickout return 

This spool valve operates in the same way as the 
previous ones. 

Operation of check valve (Fig. 11) 

When the spool (2) is moved to the right, the oil 
coming-from channel N is sent to the output S2, lifting 
the check valve (6) to feed the service side. 

In the neutral position, the check valve seals the 
circuit. 



When the spool (2) is moved to the left, the oil coming 
from channels N and P lifts the valve (1) and is sent 
to channel D to feed the service side via grooves g1 
and output S1 . 

In its movement, the spool moves the needle (5) 
which lifts the ball and causes the pressure to drop 
on the service side, enabling the valve (6) to lift from 
its seat and oil to flow towards channel R. 

Note: When dismantling the spool, It Is essential 

to dismantle the checkvalve (6) and the needle (5) 

first. 

The spool valve body is available as spare part 

paired with the spool (2), the needle (5) and the 

valve (6). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



^ 



8C01.8 Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 



O 



E. 4-position spool valve, double 
acting with kickout return to 
neutral and floating position 

Operation (Fig. 12) 

When the spool (2) is moved to right or left, the same 
positions are obtained as with the previous spool 
valves. 



The special characteristic of this spool valve is that 
it has a floating position F, when the spool is with- 
drawn as far as possible, beyond the kickout return 
to neutral position. 

In this F position, the channels of outputs S1 and S2 
are connected with the return channel B. Therefore 
the oil can circulate freely. 




) 



) 



-) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 8C01.9 



F. Diagrams 



Si 



S1 



N 






© ® © © © 



Si 





S2 








S2 




1 


S2 


I 

I 


1 




i 


! 




* j 


. IrJ, 


N 




n 


L 


■ 

i— ■ 


►— 


n 

* 1 


■ 




h-= 


n 

■I > 


■<> 


I ^ J 


p 


R 


1 
1 


f 
ft 




1 

i[ — ■ 


t 


M 


1 

1 


> 1 

,. 1 


1 




>< 






1 














— < 


►-- 


J ! j 


t~ 


i i 




■© 



o-x 



ft 



© 



Fig. 13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8C01. 10 Hydraulics - "Rexroth" auxiliary spool valves 



^ 



■) 



G. Assembly and adjustment of 
control cables 

Note: Depending on the version of the support, 
operations 1 to 6 have to be carried out when 
replacing the cables. 

On levers with old support (Fig. 14) 

1 . Pass the cable through the grommet (10) at the 
rear of ,the cab and through the fastening (6) on 
the support (9). 

2. Fit the pin (5). 

3. Screw the clevis (1) on to the threaded part of 
the cable (2) and fit it on the lever L with the clip 
(7). Tighten the nut (3). 

Note: Check that the cable is not constrained. 



On levers with new support (Fig. 15) 

4. Pass the cable through the grommet (10) at the 
rear of the cab. 

5. Fit and tighten the fastening (6) on the support 

(9). 

6. Screw the clevis (1) on to the threaded part of 
the cable (2) and fit it on the lever L with the clip 
(7). Tighten the nut (3). 

Note: Check that the cable is not constrained. 



On the spool valves (Fig. 16) 

7. Check that the spools are in the neutral position. 

8. Screw the clevis (1) on to the threaded part of 
the cables (2). 

Tighten the nuts (3) and fit the pins (4). 

9. Partially screw on the sleeves(5) and fit the screws 
(6) without tightening them. 

10. Adjust the sleeves so that the control levers are 
correctly positioned in relation to the "symbol" 
plates, according to the dimensions shown in 
Figs. 14 and 15. 

1 1 . Fix the screws (6) and tighten the nut (7) to a 
torque of 20 Nm. 

1 2. Check the operation of the controls and the 
spool valves in the three or four positions, de- 
pending on the option. 



Fig. 14 




J 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8 C02 "Bosch" auxiliary spool valves 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Hydraulics - "Bosch" auxiliary spoof valves 8C02. 1 



General 



A. 3-position, spool valve, single double acting 



B. 3-position spool valve, double acting with check valve 



C. 3-position spool valve, double acting with shock valves 



4-position spool valve, double acting, kickout 
return to neutral and floating position 



3-position spool valve, single/double acting 
with flow divider 



F. Diagram 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



1* 



8C02.2 Hydraulics - "Bosch" auxiliary spool valves 



General 



"Bosch" spool valve can befitted instead of and in place 
of "Rexroth" spool valves. Their operation is identical 
and the different options are also the same. 
For assembly and adjustment of control cables, refer to 
chapter 8C01, section G. 



(4) 3-position spool valve, single/double acting with 
kickout return to neutral 

(5) Single/double acting change-over knobs 

(6) Intermediate block 

(7) 4-positton spool valve, double acting, kickout 
return to neutral and floating position 

(8) End plate enabling continuation to lift and 
return to casing 



Parts list 

(1) Intake block 

(2) 3-position spool valve, single/double acting with 
flow divider, return to neutral by spring 

(3) Spacer 



Designation of ports 

VR Feed port, towards the lift valve 

P Pressure 

R Return 

S1-S2 Outputs to quick couplers 




r) 



3 



) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^7W 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Hydraulics - "Bosch" auxiliary spool valves 8C02.3 



A. 3-position spool valve, single/double acting 



N 
P 
R 
S1-S2 



Continuity to lift valve 

Pressure 

Return 

Outputs to quick couplers 



(1) Valves 

(2) Spool 

(3) Housing 




B. 3-position spool valve, double acting with check valve 



N 
P 
R 
S1-S2 



Continuity to lift valve 

Pressure 

Return 

Outputs to quick couplers 



(1) Valve 

(2) Spool 

(3) Housing 

(4) Check valve 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hr 



8C02.4 Hydraulics - "Bosch " auxiliary spool valves 



C. 3-position spool valve, double acting with shock valves 



This type of spool valve is used with high-inertia hydraulic motors. 
N Continuity to lift valve (1) 

R Return (2) 

S1-S2 Outouts to quick coupling 



Valves 

Spool 



(3) Housing 

(4) Shock valves 




D. 4-position spool valve, double acting, kickout return to neutral and 
floating position 



(2) 

(3) 

N 

R 

S1-S2 



Valves 

Spool 

Lock housing 

Continuity to lift valve 

Return 

Outputs to quick couplers 



a-b Locking of kickout return to neutral position, 

depending on position of spool 
c Locking of floating position 




Issue t 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^/V^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Hydraulics - "Bosch" auxiliary spool valves 8C02.5 



E. 3-position spool valve, single/double acting with flow divider 



N 

P 
R 
S1-S2 



Continuity to lift valve 

Pressure 

Return 

Outputs to quick couplers 



(1) Valves 

(2) Spool 



(3) Housing 

(4) Flow divider 




F. Diagram 



R 



s 



^ ^ 



3 positions with 

flow divider 



3 



S1 S2 



r __ i 
1 ! 
1 



i 



tjj:- 



vfesa 



1 



-t ^ 



3 positions 
check valve 
kickout return 



(fea 



S1 S2 



*Si 



rr 



£ 



3-4 






4 positions 
single/double 
acting 
kickout return 



Si S2 



J\l 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



8D01 Lift Control Valve 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Lift Control Valve 




8D01.1 



General 



A. Removal and refitting of lift control valve. 



B. Neutral position 



C. Lift phase 



D. Lower phase 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8D01.2 



Hydraulics - Lift Control Valve 



Hr 



O 



General 



The lift valve is fixed on the left cover mounted on the 
centre housing. Its function is to regulate the flow of oil 
to and from the lift cylinders according to the signals 
transmitted to it by the computer of the electronic 
control system. This valve is composed of a series of 
spools and valves, most of which are not reparable as 
separate parts. 

A. Removal and refitting of lift 
control valve (Fig. 1) 

Removal 

1 . Mark and disconnect the harnesses of the lift (1) 
and lower (2) solenoid valves. 

2. Disconnect and plug the supply hose (3) of the 
valve and the supply tube (4) to the lift cylinders. 

3. Remove the screws (7). 

Refitting 

4. Clean the joint faces of the cover and of the valve. 

5. Change the seals (1), refit the valve {Fig. 2). 

6. Fit and tighten the screws (7) to a torque of 25- 
35 Nm. 

7. Reconnect the hose (3) and the tube (4). 

8. Reconnect the lift (1) and lower (2) solenoid valves 
(yellow connector). 

9. With a clip, fasten the cable on the valve supply 
hose. 

10. Start the engine. 

1 1 . Check the operation of the lift system and check 
the seals and hydraulic connectors for leaks. 



Description 

The BOSCH hydraulic valve controls the supply to the 
lift cylinders and is composed of two sections: 

Hydraulic section comprising the following parts: 

(1) Nonreturn valve, maintaining oil in the cylinders. 

(2) Servo piston used in the lower phase. 

(3) Nonreturn valve used in the lower phase. 

(4) Control spool valve. 

(5) Flow regulator spool valve. 

(6) Shock valve set at 200 bar. 

(9) Spool valve spring, flow regulation. 

(10) Control spool valve spring. 

(11) Control spool valve spring. 

(12) Nonreturn valve ball. 

(13) Restrictor. 

Electrical section comprising two electromagnetic 
coils: 

(7) Lower solenoid. 

(8) Lift solenoid. 

Designation of ports: 

N : Continuity port towards transfer tube and pump 

intake. 
P : Pressure. 
R : Return to housing. 
V : Cylinders supply and return. 

Note: To distinguish between a hydraulic fault and 
an electrical fault, simply operate the push-buttons 
at the ends of the solenoid valves, thereby elimina- 
ting the effect of the electronic lift system. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



I 



^ 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Lift Control Valve 




8D01.3 



B. Neutral position 



When the engine is stopped, the control valve is in the 

neutral position. The spool valve (4) is held in position by 

the springs (10) and (11). 

The flow regulator spool valve (5) is pushed towards the 

left by the spring (9). 

When the engine is running, the hydraulic pump supplies 

the spool valve via the braking valve (if fitted) and the 

auxiliary-spool valves. Pressure is delivered via orifice P. 

The oil flows initially through hole «a» and orifice «b». 

Because orifice «b» is smaller than hole «a», there is a 

pressure drop on the spring (9) side. 



This action causes a control flow to be established 

which passes to the spool valve (4) and then to the 

return orifice R on the casing. 

Once the control flow is established, the spool valve (5) 

moves to the right to a position which maintains the 

control flow and thus enables the oil to be directed 

towards the intake of the pump via the continuity orifice 

N and the transfer tube. 

When the spool valve is brought back to the neutral 

position from the lower position, a channel from behind 

the piston to the return port C is still open. 



f" 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




8D01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



s* 



Hydraulics - Lift Control Valve 




C. Lift phase 



The lift solenoid (8) is actuated to raise the tractor 

linkage. 

The control spool valve (4) moves to the left and stops 

the control flow, placing the chamber of the spring (9) 

under pressure and pushing the spool valve (5) to the 

left. 

The movement is dampened by the volume of oil 

flowing through orifice d. 



The spool valve (5), having moved to the left, enables 
the main ffow to be directed to the spool valve (4) and 
to the nonreturn valve (1 ). -- - 

As soon as the pressure on the nonreturn valve is 
greater than the pressure in the channels of the cylin- 
ders, the valve opens and linkage rises. 




3 



3 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



ft) 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Lift Control Valve 




8D01.5 



D. Lower phase 



The lower solenoid (7) is actuated to lower the tractor 
linkage. The control spool valve (4) moves to the right. 
The control flow stops and the return channel from the 
piston (2) is closed. Oil is directed under pressure via 
the hole a, the orifice b and the restrictor (13) towards 
the piston (2) which is moved to the left. 
The rod at the end of the piston (2) lifts the ball (12) of 
the nonreturn valve (1) from its seat, firstly causing a 
pressure drop in the lift cylinders circuit. Secondly, the 



piston (2) opens the valve (1), enabling the oil returning 
from the cylinders to be directed towards the return port 
R to the housing. As the movement of the piston (2) is 
limited, the control flow is reestablished, and is direc- 
ted towards the nonreturn valve (3), the return port C 
and the return port R to the housing. The lower phase 
has no effect on the spool valve (5) which is in a floating 
position. It enables the minimal flow required for control 
purposes and ensures that the main flow is able to pass 
to the pump intake via the continuity port N and the 
transfer tube. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



www.maskinisten.net 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 




8E01.1 



8 E01 Hydrostatic steering 



CONTENTS 
- General 



A. Neutral position (engine running) 



B. Wheel turning (engine running) 



C. Manual steering (engine stopped) 



D. Disassembly and reassembly of the steering unit (Orbitrol) 8 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.ne1 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8E01.2 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 



^ 



O 



General 



The steering system used on 3000/31 00 series tractors 
is a hydrostatic system with no mechanical linkage 
between the steering wheel and the steering cylinder. 
The main components of the system are as follows : 

- A pressurised oil feed supplied by the low-flow stage 
of the hydraulic pump. 

- A hydrostatic steering unit (Orbitrol). 

- A double acting steering cylinder fitted on the 4WD 
front axle or the 2WD axle. 

The Orbitrol is supplied by the low-flow system as a 
matter of priority. When the steering wheel is turned, the 
required flow of oil is sent to the relevant side of the 
steering cylinder. The excess flow not required for 
steering, combined with the oil returning from the 
cylinder is then directed on to the distribution valve 
situated under the hood, which then goes on to satisfy 
the needs of the transmission, brakes and clutch.. 

If the engine breaks down or the hydraulic pump fails, 
the Orbitrol acts as a manual pump, so that steering 
control is maintained at all times. 



Operation 

The Orbitrol unit consists of spool and sleeve with 
neutralising springs and a drive pin which connects to 
the cardan shaft. The cardan shaft is in turn connected 
to the metering unit. The Orbitrol unit has 4 hydraulic 
connections, pressure, returns (to distribution valve) 
and 2 service ports for the steering ram. The steering 
system is protected by a relief valve and 2 shock valves 
with suction valves. 

The spool and sleeve act as a valve which has a neutral 
and 2 operating positions, the latter relate to left and 
right hand turns. When no movement of the steering 
ram is required the sleeve and spool are maintained in 
a neutral position by a set of leaf type neutralising 
springs. There is also a pin which passes through holes 
in the sleeve and spool. 
The pin has 2 functions : 
-1 to limit the maximum travel between the sleeve and 

spool to fully select the left or right turn mode 
- 2 drive the metering unit via the cardan shaft 



Parts list 


(1) 


Screw 


/2\ 


Screw 


(3) 


Seal 


(4) 


Cover plate 


(5) 


O-ring 


(6) 


Stator 


/A 


Pin 


(8) 


O-ring 


0) 


Rotor (metering valve) 


(10) 


Spacer 


(It) 


Cardan shaft 


/12\ 


Washer 


/13\ 


Centring springs 


(14) 


Needle roller bearing 


(15) 


Kin-ring 


(16) 


Washer 


(17) 


O-ring 


(18) 


Relief valve 


/19\ 


Seat 


(20) 


Shock valves 


(21) 


Orbitrol 


(22) 


Non return valve 


(23) 


Suction valves 


/24\ 


Ring 


(25) 


Spool valve 


(26) 


Check valve 


(27) 


Sleeve 


(28) 


O-ring 


(29) 


Distributor plate 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 




8E01.3 



General arrangement 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8E01.4 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 



* 



^ 



A. Neutral position (engine running) 

In the neutral position, holes in the spool (25) line up 
with holes in the sleeve (27). Oil from the low flow pump 
is directed through the open centre of the valve to the 
returns port and to the distribution valve. There is no oil 
supply to ports P1 - L and R. 

The hydraulic lines to the ram cylinder are isolated. Two 
shock valves (20) and two suction valves (23) are fitted 
internally tolhe left and right outlet ports. The shock 
valves protect the system between the steering ram 



and the orbitrol unit from excessive pressure, such as 
when the wheels hit an obstruction when the steering is 
in neutral. The suction valves allow the other side of the 
system to compensate for any oil that is released by the 
shock valves. 

A check valves (26) is fitted in the oil feed port of the 
orbitrol unit. This is a one-way valve to prevent peak 
induced pressures that can be generated by the road 
wheels bearing passed to pump when steering. 




A 

B 
L 






Steering cylinder 

Position of steering wheel, left or right 

Supply to the left hand side of the 

steering cylinder 

Low-flow supply coming from the 

hydraulic pump 



PI Supply to the metering valve (stator (6) and 

rotor (9)) 
R Supply to the right hand side of the 

steering cylinder 
T Supply to the distribution valve 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



*fr 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 




8E01.5 



B. Wheel turning (engine running) 

The first movement of the steering wheel moves the 
spool (25) against the leaf springs (13). This closes the 
neutral ports and aligns slots in the spool with holes in 
the sleeve allowing oil to pass to the metering unit 
{stator (6) and rotor (9)). Further movement of the 
steering wheel continues to turn spool, sleeve and 
metering unit. Simultaneously the metering unit 
controls'the oil flow and directs it back into the sleeve 
and spool. The oil re-entering is then directed by slots 
in the spool which align with holes in the sleeve to direct 
the oil to the left or right side of the «balanced action* 
steering ram. The oil returning from the steering ram is 
directed, by the slots in the spool valve which align with 
the holes in the sleeve, to the returns port which leads 
to the distribution valve. 



Should the pressure within the steering system exceed 
1 60 bar (2322 Ibf/in 2 ), the relief valve (1 8) situated in the 
Orbitrol unit will relieve the excess pressure. When the 
relief valve is actuated for example when the steering 
wheels are at full lock or against an obstruction, the oil 
which is released goes out to the returns port. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8E01.6 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 



** 



C. Manual steering (engine stopped) 

Should the pressure from the hydraulic pump cease, it 
is important that steering should still be maintained. For 
this reason, a non-return valve (22) is situated between 
the inlet and return galleries inside the orbitrol 
assembly. 

When the hydraulic pump is functioning normally, the 
non-return valve is held on its seat by the oil pressure, 
allowing the oil to pass into the spool and sleeve valves. 



When the pressure from the hydraulic pump drops, the 
oil returning from the steering cylinder « A- is allowed to 
pass through the non-return vaivetothe inlet side of the 
spool valve, enabling oil to be passed from one side of 
the steering cylinder to the other. In this way steering 
control is maintained at all times. The pressure 
generated is proportional to the torque exerted on the 
steering wheel. 




) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



i) 






3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 




8E0V.7 



Exploded diagram 




-- •*■ 



* » 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




8E01.8 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 




V 



'0 



MECHANICAL LINKAGES 




L : Left hand supply to steering cylinder 
P : Supply from low-flow circuit 
R : Right hand supply to steering cylinder 
T : Supply towards distribution valve 




Wbtf^btftcco 



D. Disassembly and reassembly of 
the steering unit (Orbitrol) 



Disassembly 

1. 
2. 
3. 

4. 



6. 
7. 

8. 



Remove the unit from the tractor. 
Place the unit in a vice with plastic grips. 
Remove the screws (1). Mark the position of screw 
/2\ and remove it. 

Remove the cover plate (4), the O-ring (5), the 
stator (6) and the O- ring (8). 
Remove the spacer (10), the rotor (9), the distri- 
butor plate (29) and the O-ring (28). 
Withdraw the connecting shaft (11). 
Unscrew the threaded bush and recover the ball of 
the nonreturn valve (22). 

Withdraw the two pins and the two balls of the 
suction valves (23). 

Extract the sleeve (27) and spool valve (25) as- 
sembly by pushing it, making sure that the pin /7\ 
is horizontal. 



10. Remove the washers /12\ and (16), the needle 
roller bearing (14) and the ring /24\of the sleeve/ 
spool valve assembly. 

Remove the pin !7\ and the centring springs /13\ by 
pressing on one of their ends. Separate the sleeve 
(27) from the spool valve (25). 

1 1 . Unscrew the cap of the relief valve (18). Using an 
8mm Allen key, remove the threaded ring and take 
out the seal, the spring and the valve (the crimped 
seat is not removable). 

12. Unscrew the two caps of the shock valves (20). 
Remove the seals. Using a 6mm Allen key, remove 
the threaded rings and take out the springs, the 
balls and their seats (the crimped seats are not 
removable). 

13. Take out the seal /19\ the kin-ring (15) and the O- 
ring (17) 

14. Remove the check valve (26). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering 




8E01.9 



Reassembly 

1 5. Check and clean the parts, replacing any which 
are defective. Lubricate with suitable transmission 
oil before reassembling. 

16. Refit the check valve (26). 

1 7. Using special tool MS62A, fit the seal /19\ the CD- 
ring (17) and the kin-ring (15). 

1 8. In the holes for the shock valves (20) place the 
balls and the springs. Screw in the threaded rings. 
Fit the seals and tighten the caps. 

19. In the hole for the relief valve (18) place the valve 
and the spring. Screw in the threaded ring. Fit the 
seal and tighten the cap to a torque of 40-60 Nm. 

20. Fit the spool valve (25) into the sleeve (27). Position 
the centring springs /13\as shown in Fig. 1 and fit 
the pin /7\ using special tool MS63.. 

2 1 . Position the ring /24\on the sleeve and spool valve 
assembly so that the chamfer facilitates assembly 
in the unit. 

22. Fit the washers /1 2\and (1 6) with the chamfer of the 
washer /12\ facing towards the centring springs 
/13\ and with the needle roller bearing (14) bet- 
ween them. 

23. Fit the sleeve and spool valve assembly in the unit, 
applying a slight oscillating movement. Ensure 
that the pin /7\ is held horizontally. 

24. In the receptacles of the suction valves (23) place 
the two balls and the two pins. 

25 . I n the receptacle of the non -return valve (22) place 
the ball and screw on the threaded ring. 

26. Position the connecting shaft (11). 

27. Fit the O-ring (28) and the distributor plate (29). 

28. Fit the rotor (9) in such a way that two of the «C» 
shaped hollows are in the axis of the aperture of the 
shaft (11) (Fig. 2). Refit the spacer (10). 

29. Place the O-rings (5) and (8) on the stator (6). 

30. Whilst taking care not to move the rotor (9), fit the 
stator (6). Then move the stator so that its fastening 
holes coincide with those of the distributor. 
Note: The rotor (9) and the pin /7\ must be in the 
position shown In Fig. 3. 

31 . Refit the cover plate (4). 



32. Refit the screw /2\ (in the position marked upon 
disassembly) and the screws (1) with their seals 
(3). Tighten alternately to a torque of 30- 35 Nm. 

33. Using a test bench or an appropriate equipment, 
check the adjustment and operation of the Orbitrol . 

34. Refit the unit on the tractor. 












f 3 


Fig. 2 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8F01 Low-pressure components 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Hydraulics - Low-pressure components 8F01. 1 



General 



A. Lubrication and cooling system 



B. 1.5 bar valve 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8F01.2 Hydraulics - Low-pressure components 



*r 



~> 



General 



Functions or mechanisms supplied 


For operation refer to section 


by the low-pressure system 




, The hydrostatic steering unit (Orbitrol) 


8E01 


. The Speedshift situated in front 




of the gearbox 


5E02 


. The A/B range device situated in the 




gearbox selection cover 


5K01 


. The Hi/Lo (Hare/Tortoise) device fitted 




at the rear of the gearbox 


5K01 


. The front axle clutch (4WD) fitted. 




in the lower part of the rear axle 


7A01 


. The front and rear differential lock 


7C01 - 6J01 


. The p.t.o. clutch located at the 




front of the centre housing 


6G01 


. The p.t.o. brake fitted at the 




rear of the centre housing 


6D01 


. The lubrication and cooling system 


5A01 (p.3) 



A. Lubrication and cooling system 

When the main functions of the low-pressure system 
have been satisfied, the oil flows through the 17 bar 
distribution valve (3) and travels towards the oil cooler 
(1 3). It enters the oil cooler and passes into the lubrica- 
tion line L, connected by a T-fitting to the 17 bar 
distribution valve (Fig. 2). 

When the oil is cold, the 5 bar valve opens in the 1 7 bar 
distribution valve and enables a quantity of oil to pass 
directly into the lubrication line L (Fig. 3). 



Legend (Fig. 2/3) 

(3) 1 7 bar distribution valve 

(13)Oil cooler 

(36)1.5 bar valve 

A Front PTO lubrication (if fitted) 

B Lubrication hose coming from the 17 bar distribu- 
tion valve 

C Lubrication of front cover PTO shaft and gearbox 

D Lubrication of PTO clutch 

E Lubrication of driving pinion of PTO and coupler as 
well as compound pinion (4-speed version) 

L Lubrication line 



B. 1 .5 bar valve 



The lubrication line has a valve situated at the front left 
Of the gearbox which maintains a pressure of 1 .5 bar in 
the circuit. 

Operation 

The flow of oil coming from the 1 7 bar distribution vaive 
lubricates the front cover and the gearbox as well as the 
PTO shaft which traverses it. 

An external pipe also brings the oil to the PTO clutch. A 
small-bore pipe directs the oil towards the driving 
pinion of the PTO upper shaft and the coupler as well as 
the compound pinion of the 4-speed PTO (if fitted). 
If the pressure is greater than 1 .5 bar, the spring (2) is 
compressed, the valve (1) lifts up and the oil flows into 
the gearbox housing (Fig. 1). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Hydraulics - Low-pressure components- 8F01.3 



Lubrication and cooling system, 5 bar valve closed (oil hot) 

@ (& 




— ' ' . — 



/ \ 




uuu 



Fig. 2 



Lubrication system, 5 bar valve opened (oil cold) 



n n n 




UUU 



Fig. 3 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Master cylinders 




8G01.1 



8 G01 Brake and clutch master cylinder circuit 



CONTENTS 



A. Working on the master cylinders 



B. Master cylinders with trailer brake 



C. Master cylinders without trailer brake 



D. Brake pedal adjustment 



E. Clutch master cylinder. 



F. Clutch pedal adjustment 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.ne1 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8G01.2 



Hydraulics - Master cylinders 




V v 



A. Working on the brake and clutch 
master cylinders 

If it should prove necessary to dismantle the master 
cylinders, clean all parts carefully. Replace those 
which are scratched or deformed. 
Brake and clutch master cylinder repair kits can be 
found in the spare parts catalogue. 
After disassembly or replacement of the brake master 
cylinders, bleed the main brake circuit and the trailer 
brake circuit (if fitted). Refer to chapter 6K01 (sections 
C and D). Check pedal adjustment (section D). 
After disassembly or replacement of the clutch master 
cylinder, bleed the circuit, refer to chapter 5C01.G. 
Check pedal adjustment (section F). 



B. Master cylinders with trailer 
brake (dual circuit) (Fig. 2) 

Pedals unlatched (Fig. 1): 

The effort applied to a pedal, transmitted by the rod 
(5), moves the piston (4) in the bore of the active master 
cylinder. The valve (1) closes the feed port, the ba- 
lancing valve (3) is opened by the piston (4) and the 
ball (2) and oil is fed under pressure to the ports of the 
main brake C and of the pressure balancing junction D. 



Through the junction, the pressure closes the valve (3) 
of the passive master cylinder. 
The action on the piston (4) likewise causes the move- 
ment of the piston (6) and the closure of the valve F. The 
oil contained in the chamber E is channelled via the 
connecting bar to the chamber E" and to the orifice B' 
through the open valve F' of the passive master cylin- 
der. 

The assembly comprising the valve F and the piston (6) 
rapidly meets the end of the active master cylinder. 
In this position, only the tractor brake is activated. 
The trailer is not braked. 

Pedals latched 

Braking and balancing of pressure 

The effort applied to both pedals, transmitted by the 
push rods (5), moves the pistons (4) in the bores of the 
two master cylinders. The two valves (1 ) close the feed 
ports, the two balancing valves (3) are opened by the 
pistons (4) and the balls (2). The pressure equalizes in 
the two master cylinders by the balancing junction D. 
The oil is likewise fed under pressure to the ports C and 
C of the main brake circuit. 
Trailer braking 

The continuous action of the pistons (4) and (6) closes 
the valves F and F'. The chambers E and E' which are 
pressured feed the control valve of the trailer brake via 
the ports A and A'. 



Fig. 1 




A Control of trailer brake valve (dual circuit). 
B Supply of master cylinders via the distribution 

valve. 
C Supply to main brake 



D Pressure balancing junction 

E Trailer brake pressure chamber (dual circuit) 

F Valve (dual circuit) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics- Master cylinders 




8G01.3 




Brake master cylinders with trailer braking (single circuit) 



Fig. 3 




(1) Bar (control of trailer brake valve) (6) Trailer brake sensing pipe 

(2) Bar (supply of master cylinders, coming from the (7) Trailer brake valve 
distribution valve) (8) Trailer brake junction 

(3) Main brake supply (9) Sensing pipe (single-circuit version with 

(4) Pressure balancing junction pipe trailer brake) 

(5) Brake master cylinders 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8G01.4 



Hydraulics - Master cylinders 



* 



C . Master cylinders without trailer 
brake (single circuit) (Fig. 6) 

Pedals unlatched (Fig. 4): 

The effort applied to a pedal, transmitted by the rod (5), 
moves the piston (4) in the bore of the active master 
cylinder. The valve (1) closes the feed port, the balan- 
cing valve (3) is opened by the piston (4) and the ball 
(2) and the oil is fed under pressure to the ports of the 
main brake C and of the pressure balancing junction D. 
Through the balancing junction, the pressure closes 
the valve (3) of the passive master cylinder. 

Pedals latched 

Braking and balancing of pressure 

The effort applied to the two pedals, transmitted by the 
rods (5), moves the pistons (4) in the bores of the two 
master cylinders. The two valves (1) close the feed 
ports, the two balancing valves (3) are opened by the 
pistons (4) and the balls (2). 

The pressures equalize in the two master cylinders by 
the balancing junction D. The oil is likewise fed under 
pressure to the ports C and C of the main brake circuit. 



Note: There is a version with trailer brake (Fig. 3) for 
tractors equipped with a single-circuit assembly. 
The trailer brake valve (7) is controlled by a pipe (9) 
connected to the feed hose (3) of the right hand- 
brake, on the upper part of the rear axle housing 
(Fig. 5). 




Fig. 5 



) 




Fig. 4 



B Supply of the master cylinders via the distribution 

valve 
C Supply to the main brake 
D Pressure balancing junction 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



WW 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Master cylinders 




8 G01.5 



Brake master cylinders without trailer braking (single circuit) 



Fig. 6 




(2) Bar (supply of master cylinders, coming from the 
distribution valve) 

(3) Main brake supply 



(4) Pressure balancing junction pipe 

(5) Brake master cylinders 



D. Brake pedal adjustment 

1. Smear the pins (5) and (6) with molybdenum di- 
sulphrde (Fig. 7). 

2. Smear the clevis (1) with Loctite 542 and screw it 
on to the rod (2). 

3. Fit the return spring (3). 

4. Adjust the clevis so as to obtain a distance X of 1 1 5 
mm ± 0.5 between the support (4) and the clevis 
fastening pin. 

5. Do the same for the second clevis and check that 
the twinning mechanism operates smoothly. 

6. Manually check the operation of each pedal to 
ensure that they operate freely. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8 G01.6 



Hydraulics - Master cylinders 



lb 







E. Clutch master cylinder 
Operation (Fig. 10) 

The effort applied to the pedal, transmitted by the rod 
(1), moves the piston (2) in the bore of the master 
cylinder. The valve (3) closes the feed port A and the 
oil is fed under pressure to the port B and the supply 
channel of the clutch slave cylinder. 
Note : For sealing improvement two guide rings 
have been added to the piston from serial 
(TR334024. 

Only complete master cylinder are interchangea- 
ble, not the repair kits. 



F. Clutch pedal adjustment 

1 .Coat the pins (3) and (4) with molybdenum disul- 
phide. 

2. Apply Loctite 542 on thread of the rod (1). 

3. Adjust the rod so as to obtain travel of: 

- 1 70 mm (3000 tractors) (Fig. 8) 

- 200 mm (3100 tractors) (Fig. 9) 

between the declutched position (pedal in contact 
with the stop (2)) and the engaged position. 

4. Manually check the operation of the pedal to en- 
sure that it operates freely. 




A 
B 

(1) 
(2) 
(3) 




Supply (coming from the distribution valve) 

Supply of the slave cylinder 

Rod 

Piston 

Valve 



Fig. 10 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



w 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Distribution valve 




8H01.1 



8 H01 Distribution valve 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Operation 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8H01.2 



Hydraulics - Distribution valve 



*■ 



General 



The distribution valve is fitted on the rear bonnet sup- 
port, its function is: 

- To supply oil and keep the low pressure circuit to 1 7 
bar. 

- To supply the lubrication and cooling system. 

- To ensure a constant level in the brake and clutch 
master cylinders. 



A. Operation (Fig. 2) 



When the engine is started, the oil coming from the 
steering control valve (Orbitrol) enters through 'port 1 
and flows out through port 5 towards the low pressure 
circuit of the right hand hydraulic cover to feed: 

- the speedshift 

- the A/B range 

- the Hare/Tortoise range 

- the 4WD clutch 

- the differential lock 

- the p.t.o. clutch 

- the p.t.o. brake 

- the front p.t.o. (if fitted) 

A back pressure is then created in the circuit, forcing 
the ball (20) to lift from its seat, compressing the spring 
(21). The oil passes to the back of the spool (19), 
creating a pressure which gradually moves it, com- 
pressing the spring (1 7), resting against the shims [1 8], 

The spool (19) enables the oil to pass towards the port 
6 and towards the oil cooler. It emerges cooled and 
travels towards the channels (14) and (13) of the lu- 
brication system. When the oil is cool, the 5 bar valve 
(15) opens and allows a quantity of oil to pass directly 
to the channel (13) of the lubrication system without 
passing Ihrough the cooler. 

When one of the low-pressure functions is required, the 
momentary pressure drop causes the ball (20) to return 
to its seat due to the action of the spring (21), and the 
spool (19) attempts to move, being pushed back by its 
own spring (17). The oil in the end chamber escapes 
through the drain hole V, enabling the spool to move 
back slowly. 

When the needs of the low-pressure circuit are satis- 
fied, the oil finally passes through the feed ports 8 and 
1 (Fig. 1 ). Flow and residual pressure are regulated by 
a pipe 11 and a restrictor A, thereby maintaining a 
constant level in the brake and clutch master cylinders. 




tote 



Fig. 1 



3 



Leakages return to the gearbox via port 9, 

Note: A fter dismantling or replacement of the valve, 

tighten it to a torque of 40 to 55 Nm. 

Designation of ports (Fig. 1). 

Each port is numbered on the valve body. 



1 

2 
3 
4 
5 



6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 



Supply coming from the Orbitro! unit. 
Outlet to the front p.t.o. (if fitted). 
Not used (plug) 
Not used (plug) 

Outlet (17 bar) to the Speedshift, the A/B range 
(if fitted) and the solenoids fastened on the right 
hand cover. 

Outlet to the oil cooler (5 bar valve closed). 
Outlet to the lubrication line (5 bar valve open). 
Clutch master cylinder supply (residual flow). 
Return to front left hand of gearbox. 
Brake master cylinder supply (residual flow). 
Outlet with external pipe connecting the supply 
channels of the brake and clutch master cylin- 
ders and the T-piece mounted on the outlet of the 
lubrication line. 







") 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Distribution valve 




8H01.3 



Fig. 2 




(12) Distribution valve 

(1.3) Lubrication towards the front cover, the p.t.o, 

shaft, the p.t.o clutch and the driving gear 2 or 

4-speed p.t.o. 

(14) Lubrication coming from the oil cooler 
(5 bar valve closed) 

(15) 5 bar valve 



(16) 


Valve bod' 


(17) 


Spring 


[18] 


Shims 


(19) 


Spool 


(20) 


Ball 


(21) 


Spring 


A 


Restrictor 


V 


Drain hole 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




8101.1 



810 1 Right-hand hydraulic cover 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Removal of cover 



8. Refitting of cover 



C. Disassembly and reassembly of high-pressure valve 



D. Disassembly of cover 



E. Removal and disassembly of Bosch pump 



11 



F. Reassembly and refitting of Bosch pump 



12 



G. Reassembly of cover 



14 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8101.2 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




General 



The right-hand cover fitted on the rear axle housing has 
two main functions: 

- It serves as a support for numerous components of 
the hydraulic system. 

- It comprises various intake and delivery channels of 
the high- and low-flow (high- and low-pressure) cir- 
cuits. 

The internal face of the cover accommodates: 

- The dual element hydraulic pump and its driving 
gear. 

- The suction pipe. 

- The intake manifold. 

- The transfer pipe from the left cover. 

Its external faces accommodate: 
• The five solenoids controlling the low-pressure func- 
tions (depending on option). 

- The safety valve of the high-pressure circuit. 

■ The trailer brake valve (if fitted) or a cover plate. 

- The pressure test coupler. 

- The oi! filter. 

- The low oil pressure switch. 

- The filter vacuum switch. 

- The engine speed sensor. 



Parts list 


(D 


Cover 


(2) 


Screw 


(3) 


High-pressure (high-flow) valve 


(4) 


Engine speed sensor 


(5) 


Plug (version without Autotronic) 


(6) 


P. TO. brake supply connector 


(7) 


P.T.O brake solenoid 


(8) 


Reducer (version with Autotronic) 


(9) 


Reducer (version without Autotronic) 


(10) 


Fitting (version without Autotronic) 


(11) 


Low-pressure switch (see table) 


(12) 


Low-pressure switch (see table) 


(13) 


Solenoid valve (p.t.o. clutch) 


(14) 


Fitting (2WD version) 


(15) 


Differential lock solenoid 


(16) 


Differential lock supply connector 


(17) 


4WD solenoid 


(18) 


Plug {2WD version) 


(19) 


i -lare/lortoise solenoid 


(20) 


i 7 bar supply connector 


(21) 


Plug (2WD version) 


(22) 


J WD clutch supply connecfor 



(23) 


Low-pressure output connector 




(to Orbitrol steering valve) 


(24) 


Low pressure test coupler 


(25) 


Screw 


(26) 


Filter vacuum switch 


(27) 


Plugs 


(28) 


Cover plate (version without trailer brake) 


(29) 


Plug 


(30) 


O-ring 


(31) 


O-ring 


(32) 


O-ring 


(33) 


High-pressure output connector 




(to auxiliary spool valves) 


(34) 


Seal 


(35) 


O-ring 


(36) 


O-ring 


(37) 


Dowels 


(38) 


O-rings 


(39) 


Transfer pipe 


(40) 


Pin 


(41) 


Collar 


(42) 


Screw 


(43) 


Screw 


(44) 


Deflector 


(45) 


Suction pipe 


(46) 


Seal 


(47) 


Intake manifold 


(48) 


Pipe 


(49) 


O-rings 


(50) 


Oil filter 


(51) 


Nut 


(52) 


Washer 


(53) 


Pump gear 


(54) 


Key 


(55) 


Screw 


(56) 


Pump 


(57) 


Trailer brake valve 


(58) 


High pressure test coupler 



Different fittings for low-pressure switch I 


Version 


i ! 

Switch (12) Switch (11) 

Red mark ■ Green mark 


With Autotronic 


, t 
I 


Without Autotronic 


1 I 1 '■ 


With Autotronic j j ! 
With super-creeoer I 2 I ! 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



■/ V 




Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 8101.3 



Version without 
trailer brake valve 



View of external layout 



Version 
without 
Autotronic 




2WD version 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8101.4 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




View of internal layout 
<5§) 






Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




8101.5 




tssue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




8101.6 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




Identification of ports and fines 




] Low-pressure circuit 
1 High-pressure circuii 

Line to auxiliary spool valves 
Front and rear differential Sock (4WD) 
1 7 bar line coming from distribution valve 
Low-pressure line to Orbitrol distributor 



Return to housing 
Suction 



E : Line to 4WD clutch (if fitted) 

F : Suction 

G : Suction {Output from filter to two-siage cump) 

H : Filter 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



■y 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




8101.7 



A. Removal of cover 



1 . Carry out operations 1 to 7 (Chapter 5K01 ). 
For operations 2 to 1 2 refer to Fig. 1 . 

2. Remove the oil filter (1) to gain access to screw (2). 

3. Remove the trailer brake socket feed pipe (3) (if 
fitted). 

4. Remove the screws (5). 

5. Remove the valve (6). 

Note: Do not disconnect the hose (7) on the pilot 
head, to avoid having to bleed the trailer brake 
circuit. 

6. Disconnect and block: 

- the hose (8) towards the auxiliary circuit 

- the pipe (10) and hose (12) of the differential lock 
control (4WD) 

Note: Hose (12) must be disconnected from the 

connector at the protector end. 

On 2WD tractors, disconnect hose (10) only. 

- the supply pipe (16) of the 4WD clutch at both 
ends 

- Ihe supply pipe (1 1 ) of the p.t.o. brake at both ends 

- the suppiy pipe (17) of the Orbitrol steering valve 

- the pipe (15) coming from the distribution valve. 

7. Disconnect the harness (9) of the engine speed 
sensor. 

8. Disconnect the harness (13) of the low-pressure 
switch and the wire (4) of the filter vacuum switch. 

9. Remove the cover plate (14). 



1 0. Disconnect the solenoids (mark the connections). 

1 1 . Remove the p.t.o. brake solenoid in order to avoid 
interference with the cab (low cab). 

Note: The p.t.o, solenoid is equip ped with a 
diode. It is marked with the symbol j » -. 

1 2. Remove the screws (2). * 

1 3. Remove the cover. 

14. Remove the transfer pipe(1) (Fig. 2) 




-*\\ 




-S^D 



Fig- 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8101.8 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




'■/ V 



B. Refitting of cover 



1 5. Clean the housing and cover joint faces . 

1 6. Check the presence of the two dowels (1) on the 
cover (Fig. 3). 

1 7. Fit new seals on the cover: 

- for the Hare/Tortoise lines (2) (Fig. 3) 

- for the p.t.o. clutch line (3) (Fig. 3) 

- for the suction pipe (4) (Fig. 4) (ensure the pipe is 
the right way round: the pin on the housing must 
be in the notch (Fig. 4)). 

18. Screw two guide studs, manufactured locally, in 
diametricalty opposite positions on the housing. 

1 9. Refit the transfer pipe. 

20. Smear the cover joint face, with a sealing 
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent). 

Note: Take care not to obstruct the Hare/Tor~ 
toise lines. 

21 . Refit the cover and screws (2) (Fig, 1 ). 

Note: Remove the two guide studs. Tighten to a 
torque of 72-96 Nm. 

22. Refit the PTO brake solenoid and tighten to a 
torque of 18-20 Nm. Reverse ODerations 7 to 10. 

23. Fix the harnesses with a clip. 

24. Reverse operation 6. 

25. Refit valve (6) (if fitted) (Fig. 1). 
Note: Replace the O-rings. 

26. Refit the screws (5) (Fig. 1 ) and tighten them to a 
torque of 25-35 Nm. 

27. Reverse operations 2 and 3. 

28. Jack up the tractor. Refit the wneel. 

29. Remove the jack and tighten the wheel nuts to a 
torque of 400-450 Nm. 

30. Take away the chocks. 

31 . Top up the oil. Start the engine. 

32. Check the operation of the electrical circuits, low- 
pressure switch, solenoids and filter vacuum 
switch. 

33. If the pump has had to be removed or replaced 
(see sections E and F) repeat hydraulic tests. 
Check the cover joint face and hydraulic 
connectors for leaks. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




8101.9 



C. Disassembly and reassembly of 
high-pressure valve 

Operation (Pig. 5) 

If the pressure p exceeds 188 bar. spring (4) is 
compressed and valve (7) moves allowing oil to pass 
to the housing via port C. 

Disassembly 

34. Unscrew the plug (1). Retrieve the shims [2], 
withdraw the spring (4). 

35. Remove the O-ring (5). withdraw the body (6) 
complete with valve (7) and washer (8) from the RH 
cover. 

Note: Ball (9) is fitted in the vaive body. 

Reassembly 

36. Check that the valve (7) slides freeiy in the vaive 
body (6). 

37. Fit washer (8), mount the body (6) complete with 
valve (7) in the cover. Position the O-ring (5). 

38. Fit the spring (4) ana shims [2] ana tighten the plug 
(1) to a torque of 50 - 60 Nm. 



D, Disassembly of cover 

39. Remove the cover. Carry out operations 1 to 14. 

40. Place the cover (1) in a vice with soft plastic jaws. 

41. Remove the solenoids and plug (18) (2WD 
version). 

42. Remove She low-pressure switch (12) (see table, 
page 2) and the reducer (8). 

43. Remove the switches (11) ana (12) (see table, 
page 2), the fitting (10) and the reducer (9). 

44. Remove connector (16), then fitting (22), (or fitting 
(14) and a plug (21) on 2WD version). 




45. Remove connectors (6). (20). (23). (33). 

46. Remove the screws (25) and the cover plate (28) 
(version without trailer brake). Remove the G-rings 
(30), (31) ana (32). 

47. Unscrew the engine speed sensor (4) or the plug 
(5) (version without Autotronic). 

48. Remove the filter vacuum switch (26) and the test 
coupler (24). 

49. Remove the screws (55), the intake manifold (47). 
the seal (34) and the pipe (48). Remove the seals 
(49). 

50. If necessary, unscrew the plugs (27). 



Removal of driving gear 

51. Unscrew the nut (51). Remove the washer (52). the 
gear (53) and the key (54). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




V 



8101.10 Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v V 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




8101.11 



E. Removal and disassembly of 
Bosch pump 

Removal (Fig. 7) 

52. Remove the screws (2), and pump (56). Remove 
the O-rings (35) and (36). 

Note: The dowels (37) are force-fitted in the 
cover. 

Disassembly (Fig. 6) 

53. Place the pump in a vice (Fig. 8). 

54. Mark the position of: the stages, the intermediate 
plate and the plates. 

55. Remove the screws (2) and (4). 

56. Remove the cover plate (1). 

57. Remove [he composite seal (3) and seal (38). 
Separate the low-pressure stage (37) from the 
intermediate plate (14). 

58. Remove the stage and the bearing/pinions 
assembly (7). 

59. Remove the pinions (8) and (9) from the bearing 
assemblies (5) and (11). 

Note: Keep the bearing assemblies paired. Each 
bearing is linked by a dowel «P» (Fig. 9). 

60. Remove the composite seal (12) and seal (13). 

61 . Remove the intermediate plate (14), the driver (15) 
and the seal (16). 

62. Untighten and remove the screws (36). 

63. Remove the intermediate plate (35). 

64. Remove the composite seal (33) and seal (34). 

65. Separate the high-pressure stage (32) from the 
flange (21). 

66. Remove the bearing/pinions assembly (25). 

67. Remove the pinions (28) and (29) from the bearing 
assemblies (27) and (31). 

Note: Keep the bearing assemblies paired. 

68. Remove the composite seal (23). 

69. Remove the seal (22). 

70. Remove the circlip (19) and drive out the bush (20). 





Fig. 6 ! 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8101.12 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




F. Reassembly and refitting of Bosch 
pump 

Reassembly (Fig. 6) 

7 1 . Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are 
defective. 

Note: The seals and the bush must always be 
replaced and fitted in the lubricated state. 

72. Push the seal ring (20) in the plate (21) and fit the 
Circlip (19). 

Note: The bearing assemblies have different 
forms. The intermediate beating assemblies 
(1 1) and (31) have a recess «E» (Fig. 10) for oil 
to pass to the low-pressure stage (37). 

73. Fit the bearing assembly (27) (without recess), 
located by the pin (24), in the high-pressure stage 
(32). Position the lubrication channels «G» to- 
wards the intake orifice «0". and the groove «R»of 
the composite seal (23) towards the plate (21) 
(Fig. ?H 

74 . Place the pinions (28) and (29) of the hign-pressure 
stage in the bearing assembly (27). 

Note: The pinions of the high-pressure stage 
are wider. 

75. Position the composite seal (23) ana seal (22) 
(Fig. 12).. 

76. Assemble the high-pressure stage (32) on the 
flange (21) according to the marks made at the 
time of disassembly. 

77. Fit the bearing assembly (31 ) (with recess), located 
by the pin (30), in the high-pressure stage (32). 
Position the lubrication channels -G- and the 
recess -<E» towards the intake orifice -CK and the 
groove ■< R - of the composite seal (33) towards the 
top (Fig. 13). 





Fig. 10 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




8101.13 



78. Position the composite seal (33) and seal (34). 
Assemble the flange (35) on the high-pressure 
stage (32) (Fig. 14) according to the marks made 
at the time of disassembly. 

79. Centre the flange (35). Fit and tighten the screws 
(36) to a torque of 40-47 Nm. 

80. Refit the driver (15) against the flat surface of the 
driving pinion (28). Position the seal (16). 

81. Fit the intermediate plate (14) according to the 
marks made at the time of disassembly. 

82. Fit the bearing assembly (1 1 ) (with recess), located 
by the pin (10), in the low-pressure stage (37). 
Position the lubrication channels «G» and the 
recess «E» towards the intake orifice «0», and the 
groove «R» of the composite seal (12) towards the 
intermediate plate (14) (Fig. 15). 

83. Position the composite seal (12) and seal (13) 
(Fig. 15). 

84. Assemble the low-pressjre stage (37) on the in- 
termediate plate (14) according to the marks made 
at the time of disassembly. 

85. Place the pinions (8) and (9) in the low-pressure 
stage, ensuring that the flat surface of the ariving 
pinion (9) enters the driver (15). 

86. Fit the bearing assembly (5) (without recess), lo- 
cated by the pin (6). in the low-pressure stage (37). 
Position the lubrication channels «G» towards the 
intake orifice -O-, and the groove «R» of the 
composite seal (3) towards the cover plate (1) 
(Fig. 16). 

87. Position the composite seal (3) and seal (38) 
(Fig. 17). 




i Fig. 16 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8101.14 



Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 




V / 



88. Centre the low-pressure stage {37) and assemble 
the cover plate (1) according to the marks made 
at the time of disassembly. 

89. Fit and tighten the screws (2) and (4) to a torque 
of 40-47 Nm. 

90. Manually check the rotation of the pump. 

Refitting 

9 1 . Clean and check the parts. Replace any which 
are defective. Check that none of the channels of 
the cover are blocked. 

92. Push the dowels (37) (if removed) into the cover 
(Fig. 18). 

93. On the cover, fit new O-rings (35) and (36) in the 
counterbores of the high- and low-pressure chan- 
nels (Fig. 18). 

94. Inside the cover, apply a bead C of Loctite 575 
around the four screw holes (Fig. 18). 

95. Refit the pump on the dowels (37) (Fig. 7). 

96. Smear the screws (2) with Loctite 221 and tighten 
them to a torque of 10 - 12 Nm (Fig. 7). 



G. Reassembly of cover 

Refitting of driving gear 

97. Position the key (54). Fit the driving gear (53), 
ensuring that it iscorrectly engaged on the key. Fit 
the washer (52). 

98. Smear the nut (51 ) with Loctite 24 1 and tighten to 
a torque of 50 - 60 Nm. 

99. Refit the plugs (27) smeared with Loctite 542 (if 
removed). 

100. Replace the O-rings (49) on the pipe (48). 

101. Replace the seal (34), refit the pipe and intake 
manifold (47), Refit the screws (55). 

1 02. Fit the filter vacuum switch (26). 

1 03. Fit and tighten the test coupler (24) with its O-ring. 

104. Fit the sensor (4) (Autotronic. Datatronic) with 
"Loctite 577 Sensor Sealing" or equivalent. 

105. Screw in the sensor, without forcing it, until it is in 
contact with the pump gear. 

106. Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn to provide 
clearance of approx. 1 mm between the sensor 
(4) and the gear (53). Tighten the nut (1) to a 
torque of 10-12 Nm (Fig. 19). 

107. Fit the O-rings (30) (31) (32) in their respective 
locations on the cover plate (28) (version without 
trailer brake). 




(£3) 




110,5 


\ 




@ ~fcr- 








-J- - 


ft . 

V \ ^^ 


V It 




© 




/ if 

— — Js 




Fig. 19 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



^L 



v v 



T 




Hydraulics - RH hydraulic cover 



8101.15 



1 08. Refit the plate, fit the screws (25) and tighten them 
to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm. 

1 09. Refit the connectors (6). (20). (23) and (33). 

110. Fit the plug (21) and connector (14) (2WD 
version), connectors (16) and (22) (4WD version). 

111. Refit the reducer (8) wuh its O-ring and low- 
pressure switch (12), lightly smeared with Loctite 
221 (version with Autotronic. see table on page 2). 

1 1 2. Refit the reducer (9) with its O-ring, the connector 
(10) and the two low-pressure switches smeared 
with Loctite 221. 

Note: The low-pressure switches are marked 
with a spot of paint between the two terminals. 
It is important to fit them according to the table 
on page 2. 

For tractors without Autotronic or with Auto- 
tronic and super-creeper, fit the switches as 
shown in Fig. 20. 

1 1 3. Refit the solenoid and plug (18) (2WD version). 
Note: To avoid interference with the cab, do 
not refit the p.t.o. brake solenoid on tractors 
with a low cab. The p.t.o. brake solenoid is 
equippe d with a diode. It is marked with the 
symbol i > ^ 

Tighten the solenoid to a torque oft 8-20 Nm. 

1 14. Refit the high-pressure \alve. Carry out opera- 
tions 36 to 38. 

1 1 5. Refit the cover, Carry out operations 1 5 to 33. 




Fia 20 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




v v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - LH cover 




8102. 1 



8 102 Left-hand hydraulic cover 



CONTENTS 



A. Removal 



B. Refitting 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




8102.2 



Hydraulics - LH cover 



V / 



A. Removal 



1 . Immobilise the tractor and lift the rear with a trolley 
jack. Slacken the left rear wheel and put a stand in 
place. Remove the wheel. 

2. Drain the gearbox (only). 

3. Mark and disconnect the cables of the lift (1) and 
lowering (2) solenoid {Fig. 1). 

4. Disconnect and block the lift valve supply hose (3) 
and the ram supply tube (4) (Fig. 1). 

Note: On tractors with a tow cab, remove the 
bolts (7) and take away the valve to facilitate 
access to the upper bolts (5) of the cover. 

5. Remove the bolts (5) and take away the support (6) 
of the of the hand brake control. 

Note: On tractors equipped with GSPTO, dis- 
connect the control (8) and remove the support 
(9) (Fig. 1). 

6. Remove the cover and the transfer tube. 



B. Refitting 



7. Clean the cover and housing joint surfaces . 

8. Check that the O-rings (1) of the transfer tube are 
not damaged and refit the tube (Fig. 2). 

9. Coat the housing joint surface with a sealant 
(Master Joint or equivalent). 

1 0. Screw in two opposing guide studs G (Fig. 2). 

1 1 . Refit the cover. 

12. Mount the handbrake control support (6). the 
GSPTO support (9) (if fitted) (Fig. 1 ). Remove the 
guide studs. Fit and tighten the bolts to a torque of 
72 - 96 Nm. Connect the controls. 

Note: On tractors with a low cab, check that the 
O-rings of the lift control valve are not damaged 
and refit the valve. 

Fit and tighten the bolts (7) to a torque of 25 -35 
Nm (Fig. 1). 

1 3. Check the adjustment of the control: 

- of the handbrake; carry out operations 71 to 75. 
chapter 6 101. 

- of the GSPTO (if fitted) : carry out operations 99 to 
105. chapter 6 F01. 

1 4. Reconnect the supply hose (3) of the lift valve and 
the feed tube (4) of the lift rams (Fig. 1 ). 

15. Reconnect the lilt (1) and lowering (2) solenoid 
(yellow connector) (Fig. 1 ). 

16. Fasten the cable to the valve supply hose with a 
clip. 





1 7. Refit the wheel. Take away the stand and the trolley 
jack. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm. 

1 8. Top up the housing oil level. 

19. Start the engine. 

20. Check the operation of the lift system and check for 
leaks at the joint faces of the cover and the hydrau- 
lic connectors. 

Version without lift 

The cover (valve support) is replaced by a plate with a 
hydraulic sfeeve. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




v v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydraulic tests 




8J01.1 



8 J0 1 Hydraulic tests 



CONTENTS 



Preparation. 



A. High flow circuit 



B. Low flow circuit 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8J01.2 



Hydraulics - Hydraulic tests 




Preparation 



Before beginning the tests, the engine should be run to 
bring the oil temperature up to minimum 60 C C (140°F). 
The following equipment is recommended for the tests 
shown in this section. It is available through the MF 
dealer network. 

Pressure gauge kit 

Hoses and unions kit 

Flowmeter assembly 

Hydraulic coupler 



- MF3G01 

- MF3002 
-MF3Q03 " 

- 3582045 Ml 
Otherwise, use suitable equivalent equipment. 

In all cases, make sure of the direction of flow of the 
oil to avoid damaging the flowmeter. Also choose 
pressure gauges, hoses and unions of sufficient 
capacity and strength. 




A. High flow circuit 



1 . HP safety valve 

Fit a pressure gauge with coupler 3582045 Ml (Fig. 1 ) 
on the diagnostic point located on the trailer brake 
valve (if fitted), or on the cover plate fitted on the right- 
hand cover. Run the engine at 2000 rpm. Operate an 
auxiliary spool valve so as to open the valve. Read : 
P1 = 185 bar (+15 bar - 5 bar) 
At 1000 rpm, the pressure should not fall. 
If necessary, adjust the valve by the use of shims (See 
Section C 8101), 

2. Pump flow 

Connect the inlet pressure port of the flowmeter to a 
spool valve quick coupler other than the one fed by the 
flow divider. 

Connect the return directly to the centre housing via the 
transmission filler orifice. The return can also be con- 
nected to Accessory No. 3467953M91 , giving a direct 
connection with the centre housing (Fig. 2). 
Operate the spool valve concerned and check that the 
following minimum readings are obtained : 



Engine speed rpm 


Q1 : l/min 


P2 : barj 


2000 
2000 


40 
38.5 



100 




3. Trailer brake valve (if fitted) 

Connect a pressure gauge to the trailer brake socket. 

Run the engine at 2000 rpm. 

Apply a progressive force to the brake pedals, which 

should be locked together. The pressure reading 

should gradually increase and reach : 

P3 = 130- 150 bar max. 

4. Anti-shock lift valve 

Disconnect the cylinder inlet hoses and connect them 

to a manual adjustment pump. 

With the engine shut down and the lift valve in neutral 

position, apply pressure to the system. Note the 

opening pressure : 

P4 = 200 -210 bar. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




./ v 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydraulic tests 




8J01.3 



High flow 




Issue 1 



November 1931 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8J01.4 



Hydraulics - Hydraulic tests 




B. Low flow circuit 



1. Pump flow 

As shown in Fig. 3. connect the flowmeter between the 
distribution valve and the 1-5 bar valve hose. 
Caution : Check that the flowmeter valve is comple- 
tely open. 

Also connect a pressure gauge to the distribution valve 

(Port 4 with-piug). 

The following minimum readings should be found : 



] Engine speed 


Q2 : l/mn 


P5 : bar 


Rem. 


j 2000 

! 
I 


23 


17 


Steering 
at rest 


j 1000 


11.5 


17 


Steering 

at rest 

i 



4k 



During these tests, the rear axle must not be 
put on blocks with the front axie {4 WD) enga- 
ged. 



2. Checking leaks at clutches and receiving 
components 

To check the reference point flow at Q2, the front axle 

should be engaged (no flow to clutch, warning light 

«on»). the range lever in Tortoise position, the A/B 

control lever at position B. 

Remain connected as at B1 . Note the reference point 

Flow Q2 at 1000 rpm. 

Operate each function separately and note flow Q3. 

The difference Q2 - Q3 represents the leak, which must 

not exceed the values shown in the guide table : 

Example: PTO Clutch 




Q2 = 13 l/min. Q3 = 1 1.5 l/min. Leak = 1.5 l/mm. OK 
Q2 = 13 l/min. Q3 = 10.8 l/min. Leak = 2.2 l/min. higher 
than acceptable leak. 

Note: Before checking the following function and so 
that flow Q3 is not falsified, move the lever of the 
function under test to the neutral position or to the 
range position shown below. a 

When all clutches and other components are fed. ™ 
pressure P5 should stay at 1 7 bar. 





PTO 
Clutch 


PTO 
Brake 


Diff. 

Lock 


Front 
PTO 


Speed- 
shift 


A 
Range 


Hate 

Range 


I 
Front 

Axle ! 


Reference point 
flow Q2 


















* 1 


Flow read at Q3 


















* i 

t 


Leak registered 
02 - Q3 l/mn 
















! 
i 

i 


Acceptable leak 
l/mn 


2 


2 


2 


3 


3 


1.5 


2 


2 ! 
i 


Pressure at P5 


17 bar j 



" Q2 = With front axie engaged (no flow to clutch) 

' Q3 = With front axle disengaged (flow to clutch) 

As from tractor No. N047049, to disengage the front axle when the tractor is stopped the solenoid has to be 

connected directly from the positive terminal of the battery. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Hydraulic tests 




8J01.5 



Low flow 




WW 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8J01.6 



Hydraulics - Hydraulic tests 




3. Supply to steering valve (Orbitrol) 

Connect a pressure gauge to the diagnostic point on 
the right-hand hydraulic cover, as shown in Fig. 4. 
Turn the steering to full lock and read : 
P6 a 170 bar at 1000 rpm and at 2000 rpm 



4. Supply to steering cylinder 

Connect a- pressure gauge to a bypass on each 

steering cylinder hose. 

With the steering at rest, read : 

P7 = i7bar 

Turn the steering wheel. The pressure should reach 

between 1 7 and 1 70 bar on the inlet end of the cylinder. 

The pressure on the return line should be 17 bar. 



5. Clutch release bearing 

Connect a pressure gauge with a 3582045 M 1 coupler 

to the bleed point located on the right-hand side of the 

gearbox (Fig. 5). 

Caution: Since the pressure can reach 30 bar when 

the pedal is depressed, it is essential to connect the 

pressure gauge after starting the engine. 

Note pressure P8 = 1.5 bar max. 



6. Lubricating pressure 

Connect a pressure gauge to the tee-union on the valve 
on the left of the gearbox. Note P9 = 1.5 bar max. 




^f 



/, i 



) N 'ri-r 



Fig. 5 / / 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



^ 



3000/3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



8 KO 7 Dynashift control 



CONTENTS 

General - 



A. Ratios explanation 



B. Dynashift piston pressure check 



Hydraulics - Dynashift 8K01.1 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8 KOI. 2 



Hydraulics - Dynashift 



^ 



General 



The system control assembly comprises of the three 

main parts (Fig. 1) : 

-The distribution unit (1) mounted on the right side of 

the gearbox, it has two internal oiiways A and B (Fig. 

2) allowing the oil to circulate from one solenoid valve 

to the other. 

-The solenoid valves (2) are screwed into the distribu- 
tion unit, they include: 
. the lower solenoid valve EV1 with four ports and two 

positions. 
. the upper solenoid valve EV2 with three ports and 

two positions. 

- The accumulator (3) mounted on the distribution unit, 

on the inlet line, enhances the oil flow to fill the 

Dynashift unit piston chambers when necessary. 

Thus piston reaction is maintained. 

Make Olaer 

Type 1/20 

Capacity 1 litre 

Gas Nitrogen 

Pressure 9 ± 1 bar (must 

be checked every 6 
month, with engine 
stopped) 
Mote: When the engine is stopped, the accumulator 
maintains a pressure of 17 bars for a short period. If 
immediate maintenance action is necessary on the 
system, proceed with caution. 

Two test couplers may be fitted to check the pressure 
in the piston chambers (Fig. 7). 
The distribution unit oil is supplied by pipe. The return 
oil, from the piston chambers goes to the gearbox 
housing selector cover via the pipe (4) (Fig. 7). 



Lubrication 

The oil flow coming from the cooler lubricates the 
mechanical elements of the Dynashift. reverse shuttle 
unit, gearbox and P.T.O. shaft which pass through the 
transmission (see chapter 5 N01). 




Issue 1 



December 7993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Dynashift 




8 KOI. 3 




Designation of ports 


and 


ga 


ileries 


A 


. Internal oilway 








B 


: Internal oilway 








C 


; To sump 








P 


: Pressure 








R 


: Return 








EV1 


: Solenoid valve 1 








EV2 


: Solenoid valve 2 








E 


: Port, to front piston 








F 


. Port, to rear piston 









Fig. 2 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



8 KOI. 4 



Hydraulics - Dynashift 



*r 



A . Ratios explanation 



Refer to chapter 5 R02 for the theoretical operation and the 
mechanicai explanation of the ratios (refer also to page 8K01 - 
3 - Fig. 2). 

Ratio A (Fig. 3) 

Solenoid valve EV1 is supplied, thus allowing oil under pres- 
sure to reach gallery A. This gallery directs the oil to the front 
piston via orifice E. and also, to solenoid valve EV2. Since EV2 
is in neutral position, the oil can circulate through the spool 
valve and orifice F to the rear piston chamber. Both pistons are 
thus under pressure. 

Ratio B (Fig. 4) 

A gear change from A to B is obtained when both solenoid 
valves are supplied. The oil flow to the rear piston is thus 
interrupted. The rear piston is pushed back by springs which 
send oil back into gallery B. This gallery communicates with 
the sump via solenoid valve EV1 . 

Ratio C (Fig. 5) 

A gear change from B to C is obtained by interrupting the 
electrical supply to solenoid valve EV1 , solenoid valve EV2 
remains energized. Gallery A is no longer under pressure but 
is connected to the sump. Consequently, the front piston can 
return to neutral position. 

Gallery B is under pressure. The oil circulates to the rear piston 
through solenoid valve EV2. 

Ratio D (Fig. 6) 

Ratio D is obtained by cutting the electrical supply to EV2. The 
two pistons are connected to the sump by gallery A. 




Q) 



Ratio C 









EV1 



\ / 3 EV2 + 



Front Rear 



Fig. 5 







Ratio D 



dxTf 



EV1 



/H EV2 



A 

I 
i 

Front Rear 



Fig- 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Hydraulics - Dynashift 



www.maskinisten.net 




8K01.5 



B . Dynashift piston pressure check 

(Fig- 7) 

1 . Remove plugs (1) from the distribution unit. 

2. Screw on two male couplers (2) and f3). ref. 
3384387 M1, and connect them to couplers ref. 
3582045 Ml , connected to pressure gauges with a 
capacity of 27 bar approx. 

3. Start the engine. 

4 . Operate the iever under the steering wheel to select 
each ratio (A, B. C, D). 

5. Check that the pressures are correct in accordance 
with the following table. 



Ratio 


Front piston 
coupler |2) 


Rear piston 
coupler (3) 


A 


17 bar 


17 bar 


B 


17 bar 





C 





17 bar 


D 










6. If the pressures are not correct, check the 
displacement of the solenoid spool valve or refer to 
the electrical tests (chapter 10 C01 p. 4). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



(0 



9 A 1 Electrical system 



CONTENTS 



www.maskmisten.net 



V V 



3000/3100. SERIES TRACTORS 



Electrical equipment 




9A01.1 



A. General 



B. Instrument panel and engine area wiring . 
{with thermostart) 



C. Instrument panel and engine area wiring . 
(with etherstart) 



D. Lighting system - Europe type 



E. Lighting system - Germany type . 



F. Lighting system - USA type . 



11 



G. Fuses . 



13 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




9A01.2 



Electrical equipment 



V V 



A . General 



Connector identification 



The electrical arrangements in MF 3000/3100 Series 
tractors comprise a 12 volt negative system, charged 
by a 70 ampere alternator. The alternator has an 
integral rectifier and regulator and the charging control 
is machine sensed. An additional terminal is provided 
to power the- electronic engine tachometer . The 
alternator is fitted on the right hand side of the engine 
and is driven by a V-belt from the crankshaft pulley. 
The starter motor is of the pre-engaged type mounted 
on the right hand side of the 1 000 series engine and on 
the left hand side of other engines. 
A safety start switch is fitted below the clutch pedal. 
This renders the starter motor inoperative until the 
clutch pedal is pressed. 



Specifications 

Battery 

MF 3050-3060-3065 

Number 

Make 

Type 

Model 

Cold start performance 

Reserve capacity at 25 A 

Voltage 

Acid capacity 



1 

CEAC 

Maintenance free 

FCM 1 25388 

505A(-18°C) 

1 20 min 

12V 

8,2! 



MF 3050-3060-3065 (cold climates) 

MF 3080-3095-31 15-3125 

Number 

Make 

Type 

Model 

Cold start performance 

Reserve capacity at 25 A 

Voltage 

Acid capacity 

Alternator 

Make 

Type 

Max. output 
Regulator 
Regulator voltage 1 

Starter motor 

Make 
Model 
Voltage 
Type 



2 

CEAC 

Maintenance free 

FCM 066431 

420A(-18°C) 

120 min 

12V 

4,3 I 



Valeo 
NG 

70 A 

Machine sensed 

4,2 V 



Magnetti-Marelli 

M127(2.8Kw) 

12V 

Pre-engaged 



C1 
C2 

C3 

C4 

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

C10 

C11 

C12 

C13 

C14 

C15 

C16 

C17 

C18 

C19 

C21 

C22 

C23 

C24 

C25 

C26 

C27 

C30 

C31 

C33 

C34 

C45 

C60 



Colour 



Way 



Location 



Black (circular) 

Black (circular) 

red band 

Black 

White 

Black 

White 

White 

Black 
Black (circular) 

Black 

Black 

White 

Black 

White 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 

White 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black 



9 
9 

6 

5 

7 

6 

4 

2 

3 

1 

1 

3 

3 

5 

1 

6 

3 

6 

2 

2 

2 

1 

4 

1 

1 

1 

2 

7 

2 

2 

1 

6 



Beneath hood 
Beneath hood 

Instrument panel 
Instrument panel 
Instrument panel 
Instrument panel 
Instrument panel 
Beneath hood 
Beneath hood 
Beneath cab - Front RH 
Engine - RH side 
Beneath lift console 
RH cab pillar 
Beneath lift console 
Beneath cab - Front RH 
Roof - Front RH 
Roof - Front RH 
Roof - Front RH 
Roof - Front RH 
Instrument panel 
Beneath lift console 
Roof - Front RH 
Roof - Front RH 
Instrument panel 
Beneath hood 
Instrument panel 
Instrument panel 
Instrument panel 
Autotronic box 
Autotronic box 
Instrument panel 
Instrument panel 



Identification of harnesses 

(a) Instrument panel main harness 

(b) Engine harness 

(c) Engine harness extension 

(d) Control panel harness 

(e) Thermostart wire (or harness) 

(f) Instrument panel / roof harness 

(g) Roof harness 

(i) Rear wiper /washer harness 
(j) Washer pump harness 
(I) Harness - Door switch for interior light 
(m) Instrument panel electronic harness 
(o) Battery harness 
(v) Instrument panel lighting harness 
(w) Front and rear lighting harness 
(y) Main switch harness 

(z) Wire for radio, digital clock, interior light (for main 
switch) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V v 



Electrical equipment 




9A01.3Q 



B . Instrument panel and engine area 
wiring (with thermostart) 

Key to diagram 



1 . 


Starter switch 


2. 


Safety switch 


3. 


Alternator warning light 


4 . 


Rev. counter 


5. 


Engine oil pressure warning light 


6. 


Water temperature gauge 


7. 


Air filter vacuum warning light 


8. 


Brake oil pressure warning light 


9. 


Parking brake warning light 


10. 


Oil filter vacuum warning light 


11 . 


Fuel gauge indicator 


12. 


Hare warning light {instrument panel) 


13. 


Hare warning light (console) 


14 . 


Switch illumination 


15. 


Cigar lighter 


16. 


Fuel gauge 


17. 


Oil tiller vacuum switch 


18. 


Parking brake switch 


19. 


Air filter vacuum switch 


20. 


Temperature sender unit 


21 . 


Engine oil pressure sensor 


23. 


Alternator 


24. 


Starter motor 


25. 


Battery 


26. 


Main switch (if fitted) 


27. 


Fuse 5 A {if fitted) 


28. 


Thermostart 


30. 


Pressure switch 


31 . 


Air conditioning compressor 


32. 


Injection pump solenoid " 


33. 


Front windscreen washer pump 


34 . 


Rear windscreen washer pump (if fitted) 


35. 


Switch (if fitted) 


36. 


Water circulating pump (if fitted) 


37. 


Front windscreen washer switch 


38. 


Air conditioning thermostat 


39. 


Console illumination 


40. 


Blower switch 


41 . 


Blower motor 


42. 


Front windscreen wiper switch 


43. 


Windscreen wiper motor 


44 . 


Interior light 


45. 


Door switch 


46. 


Digital clock 


47. 


Radio {except NA) 


48 


Radio (NA only) 


49 


Relay 



Colour code 

A = Silver 

B = White 

BL = Blue 

G = Grey 

I = Ivory 

J = Yellow 

M = Brown 

N = Black 

O = Orange 

R = Red 

RO = Pink 

V = Green 

VI = Violet 
F = Dark 
C = Light 



Abbreviations, symbols 

AD : Connector AD {= C1 4) connected to AC 

(section 13 B01.C)orN 

V : connected to connector V. section 1 3B01 C 

AH : Connector AH, section 12B01.E 

AP : Connector Ap, section 12B01.E 

HB : Hand brake buzzer (if fitted) 

PB : Pneumatic brake (it fitted) 

PS : Pneumatic seat (if fitted) 

WM : Rear windscreen wiper motor 

WR : Rear washer switch 

WS : Rear windscreen wiper / washer switch 

= Wiring forming part of lighting harnesses 

= Wiring forming part of electronic 

harnesses ^ 

+P = + Permanently live 

+AC - + live when ignition is on 

Tractors equipped with series 1000 engines 
On tractors fitted with main switch disconnect 
connector C25 of harness (f) and connect its 
terminal to the female terminal of wire (Z). 
The unused female connector should be 
insulated carefully and attached to the harness 
using adhesive tape 

Note : It the alternator warning light (3) does not 
illuminate at position 2 of the starter switch check 
that bulb is not burnt out. If the bulb is burnt out the 
excitation will not occur and the alternator will not 
charge rendering the electronic lift control 
inoperative. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



37 



38 39 40 



41 



35 



© 



36 



rt 



■BL- 



shmlCI 



i J 



Clfa 



f=r. 



-*L- 



33 



sr' 




34 LZP <f | 

-® « 1 WR kt 






SD i N 1 



CI? 



s< 



K=H 



^ VI- 



-Sr 



46 48 

C34 C2S 



9A01.3 



5 [it y\ I nk' I () 

1 Mg jfl y °a jciaioBi c«b 

A AA a A r-f4 — i — rf-^ 
at at lafej no © [ 



CIS v ' C34 C2; 

*>' h~~ r 

3 L-Ti 



-®- 



-M- 



+P 



Cfe 



ws 



^D — h 

-i$ — * 



C€, 



l t 



1 02.3 g) K«niR-(^ Horift <Q @. 




— M- 



1|-M- 



* 



28 



C1L 



-s^- 



-*R 



I RO 



Y 



■Sr 



-52^^51 



-<&- 



<JJ — @_ 



25 



26 



r^-^tu 



^"■©-N. 



\-®— 




'^■&-n— -Ofr j T 



^: 



K 



24 



u 



27 D 



IR 



-<§ ci£ — <G — * - 



^c 



HOH^ 




IS^~ 



4^R-c AP 



L*§> — Ca>- 



C*o 



>-U m — iS;— J r f 04§ Lq -, 




<£2_ 



~(gr- J-C— — -®~- - J - EEP^ — 

—fg—V-C** -(g — y—o-ftu.— — 

— (g— G-eS -@. — G-~ £=3-^ '<> 

AD^-vi-j. c^-vi-@ — ®-^_<d— 

-v.c '.§ <^ — •§) V-C- 



-VI- 



UESE 



23 



21 



20 



19 



ro J:— - 



.-® R0- 



ci 



-©- 



<^-^ 




M 



7^r. 




« 



^ 



RO- 



-6 ci^pg- 

-3; <fikr-^ffi- 



r- ? 






,cs f 



®^ 



rCil 



-C5 






C50 



a; 



BL.C 




rp^ 



=® 



5a 



<X=>°C2, 



4— N C— 



,C45 



■a— -^5- 



3® 12 



-h+h 



® 



., rt R ,, 

j a a- 3 a 1 A 2 aV 
J AD 



PS 



-j3>. 




Ct2 ® 



G.««J 



w 




13 



15 



17 



16 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V v 



Electrical equipment 




9A01. 



C . Instrument panel and engine area 
wiring (with etherstart) 

Key to diagram 

1 . Starter switch 

2 . Safety switch 

3 . Alternator warning light 

4 . Rev. counter 

5 . Engine oil pressure warning light 

6 . Water temperature gauge 

7 . Air filter vacuum warning light 

8 . Brake oil pressure warning light 

9 . Parking brake warning light 
10. Oil filter vacuum warning light 

1 1 . Fuel gauge indicator 

12 . Hare warning light (instrument panel) 

13 . Hare warning light (console) 

14 . Switch illumination 
15. Gigar lighter 

16 . Fuel gauge 

17 . Oil filter vacuum switch 
18. Parking brake switch 

19 . Air filter vacuum switch 

20 . Temperature sender unit 
22 . Engine oii pressure sensor 
23 . Alternator 

24 . Starter motor 
25. Battery 

26 . Main switch (if fitted) 

27 . Fuse 5 A (if fitted) 

29 . Ether solenoid 

30 , Pressure switch 

31 . Air conditioning compressor 

32 , Injection pump solenoid " 

33 . Front windscreen washer pump 

34 , Rear windscreen washer pump (if fitted) 

35 . Switch (if fitted) 

36 . Water circulating pump (if fitted) 

37 . Front windscreen washer switch 

38 . Air conditioning thermostat 

39 - Console illumination 

40 . Blower switch 

41 . Blower motor 

42 . Front windscreen wiper switch 

43 . Windscreen wiper motor 

44 . Interior light 

45 . Door switch 

46 . Digital clock 

47 . Radio (except NA) 

48 . Radio (NA only) 
49 . Relay 

50 . Ether switch 

51 . Relay 



Colour code 

A = Silver 

B = White 

BL = Blue 

G = Grey 

I = Ivory 

J = Yellow 

M = Brown 

N = Black 

O = Orange 

R = Red 
RO = Pink 

V = Green 

VI = Violet 
F = Dark 
C = Light 



Abbreviations, symbols 

AD : Connector AD (= C14) connected to AC 

(section 13 801. C) or N 

V connected to connector V, section 13B01.C 

AH : Connector AH, section 12B01.E 

AP : Connector Ap. section 12B01.E 

HB : Hand brake buzzer (if fitted) 

PB : Pneumatic brake (if fitted) 

PS : Pneumatic seat (if fitted) 

WM : Rear windscreen wiper motor 

WR : Rear washer switch 

WS : Rear windscreen wiper / washer switch 

= Wiring forming part of lighting harnesses 

= Wiring forming part of electronic 

harnesses 

+P = + Permanently live ^| 

+AC = + live when ignition is on 

Tractors equipped with series 1000 engines 
On tractors fitted with main switch disconnect 
connector C25 of harness (f) and connect its 
terminal to the female terminal of wire (Z). 
The unused female connector should be 
insulated carefully and attached to the harness 
using adhesive tape 

Note : If the alternator warning light (3) does not 
illuminate at position 2 of the starter switch check 
that bulb is not burnt out. If the bulb is burnt out the 
excitation will not occur and the alternator will not 
charge rendering the electronic lift control 
inoperative. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



37 



38 39 40 



41 



42 



43 



-(E) — N- 



35 



36 



Tr_. N _rTt 



33 

31 
30 
29 



■ BL 1- ! l 






-EfcB 



*f' 




r?-*- — 53> — ®— ^-^tsa 
34 



BL VI 



« 



<t-M- 



■fi. 



wt 



32 



,ci 



I 

WR 



;QT 




v\ 





47 l*46 48 




9>W7.5 



a aa ri r-f4 — r~ _ r 1 ' 



€) — Q 



,§,. M ««fc «. — C— H»mbB — @ $"B 



25 



Rf 



R— rJ 

-<CI L- 



.Cf^AH 



— u .. .\_ 



-fV 



-SK3- 



-S- 



r 




26 

27 [] 



CT^ ft~ ^£ 



24 



L_ rt _ 



U 



wi 



BU 



He 









23 



iii= 



M 



B 



22 



20 



19 




^ 



/* 



1 



*£ 



-o- 



-R— 



4- i 



BL.C 

— » 



^J 



J> 



-Or 



^2: 



^c 



^1 



Tv 



~~i_ 



-n — 
•K— 
-n— 

-M — 



-£— <£2- 



-v.c- 

-VI- 

-a- 



-S c^— o> 

, e . c c£ — a. 



.R0 



i-- 




- g c^ 4~ M 

-§■ <■£: >& — ■ ri 



q — M~c r7 

6 & a—rt-c" 

b— ^Cil_M 1 < 



AD >-vi— a; c-^-vwa- — ;IH=HE vt- 



— 3 ro 



-S <£> — @- 



=® 8 



Ro- 



ca 



>> BL.C- 



-fci c-K — 4- 

f &^- 






H-4w 



i R 



A 



n n r 
AD 



CD 




^T 



J AD 



M 



\ 

PS 



4) 







15 



18 



17 



16 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 




Electrical equipment 



9A01.7* 



D . Lighting system - Europe type 



Key to diagram 



1 . 


Starter switch 


2. 


Stop switches 


3. 


Rear RH direction indicator 


4 . 


Rear RH brake light 


5. 


Rear RH work lamp 


6. 


Number plate lights 


7 . 


Power socket 


8. 


Rear LH work lamp 


9. 


Rear LH brake light 


10. 


Rear LH direction indicator 


11 . 


Front LH direction indicator 


12. 


Front LH side Sight 


13. 


Front LH work lamp 


14 . 


LH headlight 


15. 


Horn 


16. 


RH headlight 


17. 


Front RH work lamp 


18. 


Front RH side light 


19. 


Front RH direction indicator 


20. 


Flashing beacon 


23. 


Flasher unit 


24. 


Lighting switch 


25. 


Hazard warning light switch 


26. 


Flashing beacon switch 


27. 


Control cluster illumination 


28. 


LH direction indicator warning light 


29. 


RH direction indicator warning light 


30 


Main beam warning light 


31 


1st trailer warning light 


32 


2nd trailer warning light 


33 


Front work lamp switch 


34 


Rear work lamp switch 


35 


Fuel gauge 


Colour code 


A 


= Silver 


B 


= White 


BL 


= Blue 


G 


= Grey 


I 


= Ivory 


J 


= Yellow 


M 


= Brown 


N 


= Black 


R 


= Red 


RO 


= Pink 


V 


= Green 


VI 


= Violet 


F 


= Dark 



Abbreviations, symbols 

Emb = Sleeve (band) 

+P = +Permanentiy live 

+AC - + Live when ignition is on 

= wiring lorming part of engine harnesses 

= wiring ior platform tractors without pillar 

only 

wire non present on platiorm tractors 

without pillar 



Connector identification 

C7 = White, 4 way connector 

C9 = Black. 3 way connector 

C60 = Black. 6 way connector (8 way on plateform 
tractors without pillar) j - 

C61 = Green, 7 way connector {instrument panel) 

C62 = Black, 4 way connector 

C63 = Black, 4 way connector 

C64 = Black, 2 way connector 

C65 = Black, 2 way connector 

C66 = Black, 3 way connector 

C67 = Black, 3 way connector 

C68 = Black, 1 way connector 

C69 = Black, 1 way connector 

C70 = Black. 1 way connector 

C71 = Black, 1 way connector 

C72 = Black. 2 way connector 

C73 = Black, 2 way connector 

C74 = Circular, 1 way connector 

C76 = Black, 1 way connector 



Harness identification 

(a) Instrument panel main harness 

(b) Engine harness 

(f) Instrument panel / roof harness 

(v) Instrument panel lighting harness 

(w) Front and rear lighting harness 

(x) Roof lighting harness 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 



^V 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Electrical equipment 




9A01. 



E. 


Lighting system - Germany type 


Key to diagram 


1 . 


Starter switch 


2. 


Stop switches 


3. 


Rear RH direction indicator 


4. 


Rear RH brake light 


5. 


Rear RH work lamp 


6. 


Number plate lights 


7. 


Power socket 


8. 


Rear LH work lamp 


9. 


Rear LH brake light 


10. 


Rear LH direction indicator 


11 . 


Front LH direction indicator 


12. 


Front LH side light 


13. 


Front LH work lamp 


14 . 


LH headlight 


15. 


Horn 


16. 


RH headlight 


17 . 


Front RH work lamp 


18. 


Front RH side light 


19. 


Front RH direction indicator 


20. 


Flashing beacon 


22. 


Work lamp relay 


23. 


Flasher unit 


24. 


Lighting switch 


25. 


Hazard warning light switch 


26. 


Flashing beacon switch 


27. 


Control cluster illumination 


28. 


LH direction indicator warning light 


29. 


RH direction indicator warning light 


30 


Main beam warning light 


31 


1st trailer warning light 


32 


2nd trailer warning light 


33 


Front work iamp switch 


34 


Rear work iamp switch 


35 


Fuel gauge 


Colour code 


A 


= Silver 


B 


= White 


BL 


= Blue 


G 


= Grey 


I 


= Ivory 


J 


= Yellow 


M 


= Brown 


N 


= Black 


R 


= Red 


RO 


= Pink 


V 


= Green 


VI 


= Violet 


F 


= Dark 



3l) 



Abbreviations, symbols 

Emb = Sleeve (band) 

+P = +Permanently live 

+AC = + Live when ignition is on 

= wiring forming part of engine harnesses 



Connector identification 

C7 = White, 4 way connector 
C9 = Black, 3 way connector 
C60 = Black, 6 way connector 
C61 = Green, 7 way connector (instrument panel 
C62 = Black, 4 way connector 
C63 = Black, 4 way connector 
C64 = Black, 2 way connector 
C65 = Black, 2 way connector 
C66 = Black, 3 way connector 
C67 = Black, 3 way connector 
C68 = Black, 1 way connector 
C69 = Black, 1 way connector 
C70 = Black, 1 way connector 
C71 = Black, 1 way connector 
C72 = Black, 2 way connector 
C73 = Black, 2 way connector 
C74 = Circular, 1 way connector 
C76 = Black, 1 way connector, junction with creeper 
gear harness 



Harness identification 

(a) Instrument panel main harness 

(b) Engine harness 

(f) Instrument panel / roof harness 
(v) Instrument panel lighting harness 
(w) Front and rear lighting harness 
(x) Roof lighting harness 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




16 







15 



/v 




It© 



: i ' 

N J V 



__LJ J 



5l 



14 

13 

12 
11 




-8L-«S>- 



. — ^^- 

(G) — 



Cs> 



^ 

r ^ 



G, J V 



H2r 



^ 



i 
R £0 



a 

t 

I 



C7 



N 
1 



r & r n 



:_er — «*>. 



1FT" 



f— ?■ 



I* 
X iii>N- 



,C64 



I h 



XK> 



_U M _^CH_ S0 _--^1 



cw 












b^k 



KO 



g Re-*N 



-C^L-a 



H> 



A 



-KO- 



-@- 




.Cfai 



"1 
R 



<— & 



„Cfefe 




8 

9 
10 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 



Electrical equipment 




9A01.1 



F. 


Lighting system - USA type 


Key to diagram 


1 . 


Starter switch 


2. 


Stop switches 


3. 


Rear RH direction indicator 


4 . 


Rear RH brake light 


5. 


Rear RH work lamp 


6. 


Number plate lights 


8. 


Rear LH work lamp 


9 . 


Rear LH brake light 


10. 


Rear LH direction indicator 


11 . 


Front LH direction indicator 


13. 


Front LH work lamp 


14 . 


LH headlight 


15. 


Horn 


16. 


RH headlight 


17. 


Front RH work lamp 


19. 


Front RH direction indicator 


21 . 


Relay 


22. 


Relay 


23. 


Flasher unit 


24. 


Lighting switch 


25. 


Hazard warning light switch 


27. 


Control cluster illumination 


28. 


LH direction indicator warning light 


29. 


RH direction indicator warning light 


30. 


Main beam warning light 


31 . 


1st trailer warning light 


32. 


2nd trailer warning light 


33 


Front work lamp switch 


34 


Rear work lamp switch 


35 


Fuel gauge 


Colour code 


A 


= Silver 


B 


= White 


BL 


= Blue 


G 


= Grey 


J 


= Yellow 


M 


= Brown 


N 


= Black 


R 


= Red 


RO 


= Pink 


V 


= Green 


VI 


= Violet 


F 


= Dark 



Abbreviations, symbols 

Emb= Sleeve (band) 
+P = +Permanently live 
+AC= + Live when ignition is on 

= wiring forming part of engine harnesses 

* = not used 



Connector identification 

C7 = White, 4-way connector 
C9 = Black, 3-way connector 
C60 = Black, 6-way connector 
C61 = Green. 7-way connector {instrument panel) 
C62 = Black, 4-way connector 
C63 = Black, 4-way connector 
C64 = Black, 2-way connector - 

C65 = Black, 2-way connector f| 

C66 = Black, 2-way connector 
C67 = Black, 2-way connector 
C68 = Black, 1 -way connector 
C69 = Black, 1 -way connector 
C70 = Black, 1 -way connector 
C71 = Black, 1 -way connector 
C72 = Black, 2-way connector 
C73 = Black, 2-way connector 
C76 = Black, 1-way connector, junction with MF 3000 
creeper gear harness 



Harness identification 

(a) Instrument panel main harness 

(b) Engine harness 

(f) Instrument panel / roof harness 
(v) Instrument panel lighting harness 
(w) Front and rear lighting harness 
(x) Roof lighting harness 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




www.maskinisten.net 



9A01.11 



19 



17 




27 28 29 30 31 32 33 



© ® ® © ® © 



[jni ffiraj [tjF22 



^z%- 




/V- !i ! 




13 




.-i£j 



C3 



r lU t 



F1&[P|Fi1 [JFlfc R3Q0F34 



16 

I 

G 



c?> 



r« 






ti 



5 

r ? 
J v 

V 



a$~ 



-'■i-O 



«2 



11 




I Y 



CM 



i 

a 



-iQt- 



A 



CI 



C6CL 



CfeO 



N 



? 



-U). 



-N- 

-n- 



--6L-- 



-R0- 



j — ;— v vi= ^-^ 



s> >— «,— ' 






-f — ■ 






-cfii- 



rf?^ : 




N 

i. 






t^tfcS 



<i»6L-<. 




-to-*-- 



^ 







8 

9 
10 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



TRACTOR SERIES 3000 /3100 



Electrical equipment 




9A01.13 



G . Fuses 



Fuses are fitted in a box located on the left hand side of the 

instrument panel. 

The box is divided into two parts. The upper part contains the 

fuses for the lighting system and the lower part the fuses 

which protect the engine and electronic functions. 

A special tool (25) located in the box enables fuses to be 

replaced easily. 

Note : Fuse box should always be kept very clean. Fuses 

must not be replaced with ones of higher rating, since this 

may cause damage to the electrical equipment. If any of 

the fuses blow, the fault must be traced and remedied. 

In addition to those fitted in the fuse box, there are also three 
fuses situated at the front RH side, beneath the hood. 

- a 7,5 amp (brown) protects the electronic lift. 

- a 10 amp (red) protects the Autotronic transmission control 
unit. 

- a 5 amp (yeliow) protects the front PTO (if fitted). 

A 3 amp in Datatronic tractor performance monitor wiring 
harness in console (if fitted). 




u. m, .u. ,u. .u .u 

-D- 




Fuse n° 


Rating (Amp) 


Colour 


Applications 


1-7-8 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
9 
10 
11 
12 


Spares 
5 
25 
25 
25 
15 
7,5 
7,5 
10 
25 


Yeliow 

White 

White 

White 

Blue 

Brown 

Brown 

Red 

Whiie 


(+P) Interior light - Radio 

(+P) Cigar lighter and internal power socket 

(+AC) Front windscreen wiper and washer 

(+AC) Air conditioning blower and compressor 

(+AC) Rear screen wiper and washer 

(+ ER) Electronic lift 

(+AC) Instrumeni panel unit and injection pump solenoia 

(+AC) Cab relay solenoid and parking brake warning light 

(+AC) Hare/Tortoise range control '< 
4 WD control \ 
Differential lock control 
PTO and PTO brake control 

4 speed PTO control (economy PTO) j 
Creeper gear control j 
Low pressure warning light (tractors without Autotronic) ' 
Linkage raised position switch (tractorr, with Autoi:onic) j 
Speedshift control 
Internal power socket 

Tractor performance monitor I 
Pneumatic suspension seat (if fitted) i 


13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 

19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 


Spare 
15 
10 
7.5 
7,5 
7.5 

15 
15 
7.5 
15 
15 
10 


Blue 

Red 

Brown 

Brown 

Brown 

Blue 

Blue 

Brown 

Blue 

Blue 

Red 


Brake (ignis (within rear fights) 

Direction indicators > 

Horn ; 

From left, rear RH side lights and number olale lights ' 

Front RH and rear LH side lights 

Instrument panel lighting • 

Illumination of instrument panel i 

Switches roof panel and front windscreen wiper / washer switches 

Cigar lighter and electronic console switches 

Electronic linkage console 

Rear work lamps 

Front work lamps 

Rotating light (if fitted) ' 

Hazard warning lights 

Headlights (main Deam) 

Headlights (dipped beam) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 



w 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10 . ACCESSORIES 



Contents 



1 A01 3 nD AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVE KIT 

10 B01 FITTING A GROUND SPEED PTO ON 2 WD TRACTORS 

10 B02 FITTING A GROUND SPEED PTO ON 4WD TRACTORS 

10C01 FITTING THE FRONT PTO 

10C02 REPAIRING THE FRONT PTO 

10 D01 FRONT LIFT POSITION INDICATOR 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



10A01 Auxiliary spool valve kit 



CONTENTS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Accessories - Auxiliary spool valve kit waoi. 1 



A. Removing the factory - fitted 2-spool valve 



B. Fitting the 3-spool valve assembly 



C. Removing the consoles in the cab - 



D. Refitting the consoles in the cab 



Pitting and adjusting the auxiliary spool valve 
control cable (old bracket) 



Fitting and adjusting the auxiliary spool valve 
control cable (new bracket) 



6 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10A01.2 Accessories - Auxiliary spool valve kit 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



A. Removing the factory- fitted 2- 
spooi valve assembly 

Note: To make a correct installation, remove the 
«two-spool valves* as an assembly. 

1 . Remove the oil collectors (if fitted). 

2. Disconnect hoses (1), (2) and (3)(Fig.t). 
Unscrew nuts (7), screws (6) and couplers (5). On 
each spoof valve, take out pin (4) linking the clevis to 
the spool (Fig.2). 

3. Remove unions (4), (6) and (7), quick fit couplings 
(5) and screws (8)(Fig.1). Remove the spool valve 
assembly and place upright on a bench. 

4. Remove hose (3). Unscrew nuts (12)(Fig.3). 
Remove the flow divider, the spool valves and the 
intermediate blocks separately. 



B. Fitting the three-spool valve 
assembly 

5. Clean the seal surfaces on each spool valve, replace 
the plates and seals. 

6. Replace threaded rods (1)(Fig.4). 

Note: The length of the threaded rods differs 
according to the number of spool valves. 

7. Put the end plate with its threaded rods on a bench. 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



^ 



www.maskmisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Auxiliary spool valve kit waoi.3 



8. In order, assemble the seating plates with their 
seals, the intermediate blocks, the spool valves 
and the flow divider (Fig.5). 

9. Position the spool valve unit, with fixing faces F 
{Fig, 5) resting onaflatsurface(Fig.6) to ensure that 
the spool valves are properly fitted onto their brac- 
ket. 

Tighten nuts (12) to torque 17-20 Nm. 

10. Fit and tighten unions (13)(Fig.6) and hose 
(3)(Fig.3) to torque 50 Nm. 

1 1 . Refit the spool valve assembly (Fig.7). Tighten 
screws (8). Refit quick couplers (5) and connectors 
(4). (6) and (7). 

Note : Replace the 45> union on the lift control 
vaivo inlet with a 9tP union. 

1 2. Position unions (4), (6) and (7). Reconnect and 
tighten hoses (1), (2) and (3)(Fig.7). 

1 3. Slide pin (4) into each clevis (1)(Fig.2). 

Note: Check that the valve spools are in neutral 
position. Partially screw couplers (5) on the first 
and second spool valves and fit screws (6) 
without tightening. 






Fig. 7 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskmisten.net 



<* 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10A01.4 Accessories - Auxiliary spool valve kit 



WW 



-\ 



C. Removing the consoles in the cab 

1 4. Disconnect the batteries (only the earth cable). 

1 5. Disconnect one end of the right-hand door gas 
strut and open it to its maximum extent (Protect the 
fender from any contact with the door). 

1 6. Remove the retaining screws on the lift console and 
disconnect the connector. 

1 7. Removetfje indicator plate retainers from the PTO 
and auxiliary spool valve controls. If necessary, 
remove the rubber knobs from the control levers. 
Remove the hand throttle control adjustment stop 
(if fitted). 

1 8. Remove the mouldings around the trim. 

19. Remove the screws, lift up and push the two 
consoles forward (Fig. 8), taking care not to discon- 
nect the harnesses. 

Fitting the auxiliary spool valve control 

lever 

Early-type bracket without automatic hook control 

(Fig. 9) 

Note: To facilitate installation on tractors fitted with 
creeper gears, remove only the bracket for the 
control, inside the cab. 

20. Fit the lever (1 ) with bearing (2) and friction washer, 
coated with molybdenum bisulphide grease. 

21 . Fit spacer (5), washer (7) and tighten nut (4) so that 
the lever moves freely, without any axial play. 

22. Fit and adjust the control cable. Carry out 
operations 44 and 45 

Note: Tractors with creeper gears: Refit the 
control lever bracket. 

Early-type bracket with automatic hook control 

(Fig- 10) 

Note: To facilitate installation on tractors with cree- 
per gears, remove only the bracket for the control, 
inside the cab. 

23. Remove the clip attaching the clevis to the lever (6). 

24. Unscrew the nut (4). Remove washers (7) and (8). 
Remove control lever (6) with bearing (2). friction 
washers (3) and spacer (5). 

25. Fit auxiliary spool valve control lever (1) and auto- 
matic hook lever (6) with bearings (2) and friction 
washers (3) coated with molybdenum bisulphide 
grease. 

26. Refit washers (B) and (7). Tighten nut (4) so that the 
levers move freely with no axial play. 




Fig. 8 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Auxiliary spool valve kit 10A01.5 



27. Fit and adjust the control. Carry out operations 44 

and 45. 
Note: Tractors with creeper gears, refit the control 
bracket. 



New bracket (Fig.11) 

28. Coat the thread of pin (9) with Loctite 241 and screw 
intg bracket (11). Tighten nut (10). 

29. Fit lever (1) with pad (2) and friction washers (3) 
coated with molybdenum bisulphide grease. 

30. Place washers (8) and (7). Tighten nut (4) so that 
the lever operates with no axial play. 

31 . Fit and adjust the control, carry out operations 50 to 
52. 



D. Refitting the consoles in the cab 

32. Refit the two consoles. Check that the wiring 
harnesses are connected. Tighten the screws. 

33. Refit the indicator plates, rubber knobs (if remo- 
ved) and hand throttle control adjustment stop (if 
fitted). 

34. Connect the lifting console connector and refit the 
console. 

35. Connect the battery earth cables. 

36. Reconnect the door gas strut. 

37. Check that the lifting console and electronic and 
electric controls work. 

38. Apply a bead of silicomet in the angle between the 
fender and the moulding. 

39. Using housing (5)(Fig.12). adjust the control ca- 
bles for the first and second spool valves, making 
sure that levers C are positioned within tolerances. 
According to the type of fitting, refer to figures 13 
and 14 (early and later type bracket). Tighten 
screws (6) and lock nut (7) to torque 20 Nm. 

40. Fit and adjust the auxiliary spool valve cable. Early 
bracket : perform operations 46 to 48. Later brac- 
ket : perform operations 53 to 55. 

41 . Connect a pressure gauge to the quick couplers 
and check that the three or four positions ( depen- 
ding on option) on each spool valve work. 

42. Using several clips, refix the oil collectors (if fitted). 

43. Check that the controls work, and check for leaks 
at the sealing faces of each spool valve, at the 
quick couplers and at the hydraulic unions. 




Fig. 11 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



•* 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



^ 



10A01.6 Accessories - Auxiliary spool valve kit 



E. Fitting and adjusting the auxiliary 
spool valve cable - Old bracket 

On lever (Fig. 13) 

44. Put the control cable in the grommet-plate (10) at 
the rear of the cab. Slide cable housing stop (4) in 
slotted bracket (6) and fix pin (5). 

45. Screw clevis (1 ) level with the edge of the threaded 
part of cable (2) and fit on lever L with clip (7). 
Tighten nut (3). 

Note: Check that the cable is not restricted. 

On spool valves (Fig. 12) 

46. Check that the valve spools are in neutral position. 
Screw clevis (1) level with the edge of the threaded 
part of cable (2). Tighten nut (3). Fit pin (4) in clevis 

0) 

47. Partially screw housing (5) and fit screws (6) but do 

not tighten. 

48. Screw housing (5) fully home so as to position lever 
L as shown in Fig. 13. Lock screws (6) and tighten 
nut (7) to torque 20 Nm. 

49. Make sure the control works in all three or four 
positions {depending on option). 



F. Fitting and adjusting the auxiliary 
spool valve cable - New bracket 

On lever (Fig. 14) 

50. Put the control cable through the grommet-plate 
(10) at the rear of the cab. 

5 1 . Fit and tighten cable clamp (6) on bracket (9) on the 
console. 

Note: The attachment of clevis (1) to lever L 
differs, depending on the type of spool valve. 
Attachment A : Four position spool valve, one 
floating. 

Attachment B : Three position spool valve. 
Depending on the attachment required on lever 
L, fix clamp (6) for cable housing end (4) in the 
correct position. 

52. Screw clevis (1 ) level with the edge of the threaded 
part of cable (2) and fit it to lever L with clip (7). 
Tighten nut (3). 

Note: Check that the cable is not restricted. 









— L: 
















® 


® 

® I 

■Ci)y 








o 


jS 

(To) 






O) 




-~-~j» 






® ® 









® 


Fig. 13 










On spool valves (Fig. 12) 

53. Check that the spool valve spool is in neutral 
position . Screw clevis (1 ) level with the edge of the 
threaded part of cab!e{2). Tighten nut (3). Fit pin (4) 
in clevis (1). 

54. Partially screw clevis housing (5) and fit screws (6) 
but do not tighten. 

55. Screw clevis housing {5} down so as to position 
lever L as shown in figure 14. Lock screws (6) and 
tighten nut (7) to torque 20 Nm. 

56. Check that the control works in ail three or four 
positions (depending on option). 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Accessories - GSPTO 




10B01.7 



41 . Fit the shaft assembly (8) (Fig. 10) and circiip (4) in 
the housing. 

42. Place gear (3) and fit circiip (2)(Fig.1 1). 

43. Check the movement of coupler (10) through the 
access panel in the cover (12). 

44. Replace and clean plug (1) (Fig. 2), apply Loctite 
542, and then fix it slightly behind the face of the 
housing. 

45. Fit link (7) (fitted with a new O-ring (5)) with the dog 

(1) in the groove of coupler (10)(Fig.12). 

46. Clean and degrease the seal surfaces on the cover 
and housing. 

47. Apply sealing compound (Master joint 510 or 
equivalent) to the surface of the cover seal. 

48. Screw two studs into the housing in opposing 
positions. 

49. Fit the control link retainer tube (4), locking plunger 

(2) and spring (3) (Fig. 12). 

50. Refit cover (12). Remove the guide studs. Fit and 
tighten the bolts to torque 130 - 170 Nm. Check 
operation of link (7) (Fig. 12). 

51. On the left-hand cover, fit bracket (1) for cable 
(Fig. 13). 

52. Jack up the tractor. 

53. Refit the wheel. Remove the axle stand and the 
jack. 

54. Tighten the wheel nuts to torque 400 - 450 Nm. 

55. Fill oil to level in the rear axle. 

56. Refit the tow hook. 




Fig. 12 





Fig. 1 *. 



\r 


^-""""""^"-H 


C/ I 


— ■ / - \ 


t 




/vL) 




If / 




1 




Fig. ■: 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



\<*f 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




v v 



10B01.8 



Accessories - GSPTO 



C. Removing the lift console 

57. Disconnect the batteries (earth cable only). 

58. Disconnect one end of the right-hand door gas 
strut and open fully (protect the fender from any 
contact with the door). 

59 . Remove the retaining screws on the lift console and 
disconnect the connector. 

60. Removeithe upper mouldings around the fender 
trim. 

6 1 . Remove the screws, lift and push the console 
forward, making sure not to disconnect the wiring 
harness. 



D. Fitting the control lever (Figs. 14 
and 15) 

62. Remove nut (2) and washer (6). Separate screw 
(12) from lever (4) spacer (11) and spring (1). 

63. Fit pin (5) and washer (6) on the console and tighten 
nut (2). 

64. Position spring (1), lever (4) and link (7) with 
bearings (3) and spring (8). 

65. Put on washer (9) and fit retaining ring (10). 

66. Fit and adjust the control. Carry out operations 76 
to 80. 



E. Refitting the lift console 

67. Refit the console. Check that the wiring harnesses 
are connected. Tighten the screws. 

68. Refit the "symbol" plate, the rubber knob (if remo- 
ved), and the adjustable stop on the hand throttle 
(if fitted). 

69. Connect the lift console connector and refit. 

70. Connect the battery earth cables. 

71 . Reconnect the door gas strut. 

72. Apply a bead of silicomet in the angle between the 
fender and the moulding, 

73. Fit and adjust the cable on the link located to the left 
of the rear axle housing. Carry out operations 81 
to 87. 










jGO 




^ 






©\\ 








i©\ \ 




Cj/ 










/iT) 






<jl i ' 


Fig. 15 



74. Check the working of : 

- the lift console and the electronic and electric 
controls. 

- the ground speed PTO. 

- the automatic hook (if fitted). If it needs adjusting, 
carry out operations 1 and 6 to 9, chapter 6M01 . 

75. Check sealing of the seal surfaces : 

- on the cover under the rear axle housing. 

- on the right-hand hydraulic cover and fittings. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Accessories - GSPTO 




10B01.5 



B. Fitting 



1 6. Clean and check the parts and replace any faulty 
parts. Remove all traces of Loctite from the angles 
of the plug housing recesses (1) and (24)(Figs. 3 
and 4). 

1 7. Fit gear (31) and circlip (30). 

Tractors without creeper gears 

1 8. Refit the coupling shaft and sleeve unit and position 
coupling sleeves (27) and (28) on shaft (29). 

19. Fit double pins (25) and (26) on the coupling 
sleeves. 

Note: Direct the groove end of sleeve (28) to- 
wards the rear of the tractor (Fig.5). Replace the 
pins (the long pin is fitted on sleeve (27)). 

Tractors with creeper gears 

20. Refit the shifter fork, coupling shaft and coupler. 
Carry out operations 22 to 31. chapter 5D01.A. 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

21 . Replace the right-hand hydraulic cover. Carry out 
operations 15 to 27. chapter 8101. 

22. If needle bearing (13) is not fitted in shaft (18), 
position it 2.5mm back from face "F" (Fig. 6). 

23. Fix bearing cup (14) right up against the shoulder 
of the housing. 

24. Fix bearing cone (19) right up against the shoulder 
of shaft (18), using a suitable press and driver, and 
then position circlip (17). 

25. In order to be able to turn the shaft for J 1 shimming, 
do not fit gear (16). Position bearing cone (15), fit 
shaft (18) assembled with bearing cone (19) and 
circlip (17). 

26. Refit bearing cup (20). spacer (22) and circlip (23). 
Note : For correct shimming, make sure the 
spacer moves freely in the housing bore. 

27. Shim shaft (18) to : J1 = to +0.10 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



if 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10B01.6 



Accessories - GSPTO 



^ 



28. Place a dial indicator on the end of spacer 
(22)(Rg.7). 

29. Through the panel in cover (12) pull on the shaft. 
spring (3)(Fig.12). 

30. Reset the dial indicator to zero. 

31. Repeat the operation, this time pushing. 

32. Select shims of the right thickness, depending on 
the amount of play shown on the dial indicator. 

33. Removecirclip (23) and spacer (22), take out shaft 
(18) assembled with bearing cone (19) and circlip 
(17), keeping circlip (15) in place. Refit gear (16), 
shaft (18) and bearing cup (20). 

34. Apply two spots of grease on adjusting shims [21] 
selected at step 32, and place them against bea- 
ring cup (20). 

35. Fit spacer (22) and circlip (23). 

36. Replace and clean plug (24), apply Loctite 542 to 
the rim of its housing and fix in place. 

37. Place coupler (10) on shaft (18). 

Note : Put short shoulder "E" facing towards 
shaft (8)(Fig.8). 

38. Fit circlips (6) and (9) on shaft (8). 

39. Using a suitable driver, press bearing (5) onto the 
shaft in contact with circlip (6). 

40. Fit circlip (7) using long-nose pliers (Fig. 9). 





Issue i 



November 1991 



^'■v J^ '■*&+&, »*. 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Accessories - GSPTO 




10B01.3 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10B01.4 



Accessories - GSPTO 



*r 



A. Preliminary operations 

1 . Immobilise the tractor and block the left-hand rear 
wheel. 

2. Place a wedge between the frame and the front 
axle (Fig. 1). 

3. Drain the rear axle housing. 

4. Remove the tow hook. 

5. Extract the rear plug (1)(Fig.2). 

6. Jack up the right-hand rear side of the tractor. 

7. Install an axle stand and remove the wheel. 

8. Remove bolts (11) and cover (12). 

9. Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover. Carry out 
operations 2 to 14. chapter 81.01. 

Tractors without creeper gears 

1 0. Take out double pins (25) and (26) from coupling 
sleeves (27) and (28). 

1 1 . Slide the sleeves towards each other aiong shaft 
(29). 

1 2. Remove the shaft and sleeve assembly. 

Tractors with creeper gears 

1 3. Remove the shifter fork, the sleeve unit, the cou- 
pling shaft and the coup\er. Carry out operations 3 
to 8 and 13 to 16, chapter 5D.01 A. 

Tractors with or without creeper gears 

14. Remove circlip (30). 

15. Remove plugs (1) and (24)(Figs.3 and 4). 





Issue 1 



November 1991 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Accessories - GSPTO 10B01. 1 



10B01 Fitting a ground speed PTO on 2 WD 
tractors 



CONTENTS 

A. Preliminary operations . 

B. Fitting 



C. Removing the lift console 8 

D. Fitting the control lever 8 

E. Refitting the lift console 8 

F. Fitting and adjusting the control cable 9 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




70807.2 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Accessories - GSPTO 



^ 




Key to illustration 


(16) Transfer gear 


(1) Cap 


(17) Circlip 


(2) Circlip 


(18) 2WD shaft 


(3) Pinion 


(19) Bearing cone 


(4) Circlip 


(20) Bearing cup 


(5) Bearing 


[21J Shim(s) 


(6) Circlip 


(22) Spacer 


(7) Circlip 


(23) Circlip 


(8) Shaft 


(24) Plug 


(9) Circlip 


(25) Double pin 


(10) Coupler 


(26) Double pin 


(11) Bolt 


(27) Sleeve 


(12) Cover 


(28) Sleeve 


(13) Needle bearing 


(29) Shaft 


(14) Bearing cup 


(30) Circlip 


(15) Bearing cone 


(31) Gear 


ssus 1 


November 1991 




www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



\/ 



Accessories - GSPTO 




10B01.9 



F. Fitting and adjusting the control 
cable 

76. Put the cable into the grommet at the rear of the 
cab. 

77. Slide cable housing end stop (5) into bracket (6) 
{Fig. 16). 

78. Screw the clevis to the edge of the threaded part of 
cable (7) (Fig. 16). 

79. Fit clevis (1 ) to link U with clip (8) and tighten nut (2) 
(Fig. 16). 

80. Adjust cable end stop (5) to obtain a measurement 
of 105mm between bracket (6) and the clevis pin 
(1){Fig.16). 

Note: Make sure the cable can move freely. 

81. Put link U in "engaged" position (Fig. 17). 

82. Put rod V in "clutch engaged" oosition (Fig. 18). 
Note: Make sure that link V is properly locked in 
place. 

83. Screw clevis (6) to the edge of rne threaded part of 
cable (4)( Fig. 18). 

84. Fit clevis (6) on link V with clip (5) and tighten nut 

(7). 

85. Adjust cable end stop (1) using nut (3), making 
sure.that link V is still in "clutch engaged" position. 

86. Tighten nut (2). 

Note: After tightening, check that there is no 
drag on the cable in "clutch disengaged" and 
"clutch engaged" positions (Fig.18). 

87. Check that the control works properly in "clutch 
disengaged" position. 





engages Dositton 



Fig. 17 




Issue i 



November 1991 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



W 



Accessories - GSPTO 10B02. 1 



10 B02 Fitting a ground speed PTO on 4 WD 
tractors 



CONTENTS 

A. Preliminary operations 



B. Fitting 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10B02.2 



Accessories - GSPTO 



^ 



Fig. 1 




Rice field version 



Key to illustration 

(11) Bolt 

(12) Cover 

(13) Needle bearing 

(14) Bearing cup 

(15) Bearing cone 

(16) Clutch unit 

(17) Bush 

(18) Bearing cup 

(19) Bearing cone 
[20] Shim(s) 

(21) 0-rmg 



(22) Retainer - bearing 

(23) Circlip 

(24) Seal 

/25\ Sealing rings 

(26) Seal 

(27) Setscrew 

(28) Flange 

(29) Cap 

(31) Transfer gear 

(32) 4 WD shaft 

(33) Drum 
(43) Bush 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Accessories - GSPTO 



w 



10B02.3 



A. Preliminary operations 

1 . Immobilise the tractor and block the rear wheels. 

2. Drain the axle housing 

3. Remove the tow hook. 

4. Extract rear plug (1)(Fig.2). 

5. Remove bolts (11) and cover (12). 

6. Extract plug (1) (Fig.3). 

Note : To stop the 4 WD clutch from slipping in 
certain working conditions, where the front axle 
and the ground speed PTO are used simulta- 
neously, a five-disc clutch has been fitted on the 
3000 tractor range as from serial number 
N309034 (see service bulletin 88/027, issue 2, 
December 1 988). All 3100 tractors are fitted with 
a 4WD five-disc clutch. 

For 3000 tractors prior to this number 

•Remove and refit the clutch unit (see Fig.1 ) and carry 
out operations 7 to 23. 

•Remove and refit the clutch (see chapter 7A01, sec- 
tions 8 and C. 

• Continue assembling the ground speed PTO. Carry 
out operations 24 to 33. 

For 3000 tractors after this number and for 3100 
tractors 

•If the bearing is fitted, continue assembling the GS 
PTO. Carry out operations 24 to 33. 

• Check that needle bearing (13) is in place. If the 
needle bearing is not fitted, refer to Figure 1 and carry 
out operations 7 to 33. 

7. Disconnect the two front differential locking control 
hoses (plug the pipes). Remove the shield and 
transmission shaft. 

8. On tractors fitted with a reinforced seal protector. 
remove screw (27), flange (28) and seal (26). 

9. Remove circWp (23). 

10. Protect the splined part of shaft (32). Pull out 
bearing retainer (22) with seal (24) using the locally 
manufactured tool (see section E, chapter 7A01). 

11. Remove O-ring (21), adjusting shim(s) [20] and 
bearing cup (18). 

1 2. Take out shaft (32) and bearing cone (1 9) but retain 
clutch (16) and drum (33) assembly. 

13. Remove clutch (16) with drum (33) and bearing 
cone (15). 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10B02.4 



Accessories - GSPTO 



*r 



B. Fitting 



14. If needle bearing (13) is not fitted on shaft (32), fit 
it 2.5mm back from side "P (Fig.4). 

1 5. Check that sealing rings /25\ are not damaged and 
that they turn freely. 

1 6. Place bearing cone (15) in bearing cup (14), push 
in shaft (32) after positioning clutch (16) and drum 
(33) assembly in the housing. 

17. Put bearing cup (18) and adjusting shim(s) [20] 
coated with grease, in place. 

18. Fit O-ring (21) in the housing groove. 

19. Fit bearing retainer (22) with seal (24) and circlip 
(23). Remove the shaft splines protector. 

20. On tractors with rice field version, grease and place 
seal (26). with the iip facing bearing retainer (22). 
Remove the protector. 

21. Fit flange (28) leaving some play relative to the 
housing. 

22. Tighten screw (27) coated with Loctite 241 . 

23. Refit the drive shaft and shield. Reconnect the two 
front differential locking control hoses. 

24. Put coupler (10) on shaft (32). 

Note: Put short shoulder "E" facing towards 
shaft (32)(Fig.5). 

25. Fit the ground speed PTO shaft and carry out 
operations 38 to 51 . chapter 10801 . 

26. Refill the rear axle with oil to level. 

27. Refit the tow hook. 

28. Remove the lift console. Carry out operations 57 to 
61, chapter 10B01. 

29. Fit and adjust the control lever and cable and carry 
out operations 62 to 65 and 76 to 80, chapter 
10B01. 

30. Refit the lift console and carry out operations 67 to 
72, chapter 10B01. 

31 . Fit and adjust the cable on the link located on the 
left of the rear axle hous in g . Carry out op erat ion s 8 1 
to 87, chapter 10B01. 

32. Check that the following function correctly : 

- the lift console, and electronic and electric con- 
trols 

- the ground speed PTO 

- the automatic hook (if fitted). If adjustment is 
required, carry out operations 1 and 6 to 9, 
chapter 6M01. 

33. Check the sealing of the cover seal surface under 
the rear axle housing and of the Iront differential 
locking control hose connectors. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



w 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Fitting the front PTO 10C01.1 



10C01 Fitting the front PTO 



CONTENTS 



General 



A. Preliminary operations 



B. Fitting the hydraulic installation 

C. Fitting the PTO unit assembly _ 



D. Fitting the electrical installation 

E. Wiring diagram 



F. Final reassembly. 



Issue 1 December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



** 



10C01.2 Accessories - Fitting the front PTO 



General (Fig. 1) 



The whole power take-off unit, installed on the front 
axle bearing, is driven via a coupling sleeve connected 
to the engine pulley. 



The power take-off is started by operating a knob 

(contactor) (2) in the cab. 

For details on its operation, see section 1 C02. page 2. 



(1) PTO unit assembly 

(2) Contactor 

13) Contactor harness 

(4) Power supply harness 

(SI Solenoid valve and electromagnetic brake harness 




Fig. 1 



A. Preliminary operations (Fig. 2) 

Note: Before disassembly, apply the handbrake and 
immobilise the front wheals with blocks. 

1 . Remove the front weights. 

2. Remove the sheet metal panels. 

3. Disconnect the vacuum switch, the horn, the 
headlights, the battery cables and the fuse. 

4. Remove the batteries. 

5. Unscrew the air-conditioning condenser and take it 
out of the grille. 

6. Remove the grille. 

7. Remove the weight supporting frame. 

8. Remove the air-conditioning drier support. 

9. Position an adjustable stand under the engine to 
allow the removal of the front axle bearing. Free the 
front axle. 



^M^% 




FigJ 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Fitting the front PTO 10C01.3 



B. Fitting the hydraulic installation 

Left-hand side of gearbox 

1 0. Remove hose A ( Fig. 3) which comes from the 1 7 
bar valve. 

1 1 . Remove the union (1) and install a union tee (2) in 
its place. Reinstall the elbow union (1). 

1 2. Reinstall hose A on the union tee (2]. 

13. Fit the power take-off return hose 13) (Fig. 3 
and 4). 




Different types of installation 
A - B - C : Clockwise PTO version 
D : High-visibility version 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



iocoi.4 Accessories - Fitting the front PTO 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



C. Fitting the PTO unit assembly 

Coupling sleeve (Fig. 5) 
1st section : Engine side 

14. Unscrew the engine pulley, fit the hub (1) with the 
new bolts supplied with the kit. Tighten the bolts to 

a torque of: 

- 4 cyl. engine: 51 - 69 Nm, 

- 6 cyl. engine: 52-75Nm. 

1 5. Install the bush (21. coupling (3) (tighten to a torque 
of 36 - 46 Nm), vibration damper (4) and coupling 
(5). 

2nd section : PTO side 

1 6. Assemble the hub (81, bush (9) and shaft (7) (tighten 
the hub to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm.) 

17. Position the vibration damper (10) and coupling 
111). 

1 8. Fit the coupling sleeve (6), positioning it away from 
the end of the shaft (7). 

1 9. Fit the elbow unions on the PTO unit (Fig. 4). 

20. Engage the PTO unit assembly in the pivot on the 
front axle. Fit the attaching bolts coated with Loctite 
270 and tighten to a torque of 520 - 640 Nm. 

21. Connect up and position the coupling sleeve (6), 
complying with the dimension of 1 5 mm as per Fig. 
6. Tighten the sleeve to 36 - 46 Nm. 

22. Fit the connecting pipes and hoses onto the 
gearbox cover and secure them with attaching lugs 
B (Fig. 7) on the engine side. 

23. Connect up the hose to the oil cooler on the lower 
outlet. Fit the jet (8) (Fig. 4). 

24. Connect the hose to the 1 7 bar valve on the free 
outlet. 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Fitting the front PTO wcoi.5 



D . Fitting the electrical installation 
(Fig. 8 - 9) 

Preparing the contactor assembly 

25. Fit the plate (11) onto the console in the cab and 
secure it with four rivets after removing the 
blanking part. 

26. Assemble the relay (6) on the mounting plate (13). 

27. Place the prepared assembly on the contactor (2J 
after unscrewing parts (14) and (15). 

28. Connect the harness (3) to the relay (6) and the 
knob (contactor) (2). 

29. Free the bellow from the gear levers. Install the 
contactor assembly in position through the 
opening. Do not forget to fit the Grower washer 
(12). Screw the bushes (14) and (15). 

30. Connect the solenoid valve (10) onto the power 
take-off. Feed the wire through the battery support. 

31 . Connect up the PTO brake wires by means of the 
connecting strip. 




Fig. 8 



■;^M' 




Issue 1 



December 1 993 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



10C01.6 Accessories - Fitting the front PTO 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



E. Wiring diagram 



tfH, _._f 



"^T? 







List of parts 

2 Front PTO contactor 

Relay 

Fuse 5 A 

Battery 

Front PTO brake 

PTO solenoid valve 

1 1 Hare/Tortoise (Hi-Lo) range contactor 
(tractors with Autotronic system) 

1 2 Low-pressure contactor (tractors 
without Autotronic system) 



6 
7 
8 
9 

10 



Colour 


B 


White 


J 


Yellow 


N 


Black 


R 


Red 


RO 


Pink 


V 


Green 



so*—^* 



Connectors 

C98 4-way 
C99 3-way 



*9 !# 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskmisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Fitting the front PTO iocou 



F. Final reassembly 



Not a: Reform p r oceeding with final reassembly, it is 
advisable to checkthatthe system operates correctly 
and that there are no leaks. 

Important: Before starting up die engine, check the 
oil level in the power take-off. When switching on, 
allow the engine to idle for a few minutes, check for 
leaks, stop the engine and retighten components, if 
necessary. 

Carry out procedures 1 to 9 in reverse order. 
Precautions: Install and secure the battery attaching 
clamps before closing the supporting sheet metal. 

Operation 

Engine speed of 1 .000 to 2,040 rpm. 

To engage the power take-off, press and turn the knob 

(Fig. 11). 

Important: The tractor must be stopped with the 

ignition switched off before engaging the front 

power take-off. 













^ J 


c 

o ^ 


Fig.11 









Issue i 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




WC02.1 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



10 C02 Repairing the front PTO 



CONTENTS 

General - Operation , 



A. Removing the PTO unit 



B. Disassembly , 6 

C. Reassembly 8 

D. Refitting the PTO unit 11 

E. Removing and refitting the connecting shaft ___ 11 

F. Service tools 12 



Issue l December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 31 00 SERIES TRACTORS 



0C02.2 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



^ 



General 



The front power take-off unit is mounted under the front 
frame, it can be installed on two or four-wheel drive 
tractors. The PTO shaft rotates at single speed of 1 ,000 
rpm and can be installed in 6 or 21 spline versions. 
The maximum torque transmitted by the PTO shaft is 
50 m/kg. 



Operation 



The power take-off is provided from the input shaft (40) 
which is connected to the engine pulley by means of 
shaft (86) which is splined at both ends. The link is 
provided by the spiined sleeve (85) and the flexible 
couplings (76) and (79). 

The solenoid valve (62) sends the oil from the 17-bar 
low-pressure system via the union (73) to act on the 
piston (a) of the clutch (1), thus linking the hub (b) and 



the unit (c) via the clutch friction discs. The shaft (33) 
and driving pinion (29) transmit the output drive to the 
PTO shaft (9) via gears (20) and /4V As soon as the 
control knob is turned to the "0" position, the solenoid 
valve (62) shuts off the oil supply and the electromagnetic 
brake (32) immobilises shaft (33) and, consequently, 
stops the PTO shaft (9) rotating. 
The unit is lubricated by means of the oil flow outlet 
from the cooler at a pressure of 1 .5 bar (orifice U. 
An eccentric type pump (21) (22) (23) ensures that a 
constant oil level is maintained in the unit. Capacity of 
housing: approximately 4.75 litres. 

Reverse direction version 

An additional pin (16) and a gear (20) which is meshed 
with gear /4\ allows the direction of rotation of the 
output shaft (9) to be reversed. jfe 



List of parts 


130] Adjusting shims 


160) 


Bush 


HI Clutch assembly 


(31) Pin 


(61) 


Bolt 


(2) Plug 


(32) Electromagnetic brake 


(62) 


Solenoid valve 


(3) O-ring 


(33) Shaft 


(63) 


Bolt 


/4\ Driven gear 


(34) Bolt 


(64) 


Cover 


(5) O-ring 


(35) Washer 


(65) 


Grommet 


(6) O-ring 


/36\ Bolt 


(66) 


Studs 


(7) Seal holder 


/37\ Cover 


(67) 


Bolt 


(8) Guard 


(38) Sealing bush 


(68) 


Retaining ring 


(9) PTO shaft 


(391 Seal 


(69| 


Grease nipple 


(10) Sealing bush 


(40) Shaft 


(70) 


Housing , 


(11) Bearing 


/41\ Bolt 


(71) 


Circlip 


(12) Bolt 


(42) Special nut 


172) 


Union 


(13) Rivet 


(43) Rivet 


(73) 


Union 


(14) Guard 


(44) Shouldered bushes 


(74) 


Bolt 


(15) O-ring 


(45) Bearing 


(75) 


Bush 


(16) Pin 


(46) Retaining ring 


(76) Coupling 


(17) O-ring 


(47) Stop ring 


(77) 


Bolt 


/18\ Washer 


(48) Clamp 


(78) 


Bolt 


(19) Double needle-roller bearing 


149) Bolt 


(79) 


Coupling 


(20) Intermediate gear 


(50) Filler plug 


(80) 


Hub 


(21) Pump assembly 


/51\ Cover 


(81) 


Bolt 


(22) Pump hub 


(52) Bolt 


(82) 


Bush 


(23) Pump pin 


(53) Plug 


(83) 


Bolt 


(24) Dowels 


(54) Plugs 


(84) 


Bush 


(25) Spring 


(55) Cupplug(s) 


(85) 


Sleeve 


/26\ Support 


(56) Rivet 


(86) 


Shaft 


(27) Stop ring 


(57) Lock plate 


(87) 


Bush 


(28) Bearing 


(58) Bolt 


(881 


Coupling 


129) Driving gear 


(59) Rear bearing 




< 


Issue 1 


December 1993 







"www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



WC02.4 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



* 




Issue i 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



^ = 

0)CO2.3 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 






Issue 1 





December 1993 




www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




WC02.5 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



A. Removing the PTO unit 

1 . Immobilise the rear wheels with blocks. Apply the 
handbrake fully. Remove the sheet metal. 

2. Remove the front weights (if installed}, their 
support and the spacer (depending on type). 

3. Disconnect and remove the batteries (depending 
on type). Remove the grille. 

4. Remove the battery bracket. Disconnect the wiring 
harness from the solenoid valve. Remove the 
supply (17 barl, return and lubricating pipes. 

5. Drain the PTO unit. 

6. On 4WD tractors, disconnect the front differential 
locking hoses (and plug the openings). Remove the 
guard and the drive shaft. 

7. Lift the tractor with a jack positioned in line with the 
axle housing. Install a stand (see Fig. 2) under the 
engine's lower casing. 

8. Install a sling and hold the front axle with straps (see 
Fig. 2). 

9. Remove the bolts (1) and the grease nipple (69) 
(see Fig. 1). 

1 0. Screw a locally manufactured hook in place of the 
filler plug (50). Using a travelling hoist, remove the 
PTO unit as shown in Fig. 2, disengaging the bush 
(87) from the coupling (76). Recover the chamfered 
washer /7\ (see Fig. 1}. 



P- ^\^± 




Fig. 1 




Issue l 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



WC02.6 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



^ 



B. Disassembly 



Clockwise and reverse PTO versions 

1 1 . Position the assembly on a suitable support. 

12. Remove the bolts {63) and (52). Detach and 
remove the covers (64) and /51V Recover the O- 
ring (17). 

1 3. Remove the pump assembly (21), the hub (22), the 
pin (3t) installed with the spring (25) and dowels 
(24). 

1 4. If necessary, extract dowels (23) and (24). Remove 
the spring (25). 

1 5. Detach and remove the support /26\ installed with 
gear (29), bearing (28) and stop ring (27). 

If necessary, separate the gear 129) and the bearing 
(28) from the support /26V Take off the stop ring. 
Remove the bearing. 

Note : The bearing (281 has no external cage. 
Recover the rollers. 

1 6. Remove the shims [30]. 

1 7. Remove the bolt /41\ (left-hand thread) and the seal 
(39). Remove the shaft (40). 

1 8. Remove the bolts (67) and the nuts from studs (66). 
Detach and remove the cover /37\ with the solenoid 
valve (62). 

If necessary, drive out the seal (38). Remove the 
solenoid valve (62). 

1 9. Remove the bolt (49) and the clamp (48). Unscrew 
the grommet (65). Free the supply wire. Remove 
the clutch assembly (1) along with the 
electromagnetic brake (32) and the shaft (33). 

20. If necessary, separate the brake from the clutch. 
Take out the bolt (34) and remove the shaft (33). 
Note: The front PTO clutch is fitted with three 
discs, three backing plates and two spacers. If it 
is necessary to dimantle it. see Section 6 GOI, 
partD. 

Clockwise PTO version (Fig. 3) 

21. Take out pin (16). Remove the gear (20), the 
bearing (19) and washer /18V 

22. Discard the O-ring (15). 

23. If necessary, extract the shouldered bush (44). 
Drive out the cup plugs (55). 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



W 



WC02.7 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 




Fifl. 4 



Reverse PTO version (Fig. 4) 

24. Remove the bolts (581 and the lock plate (57). Take 
out pins (16). 

Remove the gears (20), the bearings (19) ana the 
washers /18Y 
Discard the O-ring (15). 

If necessary, extract the shouldered bushes (44). 
Drive out the cup Dlug (55). 
Note: On the outer face of pin (16) held by plate 
(57), the end of the hole is blanked by a rivet (56}. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



WC02.8 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 




V 



Clockwise and reverse PTO versions 

25. Remove the guards (8j and (14) (depending on 
type). 

26. using tool MF 460 {section F) fitted with a sleeve of 
suitable length, remove the retainer ring (46). 

27. Remove the circlip (71). 

28. Extract the seal holder (7) with the sealing bush 
(10) using the locally manufactured tool (section F) 
(see Fig. 5). 

If necessary, drive out the seal holder of the sealing 
bush. 

29. Discard the O-ring (5). 

30. Secure gear /4V, take out the shaft assembly (9), 
the bearing (11), the stop ring (47) and the retaining 
ring (68). Remove the gear. 

If necessary, extract the bearing (45). Remove the 
plugs (2) and (53) with their seals. Remove the rear 
bearing (59) and extract the bush (60). Remove the 
studs (66) and the grommet (65) equipped with its 
seal. 



C. Reassembly 



31 . Clean and check the parts and replace any that are 
faulty. 

32. If necessary, fit the bush (60) in the rear bearing 
(59) and reinstall it. 

Tighten the bolts (61) to a torque of 90-120 Nm, 

after coating them with Loctite 241 . Screw in the 

plugs (2) and (53) with their seals. 

Lightly smear the outside diameter of the bearing 

(45) with loctite 638 and fit it into the housing. 

Fit the bearing (11) onto the shaft (9). 

Position the stop ring (47) and the retaining ring 

(68). 

Using a press and a suitable fixture, install the 

sealing bush (10) in the seal holder (7). 

33. Hold the gear /4\in the housing, orienting the gear 
tooth chamfer E towards the bearing (11). (see Fig. 
6). Engage the shaft in the gear and in the bearing 
(45). 

34. Using tool MF 459 (section F) fitted with a sleeve of 
suitable length, install the retaining ring (46) in its 
correct position. Position the lubricated 0-nng (5) in 
the recess in the housing. 

35. Lubricate the sealing bush (10). Install the seaJ 
holder (7) and the circlip (71). 





Clockwise PTO version (Fig. 3) 

36. Slightly smear the shouldered bush (44) with 
Loctite 638 and fit it into the housing. 

37. Fit the cup plugs (55), coated with Loctite 542 and 
positioned back from the face of the housing. 

38. Slide the gear (20) with the bearing (19) into the 
housing. 

39. Position the washer /ISA with its lubricanng 
grooves oriented towards the gear (20). 

40. Check that the channels in pin (16) are not blocked. 

41 . Fit the pin with the O-ring (15), line up the flats with 
those on the washer /18V 

42. Fit the plugs (541 after coating them with Loctite 
510. Check the normal backlash and the end play on 
the gear (20) by hand. M 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/ 3 WO SERIES TRACTORS 



WC02.9 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 




Reverse PTO version (Fig. 4) 

43. Slightly smear the shouldered bush (44) with 
Loctite 638 and fit it into the housing. 

44. Fit the cup plugs (55), coated with Loctite 542 and 

positioned back from the face of the housing. 

45. Slide the gears (20] with the bearings (19) into the 
housing. 

46. Position the washers /18\ with its lubricating 

grooves oriented towards the gears (20). 

47. Check that the channels in pins (16) are not 

blocked. 

Note: Pin (16) secured by plate (57) is riveted at 

its end. 

48. Fit the pins with the O-rings (15), line up the flats 
with those on the washers /18V 

49. Immobilise the riveted pin (16) with the lock plate 

(57). Coat the bolts (58) with Loctite 510 and 
tighten rhem to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm. 
Check the normal backlash and the end play on the 
gears (20) by hand. 

Clockwise and reverse PTO versions 
Note: If it was necessary to dismantle the clutch, 
see Section 6 GOT, part D. Coat the bolt /36\ with 
Loctite 270 and tighten it (left-hand thread) to a 
torque of 25 - 35 Nm. 

50. If it was disassembled, position the shaft (33) in the 
clutch (1). Install and tighten the bolt (34). coated 
with Loctite 221. 

Slide the electromagnetic brake (32) onto the shaft 
(33). 

51. Reinstall the clutch and brake assembly via the 
opening in the cover (64). 

52. Using a press and a suitable fixture, fit the bush 
(38) in the cover (37) if necessary. 

Check for the presence of the rivet (43). 
Tighten and lock the studs (66) to a torque of 25 - 
35 Nm. after coating them with Loctite 510. 
Check the cleanliness of the channels in the cover 
/37Y 

53. Coat the cover /37\ with a sealing compound 
(Master Joint 510 Loctite or equivalent). 

54. Check that the O-rings (3) and (6) are not damaged. 

If they are to be replaced, see Section 6G01, 
procedure 79. 

Fit the cover /37Y Tighten the bolts (67) and the 
nuts on the studs (66) to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm, 
after coating them with Locttte 510. 

55. Lubricate the bush (38). Fit the shaft (40) in the 
clutch. Position the seal (39). Fit and tighten the 
bolt /41\ {with left-hand thread) to a torque of 25 - 
35 Nm. 







■ «; 




Fig 


1 




i— n /" 


! . 


\ 


(§f 


/ 


^ **""■ j 


"6 






/ 


\Jl£-/J> 


1 
1 
1 

i 

L^ 

C - O 


\ 




1 ' 




/ 










<—•. S 


] 



56. Fit and tighten the solenoid valve (62). 

Tightening torques: 

- body:18-20Nm 

- knurled nut : 5 Nm 

57. Position the electromagnetic Drake wiring harness 
in the clamp (48). Check that the harness is not in 
contact with the clutch. 

Install and tighten the bolt (49), coated with Loctrre 
510 (see Fig. 7). 

58. Install and tighten the grommet (65) equipped w.tn 
its seal. 

59. Assemble the bearing (28) in the gear (29). Fit tie 
stop ring (27). 

60. Fit the gear (29) and bearing (28) assembly on :~.e 
support /261 

61. Position the assembly without the shims [30]. 
Install and tighten the bolts (52). 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



* 



WC02.W Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



62. Carry out shimming in order to obtain a play of (see 

Fig. 8): 

J1 a 0.20 to 0.50 

Check that the clutch (1) and the gear (29t are 
correctly positioned. 

Using a set of shims, measure the space between 
the electromagnetic brake (32) and the gear 1291. 
According to the measured value, determine the 
thickness of shims required to obtain a play of 0.20 
to 0.50. 

63. Remove the bolts (52). Remove the support /26\ 
and gear (29) assembly. 

64. Slide the previously selected shims onto the shaft 

(33). 

65. Smear the housing (70) with a sealing compound 

(Master Joint 510 Loctite or equivalent). 

Screw in two diametrically opposite locating studs. 

66. Install the support assembly /26\ (with the holes L 
oriented in accordance with Fig. 10), the bearing 
(28) and the gear (29). 

67. If they were dismantled, assemble the spring (25), 

the dowels (24) and (23), and the pin (31) as per Fig. 
10. 

68. Check that the parts, (21), (22) and (31) slide freely 
in their respective positions. 

69. Fit the pin (31) assembly correctly positioned in the 
head of bolt /36\. Position the hub (22) with the 
groove engaged on the dowel (23). Install the pump 
assembly (21). 

70. Smear the support /26\ with a sealing compound 

(Master Joint 51 Loctite or equivalent) as shown in 
Fig. 1 1 . 

Note: No trace of Loctite should be visible around 
the pump assembly (2V. 



II at 0.5 mm 



//at 0.5 mm 




© ® %®% 



Fig. 10 






/* 




/26\. 


? ''VK 


// ; 




(/' '.i 






i/^j) 


1 i "OClZJ^ 


\ / / 


/S 


~A -»"'i'x 


^^^^^^.~~ f* 




L 


R>4 




L 

Fig.S \ 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




WC02.11 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



71 . Install and position the union (72) on the cover /51V 
Fit a new O-ring (17). 

72. Install and orient the cover /51\as shown in Fig. 3 
(for the clockwise PTO version) or in Fig. 4 (for the 
reverse PTO version). 

Remove the locating studs. Tighten the bolts (52) 
to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm, after coating them with 
Loctite 510. 

73. Check the normal backlash and the rotation of the 
gears by hand. 

74. Using a battery, check that the electromagnetic 
brake operates correctly. 

75. Smear the cover (64) with a sealing compound 
(Master Joint 510 Loctite or equivalent). 

76. Install the cover (64) with the stop B positioned in 
the lock plate P (see Fig. 8). 

Fit the bolts (63| and tighten them to a torque of 
25 - 35 Nm, after coating them with Loctite 510. 

77. Pour 4.75 litres of transmission oil through the plug 
orifice {50). 

Install and tighten the plug with its O-ring. 

78. Visually check the operation of the pump by turning 
the shaft (40) by hand in the direction of rotation of 
the engine until oil runs from the union (72). 

79. Remove the PTO unit from the support. 



D. Refitting the PTO unit 

80. Position the washer /7\ lightly coated with grease 
(and with the chamfer oriented towards the axle or 
the front axle assembly) (see Fig. 1). 

81 . Using a travelling hoist, reinstall the PTO unit as 
shown in Fig. 2, engaging the bush (87) in the 
coupling (76). 

82. With the unit correctly supported on the washer 
/A fit the bolts (1) (see Fig. 1 ) and tighten them to 
a torque of 520 - 640 Nm, after coating them with 
Loctrte 270. 

83. Fit the grease nipple (69) and grease the bearing 
surface. 

84. Remove the straps securing the axte or the front 
axle assembly (depending on the type). Lift the 
tractor. Remove the stand. 

85. Carry out procedures 6 and 1 to 4 in reverse. 

86. Check the operation of the PTO and its brake. 

87. Check the mating faces and the hydraulic unions for 
leaks. 




E. Removing and refitting the 
connecting shaft 

Removal 

88. Remove the bolts (78). Slide the sleeve (85) 
forwards. 

89. Free the coupling assembly (76), the shaft (86) ana 
the bushes (87) and (75). 

90. If necessary, separate the shaft (86) from the 
coupling (76). Remove the couplers (79) ana (881 
Dismantle the hub (80) with the bush (82). 

Refitting 

91 . If they were dismantled, assemble the shan (86) 
with the coupling (76). complying witr. trie 
dimension of 15 mm (see Fig. 12). 

Tighten the bolt (77) to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm. 
Reassemble the hub (80) with the bush (82). 
Tighten the bolts (81) to the torque of : 
4 cyl. engine : 51 - 69 Nm. 
6 cyf. engine : 52 - 75 Nm. 
Refit the couplings (79) and (88) wtth their 
respective bushes (84) and (87). Tighten the dc::s 
(74) and (83) to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm. 

92. Correctly position the shaft (86). Slide the s:eeve 
(85) in contact with the coupling (79). Tighten re 
bolts (78) to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm. 



Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



WC02.12 Accessories - Repairing the front PTO 



^ 



F. Service tools 




MF 459 Retaining ring refitting tool 



MF 460 Retaining ring removing tool 



Tool to be manufactured locally 



2 threaded rods M5 x 170 



Welded nut HM5 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^W 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Front lift position indicator 10D01.1 



10 D01 Front iift position indicator 



CONTENTS 

Operation 



Utilisation for work 



A. Checking the position indicator power supply 



B. Checking the position sensor potentiometer . 



C. Setting the position sensor 



Issue 1 December ":993 



www.maskmisten.net 




3000/ 31 00 SERIES TRACTORS 



wdoi.2 Accessories - Front lift position indicator 



^ 



Operation (Fig. 1 and 4) 



The position indicator |3) is supplied with 12 V + power 

after starting up and is protected by a 5 A fuse located 

on the black power supply wire. 

The position sensor (4) installed in the position of the 

right-hand lifting arm pin consists of a potentiometer. 

The sensor pin A is immobilised by a 

locating pin fitted in the cover (6) which is held to the 

from support by means of bolts (5). 

The sensor body is actuated by the lifting arms. It is 

connected to the position indicator by three wires (blue 

for earth, white for signal, red for power supply}. The 

indicator's diodes light up according to the signals 

emitted by the position sensor (4) and the potentiometer 

(1) of the position indicator (3). 



Utilisation for work {Fig. 2 and 3) 

1 . Determine the required height of the lifting arms ai 
which the tool operates correctly. 

2. Set the switch (2) to the "on" position. 

3. Turn the potentiometer knob (1) until the green 
diodes E located in the middle of the screen light up. 

4. Each time the hitch linkage is raised or lowered, the 
movement of the arms is shown by the lighting up of 
the red diodes D. When the green diodes come back 
on, the lifting arms have returned to the initial 
position. 



Colour code 

B White 
BL Blue 
J Yellow 
M Brown 
N Black 
R Red 
V Green 




Frg.i 



Issue 1 



December 1 993 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Accessories - Front lift position indicator 10D01.3 



A. Checking the power supply to 
the position indicator (3) 

1 . On the position indicator (31, disconnect the wires 
(blue, white, red) for the position sensor (4). 

2. Start up. Set the switch (2) to the working position. 

3. On the position indicator, check that the lower round 
diode comes on. 

If does not, check: the brown earth wire, the black 
power supply wire and the 5 A fuse between the 
starting switch and the position indicator, the switch 
(2), etc.. 




B. Checking the potentiometer (1) 
and position sensor (4) 

1 . On the position indicator, reconnect the wires (blue, 
white, red! for the position sensor (4( and set the 
lifting function to the mid position. 

2. Turn the potentiometer (1). Check that all the diodes 
come on one after the other. If they do not: 

a) Check the wires between the potentiometer and 
the position indicator PCB. If they are satisfactory: 

b) On the position indicator (3), disconnect the wires 
(blue, white, red) for the sensor (4|. Check the 
resistance between the red (+) and blue (earth) 
terminals of the harness. 

If it is approximately 10 kohms: it is correct (see 

step c). 

If R = ohms: there is a short circuit between the 

two wires. 

Disconnect the harness from the position sensor 

(4). Trace the short circuit (sensor or harness). 

If R is infinite: check the connection of the sensor. 

the continuity of the lines and the resistance of the 

sensor. 

c) Carry out the same test between the blue (earth) 
and white (signal) terminals. The correct value 
must be between 100 ohms and 11,000 ohms 
approximately (depending on the sensor 
adjustment and the position of the lifting arms). 



If R = ohms: there is short circuit between the 
two wires. 

Disconnect the harness from the position sensor 
(4). Trace the short circuit (sensor or harness). 
If R is infinite: check the connection of the sensor, 
the continuity of the lines and the resistance of the 
sensor. 
d) If it is correct, reconnect the position sensor and 
check the potentiometer or the diodes. 

3. Raise and lower the lifting mechanism. Check that 
the diodes light up to indicate lifting or lowering. 

If they do not: 

a) Disconnect the sensor on the position indicator 
and check that the resistance between the blue 
and white terminals of the sensor harness 
increases when the hitch linkage is fitted and 
decreases when it is lowered. 

b) Remove the cover (6) and check the attachment 
of the trunnion (81. Readjust the sensor setting 
(see pan C). 

4. Check that all the diodes light up when the 
potentiometer (1) is turned, regardtess of the 
position of the lifting system (minimum or maximum 
position). 

If they do not: readjust the sensor setting (see pan 
Q. 



Issue I 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




V 



WD0T4 Accessories - Front lift position indicator 



C. Setting the positron sensor (4) 
(Fig. 3 and 4) 

1 . Place the arms in the maximum high position. 

2. Remove the cover (6) from the position sensor (4). 

3. Unscrew the grooved trunnion (8) fitted on the 
sensor pin. 

4. Turn the sensor pin A as far as it will go in the 
clockwise direction. 

5. Turn the pin A in the anticlockwise direction until the 
lower round diode lights up. With the diode lit up, 
turn through 10 more degrees, 

6. Check the position of locating pin P on the outer face 
of the cover (6) and position it with bolts (5). 

On the front support, draw a marking in line with that 
on the cover. Remove the cover. 

7. Without turning the sensor ptn, fit the trunnion (8), 
lining up the groove R with the marking drawn on the 
support. Refit the cover (6) with seai (7), ensuring 

that the markings are aligned. Tighten the bolts (5) 

lightly. 

8. Start up the tractor. Check that the lifting function 
ana the position indicator (3) operate correctly. 



List of parts 


(1) 


Potentiometer 


(2) 


Switch 


(3) 


Position indicator 


(4) 


Position sensor 


(51 


Bolt 


(6) 


Cover 


(7) 


Seal 


(8) Trunnion 


A 


Sensor pin 


R 


Trunnion groove 


P 


Locating pin 


D 


Diodes (red) 


E 


Diodes (green) 




Issue 1 



December 1993 



www.maskinisten.net 




™ 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Electronic lift controi - General description 11A01.1 



11 A01 General description 



CONTENTS 

A. Description of components 

B. Working principles 



C. Using the control panel . 

D. Attaching an implement 



Issue i November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11A01.2 Electronic lift control - General description 




/ / 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 




Electronic lift control - General description 11A01.3 



A . Description of components 

The electronic linkage control system consists of 7 
basic components : 

(1) Control panel 

Situated inside the cab on the right hand side, it 
comprises the various potentiometers and diodes 
for the 8 main functions. 

(2) Electronic calculator 

Situated directly underneath the control panel and 
connected to it. 

The electronic calculator is the «brain» of the 
system. The purpose of the electronic calculator is 
to compare the signals relayed from the sensors (4) 
and (3) with the settings of the various controls on 
the control panel (1). 

When the value of the control panel settings differs 
from those sent from the sensors, the electronic 
calculator sends a signal to the control valve 
solenoids (6). This raises or lowers the 3 point hitch 
until the values set on the controls equal those 
received from the sensors. 



(7) 



The valve is of the open centre type and forms one 
section of the high flow (high pressure) hydraulic 
circuit. The circuit components are connected in 
series, the circuit also contains the trailer brake 
valve {if fitted) and the auxiliairy spool valves. 
The valve is basically hydraulic in design with 2 
pilot valves controlled electrically by solenoids. 
One solenoid is lift and the otner lower. The sole- 
noids receive electrical signals from the electronic 
calculator (2). 

Note : Never connect an electrical supply direc- 
tly to the solenoids as serious damage to the 
solenoids may occur. 

External controls 

Situated on the fenders or inside the cab according 
to the specifications. 

Designed to simplify the couDling of implements. 
the system allows the operator to control the heignt 
of the lower links by means of two push button 
switches conveniently mounted on the outer edge 
of rear fenders. 



(3) Position sensor 

Located on the right hand side of the lift cover. 
The position sensor registers the angular position 
of the cross shaft (rock shaft) by means of a linear 
sensor, located against a cam connected to the 
cross shaft (see 6 B01, p. 3). The electrical signal 
from the sensor is relayed back to the electronic 
calculator by means of a well-protected cable. 

(4) Draft sensors (sensing pins) 

Situated at the pivot point where the lower links 
meet the axle housings. 

The draft sensors register the draft force on the 
lower links. The sensors are built into the lower link 
pivot pins. They measure draft forces extremely 
accurately by measuring changes in internal 
forces caused by the changing loads on the pins. 
The electrical signals from the sensor are then 
relayed back to the electronic calculator by means 
of well-protected cables. 

(5) Electrical harness linking the various compo- 
nents 

(6) Hydraulic/Electrical control valve 

Located on the left hand side cover on the rear axle 
housing. 



B . Working principles 



The principles by which these components work toge- 
ther to achieve an effective linkage control system is as 
follows : 

The system operates around the central component 
which is the electronic calculator (2) -the brain-. 
The electronic calculator receives 2 types of electricai 
signal, the operator's signal, through the dials en the 
controi panel, and the tractor/working signal, frcm me 
draft and position sensors. 

The calculator takes the signal, sent from the various 
controls on the control panel and compares that signal 
with the signal relayed from the sensors, if the 2 signais 
are of different values the electronic calculator will then 
send its own signal to the control valve solenoids. This 
raises or lowers the 3 point hitch until the values set en 
the controls are equal to those received frcm ;r.e 
sensors. 

When the tractor is working these corrections are 
constantly being made ensuring that the quality of me 
work is maintained and optimum performance is 
achieved. 



Issue i 



November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11A01.4 Electronic lift control - General description 



www.maskinisten.net 




v -/ 



C . Using the control panel 

(A) Maximum height control 

This potentiometer is used to set the maximum iift/ 
height. 

It is normally used with PTO driven linkage moun- 
ted implements where excessive iift height can 
cause rapid wear on the PTO shaft universal joints. 
It can also be used to save time at the headland by 
avoiding lifting the implement to transport height. 

(B) Sensitivity control 

The sensitivity control establishes the size of the 
systems «dead band-. 

An electronic system is always capable of being 
more sensitive than a hydraulic one. To accomo- 
date this the calculator has a «dead band « incor- 
porated into it. This «dead band» is a means of 
reducing the sensitivity of the system. Under the 
majority of applications this built in -buffer" will 
prevent the "Shuddering » experienced when the 
calculator is reacting to too many draft signal 
variations. 

However, should the application mean that large 
rapid variations in draft force are ocurring (sub- 
soiler in stoney subsoil) then it is possible to in- 
crease the «dead band- by movement of the 
sensitivity dial. 

The sensitivity control operates on draft and inter- 
mix but not on position control. 



(C) Rate of drop control and transport lock 

This potentiometer provides an adjustable rate or 
implement drop. 

The system allows optimum implement lowering 
rate consistent with fast entry into work, whilst stisi 
protecting the implement from damage. The 
implement drop speed is independent of the imple- 
ment weight. 

Also when turned fully clockwise oast the slow 
position, it locks the hydraulic lift in the transport 
position. 

(D) Lift/Lower switch 

This toggle switch controls the lift and lowering cf 

the 3 point hitch. 

A safety device is built into the s/stem which 

automatically locks the hydraulic : if t when tne 

engine is switched off. 

This places the whole hydraulic sys'.em into «hoic- 

making it impossible tooperate any or the hydraulic 

functions. When the engine is started uc again 

movement on the lift/tower switch to :ne lift positicr 

will re-actuate the system and all Junctions vrm 

become "five". 



Fig. 1 - Early control panel 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 




Electronic lift control - General description 11A01.5 



(E) Depth/Height control 

This dial is used with one of the three controls, 
position, draft or intermix, as determined by the 
position of the function selector control. 
When the dial is used with the function selector in 
position control (fully clockwise), it will act as an 
implement height control {used with non-soil enga- 
ging implements). 

When the dial is used with the function selector in 
draft control (fully anti-clockwise), it will act as an 
implement depth control (used with soil engaging 
implements). The system senses draft forces on 
the lower links to attain the depth set on the dial. 
When the dial is used with the function selector in 
any other position (2, 3, 4 or 5) it will act as an 
implement depth control (soil-engaging imple- 
ments). The system will attain the depth set on the 
dial by sensing draft forces on the lower links as 
well as the height of the implement by sensing the 
angular position of the cross shaft (rock shaft). This 
is known as Intermix. The position of the function 
selector will determine the percentage mixture of 
draft/position signals. 

The purpose of intermix is best explained as 
follows. With the increasing size of tractors and 
implements a system of linkage control that relies 
solely on changes in draft force for its reactions can 
have its limitations. Large changes in draft force will 
result in excessive linkage movement, a problem 
often associated with very wide (heavy draft) 
shallow cultivating implements or implements 
working in soils with bands of different consistency. 
Using intermix which reacts to position sensor 
signals, as well, will result in less linkage movement 
for the same change in draft force allowing a closer 
control of the depth to be attained. 

(F) Function, Selector Control 

The purpose of this dial is to select position 

control, draft control or various degrees of 

intermix 

Mark 1 position control only 

Marks 2 to 5 : draft control progressivity 

Mark 6 draft control only 

(G) (H) Indicator lights (diodes) 

The two indicator lights show the operator when 
and in which direction the hydraulic linkage is 
moving. They are a visual check that the 
Electronic Lift Control is operating as the lights 
will continually go on and off when working in 
draft control or intermix. 
(G) ; Lift warning light 
(H) : Lower warning light 



(J) 



Quick soil engagment button 

This button was introduces on the new conuoi 

panel from June 1991. 

You can obtain working depth quicker by press~~g 

button J. When you release the button, working 

depth returns to that set on button E. 

Fig. 3 : 

1 : normal engagement 

2 : quick soil engagement 

Advantages : faster, more precise entry of soil. 
Note : When you press the quick soil engage- 
ment button, active slip control is deactivated 
until the button is released. 
During rapid soil engagement, keep slip control 
below 80 % to prevent the implement from lifting 
when releasing the button. 



Fig. 2 - New control panel 



D J A 





Frg.3 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




•/ v 



11A01.6 Electronic lift control - General description 



D . Attaching an implement (Fig. 4-5) 

1 . With the internal controls 

After starting the engine, move the switch (D) to lift, 
then tower, in order to bring the console into ser- 
vice, then adjust the position of the arms with the 
depth control knob (E). 

Note : The other controls must be placed as 
follows : 

(A) At the maximum position 
{B) In intermediate position 
(C) In intermediate position 
(F) On position control 

2. With the external controls 

Use of the external control can only be made if the 
switch (D) is in the lower position or neutral. In this 
position, a simple movement of the external control 
allows the lift arms to move. For safety, when the 
external buttons are operated, the control panel is 
automatically switched oil. 
Note : The movement of the linkage stops as 
soon as the button is released . When the exter- 
nal control is used, the lowering speed is 70% of 
the maximum speed. 

3. Reactivate the control panel 

After attaching an implement as described pre- 
viously, or also after stopping the engine, move the 
switch (D) into the lift, then the lowering position. 
Note : Locking of the arms is carried out with the 
potentiometer (C) controlling the lowering 
speed ; if this is set at lock, with control (A) set 
at maximum position and (E) at any position. 



4. Headland turn manoeuvres 

Switch (D) at lift ; depending upon the position of 

(A) the arms will rise. 

At the end of manoeuvring, set (D) at lower and the 

former positron will be resumed. 

Note : The floating position is obtained with 

button (E) set between 8 and 10. 




Fig. 4 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Electronic lift control - Fast checking hboi. 1 



11B01 Fast checking of lift 



CONTENTS 



A. Lift/lower switch in "neutral" 



B. Lift/lower switch in "lift" 



C. Lift/lower switch in "lower" 



Issue 1 November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11B01.2 Electronic lift control - Fast checking 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



For these checks, the oil must be at 60P C and the 
engine running at approx. 1200 rev/min : a load of 
300 to 400 Kg is required on the lower links in order 
to overcome the friction resistances. 



A . Lift/lower switch in neutral 

Check that there is no reaction on the arms. 
Make sure that the lift functions correctly when opera- 
ting the external controls. 



B . Lift/lower switch in lift 

Set controls as shown in Fig. 1 : lower links at lowest 

position. 

Switch D set to lift allow lift arms to raise and stop, 

check that the ram rods have moved out 50+5 mm. 

The warning light G remains lit as long as the arms are 

rising. Rotate A and check that : 

- The lift is proportional 

- There are no oscillations when the arms have reached 
their position. (G light goes off). 

- Knob A at maxi height setting, relief valve does not 
blow off whatever other knob settings ; light H never 
comes on. 

- Check also that operating the external controls do not 
bring about any variations. 

Fault identification 

Push on electrovalve spools manually. If linkage lifts 
and lowers the hydraulic circuit is not faulty. The 
following electrical test procedure should be carried 
out. 



W 



Bl CI D 
3l 




AAA. _/"o 



:x&- 







Fig. 1 



D J A 




Fig. 1A.i 



Fig. 1 : Old control panel 

Fig. 1A: New control panel from serial N"S191036 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Electronic lift control - Fast checking 11B01.3 



C . Lift/lower switch in "Lower" 
Timing active (Datatronic only) 

Datatronic -Timing active- light comes on a few se- 
conds after switch D is placed on «lower» position 
{whatever above settings are). 



Depth control 

a) Lift ■- 

Set controls as shown Fig. 2, lower links at lowest 
position, light H on. 

When the depth control knob is turned towards O: 
check that the lifting warning light G comes on when the 
setting 7.5 to 8.5 is reached. 

The lifting of the arms must then be proportionai to the 
settings of knob E. without oscillations. 
The lift arms reach the maximum high position when the 
depir. control knob E is at 0: the warning light goes out: 
make sure that the relief valve does not blow. 
Set sensitivity to maxi, repeat above operations. Reac- 
tions should be identical. 
Sens;:ivity is inactive for 100 % position setting. 

b) Lower 

Set controls as shown Fig. 3. lower links at highest 
position. 

Turn cepth control E to lower, light H should come on 
from 0. 

Lower iinks should be at lowest position from 7.5-8.5. 
From 6.5 light H should stay on. 
Set sensitivity to maxi, repeat above operations. Reac- 
tions should be identical. 



Maxi height 

Lower iinks at lowest position, set controls as shown 
Fig. -. 

Raise lower links using knob E : ckeck that from 6. G 
light goes out, lift not possible, lift rams have moved out 
50 ± 5 mm. 

c) Quick soil engagement 

Set controls as shown fig. 3. 

Push on button J and check that lift arms lower. Release 

the button and check that they raise to their initial 

posucn. 



D J A 




Fig- 2 



D J A B 



®©@ 







Fig. 3 



D J A 



@Q© 







@'^P=f 



fig. 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




11B01.4 Electronic lift control - Fast checking 



Continue the test procedure as follows : 

Set knob E at 4.5. Operate knob A and check that the lifting or lowenr ■; operates only tor the firs; quarter of the 

potentiometer range. 

ACTIVE RANGE 




DEAD RANGE 



E ' ™ 9 A 

Depth control knob E at mark 3 ; the arms raise through half the adjustment range, when A is operated. 

ACTIVE RANGE ^ ^ DEAD RANGE 




Knob E at mark 1 .5. When knob A is turned, the arms raise over 3/4 of the range. 

ACTIVE RANGE £J DEAD RANGE 




Knob E at ; knob A at top position ; the arms raise over 7/8 of the adjustment range of the potentiometer 



ACTIVE RANGE 



^T DEAD RANGE 




When switch D is at "lower", lift stroke is limited from mark 6 by knob A. Max height range setting is influenced by 
knob E setting. t 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 




.1 



Electronic lift control - Fast checking 11B01.5 



Draft control 

Draft control at minimum sensitivity 

Position the various potentiometers as shown Fig. 5. 

Lower links at lowest position, H light on. 

Lift control 

Then turn knob E. In order to raise the lift, the warning 

light G must come on at the setting 3-3.5. 

The lift reaches the transport position at setting 2.5. 

Note : Lift stroke is no longer proportional to knob 

E setting. 

Lowering control 

Turn knob E to low, check that : 

- lift lowers from 3-3.5 

- lift is at lowest position at 4.5 

- stroke not proportional to knob E setting. 

Draft control at maximum sensitivity 

Position the various potentiometers as shown Fig. 6. 

The lower links at lowest position, the lowering warning 

light is fit. 

Lift 

Raise the arms by operating knob E ; the warning 

light must come on from 4-4.5. They reach the 

transport position at 3. 

Lower 

Turn knob E to low, check that : 

- light comes on at 3-3.5 

- lift is at lowest position from 4.5. 

- stroke not proportional to knob E setting. 




D J A B 



s2 




Fig. 6 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




v v 



11 bo 1.6 Electronic lift control - Fast checking 



Draft / position intermix minimum sensiti- 
vity 

Position the potentiometer as shown Fig. 7. 

By operating knob E, raise and lower the arms making 

sure that the depth control range is limited {4 to 3 

marks). 

Set knob F to marks 4, 3, 2 check that depth control 

range increases as shown Fig. 8. 

Note : On the earlier control panel the minimum 

sensitivity position on knob B is situated at the 

right. 



D J A B 







Fig. 7 




Issue 1 



November 1991 




3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



www.maskinisten.net 




Electronic lift control - Fast checking uboi.7 



Draft/position mixing, maximum sensitivity 

Adjust the potentiometers as shown Fig. 9. 

Carry out same operations as previously, but checking 

as shown Fig, 10. 

The sensitivity adjustment acting on the draft control 

has a lesser effect if the draft/position selector is nearer 

to the pure position control, because sensitivity only 

acts on draft. 

Note : the indications are given for a load ofapprox. 

400 Kg on the ball ends and may vary if the load is 

different 




Fig. 9 




Fig. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11B01.8 Electronic lift control - Fast checking 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



Lowering lock 

Make sure that the lift arms are in the lowest position, 

then set controls as shown Fig. 1 1 . 

Light H goes out. 

1) Calculator 3383891 M3 (Bosch 053 82 001 008) 

Check that it is impossibie to raise the lift arms with 

switch D on lift, or with knobs A or B. 

Check it Is possible to raise the lift arms with depth 

control knob E {switch D set to lower), but that it is 

impossibie to lower the arms. 

Lower the lift arms to lowest position, set the controls 

as follows : 

- knob A to minimum 

- Knob E to 1 

- Knob C on lock 

Make sure that it is impossible to raise the lift arms 

with switch D. 

Make sure that it is possible to raise the arms when 

turning knob A, but that it is impossible to lower 

them. 



D J A B 




© 



fig. 1 1 ; 



2) Calculator 3383891 M2 (Bosch 053 82 01 006) 

Set controls as shown fig. 1 1 . 

Make sure that it is possible to raise the lift arms by 

turning the knob E but not possible to lower them. 

Check that it is possible to raise the lift arm with 

switch D on lift but that it is not possible to lower 

them. 

Lower the arms to lowest position. Set the controls 

as follows : 

- Knob A to minimum 

- Knob E to 1 

• Knob C on lock 
Check that it is possible to raise then to lower the lift 
arms when turning knob A. 



External controls (if fitted) 

Make sure that operation of the external controls takes 
priority over adjustment carried out at the console. 
If this operation ceases, the lift must stop. (Warning light 
goes out). 

In order to control the lift again from the console, set the 
lift/lower selector D at least once at the position Lift. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



V V 



3000/ 3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




I 



Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 1 1C01. 1 



11 C01 Checking the harnesses and components 



CONTENTS 



A. General 



B. Voltage checks 



C. Checking resistances 



D. Checking connectors C2-C1 continuity 
(harness - calculator) 



E. Checking control console 

F. Checking potentiometers 



G. Adjusting position sensor and 
depth control knob 



H. Circuit diagram {with quick soil engagement) 11 

I. Circuit diagram (without quick soil engagement) 13 



Issue 1 November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11 C0 1.2 Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 




/ •-/ 



^ 



A . General 



The various checks to be carried out on tractors equip- 
ped with electronic lift, when there is a functional 
anomaly, are carried out using a tester 3389502 M 1 and 
multimeter MF 3005. 

The tester (B) is connected to the round 24 pin 
connector (C2) or the harness (FR), or both (Fig. 1). 
The aim of the tester is to prevent damage to the plugs 
on the connector and it is provided with female plugs 
which are able to fit the ohmmeter test leads. 

Use of the ohmmeter / voltmeter (multimeter) (Fig. 2) 

Before carrying out any measurements read carefully 

the multimeter use instructions. Select ohmmeter (Q) - 

voltmeter direct current (VDC) or voltmeter alternating 

current (VAC). 

For the ohmmeter function, measuring resistance, it is 

useful to make readings according to the scale of 

resistances. 

Interpretation of readings with ohmmeter : 

When the display is about 12, this means that there is 
no break in the harness or in the part forming the line 
where the measurement is ^eing carried out. 
When the display is 0.L M Q (infinity), this means that 
there is a break on the line, hence there is more chance 
of current and voltage transfer, which may be the cause 
of the breakdown. 

Note : Never connect two test box jacks when 
calculator is functioning. 

Trouble - Shooting on Oatatronic tractors 

To find the cause of faults in case of incorrect 
functioning of the Electronic Lift Control, disconnect 
connector L and check to see if the problem still exists. 
If it does not, check the Datatronic wiring harness (see 
13B01-4) and not the lift control. 





KutOC BUTTON 
BOUTOM DC OAMUE 
MREKXSKNOPT 



WOT AH* SWITCH 
StUCTEun ROTATIF 
(MIHSOVU.TEH 



TtMttMALS 

aORHf s — 



MKJCMLUSSl 



~^w 



O 10* 



O 300m* =Ot«Q 



Fig. 2 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 11C01.3 



B . Voltage checks 



Tester (B) connected between control console and tractor harness (FR) as shown Fig. 1. 

Engine stopped, ignition off 



Voltage between 
terminal 

+ 


Normal values 


Others values see 
fault nbr in 11 D-01 


16, - 14 


Battery voltage 
10.4- 15.3VDC 


1 


17 - 14 


Alternator voltage 
VDC 


2 



Engine running, ignition on 

The console must be brought into use by operating the switch D ( see chapter 1 1 A. pages 4-5 ) to transport position. 
Battery charging warning light off. 



Voltage between 
Terminals 

+ 


Instructions 


Normal Values 


Other values 
See Faults 
In 11 D-01 


16 - 14 




Batter/ voltage 
10.4 -15.3 VDC 


1 


17 - 14 




Alternator Voltage 
13.5 - 14.5 VDC 


3 


2 • 14 




Battery voltage to solenoids 
10.4- 15.3 VDC 


4 


8 ■ 10 




Voltage provided 

by calculator to draft sensors 

9.5 - '.0.5 VDC 


5 ! 

I 


9 - 10 
12 - 10 


Lower links unloaded 


RHS draft sensor signal 

Maxi 5.7VDC 
Mini 4.3 VDC 

LHS draft sensor signal 


20 
20 


5 • 7 


Select multimeter MF 3005 
•Range hold" for these 
measures. Press white button 
once and place selector on V-(VAC) 


Position sensor power supply 
6.7 -7.2 VAC 


6 


6 - 7 


Set switch D to neutral. Press 
(lift) external control button until 
links stop raising 


Position sensor signal 
4.5 - 4.9 VAC 


21 ! 

i 


6 - 7 


Set switch D to lift then to lower 
Lower links in minimum position 


Position sensor signal 
2.0 - 2.6 VAC 


21 j 

i 
i 



Issue 1 



November 1991 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11 C0 1.4 Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 



www.maskinisten.net 




V V 



Connector identification 



J jjj) fSfg 



inl 








GREEN / RED WIRES 

2 WAY PLUG FOR PIN CONTACT(BLACK) 

CONNECTEUR PORTE • LANGUETTES 

2 VOIES (NOIR1 . 
FILS VERT i ROUGE 



VIOLET i PINK Wires 
2 WAY PLUG FOR SOCKET CONTACT 
CONNECTEUR PORTE ■ CLIPS 2 VOES 
FILS VIOLET / ROSE 



AUTOTRONIC 



\. 



^ 



DATATRONIC 



3 WAY PLUG FOR PIN CONTACT 
CONNECTEUR PORTE - LANGUETTES 
3VCKES 



S WAY -MIC- CONNECTOR FOR PIN 
CONTACT CONNECTEUR PORTE 
LANGUETTES TYPE "MIC 5VOIES . 



COMMANDE EXTERIEURE 
EXTERNAL CONTROL 



ALIMENTATION GENE RALE 
GENERAL POWER SUPPLY 



Fig. 3 



C . Checking resistances 

- harness 

- sensors 

- solenoids 

- external controls 

Engine stopped - Ignition off 

Disconnect the control console (Fig. 4) 

Disconnect Autotronic and Datatronic connectors M 

and L (Fig. 3). 

Measure resistance between tester (B) terminals. 

Replace the multimeter in "automatic range selection" 

mode. 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



** 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 11C01.5 



Resistance 


Instructions 


Normal values 


Other values i 


between 


I 






see faults j 


terminals B 






in 11O.01 ( 


5 - 


7 




Position sensor R=48 ± 3 £1 


7 


5 - 


6 




Position sensor R=24 + 1 Q. 


8 


7 - 


6 




Position sensor R=24 ± 1 Q. 


9 






Disconnect left hand draft sensor 










before measurement on RH side : 










white connector + white band (Fig. 5) 


Right hand draft sensor 




W- 


S 




R = 30 K Q min - 40 K £1 max " 


10 


9 - 


8 




R = 35 K n mm - 45 K Q max ' 


11 


9 - 


10 




R = 6.5K il min - 7 K Q max * 


12 




Reconnect LH sensor 




[ 






Disconnect right hand draft sensor 










before measurement : RH side of 






10 - 


8 


iractor. 


Left nana draft sensor 

R = 30 K £2 min - 40 K Q max ' 


■3 ' 


12 - 


8 




R = 35 K flmin - 45 K fl max ' 


14 i 


12 - 


10 




R = 6.5 K £2 min - 7K Q max ' 


15 ! 




Reconnect RH sensor 




I 


2 • 


1 




Lifting elecirovalve R = 1.7 11 + 0.5 " 


16 ! 


2 - 


3 




Lowering electrovalve R = 1.7 Q. + 0.5 " 


1? i 


23 - 


1 


Externa! controls for lifting (Fig. 6) 
Release lift button 
Press lift button 


R = 0L-M« 
R = 0ii 


18 


23 - 


3 


External controls for lowering (Fig. 6) 
Release lower button 


R = 0L-Mn 


19 






Press lower button 


R = 0Q 





Values correct for multimeter giving voltage drop < 0.2 V. {All digital display multimeters) - other multimeter v. ii 

induce different measurements 

When measuring electrovalves, very low resistance can be influenced by harness and test leads resistance 




Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




v 



11 C0 1.6 Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 



D . Checking connectors C1 - C2 
continuity (harness - calculator) 

Disconnect calculator and tractor harness (FR). 
Connect tester <B) to connector (C2) (see Fig. 7} 

Measure resistance between tester (B) and calcula- 
tor connector (C1) (see Fig. 8). 

All values must be between O and 1.5 Q except *, 




rrm 



i 



\ji\l UU=f 



o o o o 

9 O O O 

o o o o 

O O o o 

o a o o 

o o a o 



M5 



Fig. 7 



Resistance 






between terminals 


Instructions 


Functions 


B 


C1 


7 


10 




Position Sensor (ground) 


6 


9 




Position Sensor (signal) 


5 


19 




Position Sensor (power) 


12 


12 




LH draft sensor signal 


9 


11 




RH draft sensor signal 


23 


5 




Externa! controls ground 


2 


4 




Electrovalves power 


16 


1 




Calculator power supply (+ batteryj 


* 13 


8 


100 Q. with quick soil enga- 
gement 


Depth signal from datatronic 


8 


18 




Draft sensors power 


10 


17 




Draft sensors ground 


3 


2 




Lower E.V. ground 


1 


3 




Lift E.V. ground 


24 


7 




Lower switch signal to datatronic 


14 


16 




General ground (battery) 


17 


15 




Calculator power supply (alternator voltage) 


8 


7 


Switch D on "lower" position 




8 


21 


Switch D on "lift" position 





N.B : It no continuity (R = Infinity) check the internal wiring of the control console and the lift/lower switch if required. 



7 




o 


o 


oiol 


a. 


o 


olo 


o 


o 


°l° 


7 


o 


o o 


o 


o 


o o| 


o 


o 


oiol 


& 



Fig. 8 



Terminal identification on connector C1 
1 -4 

5 
10- 



16- 
21- 




J< 1 anHnonoooooa i t- _ 



S. 



14. 




25 

Fig. 9 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 




Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 11 C0 1.7 



E . Checking control console 

Disconnect tractor harness (FR) and calculator. 
Connect tester (B) to connector (C2) (Fig. 7). 
Follow instructions and measure resistances between 
(B) terminals. 



TERMINAL 


INSTRUCTIONS 


RESISTANCE 


FUNCTION 


IF FAULT.CHECK j 


NBR 








| 


15 - 14 




18±2Q 


Internal lighting 


Printed circuit (bulbs) 
Internal wiring ] 


21 ■ 20 


Selector "D" 


on 


Transport position 


Switch "D* 




at lift pos. 




information to 
Autotronic 


Printed circuit 
Switch "D" harness 
Internal wiring 


21 - 20 


Selector "D" 


O.LMQ 


Transport position 


Switch "D" ; 




at lower pos. 


(infinity) 


information to 
Autotronic 


Printea circuit 
Switch D" harness 

i 

Internal wiring 1 


24 - 8 


Selector "D" 


on 


Timing active 


Switch "D" 




at lower pos. 




signal to 
Datatronic 


Printed circuit 
Switch "D" harness 
Internal wiring 


24 - 8 


Selector "D" 


O.LMQ 


Timing active 


Switch "D" | 




at lift pos. 


(infinity) 


signal to 
Datatronic 


Printed circuit j 
Switch "D" harness 
Internal wiring 


13 - 8 


Depth 


1650 ± 200 Q 


Depth control 


Printed circuit 




control 




(signal from 


(Depth ; 




knob "E" at 




Datatronic) 


potentiometer) i 




"low" 






Internal wiring \ 


13 - 8 


Depth 


560 mini ± 56 Q 


Depth control 


Printed circuit j 




control 


(D 


(signal from 


(Depth ! 




knob "E" at 




Datatronic) 


potentiometer) 




"high" 






Internal wiring j 


10 - 8 




960 ± 96 Q 


Draft sensors 
power supply 


Printed circuit ! 
Internal wiring ' 

i 



(1) See adjustment procedure page 9 if different value 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11 C0 1.8 Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 



* 



F . Checking potentiometers 

Disconnect the calculator. 

All the following measurements of resistance are carried out 
at the terminals of the 25 pin connector CI (Fig. 9). The two 
resistance values are given for a minimum and maximum 
adjustment. However it is necessary to measure the 
resistance whilst varying the adjustment of the potentiometer, 
in order to detect any fault within the potentiometer which 
would only be apparent for a certain setting of the knob. Any 
sudden variation denotes a fault. 



WHEN TESTING TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID DAMA- 
GING THE CONNECTION TERMINALS. 
Note : It Is normal to observe that the value of the 
resistance is greater than 960 ±96 Si before the potentio- 
meter reaches its stop. However, this value must not 
exceed 2100 il (2200 Q with quick soil engagement)for 
depth control potentiometer and 1600 Q for the others. 

See location of internal wiring page 1 1 . 



TERMINAL 
NBR (CI) 


FUNCTION 


NORMAL 
RESISTANCE VALUE 


IF FAULT, CHECK : 


8 - 17 
Control 

console without 
quick soil 
engagement 


Depth 

Control 


High: 1650+200 £1 
Low : 560 ± 56 £1 
(see adjustment p. 9) 


-R = 0.LM £1, console printed circuit 
(soldering) or internal wiring 

- other values, potentiometer 


8- 17 
Control 
console with 
quick soil 
engagement 


Depth 
Control 


High: 1750 ±200 Si 
Low : 660 ± 56 £1 
(see adjustment p. 9) 


i 

-R =0.LM £2, console printed circuit [ 
(soldering) internal wirinq 1 

- other values, potentiometer i 


8- 17 
Control 
console with 
quick soil 
engagement 


Quick soil enga- 
gement (button 
pressed) 


R = 63£l±7 


Button J 
Printed circuit 


6 - 17 


Maxi height 


Mini : 864 - 1056 Si 
Maxi : Si 


- R = 0.LM £1, console printed circuit 
(soldering) or internal wiring j 

! 

-other values, potentiometer ! 


24 - 17 


Sensitivity 


Mini : Si 

Maxi : 960 + 96 SI 


-R = 0.LM £1, console printed circuit 
(soldering) or internal wiring j 

- other values, potentiometer j 


14 - 17 


Drop speed 


Mini : Si 

Maxi : 960 ± 96 n 


- R = 0.LM £1, console printed circuit ; 
(soldering) or internal wiring 

- other vaiues, potentiometer i 


20 - 17 


Intermix 


Draft : Si 
Position : 960 ± 96 £2 


- R = O.LM £i, console printed circuit i 
(soldering) or internal wiring 

- other values, potentiometer t 


18 • 17 


Potentiometers 
power supply 


960 ± 96 £1 


- R > 1 . 1 k SI = one or more i 
potentiometers not powered. ' 
Check console printed j 
circuit or internal wiring s 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 




Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 11 C0 1.9 



G . Adjusting position sensor and 
potentiometer 

Adjusting position sensor 

If work is carried out on the lift requiring it to be 
assembled and adjusted, the following method 
should be applied : 

1 . Position sensor removed. 

2. Run engine and raise the arms using the external 
control or solenoid manual actuation, until the relief 
valve blows. 

3. Stop engine, then make a mark between the lift cover 
and a lift arm hub. 

4. Screw down the sensor fully by hand , without forcing 
it, then turn back one turn and a half. 

5. Start engine, then lower and raise the arms with 
position control potentiometer. 

The difference between marks on the lift cover hub 
and the lift arm must be about 3 mm, which corres- 
ponds to the transport position. 
N.B. : If the difference is less than 3 mm : screw in 
sensor. 



If the difference is greater than 3 mm : screw out 
sensor. 
6. Tighten nut to 20 Nm. 

Adjusting depth control knob 

if resistance at terminals 8 - 7 of connector C1 is higher 
than 560 ± 56 Q (660 ± 66 Q with quick soil engage- 
ment) when knob is at index 1 ("low"), turned up to it's 
stop, then check installation on potentiometer shaft as 
follows : 

1 . Unscrew screws and remove knob preventing loss 
of springs and pads by placing fingers on mark 5 
and opposite. 

2. Turn potentiometer shaft anti -clockwise up to it's 
stop. 

3. Replace springs and friction pads. 

4. Reoiace knob on potentiometer shaft, indexed to 8 
or 7. 

5. Turn knob anti-clockwise up to it's stop, then tighten 
the 2 screws (preventing knob from turning clock- 
wise before tightening screwsj. 




Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v v 




Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 11 C0 1.11 



H . Wiring diagram (with quick soil enga- 
gement) 

Key 

42 . Position sensor 

43 . LH draft sensor 

44 . RH dralt sensor 

45 . Lift control valve 

46 . External lift control buttons 

47 . ELC calculator 

F . ELC harness junction with position sensor 
G . ELC harness junction with LH draft sensor 
H . ELC harness junction with RH draft sensor 
I . ELC harness junction with lift valve (levering) 
J . ELC harness junction with liit valve (raising) 
K . ELC harness junction with external control 

buttons 
L . ELC harness junction with Datatronic s connector 

Z) 
M .ELC harness junction with Autotromc [connector 

Q) 

N . ELC junction with Datatronic (connector AB) or 

console harness (connector AD) 
P . ELC harness junction with external control 
buttons. 
C 1 . 25-way connector on ELC calculator 
C2 . 24-way ELC harness connector 
C3. 20-way connector on printed circuit 



Wire colour code 


B 


White 


B.BL 


White, blue mark 


B.R. 


White, red mark 


B.V. 


White, green mark 


BL 


Blue 


BLJ. 


Blue, yellow mark 


BL.R. 


Blue, red mark 


BL.V. 


Blue, green mark 


G 


Grey 


J 


Yellow 


J.BL 


Yellow, blue mark 


M 


Brown 


N 


Black 


a- 


Red 


R.B. 


Red, white mark 


R.N. 


Red. black mark 


RO 


Pink 


V 


Green 


VI 


Violet 



Description of calculator functions 



Identification of connector terminals 



CA 

CB 

CC 

CD 

CE 

CF 

CG 

CH 

CI 

CJ 

CK 

CL 

CM 

CN 

CO 

CP 

CO 

CR 

CS 

CT 



Position sensor signal 

Position sensor power supply 

LH draft sensor signal 

RH drafi sensor signal 

External controls ground 

ELC solenoids power supply 

Power supply from battery 

Safety relay power supply (+ engtr.e running) 

General ground (from chassis) 

Working mode 

Transport mode 

Lift solenoid 

Lower solenoid 

Ground 

10 volt - Draft sensors power supo : y 

Info, depth setting 

Info, high position setting 

Info, sensitivity 

Info, lowering speed setting 

Info, intermix setting 



Connector 


lerminal 


Identification 


N 


1 
2 
3 
4 
5 


+Battery 

Ground 

+ Lighting 

+ Engine running 

Dual Control provision 


L 


1 
2 


Slip control 
Working position 
(for Datatronic) 


P.K ■ 


1 
2 
3 


Lower (external control) 

Ground 

Lift (external control) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



1(133) — 3 



^ AB Datatronic or 
A q Console harness 

9 Q Aulotronic 



Dai© 

4:c3© 





11C01.11 



;j)44 



ID43 






46 



www.maskinisten.net 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Electronic lift control - Checking harnesses and components 11C01.13( 



I . Wiring diagram (without quick soil enga- 
gement) 
Key 

42 . Position sensor 

43 . LH drall censor 

44 . RH draft sensor 

45 . Lift control valve 

4fj . Externa! lift control buttons 

47 . ELC calculator 
I" . ELC harness junction with position sensor 
G . ELC harness junction with Lh dralt sensor 
H . ELC harness junction with RH draft sensor 
I . ELC harness junction with lift valve (iowering) 
J . ELC harness junction with lift valve (raising) 
K . ELC harness junction with external control 

buttons 
I. . ELC harness junction with Datatronic (connector 

Z) 
M .ELC harness junction with Autoironic (connector 

Q) 
N . ELC junction with Datatronic (connector AB) or 

console harness (connector AD) 
P . ELC harness junction with external control 
buttons. 
C 1 . 25-way connector on ELC calculator 
C2 . 24-way ELC harness connector 
C3. 20-way connector on printed circuit 



Wire colour code 


B 


White 


B.BL 


White, blue mark 


B.R. 


White, red mark 


B.V. 


White, green mark 


BL 


Blue 


BL.J. 


Blue, vellow mark 


BL.R. 


Blue, red mark 


BL.V. 


Blue, green mark 


G 


Grey 


J 


Yellow 


J.BL. 


Yellow, blue mark 


M 


Brown 


N 


Black 


R 


Red 


R.B. 


Red, white mark 


R.N. 


Red. black mark 


RO 


Pink 


V 


Green 


VI 


: Violet 



Description of calculator functions 



Identification of connector terminals 



CA 

CB 

CC 

CD 

CE 

CF 

CG 

CH 

CI 

CJ 

CK 

CL 

CM 

CM 

CO 

CP 

CO 

CR 

CS 

CT 



Position sensor signal 

Position sensor power suppiy 

LH draft sensor signal 

RH draft sensor signal 

External controls ground 

ELC solenoids power supply 

Power supply from battery 

Safety relay power supply (+ engine running) 

General ground {from chassis) 

Working mode 

Transport mode 

Lift solenoid 

Lower solenoid 

Ground 

10 volt - Draft sensors power supply 

Info, aeoth setting 

Info, high position setting 

Info, sensitivity 

Info, lowering speed setting 

Info, intermix setting 



Connector 


terminal 


Identification 


N 


1 
2 

3 

4 


+Battery I 
Ground 

+ Lighting 

+ Engine running 


L 


1 
2 


Slip control 
Working position 
(for Datatronic) 


P.K 


1 
2 

3 


Lower (external control) 

Ground 

Lift (external control) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




-fh-o- 



2 ,--t'--'i-r- 






ng~r-<T5cg, 



ITStUWFI 17 K T6CTKUC 



"S .. 



--TO— 



BL 



q: 



_B_ 



-----30^ 



V 



*fc 



CE3 



CE 



£Z. 



CO 



(0 



» ► ! ^ 



,l*W 



0,6<lyF 

100V I 

w .'N4001 



f ► ! 560fl.l*W — 1^| 



I1N4001 



%= -A— tTKnUr- 



N ^ t - 




■~ t560n.V4W| - 



^W*. i I 



— a * 



^ 



4,7 KA 



□53 -<H^ 



JE 



31 



SZj-CHS^ 



en 



3_} -T7C2) (TsCT ;- 



QQj -C3CT;<TC2; 



11 



1_1 



OD 



"W 



-3D 



'"7CTV53C2,- 



^crvracT 



TSCT) 
02 



,6Ci; 



OE-^c 



Tj<Z3CV- 

31 



-a^xi^-cii 





11C01.13 



-(mx^D-nu-Gz:- 



RO 



VI 



L^ FI t z Datatronic 
TO-^k N 




* *B Datatronic or 
£0 Console harness 

V Q Autotronic 



]D44 



U)43 



qp OB© 



fC3^feaoB® 

COD® 



46 



11 D01 Analysis of possible faults 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



Electronic lift control 




11D01.1 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




11D01.2 



Electronic lift control 



V / 



FAULT 1 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : examole (16) = Terminal 1 6 on tester 



If 0< voltage < 10.4 V 
If voltage > 15.3 V 
It voltage = V 



The battery is insufficiently charged to achieve correct operation of the 
electronic lift. 

Risk of damage to calculator. 



1 . Check battery compartment connections ; 

If OK : see 2 

2. Check 7.5 A fuse in battery comcartment : 

If OK : see 3 

If faulty : see 5 

3. Check voltage between (16) and :ractor chassis : 

If 12 V : see 4 

If V : supply line from battery broken 

4. Check resistance between (14) ana tractor chassis : 

If R approx. Q : OK 

If other value ground line broken or bad ground connexion 

(see gearbox cover or battery) 

5. Disconnect console and positive terminal of the battery 
Check resistance between (16) and (14) : 

If R = O fl : short circuit between + battery line and ground. 

If R = infinity : see 6 (harness correct) 

6. Connect the console to the tester. Disconnect computer and harness. 
Check resistance between (16) and (14) : 

If R approx. infinity; OK ana computer faulty if all other harness 

checks are correct 
If R approx. O Q console faulty (see internal wiring) 



FAULT 2 



If voltage = 12 V approx. 



Check that the + line after the starter switch is not directly 
connected to a permanent + "2 V line. 
(Check starter switch or look for short circuit) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Electronic lift control 




11D01.3 



FAULT 3 



Tractors with serial number after U262030 

LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER example (16) = Terminal 16 on tester 
C1 - 15 = TERMINAL 15 ON CONNECTOR C1 



If 0< voltage < 13.5 V 



The alternator warning light remains lightly illuminated (engine running 
or stopped, ignition on). 

Disconnect alternator connector (engine stopped • ignition on). 
Connect earth to connector contact of the alternator (linked by a 
violet wire) : 



If the alternator warning light comes on normally : 

• alternator regulator faulty. 

If the alternator warning light comes on slightly : 

• engine harness faulty (break). 



If voltage > 14.5 V 



Voltage too high. Check alterrator regulator and battery. 



If voltage ~ V 



1 . Check the 7,5A fuse in the fuse box ir9) 

2. Engine stopped. Ignition on. 
Check the alternator warning light : 

If on , check : - lift harness 

- console harness / fuel gauge. 



If off , check 



- dashboard fuse F10 

- alternator warning light 

- engine harness 

- main harness (on panel) 






ak between aiier- 
tor and Dashboura 



FAULT 3 



Only for tractor with serial number up to U262030 



If voltage < 10.3 V 



The battery is insufficiently charged to acnreve correct operation of the 
electronic lift. 



If voltage > 15.3 V 



Voltage too high. Risk of damage to computer. 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 

v ,/ 




11D01.4 Electronic lift control 



FAULT 3 (cont'd) 



Only for tractor with serial number up to U262030 

LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (16) = Terminal 1 6 on tester 
C1 - 15 = TERMINAL 15 ON CONNECTOR C1 

If voltage = V 1 . Check 7,5 A fuse 

If OK : see 2. 

If faulty short circuit between + after starter contact. 

Disconnect the 9 way red connector (under hood on left hand side of 
cab). 

Measure resistance between terminal 8 (red wire) of the 9 way red 
connector located in engine harness and earth. 

If R = Q : short circuit (engine harness faulty or panel 

main harness faulty), 
if R = infinity disconnect the 2nd 5 way white connector 

located under the lift console. 
Measure resistance between terminals 5 and 2 of this connector 
(on plug side) 

If R ~ ii : short circuit in harness or relay faulty (located 

behind :ne right piiiar trimming of <zab). 
If R z. 650 £2 short c:rcuit in coupled harness. 

2. Check 7,5 A fuse in battery compartment. 

If OK : see 3. 

If it is faulty check whole of the circuit between + battery 

andC1 - 15 

Checking instructions : 

a) Disconnect connectors one by one, as far as you're carrying out 
checking from + battery to harness. 

For each disconnected connector, look for its corresponding 
terminal, connected to + battery. 

(Measure resistance between terminal linked to + battery and each 
connector contact). 

If R = £2 the contact is good. 

b) Measure resistance between this contact and earth. 

If R = infinity reconnect connector and carry out the same 

operations for the next one. 
If R = Q harness is faulty. 

If harnesses and console are correct : computer unit is faulty 

3. If the first checked resistance i between terminals (16) and (1 4) is OK: 

- Check circuit between terminal 5 of relay (located down the right 
pillar of cab. behind trimming ) and C T - 15. then check the relay. 

If voltage is V : 

- Check whole of the circuit between + battery and terminal 3 of 
relay (located down the right pillar of cab. behind trimming). 

Follow checking instructions given in paragraph 2 here above but 

on section a : 

If R = infinity at all terminals, harness is faulty. 



Issue 1 November 1T31 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 




Electronic lift control 



11D01.5 



FAULT 4 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER Example (16) = Terminal 16 on tester 
C1 - 15 = TERMINAL 15 ON CONNECTOR C1 



If voltage < 10,3 V 



The battery is insufficiently charged to achieve correct operation of 
the lift. 



If voltage > 15,3 V 
If voltage ^0 V 



The voltage is too high (risk of damage to calculator). 



Engine stopped, ignition off 

1 . Disconnect calculator. Measure the resistance between 
terminals (17) and C1 - ~>5 

H R = infinity console faulty (internal wiring) 

If R approx. Q see 2 

2. Measure the resistance between terminals (16) and C 1 - 1 

If R approx. Q see 3 

If R approx. infinity: console faulty (internal wiring) 

3. Measure the resistance between terminals (2) and C1 - 4 

If R = infinity : console faulty (internal wiring) 
If R approx. Q: see 4 

4. Check position sensor as indicated page 1 1 C0 1-04 and 05 

If OK : see 5 

5. Check the selector "D" as indicated page 1 1 C0 1-6 (terminals 8/7 
and 8/21) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




11D01.6 



v v 



Electronic lift control 



FAULT 5 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER 
C1 - 17 = TERMINAL 17 ON CONNECTOR C1 



: Example (10) = Terminal 10 on tester 



If voltage < 9,5 V 
or if voltage > 10*5 



Calculator faulty if all other checks of voltage and resistance 
are correct. Carry on test procedure. 



If voltage ^_0 V 



1 . Disconnect the harness and the calculator. 

Measure the resistance between terminals (10) and Ct - 17 
If R approx. Q OK : see 2 
If R approx. infinity console faulty (internal wiring) 

2. Measure the resistance between terminals (8) and C1 - 18 

If R approx. Q OK : see 3 

If R approx. infinity console faulty (internal wiring) 

3. Measure the resistance between terminals (8) ana (10) 

If R = 960 ± 96 Q : calculator faulty if the checks of 

resistance of the harness are OK. 
Carry on procedure 1 1C01-4. 

If R approx. £2 or infinity : console faulty (potentiometers or 

internal wiring). 



FAULT 6 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER 
CI - 19 = TERMINAL 19 ON CONNECTOR C1 



Example (5) = Terminal 5 on tester 



If voltage ^_0 V 



1 . Disconnect the harness and calculator. 
Measure resistance between terminals (5) and (7). 

If R approx. Q : console faulty 

If R approx. infinity see 2 

2. Measure the resistance between terminals (5) and C 1 

If R approx. Q see 3 

If R approx. infinity console faulty 



19 



10 



3. Measure the resistance between terminals (7) and C 1 
If R = infinity : console faulty 

If R approx. Q OK - calculator faulty if all the checks 

of resistance of harness are correct. 

Carry on test procedure 1 1 C0 1-4. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



■■■/ V 



Electronic lift control 




11D01.7 



FAULT 7 



- LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : Example (7) = Terminal 7 on tester 



If R > 49 ft or infinity 




1 2 3 



1. Disconnect the position sensor black connectors 

Measure the resistance between terminal (5) and terminal 3 of the 

position sensor female connector 
if R approx. ft : see 2 

If R = infinity harness faulty (break) 

2. Measure the resistance between terminal (7) and terminal 1 of the 
position sensor female connector 

If R = ft : harness OK - sensor faulty 

If R = infinity harness faulty (break) 



If R < 47 ft 



1. Disconnect the position sensor 

Measure resistance between terminals (5) and (7) 
If R approx. ft harness faulty (short circuil 

If R approx. infinity harness OK (sensor faulty) 



FAULT 8 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER Example (6) = Terminal 6 on tester 



If R > 25 ft or infinity 




1 2 3 



Disconnect the position sensor 

Measure the resistance between terminal (5) and terminal 3 of the 

position sensor female connector (black connectors; 

If R approx. ft : see 2 

If R = infinity harness faulty (break) 

Measure the resistance between terminals (6) and terminal 2 of the 
position sensor female connector (black connectors) 
If R approx. ft harness OK - sensor faulty 

If R approx. infinity harness faulty (break) 



If R < 23 ft 



1. Disconnect the position sensor 
Measure resistance between terminals (5) and (6) 
If R approx. ft harness faulty (short circuit) 

If R approx. infinity harness OK (sensor faullv) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskimsten.ne 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




11D01.8 



Electronic lift control 



V / 



FAULT 9 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER i Example (6) = Terminal 6 on tester 



If R > 25 Q. 
(or infinity) 



,CS\ 




1 . Disconnect the position sensor black connectors 

Measure the resistance between terminal (7) and terminal 1 of the 
position sensor female connector 

If R approx. Q see 2 

If R = infinity harness faulty (break) 

2. Measure the resistance between terminals (6) and terminal 2 of the 
position sensor female connector (black connectors) 

If R approx. Q : harness OK - sensor faulty 
If R approx. infinity: harness faulty (break) 



If R < 23 Q 



1 . Disconnect the position sensor 

Measure resistance between terminals (6) and (7) 
If R approx. Q harness faulty (short circuit) 

If R approx. infinity: harness OK (sensor faulty) 



FAULT 10 



LABELED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (10) = Terminal 10 on tester 



If fl > 40 k n 




1. Disconnect both draft sensors. 

Measure the resistance between terminal (10) and terminal 1 of the 
right hand side draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. £1 see 2 

If R approx. infinity: harness faulty (break) 

2. Measure the resistance between terminal (8) and terminal 3 of the 
right hand side draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. Q harness OK - sensor faulty 

If R approx. infinity: harness faulty (break) 



If R < 30 K Q 1 . Disconnect both draft sensors 

Measure the resistance between terminals (8) and (10) 
If R approx. Q : harness faulty (short circuit) 
If R approx. infinity: harness OK - sensor faulty 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



V V 



Electronic lift controi 




11D01.9 



FAULT 11 | 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (9) = Terminal 9 on tester 



If R > 45 K H 

(or infinity) 




Disconnect both draft sensors 

Measure the resistance between terminal (9) and terminal 2 of the 

right hand draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. il see 2 

If R approx. infinity: harness faulty (break) 



Measure the resistance between terminal (8) and terminal 3 of the 
right hand draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. Q right hand sensor faulty 

If R approx. infinity: harness faulty (break) 



If R < 35 K £2 1 . Disconnect both draft sensors 

Measure the resistance between terminal (8) and (9). 
if R approx. Q harness faulty (short circuit) 

If R approx. infinity: right hand sensor faulty 



FAULT 12 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (10) = Terminal 10 on tester 



If R > 7 K Q 
(or infinity) 




1 . Disconnect both draft sensors. 

Check continuity for the right hand draft sensor. 
Measure the resistance between terminal (9) and terminal 2 of 
the right hand draft sensor female connector in order to ensure 
that there is no break. 

If R approx. Q see 2. 

If R approx. infinity: Harness faulty (break). 

2. Measure the resistance between terminal (10) and terminal 1 of 
the right hand draft sensor female connector. 

If R approx. ii right hand sensor faulty. 

If R approx. infinity: narness faulty (break). 



If R < 6.5 K £2 1 . Disconnect both draft sensors 

Measure resistance between terminals (9) and (10) 
If R approx. 0Q harness faulty (short circuit). 

If R approx. infinity: harness correct, right hand sensor 

faulty. 



Issue 1 



November 1 991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




11D01.10 



Electronic lift control 



FAULT 13 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (1 0) = Terminal 1 on tester 



If R > 40 K Q 
(or infinity) 




1 . Disconnect both draft sensors 

Check continuity for the left hand draft sensor. 

Measure the resistance between terminal (10) and terminal 1 of 

the left hand draft sensor female connector (white connector), 

!f R approx. Q. see 2. 

If R approx. infinity : harness faulty (break). 

2. Measure the resistance between terminal (8) and terminal 3 of 
the left hand draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. Q harness correct, left hand sensor faulty 

If R approx. infinity : harness faulty (break) 



lfR<30K£i 1. Disconnect both draft sensors. 

Measure resistance between terminals (10) and (8). 
If R approx. Q harness faulty (short circuit). 

If R approx. infinity : harness correctjeft hand sensor faulty 



FAULT 14 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (1 2) = Terminal 1 2 on tester 



If R > 45 K il 
(or infinity) 



r^^\ 




1 . Disconnect both draft sensors 

Measure the resistance between terminal (12) and terminal 2 
of the left hand draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. Q : see 2. 

If R approx. infinity : harness faulty (break). 



Measure the resistance between terminal (8) and terminal 3 of the 
left hand draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. Q. : harness correct, left hand sensor faulty 

If R approx, infinity : harness faulty (break) 



If R < 35 K Q 



1. Disconnect both draft sensors. 

Measure the resistance between terminals (12) and (8). 
If R approx. CI : harness faulty (short circuit) 

If R approx. infinity . harness correct, left hand sensor faulty 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 



vv 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Electronic lift control 



11D01.11 



FAULT 15 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (12) = Terminal 12 on tester 



if R > 7 K Q 
(or infinity) 




1 . Disconnect both draft sensors 

Measure resistance between terminal (12) ana terminal 2 of the left 
hand draf sensor female connector (white connector). 
If R approx. £1 : see 2 

If R approx. infinity : harness faulty (break) 

2. Measure resistance between terminal (10) and terminal 1 of the 
left hand draft sensor female connector (white connector). 

If R approx. Oil : left hand sensor faulty 

If R approx. infinity ; harness faulty (break). 



If R < 6.5 K Q 



1 .Disconnect both draft sens< 
Measure resistance betwee 
If R approx. OH 
If R approx. infinity 



:rs 



terminals (12) ana (10). 

harness faulty 

harness correct, left hand sensor faulty 



FAULT 16 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (2) = Terminal 2 on tester 



If R > 2.2 Q 
(or infinity) 



/Q\ 



-ft 

i 

2 




\ 



1 .Disconnect the lift solenoid (black connector). 
Measure the resistance between terminal (2) and terminal 1 of 
the lift solenoid female connector (black connector). 
If R approx. Q see 2 

If R approx. infinity harness faulty (break) 

2. Measure the resistance between terminal (1) and terminal 2 of 
the lift solenoid female connector (black connector). 

If R approx. Q ; harness correct, lift solenoid faulty 

If R approx. infinity harness faulty (break) 



if R<i.2n 



.Disconnect the lift solenoia (black connector). 

Measure the resistance between terminals (1) and (2). 

If R approx. infinity harness correct, lift solenoid faulty 

If R approx. Q ■ harness faulty (short circuit) 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




11D01.12 



Electronic lift control 



FAULT 17 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (3) = Terminal 3 on tester 



If R > 2.2 a 
(or infinity) 




If R <1.2 



Disconnect the lower solenoid (yellow connector). 

Measure the resistance between terminal (3) and terminal 2 of the 

lower solenoid female connector (yeliow connector). 

If R approx CI : see 2. 

If R approx. infinity : harness faulty (break). 



2. Measure the resistance between terminal (2) and terminal 1 of 
female lower solenoid (yellow). 

If R approx. O. : harness correct, lower solenoid faulty 

If R approx. infinity harness faulty (break). 

1 . Disconnect the tower solenoid (yellow connector). 
Measure the resistance between terminals (2 ) and (3) 
If R approx. Q. : harness faulty 

If R approx. infinity harness correct, lower solenoid faulty 



FAULT 18 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (1) = Terminal 1 on tester 



If R approx = infinity 
position "released" 
and R = infinity 
position "activated" 



\S) 



BLUE 



ORANGE 




GREEN 



X.OOWN Y.UP 



1. Disconnect all "Y" connectors from external lift push-buttons (raising;. 
Measure the resistance between terminals (1) and the terminals 

of the connectors linked by a green wire. 
If R approx. Q : see 2 

If R approx. infinity : see 3 

2. Measure the resistance between terminal (23) and the terminals 
of the connectors linked by a blue wire. 

If R approx. Si : harness correct, replace push-button 

Before replacing the push-button, check that the lugs are fully 
engaged onto the connector terminals as indicated. 

If R approx. infinity see 4 

3. Disconnect the external control harnesses at the connectors 
located beneath the contrci console (three way white connectors). 
Measure the resistance between terminal (1) and the terminal of 
each three-way connector linked by a green wire. 

If R approx. infinity : main harness faulty 

If R approx. Q . see 5 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



/ ■/ 



Electronic lift control 




11D01.13 



FAULT 18 (cont'd) 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (1) = Terminal 1 on tester 



4. Disconnect the external control harness at the connectors located 
beneath the control console (three way white connectors). 
Measure the resistance between terminal (23) and the terminal of 
each three-way connector linked by a yellow wire. 

If R approx. infinity main harness faulty 

If R approx. Q see 5 

5. Should the tractor be equipped with two external controls, find 
which is the harness linked to the faulty control : this harness is 
faulty. 

-If there is only one external control, the harness which links it to 

the main harness is faulty (break). 

-If the two controls do not function : the two harnesses are 

faulty. 



If R approx. O 
"released" and 
R approx. Q 
position "activated" 



1. Disconnect all "Y" connectors from external lift push-buttons (raising). 
Measure the resistance between terminals (1) and (23). 
If R approx. £2 : see 2 

If R approx. infinity : control knob faulty 



BLUE 



ORANGE 




GHEEN 



2. Disconnect the external control harnesses at the connectors 
located beneath the control console (three-way white connectors). 

If R approx. fi main harness faulty (short circuit) 

If R approx. infinity see 3 

3. Measure the resistance of each three-way white connector 
between the terminals linked by a green and blue wire. 

If R approx. Q the corresponding harness is faulty 

(short circuit). 



X.OOWN 



y.up 



If R approx. Q 
position "released" 
and R approx. infinity 
position "activated" 



t. Check that the lugs are properly fitted into the connector terminals, 
as indicated. 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



11D01.14 



Electronic lift control 



^k 



FAULT 19 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (3) = Terminal 3 on tester 



If R approx. infinity : 
position "released" 
and R approx. infinity 
position "activated" 



f ^ fc~f" Tl I'ff^ 



BLUE 



ORANGE 



X = DOWN 




1 . Disconnect all "X" connectors from external lift push-button 
(Lower). 

Measure the resistance between terminal (3) and the terminals of 
the connectors linked by an orange wire. 

If R approx. Q see 2 

if R approx. Infinity see 3 



2. Measure the resistance between terminal (23) and the terminals of 
the connectors linked by a blue wire. 

If R approx. infinity see 4 

If R approx.O Q. narness correct, push-button faulty 

Before replacing the push-button, check that the lugs are properly 
fitted into the connector terminals as indicated. 



- GREEN 



Y = UP 



Disconnect the external control harness at the connectors located 
the control console (three-way white connectors). 
Measure the resistance between terminal (3) and the terminal of each 
three-way connector linked by an orange wire. 

If R approx. infinity main harness faulty 

If R approx. Q : see 5 



4. Disconnect the external control harness at the connector located 
beneath the control console (three-way white connector). 
Measure the resistance between terminal (23) and the terminal 
of each three-way connector finked by a yellow wire. 

If R approx. infinity main harness faulty 

If R approx. ii see 5 



If only one external control is operating the harness which links 

the control to the main harness is faulty. 

Jf there are two external controls, the harness which is linked 

to the control not operating is faulty. 

If the two controls do not operate, both harnesses are faulty. 



issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 



v 



Electronic lift control 




11D01.15 



FAULT 19 (cont'd) 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (3) = Terminal 3 on tester 



If R. approx. £1 
position "released" 
and R approx. £1 
position "activated" 



SLUE 



ORANGE 




GREEN 



1. Disconnect the "X" connectors from external lift push-button 
(Lower). 

Measure the resistance between terminals (3) and (23). 
If R approx. Q : see 2 

tf R approx. infinity : push-button faulty 

2. Disconnect the external control harness at the connectors 
located beneath the control console (three-way white connectors). 

if R approx. £2 : main harness faulty (short circuit) 

If R approx. infinity see 3 

3. Measure the resistance of eacn three-way white connector between 
the terminals linked by an orange and blue wire. 

If R approx. Ofl the corresponding harness is faulty 

('short circuit}. 
Check that the lugs are propeny in the connector terminals, as 
indicated. 



X-OOWN 



Y.UP 



If R approx. £2 
position "released" 
and R approx. infinity 
position "activated" 



1. Check that the lugs are properly fitted into the connector terminals, 
as indicated. 



FAULT 20 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (8) = Terminal 8 on tester 



If voltage < 4,3 VDC 

or 
voltage > 5,7 VDC 



1 . Carry out voltage checks (in Darticular between terminals (8) 
and (10)) 

If correct : see 2. 



2. Carry out resistance checks on lift harness (limited to checks relating 
to draft sensors} 

If correct : see 3. 

3. Carry out all measurements of resistance relating to control console 
(page 11 C0 1-6). 

If correct : draft sensor faulty 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




11D01.16 



Electronic lift control 



V V 



FAULT 21 



LABELLED CIRCLES INDICATE TEST JACK ON TESTER : example (5) = Terminal 5 on tester 



Lift in up position 
If voltage < 4.5 VAC 
or voltage > 4.9 VAC 



1 . Check that the lift arms are in highest position by operating the 
push-button at the end of the lift solenoid. 

Check that the multimeter is not in "automatic range selection' 
mode. 



2. Carry out voltage checks {in particular between terminals (5) 
and (7)). 

If correct : see 3. 



3. Check adjustment of position sensor. 
If correct : see 4. 



4. Carry out resistance checks on lift harness (limited to checks 
relating to position sensor)(page 1 1C01- 3-4 and 5). 
If correct : see 5. 



5. Carryout all measurements of resistances relating to control panel 
(page 11 C0 1-6). 



Lift in down position 
If voltage < 2 VAC 
or voltage > 2.6 VAC 



1 . Check that the lift arms are in the lowest position by operating ;he 
push button at the end of the lower solenoid. 

Check that the multimeter is not in "automatic range selection" 
mode. 

If correct : report to n J 2 of this page, 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



mmmm 



T www.m^skini^n.ne| 



• 



K> 



WWmmBRHmNww. maski n istexmet 



• • 



• • • • •# • •• • 



• • • • 



www.maskinisten.net 



^ 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




12 . AUTOTRONIC 



Contents 



12 A01 OPERATION AND CHECKING WITHOUT TESTER 
1 2 B01 CHECKING AND REPAIR WITH TESTER 
12C01 DYNASHIFT SYSTEM 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Autotronic 12A01.1 



12 A01 Operation and checking without tester 



CONTENTS 

Description 2 

General 5 

1. Power supply 5 

2. Hydraulic pressure switch (engine stopped) „ 5 

3. Hydraulic pressure switch (engine at idling) 5 

4. Differential lock 5 

5. Brake switch 5 

6. Four wheel drive 5 

7. Lift raising / lowering switch 6 

8. Hare/Tortoise range change 6 

9. PTO 6 

10. Checking the engine speed sensor 6 

11. Checking the PTO speed sensor 6 

12. Checking the forward speed sensor _ 6 

13. Hare/ Tortoise range solenoid wiring 7 

14. 4 WD solenoid wiring . 7 

15. Differential lock solenoid wiring _ 7 

16. Checking the non synchro earth wire 7 



issue ! November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000 /3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




12A01.2 



Autotronic 



Description 



General I The following information and procedure apply to Autotronic generation 2 equipped with the new 

ETCU box 3582042 M fitted on 3000/3100 tractors from serial n° N047049. 
For previous tractors refer to workshop service manual n° 1646640 M1 . 



AUTOTRONIC 

ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL BOX 




ACTS AUTOMATICALLY ON 




''HAREATORTOISE 



RANGE 
CHANGE 



POWER 
TAKE OFF 



y 




Hydraulic protection of functions 1-2-3-4 

Automatic cut-out of both following functions if hydraulic 
pressure becomes too low (17 bar nominal) 

2-P.T.O. 

3 - Diff. lock 
1 - Hare/Tortoise range change prevented 
4 - Automatic engagement of 4 WD 



Issue 1 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




Autotronic 



12A01.3 



HARE/TORTOISE RANGE CHANGE 



© 



Tortoise/Hare or Hare/Tortoise 
change impossible 

If ground speed higher than 2 Kph 
If hydraulic pressure too low 




If the hare range is selected when the 
creeper gear is engaged the Hare 
warning light flashes. In this case move 
the gear lever to Tortoise position. 



POWER TAKE OFF 







Controlled gradual 
engagement 



by supplying pulsed current 
to the solenoid until full 
engagement is achieved. 



J 



f 



Disengaged if PTO 
clutch slips 



If pressure drops (1 7 bar 
nominal), or if clutch slips, oil 
supply to PTO clutch is cut-off 
(warning light flashes) 



/" 



Does not re-engage when 
engine started 



Does not engage if 
implement is blocked 

■ If implement is blocked 
engagement is cut-off before 
stalling (warning light flashes). 



If engine is stopped with PTO 
engaged, or if PTO is re-engaged 
before starting the engine. 
Autotronic prevents PTO 
engagement when engine is started 
(warning light flashes) 



Economy PTO desengagement I 
in case of over speed J 

- If economy PTO (engine 1 550 rpm) 
is selected. Autotronic disengages 
the PTO when the engine speed 
exceeds 1900 rpm 



Issue i 



November 1991 



www.maskinisten.net 




12A01.4 



3000/3100 SERIES TRACTORS 




•■/ v 



Autotronic 



DIFFERENTIAL LOCK 



Disengaged when brakes 
are applied " 



Diff .lock is disengaged 
when either brake pedal is 
depressed. 

Re-engages when brake 
pedals are released 



Disengaged when 3 point 
linkage is raised 



Dirt, lock is disengaged when 
lift/lower switch is moved to 
lift position. 

Re-engages when switch is 
returned to lower position 
(warning tight goes out then 
comes back on). 



4 WD engaged when 
diff .lock switch is 
operated 

. s 

Warning light comes on 






isengaged if ground 
speed exceeds 14 kph 



Does not re-engage when 
speed reduced to below 
14 Kph (warning light 
goes out). 



( Disengagea if hydraulic 
i pressure droDS ( 1 7 bar 
I nominal) 



FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 







Engaged when 
starting tractor 



- To desengage 4WD 
after starting the 
engine, press and 
release brake pedal 
then push on 4WD 
button(warning light 
goes out) 

• 4 WD is still engaged 
until tractor starts 
moving (solenoid then 
energized) 



Disengaged if speed 
exceeds 1 4 Kph 



If tractor speed is 
below 14 Kph and 
the 4 WD button is 
pressed once ; 
4 WD will be 
disengaged when 
ground speed 
exceeds 14 Kph. 
but will be re- 
engaged as soon 
as ground soeed 
drops below i <\ 
Kph. 

If tractor is being 
driven at more than 
14 Kph and 4 WD 
has been 

disengaged, it can 
be re-engaged by 
pressing the 4 WD 
control button once. 



Engaged